Plato (c. 427-c. 347 BC) - Against the Atheists (Lewis Taylor, editor), 1870

Page 1


DEPARTMENT OF

=5=

LIBRARY OF o

mm

ESIA

'sMfci

^nduiiiiai e^nivw6ity,

<

CHAMPAIQN, Books are Not

to

be Taken

ILLINOIS.

From

the Library

Room.


The person charging

this material is re-

sponsible for its return on or before the Latest Date stamped below. mutilation, and underlining of books are reasons for disciplinary action and may result in dismissal from the University.

Theft,

University of Illinois Librai§lAS$lv

APR BtC

4

-

9

12

m ^

NOV 4 9

SEC

wo 4

1980

L161— 0-1096



t

Digitized by the Internet Archive in

University of

2016 with funding from

Illinois

Urbana-Champaign Alternates

) t

https://archive.org/details/platoagainstathe00plat_0



PLATO CONTRA ATHEOS.

PLATO AGAINST THE ATHEISTS; OR,

THE

TENTH HOOK OP THE DIALOGUE ON LAWS, ACCOMPANIED WITH

CRITICAL NOTES, AND FOLLOWED BY

EXTENDED DISSERTATIONS ON SOME OF

THE MAIN POINTS OF THE PLATONIC PHILOSOPHY AND THEOLOGY, ESPECIALLY AS COMPARED WITH THE HOLY SCRIPTURES.

BY TAYLER LEWIS,

LL.D.,

PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY IN THE CITY OF NEW-YORK.

rnrv-'n As

the Lord

livetli,

and as thy soul

liveth.

Hebrew Oath.

NEW YORK: HARPER

& BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,

FRANKLIN SQUARE.

1870

.


Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by

Harper afi

&

Brothers,

the Clerk’s Office of the Southern District of

New-Yor&.


TO

lfB

ELIPHALET NOTT,

UEV.

THE VENERABLE

-VTVci

\

*

*'

s

D.D„

PRESIDENT OF UNION COLLEGE .

f,ȣRED

THIS IN

l

alma mater,

WORK

most respectfully

XnscrtfieT),

REMEMBRANCE OF THOSE LESSONS, BOTH OF THEORET ICAL AND PRACTICAL WISDOM, WHICH HAVE AIDED IN FORMING THE MINDS AND CHARACTERS OF SO LARGE ^A PORTION OF

THE EDUCATED MEN OF OUR LA^

t*


nox rx isSs ^33 o'ri^x - r t t v: •

I

•*

:

Psalm x iv., 'lirr

0X

3

xbo

3

1.

x ynxrrnxi o’nssrrnx xVi Jeremiah

*Ei> avrCp

,

xxiii.,

24

yap £ti/uev, Kal KivovpeOa, nai kofiev. Acts xvii., 28. ,

HiGTEVGac yap del rov TrpoGepxopevov S

rfi

Qe<p f ot>

JJ2TI, Kal Tolg EK£nraii?Lv avTov pcGdanodoTTjg ytv*

rat. •

Hebrews ,

XI.,

6


K\

INTRODUCTION. It

is

Laws

among

generally agreed

those

who

of Plato to be a genuine production, that

a treatise written in his old age.

garded as containing

his

If so,

may

it

most matured and

The was

hold it

be re-

best-set-

on many of the great subjects discussed in his other dialogues. Some have thought that they discovered many contradictions between this work and the Republic. One has even gone so far as to say that they are opposed in every page. In this opinion, however, we cannot concur although it must be admitted tled opinions

;

that they differ in respect to style, and, notwithstand-

ing the near relationship which would seem to be

by

in-

very dissimilar in design. In the one, the State is the main subject of discussion in the other it is a secondary part, subordinate to what dicated

their titles, are

;

more

the writer evidently regards as a higher and

philosophical investigation into the nature of right or

The

practice of contrasting these

two

works has arisen from a wrong view of the true

title

righteousness.

of the one generally styled the Republic. appropriate designation

is

into the

Nature of Right

idently

made

tells

nepÂŁ

A maiov,

or,

The imaginary

.

subservient to

most

Its

An Inquiry State

is

ev-

as he expressly

this, or,

us in the second book, intended only as a model

of the

human

soul, so

magnified that

therein, in large letters,

enough

for the

we might

read

what would not be distinct when examined in the

mental vision

Vide lib. This comparison of the soul to a comii., 369, A. monwealth has been a favourite, not only with Plato, smaller characters of the individual

A

2

spirit.


INTRODUCTION.

VI

but with the most philosophical minds in

all

We

ages.

on a much smaller scale in the eleventh book of •The Laws, where the Nightly Conference, or the most find

it

solemn legislative and judicial body

comIn the Re-

in the state,

pared to the head in thQ human system. public

it is

the great idea, to

the fancied State

is

is

which the construction of Sometimes,

altogether secondary.

must be admitted, the author seems so taken up with this imaginary commonwealth, that he unconsciously, perhaps, brings it into the primary place, and thus distorts his plan. It is this occasional forgetfulness of his main design that has introduced into however,

Plato’s

it

Republic those incongruities which,

in all ages,

have been so much complained of. Sometimes the consistency of the under or fictitious part is overlooked, or, in other words, the State is utterly forgotten, while we are carried

away

some of

to

the most abstruse of

metaphysical discussions, such as

may

all

be found in the

and seventh books. Again, his attention seems be so occupied with the outward drapery that he loses sight of his main theme, and, pleased with the sixth

to

efforts

own

of his

fancy, dwells at great length on

merely externa] to the higher and In the third, fourth, and last three books, inner sense. the harmony of primary and secondary is well preserved. In the sixth and seventh he seems to lose sight

what, in

of the

reality,

is

commonwealth almost wholly, while

in

some

parts of the second he appears to have nothing else

before him.

The

fifth

may

be regarded as a sort of

hybrid production, arising from a confusion of both views.

Some

of

its

arrangements are altogether too

unnatural to allow the supposition that they were ever

intended for a real State cult to discover

;

and yet

it

is

very

diffi-

what bearing they can have upon

the


INTRODUCTION.

Vli

higher philosophy to which the whole scheme was

The

tended to be subservient.

least

that Plato here lost himself, and

we

can say

inis,

produced something

which was neither allegory nor reality, neither philosophy nor legislation. It is on the subject of the domestic relations, which are supposed to be assailed in this

book, that there

fifth

between the Republic Plato seems, even in his own day, to

exists the greatest contrariety

and The Laws. have been so reproached with

this

apparent blot

in his

was led to take special pains to do it away in this work of his old age and hence the great desire he shows in The Laws to set in their highphilosophy, that he

;

est light the sanctity of the family, or parental

We

relations.

ial

length in the

first

to

this

at

fil-

some

of the dissertations appended to the

In other respects, the discrepancies between the

text.

Republic and

The Laws have been

Differing,

ted.

have adverted

and

minor

details,

however, as they

greatly exaggera-

may in some

of their

no one can attentively study both with-

out discovering evidences that they are productions of the

same mind, and

that, in the

higher philosophy on which

main elements of that and morals

all legislation

depend, they are substantially the same.

The

Treatise on

Laws

is

undoubtedly intended

really practicable , if not a really existing State.

for a

In

discussing, however, the primary principles of legislation, the

author takes a very wide range, occupying

more time in what he styles the preambles, or recommendatory reasonings about the laws, than in the laws themselves. Hence there are but few points in far

the Platonic philosophy and ethics, as exhibited in the

what have some representative same questions started respecting

other dialogues, but here.

We

find the


INTRODUCTION.

via the nature

and origin of virtue

—whether

it is

or capable of being taught as a science or not er

it is

one or

many

that

is,

;

didafcrrj,

wheth-

whether the virtues are ah

so essentially connected that one cannot exist without

the others.

We

find the

end and origin of law

same views

in

—the importance

regard to the

in all things oi

looking to the idea, the ev ev 7rohXoig, or one in many.

same reverence for antiquity and ancient myths, the same disposition to regard religion as the There

is

the

beginning and foundation of every system of

civil pol-

and the same method of representing the ideas of a God, of his goodness, his providence, of a present and future retribution, as lying at the foundation of all morals and all religion. Even in the departments of psychology and ontology we find many things in The Laws which remind us of the author of the Phaedon, the Parmenides, and the These tetus. The favourite doctrines and methods of reasoning contained in the Gorgias are exhibited everywhere and perhaps there is no other part of Plato’s works more in the style and spirit of the Timseus than this very tenth book of The Laws, which we have selected as the ground of our comments in the present work. It was on this account chosen as forming, in our ity,

;

judgment, one of the best central positions from whence to

make excursions over a

philosophy.

We may

large part of the Platonic

perhaps be charged with hav-

ing sometimes used the text as a mere thread on which

hang our own discussions but even should it be admitted that there is some truth in this, still might it to

;

be maintained that those discussions are

all

closely

connected with the Platonic philosophy and theology,

and that from

this field

we

never depart, unless, per-

haps, to dwell on kindred subjects suggested

by the


INTRODUCTION.

Holy make

Our

Scriptures.

IX

object has not been merely to

a classical text-book, but to recommend Plato to

by every means through which

the student or reader

drawn

attention could be lieving that in

no other

to

our favourite author

way

we

could

;

be-

render a better

service to the cause of true philosophy and religion.

Some may say that, in made to talk too much that

we

our great

partiality, Plato

a Christian.

like

It

may

is

be

have found senses higher and more Scriptural

than are contained in the letter of the passages to

which reference extent, the

is

case,

made

yet even

if this is, to

some

only shows the suggestive nature

it

of his philosophy

;

how

;

it

is

capable of carrying the

earnest reader to more spiritual views than the author

and how he

himself, perhaps, ever entertained, in this respect,

cient or

from

modern

We

afar,

think

will be found

it

which we have indulged are thus

naturally suggested

brought from

other profane writers of an-

all

times.

that the views in

differs,

that they are not hunted for, or

;

but are such

not always con-

as, if

tained in the precise letter of our text, do most easily

present themselves in connexion with

one

who

elation.

it,

especially to

reads Plato by the light of the Christian Rev-

On

this subject,

of what

may

be called the

Platonic Spiritual Sense or capability of accommoda,

tion to higher views, the reader

LX., where

is

referred to Disserta-

some length. In pursuance of this favourite plan of recommending Plato and the Platonic philosophy, the method followed in the present work was adopted. The text and critical notes form by much the smallest part, and even these accompanying annotations frequently exhibit as much of a philosophical and theological as of

tion

a

critical

it is

treated of at

character.

The longer

dissertations an


INTRODUCTION. nexed, and which, for the reader’s convenience,

we

have divided into numbered sections, with general and running

titles,

dation of

are devoted almost entirely to the eluci-

some of the main

points of the Platonic phi-

losophy, in their connexion with other systems of antiquity, to

for

a comparison, whenever there was occasion

with the sentiments of Aristotle,

it,

drawn from

illustrations

the Grecian poets, together with a con-

tinual reference to the

Holy

Scriptures,

by way of

resemblance, contrast, agreement, or condemnation.

For these purposes, there have been introduced, from all the other Platonic dialogues, very frequent and extended quotations of the most striking passages

almost

;

h ing such

as,

besides having a natural connexion with

would promote our main design, by producing in the reader a desire to have a deeper knowledge of Plato than is generally possessed by the greater part of our philosophical and theological writhe subject discussed,

To

ters.

these quotations, in almost every case,

translations

have been given, sometimes

sometimes paraphrastic. are,

when

were

The exceptions to

this

and

course

the nature and substance of the quotation

sufficiently indicated

duction.

literal,

full

The main

by the manner of

its

intro-

references are to the Timaeus,

the Republic, the Phaedon, Gorgias, Theaetetus, Par-

menides, Philebus, Protagoras, Symposion, Politicus, Cratylus, Sophista, and the other books of

The Laws,

with occasional citations from most of the minor dialogues having any claims to be regarded as genuine.

The work has been ation

the result of a careful examin-

which we have Plato mainly by himself, and by

of the Platonic writings

sought to interpret

;

in

the aid, on the one hand, of his jealous rival, Aristotle,

and on the other, of

his

enthusiastic admirer


INTRODUCTION.

Of modern

Cicero.

critical

whether English or German,

XI

and philosophical

we make

helps,

display,

little

we have made but little or no use of them. In regard to the text, we have followed that of Bekker and Ast, who hardly differ at all, either in because, in

fact,

Wherever

words or punctuation.

there has been a

departure from them, the reasons are assigned, mainly in the shorter notes.

The

power have been very this

critical

limited,

means within our

and

we

therefore, in

department, ask indulgence for any errors which

may have been committed. For

the philosophical opin-

advanced no such plea is interposed. By their own merit, and their accordance with the true interions

pretation of the Platonic system, they stand or

One design of

the

work

is

fall.

to serve as a text-book

for senior classes in college, not so

much by way

of

furnishing an exercise in the study of the Greek lan-

connex-

guage, as for the higher object of exhibiting,

in

ion with the Platonic, the other systems of

Greek

phi-

losophy, and their bearing upon the Christian theology.

On the same grounds, it is

supposed that it

may be

found

and

useful to students in our theological seminaries,

form no unprofitable addition to the libraries of

gymen, besides commending itself generally tention of our scholars and literary men.

We for a

believe that in this age there

deeper knowledge of Plato.

is

cler-

to the at-

a peculiar call

Some

acquaintance

with his doctrine of ideas seems needed as a corrective to the tendency, so widely prevalent, to resolve

knowledge

into

an experimental induction of

only in physical, but also in science. style,* *

is

If the

Good,

to

ethical

and

facts,

all

not

political

adopt our author’s

own

something more than pleasure or happiness

See The Cratylus.

440, B.

;

also Dissertation

XX., p

163.


— INTRODUCTION.

Xll

either present or anticipated

if the

True

higher than past, present, or future facts tiful

something

is

the Beau-

if

something more than a generalization from

is

pleasing individual

sensations

if

the Just and the

Right involve inquiries far above those endless logomachies,

and questions of casuistry, which form the main

modern

features of

ethics

if

the State

a reality

is

transcending a present aggregation of flowing and perishing individuals tinct

wills

if

Law

is

a spiritual

power

dis-

from the muscular force of a majority of present

if

God

something more than gravitation, or

is

the eternal development of a physical fate,

only another plicable

name

phenomena

if

there

is

a real foundation for

the moral and religious, as distinct from, and not

braced

in,

is

an eternal succession of inex-

for

which

the natural or, in other words, ,

and retribution are terms of

far

if

em-

penalty

more solemn import

than the modern jargon about physical consequences then surely

high time that there should be some

is it

disturbance of

opposing views

placid

this ;

taking for granted of the

then surely should Plato be stud-

no other purpose, as a matter of curiosity, to see if there may not possibly be some other philosophy than this noisy Baconianism, about which there is

ied, if for

more noisy, because more empty, transcendentalism, which some would present as its only antidote. In place of all this, we want the clear, simple, common sense philosophy of Plato, commending itself, when rightly understood, to

kept up such an everlasting din, or that

all

still

the aoival evvoiat or universal ideas of the race, in ,

distinction from that miscalled

common

sense which

only the manufactured public opinion of the a philosophy most religious

most practical

—most

—most

childlike in

moment

speculative, its

is

and yet

primeval simpli-


INTRODUCTION. city,

We

and yet most profound.

dence on

this

xia

speak with confi-

The young man who

point.

thusiastic student of Plato

can never be a

an en-

is

sciolist in

regard to education, a quack in literature, a dema-

gogue

an

in politics, or

infidel in religion.

Our main object, then, is to recommend

this

noble phi-

losopher to the present generation of educated young

The

men, especially to our theologians.

by no means professes

present

whole, but merely to present some of points, to allure other

though alluded to discussed under the design,

minds among us

The main

ough examination. in

its

more

almost every dissertation,

own

because

title,

work should be acceptable

treating

it

itself in

attractive thor-

doctrine of ideas,

present

by

its

to a

is

al-

not

we had formed

permitted to accomplish

if

work

forth his system as a

to set

it,

and

if

the

to the public, of

ah*examination of another of the

most interesting of the Platonic dialogues. We conclude with the remark that, in a moral and practical, as well as in a speculative point of view, the

particular subject of the dialogue selected has

claim to attention.

He who

thinks most deeply, and

has the most intimate acquaintance with ture, as exhibited in his

apt to resolve

all

own

when

league with a subtle pantheism,

stituting its

star-dust,

human

heart, will be the

unbelief into Atheism.

will this be the case at a time in

some

is

na-

most

Especially

physical science,

everywhere sub-

jargon of laws, and elements, and nebular

and

vital forces,

and magnetic

fluids, for the

recognition of a personal God, and an ever wakeful,

ever energizing special providence. mit, life.

is

Theism,

we

ad-

everywhere the avowed creed, but it wants It is too much of a mere philosophy. There B


INTRODUCTION.

XIV

are times

home

when

the bare thought tnat

power and a

to the soul with a

which gives a new terest to

every other moral is felt

truth.

that

is,

comes

flash of light

and a more vivid

illumination,

sions the conviction

God

all

It is

in-

on such occa-

unbelief

is

Atheism,

acknowledgment of a mere natural power clothed with no moral attributes, and giving rise to no moral sanctions. We want vividness given to the or an

God

great idea of

as a judge, a moral governor, a

special superintendent of the world

and

all its

move-

ments, the head of a moral system, to which the ma-

chinery of natural laws serves but as the temporary scaffolding,

to

be continued, changed, replaced, or

removed, when the great ends

finally

was designed

for

which alone

have been accomplished. Just as such an idea of God is strong and clear, so will be a conviction of sin, so will be a sense of the need of expiation, so will be a belief in a personal Redeemer, it

and so

shall

will follow in

its

train

an assurance of

all

the

and deep, that no boastful pretension of that science which makes the natural the foundation of the moral, and no solemn

verities of the Christian faith, so strong

stumbling-blocks in the letter of the Bible will for a

moment

any disquietude. There is a want of such a faith, as is shown bv the feverish anxiety in respect to the discoveries of science, and the results of This the agitations of the social and political world. timid unbelief, when called by its true name, is Atheyield

it

The next

ism.

great battle-ground of infidelity will

not be the Scriptures. will

be

summoned

What

to defend the

the great truth involving

gious truth is the

—

faith there

all

who

remain

very being of a God,

every other moral and

the primal truth, that

rewarder of

may

reli-

HE IS, and that he

diligently seek

him

.


«

CONTENTS. Introduction

.......... .......

Png

v

Statement of the Argument

Greek Text and Critical Notes

.

.

EXCURSUS

.

1

.

to 84

I.

Platonic View of the Parental and Filial Relations, and the Ancient Doctrine generally on this Subject

The

.

.

.87

II.

The Words

—The Preamble, the Ad-

npooifuov and Uapa/j,v6tov visory or Argumentative Part of the .

Law

.

.

.

.95

III.

Subjective Sense of the

Word

97

’A ?i7j6ev(j

IV.

The Orphic Poetry Plato’s

Regard

99

for Antiquity

y. and the Ancient Mythology.

— His

Use of the Word QeoI

102

....

VI.

Philosophy and Character of Anaxagoras

105

VII.

The Divine

Justice the

Ground of Human

Law

.

.

.110

VIII.

Universality of the Belief in a

God

Ill

IX. Antiquity of Atheism

114

X. Principle of Authority

116 XI.

Degrees of Atheism.

—Peculiarity of Plato’s Style

.

.

.117

XII.

Ancient Doctrine of the Four Elements

119

XIII. Atheistical Doctrine of $v(ng, Tvxv, and

T exvrj

.

.

.130


CONTENTS.

XVi

Atheistical Doctrine that ture, but by Art

Law

XIV. Mfi and Religion were not by Na.

.

135

XV The Figure Aposiopesis

139

.

XVI.

Argument

for the

Existence of a God from Motion

.

.

141

.

144

.

146

XVII. Soul Older than Body

XVIII.

Remarkable Comparison of the Dangerous Flood

XIX. Invocation of the Divine Aid in the Argument. amples of this from other Dialogues

.

— Striking Ex148

XX. of the Ancient Schools, Do all Things flow 1 &c. with a Sketch of some of the principal Materializing or Atheistical Philosophers who belonged to the Ionic, and to the Physical School of Elea 152

The Great Question ;

....

XXI. Mathematical Use of the

Word A oyog

164

XXII.

-166

Paradox of Circular Motion XXIII.

The words QOLo ig,

Teveatg, UaOog, and $6opd

.

.

.

.167

XXIV.

— ..........

Philosophy of the Verb Ytyvopac

TO

BE.

Platonic use of

E Ifii

and

170

XXV. Ancient Divisions of Motion.

— Distinction

—According

to Plato.

—According

between Teveaig and ’A/iXolucig. ^-The Atomic Theory more favourable to Theism than the

to Aristotle.

184

Doctrine of Occult Qualities

XXVI.

A vroKLvijGig,

— —

or Self-motion of Soul. Energy or Action be Whether on this View longs to the Essence of the Deity. God must have created Worlds from Eternity. Aristotle’s His own DocMisrepresentations of Plato on this Point. trine.

the

Aristotle’s

first

Immoveable

— — Essence. — Moral

Reasons

of Moving Causes

190

XXVII.

The Words A oyog,

EMo$-,

and

’Idea

.

.

.

.

.

.195


— CONTENTS.

XVII

XXVIII. Distinction between

Page

v

A oyog and O voua XXIX.

196

Distance between Self-motion and Motion by Impulse. —Impassable Chasm between' Spirit and Matter. Ideas of The Word IIoAChange, Cause, and Spirit inseparable. Principle of Euphonic Attraction loarfj 201

Infinite

.

.

XXX. Argument of Ancient Atheists that Apparent Evidences of Design were only Evidences of subsequent Accommodation. Things (they said) older than Knowledge of Things, and

therefore older than Soul

204

XXXI. Platonic Doctrine of the Evil Principle. cessity

— Of ’Av&yKq,

or Ne-

207

XXXII. Platonic Analogy between the Motion of that of a Sphere, or of the Heavens

N ovg

and

and 219

XXXIII.

The Motions of the Evil Soul Irregular and Disorderly. The nearer an Approach to the Pure Reason, the more of Fixedness and Uniformity. Heaven a State of Eternal Rest. Atheistic Objection from the unvarying Regularity of the Heavens, from whence was inferred the Absence of Will and

Reason

224

XXXIV. Platonic Doctrine of the Animation of the Heavenly Bodies. Ancient Belief that each Nation had its own peculiar Guardian Daemon or Genius 229

XXXV. Three Hypotheses

in respect to the

Animation of the Heav-

enly Bodies

233

XXXVI. v

a or Vehiculum Mundi. O able Passage from Euripides

Ff)g

xw

->

—Examination of a Remark 235

XXXVII.

— Doctrine

Second Grand Division of the Argument. Mistake of Cudworth Special Providence.

....

of a

237

XXXVIII. The Greek Words

for Blessedness,

Happiness, Fortune, &c.

.

239

XXXIX. Atheistic Argument against Providence drawn from the ProsPlato’s Language compared with perity of the Wicked. that of the Scriptures 243

.

B

2


— CONTENTS.

XV111

XL.

Pug9

Singular Word AnodLOTro/LiTreoftcu, and the Use made of it by Plato

The

Remarkable 245

XLI. 'Defect of Plato’s Theology in regard to the Doctrine of Atonement and the Necessity of Expiation 249 l

XLII.

#

Highest Proof of the Divine Goodness, the a tion of the Moral Sense

priori

Convic-

253

XLIII.

Sublime Mode in which the Bible represents the Divine Providence and Omniscience as contrasted with all mere Philosophizing on these Attributes. Analysis of the Greek Word ’A vSpeia, as denoting one of the Cardinal Virtues of Soul. 255 Piety of Epicureanism

XLIV.

— ....

true Dignity of Man his Religious Nature. the Greeek Words Sefiaf, E vaebtLa, &c.

The

Analysis of

259

XLV.

Men Compared

to

Sheep of the Divine Pasture.

Plato on this Subject in

Harmony with

— Language of

that of the Scriptures 261

XLVI. Forms of Greek Verbs

Peculiarity of certain Negative

.

.

262

XLVII.

Great Things cannot Exist without Small. Application of the Maxim to the Doctrine of a Special* Providence, to Education, and to Politics 264

XLVIII.

....

Gentleness of Plato’s Mode of Argument, and Adaptation to the Minds of the Young

its

peculiar

267

XLIX.

The Machinery of Physical Events controlled by Invisible Spir268 itual Agencies. The Doctrine of Plato and of the Bible.

.

L.

Nihilo — Greek Ideas Respect — Language of the Fathers. — Plato defended against the Charge of teaching the Eternity of the World and of Matter. — Platonic Sense the Maxim. — Comparison of Hebrews, with the Language of Plato. —

The Ancient Maxim De

in

Nihil.

to Creation.

of

Difficulties

xi., 3,

of Reason when the Doctrine of Cieation from Revelation

is

examined apart 272


CONTENTS.

XIX

LI.

Page

Doctrine that the Parts are made for the Whole as set forth by Plato, and as viewed by Modern Rationalists and Semi-

Infidels. The Converse Doctrine, that the Whole is also for the Parts, examined with Reference to the Mutual Harmony 286 of both

LII.

Atheistic Objection

drawn from the Extent of the Universe

.

292

LIII.

Explanation of a Difficult Passage. Remarks on those Views that resolve Morality into an Obedience to Physical Laws, and regard all Punishment as Consequential instead of Penal 294

LIV.

The Word ’Av^eOpog able

Passage

in the

as distinguished from

A luvioc.

—Remark-

Timaeus

300

LV.

The Greek Words

for Eternity,

A I6v

and A lovloq

.

.

.

302

LVI. Plato’s Doctrine of the Freedom of the Will, viewea in Connexion with the Law of Cause and Effect in Nature 307 .

.

LVII. Explanation of a Difficult Passage

312

LVIII.

The Greek Word

Similar in all

"kidrjg

and the Hebrew

Views of a Future Ages

and

—iSvp jy 3

1

316

LIX. and Similar Fears of Hell

State,

318

LX. "kytog — Exceeding Spirituality of some of Plato’s —Many of his Thoughts capable of being accommodated to p Spiritual Sense higher than the Author himself had ever intended to convey. — Difference Re-

The Word

.

Views.

fairly

in this

spect between his Writings and those of phers, Ancient and Modern

all

other Philoso-

322

LXI. Mythical Sense of the

Word

Quvarog

331

LXII. Omnipresence of the Divine Justice. —Remarkable Resemblance of Plato’s Language to some Passages from the Bible 333 LXIII. Doctrine of a Final Judgment.—Use of the

Word Iwreketa

334


XX

CONTENTS.

Platonic

.....

LXIV. Use of the Word Tvnog

Pag*

338

LXV. Explanation of a Difficult Passage, in which Plato seems to assert that our Evils in the Present State exceed our Good 339

LXVI. M.axv ’AOavarog, or Battle of the Universe, between the PowSin, therefore, no Light Matter, beers of Good and Evil. cause it is Treason against the Cause of Good, for which 342 God is contending with the Evil Soul

Plato’s Doctrine of the

....

LXVII. A atiioveg, or Genii

347

LXYIII. Beauty and Accuracy of the Ancient and Platonic Division of Deep Moral Significance of the the Four Cardinal Virtues. Four Greek Words, knokaaia ’A Kpareia, ’Ey/cpdma, and 35 'Zutypoavvri, as indicating the Four Moral Degrees

,

.

.

LXIX. Peculiar Use of the Indicative Mode in certain Cases. parison of Passages from the New Testament

— Com-

.

.

.

355

LXX. Use of the Word YUeovE^ia.

....

Aristotle’s Distinction

Arithmetical and Geometrical Equality

between 356

LXXI. Impiety and Folly of attempting to bribe Heaven

.

.

.

357

LXXII.

Different Species of Atheists. Morality of Atheists not founded on Principle. First Species styled A inaiog by Plato, and invested by him with too Good a Character. Second Species, the Magician or Juggler. The Atheist often in Secret the Victim of Superstition. Hobbes. The Ironical Species of Atheist, a Character peculiar to the Ancient World. Elymas the Sorcerer. Apollonius of Tyanea 359

— ....

LXXIII.

The Nightly Conference, or Areopagus The Athenian Areopagus

of Plato’s State.

— 363

LXXIV.

Common Law

against

all

Private Religions.

Plato’s Doctrine in respect to ship and Religion of the State

Changes

—Examination

in the Public

of

Wor364

LXXV. Belief in Apparitions, Ghosts, Spectres, Dreams, &c., the in

all

Ages

same 369


;

STATEMENT OF THE ARGUMENT. As a dramatic work, The Laws is far inferior to the Republic. The speakers are three namely, Clinias, a Cretan, Megillus, a Lacedaemonian, and a stranger, who passes by no other name than the Athenian. The latter is the Socrates of the dialogue. The first :

two are

either

mere

listeners, or only brought in as suggestive helps

After nine books occu-

in the various transitions of the discourse.

pied with varied and extended schemes of legislation, and wffiere

laws are mingled with reasonings and introductory preambles, which need not here be specified, the author comes, in the tenth book, to

which it would be a state indeed, and not a mere herding together of men and women in a political congregation, having no other bond of union than the temporary consent of individual wills. Previously, however, to the enactment of laws for the punishment of sacrilege and other offences

treat of offences against the public worship is

and

supposed, of course, the State must possess,

religion,

if it

against religion, the chief speaker proposes that there should be laid

down, by way of foundation, a preamble or hortatory statement, which preamble, although con-

containing the reasons of the laws

;

expanded into an argument which occupies nearly the whole book, the few last pages only being taken up with the laws and the penalties annexed. cisely expressed at first (page 3), is subsequently

The argument

is

divided into three parts

;

1.

Against those

who

Against those who, while they admitted the existence of a God, denied a providence and, 3. Against those who, while they admitted both a God and a providence, maindenied the Divine existence

;

2.

;

tained that the Deity sin severely. as, that

it

appeals at

The

was

first

easily propitiated, or

would not punish

part is introduced by a declaration of Clini-

must be easy to prove the existence of the Deity. He once to the most obvious phenomena of nature, the sun,

the earth, and stars, &c., as conclusive evidence, especially

if taken connexion with the universal sentiments of mankind. This gives occasion to the chief speaker to suggest that the subject is involved

in

had imagined from the perverseness

in greater difficulties than the other, in his simplicity, difficulties,

of those

however, not

intrinsic, but arising

who imposed upon themselves

by the words chance nature ,

,

art , &c., referring to the old Atheists of the Ionic or Materializing

school (page 4 to page 15).

After a short digression, in which

it

is


STATEMENT OF THE ARGUMENT.

XXII

debated whether

it is

best at once to apply the law to such

without argument (15 to

work of

19),

men,

the Athenian devotes himself to the

and commences a most subtle disquisition

refutation,

specting the nature of soul as implying self-motion involved in

very essence.

Hence he proves

reits

that matter cannot possess this

power, and, therefore, soul being more ancient than body, the properties of soul

must

also be older than the properties of body.

From

and not the mother of Art, will, and design and thought must have been before hard and soft and heavy and light and all the adaptations of the natural world. The Atheists had held that religion, and the belief in the existence of Gods, being the production of human law, which was a production of art, and this

it

is inferred that nature is the child,

as the Atheists said, and that, therefore, law and ,

,

,

,

,

,

,

art itself being the offspring of Nature, therefore religion

ideas of the just and right

all

were conventional among men, and had

This argument

no other foundation.

and

is

refuted by the Athenian

by showing the superior antiquity of soul, and, therefore, of these ideas as essential parts of its constitution (25).

In proving the self-

energy of soul, he goes into a very minute examination of the different kinds of motion, summing them all up, however, under two general heads

thing else

namely, motion by impulse and that which moves someby commencing motion in itself. This latter he identifies ,

;

with psyche, or soul by a species of logical necessity, or an argument drawn from the force of terms and the innate ideas involved ,

in them.

The next

step

is to

determine whether

it is

one or more

which are engaged in the affairs of the universe the result of which inquiry is, that there are two, the one good and the other bad the one constant, uniform, and ever exhibiting the highest reason in all its motions, which he compares to those of a sphere, the other irregular, disorderly, without reason, and full of madness After this, there are stated three methods by which soul may (36). guide the motions of the heavenly bodies namely, by an indwellsouls

;

;

;

ing

spirit,

or

by a soul with an aethereal body, or entirely destitute

of body, and external to the object of

its

guidance

(42).

This brings the Athenian to the second grand division of the subAfject, namely, the arguments of those who deny a Providence. by seeing the appaopinion led to this are men that ter premising

shows that it is any right views of the Divine Nature. For if possessed of every virtue, indolence and indif-

rent impunity and prosperity of the wicked (45), he utterly derogatory to

we

admit that God

is

ference can form no part of his character. there

is in

him any want of power.

Neither can

Therefore

we

it

be

tliat

cannot suppose


STATEMENT OF THE ARGUMENT.

XX11I

Next

that he will neglect anything, either great or small.

is

shown

the importance of small things as parts of a whole absolutely essential to its totality, and that, without small things, the great could ,

Hence the

not exist.

doctrine of a minute special providence, un-

wisdom to human artshown to be by the sovereignty of God (but not by any inhe-

less the Deity is to be regarded as inferior in ists (56).

The method of this

such arrangements

in

special providence is

rent necessity of things), that every agent finds its fitting place

namely, virtue rises and wickedness descends, until the one reaches

The Most Holy

Place, and the other sinks

retributions of

Hades

(61).

down

God’s government, no one can escape, and, unless t

will be impossible to

or miserable

most painful

to the

This Eternal Justice, or fixed law of kept in view,

it is

form any right opinion respecting a blessed

life (64).

argument respects those who and who confide in the general mercy of God as capable of being easily moved by prayers and sacrifices. He contrasts their views of the Deity with such as are entertained of the lowest class of human guardians, as though God could be bribed by the wages of iniquity, when dogs could not be prevailed upon by similar motives to admit the wolf into the flock. Arguments against those views which would regard sin as a small matter, and God as easily appeased, are drawn from the [idxrj dddvarog the battle of the universe, or everlasting conflict between good and evil, in which

The

view

third grand division of the

sin as a trifle,

,

God and

good influences are contending

all

for the victory,

and

where, of consequence, the least taking part with the enemy, or the least neutrality is treason against the cause of

good throughout the

universe (69, 74).

There are then enumerated six classes of offenders to in

namely, two each of the three divisions of Atheists or semi- Atheists, differing their degrees of guilt, and therefore requiring different gradations ;

The book closes with a specification of the various and a law against private chapels and private religious rites in the course of which a very striking description is given of that class of Atheists who, while they had no religious belief themof punishment. penalties, ;

selves,

made

mankind N.B.

it

their business to excite the superstitious fears of

for their

own

unnatural pleasure or

profit.

—All references to any of the dialogues of Plato, except the

text of the present work, are

made according

to the pages

and

let-

ters of the alphabet, as given in the standard edition of Stephanus, *

and as they

may

be found in the margin of the Leipsic.



i'LlNO^

PLATO CONTRA ATHEOS. DE LEGIBUS LIBER META tl

rag

tie

(pepeiv pL7]ds ayecv 1.

Hepi

navrdg.

the preceding book fully

irept

fliaiojv

vdfJLCfjiov

2

av %pri idat prjdevl rcov rov (

—ayuv.

(ix.),

namely,

employed

wrongs committed

vdpeig, or

wil-

degree of violence, of which ahcia treated of ,

one species, and sacrilege another.

A collective phrase. “To take and carry away by 7 E pepov yap uMjlovg. A yeiv V

Compare Thucydides,

kciI (bepeiv is

ite-

In reference to the whole subject discussed in

and with some

2. <bepecv

roiovde

elprjoOo)

aXhorpLUv pijdsva prjdev

tgjv

prjd’

-

at the close of the ninth book, is

violence.”

1

navrdg ev

altitag , irepl

X.

i.,

y

:

a phrase derived from the earliest times, and

is

always

Hence, because personal

in reference to acts of violence.

courage was anciently regarded as the chief part of human virtue,

some have supposed and from

(ftepeiv ,

its

that from ayeiv, in this sense,

came

comparative and superlative, (peprepog

,

ayadog,

(piprarog,

Such a view encounters etymological difficulties in Besides, it can only be maintained on the termination of ayaOdg. the false theory that the savage life was the original state of men, and that moral terms partake of the ideas most prevalent in such a or (pepiGTog

.

condition.

We

general, he

is

much

prefer the derivation of Plato, although, in

entitled to but little deference as a philologist.

cording to him, to ayadov rable,”

from ayapai ayaopai “ ,

to

wonder

See the Cratylus,

great delight.”

better felt by comparing

Ac-

to aycurrov, “ the wonderful, the admi-

is

p.

“to admire with

at,” also

The

412.

force of this will be

what the philosopher says

in

the sixth book

of the Republic, of the wondrous idea of the ayadov or The Good as ,

surpassing

all

human comprehension.

No

be at a loss as to what led him to this etymology, whatever think of

its philological

that, in

reading the Cratylus,

parts the writer

is

correctness.

sincere, or

it

is

how

it,

will

we may

must be remarked, however, difficult to determine in what It

far

he

may

be indulging in the

severest satire against certain false systems of philosophy.

A

,

one, on reading


,

2

CONTRA ATHEOS.

Xag, eav prj TTeCorf rov nenrrjpevov. en yap di) rov roiov « tov navra i]prr\peva rd re elprjpeva Hand yeyove nod 'eon ,

nal ear at. peyiora de ,4r

olai re nal vbpeig

rCov XoarCdv at rcvv veojv anoXa*

drj

elg

peyiora

orav

de,

elg iepd ytyvcjv.

rat,

nal diatyepovnvg av peydXa, orav eig dr\pooia nal

dyia

rj

nard

peprj noivd tyvXerCdv

nenoivivvrjnonvv

rj

aXXuv

rivcov

elg iepd de idea nal racjjovg

*

10

devrepcog

6

elprjpevcvv

yoveag

elg de

.

7

orav v6ptfy

,

orav atypovnorcbv r ivi

9

ng

8

6

rpira

,

x^P^

,

T(*)V

epTcpooOev

reraprov de yevog vdpecog

rig.

rcbv

,

roiovrcdv

devrepa nal

apxovnvv

dyxi

XP1 T ai

rj (f>epxi rj

rdjv eneivcov prj ireioag avrovg. rrepn rov de, rd no,

Xinnov av

enaorov rtiv TtoXir&v vbpioOev,

eirj

naXovpevov.

doreov

olg d?)

elg

dinrjv

em-

noivov vopov enaoroig.

iepoovXCa pev yap eiprjrai £vXXrjddrjv (dialog re nal XaOpa eav yiyvr\rai, ri xprj rraoxsiv. oaa de Xoycp nal ooa epyep ,

uepi tieovg vdpi^ei

ng

Xeycjv

rj

Trparrojv ,

u to napapvdiov

vnoOepevcp 12 prjreov a del naox^iv. eoro)

rode

deovg

’E av prj neioy, “unless he get the consent.”

3. 4.

dij

"Y Speig, “violent wrongs committed wilfully and with malice

prepense,

whether by act or speech.” The writer now proceeds to which offences of this kind might

specify five different grades into

be divided

:

1st,

things private

;

against sacred things public

3d, against parents

;

;

2d, against sacred

4th, against magistrates

;

5th,

against private political rights of individual citizens.

A evrepog has

5.

respect to diaQepovrug above, referring not, like

devrepa, to numerical rank, but to the grade of enormity.

See Note

App.

6.

Eif de yoveag.

7.

Xoplg tuv epnpooOev elpypevuv, namely, those mentioned

I.,

in the

ninth book. 8.

"Orav u$povtlotC)v

Tig,

when any one who

is

reckless of the

authority or respect due to magistrates.” 9.

The case of tlvI

determined here grammatically by the

is

verb, xp^rcu, although in sense 10.

law,”

it is

the

common

0 Xg drj doreov, “ for all which cases or “a law in common containing

T

there

12

i)

nparrov,

See Note

II.,

“by speech

App.

them

iast all.

must be a common

provisions applicable to

each respectively.” 11. Tieyov

object of

or action.”


e

,

CONTRA ATHEOS.

3

rjyovpevog elvai nard vopovg ovdelg ncbnore ovre epyov

aoedeg elpyacaro encbv ovre Xbyov af)r\nev avopov. ev

13

6rj

aXXa

naox^v, rj rovro onep elrcov ov% to devrepov ovrag ov (ppovri^eiv dvGpcottcjv

ri rd)v rpicov

ijyovpevog,

rj

,

,

,

rpirov eimapapvGrjrovg elvai 'Gvoiaig re nal evxalg na-

rj

,

,

oayopevovg.

KA. Tl ovv A0.

T

£2

veiv rjptiv

KA.

drj

dplppev av

rj

nal Xeyoipev rrpog avrovg

yaOe enanovocopev avrebv ,

1

*

a

Trpcbrov

;

rep naraeppo-

npoanal^ovrag avrovg Xeyeiv pavrevopai.

TLola

drj

;

A0. Tavra rdpf

civ

T

epeox^Xovvreg ehroiev.

’A Gr\-

£2 i-ev

vale nal Aanedaipovie nal K.vdj oie, dXrjGrj Xeyere. rjpcbv

yap

ol

pev ronapdnav Geovg ovdapcog vopi^ovoiv

prjdev rjpojv (ppovri^eiv

*

vpeig Xeyere

drj,

a^iovpev

.

ol de

evxalg napayeaGai, oiovg

ol de,

naQdnep vpeig

rj^icbnare nepl

vopojv, rrplv aneiXelv rjpiv onXrjpdjg, rjpdg nporepov eni-

X^ipelv

nal didaoneiv

7relOeiv

on

yovreg inavd, nal rivijjv dbopcov

(bg elol deol,

QeXriovg

j

15

renprjpia Xe-

rrapd ro dinaiov

rj

iraparpeireoGai nrjXovpevoi.

vno

vvv pev yap rav-

ra dnovovreg re nal roiavG erepa rcbv Xeyopevcov apioruv ’

elvai 7TOi7]rcbv re nal prjropcov nal pavreejv nal lepecov , nal 13.

akla

he has done

ev. it

Supply as follows: “but

—ev

drj

tl

t&v rpibv ndex^v

when he has done

—being

in

thus,

one or the other

of these three states.” 14.

rb eara^poveiv ypbv, “in their contempt for us.”

npocrTrai-

fyvrag is best rendered adverbially, “ sportively .” 15.

bg

elol &eoi.

This example furnishes an excellent

illustration

of the general difference between the particles bg and on.

Both and are frequently regarded and rendered as though they were nearly, if not quite, synonymous. The difference, however, in this and similar cases, is obvious. "On would simply refer to the fact ; bg, to the manner or reason of it. As, follow nearly the

same

class of verbs,

example, didaoneiv on, “ to teach us that Gods didaoneiv bg, “to teach us how

for

for

what necessary

reasons, there are

Gods.”

the fact , is,

And

ing sentence nal on (SeXrlovg rj, n. t. h., are better than,” &c., or “ that they are too good.” :

that

there are

“ in what manner, and

so in the follow-

“ and also the fact that they


)

;

4

CONTRa atheos.

aXXcov TroXXatetg pvpicjv,

ovte

enl to

rzopeQa ol TiXelorot, dpdoavreg

napa di

a^iovpev SeXrto)

7roA/L<h

dAA’ ovv

av

2

\

tt

irecpdopeda.

aXXd

pi) aypicov, irpdg

r/pdg, el pi)

rrepl fteCdv (hg eloiv ,

pog afr/Oeiav.

teal

rd%a

ireiQoipeO

a A A’ emxeLpelre, eln perpiov Xeyopev,

lacjg vplv.

irelv

twv dfXcov Xeyovrag

p eXtlg) ye

ddttea rps-

e^ateelodai

npdjrov xpr/oOac

ttelOoi

1

dpav rd

vopoOerCov (^aoteovrcjjv eivai

dr/

r/pspcov,

6’

pi)

el-

d rtpoteaXovpeda.

KA. Xeyeiv

,

Ovreovv

%eve, doteel padiov eivai dXr/devovrag 3

d>

,

d eoi

d)£ elol

;

A0. ITw^

KA.

rd rcov

teal

re

pev

IT pedrov

yi) teal r/Xiog,

aorpa re rd gypnavra,

djpcdv diateeteoopr/peva teaXddg oyrcog, eveavroeg

dieiXr/ppeva

teal pr/ol

f

*

ore ndvreg 'E XXr/veg re

teal

tea

Pdpdapoi vopi^ovoiv eivai deovg.

A0. Qodbvpai drj 7Tore

c(j)olv

.

ye,

f

elnoip av

d)

rovg poxOr/povg, ( ov yap

patedpie,

&oye aldovpai)

pr/Te^g yptiv tearaeppovrj-

vpelg pev yap ovte lore avrebv

irepi ri/v rr/g diacpOo-

4

pdg alriav a/IA’ r/yeloOe dtepareia povov i/dovedv re

teal

,

1

.

ovk

km

to

[ir/

dp$v

adLKa.

tcl

This

away from

“ Instead of being turned

may be

freely rendered thus

the commission of sin, the

of us are wholly occupied in attempts to avert

its

:

most

consequences .”

In

most concisely, yet most forcibly expressed, the essential difference between two things that are often mistaken the one for the other, namely, between true religion consisting in right views of the Divine Nature, or that true “ fear of the Lord which is to depart from evil ” (Tpeneadai km to pr/ 6pq,v Ta adma), and superstition which is wholly occupied, not in the avoidance of sin, but in vain attempts to cure the evils and terrors which it brings upon the soul, this there is

,

,

(dpaoavTeq

6’

kZaneZodai ireip&peOa).

This superstition, or

false reli-

gion, as Plato elsewhere shows, is nearly allied to Atheism.

Note 2.

LXXX.

The

TcoTihti peTiTiu.

and peTiTLo ye “ ,

antithesis here is

between

noMu

(3e?LTitj

better, indeed, in respect to truth, if not far better.”

3.

dTir/devovrag.

4.

diacpdopag.

ing, diatyopuq.

See

and LXXXI., App.

See Note

We have It is

III.,

App.

adopted this instead of the

common

read-

supported by the authority of Cornarius and

Stephanus, although Ficinus seems to have read diaQopag, and

is in


:,

CONTRA ATHEOS, imOvpitbv

sm

rov dosbr]

f3tov

5

oppaoOat 5 rag

av -

'ijjvxag

ru)V.

KA. To

6s Tt npog rovrotg alrtov av

,

gj

gsvs,

sir]

;

A0. 'Zxsdov 6 navraTraoLV vpslg s%G) ^tivrsg ovk av stdsirjrs, dXXa vpag d,v XavOavot. KA. T i 6i) tovto (ppd^stg ravvv A0. ’Ajitadta rig 6 paXa x a ^ 87T^ 6otcovoa slvat psytorrj ;

(ppovrjotg.

KA. lUbg

E lolv

A0. vplv

Xsyetg rjptv 9

ovk, slot

usv, sv

I

nspt

6t

;

sv ypappaot Xoyot Kstpsvot

apsrijv noXtrstag

not psrpotg

7

psv TraXatorarot

fistiv, ol

ovpavov, row rs dXXcjv

ysyovsv

,

ttpotovrsg

,

9

far better

a rolg anovovotv

accordance with

all

si

the

(bg

repdg aXXrjXovg

psv slg aXXo rt

reaXebg

class of persons characterized by the Psalmist ,

In the

soul.

:

The foot

no God;" nS’ S# ,

and abominable in

,

pi)

morum cor same way are the

same

corrupt are they

r]

words of the context

ruptio

there is

ol

irpcbr r\ cpvotg

rj

atque depravalio— rottenness of

hath said in his heart

reap*

6s rijg apx^]g ov ttoXv

bbsoyovtav bts^spxovrat, ysvopsvot rs (bptXrjoav.

ol

,

sytb pavOavco

nai dvsv psrpcov, Xsyovrsg

ol 6s,

,

wg

their deeds.

Psalm

xiv.,

l

1

.

:)p;9 7

v

vr;(

corrupti , perditis moribus sunt. 5.

They are

altogether become futhy.

oppaoOai, “ to rush impetuously or violently.”

scriptive of the headlong course of those to

6 ’ApaOla .

A more

tlq.

whom

Admirably de

it is

here appiieo

perfect description of this disease of

Athe

ism (SiafOopag) could not be given. It sets forth the malady with it cause, and is equally applicable to ancient and to modern times “ an invincible ignorance fancying itself the highest vnsdom .” ’A paOia ,

here has no reference to speculative or scientific knowledge, but used in the usual Platonic sense for “ ignorance of one’s self.” ol

liyovreg

.

9.

See remarks on ug and on, page 3, 15. 6g TTpolovreg dr, “ Advancing, or going on from the discussion of

the origin

was

See Note IV., App.

pev hv perpoig.

7.

8

is

.

.

.

{rrjg upxrjg)

.

of the

first

nature

( 17)g

ttpurrjg

(jivaeog),

which

the subject of the most ancient (or Orphic) writings (rtiv nahae-

otutuv), they treated next of the theogony, that births

and generations of the Gods, with

intercourse,” as set forth by

Homer and

A 2

is,

the individual

their actions

Hesiod.

and mutual


E

6

CONTRA ATHEOS.

naXCog e^oi ov padiov kiunpav naXatolg ovoiv. 10 elg pevroi ,

yovicov re dspanelag nal

npag11 ovn av

vd)v ehrotpi, ovte (hg <b(j)£?upa Elpryrai

12

ra usv ovv

,

yaipETM, nal

ovre

Tcov veo)v rjplv nal ooeptiv

ronapanav

tig

tt

1

*

alriaOrjrcov

13 *

ra 6e

nantiv alna.

otttj

TUV TOLOVTCOV E^Epya^OVrai

dpdcog

pt pedetoO(x) nal

(ptXov XsyEoOo) ravrxj

'dsoloc

oirrj

,

rCov ap^alcov

di)

j

eyo)ye ttote enai-

yap nal gov orav rEnprjpca XiycdpEV (bg eIoI $£ 01 ravra avia 77poG(j)£povT£g, 7}Xiov te nal GEXrjvrjv nal aorpa nal yrjv, (bg ftEovg nal $ da ovra vtto rejv oocbcbv tovtcjv dvaTTETTEiouevol av XlzyoLEV (bg yrjv te nal Xcdovg ovra avrd nal ov6 ev rcbv av0p(O7TELG)v upayparcov (ppovr l^elv dvvdpEva X 615 yoLGt 6 e ravra ev rroog sig ro mOavov TTEpilTETTEppEva t66e OVV

Ol

XoyOL. EpLOV

,

,

,

,

,

,

10.

tv aXaiotg

ovoiv

See Note V., App.

.

11. yovecdv 'd-epaTvetac nal ripac;.

He

alludes here to the poetical

fables respecting the treatment of Saturn by his son Jupiter.

to Plato,

was the most

he often alludes

to

it,

offensive part of the Grecian mythology, and

as a sort of standing example, whenever he

See the Republic,

attacks the poets in other portions of his works. ii.,

377,

P

ra 6s

:

Tt interfered

rov

6rj

This,

K povov

epya nal

tvuOtj vtvu

tov vliog,

k. t.

X

with his high views respecting those duties which grow

out of the domestic relations, especially the duty of

filial

obedience.

furnishes his constant example, whenever he would con-

Hence it demn the demoralizing and

irreligious

tendency of some of the an-

cient poetry. 12.

ovte

tie

TOTvapaTvav opdfig eiprjTcu.

These and

similar portions

of the mythology he would altogether expunge, as being utterly in-

capable of any improved allegorical meaning, however gently he

See Note V., App. what we have said respecting these

might deal with the system as a whole. 13. nal ovv t]

deoLCL fthov “ ,

May

ancient and venerable matters be thus said as

may

be agreeable to

Heaven,” as it may be paraphrased. We see, from this expression, with what a gentle, pious, and cautious hand he touches the ancient mythology how he seems to implore forgiveness for venturing to cast away anything that might have claims to reverence for its antiquity, and which, under all its deformity, might yet, perhaps, contain the ;

corrupted and disguised remains of some primitive or anciently-revealed truth.

See Note VI., App.

14.

veov

15

TTEfn-FTTEptiEva

GO(j)tiv.

tc

spLTVETT s iv

Tliis

is

a term of cookery, and


d

CONTRA ATHEOS.

KA. Xahenov ye Xoyov w

^eve, elpr\ntbg

,

ye elg

<Jjv

ptovov

A0.

<5tj

rvyx&veu

de ore ndunoXXot rvyxdvovatv, eri

Xahencorepov dv

7

elrj.

Xeyupev

;

XPI $pdv

;

rjpdg

;

irorepov

anoXoyr]od)pLEOa olov KarrjyopfjoavTog rtvog tv aosdecuv avOpGJTzoig fjpojv (jxevyovot, signifies to crust

non

over —

1

,

Compare Seneca, De

crustare.

cst ista sincera felicitas

vopodeatag Xeyovaiv

rrepl rrjg

—crusta

Provid.,

6,

Also Aristophanes, Plutus,

est.

159:

A laxvvopevoi yap apyvpiov alrelv love, ’Ovopari nepnriTTOVGi

rrjv poxdrjplav.

“ With a name they crust over their depravity .”

The metaphor here

suggests the thought of vile doctrines, like pernicious and unhealthydishes, crusted over with some specious disguise to allure the eye and tempt the appetite. Socrates was ever fond of drawing com parisons from the body to the soul, from the health of the one to the

moral soundness of the other, and from the sciences and arts that pertain to the one, to that higher philosophy

the wants and relations of the other.

which

The use

is

concerned with

of this word here

corresponds well with his ordinary similes, and especially those

made use holds the

of in the Gorgias, in which false philosophy {go^lgtlkj])

same

relation to the soul that the unhealthy confectionary

art (oipoTToiucy) bears to the body.

Leip.

:

See the Gorgias, pages

28, 29,

art y Kopporucy npoq yvpvaGTtnyv, tovto go^lgtlkt] npoq vopo-

derucyv, kul otl y biponouKy npog larpLKyv tovto

pyTopmy

irpog diKaio-

cvvyv. 1.

(pevyovGL.

This

is

Ast, qui nos aversantur.

of law, signifies

to be

rendered by some aver sari non tolerare. So ,

It also,

as a term of the Athenian courts

defendant in a suit or prosecution as diuuov sig,

nifies the plaintiff, pursuer, or prosecutor

;

both terms being derived

from the ancient custom of the pursuit of the homicide by the avenger of blood, and from thence transferred to other legal contests both

of a

civil

renders

and criminal kind.

Ficinus, in accordance with this idea,

in judicium pertractos.

To warrant this, however,

the read-

ing should be tyevyovreg or tyevyovTag, with a change in the construc-

The first version seems so far fetched, that we would prefer combining the two ideas by translating tyevyovot, “whe tion of the Greek.

put us on our defence .”

with the whole context.

This agrees well with cnroXoyyotopeda, and

The speaker

Bhip of being compelled to

assume the

is

complaining of the hard-

attitude of apologist or de-


,

,

CONTRA ATHEOS.

s

3

&>g

deiva epya^dfxeda vopoderovyreg

XacpELV eaoavTEg teal

,

ovtcov $ecov

dog

rovg vopovg rpEntipEda ndXiv,

ettl

r/

urj

2 to npooiptov rjplv panpOTEpov yiyvr]Tat rcov vopa>v;

ov yap fipaxvg o Xoyog kuraOElg av ytyvotro ETiiOvpOVOtV aOEdELV, T&

Xoyotg

,

xpaipsv

ravra

LEV dlTodElljaipEV, 6

ra

rd

6s, Elg cj)66ov t ps-

6s, dvoftEpaLVELV nocrjoavrEg,

vopodsTolpsv

rj6r]

XiyEiv

oaa

irpETtsi^

psra

.

TzoXXdtag psv coays 5

’AA/l’, d) tjsvs,

toZoiv

eI

,

pETptCOg TOlg

f.

cbv E(j)patjov 6eIv TTEpi *

KA. T’G)

;

bXiy cp %po-

£t>

rovr’ a^TO siprjfcapsv, d)g ovdsv ev rep rrapovre 6sl

TtpoTipav ppaxvXoytav

pdXXov

ff

prjteog.

to Xsyopsvov, ETcstycov didwEL. ysXolov TTpo tg)v I3eXtlgto)v

rjpdg,

dr} teal

(jyavXov to

Ta Ppa^vTSpa alpovpsvovg

(patVEoOat.

6 ov epuepov apejaysneog mOavoTrjTa Tiva Tovg

6iacj)EpEi

Xoyovg

yap

ovdslg

rjpCbv exslv, cog

9

foot t slot

dyadot,

teal

Tip de-

d'uirjv

fendant in such a cause, and of being required to give reasons for the belief in the existence of the Deity, especially before profane and

ungodly men.

See Note

2.

Trpooipiov.

3.

rd pev drzobei^aipev

by arguments their fears

&c.

— rd

—rd

,

App.

II.,

k. t.

7i.,

“ Should in some things demonstrate

6e, elg epobov rpeipaipev,

be, five x eP 0iveiv i k. t, A.,

dislike , or appealing to

Ac.

their prejudices ,”

more generally

should in others excite

and in others making them

Or

it

may

be para-

If we should address ourselves to their reason, their fears, or their tastes namely, their moral sentiments, of

phrased

still

:

which they cannot wholly divest themselves, or

their

wholesome

prejudices. 4. It is

oaa

In most editions there

npetret.

is

a

comma

after npenei.

clear, however, that these words are connected with vopoOerol-

pev which follows, and that the

comma

should be after

5.

haye ev oliyu, “ for so short a time as

6.

apocryenug.

A

force of each part.

;

7vug

there is one such

analyze, so as to show the be rendered “ in some one way or other, at

difficult particle to It

may

(indefiniteness), whatever that

way

at least, if

no more,

way may

ye always,

or in composition, implies that the writer chooses to ing of a word, although intimating that he could say

ed him.

Troiijoavreg.

been together.”

some way, expressing the certainty that there

least;” apug, in

such a way

we have

be

;

is

ye, that

whether alone limit the mean-

more

if it pleas*


7

CONTRA ATHEOS.

y

reg dta^ epovrcog avOpcorrov. c%edbv yap tovto

andvTG)v tgjv vopo)v tcdXXcoTov te

dv

elrj.

vd

7Tore

teal

fjp.lv

vrrep

apiorov irpoolptov

prjdev ovv dvox^pdvavTeg prjde eTTeixOcvreg, rjvrt-

exopev dvvaptv elg

ttelOco tgjv

tolovtgjv Xoycjv,

urjdev arcoOepevot dte^eXOG)pev elg to dvvarbv hcav&g. ,

AO. E vxfj v pot, doted napatcaXelv* 6 Xeyopevog vtto gov vvv Xoyog ETtEidfj npodvpG)g ovvTEiveig peXXetv de ovketl eyx^pd Xeyetv. (f)epe dfj, 7rcbg dv Tig pfj 'dvpcp Xeyoc nepl $eCdV dog eioev dvdyurj yap dfj x^XenGog rjoepetv teal ptoelv *

,

;

,

etceivovg ol tovtgov fjplv alrioi tgov Xoytov yeyevrjvTai teal

ytyvovrat vvv dv rteidopevot 9 rolg pvdoig, ovg ,

oxeSov yap tovto.

YiVxv v TrapaKaheiv, “ to invite the wish,” that

wishes

,

thus

:

ylyvovrac.

that

nus

it is

felt

?

is,

to

second one’s

to invite one to do what he already desires to do.

yiyvovTai vvv ov

9.

is,

See Note VII., App

7.

8.

vegjv nal-

etc

rrstdojuevoi.

Nvv ovv

impossible to

In the

TceiOopevoi

make any

:

common

text this stands

the great objection to which

suitable sense out of

it.

Fici-

made a paraphrase rather than was made by Stephanus, partim (as

the difficulty, and therefore

The

a translation.

he says)

correction

veteris exemplar is ope ,

partim conjectura mea.

In fact, the

which we have given, although not altogether free from objections. It is followed by editors generally in their notes and translations, although the other reading is retained in their text. The words ov neidopevoi exigenlia loci absolutely requires the reading of Stephanus,

may

therefore be regarded, not as a

ing, but as the conclusion of the

commencement of

the follow-

preceding sentence, which runs on,

without coming to a close, until distance below.

indignant feeling

it terminates in ovk hoi iSteol, some The whole passage being the language of justlyagainst those who would ruthlessly destroy all the

religious reminiscences of youth, and

renthetical.

all

the hallowed associations

on this account, rather involved and paThe thoughts and emotions outrun the expressions,

of domestic instruction,

is,

much to be supplied to bring out the meaning in all its fulwe attempt in the following free paraphrastic transla“ For we must feel indignant, and dislike those who have ever tion been and are now the causes of such discussions who believe not the myths, which, when yet children, they heard of nurses and

leaving ness.

This

:

;

mothers

in

soothing strains of sportive or serious song, as they

lis-

tened to the prayers and gazed upon those attending spectacles (of


; -

CONTRA ATHEOS.

10

yaXa^t rpecpopevot, rpocpcov re

do)v art ev pcjv

olov ev empdalg pera re rtaididg nal pera onovdrp

,

Xeyopevovg re

y

rjfcovov nai prjre-

teat

,

teat oipetg

opa re

pera

'dvotebv,

ev ev^atg avrovg ateovovreg

optivreg enopevag avrotg ag Tjdtora o ye veog ,

rrparropevag bhjovrGJV ev onovdjj r rq peyiGTTj rcbv avrebv yovecjv vnep avrtbv re teat eteetv g)v eo teat ateovet

,

,

rcovdateorcov cbg ,

yopevcov

teat

on paXtora

iteeretatg

ovot tieolg evffiug npoodtaXe-

avareXXovrog re

*

rjXtov teal oeXrj-

nai irpog dvopdg iovrcov, repotevXtoetg apa

vrjg

teat rrpootev-

vrjpetg ateovovreg re teal optivreg 'EXXrjvcov re teal j3apda-

pG)v

10

ndvrcov ev ovpcpopatg iravrotatg e^opevcov

repaytatg oi>x ,

&g

ovruv, aXX

ovte

o)g

on paXtora

teal

ovdaprj vno'iptav evdidovrcov djg ovte elol

rcov

dfj

rravruv boot tearaeppovrjoavreg ovde

Xoyov wc ,

(patev

av boot nai optKpov vov

avayted^ovotv rjpag Xeyetv

a,

teal

ei;

ev evovrcjv,

'Seat,

rov -

evog Iteavov

teeterrjvrat ,

vvv

Xeyopev nebg rovrovg av rtg ,

ev rrpaeot Xoyotg dvvatro vovdercov apa dtdaoteetv nepl 'detiv TTpojrov d>g eiot

pavrjvat ,

n rovg pev

y

;

roXprjreov de. ov yap apa ye del

vtto

Xaipapytag

rjdovrjg, rjptiv,

rovg

d’

which the young soul hears and sees so joyfully solemn earnestness for themselves and their families, and by their vows and supplications conversing with the Gods as the most real of existences who too, at the risings and settings of the sun and moon, have often seen and heard the prostrations and adorations both of Greeks and Barbarians, in

religious worship)

their parents sacrificing with

every diversified situation of prosperity and adversity appealing to the Gods, not as unreal fancies, but as existing in the highest sense,

and without any suspicion to the contrary.” It is a strain of eloquence fervid and indignant, yet not unkind or harsh, against those

who, trampling under foot the most sacred associations, demand proof for that which never should have been doubted, and which seldom again finds a secure resting-place in that soul in which false reasoning, the result of licentious passions, has taken the place of

wholesome

religious authority.

10. '’EiXXrjvidv re nai j3ap6dpuv. 11.

Ov yap apa ye

See Note VIII., App.

Sec pavf/vai rove ,

pev

.

.

.

rjpuv, rove de,

&c. Ste-

phanus, Cornarius, Ast, and most of the commentators, would here any manuscripts.

reieet qpfiv, although without the authority of

We


;

CONTRA ATHEOS. vito

rov 'dviiovoQai Tolg roiovroig

tide

ng

XeyupEV

npdcjg,

odeaavreg rov ftvpov, T

VOL T(OV TOLOVTG)V,

TToXXd d)V

TTOLTjGEL

TlOegOcU

yiyvEoOai

tg)v

TTdl,

£2

OVV

TTEpl Toi)g tiEOvg opOtdg

TOV ds

VOVTCLL d£ GEL T£g. Tods

13

TT^ELOVg

£OLfl dV TO prjdEVd do^dv TTEpl 'decdv <dg ,

vvv ovdkv ,

$v 7

r]

tcaXtig

OV OV povog ovds

7]

y rj

ov to, ,

prj.

Trpdj-

T7]V

(f)d-

ol Gol (j)iXoi

JLJ-

*

VOGOV e%ov~

gvt&v TToXXolg (j)pdXddoVTd EH VEOV TGVT7JV TT\V

all

ovtc eIg'l ,

means “

dLdTsXsodL Trpog yrjpdg

retain

It

it,

as essential to the

l4:

frantic through the ravenings of licentiousness,

tender charity in the loss of

yptiv.

pEL-

sense

full

must not be that some of us

(yp&v)

and others

The passage would

(of us) through indignation at such persons.” all its

>

$ E(OV EG^ETE

TTEpl

kX&TTOVg TGVTTjV

TT(x)TTOTE

intended to be conveyed.

lose

XP° V0( TdVdVTLd

gol TTdpdyEyovog

tolvvv

would, however, by

,

ETTL

fCpLTljg TTEpl TG)V pLEytG-

diavor^EVTa

TO TOLOvds

*

become

de, o

Kal TTpCOTOV TGVT7JV d6%dV

TTpd)TOL

TTpolCdV ds GE 6

*

EV TL pLEya GOl p7]VVG)V OVfC dV TTOTE

TTEpl CLVTLdV

VEL7]V XpEvdpg,

EL

TOTE

Elg

piyiGTOv

.

VEOg

tcdi

dcaXeyope-

cog evl

VVV do^d^ELg pLETdddXoVTd

TTEpipELVOV

.

ltg) d?j TTpopprjGLg tol -

,

tt)v diavoiav dLELpOdppsvoLg

advpog rolg ovto) 12

11

binds together. the

It

two classes here described, by representing the fault of either extreme as arising out of that deep-seated depravity which is the common inheritance of the race. It may be thus paraphrased “ All :

ultraism, into

whether

which

of us are so apt to run, must be avoided

all

be the ultraism of sensuality, or of harsh and denuncia-

it

tory religious zeal.” firm believer in the

No man can be truly charitable who is common depravity of the race. Every

appearance of charity

not a

other

only a spurious liberality or a hollow indif-

is

ference. 12. Kal

heyopev

ttpaog.

Nothing can be more

in

accordance with

the very spirit of charity than this most gentle and exquisitely ten-

der address feeling, as

:

“ But

though

‘My child, you many a change

let

us say unto them, meekly quenching

we were now

are young, and time, as

it

rolls on, will

some of the tender expostulations of the Bible

my

law.

Hear

,

0

13. yiyvovTat de

angry

:

produce

Compare with

once formed,” &c.

in opinions

all

conversing with one of this class,

My

it

son, forget not

ye children the instruction of a father .” ,

del.

See Note IX., App.

14. diarehecrai Trpog yrjpag.

The sentiment

is

that speculative athe-


CONTRA ATHEOS.

12

vavra ev

&£ovg fielvat tisovg elvat

,

/cal

dtavorjOEt.

ra dvo pevTot

iraBij

rrepi

rcoXXolat psv ov, peivat de ovv not to tov g ,

psv cppovTt^etv de ovdev tov avOporttvov ,

rd pera tovto

dvpaot

ry

ravrorj

,

/cat

,

og (ppovTt^ovot pev, EvnapapvOrjTot ds to

ev%alg.

elot

cacpeg liv yevopevov col nepl

dfj

avTOV /card dvvaptv doypa, dv kpol

TretOrj ,

n ep/pevelg avao-

ovTog eite dXXog £%££, rcwdavopevog napd re tov dXXov, /cal dfj /cal pdXtOTa /cal 15 napa tov vopoOeTov.

icottov Eire

ev ds

dfj

tovto

Tip

aoedfjoat. TtEipaTEOv

XP° V(P FV ^oXpfja^g nepl fteovg prjdev yap to Tovg vopovg oot tlOevtl vvv,

avOtg dtdao/CEtv nepl avTov tovtov og ex £i

/cal elg

KA. K aXXtoO’ fjplv, o £eve, pexpt ye tov vvv A0. HavT&TcaoL pev ovv 2 o M eytXXe te /cal

1

,

6’ fjpdg

XeXrjOapev

avTovg

elg

-

EtprjTat.

K?i£tvta

fiavpaoTov Xoyov epnenro-

KOTEg.

KA. Tov rtolov dfj Xeyetg A0. Tov rrapd noXXotg do%a%op£vov anavTOv Xoyov. KA. <J>pa£’ ETt oacpEOTEpov. ;

ism does not often continue lative ly,

theism

may

take

elvat oocpOTaTOV

in old age, but that,

its place,

although a specu-

the other accompaniments, name-

unbelief in a special Providence, or an indifferent trust in the

Divine placability,

may continue

to the latest period.

We

think that

remark of Plato would be abundantly confirmed by an actual observation of life. It is seldom that we find an old man a specuIt is, lative Atheist, whatever he may have been in his youth. however, much more common to meet with those whose insensithis

bility in

respect to the reality of the Divine anger against sin

is in

which they have experienced the special care and sparing mercy of Heaven. direct proportion to the years in

15. /cal

61}

worthy of

nai paktara

notice.

K at

vious assertion, and

is

ical.

drj

The combination

commonly used a

is

and in the highest degree.”

The second

with pak/cra, and the third with vopoOerov. 1.

pexpi ye tov vvv “ so far at least.”

2.

navTaTccKn pev ovv.

“learning from from the lawgiver

fortiori ,

others, and, therefore, If from others {a- fortiori), also,

of particles here

generally denotes an application of a pre-

,

See Note XI., App.

kcll

is to

be taken

See Note X., App.


CONTRA ATHEOS. A0.

13

3

A eyovot

nov rev eg

cjg

ndvra earl rd 7jpdypara yiyrd pev, (pvoet, rd

vopeva, nal yevopeva nal yevrjoopeva, ,

re%vy, rd de did rvxd v

fie,

KA. Ovnovv naXcdg A0. E Inog ye rot nov

-

;

oocpovg avdpag opQtig

Xeyetv.

avrolg oneipcjpeda rovg enelOev f ri nore nal Tvy%avovoL diavoovpevoi.

enopevoi ye

urjv>

,

KA. Udvrcjg. A0. "E ouce, pact rd pev peytora avrcdv teal naXXcora anepyd&oOai (pvoev nal rvxd v rd de aptnpdrepa, rexvrjv rjv dfj napd (pvaecjg Xapdavovaav rr\v rtiv ueyaXcov teal npd)ro)v yeveenv epycov nXarretv nal renratveoOai ndvra c

,

i

j

,

rd opinporepa, a

KA. IIw^ T

A0. 5

depa

,

drj

Xeyeig

rexvtnd navreg npooayopevopev

;

eri oaepearepov epoj .

£2d’

nvp

vdo)p nal yrjv nal

real

ndvra elvac teal rvxd nal rd perd ravra av ocapara

(pvoet

rovreov.

6

.

Text'd de ovdev

*

yrjg re nal rjXlov

,

nal oeXrjvrjg aorpejv re nepi did rovrtov yeyovevai nav,

,

reX&g ovrcov aipvxMV. Tvxd de (pepopeva rjj rr]g dvvdpecjg enaqra enaorcov, rj £vpnenreonev appdrrovra olneicog ncog ,

3.

’Eikoc ye rot nov.

may be

It

E Uog nov its

ye,

is

This

likely, at least,

the usual Socratic or Platonic irony.

is

that these wise people talk correctly.”

likely, plausible, probable, at least, if not certain .”

a combination of particles deserving special notice.

usual limiting sense as given above

;

rot, like $7,

strengthens the limitation, while nov seems

in

Te

rot

Te has

confirms and

the usual

manner

to

diminish the positiveness of the expression by way of appeal to the party addressed. “ Surely (rot) may we say, may we not (nov), that these wise 4.

quod ex

illo

that Ast

may

men

talk plausibly at least (ye), to use

rovg eKeldev.

Haud

consequitur.

wrong.

is

no stronger term.”

dubie (says Ast) scribendnm est, to eKeldev,

We

The

have but

old

little doubt, on the other hand, and established reading, rove, eKeldev,

be rendered “ those from, or of that school,” namely, their

lowers, those

who expand and

explain the doctrine

the next answer. 5.

nvp

6.

(j>v<jei

Kcii .

vdcjp Kal yrjv. .

.

rexvy.

See Note XII., App.

See Note XIII., App.

more

fully,

fol-

as in


,

CONTRA ATHEOS.

14

paXaKa repog OKXrjpd^ real 7ravra birooa rq rdrv evavriorv Kpaoei Kara rvx'ijv £% avdyn7]g ovvenepaodr], ravrq nai Kara ravra ovra> yeyevdeppa \pvxpoig,

npog vypd

%r]pa

rj

,

teal

vrjKEvai rov re ovpavov oXov nai iravra breboa

vov

oa av

teal

nar ovpa ’

(pvrd %vpiT avra, dptiv iraotiv

teat

rojv yevopevcov , ov did vovv, (paoiv

,

rov -

Etc

ovde did rtva

tieov

7

ovde did vrjv ds

aXXd, o Xeyopev,

rex'V'rjVi

vorepov

Etc

T ^Xm

rovrcov vorepav yevopev'qv avrrjv

fivT]-

,

vorepa yeyevvrjKevai iraididg nvag

rr\v he '&V7]rdjv,

Oeiag ov oepodpa perexovoag eavrdrv, oV

rbxvai

slot ovvepiQoi

rdv

oi

yevva

ypacpiterj

fj

dvvapiv

yvpvaoriKij.

aZ

rag

KA.

II tig

de

E/coivcooav

teal yeorpyiKij

drj

rd

teaXa, (pvoei

dtteata

to ttoXv. ovrar ds

pev dXXa

d)

o,

,

teal

teal

ap(pto6rjrovv-

nvi napa

drj

teal iroirjrddv , (paoteovrcov

cpvoEi .

Tadr'

vioig avOpd)-

Eivai rd dueaio-

rl rig dv vitea (dia^opEVog. oOev aoibEial re av-

0pd)TTOig epniiTrovoi veoig, d)g ovtc ovrcov $ed)V oiovg o

pog npoorarrei diavoeioOai delv eXteovrG)v

rd

orav, rors tevpia Eteaora Eivai, yiy -

are avra dvdpcbv oocpcbv

re

d/L/l’

teal

peraridepevovg del ravra

rotg vopoig , a/M/ ov

teat

cp'iXoi

Txoig, idt(x)rd)v

rarov

eivai, vopep ds erepa

5

dv psraOcovrai

EorLv,

teat

aXip

rjg ovtc

*

rovrovg aXXovg aXXoig,

teal

ovd Eivai ronapanav (pvoei

vbpEva rEXvy

teal

noXiriKrjv opiKpov ri pbpog eh

Etcaoroi eavroioi ovvcrpoXbyrjoav vopoOsrovpevoi

teal

<3’

ryj (pvoEi

;

rag diareXeiv aXXrjXoig

a

oreovdalov apa yevvdj-

paKapie, Etvai irpdrrov (paoiv ovroi rexvrj,

0)

,

,

drj

boat ravraig

,

ov (pvoEi dXXd, not vopoig otttj

teal

ov (pvoei rexv^j de

,

dXrj-

,

drra £vyyEvrj

'deoeig.

Xeyeig

A0. Oeovg

/ecu

(pvoei, rex^Xl

vopodeoiav irdoav

Oelg Eivai

povoiK?),

teal

em

Eldar)1’

olov av larpiKrj

teal drj teal rrjv

vat (paoi tcoivcovovv rrjv

(5’

,

dXXd

ravrag onboai

rExvcbv, eivai

rrjv avrdrv

cpvoei teal rvxxi

s

repog

*

voftodeolav naoav.

8.

kTiKovTov.

The

-

oraoeig re did ravra,

rov Kara (pvoiv opdov

7.

vo

(3iov,

og

eon ry

See Note NIV., App.

article rtiv

would seem

to

be required here

be-


CONTRA ATHEOS.

15

dXrjdEta

uparovvrd £rjv r&v aX/io)v, nal

eTEpoiOi

Kara

KA. 0 iov

vopcov

disXrjXvOag,

gj

%eve

Xoyov

,

avOpdoncov veo)v drjpoGta ttoXegl te

A0

'AXrjOrj piivTOL Xsystg,

.

SovXevovra

pbrj

.

o)

60772; Xibbrjv

,

teal idioig olnoig.

K Xsivla.

tl ovv oIel XPV~

vac dpav rov vopoOsrrjv ovtg) tovtg)v tt&Xcu napEGnsvaG

-

,

p,ev G)v

piovov dixsiXslv

rj

;

av0pd)7TOLg

Govrai TTEpi

(bg, el per/

,

ordvra ev

(frrjGovoLV

9

do^d^ovrsg roiovrovg olovg

,

naXCbv

,

6

cfirjGlv

vopiog

/cat

;

nal nspl andvrcov rtiv psyLGTGJv

teal ducaitev,

6 avrog Xoyog oaa re

gvpinaGi rolg

t'q t:6Xei

stvai tisovg acil diavorjOrj-

7rpd$*

,

dpsrrjv telvel nal nantav ,

ravra ovtg) nparrsiv, dtavoovpsvovg burjirsp dv 6 vopo<5’ av ptfj rrapEx^rai savrov 0sT7]g v(p7]y'rjGrjrac ypd(j)cov

deZ

nva

rolg vopoig evttelO?7 rov psv dslv rsOvavcu, rov 6s ,

nXrjyalg nai bsGpolg rov 6e , dripiicug, dXXovg 6s 'nsviaig ,

noXa^EGOcu

real

(bvyalg

ttelOg)

*

no authority of manuscripts

fore eA/cwrcjv, although there is It

seems

6e rolg dvQpbbnoig, 10

to refer to (pacKovruv above.

Hence

mode

ion),

of life which

which consists, and to be

others,

is

right by nature (that

in reality, in so living as to

is,

it,

young)

in their opin-

have power over

subjection to none by virtue of law.”

in

for

factions or quarrels

arise by reason of these things, while they violently drag (the to that

apa

In this

metaphorical expression, ehwvruv, Plato seems to have had an eye to

some of those

violent contests

which Homer so vividly describes

as taking place over a dead body, in which both sides are pulling

with

all

their might, the

one to carry

off,

the other to rescue

;

as in

the battle over the body of Patroclus, in the sixteenth book of the Iliad. It is

He

rises,

however,

infinitely

above

Homer

not the dead body of the slain hero which

is

in his subject.

here the object of

young man that the atheistic crew are seeking to drag down to their own kingdom of darkness or, to accommodate the language of the Grecian poet to a sense far beyond his highest conceptions, we may say, with a slight change contention, but the living soul of the

;

of the verse,

Iliad, xxii., 161

’A/UA 9.

10.

7repi

:

X VXVC pdpvavrai dSavaroio.

See Note NV., App. tteiOcj

de rolg uvftpi'oTcoig.

about ten lines back

;

Connect

this

and then, by leaving out

with all

rj

piovov dnei7^eh\

that

is

explanatory


16

CONTRA ATHEOS.

riQevru avrolg rovg vopovg, prjdeplav ex^iv TOi C hoyoig irpooamovra eig dvvapiv ?fpepovv ;

KA.

Mrjdapcbg,

nal opinpd

oj

%eve

dAA’ einsp rvyxdvei ye ovoa

ra roiavra del

rig rrepl

ttslOg)

,

prjdaprj napveiv

rov ye d^iov nal opinpov vopoOerrjv, dAAa naoav to Ae,

yopevov,

ievra

(jrcjvrjv

veodai Aoyo),

11

nal boa vvv

nal vopep avrep fiorjOrjoai nal rexv^l

d?)

ovx

(pvoecog

enucovpov yiy-

rep rcaXaicp vopep

,

d)£ eiol deot,

y ov opOov ov ov re Xeyeiv poi

eorov

'

,

(ftvoei

eon yevvr\para nard

vov ye

rjrrov, ehrep

ov nal

dirjXOeg

dr)

rj

Ao-

,

morevet

(paivy nal eycb ooi

ravvv.

A0.

T

£2 7

jpoQvporare KXeivla, ri d

%vvanoXovQelv A byoig eig nenrrjrai duoXvyia

them

attaching

ov ^aAerrd re

A eyopeva,

TrXrjOr)

prjnrj

may be

exhibited thus

eon

re av

12

“ Or ought he

:

only, that unless they shall say, &c.

to his

it

;

;

Dr parenthetical, the contrast

to threaten

9

;

but not, by

arguments, exercise persuasion towards

the same time that he lays

down

men

at

the laws, so that (by such persua-

may

render them as mild, or as well-disposed towards the laws as possible.” As here may be rendered “ and,” sive arguments) he

sometimes a disjunctive Or may be better brought out, and the con-

which, in a similar connexion particle

:

the disjunctive force of 6e

nexion with the

first

by rendering

ed,

in English, is

“ Shall he threaten, &c., and shall he not persuade!”

it

part of the sentence at the

“ instead of,” thus

instead of using persuasion!” &c.

well as aTZELlelv, will depend on

olei

11. Tzuaav (povTjv levra, “ letting

nothing which

may

:

same time

preserv-

Ought he only to threaten

In this construction, exeiv, as xpyvat, about twelve lines back.

out

all

his voice,” that

is,

omitting

A proverbial

tend to produce conviction.

ex-

seems somewhich the Greek poets of nautical metaphor, what to resemble a were very fond, and of which we have a striking example, Eurip., Medea, 280 pression, for

which see Erasmus, Adag.,

p.

788.

It

:

’Ex^poc yap k^lacn izdvra “

For

under 12.

my

enemies

full sail, firjKrj

let

out

all

6rj

k&Xov.

their rope,” that

is,

“ are attacking

me

and straining every nerve.”

re av.

There

sudden change from the

is

a harshness here in consequence of the

participle to the indicative

mode

KEicrTjrai.


CONTRA

KA. T l

6s, co t-eve

;

ATIIEOS.

nspl psOrjg

13

17

psv nal povoncfjg ovrco 14

imnpd Xeyovrag rjpdg avrovg irsptspLStvdpLSv nepl tisoov 6s nal pfjv real vopoOs feat rcbv rotovrov ovx VTcopLSVoiyisv ,

-

;

old ys sort irov r q psrd (ppovrjosog ptsyLorr} porjOstd, 6 lotl rd nspl vopovg npooraypara sv ypdppdoc rsOsvra cog 6co,

aovra ovt

1

xpovou sXeyxov

slg iravra

si

xa ^ £1T d

tear

7

rtdvrcog fjpspsl

,

dpxdg dnovstv sort

1

15

coots

a y so ’

(jyobrjTsov ,

Tdi Kdi TCO 6vOpddsl TroXXdfCLg STTdVLOVTL si pd/cpd, cocbsXipd 6s,

*

OfCOTTSLV

*

OVTS

6id Tdvrd Xoyov ov6dpr] sx £ ^ ov6e

ooiov spotys slvdt cpdivsTdi to

ov

prj

(3or)0slv

rovroig rdig

Xoyotg ndvTd dv6pd tedTd 6vvdptv.

MEr. vkpiOTd,

co

A0. Kdl udXd

ye,

j

This, however, indeed, this 13.

is

co

MsytXXs

ttoltjtsov re d)g Xsyei.

must be rendered as though

were KEKTypeva,

it

This refers to discussions

in the first and third which had been continued at great length. linger around a subject to wait one’s own lei-

vnopevG), “ to endure, to wait with patience.”

vovpev supply TZEpipevEiv, thus

not endure to wait]”

patiently]”

if,

treatise,

14. Trepipevo, “ to

sure.”

we

*

not the true reading.

peOyg.

7TF.pl

books of this

K Xsiviag.

gsvs, 6onsl Xsystv

There

is

ov% vnopEvovpev

:

After vnope-

TZEpipevEiv,

we

taken adverbially, “ shall

or,

“ shall

not wait

evidently a case of paronomasia, or play upon

words here. “ Are altogether silent .” Compare God Theuth in th.e Phaedrus, 275, commended, as better than that of

this

with the myth

respecting the

D.,

where

struction

books, and doubts

ypepel.

15.

is

are suggested, whether, after service to

mankind

:

tKeivyg EarrjKEv uev ug 6e nai

7]

all,

the art of writing has been of real

ug dhyOtig bpocov (ypaQy) faypatyia gCivra,

edv

oral in-

6’

dvepy

tl,

aepvcjg

navv

Kai yap ra

ciyp. ravrov

ypa<py. edv tl spy (3ovX6pevog paOelv , Iv tl cypaiveL

pbvov rau-

ovk entararaL XeyeLV olg del ye nai py T:\yppi\ovpEvog de Kai ovk tv bitcy TioLdopyQeig rov naTpog dei Seltol fioydov. avrog yap

rbv

del. Kai

ovt upvvaoOaL ovte [loyOyaaL dwaToq avT(p.

In the Gorgias, 525, B.,

this

term ypepel

this, to

is applied, in a

somewhat

different

the victorious party or argument that holds

quietness after the rest ,

have been

silenced

:

manner from its

gronnd in

dW ev roaovToig "koyoig

rtiv dTJiov kTieyxopevav ovTog ypepel 6 Tibyog. 1.

ETzavLovTi.

Like a gerund, “ Scepius animo agitando .”

B 2


18

CONTRA

Kal yap

ATIIEOS.

KareonappevoL fjoav

el pfj

roiovrot XoyoL ev

ol

enog elnelv avOpunoig, ovdev dv

rolig TiaoLV (bg

euapvvovvrcdv Xoycvv

(hg slot

deot

ovv diatyOeipopevoLg rolg peylorotg vuo rlva nal paXXov npoafjKet

KA. 0 VK 5

A0.

j3orj0elv

e det tCjv

vvv 6s dvaynr}. vopoig

fj

natctiv dvOpcbncov

vopoOerrjv

;

ZGTIV.

AXkd

Xeye pot tt&Xlv

dfj

KA eivla,

Kal ov. kolvgj-

vov yap del oe zivai r<bv Xoyuv. Kivdvvevei 2 yap 6 Xeyo)v ravra nvp Kal vdup Kal yfjv ical aepa npcbra fjyeloQai ,

i

,

7ravTG)v zivai

t(x)v

Kal rfjv (pvocv ovopa^eiv ravra avrd

,

pvxfjv de zk rovrcjv vorepov. zolkz de ov Kivdvveveiv

dvr cog or\paiveLV ravra

KA.

II

aw

,

aXka

fjplv rep Xoycp.

pev ovv.

y

A0. Ap’ ovv

,

A cog

7rpog

olov

irrjyfjv

nva

avorjrov

doi-rjg

dvzvprjKapzv dvOpcbncov ottoool reebnore rcbv nzpl cpvoecog ecbfjxpavro £rjrrjparcov

yap

dfj

okottzl irdvra

;

,

opuepov ye ro deaepepov,

eipTjpaprrjpevcog

3

e^era^cov. ov

Xoycov anrope -

el (pavelev

vol aoedcov, aXXoig re e^apxovreg,

dAA’

Xoyov

prjde ev rolg koyoig,

xp&pevoi. doKel rotvvv poc ravra ov-

rcog exeev.

KA. E v A0. 2.

Xeyetg

’'FiOLKe

1

dAA

5

orrrj , rreLpco

cppa^eLV.

roivvv arjOeorepcov anreov 4 zivai Xoycov.

The primary sense

Kivdvvevei.

of this

word

“ to be in dan- « “ to seem.” The

is

the secondary and quite as frequent sense is connexion between them is not obvious. In its secondary meaning it is not synonymous with doKei, and the primary may be preserved with tolerable distinctness in many of those places in which it is ren-

ger

dered “ to seem.”

As, for example, in this passage,

—“ ventures

to

regard,” or “ is in danger of regarding.” It implies that the sentiment is a bold one, and one which, probably, he would not adopt, if he could trace all the consequences of this dogma, viz., “ that fire,

and water, and

earth,

firmation of this view,

:

opiKpov ye to diadepov,

yap “ for

In conair, were the first of all things.” compare what follows a few lines below ov

and

it

el

<j>avelev

would make no small difference

This sense of Ki.vdvvevo e^dpxovreQ

is

4.

dr)6earepa)v.

anropevoi daeOoVf

they should appear,”

quite a favourite with Plato.

— auspicantes —qui

3.

if

Tioycov

aliis

See Note XVI., App.

auctores sunt.

&c


CONTRA ATHEOS.

KA. Ovn EKTog eI

6kv7]teov

(b

,

19

%eve. pavdavo)

yap

vopoOsctag

(bg

patvstv, sav rcbv tolovtcjv dnrcbpEda Xoycov.

oh'jorj

5

7 rolg vvv Kara vopov ds egtl prjdapr) STEporg GvpcfroJvrjGat

XsyopsvoLg dsolg

•davpacts, teat ravrrj

A syotp?

A0.

exovglv

(bg opOtig

i)

dv, (bg sotnev ,

rjdrj

vat ysyovog oi tt)v rtbv aosdcbv 6

vorspov TTpoTspov.

o ds

cb

cx^ddv ova slorOoTa Xo(pOopag alrtov

teal

'ijrvx'rjv

sl-

dnEpyaodpsvot Ao-

oOsv rjpaprrjtcaGt

,

irspl

dstbv

ovotag.

TTjg bvTG)g

KA.

a eicteov,

rovro ov uptirov aXXa vorspov anE(f>r)vavTO

dr:dvro)v,

*

,

.

yov Ttvd rovds. o TTpcbrov ysvEGEorg

yot

ravrrj

Ovtcg) pavdavo).

A0. 'kvx'rjv, cb sratps, rjyvorjnsvat ntvdvvEvovot psv oXtyov i-vpnavTEg olov te ov rvyxdvst /cat dvvaptv fjv sxet *

r(bv te aXXorv avrrjg irspi, nat dr) real ysvEGsarg, (bg sv nptb9 roig egtl Gorparcov EpnpooOev irdvrorv yEvopsvrj nat psra ,

apxm rtavTog apa ovtc eg avdyurjg rd ysyovoTa T(bv GtbpaTt

doXrjg te avTtbv nat p£Tanocpr)GEG)g aTTdcrjg

paXXov

si

.

ds egtl

,

5.

dr)

9

sir)

*

nat

dr)

ovptyMvrjoat.

kizqidEiv, kneidy,

ol rrjv

all

Similar terms in similar con-

the dialogues, such as gwclSelv,

&c.

rtiv dosbivv Tpvxyv uTVEpyaadpEvot hoyoi, “

pression, UTTEpyaGapEvot o de vorspov

irpaif-

was very fond of metaphorical expressions

Plato

the soul of the impious

7.

;

nat Ta psyaXa nat irpcbTa spy a nat

nexions are found throughout

6.

G(bpaTog

paXanebv nat ftapEorv nat noveporv npoTE-

derived from the science of music.

ovvudy,

rj

EntpsXEta nat vovg nat texvt) nat vo-

teal

G/tXrjpcbv nat

pa dv

sir)

’A vaynr).

A0. A 6%a pog

oviorg,

ovG7]g TavTrjg rcpEGdvTEpag

7ipog7]k6vtg)v,

KA.

TavTa

TrpOTEpa dv

GvyyEvrj

what

rrjv rrjg

it

is.”

which render

Equivalent to this other ex-

avrCrv Tpvxvc uGE&stav.

( arr Efo'jvavro ) 7rporspov.

They

are guilty of the

which logicians style hysteron proteron that is, putting the effect for the cause, and the cause for the effect which they did, in making rexvrj posterior to dvotg and rvx rj. See Note XVII., App. 8. 9. Guudrtov epTrpooOEv.

fault

,

;

%


;

,

20

CONTRA ATHEOS. ^v ytyvoLTo, ovra ev

eig , 7 sx vrJ^

nal *

real

ra de

opQtig eirovopa^ovaiv avrb'

cj)vcng (jjv ovtc

rspa

Trpcoroig

apxopeva av

etc

0

cf)vasi

tovto) vg-

Texvrjg eh] nal vov,

KA. ITwf A0. Ov/c opOtig (f>voiv povXovraL Xeyeiv yevsoiv rfjv rrepl rd npdjra. el 6s (fravrjoerai 'ipvx'rj nptirov, ov ttv p ovde drjp, 'ipvx'rj

<

ev npuroig yeyevrjpevrj

5’

oxedov

,

11

opdorara

Xeyoir’ av elvai dLacpepovTCog, ore (pvoei 12 ravr eoO ovTCog ’

exovra, av

reg

'ijjvx'fjv

emdei^

irpeodvrepav ovoav o bbpa-

rog , aXXcog de ovdap&g. *

KA.

’A XrjOeoTara Xeyeig.

A0. Ovtcovv rd perd ravra ueOa

f

en'

avro

6rj

tovto otsXXo)*

;

KA. T t

prjv

;

A0. QvXaTTCjpev

drj

navTanaoLV dnaTr]Xbv Xbyov

,

prj

10. avro tovto, “ which they incorrectly call this very thing,” namely, “ this first thing, which we call iftvxTr, they call $vgls” vg-

Tepa nal, &c., “Nature and

by

11.

its

works would be posterior

to and ruled

and reason, or mind.”

art

ox^bbv, here, does not qualify opdorara but \eyoiTo , ,

almost be said with the highest degree of correctness.”

—“

it

It, in fact,

renders the whole declaration stronger instead of weakening

seems to be often used as a sort of apology and thus, instead of diminishing or impairing mon rendering ( almost ) would imply, it has

might

it.

It

for a bold expression, its force,

as the com-

directly the contrary

effect. 12. pvGEi.

It

might then be said with the highest degree of cor-

rectness, that these things are thus by nature that soul

how

to

is

,

if

any one should show

older than body, but otherwise not.”

Plato seems some-

have changed the sense of the word upon the

evidently here

ever that

may

makes

the

same with

it

may

this be said to

in a contest with those

it

If

any

certainly should be

whose whole strength

consists in the dexterous use of such words as tvxv, ,

He

,

be the order of nature.

as a mere play upon words,

deemed pardonable nature &c.

atheist.

the truth of things what-

be, and, therefore, if soul is o.der than body, then in

the highest sense

should regard

tyvGig

<f>voi(;,

chance


CONTRA ATHEOS. itt]

npeadvrag rjpag ovrag veonpenrjg

a(j)vycbv

naTaysXaOTOvg

baXkdpevoi™ Kadanep ovra

ei

1

*

icar^

on

,

eon

£%££, teal (j)avevTog

TtpeobvTEpoig ovot

,

Kivdvvov yeyovivai

13. fail

6

aoeptiXel, OKS'ipao-

vplv

real

,

rj

irtig

pev ravr y, ttaXelv vpag tots aal ovv-

dtabtba^Etv epnEipia el be abarog

vvv

em-

irplorov epe xprjvat ixeipaQi]-

epavrov KaraXcnovra vpag ev

Ocu el diabarog

real

dd^cjpev, pet^ova

vetbrarog 6’ eyob rvy^avoov vptbv aai ttoXXcov ,

vac

teal

/

irorapov rjpag edec rpelg ovrag biabaivEiv ps-

o(j)6<5pa ,

epiretpog pevpdro)v elnov 15

*

cov uapa7T£LO q y /cal di-

cpuip&v anorvxeZv. uicon sire ovv ,

rtiv

/cat

Trotrjo'd

21

peXXw eon

Xoyog

fjv (bg

vplv ev epoi rov ,

av eddfcovv Xeyeiv. nai

perplcjg

ccfrodpoTEpog, nai

oxedov loug

“Lest, aiming at things too great,

emSaXXopevoi.

Srj

we

should

even of the small.”

14.

Kadanep

The common reading

el.

is el

Kadanep.

We

have

ventured to make the change from the exigency of the place, and on the authority of Stephanus ly-flowing river.”

;

“ as

if

we

three had to cross a violent-

— See Note XVIII., App.

15. neipadijvai.

Whenever a verb

is

used only

voice to the entire exclusion of the active, or

predominant form

— or

when

when

in the

middle

the middle

is

the

the active has a causal signification,

thus giving rise to what in the middle

is seemingly an independent such cases, the passive aorists and passive perfect do not denote the receiving of an action, or, in other words, are not the

sense

in all

passive of the active, even when it is in use, but are strictly middle Thus, neipdu “ to tempt another ;” neipdopai “ to tempt

tenses.

,

,

one’s self, or to attempt, to try ;” neipadrjvai not to be tempted but “ to attempt, or try ;” same as the middle. So, also, 7rAa£b, “ to ;” cause to wander nhdfypai, “to wander;” nXayxdrjvai, not “ to be ,

made

to

,

wander,” but to wander same as the middle. Such cases Nothing seems to us to be gained by ;

are very frequent in Greek.

them deponent, a term which would seem to belong peculiarly where there is no middle form, except as it is supplied by the passive. In Greek no good reason can be assigned why such calling

to the Latin

verbs should be regarded as essentially different from others of the middle voice. This peculiarity does certainly exist in cases where there

is

an actual middle beyond

all

shown in the use both same sense.

doubt, as

of the middle and passive aorists with the


3

22

CONTRA ATHEOS.

a6arog l vplv

ocp&v p(bpq

(bg 737

pi] 6i)

onorodivlav iXiyyov* rs

napacpepopevog re nai epcjrdjv arjOecg ovrag

epiroirjorj,

airoKpLoeuv elr' dox'rjpoovvrjv airperxeidv re evreay] ,

arjdr],

avepurav pot xp^l vai 17 oielv ovro)al ravvv epe TTpGjrov epavrov cuiovovTGdv vpibv ev docpaXel, ical pera done!

6rj

*

ravra dirouptvaodai TrdXtv epe teal rov Xoyov duavra ovto) diegeXOelv, axpcnep dv 'ipvxijs ^cept dianepavij-cu, nal •

deify

71

porepov ov V

KA. A pior\

(b

'ijwxijv

O(bparog.

fyve, frorcelg rjplv elprjicevat

ixolet

re

(bg

Xeyetg.

A0. "Aye fy* dedv elnore uapanXrjreov tovto ovtg) yevopevov 1

.

(jxedov

ujug

a6arog.

*

enl ye anodeii-tv

See page 20

,

11

.

Here

rjplv,

vvv eo~G)

(bg elol rijv

av-

also, Gxebov, instead

of impairing, increases the force of the expression, and may be regarded as an apology for not using a stronger term. “ might

We

almost say aSarog” &c. 2

.

oxoTobcvlav ITuyyov re vplv spnoLr/Gri.

These are favourite terms

with Plato to express that state of intellectual dizziness with which the soul approaches the contemplation of those great truths, which

may

he regarded as the apxal or foundations of

all

Compare

others.

the language used in the beginning of the seventh book of the Republic,

as applied to those

who

are supposed suddenly to emerge from the

dark cave of error and phenomena into the upper world of

Compare, also, the Gorgias, 527, A.

truth.

That

this

language was

common

;

light

and

Theaetetus, 155, D.

with Socrates himself, and that

Plato in this, as well as in almost everything else, truly represents his peculiarities, not only of reasoning, but of style,

from the manner

may

be inferred

which Aristophanes joins together these two terms in evident allusion to Socrates, whose philosophy and favourite modes of speech he omits no opportunity to ridicule, not only in the Clouds, but also in many places of his other comedies. Vide the in

Acharnenses, 1218. ITuyyuo Kapa Xldtp 7rEn?i7jyphogy Kal GKOTodiviib. 3.

'KctpatyepopEvog.

stream

4.

still

sustained, although, in a critical point of view,

awkwardly dropped in tporuv. See Note XVIII., App. See Note XIX., App.

rather both.

is

In this word the metaphor of the rushing

T^oyog is to

it

is

be supplied for


c

CONTRA ATHEOS. rwr, onovd'Q iraorf napaKeuXrjoOuv

23

6 exoperoi de

.

nvog

tig

aGcfraXovg netGparog, Emdacvoopev elg rov vvv Xoyov.

poi eX eyxopbvcp

,

8

(paXeorara dnonpivEoda

rav

dpa

rtg,

(pr\

icaZ

nepl rd rocavra epojrrjOEGL roialode da-

1

EorrjKE

Kara

(paLverai.

pev navra

ds,

d) Z-eve ,

ono -

KiveZrai de ovdev

9 ,

;

rj

rd pev avrtiv tuveZrat rd de pevEL Ta pev ntveZrai nov 10 (prjGU), rd ds psvei. Mwv Tm to re eortira egttjue /ecu to Kivovpeva otw 11 edpa nov av ye ev tuveZrat IIw^ ydp ov Ka£ to rovrcp

7T

av rovvavrtov

;

?]

,

,

;

,

;

j

5. 6.

See Note XIX., App. kxopevoL 6e &g tivoq do^akovg neerparog.

some sure

There

cable.”

is still

“ Holding fast as by

preserved here the metaphor of

the dangerous flood, and there can be no doubt, that by this sure cable is

meant

just prayed. 7.

that Divine strength and guidance See Notes XVIII. and XIX., App.

This word

ElEyxopeva).

“convicted of error.” in

an argument.”

It

is

which he had

generally rendered “ refuted,” or

here, however,

It

for

means simply “engaged

thus frequently used in the Gorgias and

is

elsewhere. 8.

dnoKpLVEGdcLL, “ to take the part of respondent” as well as that

of interrogator. 9.

egttjke

10. nov.

Kara

ds

— See Note XX., App.

See Note XX., App.

psv navra.

This

.

particle, of so frequent

use

in the Platonic dia-

logues, in its primary sense implies doubt or hesitation, fore, generally said to

tion, in a

manner

employed,

take

away from

directly the opposite of

when nothing

of this kind

and

is,

there-

the positiveness of a declaraIt is,

drj.

is really

however, often

intended, but only an

appearance of it, in those familiarities of the colloquial

style, to

which

a term of courtesy, by

this particle is so

admirably adapted.

which the speaker,

to avoid being thought dogmatic or positive, ap-

It is

peals to the other party for his assent, without, however, intending

any doubt of the proposition advanced. <f)rjco) ,

it

KivELTcu,

If connected here with

should be rendered, “I will say, shall it

comes nearly

to the

same

thing, “

I

not?’

some

Or

if

with

things move, do

they not 1”

Perhaps a better exGreek to illustrate the essential difference between the present and the perfect. From its very nature .he idea of rest is finished and complete, and is therefore denoted 11.

EGTcjra egtijke

.

..

.

ample could not be found

KLvovpEva kiveItcu. in


)

24

CONTRA ATHEOS.

rovro

dpcbrj,

ra de ev ,

Td

TcXetoot.

Xap6avovra dvvaptv Aeyeig,

peocp

Ocu , KaOdnep izeptcpopa

r\

pa rov peytorov

yovoa

7]

polg re

teal

de ye d)g ev ravrpj

nepupo-

rfj

rov optKporarov kvkXov apa

roiavTTj KtvrjOig.

ava Xoyov

13

irepid-

eavrrjv diavepei opiK-

pei^ooiv, eXarrcov re ovoa Kai nXelcov Kara

/cal

Xoyov. did

(brjoopev, ev evl Kivelo-

rtiv eoravai Xeyopev cov kvkXoov orpecperai

N at. MavOavopev

;

eorurcjv 1 * ev

tt)v rtiv

drj

r&v fiavpaortiv 14

airavrcov

yeyovev,

irrjyri

dpa peyaXoig Kai optKpolg KVKXocg (dpadvriqrdg re nai raxp opoXoyovpeva 15 n opevovoa, advvarov (bg av rig eXntoeie yiyveoOai naOog. ’A XrjOeorara Xeyetg. ra de ye Ktvovpeva ev rroXXolg

vovra

1

(palvp\

pot Xeyeiv , boa (popa Kivelrat peradat-

elg erepov del rorrov

evog KeKrrjpeva

Kai rore pev ,

nvog Kevrpov rore ,

KvXivdeloOai. npoorvyxdvovra by the

2

Such verbs, however, as

present.

express positive

rest

,

is

ore fiaoiv

de nXecova,

rw nepu

eKaorore eKaoroig rolg ,

Motion, on the other hand,

latter tense.

continued or incomplete action, and

much

d’

eonv

necessarily

is

therefore expressed hy the

tt avo,

navopai

Arjyv,

,

do not so

as a ceasing of previous action, which,

being a continuous idea, admits of a present form. “ You mean, then, we will reply (to out 12. Td tt]v rtiv karurov.

imaginary interlocutor) that those which receive the faculty or prop erty

(

dvvaptv of things at rest in the centre (another

mode

of say

mg, the properly of being at rest, &c.) move in one, just like theAnother, and revolutions of those wheels that are said to stand.” perhaps a better

way would

be to take piatp with hapSdvovra, in

stead of kardruv, after this order, ra kv peotp ’kapbdvovra

kardrov dvvaptv.

Ficinus renders

13.

See Note XXI., App.

14.

See Note XXII., App. opu^oyovpeva, to be taken

15.

Advvarov

.

.

.

nddog,

“a

rrjv

rfiv

quee in medio stare possunt

adverbially

for

opoTioyovphtjq.

state of things (nuOoq) which, as

one would

expect, could not possibly take place.” 1.

kv itoXXolc, the opposite of kv hi.

tion.”

Or

On many

rolling on a plane, instead of revolving

such as Sextus Empiricus styles romayv perdSaatv. Pyrrh. Hypot., iii., 8 and 64. 2.

7t

poorvyxdvovra.

“As

centres of

mo-

on a fixed point, Sext, Emp.,

they meet continually *Vith individual


.

CONTRA ATHEOS.

25

3

korCxu pev diaofti&Tai, Tolg

TUCK nal (pepopevoig

s^ovra

(hg

dXXrjXocg e£ evavrtag

anav -

yiyvopeva peoa re nal pera^v

elg ev

ovyupivercu. Xeyo) yap ovv ravra ovrcog

tolovtcvv

t£)v

d’

ov Xeyscg

nal ovynpivopEva pev av$;d-

real prjv

.

1

verac

,

dianpivopeva 6s (pdtvei

kndoTCJV E^tg diapev^

anoXXvTai. ylyvETaf drjXov d>g

pr)

dr)

tote OTav

9

pevovGijg de avTrjg di dpcpOTepa ,

navT(ov yevEGig

onoTav ap%r) Xadovoa

tjvlk

,

av

tl

n a-

5

av^rjv, elg ttjv dev-

$ TEpav eXOrj peTadaoiv, nal and TavTrjg ;

naOeoTTjnvla

7]

,

elg ttjv nXrjoiov,

nal pEXpt Tpitiv eXOovoa aloOrjfUv oxzi r olg aioOavopEVotg. ,

pETadaXXov pev ovv ovtoj nal peTamvovpevov ytyvETac nav. eotl 6e ovTug ov, s onoTav pevrj peTabaXbv de elg •

dXXrjv egiv, diecpOapTai navTeXtig. dp ovv nivrjGEig naoag ’

elprjnapEV (bg ev e16egi Xadelv uet’ aptOpov, nXrjv ye,

cb (pt-

j

Xol dvolv ,

KA.

;

II oiaiv drj

A0. X^edov, rlv

t]

Gne'iptg

KA. Aeye A0.

; 9

cb

yaOe eneivatv ,

,

evena naoa

cov

rjpZv eg-

Tavvv, GacpeOTEpov

vxTjg fjv evena

nov

;

KA. Jlavv uev ovv A0. "E (7T6) TOtVVV 7] UEV ETEpa dwapEVrf EavT7)v de adwaTOvoa alel pea Tig d’ .

j

j

Am

niVElv niV7]Gl

eavTrjv r’ aZet

9

erepa dvvapevr] naTa te GvynpiGEtg ev re dianptGEGcv

,

av^acg te nal Tcb evavTicp, nal yeveoeot nal cpOopatg a X Xr\ ,

ata Ttg av tg5v nao&v ntvrjGEtiv .

KA.

’Kcrrct)

yap ovv.

opposing objects, by those that stand they are divided, while with others that meet

them (being borne from opposite directions) they and intervening parts come together into

unite, so that the centres

one.”

6.

See Note XXIII., App. See Note XXIV., App.

7.

dieQOaprac.

3, 4, 5.

It is

utterly destroyed,” that

before was, no longer is”

the words 8. 9.

“ the thing which

is,

See Notes XXIII. and XXIV., App., on

tyOioLg, avt-rjOLQ, (fiQopa , eipi,

See Note XXV., App.

O

and yiyvopai

.


.

26

CONTRA ATHEOS.

A0. Ovkovv

pev erepov dec mvovoav

rrjv

10

9

Xopevrjv v(p erepov 'drjoopev evarrjv av ,

mvovoav

erepa

teal

,

evapporrovoav

,

,

teal

peradaX-

rrjv re eavrrjv

pev

Trace

rrocrjpaoc,

rraoc de iraOrjpaoc , tcaXovpevrjv de ovrcog rcov ovrcov

rcov peradoXrjv teal mvrjocv, ravrrjv de

n av.

o%eddv

detcarrjv

epovpev.

KA. UavraTraoi pev A0. Tcov vaepev

11

dena pdXcora

dr)

rjplv mvrjoecov

opOorara rraccdv eppcopeveordrrjv

Trpatcrcicrjv

deaepepovreog

M vpccp

KA.

ovv.

13

12

reva rrpoKpcre elvac nat

;

avdyterj

irov

avrrjv

(jravac dcacjrepecv rrjv

dvvapevrjv mvelv rag de aXXag 7rdoag, vorepag. ,

A0. Ev

Xeyecg. dp’ ovv rjplv rcov

rcov peraOereov 14 ev

fj

teal

KA. Hoc a cpxig A0. To rrjg detearrjg KA. Urj;

dvo

vvv ova

dpQcdg prjdev-

;

;

prjQev oftedov ova dpOcdg elprjrac

A0. Upcdrov 15 yeveoec re eon

teal pcdpyp

teard

Xoyov

to de pera rovro e%opev rovrov devrepov apre prjQev aro,

rrcog

evarov.

KA.

Xeyecg

nc5$*

;

T

A0, £2de. orav erepov aXXo rjplv peraddXyj nal rovro aXXo erepov dec rcov rocovrcov apa eorac rrore rc irpcdrov peradaXXov teal rrcdg, orav vn’ aXXov mvrjrac rovr eoTat ,

,

;

,

See Note XXV., App. This is the common reading. dent, however, that dv should be supplied. 10.

11. riva TTpoKpivaifiEV.

12.

It is evi-

See Note XXVI., App.

13. pvpiG).

Hyperbolical measure of excess.

By

ten thousand

times.” 14. /LcsTaderiov.

ticulars

V

“ Must

we change

the order in one or

two

par-

}

The meaning

what was last or tenth in the order of the previous investigation, becomes first in the order of nature and in the degree of importance and that which we be fore wrongly called the ninth, becomes now the second. See Notes XXV. and XXVI., App. 15.

npcorov.

of this

is,

that

;


;

27

CONTRA ATHEOS. irore rtiv aXXoiovvTO)v rrpCdTov

;

advvarov yap, dAA’ orav

apa avro avrd tuvrjcrav erepov dXXoitior], to d erepov aX’

Xo nat ovtg)

dfj

,

pvpioig ytyvrjrai rd /avrjOevra ,

x^ ia

ear at

ucbv apx'f] rcg avrtiv

rrjg

mvrjoeojg dndorjg aXXr],

I

7tXt)v

Ti]g avTrjg avTrjv mvr\odG7\g peTadoXrj

i]

K aXXiOTa

KA. A0.

,7

E tl

elnsg

;

Gvyx^p'ijrea te TOVTOig.

Tode ehrcjpev, nai dnofcptvcjpeOa irdXiv

dr) real

rd rravTa opov yevopeva nanXeloTOt t&v tolovtgjv toXpd)Gi Xeyeiv tlv’ apa

rjplv avToloiv. el GTairj ncjg

Oanep

oi

,

ev avTOtg avay/crj

KA. T rjv 7tots

,

7rpd)Trjv Ktvrjoiv

avT7]v

dr] rrov

yevsoOai tcov eiprjpsvG)v

mvovaav in’ aXXov yap ov .

$

prj~

spnpoaOev psTanso'y prjdepidg ye ev avTOtg ovorjg ,

epirpoaOev psTanTuaecog.

A0.

’A pxv v apa 1 Kivrjosojv naotiv

tgjgl yevopevrjv teal ev tuvovpevoig

Gav ,

teal Trpd)T7]v

ovGav

ev ts eg-

tt)v avTrjv

mvov~

tyrjGopev dvaynaiatg elvai TTpeGdvTaTrjv ical KpaTiGTTjv

peTaboXfjV naGtiv

tt)v de dXXoiovpevrjv veff ETepov , klvov-

GaiPds eTspa devTepav. ,

KA. A0.

’A Xr}OeGTaTa Xeyetg. 2 Ottote d 7} TOivvv evTavda EGpev tov Xoyov , Tode

'

dnorcpivtipeOa.

KA. To A0.

5

evvdpG),

rj

7Tolov

E av

(frrjGopev

rj

;

ldo)pev

Trvpoeidei,

nexupiopevcp

ev tgj tolovtg)

KA. Mtiv apa pe

3 TavTTjv yevopevrjv ev tgj yrjivcp ,

7tov

tt

aOog elvai

epo)Tag el

£?/ v

4

teal

rj

^vppiyel tl ttotg ,

;

avro npoGepovpev OTav

avTO avTO mvf\ 1.

all

apxvv apa

motions, the

ving

among

klvt/ceov. first

“ Seeing, then, that

among

it is

the principle of

things that stand, and being self-mo-

things that move,

we

will say that

it is

*he oldest and

strongest,” &c. 2.

hravda Xoyov.

“In

such expressions as 7tov we

yr/c

this part of our

argument.”

anoplag

7r oi

—ek

yijc

rod’

Compare

Iv* el

naKov

opyrjg 3. TttVTIJV. 4.

Supply

KLVTJOLV.

Cyv npooEpovfjiEV orav avro avro tavrj

;

“ Shall

we

call

it life

(of


v

;

CONTRA ATHEOS.

N at,

A0.

tfjv.

KA. Hug yap

ov

;

A0. T L de onorav 'i/jvxrjv ev tloiv ravrov TOVTCp $q opoAoyrjreov

optipev, ptiv

;

aXko f

t

;

KA. 0 vtc aXXo. A0. "E%e dr\ 5 irpog ktog

ap

*

oi>/£

av eOeXoig nepl enao-

tov rpia voelv

KA. Hug AO.

Xeyetg

;

*'Ev pev, rrjv

ev de, ovopa.

ovolav

cal dr) Kal

7

t

6

ev de rrjg ovoiag rov Xoyov

*

,

epcorrjoetg eivai nepl

to ov anav

dvo.

KA. IIw^ dvo

;

A0. Tore pev 8 rjpojv enaorov rovvopa nporecvopevov avro rov Aoyov airairelv tots de rov Xoyov Tcporeivope•

,

apa ye to rotovde av fiovXopeda

vov, epcorav av rovvopa.

vvv Xeyeiv

KA. To to Live)

;

7toIov

when

;

a thing itself moves

£««, to live ,

itself'?”

and

to

up are unquestionably of the same radical Effervescence or fermentation from the action of heat, taking idea. place in matter otherwise apparently motionless, would be the pheboil , to bubble , to bubble

,

nomenon which of all others would most readily suggest to the mind the idea of self-motion and would thus be taken as a

primitive

,

symbol of life. v

5.

E^£

drj ttpoc

A Log. “ Hold

there by Jove.”

Let us secure

of the subject.

Compare Gorgias, 490, A. dum does not seem to us

this phrase, age

it,

An

important posi-

and then advance to another view

tion is gained.

,

The usual

rendering ot

to give its peculiar sig-

nificance. 6.

ev pev

,

ttjv

ovolav,

k.

t. X.

One

thing the essence, one the

Xoyog or reason of the essence, and one the name.”

See Note

XXVII., App. This phrase generally denotes an application of a “And accordingly, respecting every such essence, there must be always two questions.” 7.

Kal dq Kall

preceding proposition.

8.

ed,

tote pev

we demand

Tibyog or

tote

de.

At one time, the name being present

the loyoq, reason or definition

reason being given,

we

;

ask the name.”

at

another time, the


29

CONTRA ATHEOS. V

A0.

E otl

9 dix a dtaipovpevov ev aXkotg re nai

7tov

apedpep, Tovrcp drj rep nar dptdpov ovopa pev, apnov yo^ de, aptOpog dtatpovpevog elg loa dvo peprj. ’

,

h

Ad

N al.

KA.

A0. To tolovtov (ppa^G). pdrv ovv ov ravrov enarepodg 10 av re tov Xoyov epo)T(x)pevot, Tovvopa Trpooayopevopev, anodtdcbpev, av re Tovvopa, tov Xoyov apTiov dvopaTij *

nai

TavTov ov

A0. 9.

'ipvxv

may be

This

diaipovpevov.

Ylxcl

.

Tovvopa, Ttg tovtov A oyog

11

ttt dr)

c

it

;

KA. HavTairaoL pev ovv T

poo ay opevovT eg,

dtxa dtatpovpevov dpiOpov

\oy<p,

exopev

;

taken impersonally.

divided into two,” or generally, “ there

or there

is

may be this

It is

divis-

ion into two, both in other things and also in respect to number.”

tovtu

drj.

To

“ namely, that

apnov

this thing, that

this division”

is,

which has respect

—r&

number, the

to

but the ’koyog (notion, reason, or definition)

;

And

two equal parts.”

visible into

in the eighth

/car’

NAME

apidpov,

( ovopa )

a number

is

is

di-

this is the koyog or notion given

book of Euclid’s Elements of Geometry,

in these very

words. 10. pfiv ovv ov

ravrov knaripwg

may be thus freely rendered

sage

stantially predicate the

we

name

give the

asked

if,

name,

predicating of the

Do we not

which

we give name

After

The two that

whose notion

apnov.

2d.

To

even!

there seems no

all,

may

questions is

What

this the

,

part

:

The

:

,

1st. 1

answer

is

,

name

and of the

What is the name To this the answer

the notion of that whose

name

is

apnov

of is

or

apiOpog elg lea Svo peprj bLaipovpevog—

,

and Ast.

the notion), and being

confusion in the sentence.

little

a number divided &c.

is

pas-

&c., being substantially the

,

be thus stated

a number divided or divisible &c.

ovopan although

it is

the notion (to which the

as subject, apnov

notion as subject, a number divided

same.”

The whole

in both respects sub-

being asked in respect to the notion,

(of the thing of

in respect to the

belongs)

same,

ttpoeayopevopev.

:

We

have placed a

differing in this respect

comma

after

from the editions of Bekkei

following seems to us to be the order of the lattei

Tzpoaayapevovreg ovopan, apnov , kuc

dixa biaipovpevov dpiOpov ravrov ov ,

( kv

See Note XXVIII., App. 11. See Note XXVIII., App.

C

2

(

npoeayopevovreg )

Aoy<p,

dp^orepoig TTpoeayopevopevov).


;

30

CONTRA

dXXov nX'qv tov vvv avrrjv klveIv fdvrjoiv

KA. To eavrd A0.

§r\pi ye.

OovpEv 13

prjOevra , rrjv dvvapEvrjv avT7)V

dr)

;

klvelv

av rjvnep Tovvopa o

ATIIEOS.

^g Xoyov

navTEg

dfj

eI 6’

12

npoGayopEvopev

;

egti tovto ovrcog exov, apa etc no -

inavdjg dEdslxOai

prj

e%piv tt)v avrr\v ovgl-

'ipvx'rjv

'ijwx'rjv

ravrov ov nal t rjv

npcjrrjv yEVEOiv nal nivrjGtv rtiv te ovtcov nal yEyovorcov

EOopsvG)v

real

ye

6rj

teal

,

dv£(j)dvri

anaav KA. Ovn

navrcov av t&v evavTiuv TOVTOig

;

Ensi-

peTaboXrjg re nal /avrjoEG)g dndorjg alrla

;

dXXd

ltcavd)rara didEtnTai

'ipvx^J

tov nav-

tcjv npEobvrdrrjj yEvopEvrj te apx'Zj mvrjGECog. r

A0. vrjGig,

Ap’ ovv ovx

di

f]

9

ETEpov

14,

ev dXXco ytyvopEvrj nt -

avrd 6e ev avrd) prjdEnoTE napEXOvoa mveloOcu prj(3 ovXolto av Tig apiQ -

6 ev, dEvrepa te nal onoccov dpiOptiv PEIV aVT7]V noXXoGTTJV

TOGOVTO)V GGOpaTOg OVGa OVTCVg ,

peTaboXf)

d'lpvxov

KA.

’0 pOojg.

A0.

’Opdcbg

Ta

15 ,

elprjnoTeg

apa nal nvp'uog aXrjOEGTaTa te nal TEXEUTa-

av elpEv 1

'ipvx'rjv

12.

See Note XXVIII., App.

13.

apa

sensum non

salis

p&v npoTEpav yEyovivai

Itl 'jtoOov/j.ev prj Uavtiq dedelxOat.

num

habet, est enim:

demonstratum esse

,

SfC.

G(o~

JloOovpev praegnantem

quid adhuc desideramus {existiwantes)

—Ast.

We see no necessity for this

explanation of Ast, but would prefer directly connecting 'Kodovpev

with dedetxdai struction.

,

without resorting to any

“Do w e T

ellipsis or

yet feel the want of

its

praegnant con-

being sufficiently

shown,” &c.

here occurs in the usual manner, and with the

usual force which

it

has after verbs containing in themselves the

sense of a negative either expressed or implied, such as those of /orand in such cases it is not to be bidding preventing, want &c. ,

,

rendered by

itself,

;

but regarded as strengthening the quasi denial of

the governing word.

Uodov/zev

may

although a verb of want or desire, 14. See Note XXIX., App. 15. 1.

7ToTikoarrjv.

el/iev.

For remarks on

The common reading

be ranked

in this class,

and,

al-

invariably takes an accusative.

this

word, see Note XXIX., App.

is r/pev,

but as the optative

is clear-


CONTRA ATHEOS. l

iarog rjplv

31

ctipa be, devrepov re nal varepov '^vx'dg dp*

XOVG7]g y apxopevov nara

(jjvaiv.

KA. ’AXrjOeorara pev ovv. A0. M epvrjpeOd ye prjv opoXoyrjGavreg 6ev

ipvxi tyavecrj npeadvrepa ocbparoq ovoa

(bg el

,

ev rolg epnpoo -

3

~°v oebparog eaoiro irpeodvrepa

ipvX^q

KA. Haw pev ovv A0. Tponoc dr) real

real

,

rd

.

.

nal povXrjaeLg nal Xoyiopol nal

i]0r]

2

bo%ai aXrjOelg, empeXeiat re nal pvrjpac, reporepa prjnovg GG)pdro)v nal nXarovg nal fiadovg nal pcbprjg av, e’inep nal

KA.

elrj

yeyovora

ouparog.

'ipvx'rj

’A v ay nip

A0. yAp’ ovv to per a rovro opoXoyetv dvaynalov re ayadebv airiav eivai

'ipvx'tjv

tCjv

,

nal rcov naXbbv nal nancov

nal alcxp&v, dinaioyv re nal adinuv, nal redvrayv tgjv evavtig)v

;

elnep rcbv navroiv ye avrrjv

# rjoopev

airiav

;

KA. Udjg yap

ov

A0.

bioinovoav nal evoinovoav* ev airaoc rolg

•kvx'tiv dr)

;

navrrj ncvovpevoig ptiv ov nal rov ovpavov dvdynrj dcoc nelv <\>avai

KA. T l ly required, elrjpev,

plural.

the

;

prjv

;

we have rj

in

K vpicog

this is

with Ast substituted

a stronger

word than

thority^as an established truth

now

elpev,

which

form being often dropped

—or as

bpQtig.

is

used

in the dual It

means “ by

something which

for

and au-

we may

assert with confidence.’’

2.

See Note XXX., App.

3.

tu)v re

dyaQ&v airiav

cause of the good, and

eivai ipvxyv Kai rtiv nahuv.

fair,

and right.”

It is not,

“ Soul

is

the

however, simply

the efficient cause regarded objectively, but the very subjective their existence, without which they could have no being, whether there was a universe of matter or not. Where soul is not, there can be no harmony, no beauty, no right, no good. And so,

ground of

not only makes

also,

it

own

hell.

4.

ing.”

Without

diouiovcav

it

its

own

there

— evoinovoav

paradise, but

its

own

earth,

is

no discord, no deformity, no

,

“pervading

and

its

evil.

— inhabiting — indwell-


— CONTRA ATHEOS.

32

7

5

A0. Miav.rj nXecovg Avolv

Kptvovpcu.

t£ evepyendog

KA.

,

6

ye

ilev

vtrep o (f) 0)lv arro -

eXarrov prjdev rtOtipev,

irov

rrjg

/cat

X<p66pa dpdcXg etprjKag.

$ aXarrav

real yrjv teal

eari, fiovXeoQai ,

do%a£eiv

opOtig,

dappovGav, <ra/£

£yfi)

ravavria Svvapevrjg ei-epya^eodcu.

A0. Efev. ay££ pev

9

HXetovg

;

,

ovpavov

rat$* avrrjg klvtjoegiv, alg

ovopara

'ipvxr)

e'lpevGpevcjg •

x

oaat tovtcjv %vyyevelg

rj

I3ovXeveg0cu,

,

al P ovaav

picovoav

The general sense

r'd

empeXeloOcu

otconeToOcu,

(j^odovpevrjv

5. 7ivle/ovf.

navra

/car'

dfj

Xvnovpevrjv

GrepyovGav

,

7rd-

/cat

7rpG)rovpyol lavrjGEig, rag

of the passage

is

best preserved by

rendering this word, not many, but more than one. 6.

See Note XXNI., App., on the Platonic doctrine of the

<5vo/v.

evil principle. 7.

ipvxv Travra.

aye/,

antithesis of matter, for

‘fvxv is here used collectively as the

souls, including the spirits of

all

men and

angels (or daipoveg), as well as the Divine soul, which he regards as

The

the principium or fountain of the whole genus.

doctrine, that

even the human soul was older than body, was taught by Plato, yet not in the sense in which

it is

commonly understood.

It

has,

how-

no necessary connexion with his present argument against the

ever,

atheists. 8.

x aL P 0V(jav The sudden change here from the infinitive to the seems made on purpose for variety. Xalpovoav, however, ‘

participle if

any should choose so

to regard

it,

ovopara, egti (to) ipvxyv

may be The

accusative before these infinitives. '

x a LP 0VGav

taken with ipvxyv as the

order would be thus

XvTrovpevyv

,

k.

t.

X.

:

alg

povXeadai

GKOTTELodai, K. T. X. 9.

connect with klvjigeoiv alg above. working motions,” viz., those of soul

Tcuccug,

“first

c Kon tied a/, &c.

A evrepovpyovg

av,

IIpiorovpyol KivrjGEig ,

—such

as povXecdat

“second working motions,”

cor-

responding to order second of motion described some ways back “ second causes,” or “ motions of matter produced by impulse” (ef

dXXov

Fig

dXXo peraSoXy).

made page

27, line 16,

The author has

and also 30,

in

view the

classification

we

believe to be

This

line 15.

the true sense of the passage, but a glance at the position of the participles

and

infinitives

although

may

not have been intended,

true.

it

It will

above suggests another is

be seen that these participles

division, which,

yet most important and

all

express feelings of the


,

CONTRA ATHEOS. devrepovpyovg av

rrapaXapdavovaat

ayovoi iravra elg av^rjatv nai ovyupiocv

rovrotg eiropevag

teal

pvrrjrag Kovcporrjrag

'ipvx'rj

ovoa

avorrjpov

,

6/o0d

^epporrjrag,

yXvKv

,

/cat

Tuttpov

,

exec

teal *

j

8a-

Xevnov nal

/cat Tract iv olg

alel 'deov,

10

deog

avota 6e

ravra av ravavrta rovrotg arrepya^erat.

ravra ovrcog ex eiV

rtOcbpev

'ipvi-eig

i

evdatpova iratdaytvyel iravra

/cat 7

dtanpioLv

teal

XP Mpevrj, vovv pev irpooXapbavovoa

%vyyevopevrj

7TG)g

/sat

,

coopdrojv,

KLvr\ceiq

aicXrjpbv Kal paXattov

,

peXav

tyQioiv,

33

\

V ETl btora^opev

el

erepejg

;

KA. 0 vdapeog. A0. ndrepoi/

1

moral nature, while the part of the soul,

tial

may,

infinitives

Now the

of the intellect.

yevog eynpareg ovpavol)

oi’V dz) 'ipvx'ijg

denote the motions or exercises

passions or feelings being the most essen-

and that which excites the

intellect to action,

in respect to the latter, be styled npuTovpyol

( first

working ),

just as the exercises of soul generally are npurovpyol, or first work -

ing

when compared with ,

the secondary motions of matter. IT apaX“ taking along with themselves (as co-operatives or

auxiliaries)

the devrepovpyovg KtvrjGELg copdrov,” namely, second

,

apSavovacu

causes or the laws of nature. ,

10

.

nal

7r

dav

olg.

7

0 ig,

although neuter, refers to the above re-

cited devrepovpyovg Kivijoeig of matter.

K al>

if

judged according to

the English idiom, would be redundant as a connective.

however, retain is to

place as an intensive particle.

its

be rendered as

omnibus

si

may,

It

Ka/' tcugiv olg

So Cornarius regards it quibus Or it may be taken in

olg Kal tzclglv.

anima, quee Dea est utitur &c. ,

,

the order of the words, only regarding Kal as intensive instead of is not additional, but only a collective term mentioned before “ And all which,” or “ even all (those second working motions) which the soul using itself being Divine, and taking along with it that Divine thing vovg rightly and happily guides all things but when conversant with folly, it ever

connective, so that rraGcv

for all the things

— —

;

doeth the contrary,” &c.

Qeog here, according to a

common

Pla-

tonic usage, is equivalent to tielog. 11.

rrorepov ovv dq Tpvxrjg yevog

mentioned), do

one wise and qualities'!”

we

full

,

“which of the two

souls (lately

say, has the control of the heavens, &c.

—the

of virtue, or the one that hath neither of these


CONTRA ATHEOS.

34

cal yrjg nai irdarjg rrjg

i

vcpov

apsrrjg nXrjpEg

teal

,

nepiodov yeyovsvcu (pdpEV ?j

;

IIg5$*

to 0po*

to prjdETEpd Kenrrjpsvov

QovXegOe ovv npog ravra (1j6e GTTOfcpivGjpedG

KA.

;

;

;

;

A0. E l pkv, gj ftavpaoLe, (pcbpEv, rj £vpndoa ovpavov odog dpa nal (popd nal tgjv ev dvreb ovtgjv anavruv, vov fuvrjo el nal

T£pL<popa

l

7

Kdi Xoytopolg opotdv (pvotv

*

%vyy£V(bg epxsrai, djjXov

(bg rrjv

apLorrjv

nai

'ipvx'fjv

(pdriov

ETUpE^ELGdaL TOV HOGpOV TTdVTOg Kdt dyELV dVTOV TT\V TOL,

dVT7]V ddbv EKELV7JV.

KA,

’OpOtbg.

A0. E l 6e pdviitcbg te Kdt drdicrGjg spiral, ttjv icainjv. KA. Kdt rdvra opOibg. A0. T evd ovv 6rj vov KLvrjGig (pvotv e^el tovto rjdrj xa ~ ;

XeTTOV,

dco

6rj

GJ

(piXot^ EpGJTrjpa

eItTELV EpcjjpOVGJg.

Kdt kps rrjg dironpiGEGjg vplv dtimtov tgvvv npoG -

XapddvELv

13 .

KA. Ev A0.

dUOKpiVOpEVOV

XsyELg.

Mt) tolvvv e% EVdvriag olov Elg rjXiov

14

dnobXEirov-

TEg vvtcra ev pEG7]p6pta knayopEVot 7TOLr]O(bpE0a rrjv airo,

,

KpLGLV

,

Gjg

VOVV

yvGJoopEVOL inavcbg

novTdg

^Vl^TOLg OppdGLV O'lpOpEVOL TE Kdt

TCOTE •

npog ds shidva rov kpGJTGjpsvov

{3Xe-

&<7(j)dX,£OTepov opdv.

KA. Ucbg hkysig A0. T Hi npooEOME ;

12.

N ov

13.

7rpocrhapSaveLv

klvt](J£l

vovg

/uvrjGEL

Kal nspL^opa

.

15 ,

tgjv ds/ca ehelvgjv kl-

See Note XXXII., App.

here has nearly the sense of !;vXXap6aveiv, “to

take part with, to assist you in the answer.” 14. e% kvavriag olov elg fyliov.

Compare with

in the sixth

book of the Republic, intended to

the ayaOov

also, the

;

this the similitudes

illustrate the idea of

comparison of the dark cave

in the

beginning

of the seventh book, and the representation of the demeanour of those who, after coming out of directly at the sun, without

its

obscurity, are supposed to look

making use of such helps as are

furnish-

ed by the reflections of mirrors and of water. 7 “ Let us take as an image (since 15. H* TcpooeoiKE klvtjgel vovg.


:

CONTRA ATHEOS. elnova Xabatpev

vfjoecov tt)v

rrjv duoKpiocv

kolvxi

zjv

35

ovvavapvr]oQetg vplv iyu),

Tcoi'rjoopai.

KA. KdXXiOTa av Xeyoig. A0. Me livrjfieOa tolvvv* Toys r oaovrov /

tcov dnavTOJv

tu pev tuveladat rd ,

tie

j

rtiv tots etc, oti

ueveiv eQepev

.

2

KA. NaL A0. Ttiv 6’ av tuvovpsvmf Td pev ev Oat Ta 6 ev ttXelogl epepopeva.

evl tottg) tuvelo

y

,

KA. *E art TavTa.

T ovtolv

A0.

1 toZv Ktvrjoeotv tt)v ev evl (pepopevrjv

6rj

del rrepL ye ti peoov avaytcr) tuveloOai tgjv evTopvcjv ov -

oav

pipirjpd Ti KVK,X(i)V, slva'i TE aVTT]V T%j

7ravTG)g (bg

dvvaTdv

KA.

Xeyeig

A0. To

VOX) TtEpi66(xX

oitcELOTaTrjv te teat opotav. ;

TavTa drjnov teal cooavTug teal ev tgj avKept Ta avTa teal npog Ta avTa tcal eva Xoyov teal

to), teal

/card

y

,

ptav

Tat-iv

TOV

tavEloOai XeyovTeg vovv ttjv te ev evl

apcj)(i)

,

(pspopsvrjv KivrjGiv, ocpaipag

we cannot

,

evTopvov aTTEinaopeva 8

(popalg,

look upon vovg directly with our mortal vision) that one

of the ten motions to which

These motions are

mind

or reason bears a resemblance.”

called seven in the similar place of the Timaeus,

page 34, A. The ancient writers, when treating of physics, all varied in the enumeration, and sometimes the same writer varies from himself,

as Plato does in this, and in the passage of the Timaeus re-

ferred to.

tovtolv

1.

The

toZv KLvrjoeoiv.

drj

Attic connects masculine ad-

jectives and pronouns in the dual, with feminine nouns

however, which rolv ev

made

hi

is

not universal.

(pspophotv

:

also,

The common

—a

rule,

reading here has

below, ovo&v instead of ovaav.

We have

the corrections on the authority of Eusebius, Ficinus, Ste

phanus, and the Cod. Voss., besides being alsolutely required by the exigentia 2.

loci.

to belongs to vovv Kiveiodatj several lines below.

3. an eiKacTfieva is neuter, because it refers both to vovv and Kivrjmv. The order of this rather complicated sentence would be as follows 'kiyovTEQ (to) vovv rrjv te ev hi (pepophyv Kivrjatv (d/Kporepa) arret,

Kaopeva teal

h

(popatg

hropvov

tgj avrfi, teal

ccpatpac, kiveIgQcli

n epi, &c.

.

.

.

ovtc

Kara ravra

teal (orravreo^

dv tcote (pavetpev &c. ,

That


a

CONTRA ATHEOS.

36

gvk av nore (pavelpev

tyavkot, drjpcovpyol

Aoym naXCdv

el

KOVCJV.

KA.

’O pdorara Xeyeig.

A0. Ovkovv av fj y£4 prjdsTTors^cooavrcjg, prjde fcard r avrd prjdi av ravrcp prjds rtepl ravrd prjds ttpog ravrd (pepopevrj, it]6 ev Kocrpcp, prjd’ ev ra^ei, prjde ev nvi Aoyo) ,

,

,

f.

avotag av dnao7]g

Kcvrjcug,

KA.

E??7

all

is

5 xaXeirbv ovdev etc diapprjdrjv

dr)

eiretdri 'ipvx'rj

which

gvyyavrjg.

yap av dXrideorara.

A0. Nvv

in

elr]

pev eonv

rj

here styled motion in

nepcayovoa one, is not to

It is

it.

term, the opposite of motion in

accompanied by change of

rfjv de

6

it

would not

rather to be taken as a general

many

place.

,

be regarded as the same,

respects, with the motion of a sphere, otherwise

be said to be likened to

elrtelv , cog,

rjplv rcavra

,

Kivyaiq ev no^oiq, or motion

This, then, would be that higher

species of motion, which, without change in the cause, produces

motion to

it

remaining wholly in one, and is theremotion of a sphere, »which of all others presents

in other things, itself

fore likened to the

the best similitude.

It is

the tenth of the above-mentioned

enumeration, or the avroKivyaiq of soul. 4.

ovkovv av

5.

diapfiydyv.

7]

See Note XXXIII., App.

ye.

The way

great question, whether

is

it is

now prepared

for

answering clearly the

the good or the evil soul which governs

the universe. 6.

T7jv

de ovpavov

common

the

7r epi<f)opav.

reading ryv

de.

Ast here would substitute ryv ye for a change the pev preceding with all that follows, made dependant

By such

would be left alone, and tyareov, upon dq. In which case it must be taken as the proposition which the speaker thinks can now be so clearly affirmed all from en etdy to rcavra inclusive, being brought in by way of parenthesis as a preamble to the sentiment. The order in that case would be thus

:

vv v

In

enetdy 'ipvxy pev eartv y neptdyovaa yptv ndvra, x a ^en ov ovdev eirelv dq tyareov ryv ye ovpavov nept(f)opdv, &c\, “but now, since drj,

it is

soul that directs

all

culty in asserting, that

things for us, there

we must

is

no longer any

diffi-

say, that soul, &c., either the best

soul or the contrary, conducts the revolutions, at

least,

of the

This proposition, however, besides being a mere unmeaning repetition of the first clause, had been clearly asserted be-

heavens.”

fore.

We

would, therefore, prefer the

common

reading (ryv

de),

by


CONTRA ATHEOS.

37

ovoavov neptcjyopdv e% dvdytcrjg neptayeLv cbareov empeXovpevrjv nai tcoapovoav fyroi tt\v apLorrjv

rtav

T

KA.

which <

pareov

and

£2

aXXd

give,

etc

ye tCjv vvv

referred directly to

is

ertetdr]

ovd oatov

elprjpevcov,

this part of the sentence, with its principal or ,

rfjv evav-

'ipvx'rjv, rj

governing word

by the connective force of pev

leaving uq without any dependant clause expressed

de,

so that

;

the whole sentence might be regarded as unfinished or designedly

more

abrupt, for the purpose of introducing with

answer This is no uncommon device in the Platonic writings, by which the most important truths are evolved from the person with whom Socrates

of Clinias, in which the proposition designed

or the chief speaker

is

effect the

brought out.

conversing; thus furnishing a fine

is

illustra-

which Socrates so gloried as his The whole passage, in accordance with this view,

tion of that maieutical process in

peculiar method.

may

be thus presented

:

vvv

eneidr/

dr/,

pvxv pev egtiv

i

nepidyovaa

r/

r/plv 7r dvra, tt/v de

ovpavov nept(j)opdv Qclteov kg dvdyKijg ijjvxyv

TTjv doL(jT7]v

kvavTiav eTTLpeXovpevTjv nal Koopovcrav nepidyeiv ,

rj

Xaherrov ovdev

ttjv

en

dcapprjdrjv eirzelv , d)g

now, since soul (as had been shown) and since,

also,

we

is

—KA. that

T

£2

“But

&c.

give,

which guides

tjtul

things,

all

are compelled (from this premise) to say that

therefore soul, either the best soul or the contrary, carefully and orderly conducts the revolution of the heavens, there

any

the apodosis to wf, which had

no longer

is

— he would have been suspended — “that

difficulty in affirming clearly that”

said, as the

it is

soul which doeth this,” and that

we

the best

are shut up to this conclusion

;

but at this point Clinias takes the proposition out of his mouth, and impatiently announces

it

in his

of so long a preamble) (a/lAa), but

impious

to affirm

guides &c. ,

otherwise

:

w

give,

( there

from what has been said ) (

than that the soul which hath

is finally

often, like yap, refers to

no need

would be

all

virtue

for

something supposed

to pass rapidly

through the mind of the speaker, although not expressed case, in the negative

is it

what seemed to him expressed by the word dAAd,

This impatience of Clinias,

the inevitable conclusion,

which

own words

—as

in this

words we have supplied before dXkd, or some-

The great objection to Ast’s substitution of ye makes the whole proposition merely a repetition of

thing equivalent. for de

is,

that

it

what had been clearly affirmed before, and does not prepare the way answer of Clinias.

naturally for the abrupt

D


CONTRA ATHEOS.

88 .

aXXo)g "Xe^eiv

n aoav

rj

dperijv e%ovoav

piav

'ipvx'tjv

nAe>

rj

ovg neptayetv ojvra.

A0. K aXXtora, ch KA eivta, vmpiovoag de npoovnanovoov ert.

KA. To

uolov

A0. "HA lov

rolg Aoyoig

/cal

oeX'fjvrjvf

nal rd

dXXa dorpa

,

prjv

,

elnep

;

;

A0. Uepl evog 8 rjplv

rode

;

ipvXV neptayet navra dp' ov nal ev eKaorov

KA. T t

noirjocbpeOa

drj

A oy ovg,

ol nal enl

navra

dorpa dpporrovreg (pavovvrai.

KA. T ivog; f

HAA>v nag avOpunog otipa 9 pev opa, tyvxrp* de ovdeig ovde yap aXXov odoparog ovdevog ovre %£)V10 rog ovre anodvrjofcovrog rcbv £g)G)v dAAd eXnlg 7roAAf/ ronapanav to yevog rjplv rovro avaioOrjrov ndoaig ralg

A0.

rov cojparog 7.

"H 7uov nal

8.

IIep4

aloOrjoeoi, nepinetyvnevai,

'

vorjrov

d’ elvat.

See Note XXXIV., App.

cE’krjvrjv.

hog.

1

Supply d GTpov, which, in Greek,

is

often used for

the sun and planets, as well as the fixed stars. 9. "H/l lov 7r dg dvOpuTcog cdpa pev opp, &c. Compare the wellknown passage Xen., Memorabilia, iv., c. 3, 14. 10. hlnlg. This word in Greek has a much larger signification than hope in English. It means here, and in many other places,

expectation , or, rather,

verb 11.

ropai.

dvalodrjrov

simply, “

is

ground of expectation or ,

TrspiTceQvKEvai.

So, also, the

belief.

This should be rendered not

not by nature an object of perception,” but rather, that

“it is so in consequence of being above the nature of the sense,”

Such is the force of nepl. Ast would amend as usual, and read TzepnretyvKhcu votjtov povov. vti 6%, &c., placing a comma after aioOrjGEOL rejecting elvat and connecting TTEpuz£(j)VKEvaL with votjtov, There is, however, no need of this. UcptnetyvKhai bears more naturally upon dvatGdijTov aiGdrjGEGt,, or, y Eivat, which Ast wholly rerather, upon aiGdrjGEov understood. See Note XXIV., jects, is far better adapted to the word votjtov. App., on the difference between hpl and the other substantive verbs, such as ylyvopai and (j)vco when used with philosophical correctness. Such an expression as TrepLTrecpvKevai votjtov would be at war with being of a higher order of essence.

,

,

,


-

CONTRA ATHEOS. v<p

pcovcp

nal

dr]

diavorjfian

18

39 avrov n£pi to

hadcoptEV

tolovSe.

KA. 170^ A0. "HA cov

;

elnep

ay el

'ipvx'rj,

rptcdv avrrjv ev

Xeyovreq

dpav, cxedov ova dnoTEV^optEOa.

KA. T lvg)v A0. '£lg fj evovoa 13 evroq ;

ocoptaTL,

fjplv

rep nEpupspEL rovrep (paivoptEvep

navTrj SiafcopiL^EL to tolovtov naOdnep fjpag ,

ndvTT] nepKpepei,

'ipvx'fj

*

nap

rj

noOev e^coOev Gcopa avTT]

rj

Xoyog egtl tlvoov

,

ovoa

,

ExovGa 6e dvvdptEtg aXkag Tivag vnEpba’khovoag davfiaTi

,

nopicapevr] nvpog

n\

1)6eI fica GcofjiaTL otipia

(

nodrjyEL.

KA.

Tivog aepog •

fj

,

cog

TpLTOV avr?) ,

'ipi/if]

ocoptaTog

1*

Nat'

A0. Tovro pLEV avdyurp tovtcov ev y£ tl dp&oav 'ipvx.fjv navTa StayEiv avTov 6fj aptEcvov 15 TavTrpv ttjv ipvxfl v sIte .

ev appcaoiv

some of the

,

^ovGa

1

fjpriv

tjXlov ayEi (pedg Tolg anaotv, elt

best-established Platonic distinctions, although

perhaps be used by the author in a careless manner.

it

might

Uepi gives

word the sense of superiority, in the same way as in n epleifu and irepiyiyvopcu. The whole may be thus freely rendered “ We have great reason for believing that this whole genus, being imperceptible to all the senses of the body, is above (the nature of) the senses, or is by nature above the senses, and is peculiarly an obthis

:

ject of intelligence

( votjtov

dvai).

Let us, therefore, apprehend by

mind alone,” &c. 12.

tion

For a most philosophical and acute discriminabetween vovg and bidvoia, vorjpa and dLavorjpa, vorjeng and dia diavorjpcLTi.

They seem

see the Republic, close of the sixth book.

vorjcig ,

used here

for the

sake of amplification, and with

little

to be

apparent

dif-

ference of meaning between vorjpa and dtavorjpa. 13. dig

rj

kvovaa.

14. nodrjyec.

As

See Note XXXV., App. the second

ing, so this purely spiritual

was represented

as impelling or push-

un embodied influence

is

more properly

described as guiding monstrans viam. ,

15. if,

avrov dp upstvov.

with Stephanus, 1.

Iv

we

appamv ex ov(ja

The

better part of it,” namely, this soul ;

read to apetvov, sed queers. '

See Note XXXVI., App.


;

40

CONTRA ATHEOS.

3

egudev, eld

dvSpa

7

.

onojg* eld on?], deov rjyelodcu ’

XP £ ^ V navra

;

/

KA. N aC, rov ye nov

enl to eo^a-ov acpiypevov

fir]

dvotag.

A0. "A orpo)v Se

Sr]

nipt ndvroyv nal oeXrjvrjg evtavrCov ,

re nal prjvtiv, nal naocov dpdbv nepi

epovpev

rov avrov tovtov dg

f]

rlva aXkov Xoyov

,

eneiSr] 'ipvx'd

,

jttev rj

'ipvxal

navTGJv tovtgiv alrtat ecjxzvrjoav dyadal Se ndoo.v dperrjv, ,

'deovg

avrag elvac

ovra, noopovoi 2.

oncog,

(jjrjoopev

elre ev

navra ovpavov

quomodo

;

bnrj ,

terpret the term by our

,

own

10.

o&paoLV evovoat

elre onrj re teal oncog

qua parte,

See Remarks, page 33,

delov.

;

iS-eov

We

here

must

is

;

,

%cba eld’*

equivalent to

not, at all events, in-

theology, which attaches to Deity and

Divinity the highest sense of an uncreated intelligence.

In the

Greek usage, as we have seen, the word includes all above man, and Plato even applies it to the daipoveg. Whatever excellences (and they are 3. KA. N ai, rov ye nov prj. certainly of a very high kind) this treatise on laws may possess, it is

undoubtedly, as a dialogue, inferior to

of dramatic

although, perhaps,

it

trast their simplicity

was one

of the others in point

much men

of straw

part of the author’s design to con-

and unreasoning

acuteness of the chief speaker.

faith

with the philosophical

They seem, however,

sent too readily, and sometimes before their

many

Clinias and Megillus are too

skill.

we can

to us, to as-

well suppose from

characters, as here delineated, that they fairly understand

some of the

propositions presented.

While involved in these conall managed by one

tinuous abstract discussions, with the argument person,

we would

contests, of

gladly find relief in one of those vigorous logical

which

we have

so fine a specimen in the Gorgias, as

exhibited in the long-protracted struggle of the unprincipled yet bold Callicles against the

command.

most powerful reasoning that Socrates could

In respect to dramatic excellence, the Gorgias, Phsedon,

and Protagoras are unrivalled by any similar productions of ancient modern times. The common reading is eld bong, 4. eld bong ravra opoloyeZ. which seems to have been introduced from the two preceding examples of that word. We have not hesitated to follow Boeck in “We will say that reading eld\ Ast would substitute ecO bang. they are Gods, whether being in bodies, and being animated, they

or

'

1


)

CONTRA ATHEOS.

41

bong ravra dpoXoyel, vnopevsi pi) fte&v elvcll nXrjprj navra KA. 0 vk, ear tv ovrcog, co give, napacbpovcdv 5 ovdetg. A0. Tgj pev TOivvv pr) vopi^ovn dsovg ev rep npooOev ;

%povcp, 6

MeytXXe re aal KXetvta einovreg opovg 7 anaX-

co

,

XarrcopeOa

.

order the whole Heaven, or in whatever

and then

’), or, in ( eld

things adhere (to the opinion) that

The

Divine powers'?”

from the

way and manner it may be who admits these

the second place, can any one all

things are not

last clause is a

and therefore well introduced by

first,

used when the conclusion

inferential particle,

expressed that any one should think

prise

is

It is

on this account generally, as

Aristophanes, Acharn., 311

ravra epepaveog

sometimes

in

ijdrj

elra,

it

is

an

could be otherwise.

in the present case, ;

brought in

as, for

exam-

roApag Aeyeiv

drj

;

sir’

kyu gov dpEiaopai

the very beginning of the sentence rovrov

which

:

rzpbg rjpdg

sir, el diKata,

of Gods or

so plain, that sur-

is

abruptly and interrogatively without any connective ple,

full

consequence or inference

;

:

y

elttelv

avr kxpyv. Acharn., 561.

It is

easy to see

how much more force and

vividness

is

given to the

way, than by the tame reading which Ast proposes. “ What else can we do, but to say It may be thus paraphrased that they are Gods and then, if this is admitted, who will have any passage

in this

:

;

difficulty

with the necessary conclusion (a fortiori

everywhere!”

'Ynopevec

lish phrase, “will

may be

any one stick

that they are

well rendered by the vulgar Eng-

to it!” that

is,

obstinately persevere

This declaration, that “ all things are full of Gods,” was a saying of Thales, and is thus referred to by Aristotle, De Anima, lib. i., 8 Kal kv rep ofap de nvtg 'ijjvxqv pepixOat tyaoCv, oOev in the denial!

:

loog Kal Qa’Afjg rtdvra

rzAripr] '&ecjv

elvai

cpridrj.

Compare,

De Mundo, ascribed by some to Aristotle, and published among his works, ch. vi. KaOoAov de, onsp kv treatise

:

dppan

vr/rrjg,

kv

yyspcjv

— rovro

5.

de rjvioxog, kv ttoAel de

NOMOS,

also, the

generally vrjl

Kvdep -

kv orparoTredep d2

i9ebg kv Koapep.

7r apatypovtiv.

“ Beside one’s self,”

deranged.

This does not refer to time absolutely, XP° VCJ but to the state of the argument. 6.

kv rep rpoedev

7.

EiTzovreg opovg.

“Imposing terms,”

D

2

viz.,

those that follow.


CONTRA ATHEOS.

42

KA. T ivag V

A0.

H

;

diddonsLV rjpdg

dog ov/c opOCog

*pvXV v ydveoiv anavTCOv elvat tovtoov igWEnopeva elnopev yeiv

rov

rj

,

Xeyopev, Tidepevoi

ToXka orcooa dvvapevov peXnov Xe-

TTpdoTrjv , /cal prj

rjpdov, rjp.lv ttelOeoOcu , /cat

deovg rjyovpevov

%xjv

ovv elte hcavoog

ettlXoltcov filov. opdopev

Elg

rolg ovx

rjdrj

bjyovpevocg tieovg slprj/capev dog elol deol, elte emdeCog.

KA.

f/

H /clota ye

gsvs, ndvrcov 8 emdeCog.

do

,

A0. Tovroig pev roivvv

rjplv

to Xoycov* riXog ex^tgo

rov 6e rjyovpEVOv pkv dsovg elveu

rovg dvOpcojTLveov irpayparcov (pdopEv , otl

drj,

to

rrpdg

i;

pev

vp<pVTOv

ayel Tipav

avOpboTTGOV /cal adi/cGov tvxcll

connect with

7T(1vtg)v,

9.

to Xoyov reTiog exero.

prj (jopovrl^Eiv

13

/cal

and to t&v

£2

vopt^Etv Eivai

Se av-

apiore

tj'kigtu, ye.

‘dr/ptov, for

A

12

ti-T/pia,

10.

See Note XXXVII., App.

11.

7r apapvOrjTeov.

“We

/ca/cdov

6e

pev

very strong negative.

Equivalent to

rd

,

oi

c

;

T

Idea /cal drjpoota dXrjOeia

Compare to loycov with rd tuv hanovuv, for oi 497

11

$£ovg, ovyyevEid rig tocog oe deia

rjyyj

8.

,

,

tt apapvOrjreov.

10

Xoyoi reTiog exeroaav.

didnovoi, Soph., Philoct.,

Plat., Republic, viii., 563, c.

must give him

also a

word of exhorta-

tion.” 12.

T

upiGTe

£2

istence of Gods,” that

extent

is

feeling

(

(

$ eovg. “That you believe in the ex“ as far as the fact of your belief to that

oti pev riyy

concerned,

Gvyyeveid

is,

we may

Tig),

&eia ), leads you,” &c.

say, that a certain kindred or innate

imparted by or derived from the Divinity

the human

—a Divine

may mean what

Or, cvyyeveia deia

losopher elsewhere styles the Divine part affinity or

jof

kinsmanship

in

— as we style conscience

the immediate representative of the Divine nature in the soul.

the phi-

man, or the Divine

human

and vopi^eiv, “ a supposed to be suffi-

gvptyvTov should be connected with Tipav

natural honouring,” &c., which, however,

is

ciently rendered by acknowledging their existence, like Epicurus

and his followers, who pretended greatly to magnify and honour the Gods, when they assigned them a life of perfect repose, extra mundum, Semoti ah rebus nostris longeque sejuncti. 13. lic

Tvxai.

and private

471, A.

The

life.”

fortunes of wicked and unjust men, both in pub-

Compare the speech

of Polus in the Gorgias,


CONTRA ATHEOS. EvdaipovEg, dogcug

ovtt

1

*

43

dXX

de Evdaipovi^d\iEvai ocpodpa

ovu EppiEXtig ayovoi oe rtpog aoebsiav ev te [lovoaig

ovic

,

dpdcog vpvovpsvai

reXog

7rpog

15

afia nai

ev iravroioig Xoyotg.

nai

i)

dvooiovg avOpcjirovg optiv kXQovrag 1

locvg

yrj-

pacovg, naidag naidcov naraXcnovrag ev ripiaig ralg psyla-

Taig raparry ravvv ev anaoi rovroig idG)v* ,

aloOopLEVog ,

dt

iroXXtiv doE6rjjJidTG)v nai dsiv&v yEVOfxsvcjv not, 14

.

1

anor]g

navrairaGiv avrog avrdTtrr\g TrpoorvxGov

teal

r\

rj

avrd

di

For the common reading dogai, we read, with almost all the doijaig, which is not only necessary to the sense, but

commentators,

required as the antithesis of alyOela.

v

’EppeXug, “ considerately or,

derly, methodically, with a proportionate regard to all the circum-

stances of the case.” 15

.

This was one of the charges made against the

vpvovpsvai.

poets in the third book of the Republic noLoi nanug Tieyovoi rzepi

evdalpoveg de reoXko'i

charge

we

is

call the

chi,

iii.,

made by

ug apa nai noir/ral nai XoyouvOpdrov rd peyicra, on eiaiv ddinoi pev :

Repub., 392, A.

The same

the prophet against the Israelites.

“And now

*

dlnaioi 61 aOXioi.

proud happy, yea, those who do iniquity are exalted .”

15

.

On

Mala-

the words evdalpoveg evdaipovi&pevai, see Note

XXXVIII., App. 1

.

2.

7rpog

rehog dvooiovg.

See Note XXXIX., App.

rapdrry ravvv ev dnaoi rovroig iddv.

places a

comma

In this state,

it

The common reading

and connects idiov with what follows. has given a good deal of trouble to some of the comafter rovroig,

The difficulty, however, may be removed, as we think, by the reading adopted, although the location of the word would be rather unusual. Tapdrry Idcov is equivalent to mentators, especially to Ast.

rapdrry %cjv,

idelv,

“you

“happening

freely rendered

:

are troubled at the sight.”

“ Or

Xoronryg npoorv-

The whole may be thus when beholding men growing old, who con-

to be

an eyewitness.”

tinue unholy even to the end of life, leaving children and children’s children in the highest honours, you are troubled at the sight

when hearing by

;

or,

the ear, or happening to be an eyewitness of the

impious and dreadful deeds which have occurred

in

the lives of cer-

you yet behold them, by reason of these very crimes, advancing from a low condition to the highest power, then it is evident that you blame,” &c. Some editions omit opdg altogether as tain persons,

redundant; but by the disposition only admissible, but necessary.

we have made

of

Ldcov, it is #

not


3

CONTRA ATHEOS.

44

5

ravra dpdg

etc

dcptnopsvovg

ofUKp&v

Tvpavvldag re nal ra psytOTA

slg

tots 6ia navTa toiclvtcl 6rjXog

el

uipcfrsoOaL j

7

usv

tieovg, cog

ah Zovg

ovk av* sOsXcov

ovTag tgjv toiovtcov did %vyykvstav ,

dyopsvog 6s vito Tivog akoyiag apa, nal

ov dvvapsvog dvoxepaZvetv tieovg, slg tovto vvv to nddog 9

sXrjXvdag, coot slvat psv donelv avTOvg tcov 6s avOpconi,

vcov naTacppovslv nal apsXsZv npaypaTCOv. tva ovv prj ent 6

psZ^ov sXO'O ooi iraOog rrpbg aosbsiav to vvv rrapov 66ypa,

aXX sav 9

olov dnodionopnrjoaoOaL* Xoyoig avTO npoo-

Ticog

ibv yevcbpeOa dvvaTOt 3.

A

drjhog It

say

peptybpevog.

dfj’hog el

did Zvyyiveiav

when

as to verbs,

9

tov

s^rjg

peculiar Graecism, equivalent to drjlov eotl oe

would be good Greek, and perhaps

fie/MpEodcu.

4.

TreipcbpeOa, ovvd'ipavTeg

,

ovk.

dv eOeXov.

dv

is

still

more

Attic, to

joined to participles as well

the participle can be resolved into a subordinate

“When

you would not be willing, if you followed that See Remarks on £vyyevsia ( 12 ), page 42. 5. dvoxepaivELv. A most significant term, although not easily transferred to the English. It means, literally, to disrelish that is (in this connexion), “to get rid of the innate moral sense or taste spoken of above, under the term ^vyyEveiaV Or it may refer to the wholesome prejudices mentioned in note on 8 3. 6 'izdQog. Some would reject this word as having crept in as a clause.

natural feeling.”

,

,

.

repetition of the nddog above.

It

may, however, be taken as

in ap-

position with to vvv napov doy/ua. 7.

dlK

kdv.

This place

may be

freed

from

its difficulties

if

we

read olov te regard y understood as subjunctive to kav, and refer ysvdpeda to Iva, instead of kdv , as is generally done. Ordo, Iva ovv ,

py kldy oaodai

possible)

8

.

this 9.

.

.

.

.

.

.

akXJ ( kav nog olov 7r

eipdpEOa,

we may

&c

be able, &c.

dTvodtoTro/iTTjGadai.

On

yevdpeQa dvvarol dnodcono/inr]-

y) Iva

r’

“ That .

.

it

let

may

not increase, but that

(if

us try.”

the peculiar force and significance of

remarkable word, see Note XL., App. owd^avreg. “ Having connected our next argument with that

which we so thoroughly (did) concluded (diETrEpavdpeda) against the man, who did not hold that there were Gods.” c5 is to be referred to die7rEpavd/j.£da, although in the dative by the attraction of ovv in ovvdtyfLVTEg.

Connect 7TELpdpsOa with Tpoaxpr/oaodai.

deavour to use as an additional argument.”

“ Let us en-


45

CONTRA ATHEOS.

rov ronapanav ovx rjyovpevov tieovg e% dp diSTTEpavdpeda, rovrcp ravvv npoaxp^ciodai. av d’, w

\dyov, \r]g

irpog

Gi

K Xelvlcl

re

MeycXXe, vnep rov veov naOdirep ev rolg

teal

epirpoadev dnoftpevopevot, ScaSex^aOe

Siadcdd)

ejanep vvv

rolg Xoyoig, eyd) acpcpv

ep,'7TiiTT'Q

av Se

*

n

SvanoXov

Srj

Set-dpevog

10 rov norap^ov.

Xey eig nal av ovro) ravra Spa notrjaopev re rjpelg elg to Svvarov d Xeyeig. MEr. ’A/l/l’ ovSev ratf av lacog 11 elr\ x^^tcov evdell-aa-

KA.

’OpOtig

*

Oai rovro ye (bg erupeXelg apinptiv elal deot ovx V TT0V V tgjv peyedei Sia<pep6vrG)v. tjicovov yap ttov real Tcaprjv rolg ,

There

10. 6ia6i6C) rov norapov.

flood mentioned, 21 (14) dcadaLveiv.

In that place

:

KaOdnep it

was

is el

yet an allusion to the strong tt

orapov r/pdg tdec rpelg ovrag

and profound the depths of which

figurative of the dark

argument respecting self-motion ( avTOKivr/Gig ), had to be so carefully sounded by the Athenian before the others could venture to follow’ him. Here there is an allusion to a like difficult argument soon to follow, respecting a special Providence.

A lafhSti is Attic future for diadidaGu. 11. akV ovdev ratf uv Iggh;. The common reading gives this to the Athenian. The words r/novov and napr/v below, show beyond doubt, that

it

accommodate some ancient Athenian,

There

belongs to Megillus.

various readings, but they have

rolg vvv

dr/

the argument by which

all

error,

which gave

keyopevoig, “just it

are,

it

is true,

several

evidently arisen from a desire to

was shown

now

that

it

this

passage to the

spoken,” referring to

was

the best soul

(ijjvxv

which moved and guided the heavens and the earth. What said reminds us of the speech of Clinias, 4 (3). Here, as well

dpcGTr/) is

as in that place, surprise

is

expressed that

it

should be thought ne-

cessary to resort to laboured and recondite arguments to prove so plain a thing as the doctrine of a special Providence.

Clinias says, “ and we, as far as

us.”

“ But

And it

Do

this,” tell

then Megillus, the simple-minded Spartan, breaks

in,

could not be any very

possible, will

difficult affair to

the position just proved, namely, that

moved, &c., they, say, leap at

do what you

is

it

was

show,” &c.

From

the best soul that

in their simplicity, directly infer, or, as

we might

once to the truth of a special Providence, although the

Athenian or Socrates, having

in

view more stubborn disputants,

wishes to enter more minutely into the argument.


46

CONTRA ATHEOS.

vvv

drj

Xeyopevotg,

(bg

dyadot ye ovreg rcdaav aper^v i rjv

navrcov empeXetav olKetorarrjv avrcbv ovoav

tC)V

nett-

rrjvrat.

KA. Kcu ocpodpa ye 12 eirrjuovov. A0. To pera tovto tolvvv notv^j

ovve^erd^G)pev,

13

rtva

Xeyovreg aperijv avrtbv, opoXoyovpev avrovg ayaOovg vat.

ra

(f)epe ,

6’

to aocppovelv vovv re ,

evavrta tcantag ,

el-

nertTijoOai, fyapev dperrjg,

;

KA. Qapev. A0.

T t de

;

dperr]g pev avdpetav elvat y detXtav de, natdac

;

KA. II aw pev ovv. A0. K at ra pev aloxpd rovrcdv ra de, naXd Qrjoopev KA. A vdytcrj. A0. Ka£ tgjv pev TTpoorjrcetv rjplv, ehrep onooa cj)Xavpa ,

,

,

9

14r

,

fieolg de

pev

ovre peya ovre opinpov rdjv rotovrcdv perov epov -

.

12

.

nal a (podpa ye.

Megillus

:

Ast thinks that

this also is the

language of

Megilli sunt verba, egregie in Spartanum convenientia.

cannot see

why

We

they do not agree as well with the character of

been the same speaker,

Clinias.

Besides, had

lieve that

he would have used

it

httjkovov

we can

hardly be-

so soon after tjkovov.

The

answer of the Athenian, seems to imply that both the others had uttered their assent to what had been said. Te, when connected with such words as atyoSpa, pdTucrra, axcbov, &c., seems not so much to qualify the sense as the force or vehemence of the expression by which we mean, that it makes a sort of apology for the term, implying that a stronger one might perhaps have been used, but that the speaker means to keep within bounds. Thus, Clinias says c(j>66pa ye, “ earnestly to say no more, In this or to use no stronger expression, did I give heed to it.” w*ay, although a limiting particle, it does, in an indirect manner, increase the force of the term to which it is attached. word

kolv\7 in the following ,

;

:

13. ovvef-eT&gupev.

which neither

The common

reading here

The change

is

cwe^era^ovrov,

it,

nor any of the vari-

made on

the authority of the

suits the vulgar text preceding

ous readings proposed.

is

best commentators, and the Latin versification of Ficinus

commu

niter inves tig emus. 14. Kai tcov

pev

irpootiKeiv rjplv.

Twv and

ijplv

are neither of

them


CONTRA

KA. Ka£ ravQ

TC

A0.

6s,

apsXeiav re

rrjv 'ipvxrjg ^rjc/opev

KA.

K at ntig

A0.

’A/l/l’

nag av.

ovrcog bfioXoyoi

/cal

apyiav

nojg ’ksyeig

rj

;

47

ATIIEOS.

ape -

/cal rpv(f)7]v elg

;

15 ;

Tovvavriov.

KA. Nat. governed by npocrjueiv, but by psrbv below, which of the person and a genitive of the thing.

erned by npoarjKeiv but he ,

TEivai

;

and thus taken

neuter plural

clearly wrong,

is

psrbv

for the infinitive, there is

more than the

the Philebus, 22, E.

devrepecuv

ovd’

:

av

rfiv

There should be a comma

to be connected with

with the

orbaa dfkavpa, but thus

ellipsis supplied,

:

is

The

the ellipsis supplied, would be as follows kelv pETElvai

we

as gov-

used

is

no anomaly

for ps-

in the

tuv bizbaa

(J>?iavpa

will say, that to us (if to

Latin.

Compare

j/dovrj lletov aTir/Q&g

after eItzep,

which

—Ecnsp

orbaa

order of the whole, with Kal rjplv.plv kpovpEv

:

av

not

is

to be taken elliptically, or

shrEp ( nvlg eIglv olg petegtl).

be referred to t&v pbv.

(p?iavpa is to

a dative

tCjv

In this use of the participle for the infinitive,

ottogu.

the Greek resembles the English

tcote T^eyoLTo.

may have

Ast regards

(rivsg eIgIv olg petegtl).

ttpoGrj-

And

pertains to have a share Gods there is not the least use of sinsp, compare Aristotle’s Politi

any beings)

it

in those things that are bad, but to the

For

participation,” &c. ca,

ii.,

EiTcsp

6

:

— npog tov

blv yap tovto,

tt

this

xpr/Gipov bs ovcr/g ^pacvTi/Tog Trpbgovbsv rtiv eyKVKTiicjv, aKX

apd

no^Epov.

tt/v

a?i/1’ ELTcsp

avTov

fi'X.d'KTETai

dro

ETZEif

KA. Kat nug

vavTiov.

;

Nicomach.,

v., 9,

9

ov

:

^ov^tjglv, cjgte ovk aduiElrat, bid y

povov.

Tafijbov

aTCK ovk dno 15.

Aristot., Ethic.

n ugxco

Aristophanes, Nubes, 227

:

Tovg fisovg VTTEpcppovEtg,

Tijg yfjg

“And how

;

Elrsp.

should

we I”

A0.

’A XX slg tov-

’A/Md, like yap frequently refers to something understood, ,

supposed to pass rapidly through the mind of the speaker. It also always implies a negative, if not expressed. This use of these little particles

gives singular beauty as well as force to the Greek

They thus carry along with them variety and fulness of meaning, at the same time without encumbering or weakening the

language.

sentence with too

us from

many

words.

By

silent implication

losing sight of previous propositions.

carries along with

it,

they keep

Thus, bXkd here

or keeps in mind, the whole of the precedi-ng

sentence, being pregnant with a denial of the question.

“ No,

we

cannot assign dpe^Eiav apyiav &c., to the virtue of soul, but (aTM) ,

to the contrary.”


,

48

CONTRA ATHEOS.

T avavrta apa tovtolc; eig rovvavrlov KA. T ovvavTiov. A0. T i ovv 6rj Tpv(ptiv teal apehrjg dpyog te 1

A0.

.

2

(

;

7]T7]g

yiyvoir dv 6 rotovrog rcaoiv ’

1. Tavavna apa must be assigned

2

TpvQtiv

.

tovtolc, that

is,

elg tovvclvtlov

that

.

.

word tyOpoc or

argument, not very

intelligible,

made

plgtjtoc, for

tolovtoc

most

which he deduces an It may, however,

from pLael below.

human

stands, and regarded as an application, to

af-

and by taking away the interrogation which is found in The order would be thus tolovtoc (&eoc) nacnv fjplv

,

editions.

:

yiyvoLT’ dv Tpvtytiv nal dpeTiijc apyoc te , ov 6

“ Such a Deity would be to us

Ac.

elvaL ,

one

in short,

whom

(ov), or just

The only real is somewhat

Ac.

like,” it

is for

better by inserting

of the previous sentiment, by supposing &eoc understood after

fairs,

as

Ast, as usual,

fjp.Lv.

this could be

apyia Ac.

Tpv<prj

dpETyv ipvxvc-

is, etc

naoiv

.

after ylyvoif dv the

it

ixoi^

rjplv.

“ the opposites of

;

apelrjc apyoc te

teal

emendation here, and thinks

be read as

ov 6

KoOoVpOLGL paXiOTCL ELUeXoV E(paOKEV Aval)

KT](j)rjGL

olov,

The

harsh.

words before

passage

relative

corresponding to tolovtoc.

ever, in the order of the

Ac.

;

such a one as the poet said was

difficulty in the

stands,

would be

tcoltjttjc E(f>aGKEV elkeTlov

all Tpvtytiv, dpEhrjc,

From

is in ov,

we

which,

should expect

how-

its position,

its correlative, it

may

be re-

garded as affected, through a species of attraction, .by the words im-

Had it followed tolovtoc, it would probably which case the sentence would have presented no difficulty. The form of words in Greek is frequently affected by distance or contiguity, so as to be different from what would be reSee remarks on the w ord quired by strict grammatical depend ance. view The taken in respect to dv is 7toXXogttjv, Note XXIX., App. confirmed by similar examples which occur a few lines below ov mediately preceding.

have been

olov, in

?

:

pTjTsov tyeLv rjdoc tolovtov 6 ys, instead of tolovtov olov ys.

page 49 ( 5 ), in the words d red to

is

Hesiod

ttoogtjkel ,

Ac.

The

poet here refer

:

76J Se

gdy,

6rj

So, also,

&EOL VEpEGCOGL KCU

K7](j)fjVEGGL

CLVEpEC, OC

KEV CLEpyOC

Kodovpoic elkeIoc bpyrjv.

Works and Days, 278 It

may

be that

we have

dv, instead

the language of the verse quoted

;

terferes with the strict grammatical

of olov, to accommodate

it

a circumstance which often

dependence of a sentence

.

to in-


j

CONTRA ATHEOS. KA. ’0 pOorard ye elntiv. 3 A0. 0 vkovv tov. ye tieov* ov o ye roi avTog pLoel

49

prjreov e%etv rjOog tolovtov

n tolovtov (pOeyyeoOat, neipG)-

rep re

pevcp ovfi emTpenTeov.

KA. Ov pev T

A0. £h

6rj

yap av

ntig

6rj.

npoorjneL pev rcpaTTecv nai empefelodaL dca-

tovtov ye vovg tgjv pev peyaXuv em-

(pepovTCjg Ttvog , 6 6e

t&v opwptiv

peXelTaL,

;

5

tov tolovtov Xoyov

6e apeXel tcaTa Tiva eixaivovvTeg ,

ovfc

,

av navTanaoL nXrjppeXolpev

;

Guo-

'S. bpOoTard ye elrrdv. Ast would subjoin these words to e(paonev, and make them a part of what was said by the Athenian. They undoubtedly refer to e^aanev, yet it is perfectly agreeable to the Greek

idiom to regard them as the answer of Clinias. deal of vivacity in such an elliptical reply. tcev,

asserted that one said so and so, the reply

it is

most correctly

and

that only

:

T

£2 l 6rj

as,

;

may

g

e.

be,

.,

and

,

the

r<p TreLpopivtp

irpoorjueL.

most important truth. God hates that The Divine character is the Divine Law. It must never be called in ,

unlike himself.

is

allowance is to be made such a thought.” 5.

it

A

fieon.

which

ground and sanction of question

a great

is

too.

ovkovv tov ye

4.

There

equivalent to tyaa-

Our own language admits of

opdorard ye elndv.

when

It is

T2 l

tolovtov QdiyyeoOat ova entTpenTeov. to

is

him whd would even attempt

the relative of tolovtov

No

to utter

some distance

be-

had immediately followed it in the construction of the senThe same tence, it would perhaps have been more properly oil drj. reasons apply here that were given in respect to ov a few lines above. The order of the sentence would be as follows koto, tlvu low.

If

it

:

’koyov ova dv nhyppehoTpev enaLvovvTeg tov tolovtov Kei,

&c.

By what reason

(or

<p (olcp) <5y

why) should we not

praising such a being as the one to

whom

Tzpoor}-

act absurdly in

belongs to act and to

it

exercise care in a special manner, and yet the mind of this being

should care only for the great, while

it

neglects the small.”

occurs a number of times in a sentence, there it

is

into anything like tolerable English, without too

cution.

The

first 6e

word

much

circumlo-

between the two main the second, between two subordinate

;

In such cases the subordinate 6e

while in order to avoid the ,

6e

indicates an opposition

members of the sentence clauses.

When

a difficulty in putting

awkward

tion but.

E

is

best rendered by our

repetition of the conj mic-


CONTRA ATHEOS.

50 ntipev de ojde

dp ov Kara dvo ’

eldrj

to tolovtov nparrsL 9

5

6 7Tpdrro)v sere ffedg, sir av6po)nog

KA.

II olg) df]

A0.

A eyopev

; •

d de aueXel .

rw

oXcp

teal Tpvcpfj, el

dta-

dtaepepov ovdev olopevog elvat

fj

apeXovpevuv rtiv opuipCdv, (j)epec,

;

7

fj

padvpta

rj

eonv dXXcog

rratg

ytyvopevr] dpeXeta

;

ov yap 770V orav ye advvarov y tg)v drrdvTCxtv empeXelo $ai, rore dpeXeta eorac rcov opcupCdv fj peydXcdv prj hnpe8

Xovpevcp, d)v dv dvvapec ffeog pfj

fj

(pavXog rig

&v

eXXcTrfjg nal

dvvarog empeXeloOai yiyvrjrac.

6.

to tolovtov TtpuTTEL namely, neglects small things.

7.

o de dpeXEt.

,

Stephanus here would read

Else, he says,

ode.

must be regarded as redundant, or otherwise the sentence would According to this view of Stephanus, the following would be the order ode ape^el, fj dca^epov ovdev olopevog de

remain suspended.

:

to

elvcu

&c.,

62, o,

fj

if it

teal

Tpv(jty el diatyepeL.

He

neglects,

makes no difference, &c., or through sloth and does make a difference.” We think, however, there

either thinking that

effeminacy,

ftadvpia

it

no need of this supposition, or of regarding the de as redundant. There is a pev implied (if it is not rather lost by a corrupt reading) is

In that case, de has

after or before dta^epeL. sition or contrast,

and should be rendered

ternative intended, and also the antithesis

ordinate

member

pressed thus

:

el

We

(

pev )

usual force of oppo-

made by the

The

al-

de in the sub-

dpe2el would be clearly exnpaTTov npaTTec), the doer doeth makes no difference to the whole,

diatyepei, 6 de

say, then (o

thus, either supposing that

when

its

while, as above.

it

small things are neglected, or else (he doeth thus) through

indolence and effeminacy,

if,

in fact,

it

does

make

a difference, while

yet he neglects them.” 8. prj

empe2,ovpdv(p

d)v dv.

This

is

appended by

tion or epexegesis of the preceding oTav ye dbvvaTov,

n ov oTav

would be thus

:

tov epuepdv

peyakov (to)

dedg

fj

ij

ov yap

(ftavkog Ttg

which may care of

all

dv

&c.

of explana-

The

order

ye advvaTOv, &c., tote dpe2,eia egtol

prj E'KLpe2.ovpEvo

ycyvrjTaL ekkiitfig

be freely rendered thus things, then

way

:

(tovtov) ov dv dvvapei

teal prj

When

no one, whether

it

dvvaTog kmpEXEZoOai, it is

impossible to take

be a God or any inferior

being, can be justly charged with neglect of those things, be they

great or small, in respect to which, he

power

for a special

Providence.”

is

wanting

in the requisite

Or, in other words, there can be


CONTRA ATHEOS.

KA. A0. oav oi rovg

IT tig

yap av

Nw

6rj

-dsovg

11

51

;

6v’ ovrsg

9

rptolv rjplv ovoiv anoKpcvdodoj -

psv apcporspot

10

opoXoyovvrsg slvai

6s drspog, 6 6s , apsXslv rtiv opiKptiv.

tisovg dpcporspot (pars yiyvtioKstv Kai

*

rrapairr]-

irptirov

psv,

opav Kal anovsiv

iravra XaOslv 6s avrovg ov6sv 6vvarov slvai rtiv onoocjv

12

,

elalv ai aioOrjosig re Kal sTUorr\pai,

ravra

rj

;

KA.

ntig

ravrq Xsysrs sx^iv

;

Ovrcog.

Tt

A0.

13

6ac

^v^rolg rs

6vvao0ai iravra ottogcov av 6vvapig son

;

adavdroig

teal

;

KA. Ilwf yap ov Gvyx^p^ovrai nal ravra ovrcog sxsiv A0. Keu pijv dyaOovg rs Kal dplorovg tipohoyrjKapsv ;

14:

avrovg slvat nsvre ovrsg.

KA.

2(f)66pa ys. T

A0.

Ap’ ovv ov paOvp'ia psv Kal rpvcpq a6vvarov av -

no neglect where there is no power. In such a case, prj empeTieiaOai is not the same with apehelv. See Note XLVI., App., On the Peculiarities of certain Negative Forms of Verbs, deoc; f) tyavTiog rig dv is

equivalent to rig elrs

may

yaTiav

fi-edg

“whether small or great.” as in the Republic, ttolov

;

Evpo.0r)g

stance). 9.

Gods

fj

What

dv’ ovtec.

10. oi

sirs (j>av?iog dv.

So, also, opiKpdv

fj

pe-

be viewed as equivalent to dre apiKptiv dre psyahov,

vi.,

Or,

486, B.

dvopaOrjg.

it :

may

be regarded as understood,

ov pyv ovds rode TTapaTisiibEig.

circumstance! Whether docile The two supposed objectors.

or dull.”

Who admit, both of them, that the one says that they are easily propitiated, and

dsovg psv uptyorspoc.

exist, while the

to

“ Surely you will not omit this (circum-

the other, that they are regardless of small things.” 11.

TTapaiTijTovg.

12.

Tdv onooov

See Note XLI., App. eiaiv ai aiaOrjceu; rs Kai ETnoTrjpaL.

“ All such

things as are capable of being perceived by the sense and by the un-

derstanding.” 13.

tl

dal\

from

A ai has

the

same analogy

to

6rj

that vai has to

vrj.

It

only in a prolongation and sharpening of the voice to “ But real* express surprise or wonder, which is its usual office.

differs

6r]

ly!” 14.

dyaOovg te Kai dptarovg.

See Note XLII., App.


,

:

52

CONTRA ATHEOS.

rovg opoXoyeiv Tcparrecv otlovv ronapanav, bvrag ye otovg opoX&yovpev decXcag yap 15 e/cyovog ev ye 7]plv dpyca pa•

;

Ov/iia de , apycag /cat rpvcprjg.

KA. A^rjOearara ’

Xeyetg.

A0. ’A py 'ta pev drj /cat paOvpca ovdetg dpeXel fietiv. ov yap pereonv avrcp rcov detXiag. KA. ’O pOorara Xeyetg. A0. Ovkovv to Xotnov, elrcep apeXovct t&v optrcptiv /cat oXtycov rtiv nept to nav rj ytyvdxj/covTeg d)g Toirapa nav ovdevog tg)V tocovtgjv empeXetodat del, dpcpev dv rov1

,

to

Xotnov nXfjv to ytyvcbo/cetv TOvvavTtov

Tt to

rj

*

;

KA. Ovdev. A0. TLorepov ovv yorra, 2

d)

,

ayvoovvTag

voiav apeXovvTag

7/

aptOTe

/cat

re, fmt

(3eXTtOTe 'dtipev ce Ae,

deov empeXetodat,

ytyvdo/covTag otl

del,

XoTaTOi tg)v avOpuncov XeyovTat notetv vai /3eXTLG) npaTTetv rjdovtiv

gjv drj

Xvircov, ov notetv

ij

6

15.

3

Connect

tag yap.

etdores*

,

dt’

aAAa

dm

npaTTOvai

ay-

icaOanep oi (pav£?-

rjTTag

;

this

with what

is

said page 46, 10

pev avdpeiav elvai, deikiav be, Katdag. See Note XLIII., App. “ For the rest of our argument.” tuv Tcepl to nav. to Xoitcov.

aperfjg 1.

Which have Gods are

the

a relation to the whole.” “ Shall

dtipev ce leyovTa.

2.

we

down as saying that when they ought to exercise

put you

ignorant, and that even

a care, they through ignorance neglect

they ought, yet better,

&c.

;

still,

it

men

as the meanest of

;

or, that

knowing that

are said to do,

of pleasures and griefs, do not do what they ought 1”

A

Tieiadai.

who know

so they (the Gods), through the overpowering influence

mode

of expression very

common

A eov

etz ipe-

with the nominative

neuter participle of del and of the compounds of the substantive verbs. It

is

more it

nearly equivalent to the genitive absolute, being, however,

which mere accessory cir-

closely connected with the reasoning of the sentence in

stands, instead of denoting, like the latter, a

cumstance of time or

place.

It

being necessary,” or “

when they

ought,” &c. 3.

peTiTiu 7rpa,TT£Lv.

would here read npaTTEiv

,

Stephanus, -on the authority of Eusebius,

\3e7iTLov

however,

is

npaTTecv, melius esse alia facere.

more

strictly in

/3e7iTiG)

accordance with the purest


CONTRA ATHEOS.

KA. Utig yap av A0. Ov/covv 6rj rays dvOpcbmva

53

;

ipvxov perexEL (pvo£G)g apa

navjcjv

rr

paypar a*

rrjg

re kp-

5

teal

,

'dEOGedecrarov avro eotl

dvOpomog.

%G)G)v

KA. E owe yovv. f,

6 A0. Qegjv ys pr\v nr^para (frapEV uvai iravra onooa 7 $vr]Ta £oja, uvnEp /cat rov ovpavov oXov KA. II tig yap ov A0. "H 6rj Totvvv oputpa fj pEyaXa rig tyarG) ravra elvai 8 rolg dEolg. ovdETEpug yap rolg HE/crripEVotg rjpag dpsXElv ;

av

EL 7] TTpoorpiov ,

yap

7rtipEV

dfj /cat

KA. To A0. To 9

empEXEGTaroig ye ovoi

7

rolov

7TEpt

pV/COTE

(

dpiarotg. o/co-

to6e eti rrpog rovroig.

;

te aloOrjGEGjg nal dvvapEug, dp ovtc kvav’

dXXrjXoLV irpog paordbvrjv

tlCi)g

/cal

/cal

%aAe7rdT?yTa egtov

7re-

;

Compare the examples,

Greek idiom.

^a/leTrd or

x^sir urepa opav dwarog KCiravorj;

also such phrases as padta paOelv uaha ideiv, Aoyof ,

and others, which are generally expressed in Latin by the supine, difficile visu, mirabile dictu, &c. In such cases, of an infinitive dependent on an adjective, the Greek

cat

,

T/diorr/

niveiv at-ia ftavpaocu, ,

usage of the active, instead of the passive, corresponds to the Eng-

As we

lish idiom.

stead of better

say, hard to learn , cruel to behold, better to do, in-

to be done,

although some might regard this last ex-

ample as hardly admissible. 4, 5.

dv6pd)mva Tzpaypara

deoGeSeoTarov.

See Note XLIV.,

App. 6.

7.

See Note XLV., App.

fietiv KTr/para.

ovpavov olov.

mated universe,

This

is

like Paul’s

here evidently put for the whole ani-

naoa

tj

GpuKpa

creation, the whole creature world."

or small.” 8.

See page

ovderepug.

ktlgiq,

Rom.,

peyaXa, “be they great

7}

“ In neither respect,” that

we

participle, in

such connexions as

are small or great.

is,

E2

The

&c.

not (that

power) reciprocally an opposite nature

ovgi.

has the force of a con-

this, often

Have they

whether you take the

empeleardTotg ye

ditional clause, “ if they are most provident," dp’ ova evavTiog.

22, “ the whole

50, (8.)

ground that

9.

viii.,

is,

have not sense and

in respect to

ease and

diffi-


,

.

54

CONTRA ATHEOS.

KA.

Xeyeig

XIoj^*

;

A0. 'Opav pev nov Kal aKoveiv ra opiKpd 10 ftaXeirurepov fj ra peyaXa <pepeiv 6 av Kal Kparelv Kal emfieXelodaL rcbv opuipCdv Kal oXiyov rravrl paov f) rdbv evavricov. KA. Kal noXv ye. A0. ’I arpti. dr) itpoorer ay[levov 11 oXov tl 'depaneveiv ’

,

eulty

1

o,lo6rjGig

to Trepl alodrjoEog is equivalent to to

or

tt}q alaOjjoecjc,

and both taken together constitute a nominative

;

rj

for the

dual verb egtov

ra

10.

We may say in Greek, x a ^ £ ^ torepov egtl ra opLKpu

opav or

Gfiinpa. ra,

,

apiKpa ken

on the words

(3),

11. ’larpti 6 tj

x^EnuTEpa

See Remarks, page

opav.

52,

np&TTEiv.

(3e?itig)

npoGTEraypEvov

comma

Ast would place a

.

and render according to the following order

larpc5

:

dvvapEvcp dEpaTTEVEiv tl TTpoGTETayphov &c. ,

To

6rj

after

drj,

fiovlopEvu Kal

who is

a physician

and able to heal something committed to his care,” &c. In view avT& below is made redundant. This interposition of the

willing this

pronoun,

it is

sentence

;

true, is not

yet

still it

unusual

seems to us

in a

long and complicated Greek

in this place

to regard TcpoGTETaypivov as the nominative

more natural and easy (some would

call

accusative) neuter impersonal absolute, like diov, page 52 true, this Sel,

or of the impersonal

it

compounds of the substantive

napov and the kindred vnapxov , yet ,

extended beyond these

ally prevails in respect to

6okovv, TzpoGrjKov ally

;

as,

and

,

Thucyd.,

i

termined by them.”

,

limits.

7r apaaxov,

(2).

now and

verb, such as

not unfrequent-

occasion-

sometimes with

dotjav,

then with passive participles gener-

125, dsdoy^Evov ds avTolg

when

,

it

was

de-

So, also, with slpppivov and ov joined with ad-

See Kuhner, 312.

quum

turpe

sit

If the rule

may

in this

,

dvvaTov ov, &c.

we

The same usage

tvxov

jectives; as, aiGxpov ov “it being base,” or, ov,

It is

usage generally takes place with the neuter participle of

e£ov, TrpoGov ,

ly find

the

it

admit of being extended to npoGTETaypivov, which

is

ubrjTiov

case

somewhat akin

and Elpppivov, the sentence may be thus renderand according to the following order and punctuation Tarp<5 6rj

to do^av dEboypEvov

ed,

:

3ov?io[iEV(p K aXtig

to

Kal dwapivip 'xpoGTETayp.Evov, oXov

nuv

avTti T(bt plv [lEyaXav ETTLjiE^ovpEvip, tCjv popiuv

GfUKptiv apElovvTL

competent,

it

tl tiEpaTTEVEiv, e^el tcote

is

;

“When,

to a physician

who

is

dfi

Kal

both willing and

appointed to heal any whole, will his work, as a

whole, be in a condition creditable to him, attending, or only to the great portions

if

he attends

while he neglects the small?”

Take


CONTRA

ATIIEOS.

(SovXofXSVG) KGL fiwapLEVG), TG)V [LEV p£ydX(i)V ETUfieXoVUEVCt),

TG)V

pL 0pLG)V

dVTU) TO 7TGV

6 e Kdt GflLKpdjv G\lEXoVVTi

£%eI 7T0TE fCaXojg

;

KA. 0 vda/itig. A0. Ov p,r\v ovde tcovofiotg ,

12 ,

nvdepvrjrdig ovde OTpdrrjyolg ovtf ol,

,

twv

ov c5’ av tlgI noXLTUiolg, ovd’ g)iXcp

T ^ v oXlyoiv nai

ovdevc,

ovde ydp dvev oputip&v

1

opu/cptiv,

rovg pteyaXovg

*

itoXXg

(f>aotv oi

tolovtgjv

peydXa.

rj

XiOoXoyoi

XiOovg ev kelgOgl.

KA. Hug yap dv

;

A0. M?) roLvvv tov ye gjgl,

roocp dupideGTepa

tc

pud TEXvrj Gpjh'pa nai p,eydXa dnepya^ovrat

ovTa

15

nore

'Svtjtgjv

tg npoorjtcovTa avrolg epya,

dripLLOvpy&v (pavXorepov, oi

docpnep dv dpeivovg

14:

fteov ai;id)OG)p,£v

ai TeXeojTEpa •

tov 6e 'deov

te GocpdjraTOV, ftovXopievov t* empLeXelodaL

teal

dvva-

bmpe^ovpevcp as a conditional clause, like empeTieGTaTOig ye ovoi on ,

which we remarked a short distance back. In this way deparzeveiv is governed by npooTeTaypevov. and avrip comes in easily in the order of the sense. 12.

hTtpekovpevid

13.

dvev 7

14.

.

(j/u/eptiv.

A ZiuGcopev.

.

upehovvTi. See Note XLVI., App. See Note XLVII., App. .

Some would

account of the particle

here prefer the reading uZi&pev on

which,

pfi],

is

it

with the 1st aorist subjunctive active. rians there are, however, so

may

many

well be doubted whether the

ged on account of

it.

contended, cannot be joined

To

this rule of the

common

15.

See many of these cases, Matthiae, Gr. Gram.,

Had

This it

con-

is to

prjre to'lvw

be connected with drjpuovpyCiv it would have reand would probably have read

immediately followed,

quired only the connective re in :

make them

rule.

tov 6e deov ovtcl.

(pavlorepov above.

thus

it

reading should be chan-

728, and the emendations by which he proposes to

form to this

gramma-

cases in direct opposition, that

prjre,

tov ye d-eov d^ioiGupev tzote

<f>av?ioTepov elvat, prjTe -deov ovtcl (a ^LGiGopev),

-d-VTjTCjv

&c.

to think that the Deity, of all others, is inferior to

nor that, being a

God most wise, with

6r)fuovpyC)v

“ Let us not deign

mortal workmen,

the will and the power, &c\, he

should take no charge of those small things, the care of which

is

sc


<

CONTRA ATHEOS.

56 pev paov

.jiEvov, gjv

rjv

empsXrjdrjvat opiKptiv ovrcSv , prjda-

empeXelcdat, aaOdnep apybv

arj

*

peyaXw

padvpovvra tg)V 6e ,

KA.

1

rj

detXov riva did irovovi

Mrjdapcog dogav rotavrrjv irepi detiv,

dexrifieOa

ovdaprj

G)

ano

%eve,

*

yap ovre ooiov ovr aXrjOeg dtavorjpa 9

dtavooiped av. ’

A0. A onovpev 6e pot vvv 6 at

rep (j)iXatTt(p rfjg

The

7]6rj

paXtora perp'uog 2 dieiXex-

dpeXetag nept

tietiv.

by the parenthetical There is an opposition, or, rather, contrast between this clause and what follows, and this contrast is denoted by de, which, in consequence of its position and easy,” &c.

6s in this case is occasioned

or explanatory clause, ol tu npocyKovTa, &c.

relation to a subordinate part,

rendered.

It is

appears harsh and

difficult

to be

a rule in English composition, that there should be

no grammatical dependence between a parenthesis and the other

members of a

period

or that

;

it

should be so introduced, that

it

may

be taken out without altering the grammatical relation of the other parts.

The

propriety of such a rule

may be doubted. At all events, much more freedom in the

the Greek writers allowed themselves construction of their periods

what grammarians haps, on the whole,

;

and hence the frequent occurrence of

and suspended sentences. Perwould be better thus to regard the passage be-

style anakoloutha it

,

fore us as suspended, for the sake of the stronger impression.

After

speaking parenthetically of the exact care exercised by human

artists,

the writer breaks out in the following unfinished contrast:

“But

most wise, possessed of power and will, &c-., should neglect small things like some idle and cowardly being, while he concerns himself about the great” The impatient and characterisNo, tic interruption of Clinias then comes in with admirable effect we can hold no such opiniem we can entertain no such false and unholy sentiment. In this way far more power is given to the sentence than could be imparted by the most perfect regularity. “While he does concern himself about the 1. Ttbv <5£ ysfalov. greater.” See the remarks on the best mode of rendering^ in certhat God, being

;

tain cases,

page 49, 5 and 50,

2. psrplog.

rye apsldag

the

Gods

7.

r<5 (j>i?icuTup in manner and degree.” The one who loves to impute neglect to

“ Properly, both

irepL ftstiv.

—who querulously arraigns the Divine Providence.”

i>ihaLTL(p

ds&v nspl ryg aps^slag.

Ordo


.

CONTRA ATHEOS.

57

N at.

KA. A0.

Tg5 ye pid&oOai 3 rolg Xbyoig opoXoyelv avrov pi)

Xeyecv

KA.

’OpOtig.

4

A0. ’Encpddjv ye

prjv rcpoodelodai pot done l pvOcov

en

TLVU)V.

KA.

II 0 L 6)v,

d)

’y aOe

A0. Ueldojpev rov

;

veavi'av rolg Xoyoig, dig rep rov

tt av-

rog empeXovpevcp rrpog rrjv ocjTTjpiav nal dperrjv rov oXov

ndvr earl ovvreraypeva

5

>

f

d)v nai

,

enaorov to npoorjfcov nao^ei Kal dpxovreg TTpooreraypevoi del ndOrjg

7

rtj

bpOtiq.

ev

d)v

teal

to gov,

to countenance,

eiolv

o^erAte, popiov elg

d)

whom

Stephanus,

seem

d’

pepiopov rov eoxarov reXog

See Note XLVIII., App. whom Ast follows, and

ye pidgeadat.

3. 4.

Ficinus

-

rovroig

noiel.

endorotg ent to opL/cporarov

rcpa^ecog, elg

real

direipyaopevoi

6

to pepog elg dvvaptv

would connect

opOibq

Eusebius and with the pre-

ceding leyeiv making the whole, from rw ye to en tivuv, the lan,

guage of the Athenian. hie haberet

Alioque Xeyeiv, sine hoc adverbio quern

STEPH.

?

Xeyeiv

itself,

however,

in the

“ speaking improperly,” or of “ saying nothing to the purpose,”

common

in

Greek, that

we much

opd&q to Clinias, making speaker, page 49 ed.

There

(3),

it

much

that

is

word Pia&oOai, and intimates

argument had been perfectly be added.

As much

so

remark-

It is principally

that, in his view, the

irresistible, so that

as to say

we have

characteristic of the

simple-hearted Clinias in this interrupting assent. directed to the

is

which gives

very similar to the reply of the same

bpOoTara ye elndv, on which

great vivacity, and

is

prefer the vulgar text,

usum

sense of

nothing more need

—you are most correct

in declaring

you have forced him your argument is, indeed, most triumphant. And then this brings on very naturally the subsequent reply of the chief speaker “ And yet there seems to me to be need in addition of something of a more persuasive kind.” tlv&v errudfiv. 5. owreraypeva. Not simply “appointed by” (although this sense is included), but “ so arranged as to co-operate (gw) with the unithat

;

:

versal guardian.”

See Note XLIX., App. This word must have here the sense of consh

6.

upxovreq.

7.

uTetpyaGpevoi.


58

CONTRA ATHEOS.

to nav gvvTELvei /3Xenov*

aei, na'tnsp

navoptnpov

ov. os

fie

X sXrjOs nspi rovro avro cog yevsotg svsna snstvov yiyvs10 tcu naoa oncjg fj rj rep rov navTbg 3io) vnapxovoa svfiat11 pux)v ovoid ovx evsna oov y tyvopsvrj, ov fie svsna snsivov. nag yap iarpog nai nag svrsxvog firjptovpyog navrog pev svsna navra spya^erai, npog to noivrj £vvrelvov 12 [3eX9

[

,

,

tlotov

pspog prjv svsna oXov nai ovx o^ ov pepovg svsna

dnspya^srai. ov

apiorov

,

yevsoscog

.

snsi

3

to nspi os

fit’

eavTTjv

1

tuted, appointed, or organized,

what unusual.

fie

fid

rj

ttjv

del ^vx?) ovvTSTaypsv'rf 5 oco-

fie

paTL tots psv aXXcp, tots

psTadoXag

on?]'

navTL ^vpbaivst nai ooi naTa fivvaptv 14

rip

Trjg noivrjg

dyavanrslg dyvoebv

fie

dXXcp, psTabdXXsi navTotag

erspav

'ipvx'fjv,

aXXo

ovfisv

sp -

although such an application

Efc pepiapov rov £ox arov

“ to the

,

is somemost minute di-

TeAof must be taken abverbially, as equivalent to teIeoq. must be referred to rovroig and Gwreraypeva. “ Looking tends.” The participle, being a 8. t-wreivei pTLeirov.

vision.” *£lv

favourite part of speech with the Greeks,

is

often thus used in con-

in this manner becoming equivalent to two verbs in English, as though it were (3X£n ei nai reivei. 9. Yeveaig. See Note L., App. 10. 11, 12, 13. See Note LI., App. 14. Kara dvvapiv, &c. “According to the power of the common

nexion with a verb

generation,” that

;

is,

possible for both these ends to be good of the individual and the good

as far as

it is

jointly accomplished, viz., the

of the universe at the 15.

We

GvvTeraypsvrj.

same

time.

The common

reading here

is

Emreraypevip

have, however, followed Eusebius and Stephanus,

to several old

manuscripts as authority.

who

'Lwreraypevr)

refers

makes a

much better sense, and is much better adapted to the context. It may be rendered here, “ soul appointed to act in co-operation with body.” 1.

6i’

kavrrjv.

“By

its

own

internal action.”

bi’

erepciv \pvxyv

Through the influence of another soul.” This is one of those cases in which bid with the accusative would be said to signify the instrumental cause, a sense which it generally has with the genitive.

Even

here, however,

we may

perceive a difference.

another, and may, perhaps, be

It

denotes a

upon more appropriately rendered by reason

spiritual instrumentality, either of soul

upon

itself,

or of one soul


CONTRA ATHEOS.

59

yov T<X TCETTEVT^j XeLTTET at TrXfjV fjLETaTiOsvaL TO

vov 3y'yvopEVov

7]0og Eig /3eXtlco tottov

x

,

e ^P 0V

fjLEV CL[IEL-

^ £ eig tov

XEipova, nard to npEirov avTcbv EizaoTcp, Iva Trjg rrpoo 77 -

potpag Xayx^v'Q.

K,ovor\g

KA.

U?j Xb/Eig T

A0.

navTG)v

dv Exot Xoyov 2 paoTtvvT] ETUfiEAEiag $£olg tcov tclvttj pioi doted) (ppa^ELV. el pitv yap Trpog to

B.L7T£p

,

oXov aEi olov

;

/3 Xettg)v

irXaTToc Tig pETaox^pctTi^ov Ta TravTa

rcvpbg v6(i)p kpipvxovf teat prj %vpixoXXa e% Evog

ek,

ek noXXcbv ev, Trp(OT7]g

fj

dsvTEpag

uETEiXrjfpOTa, nXrjOEOiv dnEtg

KooprjOECjg

vvv

,

,

6’

,5

dv

ital TpiTrjg

rj

eitj

7

)

yEVEOEog

t rjg \L£TaTiQ£\i£V7]gs

eotl OavpaoTT) paoTGjvT7 r<5 tov navTog

ETUpEXovpEVG).

KA. of,

av XiyEig

than by means

nearly to the

of,

same

;

although the two expressions sometimes

thing,

means reason and motive

The

adaptation of the soul to

Nothing, then,

its

in

regard to

come spirit-

The sentiment is this is its own work.

ual agencies, having often the like relation.

,

:

appropriate state

the chess-player but to transfer the pieces

is left to

M eraridhaL —calculum quasi

thus adapted to their proper stations.”

“to take back or change a piece.” We render ireTTEVTfj chess-player by way of accommodation to a well-known game, in retractare ,

,

,

order to give more force to the simile,

'ipvxv

properly vis animee than the substance of soul ,

2.

7

Ht7rep dv ex 01

E

3, 4.

l

,

&c

See Note

yev yap npoc to olov.

this difficult passage,

Note

-

LIII.,

M.ETaTideyEvrjQ KocryrjGEog.

some

of

distance, see

new arrangement

“ Displaced arrangement,” that

is,

every act of providential intera displacing of the whole order of the chess-board at each

requiring a

mean

for

Supply pETaTXyyCLTi(5[iaTa.

6.

;

For an extended explanation

App.

UTZELpa.

ference

means more

App.

and of what follows

5.

move. where

LII.,

here

itself.

at

See the comparison of the n ettevtt/c a short distance back, also the verb [leraTidevaL M ETanxyparigo would

we have

here, to transform immediately

.

,

without intermediate means

(media) or successive generations of cause and effect.

on the other hand, although active

in

M eraSd/ilsi,

form, has an intransitive or

middle meaning, signifying a change from internal causes things themselves, whether innate or implanted.

in the


60

CONTRA ATHEOS. r

A0

eneLdr) Kareldev rjpojv o fiaoulevg epxpvxovg

tt&£.

ovoag rag npa^Etg anaaag nal uoXX^v pev dperrjv ev av ,

ralg ovoav 'noXXrpv 6e naniav ,

y

vov dXX ovk al(bviov vopov ovreg deoi,

(

,

dvdtXeOpov 1 6e ov yevope-

yevemg yap ovk av n ore

Xopevov tovtolv tiarepov) Kal to pev rrEcpvKog,

telv

ooov ayaOov

fjv

ol Kara,

%u)cov

ano-

b)(peXelv ayaftov del

to 6e KaKov (3Xan-

'ipvx'^g, dievorjOr),

ravra rcavra gvvidcbv EprjxavrjoaTO* nov neipevov

EKaOTOV TG)V p£pb)Vj VLKAdOaV dpETTJV ev tg) Tiavrl TTapexoi paXior peprjxdvrjrcu

9

Tonovg

*

,

7.

av6?i eOpov

£fi7]x av V (ja To-

.

.

KUKtaV

yiyvopevov

ttolov tl

rov iroiov nvog

Kal rivag

y

10

d<prjKE

ralg

See Notes LIV. and LV., App. This word savours somewhat of

aiuviov.

.

7]TTG)pEV7)V 6e

peraXap6dvov olKL^eoOai

rrjg 6e ysveoEGjg

8.

,

av Kal paora nal apiora.

rovro to,

repog ixav

6rj

del Tioiav edpav del TiOTE

KaOanep

'ipvxrjv teal otipa,

,

Excogitavit.

Plato’s peculiar doctrine of the necessary existence of evil, arising

out of that depravity which stitution of things.

It

was connected with

seems

with this disorder, and employing devising plans to counteract

all

the resources of his

its influence.

on the doctrine of the good and

what

matter, in the con-

to represent the Deity as struggling

wisdom

in

See Note XXXI., App.,

Uov nupevov. “In what manner the best and easiest manner to

evil principle.

situation lying,” ubi queeque pars sita

each part might be so disposed as

in

est,

or “in

give the victory to virtue, and the least advantage to wickedness or evil.” 9.

A

peprixavriTai.

change

perfect tense, to intimate that

mode of

is

here

it is

made from

the aorist to the

a finished, settled, or established

proceeding, employed at the present time as well as in the

first origin

of things.

The

aorist eprixavTjGaTo

had reference

to single

and individual parts and acts pepTjxdvTjrac has regard to the whole, “ He conIt is best rendered here as a present irpog Tzav tovto. ;

:

what kind of a situa certain quality must receive and

trives this in reference to the whole, namely,

which becomes of a See Note LVI., App.

tion everything

inhabit.” 10.

T7jg

yeveeeug rov

ttolov

nvog.

This expression

is

equivalent

words edpav, oLKL&cdaL and tottovq above, we may yet discover the metaphor of the stones and the buildto tov ytyvecdcu ttolov tl.

er,

made use

dangerous

In the

of page 55 (13).

flood,

it

,

Like the comparison of the dark and

lingers long in the writer’s mind, and affects, un-


CONTRA ATHEOS.

61

povXrjOEOLV enaoTCJV rjpcjv Tag air tag.

wv

nal bnolog rig

ical

TOiovrog ytyvErat dnag rjpcjv

KA. To yovv

slnog

a,v ettlOv -

rrjv 'ifwxrjv, ravrrj cr%e<5dv

ufi,

j

yap

oirr]

cjg

ek&otote

to ttoXv.

.

A0. METabdXXEi psv roivvv navO’ ooa psTOfta eotc Xrjg,

ev kavrolg KEtcrrjfiEva

11

i/jv-

rfjv rrjg pETaboXrjg alriav

*

ps-

Hard rfjv T7\g Eipappsvrjg 12 ra^iv 13 nal vopov. cpiKpOTEpa psv tcjv rjdcov pErabdXXovra kXaTto, Kara to TTjg %cj pag ettltte6ov pETanopEVETac, ttXelo 6e nal admoTEpa pETanEOOVTa, Etg paOog Ta te naTO XEyopEva

TabaXXovTa 6 e

(jjspETai

r/

tcjv tottov ooa At6rjv

l4c

,

te nal Ta tovtcjv E^ppEva tcjv bvo-

paTCJv Enovopa^ovTEg o<po6pa (pobovvTac nal bvEiponoXov ol

15

£cjVTEg diaXvOEVTsg te tcjv

xpvXV nanlag

rj

apETrjg

oopaTOv

pEt^ov 6e

onoTav pETaXaby, did

ttjv avT7\g

psv

j3ovXr(OLV te nal opiXiav yEvopsvrjv lo^vpav, ottotov apETTj

Tcpooplgaoa 1 ytyvrjTat diaejjEpovTog t oiavTT],

'dELa

dtacjjEpovTa

2

brj

nal pETibaXE totcov ayiov oXov pETanopiodEi,

oa

Tiva tottov ETEpov OTav 6e TavavTia,

Eig apEivcj

,

TavavTta pEdidpvoaoa tov avTTjg

consciously perhaps, his language, even where there

ed reference to

ettI

(3iov.

was no

design-

This method of carrying along metaphors con-

it.

tained, yet half concealed, in single

words and phrases,

is

a peculiar

beauty of Greek composition, by no means confined to their poetry, although this abounds with the richest examples of

it.

See the close of Note LVI., App. 12. Kara rd^tv elpappevrjg. See Note LIV., App. 13. cfiuiporepa pev rtiv yOtiv. For an extended explanation of this difficult passage, and of what follows, see Note LYII., App. 11. ev kavrolg.

See Note LVIII., App., on the Greek compared with the Hebrew and rT3-

14. "Aidrjv enovopd^ovreg.

*Ai8r)g, 15.

(j)o6ovvrat

1.

apery deta 7rpoopi^aaa.

y'lyvrjcQe 'deiag 2.

the

is

Compare

this with 2 Peter,

i.,

4

:

Iva

kolvuvol tyvoeug.

diatyepovra.

struction cially

See Note LIX., App., on the which have existed in all ages.

nal bveiponoXovoi.

similar fears of Hell

Connect

this with ronov, although

rather harsh and unusual.

On

word ayiov see Note LX., App., on ,

F

such a con-

this passage,

and espe-

the spirituality of some,


3

CONTRA

62

ATIIEOS.

kvTij tol 6Lkt] egti tietiv ot ’'OAvynov ex°vglv s

nai nai veavione, aueXeloQai doncbv into $£G)V

gj

nanfxo

*

li8v

ytyvopevov npog rag nantovg 'ipv%dg apeiva) 6e

rd^*

apeivovg nopevopevov sv re

,

i

,

7t&c>x£Lv ts nai notslv

pECL rovg npooepspslg

ovre

el

a npoorjnov

5

ravrrjg rrjg dtnrjg ovre ov prjnore aXXog arvxrjg 6 yevopevog inev^rjrac nepiyeveodai .

nacrtiv dtnCav diatyepovrcog eraijav re oi rai-avreg,

'ftecov. fjv

of the Platonic views in regard the capability

,

which

ing accommodated 3.

7rpo^

.

n dot davarotgf dpav eon rolg npoocpenai sv

to the

many parts

to

,

,

a higher system of truth.

line,

v

This

is

an un-

evidently intended as a quotation.

What

kvrr} tol diKrj earl detiv ol

doubted hexameter

future blessedness of the soul and

of the Platonic writings possess of be-

OAiyz7tov cxovgl.

immediately follows, although the language of the writer, and designed only for prose,

7

£2

The

same

yet capable of being reduced to the

is

measure by a slight transposition, and by pronouncing tietiv syllable, as must frequently be done in the Greek poetry, nai nai veavioKE, Sokcjv

Platonic writings furnish

in

one

vtco -&eC)v apeTiEioOaL.

many examples

of a similar kind,

and sometimes with no change at all, may be reduced to a pleasing rhythm. They were, in all probability, not

which by

slight changes,

designed, but flowed spontaneously from the well-tuned ear and har-

monized

of this poetical philosopher.

spirit

Nothing could more

perfectly describe the exquisite softness and polish of his

own Greek,

than what he says of Theaetetus, in the dialogue of that name, page 144, B. 4.

:

olov eXaiov fisvpa aipoc^yri fisovTog.

h TcdGL tiavaroLg.

See Note LXI., App., on the mystical senses

of this word. 5.

npoGcpepcGL rovg npootyspeig.

6.

urvxyg.

“ Like to like.”

Ficinus here evidently read evrvxyg without

he renders the passage thus

:

confidatquc se adeo felieem fore ut judicium hoc exuperet.

It is

common

ri,

Quare nec tu neque ullus alius

Decorum

for optet

effugiat atque

capable, however, of a very good sense according to

“Neither do you expect, nor if any other is is, exposed to the Divine jusin tice), let him ever boast he shall escape (or survive) the justice of Heaven.” TlepLyeveodaL superesse. The same lemarks apply to It is equivalent to ovre dXXog el here, as to ehrep, page 46 (14). arvx^g yevopevog elnep egtl roiovrog, knev^yraL, &c. the

reading.

like unfortunate condition (that

,


,

,

:

CONTRA ATHEOS.

63

e^evXa6elodai rortapdirav. ov yap dpeXrjOrjGrf

Xp£& v

ovx ovtcj

irore vtt’ avrrjg.

yrjg (3a0og , ovd’ viprjkog

rr/Gy

op,ucpog cov

dvoq /card to

rljg

yevopsvog, elg rov ovpavov avan -

riGEig ds avrtdv rrjv TrpoGrjtcovGav npcopiav, eit’ ev *

'

Odds* uevojv, site

/cal

ev "Albov dianopEvOsig eite ,

i

Elg aypiG)TEpov eti dia/copiGdEig

9

totcov. o

real

tovtgjv

avrog ds Xoyog

aV

Ell], TG)V, OVg GV KaTldojV E/C GpipsyaXovg ysyovorag dvoGiovpyrjGavrag, f\ ri toiov-

GOl fiat TTEpl EKEIVG)V

uptiv

,

rov npd^avrag, Kara,

aOXitov svdaipovag ysyovevai

(brjdTjg

ev /caronTpoig, 10 avrtiv raig npd&Giv,

w$*

ov yap

7.

,

dpeTiijdfjGri ttote

the Divine Justice or

Law

rjyrjGG)

aa -

’Avryg refers here to AUcrj, or

vn' avTjjg.

See Note LXII., App., on

personified.

the

Divine Omniscience and the remarkable resemblance between this passage ,

and

certain declarations of the Scriptures.

Hades after having passed same way, ekei is often used for the other world. There is a power in these brief adverbs, when thus employed, that no descriptive terms could equal. They are several times used in this manner in the Gorgias, especially in the passage where Socrates is pointing Callicles to that final and Divine tribunal, where he will stand so much more in need of a de-

“In

hOade.

8.

through ( bia

world

this

tt opevdelg)

or in

this world.”

In the

fence and of an advocate, than in the Athenian courts

yrrov

i'kiyyiaoeiq ovdev

HERE

hyd

rj

’EN0AAE,

ov ’EKEI

— No

M GV Kat

x aa

less than 1

human bar), will you be speechless and With how much effect are they employed by Euripides, when Medea, in making her last address to her children, says so concisely, yet with such fulness of meaning ’EKEI rd S’ EN0AAE. E vdaipovolrov Uaryp a^eOier’

would dizzy

(

that is, before a

THERE.

Gorgias, 527, A.

:

Would Your 9.

its

that ye might be blessed, but

father’s

dianofucdeig.

The

primitive local sense

ness.

Here both

THERE

;

all

HERE

hand hath ruined.

Medea 1069. comes directly from

intensive sense of bid :

through, thorough, significant of complete-

offices unite

:

“ carried through

all

intervening states

to the remotest bounds .”

10.

6g ev KaronTpoir, &c.

mirrors, you think

by the Gods.”

“ In the events of their lives, as in

you have seen

This

(reflected) the neglect of all things

fine simile is

exceedingly descriptive of these


CONTRA ATHEOS.

64

OeGjpcucevai rr\v ndvrcov apeXetav tiecov

GwreXetav,

rr\v

11

orcrj

vd)Gnetv de avrrjv , tcelg

ova

elddog avrcov

Tcy -

rcore rep rravrl tjvpddXXercu.

navrcov dvdpeiorare, ndog ov delv do-

d)

rig pi] ytyvd)GHG)v ovd'

r\v

5

dv rvnov 12

nore ovde

idol

,

Xoyov ijvpdaXXeoOat, nepl j3cov dvvarog dv yevoiro eig evdaipovtav 13 re nal dvGdatpova rvx^v. ravra el pev gs m'l-

who

look only upon the surfaces of things, superficial

imnd’kaioi.

James, of those “ who behold their natural faces kGOTTTpG),

men dvdpeg ,

suggests the similar comparison, by the Apostle

It

James

i.,

in a glass

hv

Not “their deeds,” but seeming or supercrimes.” IIpaijig sometimes

Upa^eciv avr&v.

23.

rather, “ the events of their lives,” namely, “ their

prosperity in the midst of

ficial

differing

from the derivatives of

of a similar form terminating in cles, 151

their

all

has almost the sense of nddog, and

may mean

ig.

a condition or state, thus

and even from most verbals

tzoleio,

As

in the Trachiniae of

tt\v

avrov cnconfiv

:

Tor’ dv rig daidoiTO,

IIPAaIN, naKolaiv Tlpu^ig is also a technical term,

tragedy.

It is

olg

kyw f3apvvopai.

used

in reference to the stage or

so applied by Aristotle, in his Art of Poetry, to that

event which constitutes the leading action of the drama.

may life

Sopho-

be some such allusion here to

of such as are here referred

human

to, in

life,

There

and especially the

the light of a drama, a tragic

which has not yet been wound up, or come to its catastrophe, and the issue of which has not yet been seen. T rjv navrov dpeXeiav

Trpc^cg,

The genitive, having a much more extensive significance in Greek than the corresponding possessive case in English, and embracing many more relations, frequently gives rise to constructions which appear to us very harsh. Thus here, ti-Efiv bears to dpekuav

tiEtiv.

the relation of agent, while ndvruv has to

would, perhaps, be better to regard

dew

Ovk

the doctrine

12

.

13.

words

eidcog avrejv ttjv

awTeheiav.

dpekeiav,

as an ellipsis for the

usual expression of the cause or agent, vtco tuv 11.

the relation of ob-

it

them both by

Instead, however, of governing

ject.

it

more

dew.

See Note LXIII., App., on

of a final judgment.

tvtzov.

On

evdaipoviav

the use of this word, see Note LXIV., App. .

.

.

dvedatpova.

in this passage,

and a few

The lines

location and context of these

above (e£ adXiov evdaipoveg

remarks made Note between happiness in the usual

yeyovevai), furnish an admirable illustration of the

XXXVIII., App., on the

difference

,


:

CONTRA ATHEOS.

K Xeivlag

Oei

ode

rog l4= ^vXXapdavoi Xeyovrcov

v\\L(bv

el

tt

rjfxtiv rjde

ri keyeig, naXfbg

o,

r\

yepovoia nepl ,

dv ooi

6 tieog av-

emderjg Xoyov rivog eri dv

d’

pog rov rpirov eiranove

on

ottojgovv e^eig .

^vfinaoa

real

oloOa

ftetiv (bg ovtc

65

yap deoi re

p,ev

15 ,

el

vovv nal avOpoyruv

eloi nal

1 empieXovrai, eycoye ov rcavranaoi (pavXug dv

eirjg ,

(pairjv rjpZv

worldly sense of the term, and blessedness. The passage may be “ Without giving heed to this type of life, that is, with-

paraphrased

:

out keeping in

mind

word rvnov) of

the

this general notion (see

Note LXIV., App., on

their contribution (ovvr&eiav) to the

good of the

whole, you will be able to form no right judgment respecting blessedness or

its

adopted

in

we

Or, if

opposite.”

take the other view of Gwreksba,

Note LXIII., App., and regard

it

as including the idea of

consummation final reckoning &c., we then have a sentiment almost the same with the famous declaration of Solon to Croesus, end,

,

,

related

by Herodotus,

lib.

32,

i.,

and which sometimes appears

the tragic poets as an ancient saying

;

in

as in the beginning of the

Trachiniae of Sophocles

A oyog fiev tig

egt

’APXAIOS

avOptinov (pavelg

ovk dv aitiv * EK/idOoig fiportiv, npiv dv

....

d-dvoi rig

There cannot be a doubt but that this is to be taken here in its purest and highest sense, as referring to the One “ The the One True God of Socrates and Plato. Ineffable Supreme Deity himself, the very being whose existence and Providence we have been proving may he assist you.” Had he referred in any way to the local Divinity of Athens or Pallas, he would have used 14.

'O dsog avrog.

the feminine avr 15. Tzpog

rov rpirov enuKove.

Keep

listening (as the present im-

perative here most impressively signifies) while

we

selves to the third head of our argument.”

evidently spoken

not

to the

This

is

address our-

two companions who, with the speaker, formed the

yepovoia mentioned above, but to the imaginary young disputant so frequently referred

to.

It

has been shown,

that he exercises a special Providence

are almost equivalent to faith,

Heb.,

xi., 6.

It

1.

1st, that

GOD

IS

;

2d,

which two propositions

what the apostle assigns as the objects of to be shown that he is not

now remains

easily propitiated, or turned

and

;

away from

the right, by the offerings

Tne speaker F 2

evidently looks back witb

sacrifices of the wicked.

ov ravrdnaoi QavTiog.


,

66

CONTRA ATHEOS. 3

anodedelxOai,

rd 6e napaLrrjrovg av rovg Beovg elvcu rol-

*

glv adiKOVGi de^opevovg ttclvtl

2

ovre tlvI ovy^coprjrsov

dCopa,

9

r av Kara dvvapuv rponcp eXey/creov.

KA. KaXXtoF A0. $eps

npog

6rj

ylyvoiVT av 4 9

elneg

TroiCbpiv re chg Xeyeig.

tietiv avrtiv,

fjplv, el

riva rponov TrapaLTrjrol

yiyvoiv-o av

;

teal

riveg

f(

ttoIol ti-

a good deal of satisfaction, to what he regards as his master-piece

argument

in this

word 2.

:

the subtle disquisition about self-motion.

tzclvtI rpoTru.

On

the

Note XLI., App.

TrapaiTrjTovg see

He seems

most important

to regard this as the

more

position of the three, as being, in fact,

vital to the soul’s highest

any speculative belief in the Divine existence, or in a Providence without it. Hence, he says, “ there must be no yielding here, and no pains must be spared in the refutation of this pernicious error,” namely, that the wicked can easily propitiate the

interests than

Deity by 3.

gifts.

Ay never wholly

$epe by.

or apa.

It

loses

its

force as an inferential par-

however, much less strength as an

It has,

ticle.

imports in such a connexion as

illative

than ovv

a going on of the

this,

argument, a transition to another head, with an implication that

something previous had been proved ner.

It implies, therefore,

when

in a solid

and satisfactory man-

thus employed

in

argument, a con-

sciousness of strength, and an anticipation of victory. Hence, when joined with aye, <j>epe, 7 eye, or with imperatives generally, it has been l

most appropriately styled 6y 4.

ylyvoivr’ av.

The use

“Would

hortativa.

they become propitiated or placable!”

of yiyvoivTo instead of elev implies that they are to be re-

There is in the Protagoras, 340, c., a which the true sense wholly depends on the distinction between these two substantive verbs. It is there yevbodat, ayaOov, and shown that the two propositions

garded as previously angry. still more striking example,

ttov elvcu

in

ayadov, instead of being the same, as Protagoras rashly sup*

posed, are, in fact, so widely distinguished, that one

For a bad man

other false. only

difficult ,

made good,

but impossible.

or

who

cult, but delightful.

NE20AI

is so

to

become good

Ov yap tovto

TO BE

good,

is

6 IIcrraKog b?ieye

2 ipuovtbyg,

uTiXu, to

is

own

For one who has become,

by nature,

ecd'hov, cboTrep 6

in his

true and the

strength is

or

who has

not only not

to

'EMMENAI.

not,

been diffi-

TF.-


i

-

:

CONTRA ATHEOS„ veg* ovreg

67

dp^ovrag pev avaynalov nov yiyveoOai rovg

;

6 ye diOLfirjGovrag rov drcavra evreXeyfag ovpavov. 1

KA.

5.

OvTcog.

rives

“Who

noZoi rives.

fj

being, or of

what kind being'!”

these two questions rives refers to the offices the to hold to

manner

in

tained in

suggested 6.

In

Gods are supposed

men, and noZoi rives to the nature of those offices, or the which they are discharged. The answer to rives is conThe answer to rcoZoi rives is the word apxovras below. in

the specification of the several kinds of rulers set forth.

diOLKrjGovras.

Who

The

are going to administer.”

future

used, not in reference to the actual state of things, but sub“ on our scheme are jectively, to the state of the argument.

here

is

Who

going, &c., or tering.”

whom we

are going

to

represent as actually adminis-

So, also, the mathematician employs eo rat and eaovrai in is no sequence which the mind conceives of the

the statement of his demonstration, although there or futurity, except in the relations of truths,

which

mode

in

themselves are older than time or space.

in

Subjectively, to the demonstrator, they

may

appear, and be stated

as consequences yet future. 7.

“ Actually as opposed to potentially .”

evrehextis-

Correspond-

,

Hence the noun

ing to ev evepyeia , as opposed to ev Svvagei.

ev -

much used by Aristotle, as contrasted with vvagishave differed much about the etymology of this word. The derivation, however, from evrelys, perfect complete and fyw, seems satisfactory, both as respects form and meaning. That which relexeia, so

<5

Philologists

,

exists only ev Svvdpe KivrjGLs) is its lish,

and

inchoate

and imperfect

to signify not

activity ,

much more than

energy ( avro

actually , in

Eng-

truly as matter of fact, ,

therefore not a good representative of evrehex&s, although

is difficult to find

any other substitute

evSeTiex^ia, continuance , duration , is

:

The word

completion and perfection.

has come is

is

,

for

it.

There

is

it

another word,

which some confound with this, as 22 i., Quintum genus adhibet,

done by Cicero, Tusc. Disp.,

ipsum animum evrelex^tav (evdel exetav) apThe etymology of ev Tov arcavra ovpavov i*s here put for the Selexeia is very uncertain. whole universe the Heavens and all things they contain. It is vacans nomine pellat,

quasi

;

et sic

quamdam

continuatam motionem.

very

much

xxviii., the

24:

like the

He

Hebrew

expression

looketh under the whole

Heaven of Heavens, that

is, all

Sd nnrb Heaven

space —

,

or

as

— CD'S#

the universe.


68

CONTRA ATHEOS.

AO.

apa rtot npoaepepelg tg>v apxbvrcov }} rivtg dvvarbv rjplv arteuia^ovoi rvyxaveiv psi^oatv norepov rjvcoxoi nveg av elev tolqvtol ^evycov

’AA/l’

rovrotg^ cjv

eXarrovag

;

8

apiXk copevcov,

7

/

nXoicdv Kvdepvrjrat

Oelev Grparonedcov dpxovot tlglv .

;

raxa

elrj

<

5

de Kav aitemaa

dv

teal

vogojv no -

9

Xepov evXadovpevoig larpolg eoucevat nepl Gcopara, (opyotg nepl (pvrdjv yeveoiv elojOvtag bo6(j)v

X0

i

npoodexopevoig

tzal

rj

x a ^ £7T dg

copag

ye -

rj

did

htel-

noipvicov eniGTaraig.

yap Gvytcex^prjtcapev 11 rjplv avrolg elvai pev rov ovpa vov noXXtiv peorov ayaOtiv, elvai de teal rtiv evavricov

drj

n Xeiovoov 12 8.

gjv is

de rcbv

prj ,

13

pax?}

adavarog egtiv

dfp (j)apev,

genitive by reason of rvyxaveiv

—quos assequi possimus,

-

,

rj

or,

quorum compotes esse possimus. 9. vogov 7Tolepov. The language employed above respecting contending chariots and commanders of camps, suggested the representation of the physician in the same style, as carrying on a war with diseases. In all this, however, he has in mind the allusion which soon follows to what he styles pdxv dOuvaroq the grand and ,

universal conflict between the powers of good and evil, on which

we have

dwelt at length, Note LXVI., App.

careful circumspect , ,

cautious .”

Hence

E vlabeopae.

De if

in this last sense, as Prof.

Sera Numinis

Vindicta,

,

10.

did

TirjSu,

<f)66(ov.

A apdavo,

An

is to

handle carefully,

rect.

to

92),

it is

al-

seldom,

of the

w ord, r

touch with caution.

adverbial phrase similar to did It

God;

Notes to Plutarch,

The primary conception

alaxvvrjg, &c., with fear or timidly. (j>66ov.

in his

has well observed (page

ever, found in classic usage.

from ev and

Hacket,

be

fearful especial-

to be timid,

ly to be occupied with religious dread, to be devout towards

though

“ To

(fuliag,

di'

sometimes has the form

did

The common reading is did <f>66ov, which is certainly incorCompare the phrase <5t’ dnexOsiag, ASsch., Prom. Vine., 121.

11. kneidy

ydp GvyKcxopyKapev.

This admission could only have

referred to the fact of the mixture of good and evil in the world, and

which may be regarded as expressed in what is said page 32, line 3. Plato has in no other part of this book, except in the present passage, told us which he thought had the preponderance. For an extended examination of this 12. 7tIelovwv de t&v prj. passage and the doctrine contained, see Note LXV App. On this remarkable expression, see Note 13. pdxv adavarog. ,

LXVI., App.


,

CONTRA ATHEOS. roiavTT] nal cpvXanrjg

a

,

^avpaarrig

x4=

69

rjplv ftsoL re a\ia nal 6aipovsg^ rjpslg

nal 6atpovo)v ovvrjg

(jd)£ei

(pQeipec 6s rjpdg

6s

n

(psg l6ot,

pa

a6inla nal v&ptq psrd deppo2

tistiv sp'ipvxotg

olnovoat 6vvapsoi. /3pa -

nal rdyds av rtg tgjv rotovrcov svotnovv r\\uv ipv%al

6rj

rtvsg

sm

yr]q oinovoat , nal

nsnrrjpsvat , drjXovorf ^pidjdstg,

5

cra-

a6tnov A rj*

npog rag r&v (pvX a<

See Note LXYI., App.

14.

15. 'deol nal dalpoveg 1.

6’

6s dtnatoavvif nal OGXppoavvr] psra (ppovrj-

osevq, sv ralg rtiv

%v

fvppaxoi 6e av nrrjpara dstiv

deofievrj

3

g ufri

.

.

.

dLKcuoGvvri.

icrypara deuv. See Note LX VII., App. See Note LXVIII., App., on the ancient

division of the four cardinal virtues.

“Animated, spiritual, or moral powers and from physical agencies, or what he elsewhere styles second working motions, or second causes. Ay, as an inferential particle, relates 3. xfjvxal dy nveg km yrjg. back to what precedes sir eidy yap, &c. What followed came in by way of parenthetical ejaculation, suggested by the previous meta2.

efj.ipvx°tg

dwapecL.

faculties,” in distinction

phorical allusions and mention of nohe/xog calling up to

mind the

great conflict of the universe, as presenting a bold and striking contrast with the petty conceptions of the

He now

men whose

doctrine he

is

returns to them, and resumes the

more natural “ There are order of the argument, which had been interrupted. then, (it seems), certain souls dwelling upon the earth,” &c., namely, such as would measure the Gods by themselves, and attribute to them all those imperfections and weaknesses which pertain to such earthly guardians and rulers as we have mentioned by way of comdisproving.

parison. 4.

The

:

dypiudeig.

word.

mony with such

as

drj?i ovotl

seems

to

is clear, evidently,

There should, we

The usual

two words, dylov on. require that it be taken and

generally given as

is

construction, however,

written as one 5.

This

dyTiovon.

&c.

think, be a

comma

after this

rendering, ferocious, would not here be in har-

we have below — netdovGc dun date It might much better be translated referring not so much to the wildness and

expressions as

Tioyuv, nal kv evKTaiaig knudalg. brutal, or, rather, brutish

,

fierceness of their dispositions, as to the stupidity and beastly gross-

ness of their conceptions.

men who have no

meant by these terms to indicate any more than the beasts, of theii

It is

right notions,


70

CONTRA ATHEOS.

K(*)v 'iftvx&g

apa kvvgjv

,

?)

ra^ rCbv vopicov,

rj

npdg rag rcov

iravranaocv anporaroov deonorow npoGntirrovaat ttelQov,

true relations to

state it

;

God and

the universe.

Aristotle, in his Ethic.

seems to use the term in this sense, to denote a as much below what is properly human as the Divine is above

Nicomach.,

vii., 1 ,

although he applies the epithet to a class of

E^ig

av

eItj

6it}\ov6ti Trj 'ftypiufiELa uvtlOe[aevt).

^

correspond well to the Hebrew lxxiii.,

22

Psalm

xcii.,

7,

wore

:

ti-ela

rj

to

as used Psalm xlix., 11

,

;

.

;

strikingly in

is

men

would seem here

xii., 1 The sentiment, xxx., 2 harmony with the whole train of

Proverbs,

xcii., 7.

;

3

It

thought in which Plato here indulges respecting the views such

men

The brutish man (-^ 3

entertain of the Divine justice.

knoweth not and the gross ,

man

l

(

7

'

D3

,

fr°

m

,

To make

'ftypiudEig

&r}pi66rjg)

carnosus pin guis fuit)

understandeth not this that when the wicked flourish be destroyed forever.

,

,

it is

may

that they

agree with Tpvxuc would be

exceedingly harsh, not only in respect to the construction, but also as regard the sense.

apa

icwtiv.

when

apa,

There

it,

and then

Hogeveen is

The

but

an example

by

styles

little, if it

rj,

which follows twice,

supplying of another

rj,

or, rather,

justifies, as

an

it,

i.,

65

:

EvxcoXfjc ETUfiEfityErai, eW’ EKaropbrjcin

such cases, apa

any, significant of

does not wholly lose

as he supposes, does

be-

eIte,

will be in all respects parallel to the Iliad,

it

"Ejt’ ap'

ever,

a peculiar force and elegance in this particle

thus employed.

in similar cases, the

fore

is

it

its

This,

conjecturalis.

its real force.

Even

power of concluding.

denote the reason

why

Apollo

in

howsuch

Neither,

was

angry.

That he had reason for anger was taken for granted from the fact. Since he was angry, therefore the prophet was to tell the cause, So, in this wT.ether it was on account of a vow or a hecatomb. passage, we may render “ Being evidently brutish, and approaching :

(or falling upon) their keepers, be they dogs or shepherds, or rulers

of the highest grade, they would persuade them by flatteries, n &c.

That is, since they are brutish ( therefore apa), it matters not to them whether they be dogs or shepherds, &c. because they are of this gross and animal nature, they make no distinction between the highest and the lowest class of guardians, but'Stupidly imagine that :

they

all

may

is felt in

be influenced

alike.

Thus

the inferential force of apa

giving vividness and a great addition of meaning to the

sentence, while yet

it is

free from the

encumbrance and clogging

ef-


CONTRA ATIIEOS. cl

6

73

reiaig Xoycov, xal ev evxTaiaig tigIv enipdaig (chg at

(jyrjpat

xaxtiv) e^eivai TrXeovexTovoi oepioiv

(j)aocv al tu>v

ev dvOpdonoig rraoxeiv prjdev

^aAenw.

(f)apev d’ elvai ttov

8

to vvv ovopa^opevov apdpTrjpa

nXeove^iav

rrjv

oaprdvoig GivpaGi voarjpa xaXovpevov xai eviavT&>v Xoipov

7

ev pev

ev de c5 paig erCov

,

ev de uoXeoi xal uoXiTeiaig , tovto

,

av to prjpa peTea^paTLopevov adixiav. ,

KA. HavT&TtaoL pev ovv. A0. Tovto v dr} tov Xoyov avayxalov Xeyeiv tov Xeyov Ta <bg eioi ovyyvcopoveg del fieol Tolg tcjv dvOpojmx)v add xoig xal adixovGiv, av avToig tuv adixrjpaTCOV Tig anove,

pxj,

xaOdnep xvgI Xvxoi tgjv dprcaopaTCdv opixpd dnove -

poiev , ol de rjpepovpevoi Tolg dcopoig Gvyx^polev Ta ,

,

ipvia diapnd^eiv. dp’ ovx ovTog 6 Xoyog 6 7TapacT7]Tovg elvai deovg

KA. OvTog pev A0. Tig iv ovv

7ro-

t&v cpaGxovTGdv

;

ovv. to)V

d?j

popped evTGiv arreixa^cov

tt

opoiovt,

(bvXaxag elvai fteovg ovx av xaTayeXaGTog yiyvoiTO av -

ogtigovv

Opd)TCG)v

;

rroTepov xvdepvrjTaig , Xoidq ye olvov

9 xvigg\7 re napaTpenoaevoig avTOig, dvaTpenovGi de vavg

t€ xal vavTag

;

argumentative statement.

feet of a formal

alia, &c.,

when employed with

This use of upa, yap,

reference to what

is

supposed to

exist in the mind, rather than in the expression, is one of the striking beauties in the

Greek language.

have the sense of ferocious, sition,

it

or, like

If -&r)pid6eig here

most must

a wild beast in respect to dispo-

should be taken in connexion with npog rag pvxag, and in \

would imply, that having been ferocious towards their keepers, they afterward seek reconciliation by flatteries, &c. Ast connects ftripiddeig with npog ipvxag, although he gives it the com-

that case

paratively

weak

sense, agrestes.

agrestes ad custodum animos.

A?iimos igitur quosdam,

fyc,,

patet

Whatever view, however, we may

7.

its relation to upa will remain the same. See Note LXIX., App. rz'keovei'iav. See Note LXX., App.

8.

av avroig, &c.

9.

TzapaTpenopevoig.

take of tiripiddeLg, 6. tt eiOovoi.

See Note LXXI., App. “ Turned aside from the path of right ”

The


72

CONTRA ATHEOS.

KA.

Mrjdaptig.

A0. 'AAA’ ovtl

fxfjv

fjvLoxoiGL

10

ye ev dpLXXxi owreray

vno dcopedg erepoiOL

pevoig, neioOelocv

rrjv vinrjv £evyeoi

npodovvac KA. A ecvrjv yap elnova A eyoig av A eyo)v rov Xoyov .

TOVTOV.

A0. Ov opyoig

c

9

ovde orpar^yolg ye ovd larpolg, ovde ye -

p,r\v

,

ovde vopevoi prjv, ovde tlol aval K,en7\k7\pevoig vno

?iVKG)V.

KA. E vcfrrjpei. 11 ndjg yap dv A0. ’AAA’ ov navr(x)v (pvXancov ;

ra pbeyiora

i]pZv oi

KA. HoXv ye metaphor a right

in the

fteot

elol peyiorot, real nepi

;

.

word suggests the conception of a deviation from evidently intended to furnish a case of parano-

It is

line.

navreg

masia with avaTpenovcn. 10.

TivioxotGi

above. is

It is

All these datives are to be referred to 6/iocovg

.

who

not the reinsman here

supposed to be prayed unto

;

and

offers the prayer, but

who

yet, although in this respect

we cannot help thinking that Plato had in mind some of those prayers which Homer occasionally puts into the mouth of his heroes, for aid not only in the accomplishment of wickthe cases are not similar,

ed purposes, but also

in

very

trivial

circumstances.

As,

when they

pray for assistance in the games, in the horse-race, and especially

when

the goddess Pallas, in aid of her favourite knight Diomed, as-

sumes the

reins and overturns the chariot of

Admetus.

Iliad, xxiii.,

390. 11. ful

in

E v(j>7/pec.

A

how you speak

strong and earnest word of caution.

—speak words of good omen.”

It

“Be

care-

was employed

the sacrifices to caution the people against the utterance of any

inauspicious words during the religious rites.

and impressive example of

its

There

use in the Republic,

is

a very fine

lib. vi.,

509, B.,

where, at the suggestion of Glaucon, that 'H dovij, or Pleasure, might be The Good, Socrates cries out, EvtyTjpei,, “ utter words of good

omen, or be cautious

in

your language

be blasphemy in the very conception.

intimating that there might

The same

feeling is excited

here by the bare thought, that the course of the argument had required him, however necessarily, to connect the mention of the

Deity with such comparisons as had been used


CONTRA ATHEOS.

T ovg

73

ndXXiord re repaypar a vXdrrovrag <5ia^vXatczj npog dperrjv tcvvtiv x ei povg avrovg <pepovrdg re 12 Kdl dv 0pd) 7T(x)v ueacov elvai (prjoopev, oi to dittatov ova av

A0.

dr)

(j)

,

,

j

13 evena dcbpcov napa ddi/corv dvdptiv avootcog

rrore 7rpodolev

dedopevcjv

;

KA. Ovdaptig Meow.

12.

ovre dvettrog b Xoyog tw v re

Men

biute animals.”

14

.

Gods and the

holding a middle rank between

Ast’s rendering, mcdiocribus

,

is

reepi red-

a very poor one,

would denote those who held a middle rank among men themselves, or ordinary men. M eoog, however, may perhaps have because

here the

it

same sense with

we

pirpioc, just , equitable , although

do not

any example of such usage. This meaning of pirpiog undoubtedly came from that old system of ethics founded on the say-

recollect

ing prjdev dyavj and which Aristotle afterward ol his doctrine

dvoolug dedoftevov.

13.

oj the wicked is tCjv re

14.

connect this

num

Compare Proverbs,

7xepl

(to

following,

if

27

xxi.,

:

Ast would read

ovrov.

irdoav

ovrov ) with the preceding sentence.

Neque

:

the sacrifice

There

common

connecting rov (as in the

we may regard

t£>v

ye and ,

In accordance

tolerabilis est haec oratio liomi -

in quovis impietatis genere versantium. in

the foundation

an abomination.

with which view he renders

however,

made

of Ethical Means.

is

no

difficulty,

reading) with doebov

the repetition as arising from the length

of the intervening clause, and also as intended to add force and vehemence to the whole sentence. “ Of all those who are con-

versant with every species of impiety, this holds to this opinion would, of

all

who

much more

with the preceding,

we

The word

in the

implies that

By

same

men

connecting rov re or rov ,

is

ye,

so characteristic of Clinias, and

so forcibly expressed by the words ovdapoq, &c.,

standing by themselves.

ed

,

should also destroy the fine effect of the pas-

sionate burst of indignation which is

Avrexopevog “ holding

obstinately to this doctrine than to Atheism, or

even the denial of a Providence.

which

braces himself against something for the

purpose of giving tenacity to his grasp. cling

so tenaciously

,

be esteemed the worst and most impious.” firmly to,” like one

man who

wicked men most justly seem to

light as at

K ivdvvevei, page 18

in this

(2).

passage,

may be

when

regard-

See remarks on the word

in

that place.

So, also, here the primary sense appears through the

secondary.

‘‘

He

ing thought, or he

is in

danger of being judged, he runs a risk of be-

is liable to

the imputation,” Ac.

G

.


a

74

-

CONTRA ATHEOS.

oav aoebetav

ntvbvvevet

oi tgjv

Trojg o

ravrrjg rr\g bofrjg av-

rexopevog navrcov av rcov aoedcbv nefcpioOat butaiorara Hantorog re elvat nai aoebeorarog.

AO. Td pev

6?)

nporeOevra rpta deot re ,

empeXelg, nai Trapa to btaatov

(hg

rot (fxppev itcavcog anobebetxOat

15

,

KA. U(bg yap ov

cog slot,

nai

<hg

rravranaotv anapatrrj -

nov.

nai ovpxprjcpot ye rovrotg rolg Xoyotg

;

eopev.

K at

AO.

1

ye ncog ocpobporepov bid (ptXovet

natt&v avOpcbncov. rovrov ye prjv

ftlav r£)v

K Xetvia,

urjv etprjrat

i

Tce^tXoveiurjrai, prj

rcore

even,

,

d)

rovvreg efovoiav elvat ocptotv a (bovXovrat irpdrretv noi,

a

dfj

cpihe

Xoyotg 7]yd)vrat npaoi

Ha-

2

nai ooa nai ola nepi deovg btavoovvrat. irpoQv-

ravra vecorepug elnetv rjplv yeyovev. el be n nai (3paxv npovpyov TrercoirjKapev elg ro neiOeiv nrj rovg dvbpag eavrovg pev piorjoat, rd d’ evavria irug rjdrj orep%at, naXCog rjplv eiprjpevov av elrj ro rtpooipiov aoedetag nept,

pia

[Lev brj did

,

vopo)v.

KA.

’A/l/l a

eXntg

el

be

prjj

ro ye rov Xoyov yevog ovh

alrtaoerat rov vopoder7]v. 15 •

(j)C>pEv

hcavtig dnodE^elxOai nov.

mathematician’s onsp

eSel deigai,

This

is

something

quod erat demonstrandum.

like the It is

the

formal conclusion of the long argument or preamble to the law

which

is

now

to follow against those impious

the lawgiver so

much

cQodporepov.

1.

men, who have given

trouble.

This

is

said in reference to the apparently harsh

which have been used in this third branch of the discussion against those who abused the doctrine of the Divine placability, and especially to the strong language a few lines above. The other epithets

parts of the argument, instead of needing apology in this respect,

were marked by a peculiar mildness towards

his

supposed perverse

opponents.

a

2.

drj

teal

oca

teal ola.

“ Whatever things, and however enor-

mous, and however bad.” 'Oca often, when the context requires it, is to be taken in a bad sense, implying not simply the number or quantity, but the enormity of the things referred to.

So, also, ola

not only imports quality, but sometimes a bad quality, of whatevci kind that ,

is

however wicked.


CONTRA ATHEOS. AO. Merd to

irpooipiov rocvvv

75

Xoyoqf olog av two vo -

poov epprjvevg, opOtiq yiyvoiTo fjpZv, npoayopevcjv e%Lorao-

Oai iraoi rolg aoebeoi rponcdv tCov avrojv eig rovg eva edeZg. roZg de pi) rceidopevoig. doedeiag ode eoro) nepi vopog

*

’E av

rig aoeby Xoyoig sir ’ epyoig 6 TraparvyxdvGJv apvveTG), ,

paZvcov 7rpdg ap^ovrag levoi

(.

,

rtiv de dpxbvTO)v oi npCi)TQi ttvOo -

4,

to nepi tovtgjv anodedeiypevov npiveiv

TTpog

orj-

f

ditiaa-

KaTa Tovg vopovg eav de Tig anovoaaa ap^rj pi] dpa TavTa avTrj doede'iaq viroduwg yiyvecr5 6o) Tip edeXovTi TipoopeZv vnep tcov vopcjv, eav de Tig cxpXq,

Trjpiov elaayaydvTCOv

.

,

6 TipaTG) to dmaoTrjpiov ev enaoTip tcov naO’ ev aGedovvTCjv

pev ovv virapx^ro) navi, decpo)T7]piG)v de 7

Tiprjpa. deapog 3.

pera to npootpiov

sisting of three parts

:

The whole law

’koyog.

is

regarded as con-

the preamble or argument, the declaration or

The

exhortation, and the penalty.

whole of the book, the second

is

first

has occupied nearly the

despatched

in

a single sentence,

and then all that remains is to specify briefly the several punishments for the several grades of impiety. Ordo etoayayovTov npog to dmacTripiov dnode4. Tcpog to nepi.

The

deiypevov Kpiveiv nepi tovtov.

tribunal here referred to

may

be

found described in the ninth book of the Laws, 855, D. “ To avenge the law.” It sometimes has this 5. Tipopelv vnep.

same sense with

the dative

:

Tipupelv tivi , “ to avenge any one.”

In the middle voice, “to take revenge, or to avenge one’s self.”

The noun npopia,

as well as Ttotg generally has reference to vin,

from preventive or remedial punishment.

dictive, in distinction 6.

ev enaaTip.

tion, in the

Ast would read here ev

common

reading,

is

e/caorov.

ciently so to justify the correction proposed. originally,

The

construc-

somewhat unusual, but not Tiprjpa

suffi-

would mean,

an estimate a fine ; but it is applied to any species of punmay be rendered here, generally, pocnam or pcenas. ,

ishment, and

Ordo

TipuTG) to dmaGTrjpiov Tiprjpa ev eKaoTcp

equivalent to saying

tuv

/cad’

ev acjedovvTav ,

in each individual case of each, or according to

each particular offence.

This

common

Stephanus and and thus connect the whole of this, down to tyrjprjv tivu, as an appendage to the preceding short sentence. Without this, it is said, the sense must re* main suspended. It may be a question, however, whether this con 7.

deopoTrjpiov

Ast would put a

de.

comma

is

the

reading.

after navi, read ye for de,


76

CONTRA ATHEOS.

OVTGJV EV

noXet TpitiV, kvog

ayopav ourrjpLag

Tcepl

fJLSV,

ttotvov

9

rocg nXsiOTOig

evekcl rotg rtoXXolg rcov dcopdrojv,

,

kv'og 6e , c

TXf

nepl rov rco v vvtcroop ovXXeyop,evG)v %vXXoyov, oco-

ppoviorrjpiov

9

ETrovopa^opEvov kvog 6s av Kara pkorjv tt)v ,

av

%o)pav, omjTTEp

on paAtora

sprjpog te teat oyg

rog q Tonog rtpcoptag e^^v kncovvptav ,

alone

sideration

is

sufficient to justify

11

cjirjprjv

aypccjjra-

rtva. nspl

the change, although so

Such cases of suspension do occur in the Platonic writings, in places where all efforts at correction fail and in the present case some might suppose even the irregularity to be more tolerable than the attaching so long an appendix to so short a clause, and by so feeble a connective. We would suggest, moreover, whether it would not be better to connect this with 7r ept aoebetav ds dvrov below. There is, it is true, something awkward in making the enumeration of offenders an apparent inference from the number of prisons, yet still there is something of a natural connexion between the two ideas, so that the one might easily suggest the other, al slight.

;

though 8. is,

in

an inverted order.

Common

koivov rots 'kAelotols.

to the ordinary class of offenders.

This

is

precisely the phrase of the English

—in corporis

keeping of the body9.

to the people at large,” that 'ZcoTr/ptag

The

GutypovioTripLov.

h>Ena rcov ooparov.

common law—-for the

safe

custodiam.

police prison , or,

more

properly, the house

of correction, the place where lawless people are sobered. “ In the very spot in which.” 10. oTzrf'KEp. (!>? on paAtora ayptd-

These particles, thus combined, form the strongest superlapower of the Greek language. The three are seldom found in this manner in one expression. It may be styled a double rarog.

tive in the

super-superlative. 11. ETzovvyiav Qrjpyv.

common fame &e.

The

first

(Kara

tion, discipline, or

or

tyrjpriv),

prison

may be regarded as having the Or it may be rendered, “ having in by common report, the appellation,”

^ypijv here

force of an adjective—famosam.

was

for safe

reformation

custody

;

the second for correc-

the third, the prison of vengeance

;

(npwpiac), of strictly penal restraint, intended for examples, and not for the

good of the offender.

Plato seems to have in mind the de-

partments in Hades, which he specifies in the Gorgias, and to represent

human laws

same grades with their adeAQoi, oi hv Atdov NOMOI,

as proceeding by the

brethren of the other world

:

oi

yperepot

This prison would be analowhich the avia-rot, or incurable are

as he styles them in the Crito, 54, C.

gous to that division

in Hell to

,


77

CONTRA. ATHEOS. aoedeiav 6e ovtuv pev, dvo

alriaig psv rpioiv, alonep

,

dpapravovrcov

dianpioecog a$ia yevrj rcbv irepl

real

ovtc torjg oi>d’ opo'iag dittrjg

,

real dirjXOo-

yevopsvcov,

eg kndarr\g rr]£ roiavrrig alrtag

d’

av yiyvoivro a dv

12 ,

deopeva. olg yap

vopi^ovoi deovg elvai ronapanav fjdog cpvoei

prj

Sl-

rd dela

,

rrpocr-

yevrjrai duiaiov piGovvreg re y'lyvovrai rovg nanovg nal ,

,

to dvo^epaiveiv 13

npoatevrat nparreiv tov^* ts ,

pevyovot

<

<56^

/eat TOt>£

,

dinacovg tgjv avOpcbnoiv

prj

duiaiovg crepyovoiv

$£65^ eprjpa

r?/

ovre rag roiavrag npa^eig

rrjv aditdav ,

1

*

av

olg 6 ’

elvai irdvra, anpdreiai

15

7rpd^ tt/

re rjdovcov

consigned as everlasting admonitions, and spectacles of the Divine

vengeance

drexvug napaSetypara dvyprypevovg

:

AE2M12THPK2I, dsapara

teal

vovderrjpara.

ticet

tv

A ISov

tv

ru

Gorgias, 525, C.

An

elliptical mode of expression, which who are conversant with impiety, being so from three causes which we have described, and there being two classes from each such cause, there would be, of those who of-

12. nepl dasSetav St ovreov.

may be

thus rendered

“ Those

:

fend against Divine things, six kinds worthy of discrimination, and requiring neither an equal nor a similar sentence.” 13. r<5

that

is,

Svgxepaivstv.

By having

a disrelish for wrong doing,”

a dislike arising from habit, prejudice, or an early bias of

the mind remaining in spite of their Atheism.

Nothing could convey a more vivid idea of the

14. $efiv epypa.

horrors of Atheism than this expression.

word

Iprjpa

crowds

serted lonely solitary , waste, forsaken ,

,

Every meaning of the

once into the serious mind

at

desolation in proportion to

its

— a wilderness

boundless extent.

;

a universe de-

full

of horror and

Probably the best

when it happens to invade the mind, and more any speculative argument, would be to yield up the soul for a season to the deep gloom of so insupportable a thought. Of course we mean not the hardened and scoffing Atheist, but one to whom the most transient shade of skepticism on this point is a antidote to Atheism,

effective than

To

source of pain.

quote again the line of Empedocles,

we may

well say, in reference to such a one, detkog

The

d’ c5

oKOTosccra tiefiv nipi dofa peprjlev.

expression $e£)v eprjpa seems used here by Plato as an an-

tithesis to that of Thales, referred to 15.

iKpuretat

i

.

See remarks on

typoGvvy cacohaGLa, &c.,

page

this

41, tietiv elvai nTiypy navra.

word

Note LXVIII., App.

G

2

in

connexion with au*


.

CONTRA ATHEOS.

78

Xvtx£)v irpoGnsGcoGi, pvrjfiat ts la^vpal teal paOrjastg

teal

psv

napcoGL, to

o^slai

vnap^OL

teoivov

naOog

*

vopi^siv tisovg apepolv 1 dv sv

pi)

6 s to)v akXcov av 0 pd) 7TG)v Xd) 6 xj,

Tyj

1

spya^oiT av. 6 psv yap 5 Aoycp* ts av nspl tisovg napprjoiag sir] psGTog teal nspl tiv%* otag ts teal opteovg , teal cbg tcov a/iXcjv teaTaysXcbv tci

to psv eXaTTG), to 6 s

tcXslg) teatea

dv sTspovg TOiovTOvg anspya^oLTO, 6 s 6 r) 6 o%d£(i)v 2 psv teaOansp aTspog vog 60 H 0 V 6 s ,

svs 6pag

teal

Ksva^ovTat noXXol psvoc

3 .

XsvteoTsg

4 ,

teal

i

OTpaTrjyoL,

sl 6 r]

&v to psv

'davcLTOiv

1.

sv(j)vi)g

s%

ndoav

1

teal

Tvyxdveov

sipG)viteov

6

dpapTavov to 6s

ujLLcpolv.

withstanding

,

6

&v pavTstg ts

teaTaa-

payyavsiav

testeevr)-

tt)v

teal

Tvpavvot

teal

TsXsTalg 6 s I 6 iaig smbsbov-

9

ysvoiT dv

6 s snueaXovps-

GoepiGTcbv ts snueaXovpsvGiv prjxavae .

6 i) noXXd usv ,

nX rjprjg,

nspl

,

yiyvovTai 6 s s£ avTtov sgtlv ots

6rjprjy 6poi

6 vo

teal

dltcrjg pi)

tovtcjv

rd 6 s vopcjv a^ta tisosug

to ovx evog ov 6 s 6volv a^ta vovOsx'rjGscog

dpa

teal

6 sGpcbv

This word relates back to the preceding sentence, notit

had been apparently

fully closed

and takes

classes, as far as they hold the atheistic sentiment in

in both

common

al-

though with different practical results. 2.

6

See Note LXXII., App., on the

pev yap loyu.

cies of Atheists, according to the Platonic division.

See Note LXXII., App.

EV(j)vr/g.

3.

KEKivripivoL.

gaged

different spe-

A o£d&v ....

in

Who

are most strenuously and violently en-

every species of juggling or legerdemain.”

Not simply “ those who attempt private mysteries,” mysteria privata molientes as some render it, but, rather, “those who, by means of such mysteries, plot to deceive other men.” We would, therefore, regard TsXEraig as the dative of the 4.

ettlSeSovTievkote^.

,

instrument. 5.

p7ix avai cotyLGT&v.

The

abstract

is

an expression equivalent to ol ralg “ those who use sophistical arts.”

It is

used here for the concrete.

pr)x ava

go^lgtcjv xpdpEvoi,

See Note LXXII., App. That is, either one or two deaths would be too small a punishment for him. No one will think this sentence too severe, who has carefully studied those specimens of 6.

to psv EipidviKov

7.

ovx &OQ

ovd e dvolv tiavaToiv.


CONTRA ATHE08. hopEVov. coodVTug 6 e*

(

erepa yevva

to dsovg vopi&iv a^eXelv 6v

/cal

nai to TTdpdLTTjTOvg

,

tclvtxi 6l£Ott]ic6tg)v, Toi)g

TiOepevog

Ti)g

vdjpep,

dXXd

dvo. tovtcov

6t)

p£V vn avotag avev ndurjg dpyrjg ’

,

^ yeyevrjpevovg, eig

te

7'J

to ococppoviOTrjpiov 6

diK.ao-

tlOeoOco prjdev eXclttov etlov ttevte.

d's tgj XP° VCP p^Elg tcov ttoXltc)v dVTolg dXXog 9 ovyyiyvEodo), TrXfjv oi tov vvKTEpivov %vXXoyov kolvgj-

ev tovtg)

VOVVTEg

XovvTEg

VOvPeTT[GEI TE

E7TL

,

10 .

this

'IpVX^ 0(0T7]ptd Opi-

XP° V0 S a vToZg e^eXO^

otclv (T 6

piv 60 KXI ri S

KCLL T%f TTjg

OG)(j)pOV£CV

dVTGJV

abominable character to which

,

we have

tCov dEoptiv, kciv

p£Td

T(x)V OGXj)pO -

referred,

Note LXXII.,

was no

special Provi-

olfCELTG)

App. tJGavTuc

8.

The

tie.

doctrines, that there

Gods were easily to two species of

gave

dence, and that the

propitiated,

each respectively,

offenders, distinguished by

rise

also,

characters analogous to those above presented, and. requiring each

mode and

a different

which was

to

gradation of punishment

;

the mildest form of

be imprisonment in the GoQpovLGTrjpLov, or house of

correction, for a term not less than five years.

Such a law, among

us at the present day, would be thought greatly to infringe on men’s religious liberties

—on

the precious right to be an Atheist or blas-

phemer. wfcrepivov guXXoyov.

9.

10.

n

ki

See Note LXXIII., App. “ Con-

vovOerriGec re Kal ry ryg 'ipvxyg Gurypta ofuhovvreg.

versing with them for admonition, and for the salvation of the soul.” It is interesting to meet thus in a heathen writer with that very

we have been accustomed to asmost sacred ideas of Christianity. We may, perhaps, have

expression with which from infancy sociate the

given

it

too

much of a Scriptural

aspect in our rendering of Gorypia

—the term, as thus presented by Plato, being undoubtedly with a somewhat lower sense—yet in

still,

immense ions,

all

qualifications,

what an

difference does such language, employed in such connex-

make between him and

either of ancient or

all

other philosophers and legislators

modern times.

The phrase Gurypca Tpvxyc seems

have been intended by way of antithesis GtdTrjpLCLQ cuparog, some distance back, page 76 (8). also to

aucfipoviGTTjpiov safe

,

to be taken

was not

to the expression

In this view, the

only intended, in corporis custodio.m lor

keeping of the body but also for the well-beings health

tion of the soul.

,

,

m

the

salva-


:

CONTRA ATHEOS.

80 vg)v

eav 6s

firj ,

& avQig

depstXxi

rrjv rotavr7]v dlfcrjv , tiavd-

11 £rjfuovoQu). ogol d’ av '&7]pLd)6sig ysvcjvrat npog rep &£oi)g ill) vopi^stv rj apEXslg rj 7TapatT7]rovg elvai nara-

rep

,

i

(ppovovvreg 6s tgov avQp g)tto)v 'ipvxayuytiGt, tQ)v (juvrcjv rovg 6s rsdvscdrag

nal tieovg vmGxvovpsvoi Ttsidsiv

,

<j>

10

psv noXXovg

aanovreg 'ipyx^yo^yslv^

<bg

dvotatg re

teat

evxalg

nal ETTcpdalg yorjrEvovrEg, I6td)rag te nal oXag olniag rtoXstg xpr)p,aTG) v

x^P LV smxstpfocn

tovtg)v 6s og av ocpXcov sivat 66

tear

anpag

11

teal

stjaipslv,

rtparG) to 6uiaorrjpiov

avrep Kara vopov, 6s6sGdat psv sv rep rCbv pEGoysiodv 6egfjiG)rr]pL(p

vopopvXdnenv avrovg

raicrrjv 6s vjto ro)v oitcETCov

pi^Eva sXEvdspov pr)6snoTE

irpoGLEvai 6s avrtp

*

Xapdavstv, airodavovra 6s

ng

Xelv ara<pov. sav 6s

it

EXsvOspog GwOdirr ^ 6tnag

clge6el-

,

this

word, page 69

is

The man-

had to the character de-

which corresponds Guile and jugglery,

{typiddeig in the sense of ferocious.

which are the leading ing,

(5).

used here seems to confirm the view that was

is

scribed, page 78, as dolov nal kvtdpag n^prjg,

poorly to

rcbv

snbaX-

In this place reference

there taken.

napa

e£g) tgjv dptcjv

See remarks on

11. ti-ypLudeig.

ner in which

Tpocprjv

y

traits, are

not in keeping with such a

mean-

although perfectly consistent with such beastly views of the

may be entertained by an Atheist, or a Simon Magus, or such a one as is described Note LXXII., App. This term, in its primary sense, is applied to 10. 'tpvxayuycjffc. Divine nature as

Mercury as conductor of the souls of the dead to Hades. In a secondary sense, it is employed of those who pretended to raise ghosts by magic

arts

cvocabant.

:

qui imprccando

A

or sophistry.

third It

is

meaning

et

cantando animas ex inferis in terrain

is to cajole or allure the

Socrates himself, in the

Comedy

A ipvrj

of the Birds, 1551

Tig £gt’ ahovrog, ov

ipvxayoyel

Plato uses the •

11. /car’ anpag.

'Zcokpa.TTjg.

word here in both the two latter Compare the Iliad, N., 772.

Sometimes 200

it

senses.

:

Ntfv &7ieto Tzaoa v

soul by flatteries

thus applied by the buffoon Aristophanes to

\7uog

is

tear’ atcpiyg

ciiTzeivrj.

written as one word, KaraKpag as in Soph-., Antig.* ,


CONTRA ATHEOS.

81

ag tg) eQeXovtl Xayx&veiv vn e^erG). naldag 6e dv raXiTix)

vol

13

12

t%i

ttoXel

Inavovg

,

na -

fxev

ETnpeXovps-

oi tcgv opcpavCbv

nal tovtg)v, d)g ovtgjv opepavtiv, etupeXeloOg)v prjdbv

XElpov tg)v aXXo)v, and o<pfo] rrjv dtnrjv.

notvov

Tijg rjpEpag ?]g

14r

(5’

dv 6 naTrjp

XpSG)v, og EXaTTG) te slg dEovg avTcbv rovg

nai Xdyep ttXtjppeXeIv dv noiol nal

di)

,

Oat tjttov Sea ro ,

p,fj

ai)TG)v

knl rovroig naoc vopov nElodai

et-elvai

noXXovg

epyrn

nal dvorjrovg ylyvecr-

$ eottoXelv napa vopov.

egtg)

f

yap vopog obs rolg ^vpnaGi HEtpEvog dnXtig I spa prjds sig ev idtatg olniatg EicrrjoOG). 'dvEtv 6’ orav ettl vovv I'q T tvt, npbg ra drjpoGta ltg) dvoGiv real rolg lEpsvGi te nal •

Eyx^p^TG) ra

LEpEtatg Xr\g

ftypara, olg.ayvEta tovtgov etu\le -

GWEv^aodG) 6e avrog te nal og dv

eOeX^j ust’ i

avTOv

GWEvx^odai. TavTa 6e ytyvopsva tgjv tolgjv6e x^9 iV lepa

15

egtg).

nal tiEovg ov padtov IdpvEoOat, UEydXrjg ds diavolag j

Tivog dpO&g dpav to toiovtov (pspovTGjg

bOog te yvvai^t te

drj

dta-

ndoatg nal Tolg aodEvovoi ndvTTj nal nivdvvEv-

ovgi nal anopovoiv , onrj Tig dv anopyj, nal TOvvavTiov ,

OTav Evnoptag Tivog Xa6G)VTat naOiEpovv te to napov asl ,

7r aldag

12.

This to others must have been

be dv (lev naraXiny.

intended as the most solemn and impressive part of the law,

more

much

so than the casting of the unburied body beyond the boundaries

The

of the state.

children of the Atheist

were

to

become orphans

immediately after his sentence to solitary imprisonment, that after his civil death.

no longer existing in as in

him

The domestic

lay, his relations to

law, he was

is,

were to be regarded as the case of the man who had sundered, as far

to he utterly

God.

relations

In the language of the Jewish

cut off from his 'people.

These were to be the fifteen have the general charge of all matters relating to orphans, wills, wards, and wardship. They are mentioned book eleventh of the Laws, 924, C. They were to be 13. oi

oldest

tuv

optyavtiv empe’kov[Levoi.

Nomophulakes, who were

to

divided into five classes of three each, to serve successively, each class for one year. 14. kolvov ’em tovtolq ttclgl vopov.

15. 'lepa nal

-d-eovg

See Note LXXIV., App. See Note LXXIV., App.,

ov padiov IdpveoOai.

on private innovations in

religion.


1

CONTRA ATHEOS.

82 /cal 4dvGtag

datpoGi

evx^odac

/cal

/cal Ttatoi decoy,

ev ovetpoig

cj)66ovg /cal

,

IdpvGeig imax^eladac deoZg

ev re (fodapaatv eyprjyoporag did

cog d’

avrcog

bxfjeig

3

povevovrag, e/caGratGi re avrebv /cal

lepd , redoag pev

,

77 dvrcov

vov vopov

ravra

prj /cal

dvGtatg re

avovreg

,

/cal

iroieZv /card

kclI

daipoai

teal

Iva

,

ev

/cal ficopovg

IXecog olopevot

avroZg re ey/cXrjpara irpog deebv iroicbvrai ,

deoeg

aoebovvrcov

evx^Zg, elg drretpov rrjv adi/dav av%-

iroXtg airoXavtf rcbv daebcov

1.

rov vvv Xeyope-

XaOpa rovg deovg

rolg emrperrovGiv ovglv avrebv fieXriooc ?}

ev re icada -

rig ervxs rcbv roiov-

/cal onr]

tcXercrovreg irpa^eGtvf lepd re

Idtatg oi/datg idpvopevoi, iroieZv

iccopag,

tie

irpbg rovrotg de eve/ca rcbv

*

iroXXag airopvrj-

rrotovpevovg ficopovg

a/crj

ohdag ixdoag

polg tdpvopevovg epiriir’kavai, rcov. cov eve/ca XP'U

/cal

2

/cal

nvd

rponov

/cal

,

iraGa ovrcog

rbv

ducatcog.

See Note LXVII., on

natal detov.

Daemons or Genii. eypr/yoporag. When awake

the doc-

trine of the 2.

,

opposed to ev

vigilantes as ,

This presents a case of anakolouthon and }

datives yvvai^i and aodevovoi above.

is

A id

oveipoig.

to be referred to the

cpoSovg here, as

Ast ob-

serves, is to be taken as equivalent to ne^oSrjyevovg, perterritos. 3.

last

The

endcTaioi.

feminine

is

used in reference to

mentioned, although the word belongs equally to

oipeig,

the

cpdcrpaoiv

and

oveipoig. 4.

ev re uadapotg.

5.

tclenrovreg

Sub

dio , in the open air.

npatjeaiv.

In this expression the verbal

noun

npd^eaiv has the force of the verb, and the participle Kkenrovreg

is

it

had been laOpa npdr-

We

have here the ancient

used like a qualifying adverb, as though rovreg. 6.

Kal

ndoa

ovrcog

rj

nokig dno\avy.

universal doctrine of The State as an organic whole or body with a ,

national conscience, in distinction from the very modern notion of a

mere mass or aggregate of individual wills. As an organic whole it was morally responsible for every part. Crime unpunished not only ,

infected the moral health, but brought also justly imputed guilt upon

the entire corporate organization.

No

reader of the Old Testament

can doubt that this doctrine was taught there severity. vii.,

25,

We need only refer in proof

in all its

to the case of

and other striking examples of those

apparent

Achan, Josh,

who troubled

,

ox wrought


:,

,

CONTRA ATHEOS. uev

dr)

vopoOerrjv o deog ov pep'i/jerat. kelgOo yap 6 vopog

&eov ev

ovrog, pi) KEKTTjodac (pavevra

aia,

83

erepa

/ce/crrjpevov

Idiatg obcla/g lepd

opyta^ovra

/cal

eav pev aducov prjdev rov peyaXov

yaapevog avr)p

i]

/cal

/cal

eloayyeXXsTG) rolg vopo$v\a%iv ol de

elg

ra drjpoGia

,

dicoepepeiv lepd

^rjpcovvrov, eog av direvexO'Q

olg oloriGivovv de,

,

,

eh

9

og ov tcadapog

rcaidiov

ducaorrjpiov

drjpo-

avoaiov

elp~

.

rd

tt

poor arr ovr ov

Idia, pi) nelOovreg de

eav de rig

aoebrjoag

pi)

avdpov daedrjpa avoGtov yevryrai (pavepog

elre ev Idcotg idpvoapevog

6o* to

rov de

rd

yvvrj /ce/CTryral rig 6 pev aloOopevog

/cal

itaidlov aAA’

Trkrjv

r\

prj,

ev drjpooloLg ftvaag lepd $e-

ov

*&vov,

davaro typtovG-

Kptvavreg vopocpvXa/ceg, elg to

ovrog elaayayovreg,

ri)v r r\g aoebetag dhcrjv

Tovroig emreXovvTOV.

The same sentiment may

folly in Israel.

Greek

poets.

Compare,

especially, Hesiod,

often be found io the

Works and Days, 223

UoUclki Kal ^vpieana n o?.tg kclkov avdpog anijvpa, bong akirpaivei Kal drdoOaXa prixavdarai. Tolmv

d’

ovpavoQe v p£y* eTrrjXaoe

Xtpov opov Kal TiOipov

*

ovde yvvaiKeg tlktovglv

irrjpa

Kpovlov

,

aTzotydivvOovoi de Tiaoi. *

pivvQovcu de ohoi,

Zrjvbg (ppadpoavvycnv ’O XvpnLov

*

ye crparov evpvv dmoXeaev

uXXore

6’

avrt

bye rec^og >

fj

tljv

r)

viag ev novrep Kpovidr/g anoTtvvrai avr&v.

,

r)



.^AA

EXTENDED NOTES AND

DISSERTATIONS, SUGGESTED BY PASSAGES

IN THE TEXT, ON SOME OP THE PRINCIPAL POINTS OF THE

PLATONIC PHILOSOPHY AND THEOLOGY, ESPECIALLY AS COMPARED WITH THE HOLY SCRIPTURES

;

TOGETHER WITH SOME EXPLANATIONS OP DIFFICULT PASSAGES AT GREATER LENGTH THAN WOULD BE CONVENIENT IN MARGINAL OBSERVATIONS.

vwnaa vwvyv

\

.



EXTENDED NOTES AND

DISSERTATIONS. r.

The Platonic View of the Parental and

Filial Relations ,

and

the Ancient D.octrine generally on this Subject.

Page

2,

Line

’E^

8.

6e yoveag.

A

the end and scope of the Republic, or, as

properly styled,

Righteousness

The Dialogue on

(rtepl

misconception of it

should be more

the Nature of Right or

dutaiov ), has subjected the

He

Plato to great reproach.

name

of

has been charged with main-

book of that dialogue, sentiments which, would result in the utter overthrow of all the

taining, in the fifth if

carried out,

domestic relations.

A

defence, had

we space

for

it

here,

might be derived from the peculiar parabolical or allegorical nature of that work, and from the evident absence of any

design that

it

Whether, however,

isting polity.

right

should serve as the model of any actual ex-

view of the Republic or

not,

this

be regarded as a

and whatever

we may

may

there be

think of the justice of the charge to which he

thought to have exposed himself, there can be no doubt that in this treatise (nepl vopwv), in

which he means

to ap-

pear in the character of a serious legislator for a really practicable if not existing state, ,

he takes special pains

own

to

day, he

remove the reproach to which, even in his had been subjected on account of the passages referred

to

This long dialogue on legislation was the work of his old age, and in

it

he

strives to set in the highest light the

sanctity of the domestic,

and especially the

filial

and pa-


o

88

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE For the strongest proof of

rental relations.

among many

refer,

ninth book, 881

other passages, to

and especially

A.,

,

and beautiful passage,

lib. xi.,

what

to that

this, is

we might

said in the

most striking

931 A., in which he speaks ,

of the veneration of children towards their parents as a religious. rather

than a merely moral or political duty, and

not only this, but also as involving acts partaking of the nature of religious

We

worship.

would recommend

to the

student the close study of the whole argument, not only for its

exceeding moral beauty, but also as a most triumphant

some modern re. would have destroyed the family state. Tovscjv 6s dfisXelv, ovrs $£ g ovrs avOpconog vovv e%G)v ^vpibovXog

refutation of the charge that Plato, like

formers,

7TOTG tc.

ysvoir dv ov6sig ’

r. X.

ovdev'i.

(j)povr]aai

light the sanctity of the relation,

but would deduce from the grossness of stituting the

would have

some

and of the duties resulting,

parts of religious worship, filial

He

household images of the Gods.

by the venerable

their place occupied

pa, or image of the Eternal Father. fXTjTTjp

living

rj

tovtcov narspeg

[irjrspsg

rj

UarTjp ovv orcp

sv oIklcl uslvrai

Xlol CLTTSCpTjKOTsg yijpa, prjbslg 6iavo7]drjTG) aVTCO, TOLOVTOV S(j)SGTLOV

Kvpcov sgsgOcu, sdv

or

by sub-

veneration for the idola-

of the aged sire or grandsire, as the household ayaX-

form

7tsvxi

tietiv,

a method of indirectly reforming

it

holy feeling of

adoration

trous

6s xprj rrepi

In this passage he not only sets in the highest

b Keurriiievog

6ij

l6pV\LCL

SV

fcstfirj-

n otg ayaXpa pLCbXXoV

olu'iCb

Kara rponov ye

real

opOcbg

avro depa-

“ If any one hath a father, or mother,

.

grandparents worn

out with age, and laid up as sacred

relics in his house, let

him never suppose,

as long as he

possesses this altar of the domestic hearth, that any other

dyaXpa provided

or sacred

image

he knows how

is

to

more worthy

worship

931, D., ’0 vkovv biavorjOtifiev

d>g

it

of his adoration,

aright.”

ov6sv TTpog

repov ayaXfjia dv KTrjGaifJLsda rrarpog

real

And

again,

'Sscov

rrpondropog

na-


FILIAL RELATION. peifievcov yrjpa na) prjrepcov rrjv avrrjv

ov(;

89 dvvaiuv ex ov(7(^ v

ogov ayaXX't] rig npalg yeyrjQev o $ eog.

then, believe that

we can have no

cious in the sight of

worn

or mother

Heaven than

religions

“Let

us,

image more pre-

a father, or grandfather,

out with age, and that in proportion as

honour or delight in them with a religious joy

may

we

ayaX-

(so

be rendered here as in Pindar same proportion does God himself rejoice.” If this is idolatry, it is certainly far more innocent than that which is practised by the professedly What a beautiful and affectChristian Church of Rome.

Xq, whence ayaXfia,

Olymp

.,

,

,

139), in the

i.,

ing picture

is

here presented

The aged and

!

infirm parent

not only revered in the secret sanctuary of the heart, but actually regarded,

if

not as the very household deity of the

secluded domestic temple, yet, in representation or

rendered

had

in

eltccov ,

to the Invisible

mind something of 703

the Antigone,

T t yap

is

God.

truth, as the best visible

whom homage was

to

Sophocles seems

have

same

this

beautiful conception in

narpog '&aXXovrog, svtcXeiag tskvolq

not the

j

uel^ov

;

same high meaning

in Plato, although in other respects the

—;

r

to

dyaXpa here

language

as

is striking-

more strongly resembles Proverbs, xvii., 6 where the Hebrew word mxsn mXDn> lZPJS has r VV t t

ly similar.

nnx

to

be

:

’'ATAAMA There

through

It

:

:

#

Greek ayaXpa, being like it, too, sense, as in Psalm lxxviii., 61, where

a striking affinity to the

used in a religious it

is

applied to the ark of the covenant.

As

a consequence of this religious relation, Plato attaches

great importance to the blessing and curse of a parent, and in this

he

is in

accordance with one of the most ancient

and universal doctrines that have ever prevailed among mankind. After reciting the examples of Theseus, CEdipus, and Amyntor, he thus proceeds

H

:

2

apalog yap yovevg knyovoig


90

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF

TIIE

“For the free rendering) comes loaded a way that is true of no other

ovdeig erepog aXkoig dLnaiorara, 931, C.

dig

curse of a parent (to give a

with calamity

Wherefore, as he says in another passage,

relations.”

nag

drj

to children in

vovv

(frodelrai teal

npa yoveuv

noXAoig nai noXXdmg emreXelg yevopevag

,

ei>xdg, eldcbg

931 A.

,

Every

one that hath reason both fears and honours the prayers of

knowing

parents,

well that often,

and

to

many, have they

fulfilled.” How deeply this sentiment was impressed upon the minds of the Grecian poets, and how important an

been

element

it

forms of their most tragic representations,

we

may

learn from the dismal effects and long train of calam-

itous

consequences which they set forth as following the

The

imprecations of CEdipus upon his unnatural sons.

sad story of Hippolytus, who, although innocent,

is

repre-

sented by Euripides as perishing under a father’s imprecation, exhibits the

same

doctrine, although in a

ed and distorted form.

The dying

most pervert-

cry which the poet puts

mouth of the wretched young man, d) narpog epov dvarrjvog dpa shows how awful was the calamity which the ancient world

into the

,

universally regarded as involved in a parent’s curse.

The

converse doctrine, namely, the importance of the parental blessing, is certainly one of the most clearly taught truths

of the Old Testament.

language and

How consonant

spirit of Scripture,

it is,

both with the

no one need be

told

who

recollects the value attached to the blessing of the Patriach

Isaac, and the declarations of the dying Jacob to the twelve

heads of

Israel, besides

many

other passages which are

founded upon the same idea.

was a prominent principle in all the ancient systems of law and religion that the relation of parent and child It

gave rise

to religious rather ,

Hence

Aristotle says, eotc d’

voig tig

avOpunoig npog fieovg

than merely rj

*

civil obligations.

pev npog yovelg (\uXia tekrov yap elvat nal Tpacprjvai


,

FILIAL RELATION. cm.ot,

teal

yevofievotg rov

Heaven.

come down and

affected even

speak of

Bible

makes

On

this

direct

it

would be the

fruitful

permitted to pass

if

source of every viola-

The

both of the laws of Heaven and Earth.

seems

to

to

God, and hence, in

with this view, Plato regards the

dered the

filial

and

have been regarded as a continuation

which bound us

of that

mony

tie

account the

Jewish law punished the crime with

too, the

with impunity,

parental

Hence

commandduties we owe to God,

such unrelenting severity, as though,

tion,

feeling has

this relation the subject of the first

ment immediately following the and hence,

this

modern languages.

piety or impiety.

filial

committed

offences

Something of

directly against

we

.

,

was regarded among

violation

,

to the class of duties styled

from those that were only diicaia and

'6(ua, in distinction

their

Ethic Nicomach

tt cudsvOrjvcu.

They belonged

12, 5.

viii.,

91

strictest har-

man who had

sun-

having utterly annihilated the duties and

latter as

On

obligations of the former.

seen in a passage on which

this account, as

we have

we have

already commented,

page 8 1 the children of the Atheist were ,

to

be regarded as

orphans, and placed under the care of the state.

The importance of this relation in a political point of view, may be inferred from the fifth commandment itself. The promise annexed has generally been referred to individuals. litical

ly.

It

appears to us, however, to have more of a po-

aspect,

and

to

be addressed

to the nation collective-

The language certainly seems to favour this idea may be long in the land which the Lord thy :

“ that thy days

God

intimating that the long continuance of

giveth thee

their national polity in the land of

more than on anything

else,

Canaan would depend,

on the preservation of

amental conservative article

;

this fund-

on the reverence with which

this duty should be regarded, as forming the connecting

link

between the

civil

as being the source

and the more purely

and guarantee of every

religious,

and

inferior domestic


;

92

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF TIIE

and

For undoubted examples of the

political obligation.

same and

similar language, used in the national instead of

the individual sense, see Deuteronomy,

iv.,

2G,

40

v.,

;

30

vi., 2.

In accordance with this universal sentiment of antiquity, Plato, in the passage at the beginning of these remarks,

and

in

other places in the Laws, enumerates duties to

owed

parents as immediately succeeding those which are to

God, and ranks their violation as next in enormity

Compare

public and private sacrilege.

the

Laws, 717,

and especially a most remarkable pas-

B.,

sage in the ninth book, 881, A. rovrcov ere 7Tpoyovcov

pevog

bang

Ilarpc^ yap

:

roXprjoet a\pao0ai

alicta tlvc, prjre tgjv avo)

deioag

tCjv vtto yrjg npopiCdv Xeyopevuv,

rj

prjrpbg

u ore

'deebv prjviv, prjre

dXXd

tearaeppovtiv rcbv del

,

$ avarog pev ovv ovk eonv

TLVog anoTponrjg eoxdrrjg.

‘‘If

oi

de ev

any one

f/

A idov

i)

/3ca%o-

7raXatcov nai vno irdvrov elprjpevov rrapavopel rovrep

eax^TOV,

to

the fourth book of

tovtolol Xeyopevoi ttovol

shall dare to treat with violence

,

&c.

father or

mother, or any one of his or their progenitors, having before his eyes neither the fear of the

powers above, nor of the

vengeance of the world beneath,

but, despising the ancient

and universal

mankind, shall break through

traditions of

law, for such a one there

remedy.

Death, then,

remedy, but something of Hell which difficulty

not this greatest or most extreme

still

beyond

this,

even those pains

are said to await these enormous offenders.”

The whole passage with

is

all

need of some most extreme

is

is full

of dreadful meaning,

be transferred

word which comes up

We

to the English.

to the

which can have no

Greek dnorponf. apby which we may some enormous wickedness, It is

plied to the most solemn religious act avert the

wrath of Heaven

for

and hence the terms anorponaiog drcorpomaGpog inauspicious that which is to he averted hy sacrifice an expiation ,

,

,

,

or turning aivay of the Divine wrath

,

and, in a secondary


:

FILIAL RELATION. sense, whatever

most odious or an utter abomination.

is

all lists of great

93

one of the worst abodes

in Tartarus is ever assigned to of-

fenders of this description, and thus Paul classes those

among

are guilty of violence towards their parents holy

and 'profane

pyrpaAcpaig.

The

1

In

crimes, as presented to us by the poets,

:

who

the un-

dvoaioig nai fiebrjXoig TrarpaXtiaig nal

Timothy,

i.,

9.

holiness of the family relation

is

intimated, in the

ancient mythology, by the worship of Vesta; and the perpetual cherishing of the domestic affections, as affording

warmth by which all social must be preserved, is represented

the vivifying and fructifying

and

political institutions

Well did Cicero

in the Eternal Fire. est

say, in aris et focis

This intimate connexion

Respublica.

Greek and Latin poets

in

is set forth

by the

almost every form of expression.

Virgil presents the holy alliance in one line

Deum

Sacra

sanctique patres. Georg.,

And

this

seems but

a reiteration of the precept, Leviticus,

Speak unto

duties are there given.

and say unto them Ye ,

,

473.

and of the order in which the religious and family

xix., 2,

Israel

ii.,

congregation of

all the

shall be holy

God am holy. Fear ye every man mother I am the Lord your God.

your

,

for I the Lord

his father

and

his

.

The

obligation of

filial

obedience, as the fountain of

moral and political virtues,

is

fragment of Euripides from Stobaeus *'E yco

o

pev

all

thus beautifully set forth in a

MEIT2TON

:

ap^opai Xeyeiv

narpl TteWeoOai XP £ ^ V naldag, vopi&LV r’ avro rovF dvai diicrjv.

etc

rovde upCorov

Eurip. Alopa. So, also, in a poet, in

which

still

more

striking fragment of the

same

duties to parents are ranked next after those

due the Gods, and before mere

political obligations:


94 PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FILIAL RELATION. holv aperal ag XPV

rpslg

0EOY2

clokeIv

teuvov,

go

T0NEI2,

re rtpav, rovg re dpsipavrag

N0M0T2

re Kotvovg

k&XXlotov

e^eig ore(j)avov evtcXeiag aei.

f

E XXadog

teal

-

ravra dptiv

Eurip. Antiope.

W

e have dwelt the longer on this, because

that Plato’s

Laws and

views here, and in many other places in the

which might otherwise be drawn from the

book of the Republic

even with to

all

and because,

;

even below

In the theories of some,

So

civil duties.

far

and

is

it

is

placed

from being thought

to pos-

it is

denied that

for political legislation.

perfect obligations ,

It is

it

it

forms a sub-

ranked among im-

never with us, except in some few

cases of pauperism, enforced by

many

present day,

at the

the declarations of the Bible, the relation

sess any religious character,

even

fifth

be becoming divested of that sanctity which

anciently possessed.

ject

think

other dialogues, furnish a complete refutation of

the charge,

seems

we

inferior subjects are

made

Why, when

law.

so

matters of legislation, this

fundamental and all-conservative relation should have so little

space assigned

difficult to say.

to

The

it

in our jurisprudence,

effects,

it

would be

however, which will inevita-

bly result, in loosening the whole political structure, can be far

more easily and with more certainty predicted.

relation

ous reformers, who, under the

name

of a cold and heart-

hardening universal benevolence, or love

would

The

and the duties resulting are also attacked by spuri-

utterly break

up

all

the family

to

being in general,

ties,

and destroy

the associations connected with that holy word,

These men sometimes, in their ignorance, make hand quotations from

Plato,

and

him from their profane’ grasp.

all

Our Home.

stale

we would wish

to

second-

rescue


PREAMBLE, OR ADVISORY PART OF THE LAW.

95

II.

The Words Trpootptov and the

Page

The Preamble

irapapvOcov.

Advisory or Argumentative Part of the 2,

Line

dec Ttaoxti'V-

To

16.

The

tt

Law

,

.

apapvOiov vnodepevcp prjreov a

lawgiver (vopoOerq, understood ) must

declare what each one must suffer, after having put under,

by way of hypothesis or foundation, an exhortation or pre-

Another reading has

amble.”

They

by Ficinus.

same

the

ttpooiptov,

both, however, II poolfuov

significance.

preface or preamble

is

followed

would possess nearly

would

tt apapvOiov,

which

44

literally

mean

deemed

Such an

by way of preamble, nearly the

exhortation or argument,

last

book may be considered, as only the

this tenth

few pages are devoted

and the penal

This

essentially and peculiarly neces-

sary in those institutions that related to religion.

whole of

a

an exhortatory ex-

ordium,” containing the ground or reason of the law. the philosopher

44

statute

to the preceptive declaration,

founded upon

it.

In a more limited

sense, however, the TrapapvQiov here intended is contained in

what immediately

In like manner, Cicero, in

follows.

evident imitation of Plato, introduces in his treatise

De

Legibus a similar Tcpooipcov in which he makes religious ,

belief

and reverence the only true foundation of law and

may

be found in that noble

Sit igitur

hoc a principio per-

of every form of civil polity.

passage,

lib. ii.,

sec.

vii.

:

suasion civibus, dominos esse

It

omnium rerum

ac moderatores

Deos, eaque quae gerantur, eorum geri judicio ac numine,

eosdemque optime de genere hominum mereri, quisque pietate

sit,

qualis

quid agat, quid in se admittat, qua mente, qua

colat

religiones,

habere rationem.

intueri,

piorumque

et

impiorum

His enim rebus imbutae mentes, haud

sane abhorrebunt ab

utili

ac vera sententia.

Quid

est

enim

quam nemincm esse oportere tarn stulte arrogantem, se rationem et mentem putet inesse, in coelo m undo quo

verius, ut in

et,


,

96

PREAMBLE, OR ADVISORY PART OF THE LAW.

non putet

sumraa ingenii ratione comprehendat, nulla ratione moveri putet ? Utiles esse autem ?

aut ut ea, quae vix

opiniones has, quis neget,

quum

mentur jurejurando, quantae

intelligat,

salutis sit

quam multa

fir-

foederum religiones,

quam multos Divini supplicii metus a scelere revocarit, quamque SANCTA SIT SOCIETAS civium inter ipsos, Diis immortalibus interpositis turn judicibus

Habes

legis

What

PROCEMIUM

a striking contrast

noble heathen, and those of

and boasting

constitutions,

turn testibus.

enim hoc appellat

sic

:

,

Plato.

between the sentiments of these

many modern bills

political theories,

of rights, from

which the

very names of God, religion, Christianity, or the least

any bond

sion to

by which the

religio ) (

allu-

visible state

is

connected with the invisible world, are as carefully excluded, as though they litical

On jjuov

were the deadliest

foes to the po-

happiness of mankind. this subject

we may compare

in the Timasus, or the

tempts

also the sublime npool *

Dialogue in which Plato

to set forth the universal code

at-

of laws which govern The preamble

both the physical and intelligible universe.

or TTpoolfUov there, is found in that remarkable passage, in

which he divides lev del

/l

things into

all

yevecnv de ovk s%ov

ov de ovdenoTE. to pev del

Kara Tavra ov

and

real

That which eternally that

which

never truly

is

IS

reason, always

;

ever

styles,

BEING

ON

per,

pETa Xoyov nepiXprcTov, ’

aloOrjoecog

aXoyov

dnoXXvpevov. ovTog de ovdenoTE

IS and hath never generation

BECOMING or being generated

the one

5/

to

riTNOMENON

ual to

vorjoec

to de do^rj peT

do^aorov, yiyvopevov, ov.

di)

*

what he

,

,

and

received by the intelligence with in the

same

relations, the other re-

ceived by opinion with irrational sense, ever becoming, perish ing,

and never

stantive being.

truly

,

and

in the highest sense, having a sub -

— Timwus, 27, P.

This he evidently intends

as a preamble to the system of physical and psychological legislation

contained in that wonderful dialogue; for after


:

SUBJECTIVE SENSE OF THE WORD dwelling upon the above distinction

at

97

aXrjOeVG).

some

length, pre-

paratory to the statement of the universal laws of mind and matter, Timaeus is thus addressed

by Socrates

IIPOOIMION

MON

:

to pev ovv

davpaoicog arced e^apeOd gov rov de 6?) NO“ Since in such a wonderful rjplv ecpe^g rcepatve, ,

way we have received from you the propound to us the law” Timaeus,

'preamble next in order ,

29, C.

III.

Word

Subjective Sense of the

Page

4,

Line

0 v/covv,

9.

dXrfevovrag Xeyetv to

be an easy matter

its

Does

it

not, then,

Gods

exist ?”

in

yet reference rather pression, to that

seem

’A XrjOevo), although

signification the utterance of truth,

many passages

are

“ ;

padcov eivai

to affirm, in all truthfulness, that there

are Gods, or that the

includes in

%eve, do/cel

cj

cog eioi tieoi

aXrjOevG).

which

it

it

and there

must be so rendered, has

to truth of feeling

which belongs

than

to truth of ex-

to the subjective state of

the soul or the moral diathesis, rather than to that

which

is

the result of scientific, or speculative, or casuistical argu-

ment

— what the Psalmist

Paul seems

to include

shown by the

ayarcr], “

being

So, also, Galatians, Oevcov vflv I

am

of this sense as he uses the

iv., 15 aXrjOevovreg ev ayarcr) not so “ speaking the truth,” as our translation has it, but

rather, as is

word

much

term, Ephesians,

much

styles, “ truth in the in ward parts ”

“ ;

truthful, or of

16

iv.,

Have

context, and especially

true (in heart) to

a true heart in love”

— chare exOpog vpdjv yeyova

become you

I

It

may

refer, in this last if that is

posed to be included, the subjective sense of the predominant.

rag in the passage ,

Hence we may at

aXrj-

subject to your hatred while

ample, to the declaration of truth, but even

still

by the

ex

sup-

word

is

best render aXrjdevov-

the head of these remarks, adverbialI


— SUBJECTIVE SENSE OF THE WORD

98

ly, thus

“ In

:

all sincerity, in all

dXrjOeVG).

truthfulness, in consistency

The

with the truest and purest sentiments of our nature.” other rendering, which would refer

merely

it

to the declara-

would be comparatively tame, besides producing a pleonasm in A eyeiv. Our translation is also in perfect keeping with the character of the honest and truthful Clinias, as he is, with great dramatic skill, represented to us throughout this whole argument. He uses the lantion of truth,

guage of a

This

man who never had

a favourite

is

word with

a doubt on the subject.

felt

Plato,

and frequently

For a very

found in his writings in this subjective sense. excellent example, see the Theaetetus, 202, B.

ovv dvev Xoyov

rr]v dXr\d7j

0ETEIN

pev avrov

The

sentiment

ov.

tt\v is,

do^av rivog

'i/jvx'rjv

:

orav pev

Xa6rj,

’AAH-

avro yiyv&otteiv

rrepl

that the soul

ng

be

to

6’

,

may be

harmony with the truth, so as cordially

to

subjectively in

embrace

it

in its

creed before scientific knowledge, or an objective presentation of

before

may have

the

it

to the speculative reason.

it

possesses a clear apprehension of the doctrine

This may

be,

but those

who would, on

and often undoubtedly

It

is,

life

the case in religion

this account,

.

;

undervalue logical

and doctrinal statements, or what they rather disdainfully style systematic theology, are in danger either of a mysti-

cism, in

which

all

clear perceptions of truth are utterly lost,

or of taking opinions upon the

on the

reason, or any true

We

mere testimony of

others, or

credit of a blind tradition, without either light in the

warmth

in the affections

illustration of this truthful state of mind in which Clinias pursues in the next reply the course npiorov pev yr\ nal rjXiog, &c. He enters upon the argument with all

have an

the confidence of an easy victory.

to the

He

appeals at once

most obvious phenomena, not so much as

scientific

proofs of the Divine existence, but rather as visible representations of a manifest Divine power. clare (to all

whose

The Heavens

souls are prepared for

it)

de-

the glory of


THE ORPHIC POETRY. But as though

God.”

this

had

much

too

99 the appearance

of speculative reasoning, he retreats again to his stronghold, the feelings of his

common and

own

nature, and appeals to the

who were

We

are taught in the

its

for those

Holy

Scriptures, that not only a true

unbelief in respect to the Divine existence,

seat primarily in the affections rather than in the

The fool hath The Hebrew word

intellect.

God.”

deems enough

true-hearted (akrjdevovreg) concerning the Gods.

belief, but also

has

This, with

universal sentiments of mankind.

the bare aspect of the heavens, he

understanding

;

still,

cognates, such as

said in his heart

here

is

sometimes used

Greek

like the

there

,

(frpoveo), (frpovrjocg,

erally refers to the intellect, not so

with

(ppeveg,

or scientific aspect, but rather as modified

no

for the all

typovrjpa, &c.,

much

is

it

its

gen-

in a speculative

by the

state ol

the affections or moral powers.

IV.

The Orphic Poetry.

Page

5,

usrpcov.

Line “

I

12.

Some

0/ pev ev not perpoig,

in poetry

ol ds nal

and some in prose.”

uncertain what prose writings are here referred in poetry

to.

avev very

Those

must have been the works of Homer, Hesiod, and

perhaps of Orpheus.

would seem

The term n aXaioraroi

(

most ancient)

some productions older than the These might be styled n aXaia, comparison with the period of Grecian literature in which

Iliad

in

It is

to refer to

and the Theogonia.

Plato lived, which, although time,

many

centuries posterior in

was not separated from them by any

epoch prior

to the

Persian wars.

They

distinct literary

could not, how-

ever, be well entitled to the epithet iraXaiorara which, as ,

it is

introduced, and as the context shows,

is

meant

to des-

ignate the most remote of two distinct periods, in reference


0

THE ORPHIC POETRY.

100 to

which

so style

intimated, there

it is

was

from the cosmological

it,

The

thological.

to the

They were more

if

we may

theogonic or my*

or most ancient class,

first,

former description.

a progression,

were of the

philosophical than

more taken up with the origin of things, that allabsorbing question which so engrossed the early mind yeyovev rj IlPftTH <1>Y2I2 ovpavov rcov re aXXcdv. They were pantheistic rather than polytheistic, manifesting a dethe latter,

:

parture, but

gion than

page of

a less departure from the primitive reli-

still

denoted by the

is

All these

5.)

some

styled Orphic, under

few fragments, whether spurious or our

own

9,

not,

which name a

have survived

to

Although these are generally regarded as

day.

productions of a

ence made

(See Note

marks correspond well with the nature

hymns

of the

latter stage.

much later

age, yet, from the frequent refer-

Orpheus by the Greek

to

almost certain that a collection of

poets,

it

would seem

hymns under

this

name

existed in the most ancient times, forming that copious

fund or storehouse of rich poetical appellations, from which

Homer, and subsequently Aeschylus, were being the source of whatever in the

Grecian tragedies.

is

The

supplied, besides

pantheistical or mystical

existence of forgeries

is

evidence that there must have been originals in imitation of which they were composed, and an ancient philosophy

and theology, which had once exerted great influence on the

human mind,

to

serve as their plausible and probable

foundation.

In connexion with the passage before us, compare iv.,

716, A.:

dpx'fjv

This

re

is

teal

f

O pev

dr)

lib.

deog tjonep nal 6 nahaiog Xoyog, ,

reXevrrjv nal p,eoa rtiv ovtgtv andvrejv ex^v.

almost the very language of one of the so-styled

Orphic fragments

now

extant,

and

directly referred to

is

—

eov pev rov dr}Orpheus by the scholiast on the place rov OP<I>IKON, puovpyov ocKptig, naXcuov de Xoyov Xeyei :

bg

eanv

ovroq,


THE ORPHIC POETRY.

Z evg peaoa, A tog

Z evg

apxrj,

Z evg

7tv0[jLtjv

en iravra rervurar

ovpavov aarepoevrog

yairjg re aal

Should any one say that

d’

101

much

resembles very

this

.

the

language of Thales, or some of the philosophers of that

and

period,

who had

been imposed upon by one

and given a poetical dress

we would

reply,

this peculiar

why

and

had

that, therefore, the ignorant old scholiast

may

mode

this

affixed a fabulous

some of

to

their

dogmas,

name

—why,

not Thales and others have derived

of expression from a

disposition

still

earlier source,

charge the scholiasts and

to

Christian fathers with combining to produce such useless

and yet elaborate forgeries as some connecting with their names

We

?

critics are constantly

say useless, because a

philosophy and theology, such as appears in these hymns,

beyond

did,

all

question, exist at a very early period, and

the poetical dress, had

it

not been real, would have added

nothing to the argument they sought to derive from them.

For places

made

to

in the ancient writings, in

Plato, Ion, vol.

Legibus, i,

8

;

vi.,

iii.,

230

;

p. 134, Leip.

Cratylus,

Euripides, Rhesus, 947

Nat. Deor., hortat.

which reference

Orpheus and his poems, the reader

i.,

38

ad Graecos,

;

p.

ii.,

;

;

Convivium,

263

;

Aristotle,

iv.,

25

;

;

is

referred to

219 De De Anim.,

vii.,

Hippolytus, 967

Diod. Sic.,

17

;

is

;

Cicero,

Just. Mart.,

De Co-

Athenagoras, Legat. pro Christ.,

xv., 64, 65.

12


— plato’s regard for the ancient myths.

102

V.

Regard for Antiquity and the Ancient Mythology His Use of the Word Qeoi.

Plato's

Page “

G,

hard

It is

1.

Ov padcov emrtpav n aXaiolg

to find fault

We

things.” Plato’s

Line

ovclv,

with them, seeing they are ancient

and similar expressions,

discover, in this

conservative

.

spirit

and reverence

antiquity,

for

struggling with his conviction of the importance of having

the minds of the

young imbued with higher notions

of the

Divine Nature than could be obtained from the ancient

The same

poets.

feelings are manifested in that passage

in the Republic, in rest of the poets,

which he dismisses Homer, with the

from his imaginary City of the Soul,

though, at the same time, he sends him

away with

al-

a garland

of honour on his head.

“ Should such a one (he says)

come

to exhibit his

to our city,

indeed, reverence

wishing

him

still

such man could abide with us

eptCi)

state,

,

pvpov Kara

ore^avreg, and

we

would,

as something sacred, and wonderful,

and delightfully pleasant, yet dXXrjv ttoXlv

poems,

:

would we say

rr\g /csdtaXijg

we would

that

no

aTTonepnoLfiev re av elg

Karajfavreg

send him away

to

real

another

having poured myrrh upon his head and crowned him

with a wreath.”

Republic, 398, A.

We

however,

find,

everywhere, in his works, a strong attachment

to the an-

wherever they contained nothing gross or ofhis views of morality a number of which, and

cient myths,

fensive to

;

those, too, distinguished for the feeling of

awe and

sublimity

with which they inspire the reader, he has himself present*

ed in some of the most important and philosophical of his dialogues. It is

exceedingly interesting to contemplate the peculiar

condition of this philosopher, endeavouring to reform what

he

felt

he had no power or commission

no Divine warrant, like the

Hebrew

to abolish.

Having

prophets or the apostles


plato’s regard for the ancient mytiis. ot Christ,

he did not dare

crusade against

upon an exterminating opinions, and traditions held

to enter

the rites,

ail

sacred in the Athenian worship.

The Grecian

was too well acquainted with human nature not another of a

still

reformer

to fear lest,

monster Superstition, he should

in destroying the

103

more horrid aspect

— Atheism.

call

He

up did

not wish utterly to pull down existing institutions, while he had no new revelation, whose authority might replace, with

increased vigour, the departed reverence for those ancient

myths, the probable remains of truths once communicated

from Heaven, yet mysteriously abandoned ruptions and distortions of the

to all the cor-

He

human mind.

probably

thought that out of some of the better parts of the Grecian

mythology there might be constructed a system, which, while

it

recognised the

One

an immense distance from

Eternal Supreme, placed at

by him or emasame time, admit of inferior powers, retaining the individual names at least, (if not the characters), which had been consecrated by the popular That he did believe in such an Eternal and superstition. Ineffable Supreme (6 yevvrjoag a'idioq rcarrjp Timseus, 38, all

things created

nating from him, might, at the

A.,

avrov

,

6

KoXkioroq

pop(j)rj ,

teal

dptoroq pevcjv del dnXtig ev ry

Rep., 381, C.,

— 6 Trdvrcjv rjiaora

rrjq

eavrov

Ideaq ka&aivwv, 380, D.), every reader of his works must admit.

He

undoubtedly erred in supposing that the pure

worship of such a glorious Being could be consistent with

any kind of

we

religious

homage paid

to inferior

powers

;

yet

should remember that the same error has been com-

mitted by the largest portion of the professedly Christian

Church, and that

under the

we

are to judge Plato, not as a Christian

light of revelation, but as a

heathen philosopher

which we have no just conception. These remarks are deemed necessary in reply to the charge often made against Plato, of struggling with difficulties, of the magnitude of

countenancing the polytheism of his countrymen, and which


104

plato’s use of the

may

be found set forth in

its

word

w

$eol.

strongest light in a tract by

Jacob Zimmerman, contained in the ninth volume of the Amcenitates Literaria.

A

misconception in regard to the Platonic theology has

arisen from his use of the

word

deoi.

The Greek

writers,

whether poets or orators, generally meant by it nothing more than supernatural beings of a higher order than men. The word, in itself, had attached to it none of those more metaphysical conceptions which belong to our term Divine, as significant of the uncreated and eternal. therefore, to those

who,

no philological inconsistency in

beings

in his

whom

scheme,

There was,

its

being applied

Plato elsewhere calls datfioveg, and

may be

regarded in the same light with

the angels or sons of God, mentioned in the Holy Scriptures. In respect to the objection

use of the plural,

it

may

which might be made

to his

be remarked, that throughout this

whole argument with the

atheist, tiedg

may be

for tieoi, without at all affecting its validity,

substituted

and we should

by so doing come nearer to the philosopher’s true meaning, than by retaining the common term, with the misconception arising from our modern notions that is, we should better ;

translate his spirit

the letter.

Qeoi

is

by adopting a

slight mistranslation of

often to be taken collectively for the

whole of the superhuman Genus, however inferior and dependent some parts of it may be in respect to another, and is equivalent, in the discussions which follow, to to tielov Another suggestion, which it may be or to d(U[i6mov.

make here, is, that by the phrase tieot Kara voiiovg, writer means not directly the Theogony and worship

proper to the

established by law at Athens (although even this he would

touch with the hand of a wise reformer, and not of a reckless destructionist), but rather the cultus of the

and

inferior Divinities, as

it

should be set forth by the law-

giver in that pure system of polity in the present treatise.

Supreme

which he contemplates


PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS.

105

VI. Philosophy and Character of Anaxagoras.

Page

6,

Line

wits, or wise all to

whom

veoov

6.

men

that

oo(p(hv. is,

to

have had

Of our modern

comparatively modern, although

he refers did not

seems chiefly

live in Plato’s

in

own

He

time.

mind Anaxagoras, who,

not-

withstanding his speculative theism and his boasted doc-

N ovg,

was yet regarded by Plato as giving an atheistical tendency to the age in which he lived. In regard to his theology, Anaxagoras is best known by the position, in which he so much gloried, “ that mind was the cause of all things,” and in physics, by the unpopular dogma, “ that the sun was nothing but a mass of ignited stone, instead of an animated being,” as was commonly beThe lieved, and as Plato seems to teach in this book. trine of the

character of this philosopher

may be

understood from the

boasting he himself made, and which his friends

him, in regard this respect,

to the first of

he had

in

these doctrines

;

made

for

as though, in

any way advanced beyond the more

modest Thales, or had discovered a

truth

which had been

concealed from the beginning of the world to his Socrates seems to have had a right view of

own

him

day.

in the

Phsedon, where he charges him with setting out with the doctrine that

N ovg

speculative tenet,

was the cause of all things, as a mere and then making no use of it in subse-

quent parts of his philosophy

;

that

is,

never ascending

above second causes, or rising from the physical to the

moral (to f3eXri(JTOV ), but ever assigning, as the chief motive

fires

powers, aepag ts ual alOepag nai v6ara y gases and ,

,

and fluids, as the words may be rendered

in

accom-

to the same spirit in modern physical philosophy. Having once (says he) heard one reading a book of Anaxagoras, and saying, that Nous was the disposer and the efficient cause of all things, I was highly delighted with the

modation “


106

PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS. and

declaration, I

thought* that

it

seemed

Novg

if

be admirably said

to rne to

Mind) thus arranged

(or

things,

all

everything must be placed in that position in which best for

it

to

be

;

and

;

it

was

so that no other study remained for man, in

regard to both himself and other things but the investigation ,

of that

which was (morally) most

excellent

other words, moral causes), and that this

science of things.

But in

this

and

was

best (or. in

the only true

wonderful hope (of discover-

ing the universal science, or science of sciences) greatly disappointed

;

as

for

read on

I

I

I

find the

was

man

making no farther use of his boasted N ovg, nor assigning any other cause in the disposal and arrangement of the world, than airs, and aethers, and waters, and other similar things

many and

precisely as

if

And he seemed

strange.

any one saying,

to

me

to act

that Socrates doeth whatso-

ever he doeth by mind’or reason should then, in attempt,

my

ing to assign the causes of sit

actions, assert that I

now

my

com-

here for these reasons namely, that ,

posed of bones and nerves,

have

joints,

and that

fore that the

that

my nerves

my

bones being raised up

limbs, and that for this reason

I

is

bones are solid and

contract and relax

;

where-

in their joinings, the

nerves, by reason of tension and relaxation,

my

body

now

make me

sit

here

:

to

bend

and

so,

also, in respect to our conversing, should assign other similar

causes of the phenomena of speech, such as voices, and aerial vibrations,

and sounds

((pcovag

re nal aepag nal anoag ),

and ten thousand other such agencies,

all

the while neglect-

ing to assign the true reason (of reasons), that because

it

seemed good (j3 eXriov) to the Athenians to condemn me, it seemed better to me to sit here, and more just Since, as I to submit to the sentence they had imposed. verily believe, had it not been for the last-mentioned reasons, these nerves and bones would long before this have had me away to Megara or among the Boeotians, being set in mo-

therefore

tion

by an opinion of the best ( rov PeXriarov),

if I

had not


•

PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS. thought

more just and

it

We

Phaedon, 97, 98.

remain than

better to

recommend

know

Anaxagoras,

as

to

to

fly.�

the close study of this

whole passage, and the admirable sketch theists

107

it

presents of such

every student

who wishes

to

the essential difference, on this most vital point, be-

tween the Socratic and other ancient systems of philosophy.

How

remind us of many modern books of which the name of God may, perhaps, a preface or some introductory note, while all the

strongly does

it

physical science, in

appear

in

merely

rest is not

silent, but directly

adapted

to

produce an

by suffering the mind to dwell on than aepag re ual alQepag nal vdara gases,

atheistic turn of thought,

nothing else

and

fluids,

,

and

fires,

The

or imponderable agents.

which Plato entertained of

this

philosopher

is

opinion

also signifi-

cantly expressed, although he does not mention his name, in the

eleventh book of the Laws, 967, A. B. C., a passage

which

is

istic

more freely examined

doctrine of (pvoig,

The

rvx7]* and

Note

XIII.,

on the athe-

xvr

]

Noi)^ of Anaxagoras can hardly be regarded as a

personal being, or as a world, of

The

in

which

atheist

vnepnoagitiy distinct from the

might be considered the informing law.

it

may

'ipvx^j

admit the dogma without changing his

La Grange undoubtedly

creed.

believed that there

was

N ovg, or reason, in the

Heavens, even a science so profound, powers of his highest mathematical analysis could barely follow the laws of motion in which it was displayed and yet La Grange was an atheist. The Heavens

that all the

;

had no diagram

interest for

him except

as they formed a splendid

for the illustration of his calculus,

the moral element

was wanting

it

made no

and as long as

difference what

name was inscribed upon it, whether Noi;^ or (ftvoig, or a God possessed of mere intelligence, to whom we were nothing, and who was nothing to us, except as affording subjects for the exercise of the speculative intellect.

Anaxagoras had no respect

to

moral as

This Noi)c of

final causes,

which


PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS.

108

as Socrates shows,

ophy.

was only another name

It

things, in

were studiously excluded from his

which the

for the physical truth of

atheist contends there

any other.

his hypothesis, as well as on

philos-

may be It

science on

was an

abstract

intelligence, displayed wholly in physical adaptations, with-

out either a general or special providence.

It

might be

regarded as the instinct of the universe working in the great whole, as some of its emanations in minute portions, ,

blindly, unconsciously, without personality,

everything but

itself.

and knowing

However incomprehensible

this

may

be, it is still the highest reach of that philosophy which makes no account of any moral attributes in the Deity, but regards him as a mere impassible intelligence. We have

no hesitation in preferring pantheism

if it

embrace, although

inconsistently, that moral element, without

be no true personality, either

to

Novg

which there can

or 'ibvxf

Plato evidently regarded this philosophy as no better

than practical atheism, notwithstanding

pomdogma aforemodern advocates, it

sets out so

pously, and apparently so religiously, with the said.

He seems

here to condemn

its

the veot cofiol, as he styles them, equally with that ancient

which they so much derided. Anaxagoras was of a spirit the very opposite of that which pervades all the teachings of Socrates. He was inclined rather to insult and shock the popular superstitions than gently to remove superstition

them, or turn to good account whatever of truth they might possess, and that, too, not in the spirit of enthusiastic

reli-

which we cannot help respecting even when we are compelled to condemn, but in the mere conceit of a

gious zeal,

little

fancied

modern

progress

Galileo,

in

physical

whose name

is

science.

Like the

so frequently in the mouths

of the scientific enemies of religion, he evidently rejoiced

more in the thought, that this very small advance raised him somewhat above the religious notions of his countrymen, than in any honest wish or desire to elevate those


PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS.

109

popular views which placed him, as he supposed, in such

He seems

contrast.

egotistical

to

have been a regular

and poet hater, and there is, therefore, no cause for surprise that he should have called forth the enmity and

priest

prejudices of those

whom

he had, from no higher motive

than vanity, attacked.

This

was manifested

spirit

below referred

to,

that

in the declaration, a

masses of earth and stones, and

For

melted ore.

this

its

belief of

place, or

lines

that the

sun was a ball of

he was charged by the Athenians for he who assails the com-

with atheism, and justly too

mon

few

heavenly bodies were only

the

;

any people, without putting anything better

who

in

attempts to destroy false notions of the

Deity, without teaching, as Socrates and Plato did, the doctrine of the

one eternal and ineffable, yet personal Supreme,

the head of a moral government, and directing

with

reference to moral ends,

final

is

in heart

all

things

no better

than an atheist, whatever refined speculative notions he

may have

N ovg

in the abstract about

the cause of

all

tion of Socrates

or intelligence being

It is

probable that the condemna-

was mainly

effected in consequence of

things.

his views having

been misunderstood by the unthinking

Athenian mob, and confounded with those of Anaxagoras. Plato did undoubtedly hold that the Heavenly bodies were animated personal beings but when here and in subsequent passages he styles them deoi, it is only in the sense The simple doctrine, thereof beings superior to men. fore, for it goes no farther, that the Heavenly bodies were animated beings, was no greut heresy either in philosophy (See Note XXXIV., where this subject is or religion. more fully discussed.) It was far better than the specula;

tive

semi-atheism of Anaxagoras, or even of some modern

naturalists,

who have

only substituted for the abstract Novg

of the Grecian philosopher the symbols and equations of the differential and integral calculus.

K

One

religious

com


HUMAN LAW.

DIVINE JUSTICE GROUND OF

110

God

ception of Plato

which regarded him, and which may

as a moral governor, the light in

and Socrates chiefly

connexion with the most absurd notions of the

exist in

physical universe, does yet belong to a philosophy almost infinitely

men

removed above the mere

as Anaxagoras, Galileo or

scientific

La

theism of such

Place.

VII.

The Divine Justice

Page

all

Ground of Human Law

the

.

1. Ex^ddv yap tovto rjpiv virep anavrcov K&XhiOTOV TE Kal dpLOTOV TipOOLpLOV CiV £L7)«

Line

9,

TO)V VOflOJV

“ For this

,

the fairest and most excellent 'preamble to

is just

laws, or to every system of law,” namely,

fteoi r’

eld nal dyaOot dhcrjv rtpcovreg diacpepovrcog dvdp&irov. “ That the Gods not only are but that they are also good, ,

,

and

that,

moreover, they have an esteem for justice beyond

anything that

among men.”

is felt

remarked before,

is

deol here, as

used as a collective term

we have whole

for the

of the Divine Nature, being equivalent to to 'Selov or to ,

daipoviov, and should be rendered in the singular,

would do

full

sentiment

is this

justice to the thought. It is

:

not

enough simply Neither

this the notion of infinite

thing more than the

than mere

N ovg

intelligence.

is it

we

The

the dynamic

enough

knowledge.

to

God

connect is

of Anaxagoras, something

The law

if

to believe in the

God is something more than

Divine existence.

principle of the universe.

with

See Note V.

some-

more

should present him to

us in the far sublimer idea of a Being clothed with the

moral attributes of justice, and of a special, providence.

is

It

scientific theism,

true

system of

please of

or, rather,

moral

this, and not a merely speculative or

which must

legislation.

The Supreme

lie at

We

the foundation of every

may

Intelligence, or

talk as loftily as

The

we

First Cause, or


UNIVERSALITY OF THE BELIEF IN A GOD.

The Great

Idea,

this there is

practical atheism, until along with

is still

it

recognised

Ill

The Lawgiver, The Judge, and The

Moral Governor, the constant and interested Witness of our every

act, the

ground and sanction of the solemn appeal of

the oath.

“ That such views (says Cicero) are useful and

necessary,

who will

deny,

when he reflects how many things how much safety there is in

must be confirmed by an oath,

those religious rites that pertain to the solemnization of contracts,

how many

the fear of the Divine punishment keeps

how sacred and holy a thing Society becomes when the Immortal Gods are constantly presented (in the Law) both as judges and witnesses.� Cic., De Leg., ii., vii. We would even venture to assert, that back from crime

in short,

;

a gross anthropopathy or anthropomorphism,

such views of the moral

Law,

is

every

way

to

Deity as a

attributes of the

be preferred

which reject them, them the most prominent place.

God

of

most metaphysical

to the

or philosophical notions of the Divine Nature and passibility,

retain

if it

its

im-

or do not even assign to

Mill Universality of the Belief in a God.

Page

Line

10,

10.

f

E/l Xrjvcov re teal (3ap6dpo)v ndvrcov

Compare with

ev ovpzpopalg Tzavroiatg. says, page

4*,

14

line

:

nal oti irdvreg

meant

what Clinias

E XXrjver

re

By Greeks and

f3ap6apot vopi^ovoiv elvcu deovg. barians, the former always

this f/

all

izal

Bar-

mankind, and, there-

God is here declared to be coextensive any man might rely on his own unaided

fore, the belief in a

with the race. reason,

been

who

If

will venture to say that Plato

justified in thus trusting

himself

to

it ?

would not have

And yet,

pro-

found as he was in the investigation of truth beyond the most,

if

not

all,

of his fellow-men, he never hesitates to ap-


UNIVERSALITY OF THE BELIEF IN A GOb.

112

peal to the

common

sentiments, the noival Ivvoiai of man-

kind, and to throw himself upon

which he yielded

to

them

often with a confidence

no speculative argument.

Hence

his

fondness for those ancient myths, under which were concealed, in various forms, the opinions universally held re-

specting the moral government of future retribution.

This was

God and

not, as

the doctrine of

Warburton supposed,

a mere accommodation of himself to those vulgar dogmas, which he did not wish to destroy, because he deemed them useful.

All that has been said

by writers of

and by the ancient authorities on rely, respecting the exoteric

spirit

by any

No man was

we

some of

him

to

it is

this,

misunderstand the philosopher

when he

sion of a traditionary myth,

be-

farther from his true

his most serious discussions.

deeply earnest,

to

parts of the genuine

than Warburton, and, without an appreciation of

his learning only led in

they pretend

and esoteric teaching,

lieve to be wholly unsupported

dialogues of Plato.

whom

that school,

If ever Plato is

gets engaged in the discus-

which he can regard

in

some

measure as standing in the place of primitive revelation, or can find relief from the uncertainties of his

own

specula-

what he could trace as the universal voice of huWe need no stronger proof of this, than is found in the manner in which he closes the long discussion in the Gorgias (in some respects the most perfect and rigidly contions, in

manity.

ducted argument to be found in his works), with the mythical representation of the final this tion,

judgment

;

as though, without

appeal to the authority of ancient and universal tradi-

human reason

prove that a

was not

life

could never freely and satisfactorily

of sensual pleasure, or of worldly ambition,

better than one spent in acts of virtue

vation of philosophy.

He was

the last

man

and the to

culti-

spurn such

aid, in order to gratify that pride of intellect, that would

adopt no conclusions to which

it

had not arrived through

the independent exercise of private judgment.

He knew


:

113

UNIVERSALITY OF THE BEFIEF IN A GOD. too well the direct tendency of

such a

spirit to

darken the

understanding, and to lead to error instead of truth.

We

would

affectation

not,

however, confound

which has sought

thority of our philosopher.

in mind,

this

with a modern

by the au-

to support itself

Plato,

had no Bible, and he did

it

should be ever borne

and ex-

well, therefore,

ercised his highest reason in seeking for a Divine revelation

and nations,

in those universal sentiments of all people

which were as ancient in time as they were extended in space, and which could most truly be said to be, semper, This object of his reverence was ubique, et ah omnibus. something far different from the vox populi of the demagogue,

who

artificial

tion, against

of mankind. its

is

most successful when he can array the

often

and transient feeling of one generation, or one na-

what he would It

was

style the antiquated prejudices

by

rather that vox humanitatis, which,

universality at all

times and in

all

regions, gave evi-

dence of having been once the voice of God remains of a primitive inspiration, however darkened it may have been ,

by human depravity

— opinions which had not been the prod-

uct of the speculative reason, but which, under the con-

serving influence of a higher principle, had maintained their

ground in spite of the opposition of human depravity, and

human

the consequently superinduced darkness of the

derstanding.

seems <

It

was

this

un-

vox humanitatis to which Hesiod

to allude

prjyr]

d ov rig 7rd[j,nav diroXXvrai, ’

Xaol (prjfi^ovoL

*

fteog

vv rtg eg tl

rjv

nva

iroXXol

teal avrrj.

Works and Days 709. ,

Compare,

also, Cicero,

De

Nat. Deorum,

i.,

43

:

Solus

videt, primum esse Deos, quod in omnium animis eorum notionem impressisset ipsa natura. Quae est enim gens, aut quod genus hominum, quod non habeat sine doc -

enim

trina

anticipationem

quamdam Deorum?

K

2

quae

rpohppig


114

ANTIQUITY OF ATHEISM..

appellatur,

aut lege

Quum enim

&c.

non

opinio constituta, rnaneatque ad

sit

more

instituto aliquo aut

unum omnium

firma consensio, intelligi necesse est esse Deos, quoniam

eorum vel potius innatas cogitationes habemus. De quo autem omnium riatura consentit, id verum esse necesse insitas

And

est.

again,

lib. ii.,

omnium Omnibus enim innatum est et

12: Itaque inter omnes

gentium sententia constat. in

animo quasi insculptum esse Deos. Still

we

more

same

to the

effect,

Tusc. Disp.,

find the best definition of the

Law

Ut porro firmissimum hoc

ever been given.

i.,

30,

where

of Nature that has afferri videtur,

cur Deos esse credamus, quod nulla gens tarn fera,

nemo

omnium

tarn sit immanis, cujus mentem non imbuerit Deorum opinio. Multi de Diis prava sentiunt (id enim vitioso more effici solet), omnes tamen esse vim et nature m Divinam arbitrantur. Nec vero id collocutio hominmn aut consensus efficit non institutis opinio est confirmata, non legibus. Omnis autem in re consensio omnium gentium :

LEX NATURiE

putanda

est.

IX. Antiquity of Atheism.

Page

11,

Line 12. Tiyvovrai 6s del nXecovg

ravT7]v rrjv vooov exovreq.

more or

less

who have had

rj

eXarrovg

“ There have always been

this disease of atheism.�

been maintained that there were no philosophical

It

has

atheists,

professedly so, before Democritus and Leucippus.

Plato,

however, asserts that some such have existed from a very early period, and in this he tells

is

borne out by Aristotle,

who

us that most of the earliest philosophers, especially

those of the Ionic school, assigned only material causes of the

universe

rag ev vXpg

rdv

:

eldei

irpcorcov (piXoaocftrjadvTOJv oi

uXeloroi

uovov (brjOpoav apxdg elvac iravrov.

j


ANTIQUITY OF ATHEISM Metaph.,

Aristotle,

A

3.

i.,

be made between those

distinction,

who were

however, should

professed atheists, such

who were

as Democritus and Diagoras, and those to

115

inclined

an atheistical mode of philosophizing, while they yet pro-

fessed to be theists, although of an impure and inconsistent

In this latter class the world has always abound-

species. ed.

On

the other hand,

Cudworth,

that,

cient, the first

it is

most conclusively shown by

although this materializing school was an-

philosophy was spiritual and that the sub,

sequent atheism arose from a perversion of the atomical theory, which,

who

of those

favourable

to,

when

truly held,

originated

and according

before Democritus,

it

to the

views

was not only

but one of the firmest supports of a pure theism.

though

Plato, in this passage, styles atheism a disease , as

it

were something unnatural, a corruption, diacpOopa (see page 4, line 18), a departure

from those innate sentiments orirpo-

of the race of

which he and Cicero speak so em-

Arjxpetg,

phatically.

So, also, the apostle treats

from a primitive better

state,

Rom.,

i.,

it

as a degeneracy

He

28.

speaks of

tendency as a darkness of the spirit nai eonorioOrj rj dovverog napdia avr&v, Rom., i., 21 as a reprobate mind this

,

:

adoiapov vovv 28, to which men “ had been given up, because they did not like to retain God in their or reason

,

,

We

knowledge.”

cannot read these Scriptures without

mind a similar sentiment expressed of the old poet Empedocles calling to

in a fragment

:

A eiXog d’ gj GKoroeooa Ah wretch whose soul !

If

tt epi

dark thoughts of

the light that is in thee be

darkness

!

6o^a peprjAev.

God

invade.

darkness how great ,

is that


116

PRINCIPLE OF AUTHORITY.

X. Principle of Authority,

Page

12,

Line

epoi

civ

6.

n elOtj,

nepipEVElg avao/tonQv

ovrog Eire aXXcog e^el, nwOavopEVog napa te rtiv aX “ If Xcjv, teal 6rj icai pdXiora nai napa tov vopoOerov. elre

you will take my advice, you will patiently wait, repeated ly examining whether it is thus or otherwise, learning from others, and therefore, and in a most especial manner, from Notwithstanding the earnest recommendathe Lawgiver.” tion to

most diligent study and inquiry, and

sistency with

in perfect con.

Plato holds that the acceptance of establish-

it,

ed opinions must go before and guide the exercise of vate judgment

pri-

not to supersede or dispense with the ne-

;

cessity of the latter in

its

proper time and place, but be-

cause the state of mind which submits

to

lawful authority

affords the surest guarantee of subsequent mental independ-

ence, instead of that counterfeit

more than a slavish

which

fear of a creed,

is

often nothing

and which loses

true independence, in its premature efforts to avoid

the best and wisest of

all

what

mankind have long regarded

as

established.

The

next sentence contains a thought of the highest

practical importance

iv de

M

rovrcp rep XP° V(? ToXpr}cyjg nepl 'deovg p7]dev aaEdrjoai, “ but during this, period see

to

it

That

that is,

:

di)

you venture upon nothing impious or unholy.” obligation must be revered, and pious

religious

emotions cherished, before the young soul can reason about

them, and there a right to

is

no period, however

remain atheists

until

we

short, that

we have

are able to prove

by

in-

duction the existence of a God.

He who

reason by following

submission to authority

,

its first dictate,

which God himself has those

who have been

behind him in

all

thus honours

established, will doubtless leave

taught to pursue a different course, far

the severer and more abstruse depart.


DEGREES OF ATHEISM.

117

ments of philosophy and theology. Throughout this whole treatise, it should be borne in mind that vofXQOsrrjg means rather the ancient founder of a state or of a religion, than

a temporary or subordinate magistrate of the Lawgiver,’’ as one great

so that “ to learn

;

consult with deference and respect,

is to

means of forming

right opinions, the civil

religious constitution of the state in

which we may be

and

born.

XI.

Degrees of Atheism

.

Peculiarity of Plato's Style.

Page 12, Line 13. Tlavranaoi uiv ovv &c. The author now proceeds to the discussion of speculative and j

practical atheism in

stated 1st.

2d.

its

three degrees,

,

which may be thus

:

An absolute The opinion

denial of the existence of a Deity. that, if a

Deity

exists,

he does not con-

cern himself about us, or in other words, the denial of a Providence. 3d.

A

sentiment clearly allied to the second

Deity exists, and

if

;

that if a

he even exercises a physical care or

providence over the world regarded as a physical produc-

he

tion, still

is

in a great measure, if not wholly, indifferent

to

moral conduct, and

it

be ever excited,

is

that, therefore, his displeasure,

nor by an atonement that

God himself has

should

by repentance,

easily appeased, not

provided, but by

self-imposed votive offerings and superstitious services

We ed

expect a direct argument on the

first

head, conduct-

manner by an appeal to evidences of design phenomena around us. This mode of proceeding is

in the usual

in the

adopted in the discourses recorded in the Memorabilia, and there

is,

treatise

also,

De

an admirable specimen of

Natura Deorum.

Such a

it

in Cicero’s

line of argument,

however, although quite a favourite with modern theolo-


118

DEGREES OF ATHEISM.

gians,

was

which would first suggest itself to the more abstruse speculation, and one which

not that

ancient mind, but a

had a more intimate first

relation to the great question about the

origin of things, the

whether

life

and motion

in matter,

be regarded as eternal, or as having had a dis-

to

tinct origination

from some older essence.

fully believe, is the itself to

first

way in which the

This, also,

subject

would present

such a mind as Socrates, notwithstanding

erally considered that the

plain

truth,

which he appears

gen-

more in accord-

is

than the metaphysical character in

in the Dialogues of Plato.

mode adopted here by

this is the

it is

and practical mode of

reasoning ascribed to him by Xenophon

ance with the

we

At

all

events,

who

the Athenian,

un-

doubtedly represents Socrates, and he also takes a very peculiar method of introducing of his reasoning on the

it.

In the

commencement

head, he takes his hearers by

first

by suddenly suggesting that they had unawares fallen upon the discussion of a most important principle, which deserved to be disposed of before going on with those more popular views which had just been mentioned. surprise,

It

has, at

the appearance of being accidental, but one

first,

familiarly acquainted with the Platonic

method

will rec-

ognise here the usual ironical resource the author employs

when he wishes usually subtle

to enter

of a question in relation to

dialogue

maintained.

is

upon a discussion more than

— namely, the apparently undesigned it

from the one with

The

eliciting

whom

the

chief speaker seems, or af-

remember something essential to the argufects, suddenly ment, and which they were in danger of having entirely forgotten, although it is evident that it is the main thing to

which has been kept standing

its

amples of

in

view from the beginning, notwith-

seeming incidental introduction.

this

may

be found in the Protagoras, Republic,

and Theaetetus, especially the last. Platonic, that

it

may

Frequent ex-

It is,

in fact, so purely

be regarded as one of the best signs,


X

ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. as

far, at least,

as the style

is

concerned, by which

119

we may

distinguish a genuine from a spurious dialogue.

XII.

Ancient Doctrine of the Four Elements

Page is

13,

Line

Hvp

15.

feed

v6cop uai yr\v

.

teal

aspa

generally assumed that in the use of these terms

It

.

all

the

ancient philosophers meant four simple, indestructible, and

incomposite elements

;

being the primordia or apyal by the ,

union or composition of which

Hence many

stituted.

,

other things were con-

all

a superficial sneer

by popular

turers at the ignorance of the ancients in respect to

and the number of simple substances.

istry

the matter, however,

is far

lec-

chem-

This view of

from being correct.

Some,

it

is

maintained the above doctrine nearly in the terms

true,

which we have employed, and as it would be stated by a modern chemist. Among these, if we understand Aristotle aright, was Empedocles. ’EpnsdorcXrjg psv yap ra psv gcoparircd rsooapa rd 6s ndvra perd tw v klvovvtcov ef tov ,

,

aptdpov

Aristotle,

.

De Gen.

et Corrup.,

i.,

1.

moving powers here are intended his poetical tions of Love and Discord, ’'Epog and *E peg, would be styled

in the language of

By

the two

personificaor, as

modern science,

they

Attrac-

and Repulsion, which, together with the four elements,

tion

made

the

six.

Anaxagoras, Leucippus, and Democritus maintained

number

that the elements

Kptrog

pag

.

were

infinite,

not only in number, but in

’A va^ayopag 6s dnsipa, nal Asyrannog, ual Arjpo-

form.

<

of original principles or primordia to be

*

ravra 6s

The

arcstpa uai to

doctrine

which the

tt

rjOog sivat ual

first

ing the homoeomerice, or similar parts, totle

rag pop -

of these held respectis

well known.

Aris-

represents him, on this subject, as in every respect the

direct opposite of

Empedocles.

’E vavrloyg 6s fyaivoviai


120 ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. XeyovTeg

nepl kva^ayopav rolg nepl ^pnedonXea.

ol

'O

'

pev yap

§t\gl nvp nal vdcjp teal aepa teal yr\v OTOi%eia tegGapa nal dnXd elvat paXXov fj oapna teal ogtovv nal ra ,

roiavra tcjv opotopepebv

ravra pev anXa nal Groix^la,

6 de

nvp nal aepa Gvvdera De Gen., &c., i., 1. fire, and water, and air, and earth elements, and more simple than flesh and bone, and

yrjv de teal

.

“ For the latter says that are four

others of the liomceomerice while the former contends that ,

these are simple elements, but that earth, and

See

are compounds.’’

ruption,

lib. i.,

Aristotle,

where there

is

De

air,

and

fire

Generatione et Cor-

a long, but not very clear

account of some of the ancient opinions on this subject.

Compare,

also, lib.

3.

iii.,

we

In general, however,

when they used

are quite satisfied that, even

the term <7TO£%ehz, most of the ancient

had

writers on physics

in

view elemental

states of bodies,

without reference to their composition, rather than simple substances or elements in the sense in which modern chemistry

would define the term

— that

is,

as substances incapable

of being changed, or of passing one into the other from a

change of that

state.

It

was

Parmenides held

in this sense of elemental states

nvp and

to two,

yrjv, or the solid

and

the cetliereal regarding the fluid and the aerial as only mix,

ed modifications pevidrjg

nvp nal

:

ol de

yrjv ,

olov aepa nal vdcop.

evdvg dvo noiovvTeg,

ra pera^v plypara Arist.,

De

tjoirep Jlap-

tcolovgl tovtcjv

Gen., &c.,

ii.,

,

In like

3.

manner, Aristotle himself declares that they are not simple substances as actually found in nature, but ever compound-

ed of one another, although in their ultimate to regard

them as pure

enaoTOV tcov Lib.

At

ii.,

:

elprjpevcov,

ovn egti de to

rrvp,

state

he seems

nal 6

anXovv, dXXa pucTOV,

afjp, n.

r.

nal

X

3.

all events,

we have no

doubt, from several very de

cided passages, as to the manner in which these terms are

employed by

Plato,

whatever meaning

may

be attached to


— ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. them

in the sentence at the

121

head of these remarks, as the

He was

supposed language of the atheistical philosophers.

so far from regarding them as strictly elements {aroix^Za)

modern chemical, or even ancient Greek sense of the word, that he would not even rank them in that second See the stage of combination which he styles ovXXadrj. in the

Timaeus, 48, B.

T i)v

:

6e rrpd rrjg ovpavov yeveceog irvpog

vdarog re nai y r\g (pvacv $ eareov nal ra ,

rovrcdv

irpo

n ad?].

nvp 6 n ixore eon, real enaorov avrtiv, Xeyopev apx&g, avra TtOepevoi croixela rov navrog Trpoo-

Nvv yap

cjg eldooi

rjrcov

“We

avrolg ovd

sv

(hg

2TAAABH2

elded

must contemplate the nature of

earth, before the generation of the

though

we spoke

each one of the

to

those

rest,

as the elements

(

we

well

water,

Heavens

for

;

knew what

talk of principles,

all

now, as and

of

the

not to be likenIt

very clear

is

likewise, from other passages, that Plato views

elements, but as elementary states

and

fire is,

letters

,

when they ought

to the species of the syllable.”

air,

and regard them

aroix £ Za also used for the

alphabet) of the universe,

ed even

who

fire,

aTTetfcaadrjvac.

them not as

Karaordoeig ), in which (

bodies must exist, however varied in other respects

their compositions

;

namely, as

solid, fluid,

gas or that fourth ,

condition which the ancients generally denoted by the term fire

which modern chemistry would of imponderable agents. These are heat

(nvp), but

class

electric,

,

style the light,

the

the galvanic, and the magnetic influence, which, al-

though having

five different

names, are coming

to

be more

and more regarded by our most scientific men as only modifications of one and the same principle. In other words, earth (y^), as used by Plato and many others of the Greek

was simply their scientific term for solid (to which it is sometimes equivalent), whether the substance was earth, or wood, or precious stones, v6o)p for liquid or fluid &c., and nvp for all that modification more subtle than air, of which they had some tolerably clear

philosophers, arepeov, to

,

L


;

122

ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.

views, as the seat of higher agencies than were usually cognizable by the senses, and of which they regarded the visible lire as the lowest representative form.

Whoever wishes

to

see the views of Plato on these sub-

more fully stated may consult that portion of the Timaeus, where he treats at great length of the primary

jects

constitution of bodies, details of its

and which, although erroneous in the

numerical ratios (as every a priori or theo-

retical attempt of the

kind must be), contains evidently the

germ of the modern chemical theory of definite 'proportions These four states or naraoraGSig with all other intervening compound modifications, were, in fact, regarded but as varied manifestations of one simple essence (vXrj), which .

,

receives (

,

forms, itself having no form, and is therefore

all

ayvodorov ) unknown and incapable of being

all

physical knowledge

is

known

:

since

possible only in respect to those

things which have

number and Xoyog, ratio or reason and therefore elements, which are strictly such, are in their very nature ak oya, or incapable of being objects of scientific

contemplation, except in their binary or trinary com-

binations.

As he

says in the Thesetetus, 202, B.,

ovro.) dr)

rd psv GTOix^ia aXoya teal ayvcoora elvai oXadryrd ds rag 6s GvXXabag yvoGrag rs nal prjrag nal dXrjOsl do^rj do%,

,

aGrdg. All modifications of this simple essence

phenomena

were ( (paivopsva )

or appearances, having nothing absolute except

in the idea manifested

by them, no

indestructible material

nature of their own, but continually passing into and out of

each other,

or, in

other words, ever becoming (yiyvopeva

not yev7]Gopeva), instead of absolutely being ( ovra ) in them-

Thus, in the

selves distinct and imperishable substances.

Timaeus, 49, C.

Uptirov psv o

:

dr)

vvv vdoop (bvopdnapsv ,

&g donovpsv, Xtdovg nal yrjv TirNOMENON optipsv rrjnopsvov d’ av teal dtanpivopsvov ravrov rovro rcvevpa nal aspa (ovynavOevra ds tov aspa nal tt vp) ava -

Tcrjyvvpevov, •

,

,


ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.

’IAEAN

iraXcv de avynpiOev nal naraadeadev, eig

avOig depog nvp

*

peov vdojp

re ovtg) diadidovra eig dXXrjXa, “ For, in the

condensed,

*

cog tpaiverat , tt)v

what we

yeveaiv.

water ( fluid ), when behold becoming earth (or solid). Again, place,

first

we

The

call

we

behold this same thing becoming

air (gas),

heated or being burned together

dissolved and separated, air [or gas).

paXXov gvpmXovpenal XWovg avOig nvnXov

in 6i tovtov etl

i^vdarog de, yr\v

*

amov

nal naXiv aepa %vviovra nal nvnvovpevov,

vefpog nal opi'xXrjv vcov,

re

123

becomes nvp, and nvp more closely united and condensed again having its by cold (naraadeadev), departs back again into the idea of (if

ovynavOevra

be a right reading ),

particles

Again,

air.

we

see the

air,

when condensed, becoming cloud

or vapour, and from them, when

still

more compressed,

Finally, from water

converted into flowing water.

we

be-

hold again earth or solids, thus in a circle appearing successively to give birth or generation to each other.”

Of rr\v

the

unknown elementary

vXr]

he thus speaks

rov yeyovorog bparov nal navrog aiaOrjrov

:

did

MHTEPA

nal vnodo%f)v, prjre yrjv, prjre aepa, prjre nvp, prjre vdcop Xeycopev, prjre baa in rovrcov , urjre

it;

cbv

ravra yeyovev

j

aXX* aoparov eldog

vov de anopebrara

n nal

nr]

ap,opcpov,

navde^ig p^eraXapda^ .

rov vorjrov nal dvaaXcororarov avro

Xeyovreg, ov 'ipevaopeOa.

“ But as for the mother and re-

cipient of everything

which becomes an object ©f

sensation, let us call

it

fluid,

neither solid, nor

air,

sight and

nor

fire,

nor

nor anything which springs from these, nor anything

from which these are (directly or immediately) generated, but the invisible species, having no form of ble of receiving

which partakes ble,

and that

it

all.

in is

we

say that

some most obscure way most

should not mistake.” is

Should

difficult to

not confined to the sense of sight, but

which

is

it

is

yet capa-

something

of the intelligi-

we The term aoparog

be apprehended,

Timgeus, 51, A.

erally for all that region

itself,

is

employed gen-

beyond the sphere of


:

124 ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. sensation, or does not

of the senses.

Sometimes, in

for the intelligible ,

seem

not

to

come under

and

is

the cognizance of any

Platonic import,

its

it

is

used

equivalent to vorjrov but that does ,

There

be the case here.

is,

no doubt, an

allu-

sion in the above to Thales and Anaximenes, the former of

whom

held that water, and the

mental principle, or mother of

The Greek

latter that air,

was

this ele-

all things.

philosophers and poets generally regarded

nvp as a modification of matter more

subtle than air,

and

nearer to that simple elementary substance or vXr] which

was

the basis of

them

Modern chemistry has

all.

experi-

mentally developed this a priori idea of the ancient mind, in the discovery of that class of agents styled impondera-

Most abundant proof could be given, that by this term 7n)p was not meant merely the element, as commonly understood, which goes by that name (although this was inble.

cluded), any

more than by the term

y?/,

when thus

philosoph-

was intended only the earthy matter beneath our feet. Another name for this fourth modification was aWrjp. Some, indeed, made this a higher form than tti;p, ically used,

as the author of the treatise Aristotle

ev TTVpl

,

:

De Mundo once ascribed to vdan vdarog ev aepi aepog

Xeyoj de yr\g pev ev

7rvpdg

de ev aiOepc

general, however, all

who

,

,

,

Ch.

k. t. A.

iii.,

In

p. 143.

held to but four modifications

regarded the two last mentioned as one and the same.

The

was supposed to space above the atmosphere, although at the same

peculiar region of the aether or fourth state

be

all

of

time interpenetrating and diffused through

There seems

to

all

below

it.

be an allusion to this in iEsch., Prom.

Vine., 1090 d)

aWrjp kolvov

ndvrcov

(j)dog elXicocjv,

where the poet clearly regards it as the source of vision, and seems to have held respecting it something like the modern undulating theory of light. At least, we can make


ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.

125

no other sense of elXcaaov, which, in connexion with

alOfjp

and

suggests at once to the

(j)dog ,

mind

that

waving

or en-

larging spiral motion that the air undergoes in the propagation of sound,

posed

and which,

theory referred

in the

sup-

whose vibrations phenomena of vision. In

to take place in that universal fluid

or undulations give rise to the

respect to the antiquity of this opinion, there

account of

its

length,

we

a remarka-

is

ble passage in Aristotle’s Meteorologica, lib.

“We

to, is

i.,

On

c. 3.

give only a very concise version.

have already (he says) spoken respecting the

how

element, what power

it

verse above us

of that substance

rog).

And

seems

to

is full

hath, and

this opinion is not

(

first

whole uni-

that the

euecvov rov ocbpa-

only entertained by us, but

have been a very ancient supposition, and

been held by the primitive men

have

to

which is called aether received of old the appellation which Anaxagoras seems to me to have regarded as the same with the fire. For he says that all the upper regions are filled with fire (rd avo nXrjprj irvpog elvai ), and yet he calls the same power, or the influence which pervaded that portion of And in this he was right for that subspace, the aether. stance which remains forever unchanged men very naturally suppose to be a God, and Divine in its nature (to yap ;

for that

;

’AEI c&pa

0EON

dpa re 0EION,

ac.

t. A.),

and they ac-

name

cordingly defined such a substance by the

(equivalent to del deog, or del decor), as though identity

say

,

with anything that pertains

that not once, or twice, or a

infinite repetitions, the

dvativnXelv )

((

etymology

few

to us.

among men

We

alOfjp

had no

Thus must we

times, hut with almost

same opinions come round .”

it

think

little

in a circle

of Aristotle’

of alOfjp in this passage, but if this doctrine of

the universal aether was, as he says, so ancient, and

was held

to

be the cause of light and vision,

it

is

if it

certainly

a remarkable confirmation of the closing sentiment, that

his same opinion should now be becoming everywhere a L 2


ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.

126

with our most scientific men, especially

favourite

modem

wits had for so long a time

when

made themselves merry

with what they styled the ancient absurdities respecting a

plenum and a vacuum. There is no doubt that

Aristotle himself held light to be

an undulating motion in a

sensorium of

fluid affecting the

vision, as the undulations of the air affect that of the ear.

This

fluid

fects

it,

he

styles to diacjjaveg,

olov rov aepa as the air ,

bvrog, mvelrai to aloOrjrrjpiov

ArjpdfcpiTog, oiopevog , el yevoiTO

av aKptdu)g,

“ But

sensorium

affected

is

supposition, that

we

if all

by

for

;

vno tovtov

;

tie

af-

ovvexovg

ov yap icaXtig tovto /ley ei

nevov to peTa^v, opaodac

ev tgj ovpav (p ehj, tovto yap

el pvpprji;

teal

eoTiv advvaTOv.

and says that colour

this fluid being continuous the

Democritus

is

not right in the

the intervening space

were a vacuum,

might see so sharply as to discover an ant in the sky.

This, however,

dium,” &c.

is

impossible without an intervening me-

Aristot.,

De Anima,

ii.,

7.

In the Pantheistic Orphic hymn, quoted by the author

De Mundo, and by the scholiast on Plato, De 716, A., to which we have already referred, the

of the treatise Leg.,

iv.,

sether is represented as the seat of the

rather, as the

vovg de gj drj

oi

d^evdrjg paoiXrjiog atyOiTog

navTa nXvec aai

Whether

Divine

Divine or universal sensorium

this

intellect, or,

:

’AIOHP

(ppa^eTat.

fragment be spurious or not,

tionably of a very respectable antiquity.

We

it

is

unques-

have a simi-

lar sentiment, although, in a style less pantheistic, in that

common Homeric

line,

Zev avdiOTe, peyiOTe ,

KeXaivecfreg

and which, although immeasurably to call to

mind the

’AI0EPI NAIS2N,

inferior,

Scriptural declarations,

eth in light inaccessible

as with a garment.

— Thou

The

can hardly

Who

fail

alone dwell-

coverest thyself with light

sublimity of this

is

heightened


;

ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. by the thought that latory aether

The Greek

universal undu-

light, or, rather, the

which causes the

sensation,

127

is itself invisible.

conception has a tinge of pantheism, and of the

The Hebrew, besides its represents God as separated from

mundi

doctrine of the anima

inexpressible sublimity,

.

the universe and veiled in thick darkness tion of that

very substance, which

knowledge

to

by the

interven-

the cause of light and

is

every portion of the worlds he has created.

The Orphic and Homeric

expressions,

it

is

not absurd to

suppose, arose from perversions of that purer idea which

we

find in the Bible.

met with of

its

Similar language

in the tragic poets,

is

frequently .to be

and sometimes a knowledge

Orphic application and origin

is

absolutely necessary

which would be otherwise most As when Sophocles, in one of the sublimest

in illustrating passages

obscure.

choral odes in the (Edipus Tyrannus, speaking of the antiquity of

Law, represents

it

as born of the heavenly tether,

ovpaviav

aldepa

renvoodevreg, or, in other

words, the offspring of that universal sensorium

or Divine Noi;^, which, according to the Orphic

hath

its

hymn,

From this became one of the names

peculiar dwelling-place in the aether.

manner of employing the term,

it

of Jove himself, being regarded as his peculiar province in the division of Saturn’s kingdom, as to Juno

was

allotted

the air or lower atmosphere, and to Neptune the water.

’A rjp and aiOrjp are sometimes confounded by the poets, although the distinction between them

is,

’A rjp

respiratory , and of the

lowest animal

higher of the

life

in the

life

;

Hence, as the one

is

from atOco (old root

same manner

as the

tol-

aldrjp of -the

of sensation, and even of the intellect

spirit.

breathe, the other is hot

is

on the whole,

regarded as the source of

erably well observed.

first

from

— the

aco,

ato)), to

life

arjpi,

burn

,

to

to be

expression of the idea


ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.

128 of

life (£aco,

t$v)

was most

naturally associated with the

appearance of self-motion in fermentation or (See page 27, note 4, on the words

we

and

cannot help thinking that there

is

ebullition.

Hence

^eco.)

some connexion

be-

tween aWfjp, aiQo), and the verb atoOopcu aloOdvopai. On this matter, some of the old poets and materializing philoso,

may have

phers

now

indulged in views similar to what are

held by not a few

modem

savans, respecting the influence

of an aethereal magnetic or galvanic fluid in the production

Hence

of motion, sensation, and even thought.

Aristoph-

anes, in the Clouds, 570, styles the aether fiioOpetipova 5

The

:

Aidspa ospvoraTov flioOpsppova ndvrcjv.

scholiast thinks that

it

is

here used for

The

arjp.

higher sense, however, best accords with the term oepvo-

rarov and other expressions of

to lay aside his buffoonery, is the

chooses of

all

the Grecian poets, although

terializing pantheism.

Orphic

who, when he

this writer,

most philosophical

much

inclined to a

ma-

In another place, in the style of the

hymn and Homer, he

calls

the dwelling-place of

it

Jove, "Ojuvvpi

TOtvvv aWep’ olnrjcnv Aiog.

Thesmoph ., 279.

A Wrjp

or nvp, on the one hand, and yrj on the other, be-

ing the two extremes, are frequently spoken of together as the cogenerating causes, or male and female parents of

material existences. T

£2

As

Prom. Vinct., 88

in .ZEsch.,

all

:

dlog cdOrjp

TTapprjTop re yrj. \ fTOr A p -4

v* Oif \ So, also, in a fragment of Euripides, from the drama of v

j?

\fj-

pjy

*>:'*>*

T)

ft,

*

?

*

\

'v

'

[

;

*

>

*/•

Chrysippus,

yala peyiorrj nal

On

A Log

like grounds, in the dissolution

objects,

this

semi-materializing

alfffjp.

and death of animate

philosophy

and poetry

taught that the more refined or spiritual parts returned to


:

:

:

ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. which they derived

the higher element from

their origin,

The

while the denser returned to the earth (spiritus)

ascended

to

its

kindred

129

aidrjp. the

Trvsvpa

fluids

and

bosom of their mother yala, Euripides which so strongly calls to mind

grosser matter sank into the as in the line of

Ecclesiastes,

xii.,

7

’E dear’

oOev

rjdrj y%j naXvcjiOrjvai VEKpovg, 6’ ercaorov slg to dcbinsro

kvravO* aTTEXOelv

to otipa 6

slg

TINETMA

pev

’AI0EPA

Trpog

THN. Supplices , 533.

Compare

Orestes, 1085, and Helena, 1023: 6 vovg

TG)V KdTOaVOVTCJV

pEV OV yVGjpTJV ,

aOdvcLTOV Eig aOavaTOV

Compare,

also, the line of the

from Stobseus, 108, in which the English

Church

d’

E%El

AI0EP’ EpnEouv. fragment of the Hypsipyle

we have

burial service

;

the very language of

earth to earth

—dust

to

dust

axOovTai (3pOToi elg yrjv (j)ipovTEg yv\v.

In the case of the more gross and animal,

it

was supposed

nvsvpa being borne down by the attraction and weight of the earthy and sensual, and being unable to extricate itself from it, sank into still lower forms, until purified and set free by the penetrating and cleansing fires of that the

Hades.

We

,

See the Phsedon, 81, D.

cannot conclude this long and yet, as

we

trust,

not

altogether irrelevant excursus, without giving an extract

from a fragment of Euripides, in which there tifully

is

most beau-

expressed this departure of the elements to their

native homes, and

which we cannot help thinking

genuine, notwithstanding

Valckenaer

it

is

to

strongly controverted

be

by


130 ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF 6

Xciipei

pvvr

yalav Ta

£$•

(

rd

0776(76),

5

(pVGig^

yatag

/i£T eu d’ a7r’

,

~VXV> AND T ^X V7\'

aiOepiov

fiXaoTOvra yovrjg elg ovpaviov iroXov fjXOe iraXiv

tgjv ycyvopevcov

diaKpcvopevov d

dAAo j

ovdev

i9 vtjgicec d’

aXkov

irpog

uopfpfjv Idlav airsdsi^ev.

Valckenaer Dlairib. in Eurip

Frag.

,

XIII. Atheistical Doctrine of (f>vGLg,rv^ 9

Page

Line

13,

16.

are is,

by nature and chance these

first

navra

<I>i;(7£6

rex v XI de ovdev tovtcjv. ,

four states,

re^v?].

elvat teal

They say

44

and

rvxv

(paGt*

that all these things

none of them by art ” That namely, 7ri;p, a??p, &c., were the

production of rvx 7] and <pvGig, whatever meaning they might

have attached

to these

terms

:

the second stage,

compounded bodies

sulted in the larger

which

re-

(arising from the

composition of these four elements, or from their mixed combinations, existence),

TvxV

when

considered as states or conditions of

was regarded

as chiefly the

work

of rvx'd-

d£ (pepopeva r y ryg dvvapecog EnaGra ercaGrcov, y

%vpiT£7TT(OKEV

apporrovra

Zypa irpog vypd,

it.

t. X.

ol/tELOjg

reference

is

olitELug 7T6)g;

its

influence

which belonged

made

in

that

is,

deppa

'ipvxpolg ,

fj

tvx 7] was the was modified by

In this department

presiding power, although those adaptations

iroog,

which the above expression, apporrovra although the original impulses and to (pvGtg ,

and

to

motions were the result of chance, a (pvGtg or natural necessity directed

after at

by

everything to

its

most

fitting place, so that,

a plenum vacuum warm was neutralized

long wanderings in this wide domain of

length found cold,

its

rest in a

convex adapted

itself to

,

concave, hard things found


ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF

(ftvOLg^ TV%7),

AND

131

their repose in soft, influences constantly tending to

an equality,

shape and universe

at last

(pvoeutg

avrov

fittings ,

after

:

oitcetoxg

all

sides

bodies to a spherical

motion, until finally in this

to a circular

was formed

many

brought

on

way

uoopog apporrcov rag dvvapeig

nog

a

rr\g

these various adaptations or

;

they had once happened

to take place, be-

coming more and more stable by nature (cbvotg), and a certain habit (e%tg), which everything had a tendency to main-

when once assumed.

tain

After this

immense region

of cjxvotg and

small province of re^yr], or art which ,

to

grow out of

first

[(pveoQai )

(

according

;

art or

rex vr]

is

and

a

of progress in

God

all its

itself

the

supposed

two

to the

dogma, that mind, of which

to the atheistic is

the last production of the

generative power of the universe. trine

rvx7! came

be long posterior

to

the offspring,

was

Here we have the

consistency; and

why

doc-

might not

be the last result or consummation of this ascending

scale, instead of being the beginning, as

he

is

in that a

which commences with the idea of the perfect, to the lower and the imperfect ? see not how, even on this scheme most ingenious as

priori view,

and from thence descends

We it is,

the atheist can expect to find relief from his torment-

ing theophobia, or escape that object of his greatest dread,

a superhuman being, whether he styles him a

God

or a

Daemon. If nature, (jxvotg

and

rvx'f],

have thus,

lower productions on our earth, of

man

whatever else they

(or

ter in us

which

wills,

finally

may

after

ages spent in

worked out the

soul

style that peculiar mat-

and thinks, and

feels),

why may

not

these agencies, during the long cycles of eternity, and in the infinitude of space, have given birth to a being excelling

much as we surpass the lowest And what security have they as to

us in power as vegetation

?

character, or

what grounds

for

possess any moral character at

orders of his moral

supposing that he would

all.

The same

progressive


132 ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF

(jiVOC^TV^tjy

AND

influences which, on our narrow scale, have called into being

mammoth

ichthyosauri and megatheria and ,

,

as sometimes

have given

now

birth,

affright us

by

their

on the immense

exposed

God

or

relics,

may

field of the universe, to

Gorgons, Hydras, and Chimaeras to a

monsters, such

dire,

Gods of a more horrid nature than ever crossed

the imagination of the Gnostic, or than ever figured in the

wildest legends of Thibet or Hindostan.

Indeed,

we have

every reason to believe that this monstrous Hindoo system, which should be styled a theogony rather than a theology, sprang in this very manner from an ancient atheism, which had been the offspring of a still earlier pantheism. It seems evidently

recognise

to

atheists talked about,

such an older (pvaig as Plato’s

and the history of

its

Gods

is

only a

history of successive generations from this primeval nature,

each of a more horrid species than

We

he takes shelter in that a necting with

it

from that its

man

last

unless

God which comes

minds, inseparably con-

But, then, this

is

a very different being

production of nature, which can never rise

parent, or possess

Should they

being,

own

this,

the notion of goodness, and of infinite perfec-

tion of every kind.

butes.

predecessor.

priori idea of

from the necessities of our

above

its

say the atheist has no security against

any other than physical

startle at the idea of

attri-

such a superhu-

whose malevolence might be commensurate

with his power, and assert that ble, the declaration

ing to those ideas

it is

improbable or impossi-

proceeds only from an instinctive revert-

which belong

to a directly opposite sys-

commencing with the moral instead of the natural, and making the necessary idea of God the ground of all truth.

tem,

We

are confined to so minute a portion of the universe,

that

no a posteriori induction, aside from any such neces-

sary a priori idea, or some special revelation, can ever

produce a firm conviction or a confiding benevolence.

trust in the

Divine


)

ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF

TU%?7,

AND

tÂŁ%V7].

133

Neither has the atheist any security against a Hades or

unseen world, it

is

a fact,

filled

with the most ghastly apparitions

many

self a skeptic, that

of this

unhappy

;

who was

as has been remarked by Bayle,

him-

have had

class

most horrid fears of ghosts and hobgoblins.

and

Their great

champion Hobbes furnishes a noted example of this. Some might regard it as an inconsistency, and yet their system can allege nothing against the position that such appearances are not the mere fictions of a diseased imagination, but have a real existence in rerum natura.

Who

can as-

sign any bounds to the working of (pvag and

rvx7

The own

even be sure that he

atheist cannot

Eternity

hypothesis, live again. in reference to

cept what

is

it,

is

may

very long, and viewed

everything ceases to be improbable, ex-

inconsistent with the attributes of an a priori

God.

But remove

posing

that, in the

atoms which

this idea,

may

combinations,

having the same

and what hinders us from sup-

endless changes of matter, the same

now form

the atheist’s body, and give rise to

the energies of his soul,

may

again

come

recreate a brain with the

figure, site,

an existence, in

all

into the

same

same

particles,

and order, and, of course, pro-

ducing the same thoughts and sensations,

new

] ?

on his

not,

respects identical,

or, in short, re-

which may

misery of the

same awful

anticipations for the hopeless

past,

rec-

and can only indulge the

ollect all the

and godless

future.

Plato seems to have already had in mind a class of semi-

we have been

theists or semi-atheists,

such as

who might

kind of Deity younger than Nature,

believe in a

considering,

and yet possessed of vast power and intelligence. alluding to the atheists,

the

common

opinion that astronomers must be

because they are so

phenomena

of the

After

in the habit of resolving all

Heavens

into necessities

(

avayuaig

and natural laws, he mentions a class who acknowledged the existence of

mind

in the motions of the celestial bodies

M


V

.

134 ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF

who

but

(^VOtg^ F^XVi

AND

TE^VTj

strangely regarded this mind as itself the result,

and not the author of Nature

Aeyovol nveg cog vovg elr\ 6 ndvd boa hut' ovpavov ol 6s avrol ird?uv apapravovreg 'i/jvx^g (pvoecjg, on npeodvrepov elrj oupdruv, diaK£KOG[i7]KG)g

:

StavorjOevreg de cbg vecjrepov airavO

,

rpe'ipav irdhcv,

say that

But, then, these

nature of soul, in that

and supposing upset

einslv eirog avek. t. A.

Nous, or Mind, that orders

it is

Heavens.

b)g

kavrovg 6e noXv paXXov9

it

all things,

things appear to

is

it

all

same persons,

older than bodies (or matter),

and especially themselves.

them

to

be

Some

things in the

erring as to the

be younger, they again, as

to

full

merely of

we may For

earth,

all

say,

these

and stones,

and other inanimate bodies, dividing among themselves

(or

which they assign) the causes of the universe. This is what has produced so many atheistic impieties, and so many difficulties in the treatment of these matters. Hence, also, have come those abusive charges which the poets to

have made against philosophers, comparing their declara-

and dogmas

tions

Legibus,

xii.,

confused yelping of dogs.”

to the

967, A.

There

is

be drawn from this passage. that

eternal

fore

to

Plato evidently maintains

no one can be a consistent theist who does not hold

that spirit is older than matter. is

De

one important inference

would be

The

position that matter

in direct opposition to this,

and there-

he could not himself have maintained that doctrine,

whatever appearance of

it

there

may

be in some obscure

See this more fully examined, Note L., on the ancient dogma, De nihilo nihil Jit. On this subject of tvx an ^ cf>votg compare Aristotle, Physic. Ausc.,

passages in the Timseus.

,

lib. ii.

,

ch. 4.


RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART. 135

XIV. Atheistical Doctrine that

Law and

Religion were not by

Na-

ture, but by Art.

Page ov

14,

Line

10.

Ovtu This

(pvoei, tsxvxi 6s.

6s is

vopodsotav ndoav

teal rrjv

,

simply mentioned as one of

the inferences from their doctrine, namely, “ that legislation or law

was

not by nature, but by art.”

It

was, however, just

deemed of the most dangerous conwhich he directs all the strength of

the inference that Plato

sequence, and against

his reasoning, both here

Compare

logues.

and

many other

in

parts of his dia-

the Gorgias, and especially that long

argument of Callicles (482, C.), in which he advances this same doctrine, namely, that law, and right (to 6Uaiov ), and are

which

equivalent to

is

human

not by nature, but by

religion

what the

appointment,

atheist here is

supposed

to

mean by ts^vt]^ as something junior and posterior to nature d)£ rd noXXa de ravra svavrla dXXfXoig sgtlv tj ts (f>vcug :

,

teal 6 vdfiog, k. t.

a doctrine

It is

Gorgias, 483, A.

X.

which in

ages has had

all

its

advocates,

and in modern times has been specially revived by Hobbes and his followers. all

interest.

its

this inference that gives

It is

As a

atheism

speculative tenet for the intellect

would have no charms even

mind.

merely,

it

If this

creed be true, then not only religion, but also

for the darkest

morality, and all right views of law, are without tion either in

all

any founda-

God, or in any nature of things proceeding all implying a moral sanction

from him, or in any nature at

and which necessarily suggests the idea of something and higher, and stronger than case, the offspring of

only a

human

origin

;

T s^vt], Mind

;

or, in

Plato ascribes to the atheist, vorspav sk

That

are is,

all,

in that

they have

since, in this creed, Art is the result

of the junior production,

0NHTHN

They

itself.

or Art.

older,

ONHTS2N.

They

the language

etc

tovtwv

which

yevofisvrjv

can, therefore, have only


:

136 RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART.

human

sanctions, and

depraved

it

is this

atheism

soul, gives

all its

were concerned,

tellect alone

conclusion which, to the

it

value, while, if the in-

would shrink from

from the very “ blackness of darkness”

The

ancient atheists

saw

itself.

that there could be

of Plato, the

pev

As in the moral and Deity was the beginning,

6?)

rr)v Kal

peoa ru)v ovrtov andvruv

as he says in another place, 6

av

paXiara, 717

Etrj

;

resents those against

so,

philosophy

political

it.

deog (cjonep 6 iraXaiog Xoyog)

no true nat-

God, and they did

ural morality without the belief in a

not pretend

as

it

middle, and end apx'fjv

re

£%6)T, lib.

real

iv.,

:

6

te\ev-

715, or,

ndvruv perpov

dr) -dedg rjplv

on the other hand, he justly rep-

whom

he

is

here contending, as hold-

ing to no conscience, no law, no right and wrong, as well

They

as no religion and no God. their

reasoned, however,- like

modern followers of the school of Hobbes,

From an

circle.

atheistic assumption, they

in a vicious

proved that law

was

not by nature, but by

tion,

taken as established, they argued that Divine worship,

art,

and then from

being enjoined by law, was also by fieovg eivai irpCdrov (paoiv ovtoi

vopoig.

We

Page

art,

and*not by nature

rex^V °v

(pvoet,

aXXa

tlol

14, line 20.

see the absurdity of the thing in the

their positions

this latter posi-

and their

irpcbrov 'ipevdog

;

way

Plato states

yet,

by conceal-

mode of reasoning, such writers Hobbes have seemed to make out a most formidable

ing this vicious and circular as

argument.

This

atheistical

dogma, that religion

is

the

creation of law and the civil magistrate, is most strikingly set forth in the following

fragment attributed by Sextus

Empiricus (Advers. Matliem.,

lib.

ix.,

sec. 54) to Critias,

one of the thirty tyrants of Athens, and by Plutarch (De Placit. Philosoph.,

i.,

6 and 7) to Euripides, who, he says, Sisyphus instead

utters these sentiments in the character of

of his own, through fear of the Areopagus.

verses in

full,

We

give these

because of their intrinsic interest as one of


RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART. 137 the

most remarkable remains of antiquity, because they

forth in all its strength the substance of all that

been said on

head from

this

down

that time

set

has ever

to the present,

and because they furnish a specimen of most finished poetry, of a higher stamp than atheism could have been supposed to

employ

in the utterance of its dark oracles ’TL>

xpovoc

OT* 7]V LLTCLKTOQ avdptOTCCOV /3£og

vnypETyg,

YLal ftypLudyg, ioxvog

"Or’ ovdev aeQlov ovre ToZg egOTioZglv yv

O vf

:

,

av noTiaapa ToZg kclkolq kylvero.

KanELTa poL doKovaiv dvdpcjnoL vopovg Qeodcu KohaoTag, Iva diny Tvpavvog y Tsvovg Pporelov Tyv vfipiv 6ov\yv EXVi ,

’E £rj[LLOVTO 6\

*E KELT

EL TLQ

E^apapTUVOL.

Tup^aVT] [1EV 0L VOpOL

ETCELdrj

’AnsZpyov avTovg epya py npdoGELv (3ia, 6’ snpaGGOV, rrjvLKavrd pot 6 okel

AaOpa

$ vv<u Ely

yvupyv dvyp

nvfcvog rig nal oo(j)bg

Tv&vcu

tl dsZpa rolg na/coZoL ,

nav TiaOpa

IIpdoocoGLv, y T^Eyctoiv, y fypov&GL

TO OEION

’E vtevQev ovv *Jlg £.otl

N06> m

r’

Aalpuv,

UKOVCOV

IT pooExuv ts

Udv

atyfrlnp

,

onog

ETZog fivyrolaiv k^EvpZbv,

c$’

tl.

Eloyyymrro

’daXkuv

,

j3Z(p

KCLt (37lE 7CG)V (j)povtiv t’ del,

ravra

cal (pvGiv tislav <poptiv,

t

pev to XexOev ev flporoig lmovgetcu ,

’Ef dpupEvov 6 e nav ISeZv dvvyGSTac.

’Eav 6e gvv Gtyy

tl (3ov?i£vyg nanov,

To£r’ ovxl ^t/gel Tovg fisovg "

Ev

egtl

'&e'lg)v.

A LdaypaTuv

tovgSs TLg

*

to yap (f>povovv

oyovg Pisyov

ytiiGTOv eloyyyGaTo ,

'Tevcki Kakvtyag Tyv dlyOsLav Xoycj.

N ateiv

6’ E(j)aoK£

M dTiLGTu y "OOev

n Ep

y

Tovg iJsovg svTavO’, Iva

EKnTiy^sLsv dvOpunovg,

K.al Tag ovyoEig tc5 TaTiaLnupu ’E/c

ayuv

Eyvcj Tovg (j>66ovg elvaL ppoToZg (3Z(p ,

Tyg vnspde nspityopag, Iv* aoTpanyg

KaTsZd’ kvavGEig Selvcl

6’

,

B povTyg,

to

t’

Xpovov Kahbv

av nTvnypaTa

uoTspunov ovpavov denagr noiniTipa, TEKTOvog GO(j>ov.

M2


138 RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART. *

OQev re Xa/urpog darepag onepx^i pvdpog,

O

#’ vypog tig yrjv opdpog EttTtopL&Tai.

Toiovode

7r epLEGrrjGEv

avdpcoTroig tyodov

'Zrotxovg, tcaTi&g re tcj Xoycp kcltguclgc

T ov

A

Aalpov’ oyn&v, kv 7rpenovTL x^pi V-

most masterly refutation of

cially as

may

it

this atheistic

dogma, espe-

was, in more modern times, advanced by Hobbes,

be found in Cudworth’s Intellectual System of the

Universe, in

which there

is

a most thorough and conclusive

examination of the general doctrine, that morality and

reli-

gion are not by nature, or from the Divine mind, but are strictly conventional, that is,

by human law.

Plato also

touches upon this subject in the Theaetetus, 172, B., where

he

sets forth the unavoidable conclusions of that flowing

philosophy, which, rejecting ideas and making man, ,

other words, sensations the measure of rravrojv), utterly

law, in short,

kind

all

alo%pa, Sinaia nal dSina nal ,

baa

(

perpov

rcoXzg

ravra

real

rfi

naXd pev nal ola av enaorr]

(cpaa),

nal

ozrjOezoa (t-vp^epovra elvai)

elvai

things

sweeps away all morality, all religion, all foundations whether of a civil or religious

Ovnovv nal nepl TzoXinnCbv

:

all

or, in

p?],

# r\rai

akrfleia enaarxj

vopipa

eavrirj,

nal ev rovrozg pev

*

ovSev ooepebrepov ovre ISabrrjv ISubrov, ovre rroXtv noXecog elvai . nal ev rolg Scnaiozg nal dSznozg, nal ooiozg nal avoGiOig

,

ovSev

edeXovozv loxvpi^eoOai,

aXXd to

’0Y2IAN eavrov

yiveraz aXrjdeg rore, orav So^.

They

naXov) than to that of

nozvyj So^av,

,

(that

is,

was

partly

Ka£ 6?) nal erepa ra Se Srj *

Page

14, line

23.

by nature and partly

conventional agreement or custom), but the

Just (or Right) had no foundation at other words,

rovro

the right .

,

“ The beautiful they said,

avrebv

to the idea of the

pev aXXa elvai vopep de

(pvoei

(pvoez

Theaetetus, 172, B., C.

dinaza odd’ elvai rorrapdirav (pvoez.

by law

eon

assigned a rather higher rank

beautiful (to

rd naXa,

ovn

d>g

was

all in

nature,” or, in

the creation alone of arbitrary enactment.

,


:

THE FIGURE APOSIOPESIS.

The

139

doctrines of an immutable standard of morals and of

an immutable standard of taste must go together.

Both are

necessarily and consistently rejected by the atheist, and

both should be strenuously maintained by

although not the same, can

be traced to one

all

All are harmonies

foundation.

and

consistent

all

Physical, moral, intellectual, and religious beauty,

theists.

;

all

common

spring from one root,

unmeaning notions, unless connected with that idea of God in which the Beautiful, the Righteous, and the Good (to fcaXdv to ayadov to diuacov) are all embraced all

are alike

,

,

and regarded, not only as older than human vrj),

but also than (pvvig, or Nature

art ( $vr)T7 )

tex -

Compare

itself.

argument of the atheist Callicles, in the Gorgias, 485 (pvOEL [lev

ova eotl naXa vdfuo

the :

a

ds, k. t. X.

XV. The Figure Aposiopesis.

Page # is

15,

wanting,

Line

Ei

8.

The

prj (frrjoovoiv.

apodosis here

interrupted in a manner, which, al-

or, rather,

though frequent in Greek, would not be admissible English.

This

more powerful

silent

omission has sometimes a

in the

much

than any expression of the apodosis,

effect

especially in the case of threatening and admonitions.

The

answer, in such examples, seems

con-

science, as though

response.

it

to

be

left entirely to

could not possibly mistake the proper

There are very powerful and numerous

stances of this in the

Hebrew

of the Old Testament, and

from thence in the Hebraistic Greek of the the most striking TTOLrjorj

42 62.

;

rcapnov

xxi /., 42

There

;

is

—

may eI

be found, Luke,

6e prjye.

Acts, xxiii., 9;

in-

New.

xiii.,

9

:

One

of

nav pev

Compare, also, Luke, xix., Romans, ix., 22 John, vi.,

a very fine example, Iliad,

;

i.,

135


;

140

THE FIGURE APOSIOPESIS. akA? 6e

el

el [j,ev tie

pi)

d&oovoi yepag leyaOvuoc ’AxaioX— 6g)g)olv f.

.

.

.

See, also, the ninth book of the Laws, 854, C., aal eav uev ooi dptivTL ravra

Aco</>a

j

We

have also an example very similar

the Protagoras, 325, D., I

n to vooppa

teal

to

eav pev e^ioy

el

6e

the present in Tcetdrjrai

&c., where, in the same manner, the answer

ui),

&c.

pr),

el

6e

is left to

the inward voice, and the writer hurries on to the second

See, also, the Republic,

condition as the principal clause. ix.,

&c.

pi),

6e

575,

Thucydides,

&c.

pi],

ovuovv eav pev enovreg

I).,

;

iii.,

3, teal fjv

vneirccjOLV

pev £vpdirj

Symposion, 220, D.,

Plato,

el

,

rj

— eav 6e —

rceipa

el

6e fiovXeode, n.

7. A.

This has been most appropriately and beautifully

styled

by grammarians

aposiopesis, or

an omission arising

from an excitement of the feelings, in which a gesture or a look

supposed

is

to

supply the place of the voice.

though these and similar cases-

may by some be

as defects or irregularities in the

scholar

who has any

gard them as our

own

regarded

Greek language, every

claim to taste or philosophy must re-

highest beauties.

its

Al-

tongue had not more of this

It is

a great pity that

flexibility,

and did not

admit more licenses of a similar kind, instead of being so confined in that strait jacket which has been put

stiffly

upon

it

in the rules imposed, for the

most

part,

by pedantic,

unphilosophical, and unclassical writers on English Gram-

mar

;

for such,

with some few exceptions, have been the

mass of those who have taken upon themselves to lay down the laws of this science, and to sit in judgment on Lowth and Murray. To return, however, to the sentence great

before us

:

desired to avoid the aposiopesis, this

if it is

be done by taking

all

from nal nepl

to ypacjxov inclusive,

as a parenthesis, and then bringing in

what follows as a

repetition with an apodosis to el pi) (prjoovoiv.

thing in the

which,

way

of this

however, may

is

may

The only

the particle de, the insertion of

be regarded as occasioned by the


ARGUMENT FROM MOTION.

141

prodosis having been, in a measure, lost sight of in conse-

quence of the length of the intervening parenthesis.

XVI. Argument for

Page

.

Line 22. ’A rjdsGrepcov Xoyuv. “ Unusual or common track” Reference is had to those subtle

18,

out of the

,

which are soon

disquisitions respecting motion

They

God from Motion

Existence of a

the

to follow.

common

are so called, because differing from the

and more obvious arguments generally made use

such

of,

more which Clinias

as those arising from evidence of design, and the

phenomena of

striking

had so readily alluded Plato thinks

sion.

it

he elsewhere styles 7ir\yr\v

motion

the visible world, to in the

conceded

is

se, all is

the fountain-head of the error If the least

also

rr\v

or property of

is

concerned.

at least as far

The whole cause

If this is granted, or

would not be hard

to

is

not de-

admit that matter

may

have an adaptive as well as a moving property, a

tendency in

:

to matter, or to the least particle of

surrendered to the enemy. it

power

given up to the atheist,

as the physical world

nied, then

of the discus-

best to begin at the beginning, or, as

it,

avoiyrov dogrjg.

matter per

commencement

which

an accommodation of

to

is

it

itself to

the circumstances

placed, or, according to the doctrine just

taught, a disposition to fit itself to those conditions in the

may be thrown by its own selfmoving power, acting only under the direction of rv^r], or

universe into which

chance

it

£vpnenrojfcev navra apfiorrovra olue'nog

:

paXaua npog

Here we are and we can as well

GfcXrjpa, u. r. X.

‘region of occult qualities,

the one property as of the other. the

mind

to

In fact,

rrcog,

in the dark

conceive of

it is

easier for

admit this doctrine of an adaptive power, after

conceding that of motion, than

to receive the latter first as


ARGUMENT FROM MOTION.

142

In this view, then,

an independent starting-point.

guments from

shown

tion is

fitness fall

If

we

eternity is very long

charge of

—he

oineiog ncog), and

its

mo-

only give the atheist time enough

theory, everything will at last

^vpirlnreL

all ar-

first

be the offspring of rexvr], and not of tvx^i

to

or even of (pvcug.

— and

to the ground, unless the

may

fall

fancy

into

commence

on his

that,

proper place

its

the natural dis-

only and long-sought appropriate office stand on the

Plato, therefore, takes his

position,

first

namely, that the mere motion of matter implies the existence of Spirit as an older and higher essence, or, in other words, that Spirit alone is self-moving, because

which resolves

that duality ject

and

object

itself at the

it

alone possesses

same time

into sub-

The term avroidvrjGLg is not to be conmay refer to any change in the

.

fined to local motion, but

state or condition of a thing.

may, therefore, be pred-

It

icated of mind, or pure spirit, independent of space. this

sense volition

though

it

may

is

avTontv7]Gtg or self-motion, even ,

this, in either

acceptation of the term,

affirmation rendered necessary It

is

involved in the term

which the term

is

it

is

an

itself,

or rather in the idea of

the real, and not merely arbitrary rep-

Although the argument teriori form,

is

by the very laws of mind.

and may therefore be called a

resentative,

al-

That matter

never be exhibited outwardly.

cannot possess

In

logical necessity.

may have something

of the a pos-

nevertheless strictly a priori.

clusion not derived from experience

;

It is

a con-

for in truth, aside

from

the essential idea

of our minds compel us

to create, all

which the laws our mere experience

of matter

posed

As

to

it.

in motion,

and

presented to our senses, this

phenomenon

it

is directly

seems

exhibits itself

to

op-

be evei

more con

more closely and minutely it is examined so' were to be consulted, or, to use the language of some of our Baconians, if nature alone were to

stantly the

;

that if experience alone

be interrogated, motion would appear

to

be the law, and rest


ARGUMENT FROM MOTION. '

v

if

were ever

absolute rest

Notwithstanding

to

the

all this,

143

be discovered) the exception.

mind cannot

divest itself of

which

that idea (whether innate, or acquired, or suggested) it

hath of body, as distinguished from space

;

and whenever

this idea is clearly called out, the soul doth affirm of neces-

and

sity,

phenomena of experience to the move itself. The same ne-

in spite of all the

contrary, that matter cannot

cessity compels

by

tinue motion

than

it

it,

also, to declare that matter

virtue of

can commence

any inherent power, any more

and

it,

this, too,

notwithstanding the

opposing dogma so confidently laid down in of natural philosophy.

We

of ten thousand motions,

cannot con-

all

our books

have the constant observation

commenced and continued

with-

out the visible intervention of any spiritual agent, and ap-

parently the result of innate properties, and yet,

when

the

mind remains sound and true to itself, all this does not at all weaken the innate conviction, that every KLvrjOLg implies the existence of an originating will or spirit somewhere, however many the impulsive forces that may seem to have intervened between that will and its ultimate object. When the

mind

affirm,

a healthy state,

>3 in

and does affirm

this,

we

say

it

compelled

is

to

with the same confidence as

the proposition that the three angles of every triangle are

equal to two right angles, or that two bodies cannot occupy the

same space.

Even

this,

notwithstanding

it

lies at the

foundation of mechanical and dynamical physics,

mately

to

be resolved into a logical necessity that ,

cessary affirmation into which the mind

laws of

its

is,

a ne-

driven by those

own, that form not only our highest, but our only

idea of truth.

der which that

is

is ulti-

it

Hence, having the is

idea, or that notion un-

forced to think of matter, the soul affirms

two bodies occupying the same space are one

because the

bod)r

last differentia , or erepotOTriq, is destroyed.


SOUL OLDER THAN BODY.

(44

XVII. Soul Older than Body.

Page

19,

Line

2 a) par cov epnpooOsv

16.

Tcavrcjv yevo -

Compare with this Timaeus, 34, B. T rjv 6s 6?) ibvx?] v ov% 6)g vvv vorspav smx^povpsv Xsysiv ovrcog eprjxdvrjaaro uai o dsog vscorspav. ov yap av apx^Oai

fievrj.

:

,

rcpsadvrspov vito vecorspov ovvsp^ag etaosv. vsesi uai apery nporspav uai npeodvrepav fog

6sgtt6tlv

b 6s real ys-

ocoparog,

'ipvx'rjv

we now

did not create soul, as

speak of

our argument), posterior and junior

;

for

it

(in the

order of

he would not have

Where-

suffered an elder thing to be ruled by a younger. fore

he constituted

prior to

both by virtue and by birth,

soul,

God

dp^ovoav ap^opsvov ovveoryoaro.

teal

to

be

and older than body, as the mistress and ruler

The term

thereof.”

ijn’XV is

used here in a less sense

than in the tenth of the Laws, where immaterial, and

employed

is

as distinguished from (pvoig

it

includes

in a peculiar It,

.

all

manner

that is

for

God

however, means much

more, in this passage of the Timaeus, than the soul of man.

The

philosopher

is

speaking of soul collectively, the animus

mundi or Soul of the Universe, as distinct from, inferior ,

and dependent upon, the Deity who had constituted

it

to,

(ovv-

eoTrjGaro ep7]x av V aaT0 )’ and yet as the source, and fountain ,

from which

all

other

souls

whether of men or of the that verse of Pindar, n

Ev

emanate or are generated,

inferior Divinities, according to

Nem., Carm.

vi., 2., a.,

ay6pfov, sv ftefov ysvog

1,

2

:

eu

ptdg 6s rcvsopsv

parpog apfporepoL. If soul is older

than body or matter, then the properties

or innate powers (cvyyevr]) of the former must be also before those of the latter. 661-a 6rj real

Wherefore, as he says below,

smpsXeia ual vovg ual rsxv?] ual vopog ( rd


SOUL OLDER THAN BODY.

145

ovyyevrj ipvxVG)* TTporspa av etrj anXrjpcbv nal uaXantiv nal /3ap£G)v nal novcpcov (rtiv TTpoarjnovTUv Gupan). “ Thought, j

and providence, and reason, and art and law must have ,

been before hard, and

evident that the term otipa here substances, but

matter

is

light.”

not taken for organized

in all respects equivalent to our

is

It is

word

he mentions only those elementary properties

for

;

,

and heavy, and

soft,

which belong

to

or

it,

were supposed

belong

to

to

it

as

So word against the inference we

matter, such as hardness or resistance, weight, &c. that there is nothing in this

have drawn respecting Plato’s opinion on the eternity of the material world, whether regarded as organized or unor-

ganized.

It

seems

to

us perfectly clear that in every sense

modern philosophy, he held

of the word, as used by the

matter to be junior to soul.

The is

order of the argument,

what

the direct opposite of

In the

posteriori.

ness in matter

can oppose an older

latter,

we

to the contrary,

is

commonly

styled the a

proceed from evidences of

to a soul or art ,

tyvoig, of

should be observed here,

it

which,

for all that this

may have been

whose adaptations

its

fit-

method

the offspring of

designs

may be

only an imperfect imitation, whether regarded as proceeding from the soul of man, or of

some superhuman being.

In the other, the older existence of spirit ed,

and then

it is

tion, that there

art

inferred,

must

be

is first establish-

even before experimental induc-

such evidences of design, because

and law, which are properties of

soul,

must be older

than the material structures in which they are exhibited.

On

scheme of the atheist, or the naturalist (the worshipper of (pvotg ), only some of the smaller and latest productions were the work of tex vt] making its appearance in the latter cycles of the universe. In the other view, which the author here presents, ra peyaXa nal npebra epya nal npa %eig rexvrjg av yiyvoiro, ovra ev irptiroLr, ra 6e (\>vaei nal iiVGiq varepa nal apxopsva av en rexvrjg ecrj nal vov the

N


COMPARISON OF THE DANGEROUS FLOOD.

146 “

The

great and

first

works would be the works of

arlt

while the things of nature, and even nature herself, would be posterior

There

is

to,

and ruled by

likewise another view which

full interpretation it

and mind.”

art

essential to the

is

was

of the passage, namely, that not only

phenomena

impossible that these

of matter should exist

objectively , without the previous existence of soul as

which they

cient cause of that substance of

are

an

effi-

phenomena,

but also that they could not exist subjectively without a soul of

which they

also, is

and

constitute the sensations.

true that spirit

it

visible ,

must be older than hard and ,

Compare the passage

&c.

In this sense,

in the

soft

,

Phsedon, in

which he refutes the doctrine that the soul is only a harmony, by showing that its pre-existence is essential to harmony itself, and that, where the former is not present, the latter is nothing more than dead strings, and chords, and tensions,

as

and relaxations, and vibrations of the

harmony no

reasoning

real or true being.

may be

carried

It is

down through

air,

but has

clear that the all

same

the elementary

properties of matter.

XVIII.

Remarkable Comparison of

Page

21, Line 3.

the

Dangerous Flood.

hrconelre ovv

,

uaddnep

el

norayov

rjyag edei rpelg Hvrag diabatveiv peovra otyodpa , k. t. A. have ventured The common reading is el tcaddnep.

We

the change from the exigency of the place, and on the authority of Stephanus. “ Consider, then, as if we three

to

make

had

to cross a violently

flowing river,” &c.

The Athenian

here most graphically compares himself and his two companions, just entering upon this most profound and difficult

argument respecting motion, into a

deep and rapid

to

torrent,

men who

are about to plunge

and who, therefore, need the


COMPARISON OF THE DANGEROUS FLOOD. utmost caution in the examination of every step,

147

lest, if at

any point they should lose a firm foothold, they might be

overwhelmed

in floods of darkness,

and carried down the

The

stream of doubt, without any chance of recovery.

comparison to

is

admirably sustained,

and even when

it

seems

be dropped, does nevertheless continue to affect the dis-

course, and tinge the style with a metaphorical

many teal

sentences

abarog

;

— napacpepopevog, page

22, and exopevoc cog

,

we cannot

of imitating Plato, and

comparison in respect

to himself,

tamquam

circumspectans

when

placed in like

Cicero, Tusc. Disp.,

i.,

cir-

Itaque du -

multa adversa reverens,

,

mari immenso

in rate in

-

to institute a similar

cumstances in reference to another great truth. hcesitans ,

n

help thinking that he had

passage in his eye, and meant

bitans ,

for

Cicero was very fond

vog aocpaXovg neioparog page 23.

this

hue

as in the expressions, A oyog otpodporepog

,

nostra vehitur oratio.

30.

So, also, in the Phaedon, after exhausting the direct arguments for the immortality of the soul, Socrates “ trusts

himself to the best of human reasons (that

is, to

the old and

unbroken tradition respecting the doctrine) as the safest vessel to

which the

soul could be committed, and on

alone, although in continual danger of shipwreck,

be expected it

the storms of doubt

to outride

;

it

which could

unless perhaps , ,

might hereafter find a surer vehicle in some Divine reve-

Xoyog

lation , or

tielog,

which Heaven might yet condescend

to

We do not know which to admire make known to men most, the sound philosophy, the unaffected humility, or the which the whole passage abounds. A elv yap nepl avra ev ye n tovtcjv bcanpa^aodcu, iq paOelv onrj iq evpelv fj, el ravra advvarov rbv yovv QeXriOTOV rtiv avOpconivcov Xoyo)v Xadovra enl tovtov

striking imagery, with

,

dxovpevov, toonep enl ox^dcag, luvdvvevovra dianhevoai

rbv

j3iov

el prj rig

dvvatro aacpaXearepov

pov, £nl fiedaiorepov bxppcLrog

rj

ttal

cuavdvvore

AOrOT 0EIOT

rtvog


$

.

INVOCATION OF DIVINE

148

X oyog,

We

Phaedon, 85, E.

dtanopevOrivat,.

AID.

take

avOpumvo

in this passage, not in the sense of reason or argu-

used in the Gorgias, 523, A., at the introduction of the mythical representation of the judgment ment, but rather as

after

Oov

death

:

atcove

it is

paXa uaXov Xoyov, ov av pev

6e Xoyov.

,

seems

In the

have had an eye

fjyrjO'Q

pv-

word ox^biag above, Plato

Homer’s account of the shipwreck of Ulysses, in his voyage on such a vessel from the island of Calypso, and thus to intimate that this /3eX rtorog to

tcjv avOpG)nivG)v

to

Xoyov could be regarded

as at best only

a temporary support, until the coming of that

more sure

word of Revelation. Can we doubt that the would have rejoiced in the announcement that there was even then in the world a “ sure word of prophecy, like a light shining in a dark place” and that he would have surrendered all his speculative reason'fiebaLorspog )

(

soul of our philosopher

ing for the security and comfort of such an assurance

?

XIX. Invocation of the Divine

Aid

in the

Argument.

Striking

Examples of this from other Dialogues

Page rjplv, to

22, Line 11. *Aye

vvv

call

sotg)

6rj,

Oeov elnoTe rcapauXriTeov

tovto ovrco yevopsvov.

upon God

,

let

it

Christian writers, both

he done

now”

“ If ever we ought

Many

professed

metaphysicians and theologians,

might here take a lesson from the heathen philosopher.

What more

sublimely appropriate than this petition for Di-

vine aid in an argument against those

existence

?

The

who

denied the Divine

dark, violent, and almost impassable tor-

upon which they are about to embark is yet kept in mind, and in view of this the soul is led to seek for some There is, we think, an allusion to some aid out of itself. of those prayers which Homer puts into the mouths of his

rent


,

INVOCATION OF DIVINE heroes, as they are about to engage in perilous contest

may

it

;

149

AID.

some arduous and

be to the prayer of Ajax for light

645) in which Jove covers the whole held of conflict with thick darkness or, perhaps, in that desperate

battle (lib. xvii.,

;

in still greater

consistency with the metaphorical imagery

here employed, to the prayer of Achilles, in the twenty-flrst

book of the

Iliad (273),

whelmed by the Scamander

when

danger of being over-

in

and turbulent

rising floods of the angry

:

Zev rrdrep etc

ovrtg pe ftecov eXeecvov vneor?],

dog

TTorapolo oaoooai.

Whether which

,

this be so or not,

the purest Christianity

it

in this case a prayer

is

need not blush

There are several

edge and admire.

to

acknowl-

interesting examples

of similar invocations in others of the Platonic dialogues,

mouth of Socrates

or of

evidently represented.

We

either put into the

by

whom

he

is

some speaker have but

little

doubt, too, that in these remarkable peculiarities of character,

Plato accurately represents the model he so closely ob-

served, and with

whom

his

own

intellectual existence

almost be regarded as identified. others, the invocation in the fourth

We may

note,

may

among

book of the Laws,

at the

commencement of his system of positive legislation for the state a work which certainly, of all others, should never ;

be attempted without a deep feeling of the necessity of

Qedv

Divine assistance. tcevrjv

emuaXcopeOa

*

6rj

7Tpdg rr\v rr}g noXecog

uarao-

6 de auovaeie re, ttai vnatcovcrag IXe-

cog

evpevrjg re rjplv eXOol, ovvduncooprjGcov rrjv re ttoXlv

teal

rovg vopovg 712, B.

the construction

of our

“ Let us invoke the aid of God in

May

state.

he hear us, and

when he

may he kindly and propitiously come to our assistance, that he may jointly with us arrange in order the state and the laws� How much higher a light than this is boasted of by those modern law-makers who has listened

to

our requests

,

N

2


INVOCATION OF DIVINE

150

have endeavoured, as

far as

they could,

of prayer from our legislative halls

B

Philebus, 25,

Beog uev ovv

:

AID. to

banish the voice

Compare,

!

also, the

av

(rjplv cppacrei)

7r ep

ye

j

Here,

epalg ev%aig knrjfcoog ycyv^rai.

which the Divine

the discussion of

too, the subject, in

aid is invoked, is of the

very highest importance, being no less than a most profound analysis of the radical difference between physical or sensual,

and

spiritual pleasure

when

holy, that,

;

a theme, in his estimation, so

again alluding to

it

book of the

in the sixth

which was

Republic, he utters the same word

(evcprjpei,)

employed

whether of speech

in driving all profanation,

from the

action,

or

sacrificial altar, Rep., vi., 509, B.

Perhaps, however, the most striking example of an invo-

may be

cation of this kind

found in connexion with that

sublime prooemium of the Timseus, to which

That

ready alluded. treatise

on law,

too,

or, in

it

we have

should be borne in mind,

alis

a.

other words, the legislation of the

physical and intellectual universe, embracing equally the

laws of mind and matter nal nara

:

'AXXa, rovro ye

OGXppoovvrjg psrexovoiv,

Ppaxv opuepov nal peyaXov irpayparog rjpdg 6e rovg irepl navrog Xoyovg el

yeyovev

rj

,

dij

eirl

navreg oool

ndo^

tieov del irov

TcoieloOaC

dppfj nal

naXovav

mj peXXovrag,

nal dyeveg ectlv avaynr} fteovg emnaXovpe,

vovg evxeoOai ndvrag Kara vovv enelvotg pev paXiora “

eiropevcjg 6e rjplv elnelv, 27, C.

but

little

more, then,

when

we

to

be, first of

God by

invoke

all,

always

it

is

affair,

call

,

who have wheth-

upon God.

generated or eternal

prayer, that

,

what we say may

according to his mind, and then consistent

with ourselves.”

#

Page

those

about to engage in a discussion re-

specting the universe, whether

ought

Even

of sobriety, in the undertaking of any

er of small or great consequence,

Much

23, Line

1

.

Irrovd^j irdaq TTapanenXrjoOGiv.

prayer on the present occasion has simplicity that characterize

all

all

The

the conciseness and

the recorded petitions of


INVOCATION OF DIVINE

Compare the

Socrates.

last

151

AID.

he ever uttered,

an easy

for

death, just before taking the cup of poison in the prison,

Phaedon, 117, re nal vegQcll

xpf •

a

B

’AA/C evx^Oal ye ttov rolg

:

evOevSe

rrjv pETo'utr\oiv rrjv

dr) teal

eyd>

longest specimen

evxopai

re,

eicelge

evtvx ?} ye -

The

nal jevolto ravr^j.

remarkable prayer

is that

tieolg eijeorL

end of

at the

the Phaedrus, or the dialogue on Spiritual Beauty,

which

T

we cannot resist the temptation of quoting in full £2 $IAE IIAN re nal aXkoi deoL, doirjrs pot naXip yEVEoOat rdvdo:

6ev ra^coOev 6e ooa

rolg Evrog elva'i

,

giov 6e vop'foipi rov coepov (lot <

ogov

pot,

(ptXia

*

ttXov-

to 6e xP V(J ov nXfjOog (pEpEcv prjre dyeiv dvvairo aXXog rj 6

fjirjTE

ppo)v , 279, B.

Oh

*

thou beloved Universal

elrj

erw-

Numen and ,

ye

I may become beautiful within and that whatever of externals I may possess may be all in harmony icith my inward ( spiritual ) being. May I regard the wise alone as rich ; and may I have just so much of gold as no other would, take from me but the virtuous man” The last sentence is somewhat obscure, but the whole petition approaches the spirit of the Gospel, although lacking some of other Divinities grant that

,

,

the essential requisites of a Christian supplication. justify us in

hoping that

its

author,

It

may

had he received the rev-

which he longed, would not have remained “ far from the kingdom of Heaven but it furnishes no grounds elation for

for the extravagant

language of one

siastic admiration of the

pro nobis.

He

is

who

said, in his enthu-

heathen sage, sancte Socrates ora

represented here, however, as receiving

a strengthening of his confidence, and some degree of as-

surance from his supplication for he says immediately, u holding fast to this ( that is, the hope of Divine aid) as by some sure cable let us embark ,” <fcc. still keeping up the ;

,

metaphor of the dangerous Hood.

;


152 THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW?

XX. The Great Question of flow

fyc.

?

the

Ancient Schools

,

and

Page eorrjfce

23,

;

who belonged

to the

the Physical School of Elea.

to

Line

4.

pev navra,

vavrlov

Things

all

with a Sketch of some of the principal Mate-

;

rializing or Atheistical Philosophers

Ionic

Do

,

Kara

fctvelrat,

6e, d> %eve,

6e ovdev

;

onorav

the

all

apa

nav tov-

tovtg)

fj

For the common reading nara

by the concurrence of

(pq rig,

6e, established

manuscripts, Ast would

Kara rads, connecting it with (paiverai in the preceding sentence and in this he follows Eusebius and substitute

;

the version of Ficinus. correct,

We

common

think the

reading

and that Ast and Ficinus have mistaken the

The Athenian,

of the passage.

gerous flood, to fore calling

try, as

he says,

is

spirit

entering alone in this danits

upon his companions

depth and strength, be-

assumes

to follow,

time the parts both of interrogator and respondent.

for a

He

con-

sequently supposes an objector from the atheistic or Ionic school, adopting

some

of the peculiar phraseology or cant

terms of that sect, and taking him up in the midst of his

some such way as this, “ And so then (teal elra de), answer me, if you please, one of these three questions Do all things stand, and does nothing move ? or is the opposite of this the case, namely, that all things move and nothing stands ? or do some things move and some things stand ? Give me, I say, an answer to these old queries, which have so long perplexed our schools of philosophy.” To which supposed objector the Athenian replies by taking

positions in

,

:

the third hypothesis as his starting position in this argu-

ment.

There

is

much

vivacity in this

‘he discussion about motion,

very particle by which

it is

mode

and Kara

best effected

of introducing

( nal ;

it

elra)

is

the

being used to

introduce a sudden inference, and implying a previous ar-


THE ANCIENT dUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 153 gument, in the midst of which the objection be made. allowed,

On

If

we

any

supposed

is

to

alteration of the established text is to be

think

it

should consist in changing de into

6t].

the particle elra , see note, page 40.

Whatever else may be intended, there can be no doubt that there is here tions

an allusion,

which are so

at least, to the

same quesand

fully discussed in the Thesetetus,

See, especially, Theaetetus, 180, D.

same language. These were the fa-

mous problems which so

the Ionic

stated there several times in nearly this

and

schools,

schools

divided,

afterward the

of Elea

;

first

embracing,

which Plato, in There is an allu-

to

the present argument, confines himself.

them

Italian

however, a much wider

range than the merely dynamical points

sion to

and

and metaphysical

physical

in the Memorabilia,

lib. i., c. i.,

14

:

teal

rolg

navra rolg 6e ovdev av rrore mvrjOfjvai In this language was stated the great debate between those who referred all things to sensation, making it the measure of all reality, or what Plato styles tt)v (pepofievrjv ovoiav

liev del fuveloOat,

.

,

(Theaetetus, 179, C.), and those

immutable world of ideas able essence ), the real

(

who

held to a higher and

tt)v ditlvrjrov

ovoiav the immove,

and only dXrjOtig ovrcjg ovra while ,

they regarded the objects of sense as continually moving, changing, never for a

moment remaining

the same, and

having nothing about them (aside from the idea, or Xoyog

which, by

its

connexion alone, imparted

reality) that could

,

them a temporal

to

constitute real being

(

ovoiav ) in the

They

highest and truest senses of the word.

formed, as

we have elsewhere observed,* the grand line of separation between two ever opposing systems of philosophy, and right *views, in almost every

department of knowledge, are

more or less connected with these subtle inquiries when viewed in their widest relations. Their odd phraseology

may

be more

fully interpreted thus

* Discourse on the

:

True Idea of The

What State,

constitutes real

Andover, 1843.


;

154 THE ANCIENT GlUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW ity

Are

?

all

things in a perpetual flux

universe but phenomenal facts

in the

?

Is there

of,

the perceived and apparent

nothing

and sensations, or

there a world of truth and being separate from,

pendent

?

is

and inde-

— not merely as gen-

more stable than more permanent than the old rolling heavens ideas fixed, immoveable ( dtdvrjra ), eternal, which were nevthe del Kara ravrd nai er born, and which can never die daavrcog e^ovra, the dig aXpOdg ovrcog ovra, from which all individual things derive reality, and by partaking alone of which they become the true objects of science, or emoreralizations of the mind, but as realities,

the earth,

ijgai instead of do^ai.

There is quite a full account of the systems of philosophy, of which these questions were the symbols, to be found in the dialogue Theaetetus. Plato there makes Homer (wheth er sportively or not, it is difficult to determine) the head and founder of that Ionic school which held that all tilings flowed and this because the poet represents Oceanus and Tethys as the original and mother of Gods and men. We greatly doubt whether in this

Homer had any

or mythical sense at

however, anything of the kind

was

an allusion that water

verse, i.,

all.

If,

intended, there would to the doctrine

was

to

be nothing more than

afterward advanced by Thales,

the apx^Jy or originating element of the uni-

and so the matter

3.

seem

philosophical

is

viewed by

This doctrine of Thales was,

Aristotle,

Metaph .,

in all probability, deri-

ved from a corrupt and perverted tradition of the Mosaic account of the creation, where of God

it

is

said that “

ivas brooding over the waters ,”

The

hypotheses of Anaximander and Anaximenes, one of held that air and the other that ,

principle of the universe,

what seemed

to

Spirit

and the succeeding

infinite space

were only attempts

was

whom

the

to refine

first

upon

them the grosser element of Thales.

In the later writers, however,

who may be regarded

as

being in the line of this school, these speculations, and the


THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALE THINGS FLOW? 155 phraseology employed in reference

and were applied

ferent aspect,

well as the physical world.

them, assumed a

to

moral and mental, as

to the

In the Thesetetus, Socrates

represented as thus setting forth their doctrine

pev avro v 7]OEG)q

tcaO’

teal

avro ovdev eortv

etc

be

:

(hg

Trpooayopevovreg

ovte opOcbg

riPNETAI

ovbenor ovdev del de ’

,

tei-

bfj (pa-

’E2TI pev yap

*

teal rcepl

is

apa ev

(popag re teal

Srj

tepdoeevg irpoq aXXrjXa y iyverai navra a

EINAI

pev

dif-

rovrov

ixav-

reg e%rjq ol oo(pol, rcXrjv Uappevidov , %vp(pepeodov, IT poraf

yopag re

teal

llpdieXetrog teal EpnedotcXrjg ’

Tcbv ol atepot rrjg Ttoir\oe<vq etearepag

Xappog rpaycobtag be

r/

,

Op7jpog

’titceavov re Oetiv 7r

dvra

elpr]ieev

etcyova

rtiv

tccvpcpbiaq

TTOtrj-

pev ’E7U-

eIttgov,

yeveotv porjg

teal

prjrepa TtjOvv,

teal

re

teal

That there was nothing absolute,

or

Kcvrjaecog ,

which

153, A.

existed per se

but that from impetus, and motion, and mutual mixture arise things of

all

which we predicate the verb

TO

BE,

not cor-

rectly predicating, because, in truth (to use terms aright),

nothing really IS, but

And

in this all our

all

things are ever

BECOMING.

wise men successively agree except

Parmenides, namely, Protagoras, and Heraclitus, and pedocles

;

Em-

and of the poets, the chief in each kind, namely,

Epicharmus in comedy, and Homer in tragedy, when he says that Oceanus is the origin of the Gods, &c., by which he means that all things are the offspring of flowing and motion.”

The

distinction here is clearly stated.

This school very

consistently refused to apply to things the higher term of

being, eort, but preferred the

word ytyverai

they said, really and truly IS, but ing

;

and

this

was

all

.

Nothing,

things are ever becom-

correct, if there existed nothing else ex-

cept matter, sensation; and their joint phenomena.

In an-

other place, Thesetetus, 1G0, D., Plato gives us more par iicularly their individual opinions, or, rather, the favourite


;

156

ANCIENT QUESTION DO ALL THINGS FLOW?

TIIE

and peculiar terms in which each expressed the common In the language of

doctrine of their flowing philosophy.

Homer, Heraclitus, and

all

that Ionic tribe, rcav to tolov -

rov cpvXov, as Plato styles them, oiov pevpara mveloQai ra

uavra,

all things

sentative,

that

,

he sportively makes Theaetetus the reprewere fond of saying, aloOrjoiv eruorrjprjv yiyveoknowledge and sense were the same or only differ,

names

ent

Others of

like water.

whom

them, of

6ai

were ever flowing

for the

same

The

thing.

favourite expression

of Protagoras was, Travrcov xprjpdrcov avOpcoirov perpov

man was

vac, that

meant

the

el -

measure of all things by which he ,

to refer all things to sensation, or to the

present feel-

ings and opinions, or present remembrances, of the individ-

On

ual man.

Logic.,

he

i.,

the

other hand, Sextus Empiricus (Adv.

8) tells us that Heraclitus

was noted

for taking

collected reason of the race (as the representative of

the universal and Divine reason) for the criterion of truth

but this gives,

is

utterly inconsistent with the account Plato here

and the manner he associates him with those sensu-

alists of the

flowing school

who allowed

of nothing fixed or

eternal. If the

correct,

account of Heraclitus, given in the Theaetetus, be

he was well

entitled to the appellation

not for his profundity, as

f

O

some would represent

Z/coreivog, it,

but be-

cause he maintained the darkest system of sensual philoso-

phy

that ever

shed night over the human

intellect.

Well

might he weep, as Lucian represents him, over his everflowing universe of perishing phenomena, where nothing stood

— ovdev epnedov, aXX

ovrai, uai

eon

tcovto

1

otzcog

eg nvicecova iravra avveiXe-

repifrcg drep'iplrj ,

yvcboiq ayvcoalrj,

ueya pcnpov avco narco irepixopevovra, nal apecdopeva ,

TXj

rov alcovog

naidcrf, “

ei

nothing was fixed, but, as in a mix-

ture, all things were confounded where pleasure and pain, knowledge and ignorance, great and small, were the same where all things up and down were circling round in a ;

;


THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 157 choial dance, and ever changing places as in the sport of

There was some-

Lucian Vi/arum Audio 303.

eternity.”

,

,

thing in the hard atoms and dry mechanical theory of the

laughing Democritus which

left

room

although he himself was an atheist sentimental, and, as it,

for a spiritual world,

but the

;

transcendental sensualism of Heraclitus

grossly misrepresented),

And

flowing,

soft,

some modern cant would absurdly

was atheism

he

not

is

in its darkest form.

yet there are other accounts which

very piously about the Supreme

(if

style

Numen and

make him

talk

the immortality

of the soul.

Parmenides was a man of a very all

the others mentioned

Melissus, seems to

different

by Socrates.

have gone much too

stamp from

He, however, with far in the opposite

In his famous doctrine of the one and all

direction.

,

if

Plato rightly represents him, he maintained that all things In other words, not content with saying that the

stood.

world of immutable or ideal truth was a tended that

it

was

reality,

he con-

the only reality, and that sense, instead

was wholly delusion thus verging round to that point where some species of sensualism and a hyperspiritualism apparently meet of which, in modern of being knowledge,

;

;

we have had a remarkable example in Hume and Berkeley. A uoxvpl^ero og ev re rcdvra earl nal eorpnev

times,

c

avro ev avrd),

Thecetetus, 180,

D.

’A tdiov fiev yap to

nav

nai dfCLvrjrov dftotyaiveraL Happevidrjg, Kal rag aioOrjoeig

enddXXei

etc

Euseb., Prcep.

rrjg aXrjOecag.

Evang

.,

i.,

8.

“For Parmemdss

represents the whole as immoveable, and he senses from the realm of truth.” He was a man who seems to have made a very deep impression upon the mind of Socrates when young, and to have exerted a strong influence over his opinions. At least, utterly banishes;

we may tetus,

so judge from the following passage in the

which has every appearance of

real incident in the life of Socrates,

O

The®,

truth, as presenting a

and a real expression


:

158 THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? of admiration towards one

highly esteemed

to avdpi navv veog

apa

he seems

ds poi

II appevidrjg

:

'O firjpov* aioolog re poi 6rj

whom

dtivog re.

7:dvv 'npeodvr'q,

(f>

to have*

acverai

most

to tov

,

Gvpnpoasp^a yap teat

poi e<pdvrj f3a-

n

ex eiV ^dvrairaoi ysvvalov. “ Parmenides, to apply him the language of Homer, seems to me at once revered

Qog to

and awful

for

:

1

enjoyed his company once

when

very young and he was very old, and he appeared to all

things to possess a noble depth of soul.”

184, A.

w as me in

I

T

Thecetelus,

This biographical incident alone seems to us suf-

more correctly sets forth the philosmaster than Xenophon, notwithstanding the

ficient proof that Plato

ophy of

his

way

general opinion the other

and that the most meta-

;

physical dialogues of the former give a truer representation of the

mind and manner of Socrates, than the more

and practical Memorabilia. that there could not

We

;

much

to believe, that

on the ground

infer this

have been so warm, so unaffected, and

so long- cherished an admiration,

congeniality of soul

plain

had there not been

a great

and we have, therefore, every reason of

what formed the peculiar

features

mind of Socrates may perhaps be traced to the deep impression made upon him by the idealistic and metaphysCompare, also, the Sophista, 237, A., ical Parmenides. where he styles him Uappevidrjg 6 peyag, The Great Par-

of the

menides.

In a similar manner, in the beginning of the Ce-

betis Tabula,

he

is

ranked with Pythagortis, and his name

used as descriptive of the profoundest wisdom epcppojv ical deivog nepl oocj)iav Xoycp re nal epy(*> UvOayopSLOv nva

is

:

nal II appevideiov efyXoyittig the Thesetetus

some have

(3lov.

From

this

inferred that Plato

passage in

was

guilty of

an anachronism in the circumstances mentioned in the beA careful examinaginning of the dialogue Parmenides. * Iliad,

iii.,

172

Mdolog t£ pot

kooi,

<j>LXe

knvpe, deivog re.


THE ANCIENT aUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 159 lion,

we

however, will show, as

ence

is

We

think, that

judgment on

really,

infer-

would remark generally respecting some of the phi-

we cannot

losophers of the Ionic school, that in

such an

without any real foundation.

and

not, unless

their doctrines, or decide

accurately

sit

whether they were

in the grossest sense, atheistic materialists or

we

term iravra,

can determine what they included in their

when they

said that all things flowed.

they

If

merely meant thereby that the material world was ever flowing, this might have been consistent with a pure the-

drawn arguments from

ism, and they might have even

view of things

higher attention to the

in favour of a

this

spirit-

ual and supernatural.

Such may possibly have been

case with Heraclitus.

The

the

we have

sophist Protagoras,

reason to believe on other grounds, was an unqualified athe-

Of Empedocles, who

ist.

better things, judging from

is

already referred

They have their followers,

pages 77, 115.

doubtless suffered in the extravagances of

some of whom

One

most ridiculous extent. Aristotle

to,

we hope

list,

the fragments of his po-

and especially that line which

etry that have been preserved,

we have

also in Plato’s

many of

Metaph ., (

carried their doctrines to a of them, as

5), heraclitized

iii.,

we

are told by

'jipafcXeiTi&Lv ) to (

such an extent, that he denied that any one could leap twice, or even once, over the to

same stream,

or that

it

was

possible

speak the truth in any case whatever, because the terms

of every proposition

were changing and becoming false in Hence he finally conclu-

the very process of articulation.

ded not

to

open his

lips, but, to

other reply than simply to

ovdev

g')ÂŁto

6etv Xeyetv,

every question, made no

move his finger og to reXevralov aXXd rov daurvXov e/rivet govov. :

Some, on the other hand, carried the propositions

that sense

was knowledge, and that man was

all

to

such an extreme, as

the measure of

to affirm that everything

and that there could be nothing

false

;

things,

was

true,

the seeming oppo-


160 THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? site of the former, but, in reality,

in another shape. its

own

the proposition

with

all

This

last

antidote along with

only the same absurdity

extravagance, however, brought it

which denied

;

for, if all

this

dogma was

were

true,

equally true

the rest, and so, like the famous syllogism respect-

ing Epimenides the Cretan, the result circle of alternate contradictions. iii.

things

Cicero

(iv.), 5.

,

was an

See

Aristot.,

Academ Posieriorum .

This school of sophists, as Socrates

everlasting

,

tells

i.,

Metaph .,

12.

us in the Theae-

were likewise famous for a quibbling and eristic logic, yet had a great aversion to that sober and truth-evincing tetus,

system of dialectics which was carried on by question and

A

somewhat ludicrous account of this may be found page 180, A., B., &c. Their logic was like their answer.

philosophy, ever flowing, and incapable of being reduced to

any firm and fixed conclusions. “ You can do nothing with them (says Socrates), nor can they among themselves arrive at anything certain

and

satisfactory, but take special

care that, neither in their language nor in their philosophy,

be anything which has firmness or

shall there (

oraoifiov )

;

but against this they are continually warring,

and, as far as they can, would banish verse.

stability

all

rest from the uni-

This, although not the same, has some resem-

blance to the modern doctrine of eternal progress, which, of course,

is

eternal imperfection, and

which allows of no-

any more than the ancient tenet This phithat all things flowed and that nothing stood. losophy, too, like some of the sophisms of our own day, had thing fixed or established, ,

“ a wonderful

alacrity at sinking”

down

into the vulgar

mind, and of inspiring the masses with the most exalted opinion of the doctrine and its teachers “ so that the very ;

coblers (ot ouvrordfioi), when they had imbibed or become inspired with this profound system of fluxions, abandoned

once that foolish old notion, that some things stand (enavoavro 7]Xidi(oq olopsvoL ra pev karavai ra 6s mvsloOai

at


THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 161 and when they were told that all things were moving they greatly honoured those who taught them this,” See as being a most comforting and democratic doctrine. tg)V ovtgjv), ,

Thesetetus, 180, A., B., &c.

In the Cratylus, which, although, in the main, a sportive

jeu

d'esprit,

does yet abound in very

and serious views, Plato dwells

which may

ories of language

at

many most

important

some length on two

the-

be derived from these two

systems of philosophy, in one of which the idea of motion,

and

in the other that of rest, are

made

respectively the ba-

sis of an inquiry into the primitive etymological structure

of words.

After most ridiculously deriving ovolav

(<

tboiav ),

or essence, from to (bOovv ( pushing or impulse ), because, on this hypothesis of Heraclitus, rd ovra ievai re rcavra

were ever movingon, or pushing ahead, and nothing stood still” (401, C.), he comes to speak of Kronus and Rhea (pea), when Socrates, nal pevetv ovdev, “

real existences

all

in his old ironical method, suddenly affects that in this

name

there

ophy.

suggested to him this whole flowing philos-

is

“ Oh,

my

good

(he exclaims),

sir

I

have just

dis-

covered a whole hive of curious lore, oprjvog tl oocpiag

A eyei vet,

f

yap nov

HpanXeirog on

nal norapov

somehow says

rravra %u>pel aal ovdev pe-

porf dnetfca^cov

rov avrov irorapov

ovtc

av

ra ovra Xeyec,

epdalrjg, k. r. A.”

(bg dig eg

“ Heraclitus

that all things are moving, &c,, and, in his

comparison of existences

to the course of a stream,

he even

says that one could not twice enter into the same river.*

Do you to

suppose, then, that he

Rhea and Kronus,

*

He would seem Since

all

to

this of Heraclitus

?

mean something more here than

being

the expression, that

originally gave

we

signify, that neither our

names

the progenitors of the other Gods, had

any other philosophy than

tration.

who

is

compared

to

you

mere

illus-

a

one ever-moving stream,

cannot twice enter the same

own

or do

river,

would

personal identity, nor the identity of

the universe, can remain for two consecutive moments.

O

2


162 THE ANCIENT aUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? think that through mere accident he gave these flowing

names

both?

to

Homer makes Oceanus and Te-

Just as

thys the original and mother of the Gods, and siod also.

But Orpheus surely says,

’12

Keavdg np&TLora tcaXippoog

og pa fca(uyvr}T7)v dfiopirjTopa

See how

all

I

fjpge ya\ioio

T rjOvv

think He-

onviev.

these things accord with one another, and

they tend to these doctrines of Heraclitus.”

how

Cratylus 402, ,

A., B.

At the conclusion of the first part of this etymological excursus, in which he sportively finds the origin of so many words in this ancient flowing theory, he assigns as the cause of it all the want of stability in their own brains (to adopt a modern phrase), which they mistook for the everlasting

change of things and truths themselves.

(says Socrates, with grave irony) that

surmise,

men

(

ol

just like

I

I

think

indulged in no bad

now supposed that the very ancient when I navv naXaiot), who gave names to everything, many of our modern wits (rtiv vvv ootfitiv), in just

consequence of their getting frequently turned round

in their

search into the real nature of things, became dizzy, and then things themselves appeared to be whirling around, and to

be borne in every direction.

Wherefore they blame not

own

souls as the real cause, but

the internal state of their

say that

this is the

very nature of things that there should ,

be nothing firm or stable, but that pelv),

and are

full

of motion,

And

Cratylus, 411, C., D.

acterizes the

old authors of language

thought (namely, that ity, it is

not so.

:

all

and would wish

to

he thus char-

ironical allusion to the

They seem

to

me

to

have thus

things are in motion), but, in real-

For the

utterly confounded, like

pool,

change, and generation.”

again, 439, C.,

whole school under an “

things flow (n avra

all

fact is, that

they themselves are

men who have

fallen into a whirl

drag us in after them.

For con


:

THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW?

163

am

often

such

real-

O

sider this,

most excellent Cratylus, of which

we

dreaming,* can

as the Beautiful, the Good,” &c.

ities

ovecpojTTG),

’AFAOON

norepov

I

in truth affirm that there are

(jiojpev tc

avro

elvat

noAhaiug

3 eyd)

?

TO KAAON

uat

ual ev ercaorov tcjv ovtgjv ovrcog

In this philosophy, too, he shows that there could be no

moral or

true

political science,

cial or civil rights,

no law, no real

State,

no

so-

See

with their corresponding obligations.

the Theaetetus, 172, B., and the remarks thereupon, page

There could be no science, he

138. for

affirms, of

any kind,

must necessarily be grounded on the eternal and im-

it

A coOrjocg

mutable.

would take the place of emoTrjprj, and ’A/lAd prjv ovd’ civ yvooapa yap av emovrog rov yvco-

nothing could be really known 0si7]

ye

vtt ’

ovdevdg ovdev

oouevov aXXo

teal

aXXolov ycyvocro

nai

etc

rovrov rov

Xoyov ovre to yvooopevov ovre to yv(oo0r]o6pevov av

Hence he draws

laws of our being compel us

to affirm the real,

and not mere-

ly relative existence of these ideas, therefore there is

thing which

eerj.

the sublime conclusion, that, since the very

some-

eternal and immutable, or, in the language

is

of the ancient schools, all things do not flow, but some things

EZ de eon pev dec to ytyvCbouov, eon 6e to del

stand.

eon de to KAAON, eon de to ATAOON, TO AIKAION, ov poc (pacverac ravra op.ota ovra

ycyvcoouopevov,

eon

de

po^\

ovdev ovde

eternally

cj)opa.

But

if there is something which

knows and something which ,

there is

THE BEAUTIFUL,

JUST,

then things do not all seem to

tion or a flowing stream .”

and

is eternally

known

if

THE GOOD, and THE me

to

be similar to mo-

Cratylus 440, B. ,

No word could better express that peculiar state of which Socrates (or Plato) often contemplated his favourite Sometimes he seems to be perfectly assured of doctrine of ideas. * bveipuTTo.

mind

in

the real existence of the nakov, &c., the Fair, the Just, and the

Good.

seems

Again, he appears perplexed with doubt, and, at other times, to

have but a glimpse, as in a dream, of some such bright rem-

iniscences of a better state.


MATHEMATICAL USE OF THE WORD Xoyog

164

XXI.

Word

Mathematical Use of the

Page

avdXoyov

It

is

would signify here This

ralione.

The common reading

.

the other, however,

;

preferred.

dam

ava Xoyov

24, Line 6.

Xoyog (especially

is

Xoyog. is

unquestionably to be

qua -

'proportionally , certa

called in Latin ratio ,

and

in all mathematical writings),

Greek

in

because a

simple quantity or magnitude, irrespective of the relation

it

bears to another as a multiple or a divisor, cannot be an object of science, or be contemplated

only an

dXoyov

by the mind.

It

remains

object of sense, aloOrj-rov , being, to the intellect,

See the Theaetetus,

and therefore ayvcoorov.

,

202, B.

It is this

relation or ratio

which becomes the

true

votjtov or real object of the mind, while the sensible figure ,

serves

only as

Hence

it

which

is

is

the

diagram by which

it

styled the Xoyog, ratio, or reason

predicated of

its

or word as well as reason ,

subject, ;

and hence

because,

exhibited.

is

It is

.

Xoyog,

is its

when viewed

as sim-

ple quantity or magnitude, nothing can be said about truth affirmed respecting

that

it,

no

it.

This Xoyog, or reason ever implies a third thing or mid,

dle term, namely, the

common measure

or divisor to

both quantities must be referred, and by which

we

which

are ena-

bled to predicate the one as a part, or multiple, or any certain ratio of the other.

and immutable

The Xoyot

or ratios are absolute

must

verities of science, as all voTjra

be,

while the alaOrjrd by which they are suggested are mutable, flowing,

solute.

and without anything which can be styled ab-

They

likewise

among themselves, and ratios,

ad

infinitum.

In

of being

compared

thus give rise to others

—ratios of

are

capable

modern works

meaning of the term is lost sight Latin ratio without any reference

of,

the simple radical

because

to its

we

use the

primary sense, as


MATHEMATICAL USE OF THE WORD

165

Xoyog.

same with the Greek koyog, and hence the great vagueness which prevails in most minds respecting this plain mathematical idea. In some of our older mathematical works, such as the English editions of Euclid’s Elements by Dee and Barrow respectively, our own word reason is everywhere properly employed instead of ratio. By this the

means the metaphysical notion of ratio is kept before the mind as the intelligible, by which what would otherwise be merely, as magnitude, an object of sense, becomes known See Proclus, Comto the intellect as an object of science. mentary on Euclid’s Elements, lib. i. All mathematical truths, and especially the geometrical, are ultimately to be resolved into a comparison of ratios.

For even parallelism, and other properties which would seem to have no connexion with it, do, after all, depend upon certain

they derive their Xoyoq, notion, or definition.

mathematical science

which

or correspondences, from

equalities

is finally

down

brought

So

that all

to those in-

nate ideas of the to loov &c., which are discussed in the ,

Phsedon, and of which visible magnitude

Even

simplest ratio. it

is

It

is that

which

lies evenly, equally, or, as

;

that

is,

to

its

extreme

having nothing capable of being predicated

of the one side and not of the other.

Playfair and others

have entirely misunderstood the expression, and

have greatly bungled ting a far

in their efforts to

more complex idea

tion of Euclid.

own

only suggestive.

expressed by Euclid, e^toov, between

points

seem

is

a straight line involves this idea of the to loov, or

amend, by

for this old

Any one who

is

to

substitu-

and perfect

defini-

capable of consulting his

consciousness, must acknowledge that the language of

Euclid best expresses that innate idea of straightness, which

we

ever apply, as the perfect ideal exemplar, to the deter-

mination of visible figure.

From

this

use of the word Xoyog

tudes and numbers

whose

ratio

it is,

that those

magni-

cannot be expressed by


166

PARADOX OF CIRCULAR MOTION.

that is, which have no common divisor by which one may be predicated as any arithmetical part or multiple of another are called aXoya, and in modern

other numbers

Two

works, irrational.

may be

magnitudes, however,

arithmetically incommensurable or irrational, like the side

and diagonal of the square, the circumference and diameter

among numbers

of the circle, or what are styled surds

may be, and which renders them

yet, in all these cases, there

often

rical representation

rational,

be styled the expression of the

is,

and

;

a geomet-

and may

Xoyog, or reason, just

ratio,

as well as though they were embraced

by some common

numerical divisor.

Much on this subject of quantities, styled dXoya or irrational, may be found in Euclid’s Laws of the Musical Can,

on, as contained in Meibomius.

All concords, let

it

be

marked, are founded on rational numbers, while the tional ever first

produce discords under

all

have a Xoyog or reason, and the

suggest

it,

perceives this reason in

circumstances.

soul, its

when

re-

irra-

The

the sounds

supersensual being,

although unconscious of the intellectual process on which

and hence a delight which mere sense could never furnish. Where this process is made objective, and It would thus presented to the mind, it is called science. it

depends

;

net be difficult to refer to the ratio all the

same ideas of

equality and

fundamental elements of the beauty of figure

and motion.

XXII.

Paradox of Circular Motion.

Page yeyovev.

24, Line 8

This

is

.

A/A

6i)

rcov 'davfiaoTGjv andvrcov

Trrjyrj

stated as a sort of strange paradox, that

one motion should be

at

the

same time greater and

less, or

should give rise to different velocities, according as the rev-


the words

(pOloig, yevEOig^

naOog and (pOopa ,

167

.

was nearer to, or more remote from, the centre, while there was but one impulse distributing itself proportionally, ava Xoyov, to every part. The paradox, however, elution

arises from confounding circular, or angular, with rectilineal

The

motion.

compound

idea of the latter arises from a

comparison of two elements, namely, the space passed over, and the time employed in the passage. Hence, there being

no absolute measure of space, there can be nothing absolute The other must be always referabout rectilineal motion. red to the centre of motion, and the time occupied in one revolution

;

other words, one must be referred to

or, in

space and time, the other also be said to is

to

The

time only.

have something absolute about

an absolute standard of angular space.

tions of the inner concentric circles of the cle,

moving on one

circle, are all the

rying infinitely

may

latter

since there

it,

Hence the mosame great cir-

centre, identical with the centre of the

same when thus measured, although

when

The

referred to other points.

va-

veloci-

ty of the hour hand of a watch, that revolves once in twen-

same with that of the earth on its axis. If the same hour hand could be conceived of as extending to the moon, the tangential velocity of its extremity would be greater than the orbit motion of that body exceeding ty-four hours, is the

many thousand city,

miles a minute

— and yet

—

its

absolute velo-

taken as a whole, would be that same slow and almost

imperceptible motion which apoears in our timepieces.

XXIII.

The Words cpdtmg, yeveoig

Page word

25, Line 5. cpOivei

.

.

,

tt ddog,

(pOopa.

apicpoTepa diroXXvrai.

(pOivei (<pQioig) is applied to a diminution of the

ber of parts or particles of which a body out a

and

is

This

num-

composed, with-

change of the essential idea, law, or nature.

It

is


.

the words

168

(ftOcoig,

yeveoig TraOog, ,

man and

a fat

taken away.

It is

which

the opposite of

express the difference between

a lean one, the other between a living

and a dead body.

<J>0mo

is

man

generally intransitive, but

sometimes used in a transitive sense, as in the

407

used

is

nature, or idea of a thing (that is

The one would

ytyverat.

(j>0opd

’AnohXvraL

the opposite of avt-dvercu, av^rjocg.

where the very law, makes it what it is)

and

;

is

Iliad, vi.,

:

A aijjiovie

(pdioeL

a e to gov pevog.

$6lvg) and (f>0tpevog are applied by the poets to the dead,

more

but

a metaphorical than a strictly philosophical

in

When

sense.

thus poetically used, they

still

some-

retain

thing of their primary meaning, and suggest the conception of the wasted the emaciated the weak ,

,

(

apevrjvd tcap7]va), as

though the ghostly state were but a diminution of their

mer

for-

same manner the poets use /tapovTeg the The Hebrews seem to have had something of the same metaphorical conception in their word CD'KSn T In the

life.

wearied

,

the deceased.

,

l

Mere increment

or diminution is said to take place as

long as the naOeGTrjKvla

ei-tg ,

remains

the constituting state ,

But

(diapevy, continues through , or survives the change ).

may be

destroyed both ways ('dp&orepa ), that

or av^rjotg,

when

becomes

affected.

not take

away

it is,

is,

by

it

(pOiotg ,

carried so far that the law of the body

No

increment or decrement which does

that £§tg^ or state,

can ever amount

which makes a thing what change denoted by cj)6opd,

to that great

and the verb dnoXXvpt.

Until this takes place, the real or

phenomenal idenwhich depends on the numer-

essential identity remains, although that tity

may have been

ical

sum

particle still, if

ed, if,

affected,

So that we may say, that, if every of matter has been removed and replaced by others, or aggregate.

during the process the KaOeoTTjuvla e^tg

it is

the same body, although not the

is

preserv-

same matter

on the other hand, no single material particle be

lost,

and yet


)

the words if,

in

any way,

(pdioig , yeveoig,

,

has been destroyed,

e%ig

tliis

naOog and

169

(pOopa.

no longer

it is

tKe same, but there has taken place the yeveoig of some-

thing else, having a different name, a different law, and a

few

different identity, or, as is said a

lines below, perada-

Xdv elg dXXrjv e%iv diecpOaprai navreXkg, “ passing into another state, fore was,

it

is utterly

no longer

See Note XXV.,

is,

destroyed

whatever

may have

on the difference

which be-

the thing

taken

its

place.

between yeveoig and

aXXoiuoig.

The next is

question

What

is,

yeveoig, or generation

is

It

?

rather abruptly put by the supposed interlocutor, yet

still

enough suggested by what precedes Tiyverai to which the suc6rj navriov yeveoig tjvik dv r'l naOog onorav is given A kg ap%r\ XaOovoa answer ceeding fXov is

naturally

:

1

;

:

av^rjv, k. t. A., “ It is evident (that generation takes place ,

or that the peculiar

naOog under which it takes place

ever a principle principium, or law of

is)

when-

here put for the originating idea the ,

life

anything

to

(that is, being developed in the

receiving growth,

outward or material ) passes

into the second change, and from

this into the next,

and so

coming as far as to three, it arrives at such a state become an object of sensation.� This is certainly

on, until,

as to

rather obscure, but perhaps as well expressed as

life to its

seem

material organic development.

to refer to the three

breadth, and thickness,

possess in some degree definite less,

pos-

attempt to set forth the transition from the law

sible, in the

of

was

Tpikv would

mathematical dimensions, length,

which every object of sense must ;

or

it

may

be intended as an

in-

number, representing the stages, be they more or

through which the thing generated must pass, until

become an

object of sensation, visible, tangible, &c.

P

it


;

PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB

170

to be.

XXIV. Philosophy of the Verb

TO BE.

Platonic Use of dpi and

ylyvopai.

MeradaXXov pev ovv ovro aai perauvovpevov ylyverai ndv. eon de bvrcog ov onorav pev^j perabaXov de elq aXXrjv egtv dtecpdaprai navreXtiq. The

Page

25,

Line 11

.

*

here are emphatic, and must have their precise meaning. “ While thus changing and moving, it is in the

tenses

act of being generated.

and stands (that to

is,

but after

It

perabdXXei, and for

its

is utterly

it

becomes

destroyed.�

fixed

state,

M evyf

it

is

philosophical sense, as opposed to

eorr}iie, in

the language of the schools,

as opposed to tavelrai or to that ,

or motion.

when

is,

has passed into another

it

the former thing)

be taken here in

really

which

is

in a constant flux

This, however, can only strictly be applied to

the law or idea, and in this sense

it

includes what Plato so

by the phrase del tiara ravra, &c., as that which remains unaffected amid the material mutations to which it is constantly subject.

often expresses

It

may be, however,

that ovrcoq ov is not to be taken here

in the highest philosophical sense, as

vov but more ,

according to the vulgar

opposed

to yiyvope-

usage of the substan-

tive verb, as signifying the real being, not

simply of the

law or idea, but of the generated material object ring that period in state.

It is

flux, like

which

it

suffers

no

ndOog,

itself,

du-

or change of

because they are always suffering change or

a river ever passing away, and never for two suc-

moments preserving the same numerical or aggre* gate identity, that even some of the ancient philosophers who were theists denied that generated material things were at all entitled to the epithet ovrcoq ovra. Plato, howcessive

ever, clearly regards their identity as not

number and the aggregate mass

;

depending upon

but as long as they suffer


TLATONIC USE OF no naOog by which does not hesitate

to

rj

elflL

AND J lyVOgai.

171

taken away, he

fcaOeoTrjitvia e%ig is

apply to them this higher substantive

verb, although entitled to

only by partaking for a time of

it

which it truly and in itself belongs. Modern scientfic men seem to be making rapid advance to this position of some of the ancients, that, in the material world, that idea, to

things are ever flowing, and nothing stands.

all

that

we

could say, that they

ras, Plato,

and Parmenides,

held as firmly as Pythago-

all

higher and far more real

to a

universe of truth, in which

was

all

Would

immutable, and

stable,

eternal as the throne of God.

There h[ii

is

a most important distinction between the verbs

and ylyvopai on which ,

length, although

here dwell

at

some

every page in Plato’s dialogues

almost

might have given occasion

many

we would

for

such an excursus.

In fact,

portions of this writer are not fully comprehensible,

in their highest intended

distinctions

mind.

when

meaning, unless the philosophical

between these words are kept constantly

They

in

are often emphatic, and used antithetically,

the careless reader

little

suspects

it

and thus sen-

;

tences most pregnant in meaning seem frequently to contain

mere truisms, or propositions of a most unmeaning

character.

we

In defining the Platonic sense of these words,

rely directly on the authority of the philosopher him-

self,

in the Timaeus, 27, P., 28, A.

alone,

had there been no

other,

we

From

this

passage

are justified in saying,

that elpi, in its highest sense, expresses essential, eternaJ-

necessary, self-existent, independent, uncaused being or essence, having no dependence on time

ytyvofiai, expresses

and

space.

phenomenal, temporal

,

The

other,

contingent , de-

pendent being, generated in time and space.

This philosophical distinction in

any other Greek

ed led him

to

writer,

is

more

clear in Plato than

because the subjects he discuss-

be more precise in the application of those

primary meanings of the terms in question, which grew not


172

PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB

be

to

.

out of philosophy, but must have been coeval with the

most

roots of this

Whatever

spiritual language.

themes may be, whether

inal

his

first

nom-

ethical, sesthetical, physical,

or metaphysical, they are, in his treatment, almost always

made

ultimately to turn, in a greater or less degree, on the

distinctions in the

modes

proceeds

far before

we

two

of being expressed by these

However he may commence,

verbs.

the argument seldom

are engaged in the consideration of

many

the eternal, the immutable, the one in the

(to ev ev

noXXolg), the del ovra in contrast with the temporal, the ,

The

changeable, the individual, and the generated.

differ-

ence between the classes of ideas expressed by these two verbs must be kept in mind everywhere in reading his more serious dialogues

;

and in many parts

may be

it

said to

some of his most valuable thoughts. The key passage, in which they are placed in most remarkable contrast, is one which we have already partly quoted for another purpose (page 96), but whose importance will jusform the key

tify its

the

to

In the Timaeus he defines

being presented again.

two grand departments

into

which

all

being or substance

is divided, namely, on the one hand, the sensible world , with

phenomena and, on the

its

,

other, the intellectual world in,

cluding soul as the oldest essence, and also those eternal truths, ideas, or principles,

garded fact,

ing

of entities

even more real than matter

itself,

de ovk exov *

to pev

,

TITNOMENON

ml

tl to

drj

vorjaeL

have

re-

although their dwell-

not in the world of time and space

was

to

— as existences, in

npCdrov dtaipereov Tade- tl to ’'ON pev

drj

Te

which Plato seems

name

as entitled to the

per,

:

del, v

"E otlv ovv

TENE2IN

ON

de ovdeno-

peTd Xoyov nepL^rjnTbv, del

v

mra

>

TavTa ON. nav de av to yvyvopevov vtt clItlov Tivoq e% dvdynpg y lyveodat. navTl yap ddvvaTOV x^pl? clItlov yeveav oxelv. And again, in continuation of the same distinction

:

yevecrecjg

haenTeov ovv

drj

uepl rravTog,

dpx^ v ex^v ovdeplav

fj

re OTepov

PETONEN

T

HN

del

an’ apx^g


platonic use of

and yiyvopai,

elfiL

In another part of

Timceus, 28, A., C.

tlvoc ap^dfievog.

173

passage he contrasts ovoid (or essence) with ye-

same knowledge with opinion, 29, C. It must not be expected always to find these two verbs used with this philosophical precision even in Plato. In mere narration, conthis

veotg, as

fined simply to the assertion of facts, without reference to

the nature of the objects, fjv

and eyevero are often conIn such cases the

founded, and used one for the other.

substantive verbs simply perform the office of an asserting copula, without

any respect

here, however,

we

to the

The

difference in their application. rodotus,

whenever tie

of being.

plain

his subject requires

trast strongly, as in lib.

rcbv decor, errs

mode

iii.,

53

:

it,

presents the con-

evOev 6e eyevero etcaorog

In the dialogues of Plato,

del rjoav.

however, the distinction, whenever important, fully

preserved

;

Even

marked historian He-

often find in careful writers a

and we

may

is

ever care-

say, generally, from a review

of the Platonic writings, that in

all

cases which require

is the appropriate word to exwhich IS necessarily, such as the existence and

care in the use of terms, eori press that

attributes of the Deity, the

poreal substance, the

Thus, imply

for far

independent existence of incor-

eternal truth of a moral distinctions.

example, the sentence

eon ro ayaOov, would

more than simply the assertion of a

expression,

when used with

fact.

In this

philosophical strictness, eori

performs the office of a predicate as well as of a copula, and

mode as well as the There is expressed by it, without the aid fact of being. of any other words, a general and most important proposithat predicate, moreover, includes the

tion,

namely, that the idea of goodness

is

not merely rela-

tive or accidental, or the result of the mind’s generalization

from outward

acts, but

an absolute, eternal verity; that

it

has an absolute existence in the Divine mind, and that there

is

a fixed foundation for the absolute, and not merely

relative nature of

moral distinctions.

P

2

In the sciences, this


PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB

174

term would be peculiarly appropriate

to the enunciation of

the truths of geometry and numbers. ositions the ideas of cause is

no ysvEOiq.

other, or,

One

and

effect

to be.

In mathematical prop-

have no place. There

truth is essentially connected with an-

rather, seen in

it

The

as eternally abiding.

ap-

pearance of sequence arises from the necessities and imperfections of our in time

;

and yet

own it

is

minds, compelling us strictly true, that

them

to state

every property of

every mathematical figure, and every corresponding mode of generating, contains in itself every other property, and that, as far as theory, irrespective of

convenience,

cerned, any one of them might, with equal truth, be the fundamental Xoyog, or definition from

should

be

evolved.

which

con-

is

made

all

the rest

Mathematical propositions,

strictly

speaking, have no relation to time, being eternally true,

without past, succession, or future.

We

may, without con-

tradiction or absurdity, conceive of a period

when

may

it

cease to be true, that bodies attract in the inverse ratio of the squares of their distances, but never

when

it

shall be

longer a truth, that the square of the hypotenuse to the*

sum

of the squares of the two sides.

is

no

equal

To make

use

of the verb ylyvojicu, therefore, in the enunciation of a

mathematical theorem, would be introducing a foreign and altogether heterogeneous idea.

would be most appropriate to

the ever- moving

the

to

law of cause and

latter substantive

effect, as

of nature regarded as under

having a beginning and an

dno^v^eva

;

although even these

may be stated as absolute truths, and, generally, are stated when the mind conceives of them as involving mately something that reason of some such d

is

necessary and eternal.

'priori

verb

physics or natural philosophy,

phenomena

end, as yiyvofieva nal

This

conception, whether

rect or not, that the primary laws of physics

come

thus ulti-

It is it

to

by

be corbe ex-

pressed in the same language with the axioms of the pure

mathematics.


:

platonic use of

and yiyvopai.

elpl

175

the etymological origin of these two verbs may,

Even

without any extravagance of fancy, be supposed to betoken

The primary elements

between them.

the vast difference

of the one (ew e el) are found in the most aethereal of the

vowels.

The

guttural

mutes

other (yaw y) has for its ultimate radical the hardest, and, we might almost say, the most earthly of the

and, of

(y//),

;

for

the origin of the term for earth

is

it

most easily associated with the

all letters, is

conceptions of the sensible or tactual.

Plato, although a

very poor philologist, seems to recognise the connexion

y r\ yap pog

*

D.

r

yevvrjTEipa av

opOtig KEuXrjpEvrj, tog (prjOLv "O \ir\-

eirj

to yap yeydaoc yeyevvTjoOai Xeysi.

Cralylus

dvvapcg.

These with the ever, as

use

;

distinctions clearly exist,

rov

and are probably coeval

elements of the language.

we have

their full

rj

427, B.

Ib.,

first

410,

,

Trjg yXo)TT7jg 6e dXioOavovorjg avriXapbaverat

They do

not,

how-

remarked, appear so obvious in ordinary

power being evinced only

in the discussion

of those truths, in which are involved the very ideas that are radical in the words themselves. are so distinctly

Greek tent,

in

literature,

and

is

this

many passages is

language.

who may be

in Plato.

probably to be found,

May we

account they

The

diffused throughout the

and under various forms of expression,

known God,

marked

of the difference, however,

spirit

On

to

some ex-

in almost

every

not believe that, in this way,

regarded as the author of language as

well as of everything else, has provided an antidote against

which our depraved nature is so continis surely no small protection against this,

that materialism to

ually tending.

It

that there are to be found (and perhaps in every tongue)

may have been their at w ar with the sensual

terms which, whatever ever be irreconcilably

T

origin,

must

or atheistic

hypothesis.

The

great truth of the real existence of incorporeal sub -

stance , as something independent of, and not posterior

to,

or


176

PHILOSOPHY OP THE VERB

to be.

a result of matter, lies at the foundation of

We

religion.

verily believe, too, that

all faith

whosoever

latent doubt of this lies at the bottom of all its

various forms.

ism, a system into

It is all to

all

will care-

examine his own consciousness must admit,

fully

and

that a

skepticism, in

all

be resolved into material-

which such a verb as

eotl, in its purest

The

philosophical sense, could not consistently enter.

ex-

istence of an Eternal Spirit, independent of the organization

— the real

of the world by which he manifests himself istence of our

own

ex-

souls as something in the order of na-

ture, if not of time, prior to,

zation of our bodies

mortality of the soul

and independent

of,

the organi-

the consequent immateriality and im-

;

;

the eternal existence of

styled necessary truths

;

all

which are

the eternity of moral distinctions

;

the existence of moral attributes as the highest part of the

Divine character, and the solemn verities of the Christian

and the Christian redemption, as flowing necessarily

faith

from the above truths in their relation in every thinking

to

man

—

all

these are,

and well-balanced mind that has receiv-

ed a religious or Christian education, parts of one system

;

are inseparably connected together, so that a doubt of

all

one

is

with

it

a doubt of

all,

and a firm conviction of one brings

a satisfactory belief in

ment which

all

the rest.

The prime

ele-

runs throughout, is a firm faith in the reality of

incorporeal substance or that there ,

is

verse besides the sensible world and

something in the uniits

phenomena, some

God or soul than that pantheistic power which is only another name for their combined manifestation in short,

other

—

some eyrcoofiia

vnepKoofila, as the origin and cause of the ipvxi] ,

as well as of the material world in

ergies are displayed.

Yet

it

must be confessed,

downward tendency in our fallen race to do not like to retain God in our knowledge.

is

a

tendency (unless checked, as interpositions at special

which

it

its

en-

that there

atheism.

We

We

find this

ever has been, by Divine

times of grace) gradually infecting


PLATONIC USE OF

AND ylyVOgai.

Elfll

177

individuals and nations, giving an atheistic tinge to Ian-

guage, and corrupting and finally destroying religious belief.

There

is, at

the beginning of this, the opposite of the con-

viction before mentioned

— a secret and almost unconscious

skepticism, a suspicion, a fear, and in some, perhaps, a

hope, that all

is

nature that ,

the mere succession of

all is

generation (yeveaig), or

phenomena

;

that there is nothing

naO' eavTijv, absolute, necessary, eternal, self-existent, or, in other words,

Now we

d)$*

ovdsv

earrjiie , that

nothing stands

.

cannot help indulging the thought, however ex-

may appear to some, that the Divine Author of who careth for us,” and who arranges all things about his own eternal decrees, does exert a provi-

travagant

it

our race, “ to bring

dential control over so important an instrument as speech,

and that ed

in these

in their

and

their

two substantive verbs, so

distinctly

mark-

primary sense, their philosophical applications,

numerous derivative and kindred terms, he has

stamped upon the noblest language of earth, an indelible impression of the eternal distinction between the classes of

substances denoted by them, and of the real existence of those great truths so fundamental to all others, the chief of which is, u that IS and that he is the rewarder of those

HE

,

him” Especially would this seem to be a sober conclusion, when we consider how, in the providence of God, this same language was intended to be the medium of a Divine revelation, and the teaching of a widespread Christian theology. The modern tongue which comes the nearest to it in this respect is the German. And

who

diligently seek

may we

not regard this, too, as intended, by

its

ual character, to resist effectually the neology

ism which have been attempted

May we

not hope, that, after

German mind, fluences tive

which

to

all

high

spirit-

and natural-

be conveyed through

it ?

the extravagances of the

the conservative, religious, and spiritual inin this

and other respects exist

in their na-

Teutonic, will yet hold them firm to those great truths


178

f HILOSOPHY

which

OF THE VERB

are the foundation of

Materialism can a

all faith.

best only babble in other languages

to be.

cannot speak

it

:

at all

German, without the use of words which must continually remind it of its absurdities and contradictions.

Greek

in

The

or

English, and most of the modern languages of Eu-

ope, are very deficient in the expression of the distinction

conveyed by these verbs. Words,

it is

true,

may

be found,

which may be forced into a sort of awkward correspondence but they want that unction, that naturalness, that di;

and easy contrast with the opposing terms, which

rect

would show that they are in harmony with the genius and spirit

Hence

of the language.

the almost impossibility of

a faithful and yet lively translation of Plato into the French

and English.

we needed proof how poorly the Latin is purpose, it may be found in the version of

If

aapted to this

by Ficinus, and even in the translation of the same dialogue by Cicero, of which a large fragment yet the Timeeus

remains.*

We may trace even where

Among

the distinction between

we may

not suppose

it

to

elfit

and

ytyvofjtat,

have been directly

in

modern authors, there is no one in whose writings seem more wanted than in those of the English He often seems to labour with the stiff Plato, Ralph Cudworth. Latin, and the still more clumsy English, when the Greek sljui and ytyvoyai would have helped him at once out of all difficulty. As, *

all

these Greek words

for

example, when speaking of the eternity of truth, and of

inde-

its

pendence even of the creating or generating power of the Divine he means just what will, he says, that “it cannot be made, but is Flato'would have expressed by the words, ovderzors kyevero

alX

dec

Eng.

ed.

eon.

And

System of

Intellectual

again, vol.

iii.,

p.

405,

the

Universe

may

exist in

our imperfect language, and for the ble author,

we cannot

help thinking

Aristotle to express the ovd^Trore kyevero.

vol.

where he wishes

English, that “ the perfect triangle, &c., really yet existed, and never

,

is,

how

same thought by

376,

it

As we

never

feel for

of our most admira-

easily the

the

p.

to tell us in

although

rerum natural difficulties

dM/deca,

i]

iii.,

Greek enables

same words,

del kart,


:

PLATONIC USE OF the

mind of

conveyed.

its

Thus,

adaptedness to the truth intended

example, in the

for

Gospel of John, the one

We

first

which derived

be

to

verses of the

applied to the Eternal

is

other to the sensible world,

him.

179

have arisen (perhaps uncon-

the writer, but to

sciously) from

AND J lyvopai.

elflL

its

A oyog,

the

yeveoig from

might, in defence of this position, say at once,

were specially suggested by the Holy Spirit, the *eal author of the passage, without supposing John himself to have had any acquaintance with the Platonic wriBut tings, or to have intended any philosophical contrast. distinction as growing recognise the without this, we can

that the terms

directly out of the genius of the language, although, in the

expression of truths in which

did not enter, either verb,

it

or both, might have been used, without anything special to attract

But John was treating of a subject

observation.

which, of

all

others, called for the contrast

whether Xoyog

is

preme Reason,

or for the Eternal

Person

used here

in the Trinity.

extravagance

in*

;

and

that, too,

for a personification of the

There

is,

Su-

Son of God, the second

then, no absurdity and no

supposing that the words are here used,

not in their ordinary narrative sense, but with special re-

gard to their primary differences, osophical strictness.

them- than of the other.

may

This r

lower class of existences

Hv

when employed

or kart

— and

it

in phil-

be more clear of one of

may

is this

be applied

that has rendered

necessary the qualifying adverb, ovrojg, which frequently in the Platonic phrase, ovrcog ov

cannot well be used for the higher.

One

to the

we

— but

find so

eyevero

the least familiar

with the genius of the Greek language must feel the impropriety of the expression, ev

had

apxy eyevero

6 Qeog

;

unless

it

been actually intended to teach the fabulous generations

of such gods as Hesiod treats of in his Theogonia,

came from an

older

<\>voig ,

who

all

and were generated out of Chaos

and the broad-bosomed Earth


— PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB

180

to be.

Xaog TENET’, avrap eneira

’TI tol [lev Tcpcortara

YaV evpvorepvog

I

Travroiv edog aocbaXeg alec.

,

Hesiod, Theog ., 117.

A much tures

may

more clear and

be found John,

most remarkable

example from the

striking viii.,

Here we have

58.

and here

antithesis,

we

been expressed

NE20AI

received his yeveotg

WAS,

and ever

.

AM,

,

eternally

SHALL BE

brew rynx, Exodus,

To

Aeyw vplv

and

into being

essentially

or

,

AM,

dpi, here, like the He-

for

:

seems

14,

iii.,

in-

TE-

rrplv ’A dpaap

— Before Abraham came I

was

the designed idea could not Jiave

’Aprjv dprjv

:

EIMI

eyed

it,

the

feel confident in

saying, not only that the philosophical distinction

tended, but that, without

Scrip-

to include all tenses.

be convinced that this juxtaposition of words was not

accidental, or used merely for the sake of variety, let us

compare the other modes namely,

irplv

9

A 6paap

veoOat eyd) eyevoprjv perceived, but

that

dvai ;

might seem

eyco d\u, or

and the difference

be equivalent,

is

ye-

not only to be

In consequence of our using the soli-

felt.

tary verb to be for both

modes

and y iyvopai, the English

elpt

to

npiv ’Abpaap

setting forth the truth in all

its

of existence expressed by fails,

and ever must

fulness.

It is

in

fail,

not extrava-

gant to suppose that our Saviour here intended, and the

Jews understood, a direct reference to Exodus, iii., 14 that I AM where the Septuagint employs the participle of elpi as a name or personal appellation of the Deity,

AM

corresponding to the "I2N hath sent

me

Hebrew rrnx,

or

DUV, namely, O f

There seems, also, good reathis term, O "QN, may, in some

unto you.

son for the opinion that

f

other passages, have the force of a descriptive appellation (as

one of the Divine names), instead of being a mere par-

As

ticipial copula.

T2N, ent ndvrcov

whom, according Tehovah

,

God

in the noted passage,

tiedg,

evXoyyrog

to the flesh

over

all,

(

Kara

Rom.,

ix.,

5

elg roi)g aitivag.

oaptca),

blessed forever .

was

f

O

— Of

Christ,

The

The Hebraism,


PLATONIC USE OF

(wsn

Kara capita

AND ylyVOgUi.

ELflL

181

the only form of expression in

1

'D ?), is

corresponds to the Greek Kara which ysveciv and, by keeping this in mind, we find that there is the same contrast, Rom., ix., 5, as in John, i., 1, 2, 14 that language,

at all

;

:

Kal o Xoyog cap% eyevero

Transfer the Hebraistic idiom

.

more philosophical Greek, and this contrast would be Kara ye thus set forth Kar ovciav ev apxxj fjv 6 Xoyog to

veav cap £ o cbv Kal o

,

Compare,

Eyevero.

,

i]v.

:

We

are

who

also, Rev.,i., 8, ’E ytb Eipu

aware of the objections

and have no expectation that those

will

it

to

Exodus,

mind of one who

naturally left on the

to all this,

have much force with

entertain different views in theology

such impression of a reference

-

iii.,

;

some

but

very

14, is

believes,

on other

grounds, in the Divinity and eternal self-existence of the

being here styled

The Logos.

This impression receives

strength, also, from the supposition that the language of the

Septuagint version of Exodus,

passed into a descriptive

among

the Old Testament

Should

14 (6 cbv ), had already

and been ranked

appellation,

names

be thought that

it

iii.,

of the Deity.

we

are too

much

inclined to

represent Paul and John as Platonizing, or as indulging in the use of philosophical language, in the

case of the former, to Acts,

£ g) gev, Kal

KivovgeOa

move, and are

The

itat

eogev.

we would xvii.,

28

“ In

:

simply

refer,

’Ev avrcp yap

him we

live ,

and

allusion here, as well as in other

Greek schools is too plain to be mistaken and it does not seem extravagant to suppose, that the Apostle had in mind the Greek and Hebrew names respectively of their Supreme Deity The etymology of Jehovah is suggested at once by Exodus, parts of that chapter, to the language of the ;

iii.,

14.

It

he styles

it

may

be called the proper name of God,

himself, his memorial

Essentially Existent one (6 ojv) himself, and else.

who

is

;

to all

generations

the Being

who has

or,

as

— The life

in

the source of existence to el^rything

In spiritual substances, life and being are the same.

Q


PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB

182

The two

Hebrew

roots in

to be.

expressive of these two ideas,

namely, rrn and rrn, are so nearly alike, that they

may

be

regarded as from one source, and, in some cases, as nearly

Hence

synonymous.

Old Testament, The Living God ended merely dead

to distinguish the

idols of the

common

the appellation so

To

.

God

in the

say that this

of the

is in-

Jews from

the

Heathen, or from their deified dead men,

None

Heathen nations, any more than the Romanists of modern times, were ever so besotted as to worship their idols without reis

not to give

it

half

meaning.

its

of the

garding them, in some measure, as the representatives of

The

living and immortal beings.

have had a higher significance, and seems to refer

name Jehovah necessarily

caused to

— The Being

—who has

life

priori, as the

to this

that not only exists, but exists

and un-

in himself, unoriginated

that Divine existence

admit a

must

epithet, therefore,

which the mind

ground of the belief in

is

compelled

all

other ex-

istences, or as a necessary truth, the contrary of which,

when

fairly presented,

cannot be admitted without bringing

darkness over every other

truth.

en found in the Old Testament, is

used

to

61

Hence

the appeal so

As I live

,

Gese-

denote the highest ground of certainty.

nius and other

German

critics,

oft-

saith the Lord,”

indulging their propensity

ever to undervalue the testimony of the Scriptures, and to lessen our reverence for their antiquity and sacred authority,

assign an Egyptian origin to this name, and deduce

from an inscription upon the temple Plutarch

am

that

:

at Sais, as

’Eyc5 el[U to yeyovbg teal ov

which has been,

is,

teal

and shall be.”

it

given by

eodyevov

.

—“ 1

This inscrip-

tion, although, perhaps, itself comparatively modern, may have contained an old Egyptian sentiment; and yet such

an admission would not militate

brew

origin of the

name, and

its

at all against the

pure He-

derivation from ideas ex-

isting in the patriarchal ages, or in that

common

early the-

ology which was transmitted pure to the Jew, while

it

w^as


v

;

PLATONIC USE OF

EL[H

AND

-

To

183

yiyV0\iai.

same early source must we look for the notion on which was grounded the etymology of the Greek Z evg, and which presents so strong corrupted by every other nation.

the

a contrast with the corruptions of the subsequent mythology.

Although

may

it

idea of the

itive

approach

to

have done,

not be precisely the

Hebrew There

it.

same with

the prim-

term, there certainly seems is

no need of

travelling, as

some

some

to the Sanscrit for the origin of this term.

seems as purely Greek as Qeog and

A aipojv, and

It

nothing

can be more simple, or less liable to the charge of being forced, than the

He

tylus.

lonv

rjplv teal rolg

tov

0

rj

and

us,

etymology which Plato gives us in the Cra-

derives Zevg , Zrjva, from

apx^ v ts

events,

all

it

was

ical

etymology

:

Ov yap

no one

is sufficient for

who

.

to

more prop-

is

and king of

— “ For

all

things.”

our present argument, that

the received and probably well-known philosophin Paul’s time,

therefore, to suppose that

and we have every reason,

he alludes

passage of his sermon at Athens. eopev,

live

to

fiaoiXevg tCjv navreov

to all other beings, there is

this

,

aXXoig Traotv bong eorlv alnog paXXov

erly the cause of life than the ruler

At

t'q

we

to

it

in this

famous

In the words ^bjpev and

have the radical Greek and Hebrew ideas com-

bined in one description, composed of terms severally significant of motion said,

he

is

,

life ,

and essence

our Zevg and our Jehovah:

“For

and are as some of your own poets have ,

had

as though Paul in

him we

said,”

<fcc.

live

We

by this view, to suppose that the Aposexercise any false liberality towards the cor-

are no more required, tle

meant

to

rupt polytheism or idolatry of Athens, than that his

evident allusion to the language of their schools

signed as any sanction to the

some

parts of their philosophy

most

was de-

follies and monstrosities of and poetry.

For some of the more striking of the many passages in Plato’s dialogues, in which there is this marked antithesis between

elpt

and yiyvopai

,

see the Thesetetus, 153, E.,


184

ANCIENT DIVISIONS OF MOTION.

155, A., 157, D. vac,

:

keys tolvvv

akkd ycyveoOac

525, C.

(j)ckooo(j)(t)

:

rENE2E£2 ’0NT02

ayaOov

del

nrNOMENOT,

ro

be, bed

efavabvvn

yvcboeg

el ooe

uakov, &c.

prj tl el-

Republic,

;

’OTHIA2 anreov

rrjg

elvac,

526, P., 527, A., 527, B., T?jg del

:

eon p

teal

apeouee to

rov

yecopeTpeurj, ak)l’ ov

508, E., P.

tt ore

re

Parmenides, 138, E., 141,

;

C., 154, C., D., 161, 162, A., B.

;

Philebus, 53, C.,

where

he defines physical pleasure, or the pleasure of sense, as ever yeveoeg, but never ovo'ea be ovk

eon Tonapanav

Hippias, Maj., 294, B. C. 37, C., D., E. too

numerous

;

(bg del

:

rjbovrjg

;

yeveoeg earev ovoea ,

Phaedrus, 247, C., D., E.;

Timaeus, 28, A., B., &c., 29,

;

together with passages from the Sophista,

and the Phsedon, everywhere

for citation,

XXV. Ancient Divisions of Motion. ing

to Aristotle.

According

Plato.

to

Distinction between Yeveoeg

and ’A kko'e-

The Atomic Theory more favourable

cjocg .

Accord-

to

Theism

than the Doctrine of Occult Qualities.

Page

Line 22. "E oro) tolvvv tj pev erepa bvvapevrj abvvarovoa del pea Tig. He speaks now of the two orders of motion, taking the word uevrjocg in its most extensive sense, as including all the spe25,

ucveZv KLVTjoeg, eavrrjv be

cies before alluded to,

namely, circular

separation, concretion , augment

corruption

;

,

,

rectilineal or tot: mi),

diminution generation , and

or, generally, all that is

,

expressed by the word

peTadokrj, or change internal or external, according to that ,

definition of Aristotle, rraoa uevrjoeg

peTabokrj, ual yeveoeg

teal

ei;

dkkov

elg

akko eorl

cpdopa (boavTCjg, Arist., Metaph.,

how much more The extensive it is than the corresponding English term. two kinds of motion here spoken of are not so much to be

x. (xi.), 12.

From

this

it

may be

seen

regarded as species distinct from the others, but rather as


)

ANCIENT DIVISIONS OF MOTION. embracing

ideas, each

two general

all

;

:

.

185

the specific varieties

Plato here, however, must be regarded as un-

mentioned.

usually careless in his specifications, since, according to the fair import of the language, these two must be consid-

ered as species reckoned with the

was

dent that this

Page

26,

Line

rest,

and yet

2. evdr?]v.

It is

not obvious, at

to the

Tlepicpopu.

2

'ZvyKpiGLg.

4.

A L&KpLGig.

5.

kv^rjaig.

6

.

4}6tGig.

7.

Teveaig.

8

.

9.

Kivrjcnc srepov kivovgcl kcll

.

i)(p’

The

.

10.

Totukt) peTu6aGL£.

$0opd.

KlV 7)GLC

Srepov KLvovpevrj.

last two,

ly species

and

however, as

but genera

,

what

so, in

;

2. (pvGiKr)

KCLL

we have

remarked, are not

strict-

including, respectively, all the rest

,

follows, the writer proceeds to regard them.

merates but six species

3. av^rjGtg

kdVTTJV KlVOVGd

erepa.

Sextus Empiricus, Pyrrii ., Hypotyp

iius)

why

following enumeration, taking opposites together

3.

1

first,

mentioned

would, however, be the ninth according

It

it.

is evi-

from being his intention.

far

this is called the ninth, since there are but six

just before

it

ronucrj peradaoig

1.

:

iii.,

8, § 64,

enu-

trans-

( localis

peradoXrj (naturalis mulatto ), or dXXotooig

{augmentum)

veoig

generatio (

totle,

Phys. Auscult .,

;

4. peiooLg

decrementum ) (

;

vii.,

2,

;

Compare

6. (pOopa (corruplio)

;

5. ye-

Aris-

where he enumerates three

genera, which he afterward divides into a great variety of species,

many

of

than their names tottov, aai

which have hardly any other :

’Erat

Kara ro

ra Kivovpeva rpia. Kara ro

ttolov ,

Kai (pOioig.

tie

rpelg eioi KLvrjoeu

ttolov , Kal f

H

Kara ro ttogov

,

differences r\

re Kara

avayfcrj Kal

pev ovv Kara tottov (popa

aXXolocug

,

r]

6e

6e Kara rb ttogov , av^rjocg

rj

“ Since, then, there are three causes of motion,

namely, in respect

to

space, in respect to quality, and in re-

spect to quantity, there must be three corresponding motions or

movements.

The

first

Q

2

of these

is

called (popa the ,


186 distinction between yeveotg and aWoiuGtg. second, aXXoi(OGig (or change), the third, increment and diminution.”

‘The scholiast on the passage of Plato before

much

us has a

better division

and

into corporeal

first,

;

psychical and then into the subdivisions of space, quality, ,

quantity,

and essence, on the one hand, and

into the last

two enumerated by Plato, and here called the ninth and

on the other

tenth,

Kara

tottov,

:

T?jg nivr\GE(og

TtotOTrjTa, /card TroooTrjra

,

nar ovolav *

aXXo nivovoa im' dXXov 6e nLvovpevrj te mvovoa nal srepa dvvapevr]. Compare, also, ipvXifcrj,

rj

,

Phys. Auscult .,

v., 3, viii.,

7 Be

General,

;

Kara

lev ocoparinrj,

rj

r]

6e

eavrrjv

7/

Aristotle,

Corrup .,

et

1, 4.

i.,

In this last-cited treatise Aristotle endeavours to present the distinction between yeveoig and aXXoicooig. eral statement is clear

enough

’ :

AXXotcoGtg

His genegtlv orav

[lev

,

vnopevovrog rov vnonetpevov, aloOrjrov ovrog, psTadaXX^ kv rolg avrov TtaOeoiv

olov to Gcbpa vyiaivei nal

napvet, vnopsvov ye ravro

6e

ycovioEidfjg, 0

nal o %aXnog GrpoyyvXog ore ,

avrog ye &v orav 6s oXov p.ETabdXXrj, .

vnopevovrog aioO^rov rivog

vXP

olov e% vdarog

aijp,

d>g

,

aspog vdcjp, rov pev

el;

rj

,

place

ample, the body the same body

;

is

is

,

ye -

peradoXrj

“ Alloiosis

takes

a change in

its

As, for ex-

passions.

healthy, and again

is sick,

yet remains

or the brass is at one time round, and at

another angular, yet

still

the same.

entire change, the subject it

7]Sr)

the subject (some object of sense) remains the

same, while there

but

rj

,

e% dvatoQrjrov elg aloOrjrov.

when

pr)

vnonetpevov rov avrov

VEGig to toiovtov rov 6e cpdopa paXtara 6e dv

yivErai

1raXiv

But when there

is

an

no longer remaining the same,

being as though from water

snould arise, such a change

air,

or from air water

in respect to the

is,

one thing,

a generation, and, in respect to the other, a (pdopa or cor,

ruption,”

&c.

In applying this, however,

matter of degrees, unless totality, or

it

is

it

will be found to be only a

determined what constitutes

an entire change, as also what

is

meant by

not-


DISTINCTION orrfg, properly,

ence

to

BETWEEN

AND dXXoLUGLg.

yeVEGig

This must be viewed

or quality.

187

in refer-

two theories, one of which, or the atomic, considers

all iroiOTTjT ag,

or qualities of bodies, as arising from the site,

figure, motion,

and order of the atoms of which they are

composed

AryxoupiTog

(d)g

Aevtannog

real

Tagei tovt(Âť)v eg d)v slot, Arist.,

De

the affections they produce in us

change of quality

is

Gen.

<paoi , deaei uai

et Cor.,

according

;

to

i.,

1),

and

which,

all

ultimately to be resolved into topical

motion, producing a change in the situation, order, and nu-

merical combination of the particles istry

new substance

arises from the difference in their

arrangement and proportion

once was

The

such as modern chem-

shows when, the constituent atoms remaining the same

in kind, a

totle

;

common

so that, for example,

;

atmospheric

air

becomes

what

nitric acid,

&c.

was the theory of occult qualities, in which Ariswas a believer. This maintained that the figure, site,

other

motions, and order of parts or particles remaining the same, or being identically the

might

same

two respective bodies, they

in

differ greatly in their properties

;

and there being no-

thing in the matter in respect to locality, number, proportion,

magnitude, motion, or any sensible phenomena, to

which

this difference could

cult.

Hence,

that

in

be assigned,

it

was

styled oc-

one place, Aristotle endeavours

two bodies might both be absolutely

full,

to

show

or a plenum,

and yet one might have a property of heaviness or weight, the other of lightness

;

one might have a property of hard-

ness and the other of softness, and that the one might even

be compressible while the other was incompressible the T7jg)

phenomena of thinness (yavorpg)

or density

(

;

since

tcvicvo -

were no proof of a vacuum, or the contrary.

In this view, dXXoLUOig and yeveoig can only be regarded

Kara to ttogov, unless yeveoig is tathe change uard to itoiov, or a change of the oc-

as differing in degree,

ken

for

cult quality itself,

disposition

which was

entirely independent of the

and motions of the parts of the matter.

On

the


188

ATOMIC THEORY.

other theory, there

is

a marked distinction between them,

would

as the one (d/LAotcua^) ticles as

would only

refer to

such a change of parsum, the other (ye-

affect the aggregate

veacg) to such a change in site, order, motion, and combi-

would destroy the former

nation, as

new

one, constituting a

new law

eÂŁi$,

and give

rise to a

’A XXoiooig

or nature.

would be a change in the aloOrjrd addressing itself solely ,

to the

sense

yeveotg, a change in the vor\r6v or idea, ad,

;

dressing itself to the intelligence, and constituting the object of science.

The ical,

atomic theory has been charged with being atheist-

because atheists have held

very conclusively shows that

it

Cudworth, however,

it.

is,

on the contrary, most

favourable to theism, because, allowing to matter nothing but atoms, figure,

compelled

to bring in

tion, and, since

ing, all

it

site,

it

&c., the mind that thinks rigidly

something

discards

all

to set these

atoms in mo-

unmean-

occult qualities as

is obliged to resort to Spirit as the direct author of

those original impulses of matter

styled properties.

On

38-45. first

is

See The

which

are generally

Intellectual System , chapter

i.,

the other hand, this other doctrine, which, at

view, seems more spiritual, as apparently maintaining

the existence of a secret something besides the matter, and, therefore, as

more favourable

of atoms,

in reality, the great hot-bed of atheism, ever

is,

to religion

than the dry theory

dispensing with the presence of the Deity, as long as these blind occult qualities can be brought in to justify fain

seem

a jealous reverence for the Divine honour.

Nec Deus

intersit, nisi

This doctrine seems Aristotle

what would

and others,

to

dignus vindice nodus.

have given

rise, in the

minds of

between romrcrj

to this distinction

TaboXrj, local change or change in space and usradob) ,

ttolov

,

or

change of

,

quality, as the

j

two great and

distinct

orders embraced under the term KLVrjoig, or motion in largest sense

;

whereas,

if

[is-

Kara

the other view be correc

t,

its

the


189

DOCTRINE OF OCCULT QUALITIES. second

as

is

local motion as the

jnuch

motion internally, although there the circumscribing space in tained

so that

;

may

that is, local

first,

be no departure from

which the whole body

con-

is

change would be motion in the modern

all

sense of the word, and there would remain only the two

genera which Plato numbers as the ninth and tenth, and

which the

scholiast has styled owfiarutr}

the rest being

mere differences arising from

gree, separation, or concretion.

somewhat less

and

affected

by

dependent upon

'ibvxLfcrj

;

all

direction, de-

Plato’s division, although

this doctrine of occult qualities, is far

it

than the others

we have

and what he says of the naOeorrjKvla

e^tg

savours

most strongly of the other theory.

grounds,

we

are persuaded that Plato’s

mentioned,

and

its

change

On

other

view was more

accordance with the atomic doctrine, which resolved

in all

into the motions, figures, sites, &c., of ultimate

7TOLorrjTag

This seems

particles.

agree best with the

to

spirit

of the

some parts of that dialogue which are unintelligible on any other supposition. Cudworth maintains that Plato, as well as Aristotle, was a believer in the occult theory and that he was led to adopt it because he saw that the other had been held by atheists. Timaeus

;

and, indeed, there are

;

We

are satisfied, however, from a very careful examination,

which cannot be here presented, that this is a mistaken view of his philosophy. It is sufficient to say, that nothing would be so fatal to his main argument in this very treatise, as the admission of any occult quality, which is neither to be resolved into the combination and disposition of the particles,

nor into the higher power of spirit ultimately moving

upon them.

The

atheist

would ask

to resist successfully all that

for

no better

auxiliary,

might be advanced about the

necessity of that older and self-moving essence, soul

me

a place to stand,” said Archimedes, “ and

world.”

“ and

I

“ Give

me

I

will

.

“ Give

move the

occult qualities,” the atheist might say,

ask the aid of no

God

in constructing a universe.”


190

SELF-MOTION OF SOUL.

^

#

XXVI.

A vronivrjOLg, longs

or Self-motion of Soul

to the

Energy

.

Essence of the Deity.

God must have

or Action be-

Whether on

Worlds from Eternity.

this Vieio

created

Aristotle's

His own Doc-

Misrepresentations of Plato on this Point. trine.

Page

Line

26,

Haotiv EppcopeveoTaTrjv

9.

Such strong expressions

urjv dtacpepovrcog.

'irpanri-

/cat

as these gave

occasion to Aristotle to assert, that Plato taught the doc-

cause was an eternal energy or activity

trine that the first

ever employed, that

He

ptg.

is,

evepyeia in distinction from dvva,

even most unjustly seeks

Eternal Spiritual

Mover with

confound Plato’s

to

the everlasting agitation of

the self-moving atoms of Democritus and Leucippus evioc noiovoiv del evepyeiav , olov

yap elvai

del

yovoev.

(f>aot KtvrjGiv

Some make

pus and Plato. tion, but

it

dAAd

“ the first essence

nvd

ova lav,

true sense,

with him.

(xii.), c. 6.

we

us.”

tell

This disparagement of atheists,

Leucippus and

own dogma,

off his

that

;

shall see that Plato

an eternal

pij evepyrjoei , ovre

rdv?]Oig , its

most

fully

agreed

ij

gize, there will

prj

dvai.

:

ert ovd el evepyrjoei, ’

ov yap eorai nivrjoig atdiog

Several yap to dvvapei ov, fjg

very essence must be

from power ( dvvapig )

eorai tdvrjoig

ovGta avrrjg dvvapig

roiavrrjv,

mo-

on dvdyftrj elvai atwas immoveable dfdv7]rov in which proposition, taken in

activity (evepyeia), in distinction

i]

,

Leucip-

activity, as

In another part of this same chapter, he infers,

that if there be

6'

ITA arcov.

riva ov Ae-

by reason of what, and what, they do not

by associating him with the Democritus, is merely done to set

yap

teal

teat

that there is an eternal

Plato,

its

Sea tl,

an everlasting

For they say

Aristot ., Metaph., xi.

diov

Aev/annog

Aid

:

A el apa

ev -

elvai dpxrjv

ovoia evepyeia— u For

if it

should not ener-

be no motion

if it

should energize,

;

neither

t


;

ARISTOTLE MISREPRESENTS TLATO. while yet

19l

essence was only (dvvapcg) power or poten-

its

tiality.

Even

for that

which

in that case, there will be

no eternal motion admits of

exists, tv dvvapec, in potentiality,

Therefore there must he some such principle,

not-being.

whose very essence

energy .”

is

In stating the objections to the doctrine, he misrepresents

Plato in his usual manner,

by drawing the unsound

infer-

ence, that the Phrst Cause must have been ever engaged,

from

its

very nature, in the work of creation, and

fore, the universe

must have been eternal

dnecpov xpovov %ao£ ?]

i)

vv%,

:

dXXa ra avra

that, there-

(hare ova dec,

rj

av

fjv

rrepcodcp,

dXXcvg, ehrep nporepov tvepyeca dvvapecog, el de to avro

del Trepcodcp, dec re dec peveev tvepyovv

—“ So

that there

could have been no chaos or night for an infinite (or indef-

same things must have been ever taking place, either in a circuit or in some other manner, if activity tvepyeca ) is older than dvvapcg. But if the same eter( inite)

time

;

but the

nally took place in a circuit, then there

must have ever been

something continually energizing, or putting forth active power.”

Metaph.,

xi. (xii.), c. 6.

was never careful to do Plato justice although it would be easy to show the modern declamation to the that their philosophy was subcontrary notwithstanding stantially the same the main difference arising from the Stagyrite’s studious care to adopt, in many cases, a different Aristotle

;

— —

;

phraseology, for the purpose of creating the appearance of a wider disagreement than really existed, and from his con-

and misstate Plato's real meanHis misrepresentation here, whether wilful or not,

tinual disposition to pervert ing.

arises from his utterly confounding the

which our philosopher defines as eavrrjv re teevovoa did he hold too,

it

to

it

teal

his tenth species of teevrjoeg,

erepa dvvapevrj.

be eternal and essential.

however much

regards

two aspects under

it

may

In the

first

only

In this respect,

be above our comprehension, he

as purely spiritual, or, as the scholiast defines

it f


192

THE VERY ESSENCE

IN GOD,

IS

ENERGY.

psychical, in distinction from topical motion

ever energizing within

itself,

in the generation,

What

and changes of the topical universe.

meant was

this, that

than dvvapig

;

the First Cause

activity constituting its

means

it

by an exercise of

necessitating will,

it

Plato

was something more

an eternal

sence, yet by no until,

as something

and only presenting the sec-

ond aspect when exercised, tiara ronov, creation,

;

very es-

to act out of itself,

should give rise to an out-

ward universe, which, although actuated by, remains

clear-

ly distinct from, this everlasting energy.

We

have likewise an example of the gross manner in

which

Aristotle misstates Plato, in another assertion of this

same

chapter, wherein he charges

in respect to his first

UX arcovi

ovde

Mover

him with inconsistency ’AAAd firjv

or Eternal Soul

ye olov re Xeyeiv

olerai apxrjv elvat evi-

fjv

ote to avro kavro ntvovv. vorepov yap 7)

ipvrxrj,

tell

to

(j>rj(u

—“ But,

what he means by

us

be the

soul,

cog

first

he says

principle,

teal

apa

rep ovpavcp

surely, neither is Plato able to

which he sometimes thinks namely, his self- moving power for that

;

(in a certain place), is

would convey the inference,

cotemporary with the Aristotle undoubtedly

heavens, or the material universe.”

that this is inconsistent with

the doctrine of the Eternal Spiritual the tenth book of

:

The Laws. The

Mover

position

as laid

down

which he

in

cites

is

from the Timaeus, but the careful reader can hardly

to

see that there, by ^vx^j, Plato means the anima mundi

which he expressly represents as the the Eternal Father,

of which

it

was

to

who formed

it

fail ,

direct production of

together with the body

be the plastic power

;

whereas through-

out this book, and especially the present argument respect-

ing motion, he employs the term soul for the immaterial principle

matter self

which was

— in

— and

known

fact, as

this

to one.

prior to all creation

another

name

for the

and generation of Eternal Deity him-

wide difference could hardly have been un-

who must have been

familiar with the dia-


Aristotle’s immoveable essence.

193

logues of Plato, especially such important portions of them as the Timseus and this argument* against the atheists.

One cause of Aristotle’s misconception may have been his own unsound definition of motion, which necessarily excluded this tenth species, which Plato makes the ground of

the rest

all

Metaph., x.

peradoXrj.

he seems

ever, to

yap

ixaaa

:

to

mean

ntvrjatg £%

(xi.), c. 12.

the

akXov

slg

aWo

In other places,

same with our

author,

sorl

how-

and even

go beyond him in the sublimity of some of his ideas re-

specting the

first

Compare,

Mover.

for this purpose, the

chapter of the last book of Physics, and the seventh

last

chapter of the eleventh book of the Metaphysics.

Cause he

First

styles a/cLvrjrov, not, as

we

The

think, in the

sense of inactivity or quiescence, but as incapable of being

moved, or of deriving antecedent.

its

motion from anything external or

This, instead of being 6vvapig alone, he him-

self describes as essentially

eon to Ktvovpsvov vov

seems

He

to intend the

,

first

mover,

mean an

apx'fj,

namely, the moral and

or principle of a

We

6s

.,

.

still

final

he does not rather higher nature even

if

cause of the heaven-

allude especially to that most remark-

* There cannot be a doubt, that, in the passages Aristotle has reference to this tenth book of The else does Plato talk in the

same

style

we have

Laws

quoted,

nowhere about motion and the first mo;

for

be in some of the subsequent books of this very treaIn the Timaeus, the argument is conducted in a manner alto-

ver, unless tise.

errel

energy of vovg as something higher

than

ly motions.

,

:

o ov Kivovpe-

Metaph sometimes even transcends Plato, and

than a merely psychicalf

this,

n

ovoia nai sv spy eta ovoa

Kivsly aidiov , nal

xi. (xii.), c. 7.

an Eternal Energy

tavovv peoov eotl

teal

it

gether different. Aristotle

makes

This, then, together with other references which to the

Laws, as a production of Plato well known

ought to be conclusive evidence of their genuineness. Plato, however, in this argument, evidently uses 'tpvxv for all that

in his day, t is

incorporeal, including intellect (vov-c) as well as

power.

R

life

and motive


194 MORAL REASONS, THE FIRST OF MOVING CAUSES. “ that

where he says

able passage,

Cause, moves the heavens, as being loved

By

pievoi’ ,” c. 7.

Cudworth supposes

this,

dpx%

this

or First

tuvel 6e

that

epd>-

he meant

to

represent a second moving power, or soul of the world,

which, “ enamoured with did, as

were, in imitation of

it

heavens.”

We

this

supreme, immoveable Mind, it,

System

Intellectual

,

continually turn round the vol.

ii.,

p.

313, Eng. ed.

cannot, however, discover any solid grounds for this

would rather regard this as a mode of expression, by which the Stagyrite would give the first place in the series of moving causes to moral reasons what he opinion, and

himself so tersely styles, to ev nal tzaX&g, or the well and fit ,

and what Socrates was fond of denominating to PeXtio-

tov the best.

It

,

was

this principle

which produced

motion of the Highest Heavens or sphere, on which ferior

motions depend

ovpavog nal

rj

(pvoig.

Toiavrr\g

etc

:

apa apx^g

In this language

be discovered some allusion

to

we

that

all in-

TjpTTjrat,

6

think there can

Homer’s golden chain

;

and,

indeed, the whole style and sentiment of the passage seems

more

far

in accordance with the semi-poetical philosophy

No-

of Plato than with that of the dry and rigid Aristotle.

thing could be

more Platonic than

this

conception of the

universe eternally moving on through love of/rhe First

Fair and

The

First Good, attracted rather than impelled,

and ever tending it

were

to the object of its admiration, as

striving to develop, in the

harmony

of

though varied

its

physical influences, that all-perfect idea with which

it

was

enraptured.

We may

compare with

all this

a splendid passage from

the Phaedrus, of which Cicero has given a version in the “All first book of the Tusculan Disputations, sect, xxiii. soul is immortal, for that which ever moves must be eternal while that which moves another, and yet is moved by :

;

something

else, since

cessation of

life.

But

it

hath cessation of motion,

that alone

which moves

may have

itself,

seeing


;

the words hoyog, that

but

never leaves

it

itself,

also the fountain

is

195

Idea.

not only never ceases energizing,

and beginning of motion

This can never either be

things.

and

eldog,

bom

to all other

or perish, or

the

all

heaven and earth collapsing must stand still, and never For, again find a renewed source and origin of motion. since

it

which

is

self-moving

not fear to say that this

is

the very essence and

evident that that

is

we need

reason (Xoyog) of soul,

or, in

other words,

very nature,”

its

We

Phcedrus 245, D.

ravrrjg ovor]g (pvoeog ipvxVS*

cjg

is eternal,

,

need not remind the reader that in this passage, as well as The Laws, the term sow/ is taken collective-

in the tenth of

ly for the oldest soul, as the source of all animation, and in-

cluding

all

other souls as in

some way proceeding from

it.

XXVII. The Words Xoyog,

Page

28, Line 9.

rov Xoyov

j

eldog,

uev, rrjv

ev 6e ovoya.

and

idea.

ovaiav ev

One

6e, rrjg

ovoiag

thing the essence, one

X oyog, reason, definition, or notion of the essence, and one the name.” A oyog, when rendered reason is not to be taken for the faculty of the mind to which we give that apIt more properly signifies the reason of a thing pellation. the

,

the reason as existing in a thing, perceived, or, rather, un-

derstood by the mind, or the rationale.

why the thing

term, but, rather, the constituting cause

to tl

fjv

It is

exists, or the final cause, as

elvat , that

,

not the reason

we

what

often use the

Aristotle calls

which makes anything what

it

particular modification of the general idea of existence.

;

a,

The

which is the object of the mind’s intellection which binds together (primary sense of Xeyco)

X oyog

is that

( notio )

;

that

is

or gathers into a unity for the soul’s contemplation

which alone the ovoga

,

or

that to

name, belongs, and without which

the thing itself is only an object of sensation.


196

BETWEEN Xoyog AND

DISTINCTION

In reading Plato,

between X oyog,

we have

sometimes

and

eldog,

difficult to distinguish

The

I6e a.

conclusion to which

which we would

arrived, but

gree of hesitation,

is

it

as follows

is

state

A oyog

:

OVOpa.

is

with some dethe notion or

reason of a thing viewed in relation to the mind contemplating

mind

;

it,

yet having an existence separate from such a

— as

eldog the notion in reference to the thing itself ,

the ev ev noXXolg, or one in many, residing in

it

Msa, the

;

same, regarded as self-subsisting, apart from mind, and also

from the individual things through which

The

absolute existence of the last

is

it is

philosophy.

In respect to the second term,

one Aristotle

is

most fond of using, there

agreement between him and Plato. hypothesis, there is

con, and that

which

common to now styled

is

If

which

is

we

the

is

no real

dis-

reject the third

a wide difference between

still

philosophy which was

manifested.

the great question in

Aristotle, Plato,

that,

and Ba-

the system of Locke.

XXVIII. Distinction between

Page

30,

Line

3.

Xoyog and ovopa.

To eavro

Kivelv cpqg

*lvtt)v ovoiav , rjVTcep rovvopa, o

The

yopevopev.

would seem

to

6?]

Xoyov exeiv'rrjv

iravreg , ipvxrjv irpooa -

order of this rather complicated sentence

be this

rrjv avrrjv

:

ovoiav

(/caff) rjvnep

ovopa TTpooayopevopev o drj iravreg (jrpooayopevovoi) to eavro Kivelv. “ You say, then, xpvx'rj'Vy Xoyov exew rd

,

that that very essence, of

which

all

men

which we predicate

predicate, namely,

Xoyog self-motion, or explanations accompanying the

name

vxrj , or soul hath for

avroKivrjoig .”

its

that ,

See the notes and

text.

may, perhaps, be objected, that Plato is resting these important positions on mere words, to which he assigns his own arbitrary definitions or notions. But what is meant by It


;

distinction

between Xoyog AND ovoya

which is such a famodern declaimers ? What

the sneering expression, mere words vourite with a certain class of

words

are

197

,

—we speak not now of sounds or

articulate enun-

ciations,

dvopara or pryiara, but of the higher term Xoyoi

— what

are words, in this sense, but outward expressions

-

of the inward logical necessities of our

own minds ?

And

what can be higher proof for us than those affirmations, which the immutable laws of our own souls compel us to make, in respect to what is included or not included in a certain idea ? Whatever belongs to the idea is necessary so,

on the other hand, whatever

is

necessary pertains to

an idea, and the exclusion of any part involves, for our minds, a logical contradiction.

The naming

of them, therefore, cannot be arbitrary, ex-

cept so far as the mere outward sound

is

There

concerned.

which are not dependent on language, as some of the nominalists of the school of Locke would hold, but language on them. So far, human speech may be reare certain ideas

garded as something supernatural, although dress or vocal forms

may have been

tional or accidental usage, instead of

We may

ness of sound to sense. tion,

We

any ovopa we please. animus anima

nn»

,

,

any natural adapted-

give to the

may

outward

its

the result of conven-

call

©etj!, or soul

it

A oyog,

'ipvxrj ,

we may

;

or no-

nvevfia,

etymolo-

gically associate this

ovopa with any such sensible phe-

we may

fancy comes the nearest to the con-

nomenon

as

ception, such as air, breaLli, fire, (Ether,

way

the ovopa

may

not conventional. periods,

it

all

— and we

in every tongue

;

calls for the

name

;

and in

this

but the Xoyog

is

languages, even from the earliest

— as

much

so as

expect, as a matter of course, to find

we may

investigate.

The

idea which

God as one of the fixed The metaphysical notion of soul is self-energy avrordvyaiq. Of this notion we is

implanted by

parts of our being. self-motion,

&c.

has had a distinct vocal sign

that of body it

In

continually change

,

R

2


108

BETWEEN Xoyog AND

DISTINCTION

Hence,

cannot divest ourselves.

QVOfld.

even from

after proving,

physical premises, that there must be somewhere self-mo -

mind attaches

tion , the

this

Xoyog

to its ovo[ia,

and affirms

—being the whatever be the name — and

that this self-motion is soul,

Šetjl:,

'ipvx'rji

&c.

same unchanging notion, that this name, although affixed to the flowing and varying sensible phenomenon from which it may have been etymologically derived, ultimately represents the

of

which *

To

that sensible*

phenomenon

is

immutable Xbyog

the symbol.

dwell on this distinction between ovopa (or pfjpa) and loyog

at greater length,

we may

say, that the former simply represents a

sensible perception or action calls eldolov

;

(

aloOrjTov ), or

the latter, a thought, an idea

tellcctum, or votjtov

,

what Plato sometimes

(idea),

the

intelligibile, in-

being no part of the sensible image or action,

it. All words, being a communicafrom mind to mind, through matter must array the thought, du-

but suggested or symbolized by tion

ring

must

,

its

passage, in the garments of the flesh,

something sensible.

originally represent

reality,

other words,

or, in

The

ovopa, then, in

goes no farther than this sensible image or action, which

it

There are but two stages in the process. The Xoyoc, on the other hand, goes beyond this, and represents the intelligibile, or votjtov, of which that image, action, or aiodrjTov, is but the symbol. Here, then, are, in fact, three stages, and the eiduXov, or action, which the word, as ovopa presents, does itself re-present something still behind it. The life of language is gone, when, with respect to abstract terms, the primary sensible images have faded away and become unknown, or, in other words, when this second stage in the process has been left out, and the word stands for the thought, in the same way that x and y represent quantities in algebra. The same term may be regarded both as ovopa and Aoyof. For primarily presents.

,

example, the word

circle,

as a name, merely presents that round,

sensible image, which, as far as the elduhov to the vision of an animal as of a

cardinal idea, involving

ent to the itself the

all

Newton

concerned,

as Tioyog,

it

mind of the mathematician, and of which word or representative.

be regarded as genuine 7r avTrj,

AOrOS

:

kv/c^oc, to

av

is

the

elrj

same

suggests that

the properties of the figure, which

is

pres-

this eldulov is

This cannot be better expressed

than in the language of Plato himself,

arrexov

;

is

if

km

the Epistles can in any

way

to pkoov ek tuv eox^tov lgov

ekelvov tyrrep GTpoyyvhov Kal

tt Ept^epki


BETWEEN Xoyoq AND

DISTINCTION It is

We

not a vain support to rely upon language.

say, in

the words which Plato puts tlvcl

tylus, OlfJLCU fiev

rrjv 'depevrjv

438, C.

As

into the

dvvapiv elvat

shown

may

mouth of Crar\ dvOpomeiav

,

rd npdjra dvopara rolg irpaypaoiv. is

199

OVOJia.

in this last-cited dialogue,

Cratylus, it

follows,

correctness.* in its origin

and progress, an inward necessity, and must,

therefore, possess It is

inward truth and necessary

a striking proof of

its

Divine origin (we

mean

*

in the

bounding, defining, classifying, and combining of ideas, and not in the outward vocal sounds affixed to them), that the it as it is, but must change meaning of its terms to suit non-existent notions, to which it never has been and never can be adapted, without introducing confusion extending far beyond the particular cases of amendment. He must have an entire new dialect, and that, too, one which will ever destroy itself by the con-

atheist or materialist cannot use

the

tradictions, discords,

exist

between

its

trine of death in

no

efforts It

and jarring inconsistencies which must*

parts, in

every attempt to express the doc-

words necessitated

to

glow with a life which

can wholly quench.

has been well observed, that there

is

no language un-

der heaven in which the atheist, the pantheist, or the

who

man

denies the reality of moral distinctions, can talk five

minutes without a logical contradiction,

or, in

other words,

a war of ideas. Should they form a new one, and take the utmost pains to adapt it to their philosophy of darkness, it will be found to be built on a disarrangement of the neces-

sary and logical elements of speech, and must soon perish

by reason of its own innate formed in opposition “

to the

The word

contradictions.

No

such Babel,

high decree of Heaven, can ever

ovoya

kcll kvkTioq.

ity in

every direction, from extremities to a central point,

circle,

representing the idea of equalis

the lo-

yog of that to which roundness, and periphery, and circle, are the

names.”

Plat.,

Epist .,

vii.,

342, B.

Compare,

also, the Theceteius ,

201, 202; Sophista, 221, A.

* See Schleiermacher’s Introduction to the Cratylus.


:

200

DISTINCTION

The

stand. ities,

BETWEEN Xoyog AND .OVOpa.

ideas of incorporeal substance, of eternal ves

of moral distinctions, cannot be separated from lan

guage.

The

indelibly as

proof of soul and of God it is

is

stamped upon

written on the firmament of heaven

it

as

itself.

Some of the views we have been endeavouring to set may be found admirably stated in Varro’s account of

forth

the Platonic or Socratic philosophy, especially in respect to the importance

it

attached to innate notions and words as

representatives of them, in Cicero, Acad. Poster .,

viii.

Tertia deinde philosophise pars, quse erat in ratione et in disserendo sic tractabatur

;

quanquam

tamen non esset judicium veritatis (vovg) volebant rerum esse judicem

neam

oriretur a sensibus,

solam censebant ido-

cui crederetur, quia sola cerneret id, quod

set, ( ra del

ovra ), simplex

Kal d)oavTG)g)

et tale

et

unius modi

quale esset.

Mentem

in sensibus. :

Hanc

(

del

illi

semper

es-

Kara ravra

ideam appella-

jam a Platone ita nominatam nos recte speciem (elSensus autem omnes hebetes et dog) possumus dicere. tardos esse arbitrabantur, nec percipere ullo modo eas res

bant,

:

quae subjectae sensibus viderentur, quse essent ita mobiles

(psovTa) et concitatse, ut nihil

unquam unum esse

ne idem quidem, quia continenter laberentur nia.

Itaque hanc

tov) appellabant.

omnem

constans,

et Jluerent

partem rerum opinabilem

om-

(do^acr-

Scientiam autem nusquam esse cense-

bant nisi in animi notionibus atque rationibus (Aoyoi), qua

de causa dejinitiones rerum probabant, quibus disceptabatur, adhibebant.

et

has ad omnia, de

Yerborum

explicatio pro-

quam Arguments et quasi rerum notis ducibus utebantur ad probandum et ad concludendum id quod

babatur, qua de causa quceque essent ita nominata

,

etymologiam appellabant.

explanari volebant, in qua tradebatur omnis dialectics dis ciplina, id est, orationis ratione conclusae.


;

IMPASSABLE CHASM BETWEEN SPIRIT AND MATTER

201

XXIX. Distance between Self-motion and Motion by Impulse.

Infinite

The Word

Impassable Chasm between Spirit and Matter. Principle of Euphonic Attraction.

ttoXXogttj.

Page

Line

Xogttjv, k.

sentence, with

meaning

is t£

dering

:

T

Ap’ ovv oi>x erepov .... 7roAr. A. This is a very complicated and awkward

30,

13.

anomalies, although the

several

The

quite clear.

following

not that motion,

Is

is

general

a very free ren-

which takes place in one

which never effects that itself, by itself is not such a

thing by reason of another, but

anything shall have motion in principle of motion,

we

,

the most remote in degree of great, as

say, justly styled second and even

any one might choose

such numbers, however

all

to

use in the computation

being, in truth, that kind of motion or change culiar to a soulless body.”

we

which, however,

The

6tt6gg)v rig

sense

is,

although

:

?

pe-

is

order of the latter part (in

are compelled to use ttoXXogtt] for

TToXXoGrrjv, in consequence of the

be as follows

which

change of position) would

devrepa re nal noXXoGrrj togovtcov apiOytiv

dv fiovXoiro avr'fv dpiSpslv. The general by impulse, or the motion of matter,

that motion it

may

be next in order ( devrepa ),

is

yet almost

removed from self-motion, or the motion of soul by a distance greater than any limit assignable in

infinitely

that

is,

numbers. It is

another

mode

of saying that there

chasm between them, by which they

is

are forever parted and

assigned to two distinct worlds of being. naturalists

have ever been striving

an impassable

to

Materializing

up or bridge

fill

this

chasm, either by a direct connexion through some most subtle

matter, or imponderable agent, or occult quality, or

some

tertium quid

which might

sence these two motions,

or,

identify in

rather

— the

one common

great object

by es-

£>f all


202 IDEAS OF CHANGE, CAUSE, AND

INSEPARABLE*

SPIRIT,

their strivings

— to

These

however, from the days of Plato

efforts,

make

the higher a result of the lower

The

ent,

have been

ural

and the supernatural, or between the

all

in vain.

to the pres-

distance between the natspiritual

and ma-

must ever remain impassable by any uniting essence. The most aethereal motions of matter, even of that class of terial,

substances which the ancients included under the general

names

rrvp

and

alOrjp ,

and which the moderns have styled

imponderable agents, make no approach

However

or avroKLvrjOLg of Spirit.

they

may

and

be, yet, as matter,

to the self-motion

and attenuated

subtile

falling

under that one idea

which we have before alluded (page 142), the laws of our minds (from which we cannot escape, and aside from which there is, to us, no such thing as truth) compel us to regard them as destitute of all motion and all property of matter to

of motion in themselves

— in

ponderous mass of lead or

fact, as

iron.

much

Plato

so as the most

was deeply

sensible

of the importance of this fundamental position, and therefore

he labours so earnestly, even

at the

thought tedious and prolix, to maintain the remark before, and yet

ness

to

motion

We

importance and

our present subject will justly warrant

This point being conceded

itself,

its

it.

hazard of being

may

in

to the atheist,

some way be an

have made its

adapted-

its repetition.

namely, that

self-

occult property of matter in

or that the least and most aethereal atom in the uni-

verse could ever get in motion without the aid of that older

and higher something

Xoyog and the ovopa

;

to

which he has here assigned the

or that there

is

the distance of a hair’s

breadth between the ultimate ideas of change cause and ,

the action of spirit atheist, all is lost.

war wkh the

— this, If this

we

,

say, being conceded to the

can be conceived

of,

or

is

idea, or Adyo^, of matter, as given u§

laws of our own minds, then

may

it

not

at

by the

also be conceived of as

having an occult adaptive property, and the conclusion cannot be resisted,

which would

alike establish materialism in


203

EUPHONIC ATTRACTION. respect to man, and pantheism (which doctrine) in respect

UoaXogttjv, as culiar word.

nominator

is

same

in fact, the

is,

to the universe.

appears in this sentence,

it

is

a very pe-

of many, a fraction whose dea very large number, and hence its name an signifies one

It

infinitesimal part.

Compare the Philebus, 44, P. ra 7ioAwhere it is put in direct contrast with :

Xogtcl mc?i7]p6rrjTL

;

otckrjpoTara, as an infinitesimal fraction opposed to a superlative.

There

the sentence, fers to is,

to the order of its construction in

should be tcoXXogt?/, since

it

devrepa and must be taken ,

in

regularly re-

it

connexion with

however, made accusative, in consequence of

and by the

after the infinitive, apcOpelv ,

This ists

differs

anomaly

also a peculiar grammatical

According

word.

in this

is

it.

It

position

its

attraction of avrrjv.

from the ordinary case of attraction which ex-

between the

sake of euphony,

and antecedent.

relative

euphonic, because

it

seems

or, rather,

to affect

may be

It

words solely

styled for the

homceophony, and on the mere

ground of contiguity in location, although very remotely lated in all other respects

so

;

much

so, that, in this

re-

way,

great violence is sometimes done to the true grammatical construction.

There

no need of resorting

is

any various

to

We

reading, or to any conjectural emendation.

have no

doubt, from the location of the word, that Plato wrote ttoX-

however harsh the construction may appear to us. togovtov also seems very awkward, and yet (although we cannot well keep it in that place when XoGrrjv,

The

we

position of

adopt the order for a

that,

by standing where

phasis than though clause “

;

as though

However great

still

by so

it

we

literal translation)

it

does,

it

has a

had occurred

much

in the

should thus paraphrase ,

it

in

English

as high as you please

ple of local or euphonic attraction, although interferes with

stronger em-

beginning of the

number carry it much (togovtov) is it remote ,” &c. the

easy to see

it is

grammatical smoothness,

is

:

,

This princiit

sometimes

undoubtedly in


ATHEISTIC ARGUMENT AGAINST DESIGN.

204

accordance with the genius of the language scholar can endure the attempts to divest

it

of this peculiarity by

;

and no

true

which are sometimes made means of pretended emen-

dations.

-

XXX. Argument of Ancient Atheists

that Apparent Evidences of Design were only Evidences of Subsequent Accommodation. Things {they said) older than Knowledge of Things and ,

,

therefore older than Soul.

Page

31,

Line

8.

Tporcot, 6rj nai ijOrj nai (3ovXrjaecg teal

XoyLopoi Tcporepa aoparov,

ti.

The

r. X.

we keep was directed. The

unnot be appreciated unless

which it soul was the

against that

quently younger.

in

full

force of this

mind the objection

ancient atheists said

offspring or result of matter, and conse-

Hence what

theists

would

call evidences

of design or of mind’s preceding matter, they would regard as merely subsequent accommodations to an accidental ex,

isting state of things, in like

which, had

manner, have drawn

commodations

to

which

it

after

been any other, would,

it it

the only uses and ac-

could be adapted

;

and which, in

would have carried w ith them like appearances of previous design, or, as Lucretius has most concisely exT

that case,

pressed

it,

Nil adeo natum est in corpore, ut uti Possemus, sed quod natum est, id procreat usum.

Lucretius

Thus,

for

,

iv.,

832.

example, they would say, in accordance with

their theory, that teeth

were not made of a

certain shape

with the previous design that the animal should eat herbs, but that, because they happened to be of a certain form (and there

was no reason

in themselves

why

they should be of

one form rather than another), therefore nature applied

them


ATHEISTIC ARGUMENT AGAINST DESIGN.

205

9

use, and the only use, adapted to their accidental

to the

Again,

structure.

if

certain bodies had, in the course of

ages, received from tv%7] elongated projections from the

main

trunk, or an attenuated

ed form, in

and

flexible shape, or a round-

these cases, they would have said, and did

all

say, that that animation residing in

but a junior

found tion,

itself

art,

them (which was

when

the production of an older tyvocg ),

thus circumstanced

made

,

by accommodating the one

to

the best of

itself

its

it

condi-

a walking, the other to

a crawling, and the other to a rolling locomotion.

So, also,

had they been acquainted with some of the arguments of our modern natural theology, they would have denied that the revolution of the earth on

its

axis

was adjusted

to

twen-

any design that such a period should

ty-four hours, with

correspond to designed circumstances in the alternating •

changes which occur in the economy of the animal and vegetable tribes.

tended

that, in

On

the contrary, they would have con-

the eternal and fortuitous dance of tv%7], the

earth having received such an accidental impulse as just

produced the aforesaid period, nature, in time, accommodated to

man

it

the intervals for the exercise and relaxation of hu-

bodies, together with „all the periodical vicissitudes

which seem to have relation to such a revolution and that, had this accidental period been of any other length, the same adapting (pvcug and rv^r] would, long before this, have ;

brought

all

the earthly

economy into

This argument, of which outline,

that

it is

we

perfect

harmony with it.

have given an imperfect

they carried to great length, and

easy

is

it

to

see

capable of a most extensive and subtle application.

It is difficult, if

not impossible, for any one

who

admits the

doctrine of occult properties to any extent in matter, to give

a direct answer to the objections drawn from

it

;

and yet

believe that not a vestige of any skeptical doubt

may produce can remain upon ley’s

it

the mind, after reading Pa-

most valuable work on natural theology.

S

we

which

As a specu-


206 THINGS OLDER THAN KNOWLEDGE OF THINGS. argument, this doctrine of subsequent accommodation,

lative

as opposed to a previous designed use,

dable appearance, but

it

may have

a formi-

vanishes on a close observation of

nature, because the soul, in such observation, instead of re-

on a

ally relying

'posteriori facts,

cannot divest

itself of that

a priori view which believes in design, and looks for design,

and carries along the preconception of design as

volved in those ideas of

upon the

God and truth

with which

we have

seen, overcomes the difficulty by be-

ginning with motion instead of evidences of design

thence,

;

more remote point of view, proving the higher an-

this

tiquity of soul, then of the acts or exercises of soul,

which

enters

investigation.

Plato, as

from

it

in-

purpose or design

is /3ov?i7](7Lg ,

,

Another subtle objection from

this

one of

.

same school was,

that

knowledge, being the knowledge of things must, therefore,, have been posterior to things hence that mind was young,

;

er than matter. trine of

mind

In this they, of course, rejected the doc-

any other knowledge than

or intellect contained, in

intelligibles {yoryra)

way

making

any sense, it

to

be

all

its

own

be said that the objection

it

in respect to ideal or eternal truth,

may

ideas or

from without by

of impression from the external world.*

* Should

way

;

that of things, or that the

If this

be stated in the same

and that there must have

been vo7]T& before vovg or truth before knowledge, the only reply ,

that

God is

intclligens

at the

and

same

be

is,

time, and from eternity, both vovq and votjtov ,

inlelligibile ,

or intellectual.

It is

some such view which suggested

the absolute neces-

most profound minds of antiquity the idea of a plurality in the Divine nature, a distinction of two hypostases, at least, with a third, ipvxv, to which they were related, and in which they were united. Instead of being contrary to reason, it was the highest result to which she arrived sity of

(if

the truth

tion), as

w as r

not rather obtained from

to the

some

primitive revela-

her only refuge against the cheerless and incomprehensible

conception of an eternal, solitary monadity, or the equally

difficult

conception of a necessary, eternal, outward universe, towards which the Divine love and the Divine intelligence might be directed.


:

207

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE. atheism, as

it

most assuredly is, when held in relation to what shall we think of the corresponding

the Divine Mind,

doctrine

when

applied to the

human

soul

If

?

we

the conclusions to which such inquiries lead us,

start it

from

should

be borne in mind, that the only possible defence against

them must be found in that ideal philosophy which supposes knowledge belonging to mind, as mind whether it be Divine or human, entirely independent of things or of any outa

,

,

ward world. The above atheistic objection is also expressed by Lucretius, with far more of poetry than piety Exemplum porro gignundis rebus, et ipsa hominum Divis unde insita primum,

Notities

Quid vellent facere, ut

animoque

scirent,

viderent'?

Quove modo est unquam vis cognita principiorum, Quidnam inter sese permutato ordine possent, Si non ipsa dedit specimen natura creandi

1

Lucretius,

lib. v.,

132.

XXXI. Platonic Doctrine of the Evil Principle.

Of AvdjK ? ’

/,

or

Necessity.

Page

32,

Line

2.

A volv yev ye

irov

eXarrov yrjdev nOti-

yev, Trjy re evepyendog real rrjg ravavrla dvvayevjjg e^ep.

ya&oOai

—“ Nothing

less than two, at least, the

does us good, and the one that

We

is

one that

able to do the contrary.”

have here presented, in the most unequivocal terms,

that grand defect in Plato’s theology,

mars, by

its

which occasionally

presence, almost every part of his otherwise

noble system.

It is

most

in his dialogues, that

clear,

from

this

and other passages

he held the doctrine of two uncreated

principles or souls, one good (or the benefactor, as he styles

him), the other evil. ter,

Neither Plato, however, nor Zoroas-

can be charged with the absurdity of believing in two

Supremes.

They avoided

this

by running

into the incon-


PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

208

sistency of supposing that the evil principle, although uncreated,

was under

controlled,

the dominion of the good, constantly

and ultimately

be completely conquered by

to

it.

This doctrine, likewise, made harsh discord with almost every other part of his philosophy, especially his views of the origin of the universe, as set forth in the Timaeus,

made

is

we examine

the matter closely,

could have come

when how he

of a distinct evil soul and yet,

no mention

;

is difficult to

it

any other conclusion.

to

where

see

Plato had no

other guide than reason, aided, perhaps, by a dim and cor-

rupted tradition of primitive truth in it

no other

way

upon God as

and reason can account

;

for the existence of evil, its

immediate author.

without charging

It is

evident, from

manner in which he ever speaks on this subject, that he had a deep conviction of the essential goodness of the

the

Deity, and that he

felt

himself sorely pressed by the

saw everywhere

existing in the world.

compare what he says

in the

On

diffi-

which he

culty of reconciling with this goodness the evil

this point,

second book of the Republic

,

ovuovv ayaOog 6 ye tieog rep ovti re teat Xektsov ovro) “ Wherefore is not God really good, and must we not thus ever affirm?” "0 6e ye p?]dev nanov iroiel, 379, B., C.

:

ovd'

,

av rivog eh] nanov ’AJTION. ovk apa uavrcov ye

acri-

ov to ayaOov, aXXa rcbv pev ev exovrcov alriov tcov be ,

nancov avatnov. ovd apa 6 deog ’

cog oi

noXXol Xeyovoiv

alriog , iroXXcbv 6e

uancov rjplv

nanbv here

all

elrj

’AJTI02,

dAA’ oXiycov pev rolg avOpamocg

avalnog

noXi)

yap eXdrrco rayaQa

But he doeth nothing

tgjv

evil (evidently taking

in the sense of physical evil), nor could

the cause of anything evil.

author of

IIANTI2N av

The Good

he be

cannot, then, be the

things, but only of those that are good, while

God cannot, therefore, many say, but only of few things is he the cause to men, &c .,for our good things He does are much fewer in number than our evil things .” he

is

never the author of the bad.

be the author of all things, as the


PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE. speak of the

not, in this place of the Republic, directly

principle, but leaves

aXXa arra

n6)V

Of

to

be plainly inferred

for his

myth

,

we seek some

of the two casks

which

lie in

evil

6e na'deov

other cause, and

After this, he proceeds to censure

with good and the other with

filled

Tow

:

rd atria dXX' ov rov

del tyrelv

the evils, then, must

not the Deify.”

one

it

20G

Homer

the court of Jove,

evil,

from which he

dispenses to mortals severally as he will.*

When we

the impressive application of this great truth

which Achilles

makes

to the

the poet as far

case of Priam,

so,

cannot help recognising

more orthodox than the philosopher, and as

coming much nearer

was

we

read

to the true

He

teaching of revelation.

however, because, instead of yielding his mind

the perplexing

and insurmountable

difficulties

to

which attend

every merely speculative view of the matter, he simply gives utterance to one of those universal and unvarying sen-

timents of the

human

soul,

which could have come from no

other source than a tradition of the primeval

woes consequent upon

fall

and the

it.

Revelation removes this difficulty respecting the origin

by solving the mystery, and bringing it down to of our understandings, but by imposing silence

of evil, not the level

upon reason, in her attempt

to investigate a subject alto-

The Bible does not shrink from the solemn declaration, I form the light and I create the darkness ; I make peace and I create evil ; I the Lord gether beyond her powers.

do

ALL

these things

A oiol yap

and

re ttlOoi KaraKeiarai hv

dopov, ola dtdoGi, nantiv, erepog

d

A log

time,

it

sternly

ovdei,

de, eucov.

[lev k ’ apfii^ag 6oltj Zevg, k. t. X.

t Isaiah xlv., 7. ,

same

yet, at the

Iliad , xxiv., 527.

There can be no doubt, from the mention here

of the light and the darkness and from the connexion of this remark,

able declaration with the prophecy respecting Cyrus, that there

must

have been intended a special reference to the Zoroastrian or Persian doctrine.

S 2


210

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

forbids the impious thought, that the Divine

Essence can

sin. Thou art of purer eyes Evil shall not dwell with thee. The

hold any communication with than to behold iniquity. caviller

may

say that this

Gordian knot

;

and

is cutting,

according to

that,

es the apparent contradiction, that is

instead of untying the this, revelation

God

teach-

creates evil, and yet

not the author of sin, without which there could be no

evil.

It is

even

it

submit, or receive

all

ities,

and

total

There

so.

derstandings, but

is

is

a contradiction to our un-

a contradiction to which

we must

the contradictions, mysteries, absurd

darkness of atheism.

It

served, that this great difficulty lies, in

has been well ob-

some form,

very threshold of every system which has the least be styled religious, in order

to

must be received as matters of ing at war with reason,

is,

teach us

that,

at

the

title

to

some things

This, instead of be-

faith.

in fact, its highest dictate.

It

presents an incipient faith as the only condition on which

everything else are shut up to

reason

itself,

is to it

be understood, and declares that

we

by something higher and stronger than

even

the necessities of our

Let those who, in such a case as Bible as their only guide, devise,

if

moral being

this, will not

.

take the

they can, a better sys-

tem than the one which Plato and Zoroaster felt themselves compelled to adopt, although they must have been well aware of the difficulties, and war of ideas, or first princi-

which it involved them. They could not believe two Supremes on account of the logical contradiction,

ples, in

in

was inferior to, and capable of being controlled by, the Good (as they unquestionably did), the same old objection comes back with all The position to which our philosopher manifests its force. so strong a repugnance is only so changed as to make God and

yet, if they held that the evil soul

the permissive instead of the positive author of evil. ,

consolation in this

;

especially

when

Small

taken in connexion

with that melancholy declaration just quoted by us from the


TLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

211

second book of the Republic, that “ our good things are

much fewer It

in

number than our

evil things.”

should be remarked, however, that Plato’s evil princi-

ple differed, in

some most important

made known

spirit

The

to us in the Bible.

though recognised by him as a

much

respects, from the evil

'ipvxv, or soul,

former,

was

a moral or spiritual, as a physical power.

al-

not so It

was

the dark, foolish, disorderly, intractable, chaotic, evil spirit of matter the

(if

we may

use so paradoxical a term), on which

Good God was ever exerting an

influence, in bringing

from chaos into harmony, although that influence was

it

ever resisted, and sometimes exercised with great difficulty. It is

to this

he alludes

in the Timaeus, although in this lat-

work we find no trace of that animation and personality which is assigned to the evil principle in the tenth of The Laws. In the Timaeus, too, although possessed of motion ter

and a

sort of blind activity,

rather than an

navra

enemy :

it

is

a hinderance, or an obstacle,

BovXrjOeig

yap

(f)Xavpov 6s pr]6sv elvat , ovro)

,

$ ebg ayaOa psv

6

6f]

rtdv ooov rjv opa-

rov napaXadcov oi>x rfOvx^ v ciyov aXXa tuvovpevov* rrXrjppsXtig teal ardteredg, Kara 6vva\av slg rd^tv avro rjyaysv ,

etc

ara^iag. Qsjug yap our’

rrjg

T£2I 6pav aXXo TrXrjv

ing that *

On

all

this

rjv

ovr son T12I ’APIU’

to KAAAI2T0N — “For God, wish-

things should be good, and that there should be

and some few similar expressions

been grounded the argument

for the

common

held to the eternity of matter, and that

it

in the

Timaeus has

position, that Plato

possessed a principle cf

own, independent of the creating and constantly energizing power of the Deity. Should it be admitted that our philosopher is justly

its

chargeable with inconsistency,

assumed

in the

Laws

in

still

we

contend that the positions

respect to the inertness of matter, and the

superior antiquity of soul, should have the greater weight, inasmuch as the extracts from the Timaeus are merely incidental declarations,

whereas the latter form the very heart and substance of one of his most studied and elaborately-prepared arguments. See farther, on this subject,

Note

L.,

On

the

Ancient Doctrine

,

Dc

Nihilo Nihil jit.


PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

212

nothing bad, thus taking in hand the visible (or material),

never

at rest, but ever

moving about

in a strange and disor-

derly manner, as far as he could reduced

For

to order.

from disorder

not permitted (ov tiefug,

is

it

it

it is

morally

impossible) for the Best Being to do anything else than the

best�

So, also, in that trinity about which

Timceus, 30, A.

much has been

so

and which but

said,

faintly appears in

any parts of his authentic dialogues, the or third hypostasis, seems to be rather a benign physical influence,

make any approach

than to

which

is

institute

to that renovating

revealed in the Scriptures.

we

If

any comparison, we would say

resemblance

to the

nn

of Genesis,

i.,

2,

moral power

should dare to

that

it

has more

and Psalms,

civ.,

30, than to the Ttvevfia of Paul and John.

The

truth

on

is, that,

this great

and

the existence and origin of evil, the

have wavered, and ent times.

to

have had

Here he very

it

subject of

mind of Plato seems

to

different opinions at differ-

briefly, yet

his belief in a 'personal evil soul

difficult

.

very distinctly, avows

In the Republic he leaves

as a matter of inference, contenting himself with the dec-

laration, that

God

while, at the

same

is

the author of good, and of good only,

time,

he asserts

nates, at least in the present state.

that the evil predomi-

In the Timaeus,

it is

a

lower order of being, the dark and chaotic principle of matter,

possessing something of a positive character, yet

without anything psychical or animate in

its

nature.

still

In the

some of its features, allied to this, yet capable of being resolved into what modern theologians would call a mere permission of evil, as a negative principle, deriving its power from occasional Politicus, or Statesman, there is a view, in

withdrawals of the Divine presence and superintendence.

This we gather from

that

most singular myth,

in

which he

represents the universe as subject to alternate revolutions of immense length, during one of which good and perfection

predominate, while, in the other, although the good,

for a


PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

213

long time, exerts an influence, through habit, even after the

withdrawal of the Divine Presence, yet

evil

and disorder,

being introduced by degrees, increase more and more,

until,

would Old Chaos comes God once more resume the long-abandoned again, and total destruction

finally,

ensue, did not

helm.

a portion of Plato’s works on which but

It is

been bestowed, and

attention has

always having seemed interest,

we

to

give the passage to our readers at

universe

this

Again, he abandons

it

its

us to possess a deep theological

and in a very free version guides

little

consequence of

yet, in

:

“

God

and turns

(fvyiTodrjyel), to itself,

when

tined times have received their full

some

length,

himself, at one time, it

the periods of

complement

;

round. its

des-

when, be-

wisdom implanted in it from the beginning, it commences of

ing animate, and having had

him who harmonized it at its own accord to move in a contrary tendency cessity of

to a retrograde

and

;

this

motion arises from an innate ne-

For

nature.

its

direction

to

be ever in the same relations

[nard ravra ), and uniform, and the same, pertains alone those things which are most divine ter

has no share in this dignity.

the heavens or the universe

taken of

generated

many it

;

this account,

but the nature of mat-

What we name,

ovpavov (

real

therefore,

nooyov), hath par-

blessed things or qualities from him

has communion with

still, it it

;

is

impossible that

to

it

who

matter, and, on

should be altogether

exempt from change, although, as far as it is capable, it moves on in one regular course, in the same and according It is in this way that it gets this to the same relations. property of unrolling, or rolling back, consisting, at the slightest conceivable change or parallax of

its

first,

in

previous

For anything always to turn itself is impossible, except for Him who is the supreme controller of all moving things but for this Being to act in a changeable manner,

motion.

;

or to turn things,

now

trary, is impossible

(

in this direction,

ov

fiefur, is

and now

in the con-

morally impossible ).

For


;

214 all

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

we

these reasons must

itself forever,

nor that

trary circuits.

it

say, that the world neither turns

rd g

eavrov

del, prjr'

its

j

vovvre eavrotg evavria Grpecpeiv avrov), said (and which, in at

one time,

period

it

is

;

but, as

the only supposition

fact, is

guided by a Divine cause

;

and then, again, that

ed so long, that even

it

many

cupied in the revolution.”

goes by

it

del 6 lt-

tied) (f>po-

has been left), that,

during which

receives again the acquired power of

it

immortality not innate, but imparted to

gus

avrov orpe-

revolutions {prjp

av oXov imo deov orpecpeodai

evavrtag TrepLaycoyag, upp av 6vo rive

real

in con-

Neither must we suppose that two Gods * with

opposing purposes conduct (j)£tv

God

forever turned by

is

and an

life,

from the Demiur-

itself,

being abandon-

ten thousand years

may

Politicus, 269, P.

The myth then proceeds to The first, or that which riods.

describe the alternate peis

under the direct care of

the Deity, is represented as the golden age, during

time the earth produces

be oc-

all

which

things spontaneously, without

cultivation, and, in general, the order of all things is

death to * This

life.f

Good was

This was the reign of Saturn.

is in direct

opposition to the doctrine laid

from

down

in

The

Laws, where he maintains that there are at least two souls, one good and the other bad, occupied in the movements of the universe. Here, however, he seems to be very much averse to such an opinion, as inconsistent and unnatural. Some would say that this furnishes conclusive evidence that the one or the other, or both of If such an argument could be held would certainly be against the Politicus,

these dialogues, are spurious. legitimate, the conclusion

The Laws was followed by all the subsequent and regarded as an undoubted position of their master

since the doctrine of Platonists,

but, in truth, instead of invalidating either,

it

only show’s

how

a great

mind wavered on the deepest question f It might,

in philosophy and theology. however, seem, to some, to be rather a species of in-

verted death, as during this period the order of all things

commence a manhood returns to

is

so chan-

ged, that the old

process of return to the vigour of mid-

dle age,

youth, youth to boyhood, boyhood to

infancy, infancy to entire disappearance from the stage of

life.

In


215

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE. predominant, although there

is

no

little

confusion in the ac-

count which this splendid myth, in other respects so clear, gives of this period.

It at last,

however, comes

and when the complement of the times had been and the change must take place, then, Pilot letting go the helm retires

depvrjTpg

the

of

innate tendency are left to turn hack

and

,

the revolutions

filled up,

is said, the Divine

his secret place of obser-

to

,

,

vation and destiny

it

an end,

to

world

tots

:

tov rravTog 6

6i)

[isv

nv-

olov rrrjdakiGiv olanog acpepevog slg tt)v clvtov

,

aTTsoT?)

TT spLCJTTrjv

tov 6s

dij

uoopov rtdXtv dvsoTpscj)SV

At the same

Kipappsv7] ts uai ^vpcpVTog smOvp'ia 272, E. ,

time, the other

A aipovsg,

whom,

to

as presiding divinities,

had been alSupreme Ruler, hear the sigrespective provinces. Then com-

or angels,* -the various parts of the universe lotted in subordination to the

and

nal,

retire

from their

mences the predominance of works, gives signs of wo. motion

(

osiopbg TTohvg)

doned world.

Nature, through

evil.

First, a strange

is

all

her

tremour or com-

every part of the aban-

felt in

After a while, however, to employ Plato’s

imagery, the vessel ceases from the tumultuous surging

which

at first ensues,

new

into the

and enjoying a calm, gets

course in which

The world goes on

for a

is

it

season with some degree of regu-

consequence of influences being yet exerted by

larity, in

those laws and principles to which in that previous state continuation of the

come

to

earth

:

when

it

was

slg

ek,

had been accustomed

directly under the Divine

same wild and strange

fancy, the dead are said

rtiv TETETievTrjtiOTov av, kel/j,£v(*)v 6e ev

Tavavrca

We

rf/g ysvicrEog.

ry

rpoTrrj

yy

}

tt a?uv

ekel %vvig-

ovvavanvK?iOVfj,Evrjg

can hardly help thinking that

in this

myth may be traced the rudiments of an ancient doctrine

of a resurrection.

enough, and yet so

sometimes *

it

out of their graves, and thus to be born again from the

rafjLEVovg Kal avafiiooicopEVOvg, ETTEodaL

singular

at length

destined to proceed.

The general idea intended by much confusion rests upon the

is difficult to

Plato

is

clear

details, that

it

decide to which period they in fact belong.

See Note XXXIV., on

the Platonic Doctrine of the

Animation of

,


;

216

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.

care. #

By

slow degrees the former motion, with the order

and harmony by which until,

it

was accompanied, is diminished, it makes a transi-

having passed the minimum point,

tion to the contrary direction with a constantly accelerated

momentum. then that the greatest deteriorations and corruptions

It is

take place

;

of the

first,

world, and, finally, of the

animal

vegetable, next, of the

human

race, until here and there

The

a small and wretched remnant alone survive.

old har-

mony, the remembrance of which had not before been entirely quenched, of nature are

now

is

The former laws when on the very

utterly extinct.

reversed, until, finally,

all

verge of utter ruin

—tot’

avrov ev dno-

o Beog, naOopCov

TjSrj

imo rapa)(f\g btaXvOelg elg rov rrjg avopotorprog auetpov ovra rorrov dv'qj ttclXlv eepedpog avrov rcbv nrjdaXiojv ytyvopevog ra voorj-

otatg bvra, KTjdopevog Iva p?) ^Bipaodelg

,

oavra teal XvOevra orpBifjag Koopel re varov avrov nal ayrjpG) anspya^eraL

,

God, beholding

and being concerned,

in great extremity,

whelmed

enavopOtiv, aOa-

teal

in disorder

lest,

and utterly dissolved,

it

being over-

should plunge

it

again into the limitless, formless region of dissimilitude and chaos, once more seats himself at the helm

had before returned

avrov

rrepiOJTcrjv),

ed parts rectifies

to his secret

and thus renders

the

Heavenly Bodies

tlic

Demons

it

,

its

weak and it

again in order,

immortal,” 273, D.

and Note LXVII., on

the Platonic Doctrine of

* Or, in the expressive language of the original,

dg dvvapiv

bering the teaching of

its

Phaeton striving

tions given

dissolv-

or Genii.

daxrjv anopvrjfiovEvuv

fable of

from which he

place of observation elg ri)v

and having arrested

in their course to ruin, arranges it,

(

him by

—“

Still,

ttjv

as well as

it

tov narpog could,

61-

remem-

The allusion seems to be to the remembe^and follow the direcwhen he so rashly undertook to drive

father.”

in vain to

his father,

the chariot of the Sun. t Lest it should

plunge again into

the limitless place of dissimilitude.

That is, back again to old chaos. The language strongly mind the JiriDl 2 n °f Genesis, i

.

ceJJ? fo


of avdynTj

We

,

or necessity.

217

find occasionally in Plato, especially in the Timaeus,

mention made of dvdynr] or necessity as some strong and apparently opposing power, on which the Divine energy ,

,

constantly exercised, not so

was

ing, as in controlling

much

and directing Thus,

of the Divine purposes.

it

to

in directly

overcom-

the accomplishment

in the Timaeus, 48, A.,

he

speaks of the generation of the world having proceeded

from the combined operation of vovg and avdynr] mind and To the former, however, he ascribes a species necessity. ,

of authority, yet of a persuasive rather than of a violent nature

:

6s avdyrcrjg dp^ovrog, rep rtdduv avrrjv rtiv

Nov

9

yeyvopevov ra nXelora enl to /3sXtigtov ayetv ravr'q 6i avdyurjg rjTTCjpevrjg vito iruOovg epeppovog, ovro) %vvioraro ,

rode to nav

— “ But, since

Mind

rules Necessity,

by per-

suading her to bring to the best results the most of things as they are generated

overcome by

;

thus, in this

way, through necessity

rational persuasion, this universe received

its

construction.”

By

dvdyfcrj, here, Plato

does not

mean

his evil soul , nei-

he generally intend any physical necessity

ther does

ari-

sing from motion as a property of matter (although he and the

Greek poets* do sometimes apply the term

style the

laws of nature, and

it

to

what we

has something of this aspect

in the present passage from the Timaeus), but rather a met-

aphysical or logical necessity, a necessity existing in the idea of a thing, in it

what

it

is

its

in its

of the mind, by

constituting cause , or that

Xoyog or notion

which

,

it

is

— in

compelled

which makes

short, a necessity to include certain

principia in the very definition of any existing or conceiv-

able thing; and hence

he employs

in respect to

it

such

terms as rcdOecv, and iretOovg epeppovog, words which would

have

little

or no

meaning as applied

to a purely physical

necessity. * As, for example, Euripides, Troades, 893 y

:

Zfik, elr avayurj tyvoeoQ elre vovq pporuv. ,

T


218

of

For example,

on necessity.

avdyicrj,

in the idea of matter, or rather body, im-

Hence,

penetrability necessarily enters.

impos-

also, the

two bodies should ever occupy the same space ; which we have shown (page 143) to be more of a logical sibility that

God cannot make

than a physical necessity. out this. that

no more irreverent thus

It is

God cannot make

any case go contrary

have

it

remain the same.

than to say

is

not body,

and yet

to the idea of anything,

Motion

is

not a necessary prop-

we

say this, we mean that there no law of our minds, as in the above cases, which com-

erty of matter is

to speak,

matter or body, which

or in

matter with-

and when

;

pels us to predicate

necessity (that

it

of matter.

a necessity in

is,

Other species of logical

of things ) are the Hence, the laws of motion, being

mathematical avdyuai.

the ideas

partly mathematical and partly physical, are necessary, so far as

they partake of the former character.

not ne-

It is

cessary that bodies should attract each other in the inverse ratio of the squares of their distances

dinance of God, cubes. tion as

it

would have been

When, however, a fact,

it

bers involved

had

it

been the

or-

in the ratio of their

moof num-

the Deity establishes such a

must conform

in,

:

to all the necessities

and which grow out

formula or statement of the law.

of,

the

first

simple

So, also, in morals, the

idea of good may, perhaps, necessarily include the contin-

gency of

evil

with misery.

;

sin

may

be necessarily associated, in idea,

In all such cases, Plato would speak of the

Deity not as violently overcoming necessity, but as ruling, directing, controlling

moral government,

it,

to bring about the

or, in

purposes of his

other words, using towards

kind of rational persuasion.�

it

“a


MOTION OF VOVg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. 219

XXXII. Platonic Analogy between the Motion that

Page

Line

34,

ofNovg and ^v%7] ana

of a Sphere, or of the Heavens. 5.

E

nal (popa vov Kivrjoei

l

pev

real

t-vpnaoa ovpavov bdog apa

rj

nepiepopa Kai Xoyiopolg opoiav

ex et Kai %vyyevtig epxsrai, k. t. A. “ If the whole and course of the heavens hath a nature similar to the

(pvotv

way

course, and period, and reasonings of mind, and proceeds in a kindred

soul

manner,

may compare piodog

Tdf

'ipvx'ijg,

with

this

which

aOavdrov

rr\g

we must

is

same

the

We

the expressions, nepiodog vov —

7T£-

occur so frequently in the Timaeus

ipv%$jg nepiodovg evedovv elg

nal anoppyrov owpa. there

certainly affirm that the best

evepyenda) takes care of the universe.”

[rrjv (

Timceus, 43, A.

So, also,

allusion in the expression,

rj

:

emppvrov 39, where

rijg

ptag nal

(ppompojrdrrjg KVK^rjoecog nepiodog.

After the description of the visible animal (£g3op oparov), or material universe in

world was

to reside,

which the new-created soul of the KivrjOiv yap anevetpev

he thus says

:

avTtp rrjv rov odparog pa’kiora oiKeiav, rcov ejira rr\v nepi

vovv nai

(ppovrjoiv

rep avrep

paXiora ovoav.

K ivelodai orpeepopevov tion of its

did drj

Kara ravra, ev

Kai ev avrep rtepiayayebv avro, enotrjoe kvkXco

own,

For he gave to it a peculiar moone of the seven which has

namely, that

mind and wisdom. Wherefore, guiding it so as to move always in the same relations, in the same place, and within itself, he made it Timceus 33, P. We have the same revolve in a circle.” idea a little farther on in this tenth book of The Laws, page 35, line 15 To Kara ravra diyrtov Kai ehoavreog Kai ev tgj avrep, Kai nepi ra avrd, Kai npog ra avrd Kai eva Xoyov

the nearest relation (or analogy) to

,

:

,

Kai ra%iv piav apepeo Kivelodai Xeyovreg, vovv, rrjv re ev kvi (pepopev7]v KivrjOiv, oepatpag evropvov aneiKaopeva <po -


— 220 MOTION OF vovg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. palg, ovtt

dv nore,

mind and motion

n. r. X.

—“

in one, &c.,

If

we

say

this,

namely, that

being both of them capable

of being likened to the revolutions of a sphere, do both of

them ever move Kara ravrd preserving the same ,

relations,

and

in a uniform manner, in the same, around the same,

according to one analogy and one order, stitute

we

should not

in-

an inferior or imperfect comparison.”

This was one of the favourite speculations of Plato, and is

kept prominently in view in the Timaeus

that,

without attending to

many passages

in that

cult dialogue.

He

it, it

;

so

much

so,

impossible to understand

is

most profound, yet strange and

diffi-

there describes the soul of the world as

being constituted of two essences

nard ravrd exovG^g ovoiag nal yiyvo\ievT]g pepiGrr\g

rrjg apep'iGrov

av

rr\g

rrepl

nal del

rd G&para

— the one conversant with eternal, un

changeable, and necessary truth, vorjGei pera Xoyov nepiXiyrrov styles

;

the other, with facts or phenomena, or, as he here

them

The Laws,

in

the second-working motions of

matter, physical laws, or second causes. these,

Corresponding

to

he frequently speaks of two periods, which, in very

strange phraseology, he describes as

nal rrjg rov erepov. circular motion

The

(<£ epopevrjv

first

rfjg

rj

he likens

ravrov

(f>vGeojg

to spherical or

ev evi), and finds

its

symbolical

expression in the steady, unvarying, and eternal revolution of the sphere of the fixed stars or highest heavens (wheth-

phenomenal or not makes, in this respect, no The other, which he elsewhere styles a bas-

er regarded as

difference).

tard reason (vodog XoytGpog ), is conceived as represented

by the

irregular, variant,

and sometimes retrograde motions

of the lower bodies, and especially of the terrestrial phe-

nomena.

Matter and the external world being in a con-

he regarded sensation, and that exercise of reason which takes sensation and phenomenal facts for its

tinual flux,

necessary hypotheses as partaking of ,

its

to

ever-flowing foundation. 43, B.

all

the instability of

See the Tim<zus,from 28,

A.,


MOTION OP vovg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. 221 There

many

are

parison to such a

Above

son.

mind as

some things

beauty,

its

to justify

it

satisfies the

itself,

oi perfection, unity,

form delights the eye, while

find the analogy

its

In the contemplation of

mind. still

more

striking.

If

and

;

soundest rea-

to the

may

be

immutability,

Complete both in sensible and

eternity.

com-

this

combining so much of

Plato’s,

other figures, the sphere, in

all

regarded as the symbol

and

which would suggest

and poetical with the philosophical

the imaginative

there are also

things

intellectual

idea perfectly

motion

its

we

regarded as repre-

senting the psychical self-energy of soul, or of God, sents a perfect resemblance in the fact, that

pre-

motion

it is

energy, without any change of the place which

it

it

oi

occupies

as a whole, or, in other words, combining simultaneously

and harmoniously the opposite phenomena of motion and rest

rest relative throughout, or

absolute in the centre, while yet

motion

is

describes

Auscult .,

By

taken as a whole, and rest it is

the source from

which

diffused outward through every part; as Aristotle it,

did Kcvelrac aal rjpepel ttgjc

crcpalpa.

rj

Physic

.

viii., 9.

more perfect analogy,

a higher and

may be

it

regard-

ed as representing the intellectual energy of vovg or reason, ,

when engaged in the Both may be perfectly of Plato

contemplation of immutable truth. described by those favourite terms

which occur so

often in the Phrndon, and that, too,

without being regarded as tropical in the one case more

The

than in the other.

everlasting,

unchanging motion of

the “ old rolling heavens,” like the perfection, uniformity,

and immutability of the eternal ideas, may also be said

to

del Kara ravra — (baavrcog — ev avrep — ra avra — npdg ra avra — eva Xoyov piav rd^iv e%ovoa. The be,

rep

Trepi

teal

argument here so

many

is,

points

that that motion of the heavens, whicl} in

is

analogous

the best soul, must have been

and the object of

its

to the intellectual its

direct

continual care.

T

2

and

first

When

energy of production,

stripped of

its


222 MOTION OF vovg COMPARED to that of a sphere. sublime imagery

(if

we may

so regard

it),

the sentiment

equivalent to that of the Timseus, already quoted

yap

ovpavog) naXXiorog rwv yeyovorov

(tcoopog

(deog) dptorog

rwv airlwv. Qepcg

apiorep dpav aXko

same

dialogue,

creation spiritual

by and

tion of the

pavov

f

:

ttXtjv

de odt’

rjv

to naXXiorov.

o

de

ovr eotl

rep

,

3

So, also, in the

he represents the soul of the world,

the “ Everlasting Father,” as

is

O pev

after its

commencing

its

rational life (eptypovog {3lov ) with the revoluf

heavens

:

H

de en peoov npog rov eop^arov ov-

TTavTT] dtaixXaneloa^ icvtcXcp re

avrov

e£coOev

irepma-

hv'ipaoa, avTTj re ev avrx\ orpecpopevri, delay ap%7]v rjp^aro

anavorov nal After this

rbv fvpnavra xpovov. follows that most sublime passage which sets ttpog

epcj)povog /3lov

forth the delight of the Eternal Generating Parent at be-

holding this glorious work of his hands, the e^wov oparov or visible universe, with

its

,

informing soul, living and mo-

ving on in the most perfect harmony, and the celestial revolutions taking place

with

all

the order and exactness of a

creation fresh from the hands of

its

Maker

at sight

;

of

which he is said to have admired, even with astonishment, this image of the eternal powers, and to have rejoiced in it 'Qg de tavrjOev re avro nal as exceedingly fair and good £(x)V evevorjoe rwv aidiwv dewv yeyovog ayaXpa O PEN:

r

NH2A2

PTATHP,

TjydoOrj re nal evcppavOeig ert 6?) pa)l-

Xov opocov npog ro napadecypa enevoTjoev direpydoaoQai.

On

reading this passage, one can hardly help feeling that

some

of the Christian fathers

Plato, in his travels,

so strongly does

31 it

:

And God

it

had had access

call to

this

may we

mind the

right in supposing that to the

books of Moses

declaration, Genesis,

Perhaps in

;

i.,

made and behold some such view as.

looked upon all which he had

was good very good. ,

were

,

,

take that remarkable expression of Aristotle,

wg epwpevov, on which we have remarked, page 194. If there were any proof that he held to Plato’s soul of the world, we might, with Cudworth, suppose him to Kivel de


.

MOTION OF VOVg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. 223 have meant that ens, not

by a

The

Eternal Novg turned round the heav-

upon them, but by

direct action

some by which

virtue of

sympathizing attraction of a pervading plastic soul

were regulated. we may compare what is said by Proclus commentary on the Timssus 6 xpovog did tt)v npog

their motions

On

this subject

in his

:

rov alcbva

piprjaiv nvnXeloQai feyerai, (bg teal o ovpavbg

did rrjv irpbg rbv

reason of

its

N ovv

fiiprjoiv cr<paip(boOai

move

imitation of eternity, is said to

heaven, on account of

cle, as the

—“ Time, by in a cir-

imitation of mind,

its

is

moves in a sphere.”* In this he is commenting on the same analogy presented by Plato, Timceus 37, P., where he tells us that as the visible rolling heavens correspond to that soul of the world of which it is the outward ehccbv, or image, so is time an image of eternity. As spherical, or

,

the revolving mirror seems to set in motion the heavens, the earth, the trees,

and

all

the objects of the really

immove-

able landscape, so time is a revolving image or reflection of

the fixed eternal state, and so also the visible

moving heav-

ens are the sensible and temporal representative of the Eternal 7]oai ,

Mind

:

E luova

d’

emvoel

riva altivog

tavrjrrjv

rroi«‘

nai diatcoayibv d\ia ovpavov , noiel, pievovrog ahbvog 9

ev evt, (car apiOpov iovoav aiibviov einbva tovtov ov

Xpovov (bvopatcapev —

,

He

thought

to

make

6i]

a moving image

of th q fixed eternity; and as he arranged the heavens, eternity itself remaining forever in unity (that

is,

without suc-

he made an image of eternity to proceed by numsame which we call time.” In the same way, while the Eternal Mind or Reason remains in everlasting O

cession), ber, the

unity

(

ev kvi ), the visible rolling universe, proceeding by

number,

may

be regarded as

its

temporal and moving im-

* This comparison of mind to a sphere

cient Egyptian notion

God

sitting

like the

upon the

;

as Iamblichus

lote-tree,

motion of intellect

because

seems

tells its

to

have been an an-

us that they pictured

leaves and fruit are round


224 age

MOTIONS OF THE EVIL SOUL IRREGULAR. :

rov aloviov nal ev evi pe-

elucbv xpovLnrj uai mvr\Tr\

vovrog

N ov.

From some such

idea as this

came probably

the Latin scholastic term iini-versum, involving the ideas

of totality and unity, of motion in every part, and yet rest

and as a whole.

in the centre

So, in another place, speaky

ing of the motion of the stars, Plato says, boa dt ovpavov

opoiorarov

nopevopeva, tva rod’

NOHTI2I

TTpdg r fjv

(jcbcp

rep reXecorarcp,

rj

nal

diauoviag piprjoiv (bvoecjg

rrjg

Timceus 39, E. ,

XXXIII. The Motions of the Evil Soul Irregular and Disorderly. The nearer an Approach to the Pure Reason the more of FixAtheistic Objection from the Unedness and Uniformity. varying Regularity of the Heavens ; from whence was in,

ferred

Absence of Will and Reason

the

Page

0 vuovv av

36, Line 4.

.

ye pTjdenore (boavrug,

rj

Kara rd avrd, prjde ev ravrep pife ev tlvi Xoycp As uniform, reg/dvrjoig, avolag av andorjg etrj %vyyevrjg urjde

.

.

,

.

.

ular,

immutable, spherical motion,

and wisdom, so the opposite of short distance back,

rat)

is

it

all

pavuccbg uai ardurcog ep%e-

is said,

allied to that error, folly,

Plato’s view, evil soul.

were the chief

How

akin to mind, truth,

is

these (that of which, a

and disorder, which,

in

characteristics of the dark and

admirably does he, in the Phaedon, teach

same doctrine in respect to the human spirit, although somewhat different language, and with different imagery.

this

in

How

strikingly does

ing like a drunken

he describe

it

as reeling and stagger-

man (fXavopevr]

uai raparropevrj

/cat

lAtyyicboa tbonep peOvovoa) while occupied solely with the

animal

life

of the visible world

;

until

it

withdraws from the

turbulence of sense, and becomes assimilated (rep deico,

dOavarcp

,

teal

vorjrcp , uai povoetdei teal

teal

ddiaXvrcp) to the


HEAVEN, A STATE OF ETERNAL REST.

225

Divine, the immortal, the intelligible, the moniform, the indissoluble, the del d)oavru)g nal or, in

Kara ravra iftovn eavrco

;

other words, that state of everlasting energy yet ever,

lasting rest , of ever-active contemplation, yet eternal quiet-

ism,

In

which

reserved for the just in the spiritual world.

Plato most certainly agrees with the Scriptures.

this,

He

is

differs,

however, from no small portion of the modern

Christian Church, with

whom

it

a favourite theory, that

is

the future condition of the saved soul will present a scene

of activity in almost every respect similar to the present,

and who would transfer all

to the

the action, and even

lower world.

One

all

heavenly

state all the bustle,

the physical science of this

of our most popular religious writers

indulges, at great length, in a consideration of the superior

advantages which the celestial world will present for the study of the sciences of astronomy and trigonometry

though the healed

spirit

could find

its

those pursuits that even here had failed to yield

and permanent satisfaction. carry

all

state of

as

it

any

solid

This modern doctrine would

the mutations of sense into ihdX fixed and eternal

which time

however, find

The

;

everlasting rest in

ideas

it

is

any more than

in the Scriptures

which

We

but the moving image.

cannot,

in Plato.

revelation most prominently presents of

the heavenly world, and which,

we

also think,

must be most

precious to the truly pious soul, are those of repose from the agitations of the present scene of probation

;

of assu-

rance, of light, of absolute certainty or freedom from doubt, of eternal rest

;

and yet

all this in

all

perfect consistency

with the most intense moral emotion and the most energetic contemplation of fixed and everlasting truth.

We

may

be-

lieve in a progress of the soul, but in a very different sense

from that in which the doctrine

which holds out an tion

of outward

is

commonly

ever-restless, never-satisfied

knowledge, as the

throughout eternity

taught, and

;

a progress

spirit’s

which seems

accumula-

employment to necessitate


226

CONSTANCY

and eternal imperfection, and

eternal doubt all,

THE CELESTIAL MOTIONS,

IN

no real advance

is

in

which,

after

ever made, because the position of

the soul in regard to the highest truths remains as unchan-

ged as

We

present flowing world.

in the

find but

little, if

any, trace of this doctrine of progress in the Scriptures.

Revelation seems rather to intimate that, instead of this

moving on

eternal

in the acquisitions of science, the per-

fection of the soul will rather consist in the beatific vis-

ion of those fixed, established truths, in the

scheme

which are fundamental

of our redemption, and in the swelling moral

emotions of the heavenly ayamj

mere yvchaig holds only the

— that

relation

which all of a means which is to charity to

vanish away, and to be regarded as naught

end

when

great

its

Nothing seems more clearly

shall be accomplished.

taught in the Bible than that one of the essential elements of the eeonian state

is

fixedness and certainty.

Now we

see through a glass darkly, but then face to face.” In the Divine Soul these two apparently opposite ideas of repose and energy meet in their highest perfection

whatever to’s

may

;

and

be thought of the philosophical truth of Pla-

comparison,

it

must certainly be admitted that there

is

a sublime, and even an almost divine beauty in thus taking

Mind

as the symbol of the Eternal

the steady revolution of

the “ old rolling heavens,” ever presenting to us the images of power, of calm yet resistless motion, of an ever-wakeful, ever- energizing Providence,

and of everlasting

Plato, in the Epinomis, or

Laws, adverts

draw an the

to

a very

common

atheistic objection

celestial

courses.

Appendix

to his

prejudice,

rest.

dialogue on

which would

from the unvarying regularity of

It

should be proof to men,” he

says, “ that the revolutions of the heavenly bodies are un-

der the direction of reason, because they ever do the same,

even those things which had been planned and counselled ages beyond our conception. Yet the many think differently,

and

infer,

from the fixedness and uniformity of their mo-


NO PROOF OF THE ABSENCE OF WILL AND REASON. 227 tions, that

they have not soul

that the

human

serve in

it

is

and so they come

;

because

we

because

it

is

And

believe that there

is

ob~

to

be

destitute of reason,

ever abides in the same fixed courses

fievov kv ralg avralg (popalg.

should

seem

variant and irregular motions (which

the result of will), but that the divine it

to think

and animated, because they

rational

:

citppov dig

yet on this very account

a rational nature in the stars,

ever doeth the same, and in the same manner,

and preserving the same relations to icarti ravra ual Epinomis 982, D., E. (baavTG)g ual ra avrd tt parrel del. In this passage, of which we have given a very free ver:

1

'

,

sion,

he seems

to

be aiming to show that the stars them-

selves are animated, yet

still

the argument

of that particular hypothesis.

is

independent

equally valid, whether

It is

they are regarded as under the control of the Supreme or subordinate intelligences

;

and the remarks apply with

we have

their force to the position

in hand,

all

namely, that

soul and reason must be steady, uniform, and immutable, in

proportion as they are above the turbulence and irregularities of the sensible

world

;

and that

hostile to the doctrine of a minute is

absolutely essential to

beautiful

its

instead of being-

this,

and special providence, This sublime and

perfection.

view of the everlasting constancy of the heavenly

motions, as representative of the calmness, immutability,

and absolute certainty in the operations of that Divine Will which

is

ever one with the Divine

Reason

,

thus admirably

is

presented by Balbus the Stoic, in Cicero’s second book

Natura Deorum, sec. 22

:

Nulla igitur in

caelo

nec temeritas nec erratio nec varietas inest nis

;

contraque

ORDO, VERITAS, RATIO, CONSTANTLY

que his vacant ementita terras, infra

et falsa

plenaque

lunam, quae omnium ultima

erroris, est,

De

nec fortuna

om

Quae-

ea circum

in terrisque

versantur.

In the Timaeus, Plato gives us a most vivid picture of the converse of this truth, namely, the turbulence and rest-


;

228

STRANGE COMPARISON FROM THE TIMiEUS.

lessness of the soul under the overpowering influence of

We

the world of sense and matter.

or sons of God,

refer to that remark-

which he represents the

able passage in

inferior divinities,

introducing into the ever-flowing mate-

first

human

rial

universe those newly-formed

just

been generated from the anima mundi

which had rather, some

spirits if,

parts of the description do not better apply to the infant soul

of the world itself

K al

:

6

psv

drj

(6 atdcog

TrdvTa dtara^ag epevev ev rep eavrov rcaideg T7jv

tov narpdg

varov dpxr\v dvrjrov

nar^p) ravra

pivovrog

7]Qei.

6e, oi

add

rdigiv vorjoavreg , teal Xafiovreg

£d)ov,

.

.

.

rag

rrjg

aOavarov 'ipvxw

nepcodovg evedovv elg enLppvrov otipa nai dTroppvrov “

And he

(the Eternal Father)

things, abode in his

having arranged

accustomed place

-

(or

mode

all

these

of being),

hut the sons, having observed the method of the Father,

and having taken the immortal principle of the mortal

ani-

mal, bound the periods of the immortal spirit into the inflowing and outflowing body.”

This world

Timeeus 42, P. ,

of sense he compares to an ever-moving river,

or, rather, to

a wild and stormy torrent {naratiXv^ov nai anoppeov nvpa),

ever ebbing and rising, agitated by tempestuous winds

(flaXrj

nvEvparcJV vrf aspog (pepopevcov), constantly surging, and bearing about with

commence upon

all

violence the young spirit

ever-restless billows the

its

doomed

to

morning of an

eternal existence.

In this condition, while the infant soul

is

the almost pass-

ive subject of impressions, which, through this sea of matter,

invade

it

from without,

it

is

tossed about

— tots

pev

evavriag (popag tote nkayiag, tote vnriag aXoycog, dran,

T(og — “ sometimes liquely,

now

erect,

ing upon his head Xr\v

pEV eul r r)g

seeing

all

the

,

in

an adverse direction, sometimes ob-

now (

supine, and, again, like one stand-

olov orav rig imriog EpEioag rrjv nE(pa-

yrjg ,

rovg 6e nodag irpoc^aXdv

phenomena

dvo)),

and

of nature strangely inverted, with-

out reason and without order

;

until (as is the case with


X

ANIMATION OF

HEAVENLY

TIIE

229

BODIES.

some), through, the exercise of the rational principle constantly gaining the victory,

and aided by right instruction

eav pev emXapbdvrjTai Tig

dpOfj rpocj>77 naidevcrsog .

quires calmness, abstraction, and stability

escaped from

this

most

fearful disorder,

;

it

ac-

and having thus

comes

at

length un-

der the abiding influence of immutable truth as exhibited in

which matter presents only the flowing

the eternal ideas of

The whole passage

and varying diagrams. insertion continuously,

We

is

and some parts are quite

would, however, earnestly recommend

the student, not only for

difficult.

perusal to

its

most sublime imagery, but also

its

human

for the profound philosophy of

tained beneath

too long for

nature which

is

See the Timceus, from page 42,

it.

con-

P., to

page 44, D.

XXXIV. Platonic Doctrine of the Animation of the Heaveiily Bodies .

Ancient Belief that each Nation had

its

own

'peculiar

Guardian Daemon or Genius.

Page rpa.

38,

The

Line

H/l tov

real oeXrjvrjv teal

ra

aWa

do-

next question, after deciding the nature of the

governing soul, ordinate (plav is

r/

6.

is, rj

tt

whether etovg),

it

is

one supreme, or many sub-

engaged

in these offices.

Here

another point in Plato’s theology which has given offence

some of his warmest admirers. It has also been the subby Warburton and others, who have been as far as possible removed from the Platonic spirit. They would charge our philosopher here with an absurd polytheism, in making each one of the heavenly to

ject of peculiar animadversion

bodies either a divinity in trol

itself, or, at least,

of a separate divinity.

nott believe in one

and creator of

all

Supreme

If

by

this is

Ineffable

under the con-

meant

that

he did

Power, the generator

other existences, whether divine (in the

U


ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.

230

Greek sense of deoi, as we have explained it, page 104) or human, the answer is found in places of his dialogues too numerous to mention and especially might we refer to the ;

remarkable passage

in the

TimaBus (41, A.), in which the

Eternal Parent thus addresses the inferior divinities to

whom

he had given being

Trarrjp

re epyo)v, k

.

t. X.

:

Oeot

fteCdv cjv eyd) drjptovpyog

His great object here

in opposition to the atheist, that soul, or tvxtj, guides the motions of the

is to

show,

instead of

heavenly bodies.

Indeed,

throughout the whole argument, he evidently regards the

being of a God, and of soul generally, distinct from, and not a result

of,

bodily organization, as facts which involve each

and which are shown by similar and equivalent

other,

He

proofs.

appears to have considered even a belief in

the real entity of the

human

soul as inseparable from an

acknowledgment of the Divine existence was, as

it

so that the one

were, the ground and guarantee of the other.

this respect, the liveth ,

;

and as

language of the Hebrew oath, “ as

In consequence, therefore, of his constant-

ly using these terms for each other,

when he speaks

we

cannot be certain,

of soul or souls as guiding the motions of

means that agency of the Supreme Soul,

the heavenly bodies, whether he direct

was delegated

In

Lord

thy soul liveth ,� expressed the true spirit of

his philosophy.

by the

the

to inferior spirits

;

this

or

was done

whether

it

and whether these dele-

gated conducting powers resided severally in the bodies as All these life, or were separate from them. which do not affect his main argument. Without making a division into those distinct hypostases which appear in the Timaeus, he here uses ipvxrj as a general col-

an animating are points

lective term for all that is immaterial, or, at least, as a

name

superhuman powers derived from, and dependent upon, him. This was enough for for the Deity,

and

all celestial

his argument, without

when

any

farther precision or explanation,

dealing with the atheist,

man, be they one or many.

or

who

denied

all

powers above


ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.

We

may

even go

still

231

and main-

farther in our apology,

he did hold that the heavenly bodies were ani-

tain, that if

mated, or that they were severally under the care of district spirits, there

rious error, even

The

self.

was, in the

latter

when viewed

opinion at least, no se-

in the light of revelation

it-

Bible not obscurely teaches that the personal

destinies of individual

men

are, in a

measure, under the

di-

Churches

rection and guardianship of supernatural beings.

are said to have their guardian angels, according to Reve-

which we prefer to take in this literal sense, rather than to adopt any other interpretation which has been

lations,

ii.,

1,

forced upon

in the

it

government.

controversy respecting ecclesiastical

The same

doctrine

is

pretty clearly intimated

in respect to nations, Daniel, x., 20, 21,

where Greece and

Persia are said each to have their invisible

whether of a good or of an

evil nature.

remarkable passage, Deuteronomy, xxxii.,

champion,

There 8,

also a

is

which,

if

taken

according to the Septuagint version, would directly estab-

same doctrine

lish the

nations

,

:

When

when he separated

the

the sons

Most High divided of Adam,

the

he appointed

hounds of the people according to the number of the children of Israel nsprp ?, as it is in the Hebrew, but, the

1

,

according

to the

dyyeX G)v deov

We

—

number of the angels of God uara aptOpov as it stands in the Greek of the Septuagint.

—

it certainly seems Greek version was more consonant with the context which follows, and which asserts that Israel is the

cannot account for the difference, but

as though the

Lord's peculiar inheritance in distinction from the other na,

tions,

who seem

to

have been

of other directing powers.

be remarked, to

is

left to

the subordinate care

This very passage,

too,

prove that Plato obtained his doctrine of the

from Moses.

vii.,

should xi.,

26,

A acpoveg

That such an idea prevailed among the

heathen nations, especially the Persians, Herodotus,

it

quoted by Eusebius, Frcep. Evang.,

53

:

rot Hepolda

is

evident from

ypv XeXoyxaoi.


;

232

:

ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.

The

Bible teaches us also that even the ordinary courses

of physical events are under the controlling agency of an-

He

gelic beings.

flaming fire renders

it.

maketh his angels winds his ministers a ,

as the author of the Epistle to the

Science, with

modern

all its

firm nothing in opposition to this.

It is

Hebrews

boasting, can af-

a view

which

in-

terferes not at all with the regularity

and the apparent laws

we

have seen, the Bible

of physical phenomena, and, as quite plainly reveals

Nay, more, may there not be

it.

found some countenance there to this very doctrine of Plato

and churches, and nations, and every

If individuals,

?

department in nature, have their presiding invisible powers,

why

not the heavenly bodies

sun, of the

writers

powers,

when they spoke

mean only

most sublime

it

of the hosts of heaven, and used

agencies

to refer

but

;

it is

this is not

it

to physical rather than

a serious question, whether

or

when we

earth, the stars of the

Was was said, He

contained in the Hebrew.

simply a sublime personification,

when

number ; he

bringetli out their host by

name

Did the ancient

m'NDV Hi ri], Jehovah Tsehhaoth, or The Septuagint, by rendering it nvpioq

Lord of Hosts ? have seemed

much more than

?

physical instead of psychical

epithet,

6vvd[ie(ov,

to spiritual

not an angel of the

moon, and of each planet

Hebrew that

Why

?

it

calletli

them all by

are told that, at the creation of our

morning sang

of God shouted for joy

?\

ring this, extravagant as

We it

together,

and

all the sons

have no hesitation

may

in prefer-

appear, to that modern ex-

treme, which would leave such an immense, unanimated solitude

between man and the Deity, instead of

filling it up,

as the old Patristic theology did, with datgovec, angels, thrones, dominions, principalities, and

powers

With helmed Cherubim,

And sworded Seraphim, and

all that

array of invisible beings,

* Isaiah,

xl.,

26

.

t

whose existence the

dob, xxxviii.,

7.


ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY Bible does

seem

to take for granted,

mer times, may have carried it to Surely we may still maintain any the

believe in

although some, in

the precious Protestant

least species of religious adoration,

many an

for-

an extravagant extent.

Supreme Lord of Hosts

doctrine, that no one but the titled to

233

liODIES.

en-

is

and yet

order of being, which, although of far

higher rank, yet constitute, with man, an immense brother-

hood of created intelligences,

all

intended for the manifest-

Him, by whom, and for whom, all things were created, whether visible or invisible, whether There is some reason to in the earth or in the heavens. ation of the glory of

fear that Protestants,

have gone too

under the guise of a hyperspirituality,

what

far in the opposite direction, to

ly a materializing

cover a disposition to banish in our minds spiritual agencies, and,

is real-

When we

and physical hypothesis.

all

dis-

intermediate

by magnifying natural causes,

to

place the Deity at the most remote distance possible,

does really seem as though,

if

we

could or durst,

it

we would

dispense with his presence also in the regulation of the universe.

In

all

ages, a tendency to that sadduceeism

which barely saves the doctrine of the anothe'r state, has

soul’s existence in

been held, and justly held,

kin to infidelity, if not to downright atheism. believe too

much on

this subject

than too

cannot agree, with Plato, that there superintendence assigned

to

each

is

be near of

to

Far better even

little,

if

to

we

a presiding spiritual

celestial body.

XXXV. Three Hypotheses in respect

to the

Animation of the Heavenly

Bodies.

Page r G),

39,

Line

n. r. A.

We

7.

'Qg

rj

kvovoa evrog

tgj Tcepu^spel rov-

have here three hypotheses.

would make the sun

itself

an animated being

U

2

;

The

first

the second


ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.

234

would regard or

it

as under the direction of an external angel,

A ai[iG)v, having

making use of a represent

motion

the third would

;

as under the care of a pure, unimbodied spirit

it

or intellect

a material yet highly arthereal body, and

sort of impulsive

ocj^arog ovoa ), either the Universal Nu-

('ipiXrj

men, or some delegated power specially assigned

by the

to that

meant only a particular exercise of the energy of the Universal Soul (which view is perfectly If

office.

last is

consistent with his present argument against the atheist,

although

it

does not fully agree with some things he says

elsewhere), there would be no need of any defence of Plato

which we have

against the charges to

ond, however, as

we

may

have seen,

The

liever in the Christian revelation.

mandi applied

doctrine of the anima the universe. it,

It

may

sec-

first

is

only the

to particular parts of

be maintained, as Plato did maintain

in perfect consistency with a pure theism, or a recogni-

tion of

an Eternal

Spirit, not

but regarded, also, as is

The

referred.

be held by a firm be-

most abundant

we have

its

only above the anima mandi ,

There

creator and constant guide.

proof of this in the Timaeus, and, indeed,

every reason

to believe that Plato

meant no more

by his soul of the world, whether in respect to the universe or to particular parts, than Cudworth intends by his famous Plastic Nature, to which, in to ascribe a species of

some

places,

he seems inclined

obscure animate existence.*

In fact,

some such hypothesis must be adopted by those who would

make

nature a distinct thing from the Deity, or a subordi-

nate cause under the Divine reason and

wisdom

as

all

must do who are averse to the doctrine that God does things by his own immediate agency, or the systematic

all

tervention of angelic or spiritual beings.

from one or the other of these cult qualities,

apology

for

which

is

is in

The

;

in-

only escape

that philosophy of oc-

a mere play upon words, a mere

ignorance, and which,

Cudworth's Intellectual System vol. ,

when i.,

carried to

its

page 346, Engl. ed.

le-


f

ypg &X rHJLa gitimate results,

hypotheses

all

The is

is,

;

;

or yehiculum mundi.

>

235

as vve have seen, the most favourable of

atheism.

to

independent, unoriginated essence ( avroOeog ), which

above nature and above the soul of the world

is called, in

,

the Timaeus, ’AtStog Harrjp and represented as the genera,

and even of No£f.

tor of

Elsewhere, and especially

him To AyaOov ’

in the Republic, Plato is fond of styling

,

The Good.

XXXYI.

1%

”C)xrj[ia, or

Vehiculum Mundi.

Examination of a Re -

markable Passage from Euripides.

Page

39,

Line

17. ev

dppaocv e%ovoa

This

rjplv r\kiov.

cannot be rendered, having the sun in a chariot or vehicle

sense evidently requires that the sun

for the

garded as the vehiculum of the indwelling is equivalent to in loco

— ev appaoiv —

cog

itself

be re-

’Ev here

spirit.

dppara

By a similar phraseology, o^/m, vehiculum as in the

— in

loco

currus—for a vehicle*

the body

elsewhere styled

Timaeus,

is

41, C.

:

eptibaGag

cog elg oxrjpa.

In that place, however,

Plato has reference, not to the animating souls of the heav-

enly bodies, but to

sown

human

souls, placed, or, as

there previous to their

he says,

more intimate connexion with

matter in their earthly existence, that they might learn those universal truths

which were

to

be recalled to recollection

in their subsequent stage of being.

In the Troades of Euripides the a

manner

same term

is

applied, in

directly the opposite of this, to signify, not the

corporeal vehiculum but the animating,

moving power.

account of

we

,

in full,

deep, intrinsic interest,

and dwell upon

* So, also, t

its

it

at

some length

Laws xi., 913, C. kv Compare Origen contra Celsum, :

,

On

give the passage

:

ovcrta nenTfjoOaL. ii.,

60.

From

this

came those

doctrines which Origen held respecting the pre-existence of souls.


— 236

0R vehiculum mundi.

yrjg bx^j(ia, T

oxqiia,

£2 yrjg

"OoTig nor’

el

team

yfjg

ex^v edpav

cv dvaroTraGTog eldevcu

,

Zn;f, elf avdynr) (pvaeog, tire vovg (Sportiv^ UpOG7]v^dp,7]v Ge

B aevov

ndvra yap

di

tajjotyov

tceTievdov , rcara Alktjv to, fivijr* uyeig.

0 Thou who guid’st the rolling of the earth, And o’er it hast thy throne, whoe’er thou art, Most difficult to know the far-famed Jove,

Or nature’s law, 1

or reason, such as man’s

thee adore, that, in a noiseless path,

Thy

steady hand with justice

all

things rules.

Euripides

We

know which

do not

to

,

Troades, 890.

admire most, the philosophy

The

or the poetical beauty of these remarkable lines.

pression,

from

what Plato

styles

though pervading, tinct

here

from is

relieves them, in our view,

These words,

'ipvx'^l

is also, at

vnspicoofifa

the

a soul which, al-

;

same time, above and diswhich it moves for yrj ,

the world or universe

,

;

evidently to be taken in this large sense.

line, also,

far

exuv edpav,

the charge of pantheism.

connexion in which they appear, are only applicable

in the to

kccttl yr\g

all liability to

ex-

can only be referred

to a

The

last

moral power, not only

above pantheism, but also that view which delights

contemplating a

God

of

mere

intelligence.

It

special moral providence, looking to ends and varied events, yet at the

same time

general, administered

broken and harmonious laws, pervading

all

in

indicates a

by

by un-

nature, silent in

their operation, traversing a noiseless path (dp d'lpocjyov (3al-

moving power of earth ( mun influencing and controlling all things, and di veliiculum ) yet in its secret springs unsearchable ( dvaronaorog etdevcov ueXevQov)

;

the universal

;

vat)

;

ruling in the earthquake, the

fire,

and the tempest,

yet, in itself, not the earthquake, nor the storm, but the still

small voice of mind, specially and for special ends controlling matter.

So Plutarch, writing of the Divine Logos, or Reason,

in


237

SECOND TART, DOCTRINE OF PROVIDENCE.

the government of the world, uses almost the very woids of

he did not rather intend a quotation (ptvvrjg yap O 0EIO2 AOrOS dnpooderjg eon nal dd axjjo^ov f3alEuripides,

if

:

f

rd

vg)v keXevOov

We

Iside et Osiri.

Seneca, Nat. Q.,

Plutarch

dyEi rcara 61ktjv.

i9 vrprd

may compare with Deum ilium maximum 14 this a

lib. ii.,

,

De

passage from

:

poten-

tissimumque, qui ipse vehit omnia (rnundi vehiculum ), qui ubique et omnibus prsesto

est.

Compare,

also, a

of one of the lost tragedies of Euripides, as

Eusebius, Proep.

Evang

.,

xiii.,

page 681

it is

passage

quoted by

:

tov avro^vfj, tov kv aWeptcp

P v/j,6(p

ndvrcov Qvolv e/mheZavO’

.

Thou self-sprung Being that dost all And in thine arms heaven’s whirling

The

infold

,

fabric hold.

which we commenting, may have been more ancient

idea expressed by such phrases as those on

have been just

than Plato or Euripides, and

may have

given rise to the

mythological representation of the chariot and horses of the sun.

It is

sentation

We

more

may

have also

ison,

likely,

however, that the poetical repre-

have^suggested the language here employed. in the Phsedrus (246, A.) this

by which man,

in his

compound

same compar-

being, is likened to a

chariot and horses, with their charioteer, representing re-

spectively his animal and his rational nature.

XXXVII. Second Grand Division of Special Providence.

Page I

ur)

42,

Line

(ppovrl^Eiv

tie,

the

Argument.

Doctrine of a

Mistake of Cudworth.

Tov 6e rjyovpEvov p.ev deovg Eivai r. X. We come now to the second

10. k.

,

grand division of the subject, and one, the treatment of

which

will probably

be more satisfactory

to the reader, pre


— 238

SECOND PART, DOCTRINE OF PROVIDENCE.

senting, as

it

does, less of subtle physico-metaphysical dis-

more

cussion, and

The

Scriptures.

harmony with

that is in strictest

author

the

Holy

now to prove the doctrine of a those who speculatively admitted

is

special providence against

the existence of a Deity, and yet could not believe that he

concerned himself with the ordinary especially,

human

what seemed

Cud worth

sins.

to

afFairs of

them of so

little

human

life

;

consequence

asserts that “ Plato, in his tenth

book of Laws, professedly opposing the

and under-

atheists,

taking to prove the existence of a Deity, does, notwithstand-

ascend no higher than

ing,

Mundane

Soul, as the self-moving principle, and the

or proper cause of all the motion

diate

And

world.

This very learned

ly overlooked the

now

immein the

It is

but he

we

book, upon which

he could not have made so incorrect

which his previous arguyet has been the existence of such a

true, that all

ment has required as ;

is

God he there underman must have strange-

latter part of this

entering, or

an assertion.

Psyche

which

this (he says) is all the

takes to prove.”

are

Psyche, or Universal

to the

now advances

not only above self-motion,

or psychical power, to the second hypostasis of intelligence, or

Noi^

(as

it

may

be regarded

when viewed according

to

the statements and divisions of the Timaeus), but also to that

higher degree which

still

is

above mind or intelligence,

and which he elsewhere styles To ’A yaOov the idea,

all

moral attributes

justice

;

including, in

and severity, as well

as benevolence and compassion. It

is

of this higher degree, or hypostasis, as

may be

styled, that Plato, or

some

later

we

think

Platonist, thus

speaks, in that remarkable passage, contained in what styled the second epistle to Dionysius, 312, E.

paoiXea ixdvr

Trdvrcjv

>

sari, nai efcetvov evetca

enelvo clltlov diravrcvv rcov

devrepa nal rpirov ,

the

King of

all,

Trepl

KaX&v

ra rptra

:

is

Uept rov

navra

*

/cai

devrepov 6e nepl rd

—“ All things

and on his account are

it

all

things,

relate to

and he

is


;

GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS, ETC. 239 the cause of all things beautiful

;

but the second honours

pertain to the second, and the third to the third.�

words,

He

and the iravra )

is

the final or moral as ,

for

r

or psychical cause of

efficient ;

,

w ell

the manifestation of

In othei

as the designings

things

all

evena ov

(

whose moral glory

all

things are created, moved, and constantly governed.

Every reader must admit that the admirable arguments which follow in the remainder of the book are generally in strict accordance with the Holy Scriptures, and that Plato even reasons on this part of his subject in a more religious manner than many nominally Christian writers much of whose theology and science might fairly be ranked with the very atheism with which he is here contending. ;

XXXVIII. The Greek Words for Blessedness Happiness Fortune ,

Page

42,

Line

14.

akrfiua psv

de evdcupovi^opevcu, u. t. A.

povca do not refer simply ,

enjoyment

;

to a state of

evdacpcov, evdcu-

present pleasure or

and others were and the philosopher could not deny, that

etymological import, has a

sense derived to

it

E vdacpcov,

in its primitive,

much higher sense than this a when A aipcov remained un;

at that time,

significance as one of the Divine names,

and had not yet been corrupted Fortune which

fyc.

evdatpovegs do^atg

The words

wicked men are often happy.

its

ovtz

,

in that sense, the poets

for,

right in asserting,

impaired in

,

it

into that atheistic sense of

subsequently acquired in the natural de-

man and of language. From ev and A aipo)v, it would etymologically signify one who had the favour of Heaven and its purest meaning would be best expressed by our good old Saxon word blessed. It refers not simply generacy of

to a

man’s present

whole of

his being

state of feeling or

and his relation

enjoyment, but

to the

whole

;

to the

so that


:

240 GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS, ETC. one in the midst of the most acute pain, the flames, might be evdacficdv

ent enjoyment of

like the martyrs in

while another, in the pres-

;

the pleasures of sense, might be aQXc-

all

as Socrates, in the Gorgias, describes the

og

sensualist as bsivog

one would dare

alaxpog

teal

greatest abundance

“ even

if

also the

is

may

Gor-

desire.”

meaning of Solon

in that

most celebrated account which Herodotus gives of his terview with Croesus

any

they have in the

if

that their souls

all

This

E.

aOXiog, and asks

such Evdaiptovag, or blessed, eav

to call

d(pd6v cjg e%u(5LV cjv beovreu

gias, 494,

feat

of the

life

in-

although he sometimes uses oXdtog

;

instead of Ev6atp,G)v, out of accommodation to the language

of the sensual Phrygian. Plato himself clearly gives this as the radical idea of the

word, and seems evidently

eotlv

etymology when

to allude to its

"ANEY TE 0E£2N

he says, ov yap

prjnore rig evdatpedv

—“ Without the Gods no man can be called evdaifiuv,

blessed or ,

happy”

So, also, in the Timceus 90, D. ,

T

ET

:

AeZ

uaXa KEKoaprjpi’EYAAIMONA Etvai “ He must be blessed beyond all others who cultivates the divine, and who has ever in harmony within him the indwelling God.” The juxtaposition of terms here leaves no doubt that there was intended an allusion to the There is the radical sense and etymology of the word. same allusion in the Orestes of Euripides

61 depanevovra ro 'delov , exovra rs

vov rov

AA1MONA %vvouzov ev avrep

j

6ia(j)Ep6vTG)g

:

"O rav

6’

6

AAIMS2N

dpnel yap avrog *0

When God

A

T

EY

dtdti

GEOS,

t'l

del Q'iTujv

;

btyeXeZv ftelcdv.

his blessing grants,

what need of Euripides

These

lines are quoted

by

Nicomaclu,

ix., 9.

Even

us that happiness

(

,

Orestes 660. ,

Aristotle in the discussion of the

question, norEpov evdaipejv dErjaErat

tells

friends'?

friend above supplies the soul’s desire.

this cold

Evdaipovia )

(j)tXo)v

fj

prj

;

Ethic.

and passionless writer is

a divine thing ( delov


.

GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS,

241

BV<1,

t i), and without the favour of Heaven cannot grow on the

E

soil of earth:

pev ovv nai dXXo

l

tl detiv eotl dupTjpa

avOpdonoig, evXoyov nai T7\v evdacpoviav {tedodorov elvac

If,

therefore, there is

of the Gods,

Heaven’s

own

peculiar boon.”

lib.

i.,

8

cially to lib. x., 8,

Ethic.

;

Nicomach

Ethic.

For similar passages, the reader Eudern .,

the

is

gift

reasonable to suppose that happiness

is

it

any other thing which

lib. i., 9.

.,

referred to his Ethic.

is

Nicomach

is

12

lib. i.,

.,

;

and espe-

where, treating of evdaipovia in

other

its

aspect, as an active exercise of the soul, instead of simply

a state of well-being, he defines

energy — deop^nni)

evepyeia

— such

be a contemplative

to

it

as

we have

supposed

(page 225) to form the chief element in the bliss of the

heavenly world.

which, in his view, constitutes

It is this

the happiness of the Deity, and of that is

In proof of

nearest to the divine.

human

which

state

he asserts that no

it,

one of the inferior animals can ever be styled evdaipojv, because the term implies a state possible only in relation to a religious

and rational being, or one who could be sensible

of the blessedness of the Divine favour 7rag

6 /3log evdaipcov

*

rolg

d’

rt rrjg Totavrrjg evepyetag

ovdev evdaipovel

,

eireidi)

aaXkov VTxapXEL to as he says in

what

dvOpunoig

vTrapx^

*

T<5 pev

:

eft

rwr

yap

ooov opoccopa aXkiov feuam

<5’

ovdapov aocvcovel fteupLag

'deojpelv,

'deep

nai evdatpovelv

*

nai

gj

Wherefore,

follows, every such a one is fteoftXeo-

rarog, or most beloved of Heaven. visibly, in all these extracts,

mological idea of the term, as primitive Greek, and

how

It will

be seen

how

can be traced the radical, etyit

was

exhibited in the most

very similar

it

is to

the corre-

sponding one presented in the Bible, although the former

may er

not be taken in so elevated a sense, and perhaps nev-

comes up

fairly

to the full

be supposed

to

etymological import which

be contained in

The Scriptures speak of it as who enjoys the Divine favour

X

its

component

may

parts.

the blessedness of that rnan :

Blessed

is the

man

(or peo -


;

;

:

242 GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS, ETC. whose God

Lord

who dwell in thy house ; who remain in the secret place of the Most High who abide under the shadow of the Almighty. Thy favour is life, and thy loving kindness is better than life

pie)

is the

blessed are they

;

.

Ava6ai[io)v and dvodaifiovia as clearly express the oppo-

view, namely, not merely present misery, but the state

site

of one visited by the displeasure of Heaven.

It is

thus re-

peatedly used by CEdipus, in the Phcenissae of Euripides,

when lamenting

his wretched condition as one

pursued

from his earliest years by the wrath of the Gods, on account of his

own

the oracle

and his

sins

impious disobedience to

father’s

:

’APA2

napaTiabkv Aatov nal natal dovg.

ov yap

.

uvev etev

,

.

.

ftetiv rov, •

ravr’

kfiTJxavTjad/Ltrjv.

Tt dpdao) drjO 6 ’

AY2AAIMS2N

ky6. Phoenissce , 1626

In

its later

much

applications, evdaiiiovia loses

religious sense,

and degenerates

etymological

its

reference to the favour of an overruling divinity.

For a most

may

between

refer to Euripides,

Qvijtu)V

oUov

(5’

kmhpvivTog,

it

and evrvxrjg,

evdalficov

<pvoet'

’EYTYXE2TEP02

*

’EYAAIM&N

6’ civ

ov.

nature none of mortal race are blessed

When Than

The

In this

part, dal-

Medea, 1225

yap ovdelg karlv ’EYAAIM12N

aXkov yevotT av aXXog,

By

component

principal

striking illustration, however, of the rad-

ical primitive difference

Ave

its

of its old

synonyme of svrv-

into a

%ia, or good fortune, losing almost entirely

shares the corruption of

.

wealth flows

in,

one

man may

be more happy

others of his race, but none are blessed.

contrast

one by which very striking.

between it is

this beautiful

Greek word and the

generally rendered in our

The Saxon

luck, fortune, or chance

own

tongue

is

happiness is from hap, signifying

a sense to which the Greek, as

we


ARGUMENT FROM THE PROSPERITY OF THE WICKED. 243

The

have seen, subsequently degenerated.

true etymolo-

by Web-

gical meaning, therefore, of happy, is that given ster,

namely, u receiving good from something that comes

or by chance , that is, fortunate, or lucky” lexicographer says afterward, that “ he only can

us unexpectedly

The same

to

,

who

be called happy

enjoys the favour of

God

but this is

an idea which was subsequently ingrafted on the pagan root

The

by the Christian theology.

Saxon word

original

had nothing of the to delov or divine about

it.

XXXIX. Argument against Providence drawn from

Atheistic perity that

of

of

Page

the

Wicked.

Plato's

r

43, Line 3.

men growing

the very end of

H

teal

life,

old,

Language compared with

npog reXog toog avoalovg av-

who

culty set forth in the

you

continue unholy even to

— then are you disturbed

In what striking language

&c.

— “ When

leaving children and children’s chil-

dren in the highest honours sight,”

Pros-

the Scriptures.

Opbonovg optiv eXOovrag yrjpaiovg, k. t. A.

behold

the

Holy

is this

same

at the diffi-

Scriptures, not only as perplex-

ing the mass of mankind, but also as occasioning, at times,

even

acknowledged people of God. Compare the complaint of Asaph in the Ixxiii. Psalm But as for me, my feet were almost gone, my steps had wellnigh slipped. For I was envious at the foolish, when I saw painful doubts

to the

:

the prosperity

*

We

of the wicked.

Wherefore

prefer this rendering for the

to turn lack, as well as to turn

to,

his people backslide ;*

Hebrew 3^1, T

or return

the most usual sense in this conjugation.

;

as

;

oarry, as

in

which sense

it

may

would well correspond

used here by Plato.

may mean

although the latter

It

is

mean, they some wondrous

also

turn themselves with astonishment and perplexity, as to spectacle

it

to the

Greek ra -


:

:

244 ARGUMENT FROM THE PROSPERITY OF THE WICKED. and

they say

in the

Doth God know

,

Most High

And

?

is there

So, also, Job, with

?

blance to the passage before us

still

become old yea are mighty in power

The

sentiment

tiquity.

ous

,

It

when

may be

more resem-

Wherefore do

:

live ,

,

a providence

Job

?

wicked

the ,

xxi., 7.

frequently met with in classic an-

has formed the constant complaint of the

virtu-

desponding, and the standing objection of the

skeptic. As in Cicero, De Natura Deorum lib. iii., 33-36, where the doubting Cotta goes into a long enumeration of the virtuous men who had been neglected of Heaven, and of the impious who had been blessed, apparently, with the ,

highest prosperity.

Speaking of the tyrant Dionysius

(sec.

35), he says, Hunc igitur nec Olympius Jupiter fulmine percussit, nec iEsculapius misero diuturnoque morbo tabe-

scentem interemit. illatus

est

Atque

in suo lectulo mortuus, in rogo

eamque potestatem quam

;

ipse per scelus erat

nactus, quasi justam et legitimam, hereditatis loco, didit.

In the

same

32

strain, sec.

Dies

:

deficiat, si

numerare quibus bonis male evenerit, nec minus

morem

And

quibus improbis optime.

filio tra-

si

velim

comme-

then he proceeds

to

relate the cases of Marius, Cinna, Dionysius, together with

the saying of the snarling Diogenes respecting Harpalus

Diogenes quidem cynicus dicere temporibus

illis

prsedo in

solebat,

Pamphylia

Harpalum, qui

felix habebatur, contra

Deos testimonium dicere quod in ilia fortuna tam diu Cic ., De Nat. Deor ., iii., 34. ret. ,

Some

vive -

minds, otherwise serious and thoughtful, have been

almost driven to atheism by

it;

as is represented in those

desponding lines with which Claudian commences one of his

poems Saepe mihi dubiam traxit sententia mentem,

Curarent Superi terras, an nullus inesset Rector, et incerto fluerent mortalia casu.

Nam cum

dispositi quaesissem fcedera

mundi,

Praescriptosque mari fines, annisque meatus,

Et

lucis noctisque vires

:

tunc omnia rebar


the word

245

aTtodionofmeoficu.

Consilio firmata Dei

Sed cum

res

hominum tanta

caligine volvi

Aspicerem, laetosque diu florere nocentes, Vexarique pios rursus labefacta cadebat ,

Claudian. in Rufinum

lleligio.

But, while

moods,

it

it

,

i.,

12.

has disturbed the pious in their desponding

has formed the standing jest of the scoffer

the story of the atheist Diagoras, Cicero

37

ille

qui dicitur, atque ei

humana pictis, quam tas

tumque

quam

as in

Nat. Deor .,

At Diagoras quum Samothraciam venisset, Atheos

iii.,

:

De

,

;

quidam amicus, “ Tu, qui Deos pu-

nonne animadvertis, ex tot multi votis vim tempestatis effugerint

tabulis

negligere,

salvi pervenerint ?”

.Ita

fit,

inquit.

picti sunt qui naufragia fecerunt, in

in por-

enim nun-

Illi

marique perierunt.

So, also, that malignant buffoon Aristophanes puts a similar

profane jest in the mouth of the travestied Socrates Kal

rctig c5

pupe ov Kai Kpovtuv

ehrep fdaXhei rovg kmopnovg

ovds

K ?^euvvpov,

uXha tov avrov

,

o£cjv Kal (3£KKeoe?i7]V£,

n tig

ovde Qeupov

;

:

hvenpr\aev

ovxi

;

do' kniopKoi.

kciltol o<j)6dpa y’

ye veuv (daHei, Kal 'Zovviov aKpov ’A dqveov,

Kal rag dpvg rag peydTiag

*

tl

paOuv

;

ov yap

dpvg kvuopKel.

Nubes, 398.

Xenophon or Plato are entitled to the least credit, nothing could be more directly opposed to his real and most If either

cherished sentiments.

XL. The Singular Word

’ATTodcGTcofineofiai,

and

the

Remarkable

Use made of it by Plato.

Page Oat.

44, Line 9. ’AAA’ eav

This

is

Plato, in the

iuog

olov dTTodLOTrofinrjoaa-

a very peculiar and significant word, used by

few cases

in

which

it

occurs, to express the

strongest abhorrence, and generally employed in reference to

some wickedness of peculiar enormity.

X

2

It

signifies, ta


;

;

the word dnodionofmeo^ai.

246

avert the Divine wrath by expiatory sacrifices or religious

of the most solemn kind

rites

solemn religious procession

guage of a

later age,

it

.

from and, Aiog, and

Trop,nrj,

might be rendered,

to

since

exorcise

term also comes from another part of a similar cere-

this

mony, performed

for a similar purpose,

send away evil

We

,

.

may compare

namely,

with

noun, dirodioirogn^oeig, as used, Laws,

That passage

to avert , or

this the derivative

854, B., C.

lib. ix.,

deserving of attention, as being, in some

is

respects, one of the most deeply impressive, for

its

moral

The

bearings, of any to be found in the Platonic dialogues. subject

is

sacrilege,

and during the discussion the

introduces a law against or preamble

man, by

:

with, and exhorting the

evil desire, enticing

was tempting

by day and exciting

commission of

to the

— O,

sir, it is

this horrid

no

human, nor any temptation sent from Heaven,

you on

to this sin, but a certain innate

men from

in

old

legislator

with this most solemn Trpoolpiov,

One conversing

whom some

night,

it

crime of sacrilege, might thus say ly

a

In accommodation to the lan-

and unexpiated

evil

mere-

that urges

phrensy which grows

sins ( olorpog rig ep,(pvopevog

ek na?Miojv aai dtcaOdprcov rolg avOpuTroig ddiiirjpdTcov), ever restless (nepupepopevog d?UT7]pid)6rjg), and calling for

vengeance on itself ” of

men who would

over

— almost,

if

He seems

to

have had

in

view a class

be styled, in modern phraseology, given

not wholly, past their day of grace, or the

reach of any reforming means

—men

in

whom

sin

had be-

come an

olorpog, a raging disease,* or phrensy, urging

on by a

sort of

them

maddening impulse, without the ordinary

inducements of gain or sensual pleasure

—men

under the

goadings of a keenly-sensible, yet utterly-depraved conscience,

which could only

greater and

still

find ease in the

commission of

greater enormities drowning the recollec-

* Such as, in the Gorgias, he styles

vrc ovhog,

namely, apparently

healed upon the surface, but ulcerating in the bones below

and neglected sore.

— an

old


.

the word

of the lesser, as though driven to

tioii

pidxdrjg)

To eixl

:

0 rav

most earnest and solemn ad-

n

tgjv tolovtojv Soypdrcov, 16 1

gol rrpOGncTTrxj

em

naicov lepd luerrjg, 16 1

rag be rojv

ilag ,

this

rag ’AXIOAIOnOMIIHIlEII],

<

When

wander about (aXirp-

an ever-restless internal Erinnys.

such a one he gives f/

vice

by

247

diroStoTiopneopaL.

anorpo -

IOl ern rtiv

rag r&v avdpcov dyadtiv %vvovdperaGrpenrl,

Karctiv cjyevye

it.

r. X.

even such a thought should invade your mind, be-

take yourself at once, to the most solemn tion (d7ToScoiTO[i7TrjGeig)

;

go as a suppliant

modes of expia-

to the shrines of

the wrath-averting divinities; resort, without- delay, to the

assemblies of the good back, from

;

and

fly,

without turning or looking

the associations of the bad

all

thy wretched disease

may

;

if,

peradventure,

be rendered lighter.”

One

is

strongly reminded of the angel’s urgent and alarming ex-

when he bids them fly from Sodom Up ! get thee out of this

hortation to Lot and his family,

doom

the impending place

escape for thy

;

all the plain

We

;

of life

:

;

look not behind thee

haste to escape

may compare,

lest

,

in respect to this

tarry not in

;

thou be swept

away

.

most impressive

word, another passage in the ninth book, 878, A., where the legislator

speaking of a house that has been defiled

is

with murder, and of the restoration of a family that has, in consequence, been rendered childless Ka6r]paoQai

ml

uard vopov.

:

rovrov

dTro6conopnr)Gao6ai rov olnov

See, also, the Cratylus 396, E. ,

irpdjrov

pev

XP e & v EGrto avpiov be

:

diTobtorcopTcrjGopedd re avrrjv feat rca6apovpeda , e^evpovreg ,

oGrtg rd)V iepecjv rd rocavra beivbg Ka6atpeiv. plied

by Plutarch

wish

to

to

an obnoxious person

send away

to

avrov

elg

:

is

they would

represented as using in ref-

YLarovog pev ov uapovrog

K vnpov

ap-

exorcise as a troublesome spirit .

This strong language Csesar erence to Cato

whom

It is

a^ebieTTopTTrjGavro.

entrrjdeg

yap

Plutarch Cws., 2 ,

1

The verb dironopTreo) has the same meaning, and from this we have a similar word, with the same solemn reli-


THE WORD

248

gious import, which

Hebrew

the

victim piation

and

;

used by the Septuagint

is

or scapegoat.

to

ATronopnalog signifies a

ter

so, also, in the tenth

;

rov e^tXdoaoOat

:

rfjv

teal

d7T07rop,nrjv.

utter

nXrjpov eva tgj

same chap-

:

£7r’

em

povrj

rq

dioTcopirrjoet rtiv Katctiv,

850.*

vii.,

represents

See

Greek.

verse of the

Plato could not have selected a stronger his

as an ex-

avrov ware dirooreiXat avrov eig Clemens Alexandrinus uses it in the

same peculiar sense Strom.,

in classic

nXrjpov eva r <p Kvpco)

:

,

anoTropiraLG)

,

aXe^inanog and anorponaiog,

which are the more common terms Leviticus xvi., 8

to translate

religious rites

,

very similar

is

away with solemn

be sent

to

a7T0Sl07T0p,TT£0pat.

By such

abhorrence of atheism. it

word

as that abominable spirit of

to

express

language, he

all evil (if

we may

use the word spirit in so strange a connexion), which he

had been endeavouring souls of the

to averrnneate, or exorcise,

young persons

whom

derly, yet solemnly, addressing.

used

in this passage,

Some

come up

to the Scripture doc-

demoniacal possession or Satanic influence upon

the soul.

The word

follows, preserves the

oaodat, and

Trpooiov,

It

violently invading ,

which almost immediately

metaphor contained

is in admirable

whole passage.

It is :

Xpupzvoq

spirit of

suggests here the idea of sudden

the

evil,

and which can only be prevented by the

would, most absurdly, substitute

phrases

in dnodioiropn?/«

keeping with the

most speedy and efficacious remedies.

*

of the expressions

and in the parallel place quoted from

the ninth book, would almost trine of

from the

he fancies himself so ten-

ttpoibv

Viger and Ast

for irpooiov,

thereby

thus defined by Timaeus in his Lexicon of peculiar Platonic dnoTzipnecdai nai diodeicdai ra dpapTr/para, cvpTvpdKTopi t£)

A it.

general sense of

The

compound may have the more probably has reference to nopnij

latter part of the

izepiru,

but

as significant of a solemn religious procession, or ceremony, by

which evil was supposed to be averted, and which is paganism and a corrupted species of Christianity.

to

alike

common


PLATO DEFICIENT IN THE DOCTRINE OF EXPIATION. 249 utterly spoiling the metaphor,

the whole declaration. er reading here

may

One

and weakening the force of

proof that irpocubv

is

the prop,

be derived from the parallel passage

where we have the same image conveyed by a very similar word orav ooi TTpooTTLirry r c rtiv tolovtcov 6oyparo)v “ when any such thought shall invade in the ninth book,

:

you,” Sic

XU. Defect of Plato's Theology in regard to the Doctrine of Atonement and the Necessity of Expiation.

Page

51, Line 3. TrapatrrjTovg.

The

true sense of Plato

word

here, and in the subsequent argument, wherever this is

used,

though thor,

is it

we

best given

by rendering

easily propitiated , as

it

had been evnapaLrrjTOvg. In translating an aumust take into view not only the peculiar circum-

was surrounded, and

stances by which he

the peculiar phi-

losophy and theology by which his mind was influenced, but

we

are

bound

to consider, likewise,

how

far

modem

philosophy and theology have affected certain terms in our

own

tongue,

which otherwise would have been

sentatives of his meaning, instead of conveying

such circumstances, they will be very likely

to

was never intended. A due regard sometimes require what may, perhaps, seem

idea which

namely, a slight mistranslation of the justice to the spirit

;

or, in

true repre-

under

as,

convey

— an

to this will

a paradox,

letter in order to

other words, to depart a

do

little

from the etymological sense in order to preserve the substance of the writer’s thought.

we

shall certainly

Thus, here,

do Plato injustice,

tian theology along to TrapaLTTjTOvg that

if

we

example,

for

carry our Chris-

with us in the interpretation, and give sense which, standing alone,

suggest to a Christian mind.

The

philosopher

it

would

knew no


250

r la To

!)

[•:

THE IX.CTRJNE OF EXPIATION.

r c unt i

i

thing of that groat atonement which forms the basis of the

Christian

His argument

scheme.

who

against those

therefore

is

directed

held that the Divine displeasure, even

be averted by sacrifices,

for the greatest offences, could

processions, vows, and the mere ritual performances of re-

without repentance, or (which

ligion,

of

is

still

greater

mo-

ment) without any sense of that need of expiation which

was

by the

signified

sacrifices they blindly offered.

feeling of the need of expiation

expressed in

all

was

some obscure way

in

the religions of antiquity.

perfect mode forms that peculiar doctrine

which distinguishes

from

it

all

This

The

true

and

of Christianity

and the belief of

others,

which, either in the substance or the type, has been, in ages, the essential element of the righteousness which

is

all

hy

faith.

Could

we

trace anything of this in the lives or writings

of Plato and Socrates, their salvation

— truly been

from

it

we

should indulge more hope of

than from any of those moral lessons

and sublime as they are

beautiful

us in their immortal dialogues.

left to

— which We

have

are told,

both by Plato and by Xenophon, that Socrates advised his friends to be diligent in offering their sacrifices upon the al-

For

tars of their country's religion.

erally

condemned

(at least

a sanction to idolatry

by Christian

but

;

this

he has been gen-

writers), as giving

we have no

hesitation in ex-

pressing the opinion, that in no part of his philosophy did

he come nearer that

to Christianity

on no other grounds could

his salvation this advice,

;

provided

we

and

we

central truth, and

entertain such hopes of

can only believe

he had even the most

and saving doctrine which

its

that, in giving

faint allusion to the great

all sacrifice

was

primitively in-

tended to represent.

We

find,

however, but

little

reference to this need of ex-

piation in the writings of Plato, except,

it

might be, in the

case of such great and almost incurable sinners as are men*


PLATO DEFICIENT IN THE DOCTRINE OF EXPIATION. 251 tioned in the passage lately quoted (page 247) from the ninth book of the Laws.

A

life

was

of ascetic virtue

remedy which he would in general propose

the

although, in

;

was but little aware how utterly defective is any thing which bears the name of human virtue, when laid by the side of that Holy Law which the pride of philosophy, he

44

pierces even to the

spirit,

and

a discerner of

is

To

the heart.�

di viding all

the second great fault in Plato’s theology.

is

The

his doctrine of

is

the thoughts and intents of

a Christian mind this silence in regard to

an atonement other

asunder of the soul and the

an original independent

evil

This being closely connected with the dogma

principle.

of the innate evil of matter, through which the soul tainted, led

him

naturally to teach an ascetic

fication to the exclusion of

He

rious atonement.

any external,

preached

mode

forensic,

much and most

was

of puri-

and vica-

eloquently

against the lusts of the flesh as the cause and essence of

depravity

;

all

but his philosophy contains but slight recogni-

which the much-denounced body has no share, and which may be supposed to belong

tion of those sins of the spirit in

to a purely spiritual

being as well as to one

in the grossest robes of matter.

Hence

who

it

is

is

enclosed

easy

to see

how these two errors, although apparently so remote, have a common origin and a common seat in depraved and blinded human nature and how all, whether out of the Church or in the Church, who have endeavoured to rectify it in a ;

manner

different

from that pointed out in the Bible, have

ever stumbled on this same point, namely, the teaching of

an ascetic mode of purification, through the penances and mortification of the flesh, not as auxiliary

and disciplinary,

but as remedial and savina*. In respect to the doctrine of an atonement, the

Greek

poets are more often in accordance with the Bible, and

which had come down from a remote anthan our philosopher. Even in the very practices

those traditions tiquity,


—— 252 PLATO DEFICIENT whose

IN

THE DOCTRINE OF EXPIATION.

superstitious observances

he condemns, and

condemns, there may be manifested

need of expiation

which has been

justly

deep sense of the

that

ages

felt in all

—which

has formed a part of all false religions, and of all corruptions of the true

— and which only

intelligent

view of the doctrine of the

however,

finds repose in a believing

and

His argument,

cross.

sound, as directed against some of the practices

is

which prevailed

in the

Greek

and which operated

religion,

equally with atheism in encouraging the most abominable licentiousness

take

away

;

for their great design

sin, or

was

not so

much

to

the consciousness of sin, as to avert

its

consequences.* It is

that •"

the glory of the Gospel that

he can be propitiated

ilich

human ophy.

virtue,

and

TrapcurrjTog

is

in the dust all the pride of

the lofty aspirations of

all

while the awful sacrifice by

accomplished levels

it is

It

;

God

human

philos-

relieves the penitent and believing spirit from

which has ever weighed so heavily on the dark heathen mind

that

gloomy sentiment of the Grecian

poet,

Aiog yap SvGTrapaLrrjTOL (ppeveg t

while yet

gives no countenance to that false, presumptu-

it

ous belief in the Divine placability, against which Plato

here contending, and on which some in our

much

is

own day would

With such, whether ancient or modern, it is not the Divine mercy which they would exalt for that has no meaning separate from the Divine justice

lay so

stress.

but, rather, that idol attribute

which

is

of their

own

so well expressed, in this very argument, by the

Greek word paOvpUa

;

that sluggish indolence, indifference,

or good-nature, to use a stitutes the

prime

common

attribute of the

icurean and the modern

expression,

which con-

Deity of the ancient Ep-

sentimentalist.

* See remarks on this distinction, note f

imaginations,

^schylus, Prom. Vinct.,

34.

1,

page

4.


HIGHEST PROOF OF THE DIVINE GOODNESS.

253

XLII. Highest Proof of the Divine Goodness the a

'priori

,

Page peal

is

13. ’A yaOovg re nai aptorovg.

Line

51,

here directly

Conviction

Moral Sense.

of the

*

moral sense.

to the

The

The

ap-

intelligence

and power of the Deity may be matters of inductive reasoning, although

may be

there

even

for these,

and especially the former,

as good a ground of belief in the a priori con-

which every man possesses.

viction

say that no one really ever resorts

own

his

may sometimes be made

;

We

has in

standing

itself

all

we

are compelled

to assert that

mere inductive experience of an

all

Just as by

mat-

no inherent property of motion, notwith-

ever-moving world

that

God

the subject of speculative argu-

cannot bear the contrary opinion.

the laws of our minds

viction

safely

induction for

although on other grounds, and from other motives,

good

it

ter

we may

private individual satisfaction in the belief that

is

ment.

But

to external

is in

ever-restless,

opposition to such an a priori con-

we compelled to believe and feel however much inductive argument from

so, likewise, are

;

God

is

good,

the facts around us, in this world of disorder, might go

towards maintaining the contrary dogma. assert

Even

those

who

most strenuously that the Divine benevolence

is

proved from the observation of external nature carry along with them this a priori conviction, without, perhaps, being

aware of the

fact, that

from

it

is

derived, to their

own minds

and the minds of others, the main force of every argument

by which they would sustain

their

preconceived hypothesis.

Let this innate conviction be utterly banished from the soul,

and we might then see,

if

it

were possible

in that condition,

what

weakness of the a

posteriori proof.

mass of

facts

which

fall

is

to

put ourselves

the real strength, or, rather, real

Should even the great

within the sphere of our observa-

Y


^54 tion

we

HIGHEST PROOF OF TIIE DIVINE GOODNESS. be favourable

have

to

such a position, yet what right would

extend this

to

immense* scale of the uniby the unconscious working of

to the

verse, unless impelled to

it

law of our moral nature

this innate

how

with happiness to overflowing,

filled

an induction dare to step beyond

with

position,

infinite

space

all

its

us,

ble eternities, before and behind us, that

T

could so narrow

limits

around

w ere

world

If this

?

What

1

and two

we

any inferences from a mere induction offacts as

our

is

illimita-

should draw

moral

to the

attributes of the Deity, unless in the soul itself there is

some sure foundation

for faith in their existence

ever, on the other hand,

we

?

If,

how-

are actually compelled to re-

verse the picture, and to assert that misery, in our w~orld at least,

Bible

forms the rule, and happiness the exception tells

that our

things all

man

us that

is

born

sorrow

to

good things are muck fewer

— and

if

in

if

if

the

Plato declares

number than our

evil

the true voice of humanity has responded in

ages to these assertions both of profane and Holy Writ

—on what ground can we yet

cling to the belief in the Di-

vine benevolence, except by relying on the deep conviction of that moral sense,

which

tells us,

on worlds should exhibit facts tell us, that

If

God

is

strip us of the belief as

There

is

would

still

good.

no induction can prove

self.

and, even though worlds

to the contrary,

it,

neither can any induction

long as the soul remains true

to her-

within us something higher than the spec-

which exclaims, as the spontaneous sentiment of the soul, which she can neither

ulative

or the inductive

reason,

demonstrate nor reject, If there be a God he must be good , ,

and must must do

delight in goodness.

right.

The Judge of all

the

Earth

In proof of this, Plato does not hesitate to

appeal here to the consciences even of his supposed oppo-

he says, nevre ovreg all five of us, namely, the three parties to the dialogue, and the two ima-

nents, and therefore

ginary disputants

who

speculatively

deny a providence

;

as


;

STYLE OF THE BIBLE ABOVE THAT OF PHILOSOPHY. 255

much

Here we

as to say,

of argument

we

;

admit

all

agree

all

no need

is

God, he must

that, if there is a

much we may

be good, however

— here there

which

differ as to that in

his goodness consists.

XLIII. Sublime

Mode

which the Bible represents the Divine Prov-

in

idence and Omniscience as contrasted with

all

mere Philos-

Word

Analysis of the Greek

ophizing on these Attributes.

Avdpela as denoting one of the Cardinal Virtues of Soul

\

,

Page

52,

Line

A eiXlag yap

2.

necting this with what

e/cyovog,

we

avdpelav elvai deiXlav 6e naulag, ,

,

ment, which

good

apyla

may

avdpela

:

is

be thus stated

the offspring

apyta and paOvpla

of detXta

that the

He had

before proved that

power.

This

is

conclusive.

admirably stated, and in a

manner how

We

:

a part of virtue

is

is

and omniscience.

Gods it

;

admit the Gods

deiXta it

is

cannot be through

neglect the affairs of men.

As a matter of reasoning,

from

all this

down from heaven.

the ivays

of the children

and our rising up.

He

,

He

all

The Lord sitting

,

the

Lord

about his people from henceforth and for evermore.

is

down

understandeih our thought afar

off.

As

never slumbereth nor sleepeih that keepeth Israel.

This

these

his eyelids try

knoweth our

mountains are round about Jerusalem so

of the Lord

yet

Divine providence

His eyes behold and

He

is

parade of argument

sublimely do they assume

of men.

it

And

unanswerable.

positions, without reasoning at all about them.

looks

to he

opposite

its

could not be from want of

this subject of the

How

con-

10, aperijg pev

get the whole argu-

therefore

in itself

different

do the Scriptures treat

:

By

r. X.

tc.

page 46, line

is said,

.

is

the

round

The eyes

are in every place, beholding the evil and. the good.

the style worthy of a Divine revelation

poor aoes our cold philosophizing, even in

;

its best,

and how

and

loft-


;

;

256 the word

dvdpeia, as applied

and most religious

iest,

Who

to the deity.

appear in the comparison.

efforts,

can turn from the Grecian poets and philosophers,

with

all

acknowledged excellences

their

— to

the almost divine Plato himself

—yea, even from Holy

the

Scriptures,

without feeling, for the time, a conviction amounting to the

assurance of absolute certainty, that the latter

full

from Heaven

The

— the voice of God, and not of man

term dvdpeia, here used, would seem,

indeed

is

?

etymologi-

if

cally considered, to be improperly applied to the Deity.

This objection, however,

The word

is

entitled to but little weight.

is

applicable to spiritual energy of any kind, as

well as to that which

is

properly human.

It

denotes, strict-

not merely in the energy of sou! or strength of will sense of physical power, outwardly to execute its volitions,

ly,

,

which one There may be

but rather as a pure, internal spiritual force, by ,

man

a good will,

ed to

may yet weak

or one being

;

differ

but

from another.

when

moral strength

is

add-

manly character

is

said

this

to the other cardinal virtues, the

be complete, and hence the name.

tle tues,

means by the word

dperrj (the

uaprepta

says,

Add

rrjg ^vxijg.

Elsewhere, connecting

the virtues, he describes the truly brave

fears nothing which ought not

to

man

it

it

vir-

your it

as

with

all

as one

be feared, while at the ,

who same

thus view-

time , he fears everything which ought to be feared

ing

to

In the Laches, 192, D., Plato defines

.

ng

what the Apos-

same with the Latin

when he

from a similar etymology),

faith virtue

It is

as in unison with the highest wisdom, and as utterly

opposed

to that blind, counterfeit foolhardiness

no relation

to the rational soul, but

beast as to a

human

truly brave, since

being.

belongs as

much

Hence he shows

he must know what

is

which has to the

that “ the

truly good, must

necessarily partake of righteousness, temperance, and holi-

ness

;

because

virtue, to to fear

to

him alone

have a true fear

what ought

to

it

in regard to

be feared,

by reason of this God and man, so as

pertains,

arid to

be ever bold

when


,

THE WORD engaged

in right

,

avdpELCb AS

APPLIED TO THE DEITY. 25

and duty” (vide the Laches 199, D.) the support and

making dvdpda

life

of

all

ing, all are to

that,

;

in a greater or less degree

and

;

/

thus

;

the other virtues,

according to a favourite theory, that they are uine, essentially connected

1

all,

when

gen-

where one exists, all exist that, where one is want-

be suspected of spuriousness.

In this sense of energy of will*

it is

properly applied to

the Deity, notwithstanding the apparent etymological inconsistency.

It

strikingly suggests that definition of the Divine

nature which Aristotle ascribes to Plato, namely, “ that

whose very essence tiv

;

that

is

energy ”

which must

act

rj

apxr)

r\q

ovcia Evepyetd eg -

with an intensity of energy pro-

portioned to an infinite nature, ever in harmony with

itself,

and ever in the most vehement and burning opposition

See remarks on

that is unlike.

this

to all

passage of Aristotle,

page 190.

A Etkla is

is

In

the opposite of avtipsla.

some respects

it

nearly synonymous with paOvgia easiness, fickleness, or ,

weakness of will

No

.

Tpvcftr],

effeminacy, the result of sensuality

.

terms, certainly, could be more remote from any right

conception of a spiritual God.

To such

as those with

Plato supposes himself contending, and to special providence (although they

may

all

whom

who deny

consequences as the philosopher has analyzed them), be applied the language of the Bible

:

Ye thought

And

altogether such a one as yourselves.

a

not see the logical

yet

that

men

may

I was

of this

description often assume to be under the teaching of a higher philosophy than those

weak and

gine that their smallest sins

and

simple ones,

who

ima-

their lightest cares are the

objects of God’s special regard.

Philosophical theism often seems to talk very piously, * its

We would ever use the term will, in such

a connexion as this, in

highest import, as distinguished from animal wilfulness or mere

volition,

,

and as ever conjoined with reason

Voluntas est quae quid cum rations desiderat.

Y

2

;

or,

as Cicero defines

it,


THE PIETY OF EPICUREANISM.

258 and

being very religious, because

to claim the merit of

.i

graciously admits the Divine existence and intelligence*

while yet

it

make

denies everything which could

that ex-

istence an object of love, or fear, or of any interest of any

kind beyond what might be

felt in

The

mathematical theorem.

the contemplation of a

Epicureans some-

ancient

times affected this kind of sentimental religionism, # some

specimens of which

we

find admirably set forth, in all their

De Nalura Deorum lib. i., Ac etiam de sanctitate, de pielaie scripsit Epicurus. At quo modo in his loquitur ? Ut Coruncianum aut Scaevolam pontifices maximos te audire dicas non eum, qui sus

hollowness, in Cicero’s treatise

41

s.

,

:

:

Quid est enim, cur tulerit omneni funditus religionem ? Deos ab hominibus colendos dicas, quum Dii non modo homines non colant, sed omnino nihil curent, nihil agant? Sec. 42 Horum enim sententise omnium non modo super, sed stitionem tollunt, in qua inest timor inanis Deorum :

;

etiam religionem, quae

43

Deorum

cultu pio continetur.

'

Sec.

Epicurus vero ex animis hominum extraxit radicibus

:

religionem tulit.

,

quum

Quum

enim optimam

dicat esse, negat

How

gratiam sus-

et praestantissimam

naturam Dei

idem esse

maxime proprium

opem

et

Diis immortalibus et

in

Deo

gratiam.

Tollit id

quod

est optimee praestantissimaeque naturae.

well, also, might

what follows apply

to those sen-

timental followers of Spinoza, who, rapt in philosophical

adoration of “ the holiness of nature and of the infinite,” ity,

do yet, in

so vehemently

curus. At

enim

homine non

their* high

condemn

of the

spiritual-

the sensual philosophy of Epi-

quam ad

Quce enim potest esse sanctitas * This

and transcendental

liber est Epicurei de sanctitate.

tarn faceto,

awe

,

si

Ludimur ab

scribendi licentiam libero.

Dii humana non curant

word cannot probably be found

in

?

any English dictionary, we wished to

And yet nothing seemed so well adapted to the idea

express, namely, that species of scientific piety which abounds so

much ens,

in

and

such modern books as Nichols’s Architecture of the Heavin the lectures of l)r.

Dionysius Lardner.


— rRUE DIGNITY OF MAN

RELIGIOUS NATURE. 259

IIIS

XLIV. The True Dignity of Man of

Page rrj g

Line

2.

Nature.

E voedeia,

Ovtcovv

6rj

A nalysis

fyc.

rdye avOpumva npayptara

re epx/jvxov perex^t (pvoe cog apta, ual 'deoGedeararov,

This

t. X.

of

53,

his Religious

Words

the

man

;

is

said by

although, even

way of magnifying the importance when regarded as one of the least

parts of the universe, he

would

has been shown, be

not, as

beneath the care of a special providence.

He

said to enhance his dignity. nature,

and he

of

is

all

u.

Two

things are

partakes of an animated

animals the most religious.

pare the Protagoras, 522, A.

:

''Etrretdrj

Com-

6e 6 avOpconog 'deiag

rov $ eov £vyyevetav pidvov deovg evopaoe uai emxcipst fluptovg re Idpveo-

pierexet ptotpag, irptirov plev did rrjv %d)G)v

—“ And

,

,

Oai uai aydXpiara 'detiv divine,

he alone, of

all

since

man

shares in the

animals, through his relationship to

the Deity, believes in the existence of Gods, and undertakes

honour.”

to establish altars in their

Metamorpli

lib.

i.,

70

Compare,

also, Ovid,

:

Sanctius his animal mentisque capacius

altee

Deerat adhuc

Pronaque quum spectant animalia caetera terram, Os homini sublime dedit, ccelumque tueri Jussit, et erectos

'A vOpumva Tcpaypiara

ad sidera tollere vultus. is

equivalent here to ol avOpconot

;

words being probably affected by the neuter reason we have avro instead of avrog same the %Cjov. For which we should have expected. It is by the attraction of the form of the

£c5 ov,

See remarks on this Greek language, page 203. It is, how-

understood or implied in

peculiarity of the ever, to be

used here as

if

connected with avQpcjnog

same as though we should say man itself is the most religious, &c.

is

the

;

and

in English, the animat


260 TRUE DIGNITY OF MAN

The words $ eoaebeorarov

HIS RELIGIOUS NATURE. '&sooe6sta, are etymologically

,

formed on the same idea with the Hebrew phrase, narv

HUT, term

fear of the Lord, which

the

same

the Old Testament

Asiaidaipovia contains etymolo.

for religion or piety.

gically the

is

radical conception, but

by Paul, Acts, its

xvii.,

22.

component, dacpcov

name

It

example,

and as that became only another

;

down

into superstition, or

and worship of Fortune, Destiny, and other ima-

that fear

ginary personifications, which

AeiOidaipovia

is

seldom,

reverential fear of its

God

if

is

closely allied to atheism.

ever, taken for the pure and

while, on the other hand, 'Seoos-

;

equivalent, svoedeia, is

the other virtues, and the

Thus

as, for

partakes of the degeneracy of

for Fortune, so this sinks

6eia , or

almost always

is

used in a lower and somewhat bad sense,

Plato speaks of

it

first in

in the

the author of that dialogue

:

made

the parent of

the estimation of Heaven.

Epinomis, or whoever was

psl^ov yap popiov aperrjg

6slg rjpdg rears nelOy rrjg evosdeiag tgj 'dvrjTcp ysvsi

To

nomis 989, B. ,

the

same

Epi-

effect Sophocles, in the Phi-

E vgeSsIte (jg

TTpog

&eovq

*

ruXiJ unavra devrep’ r/yelrai JlaTrjp

ZEvg. ov yap ijvoiSeia GvvdvfjGKEL pporolg

nav &gl, kuv -duvoGiv, ovk anollvTcu

*

;

other words, all virtues arising out of mere earthly re-

lations are temporary

the

.

pr\-

1442:

loctetes,

or, in

all

grave

.

,

arid

The primary

tonishment, awe,

is

must perish.

Piety alone survives

root, oedag, signifying

sometimes used

Divinity himself, examples of

for the

wonder as-

very

,

Numen

which are frequently

found in Pindar and iEschylus.

The

verb

is

to

or

be

sometimes

apparently employed for repav, to signify reverence towards

human

magistrates.

This, however,

sense, and the primary

still

holds

its

is

only a secondary

place in the ancient

idea that magistrates represented the Divine authority, and that judges stood to us in the place of the Elohim.

The


MEN COMPARED TO SHEEP OF THE DIVINE PASTURE. 2G1 ultimate radical

may

Hebrew

be the

perhaps remotely connected

juravit,

,

meaning with

in

and

this

y2U/, the sa-

cred number seven.

XLV.

Men

compared

of Plato on

Page r.

X.

53,

Sheep of

to

Line

6.

Thus Socrates says ye

\ioi dotcel

Xovpevovg, tieolg elvai

Gods

Harmony

this Subject in

Oetiv ye

This comparison

is

in the

firjv

with the Scriptures.

urTyiard tyapev elvai,

k.

quite a favourite with Plato.

Phsedon, 62, B.

ev XeyeoOai to fteovg

teal

Language

the Divine Pasture.

elvai,

:

’A XXa rode

ryi&v rovg enipe-

ryiag rovg avOpdirovg ev tcov UTrjpdrcov rolg

— “This

seems

to

me to be well said, that the we are among their flocks

are our keepers, and that

or possessions

from which he deduces an admirable

gument against the lawfulness of

suicide.

It is

worthy of

note, too, that this is evidently referred to as a saying

had come down from the olden time

;

and in

ar-

which

this light

it

furnishes a pleasing evidence of the piety and sound reli-

gious philosophy of the primitive or patriarchal ages.

The

same comparison may be found in Plato’s romance of Atlantis, where he speaks of the care which the Gods took of the inhabitants of that blessed isle, and in which he represents them as forming a perfect theocracy ual fcaroudoavreg olov vopelg KTryiara ual rcolpvia ual Dpeppara eavrcov Critias 109, C. Compare the present trearjpdg erpeepov. tise, page 69, line 2 tjvppaxoi 6e i]flv tieot re dpa ual :

,

:

daipoveg

*

rjpelg d’

Gods and Genii

av KTrjpara

tietiv real

are our helpers, for

we

daipovov

—“ The

are the flocks or

possessions of the Gods and guardian divinities.”

Whatever may have been the of the expression,

it is,

origin of the sentiment and

with the exception of the use of the

plural tietiv, not only purely Scriptural in its conception,


— 262 PECULIARITY OF NEGATIVE FORMS OF GREEK VERBS* For proof of this, compare For we are his people and the sheep of his pasHe hath made us, and his are we ; as the Hebrew,

but also in the very language.

Psalm ture.

3

c.,

:

in

\

He will feed

accordance with the Keri, should be translated. a shepherd.

his flock like

this ancient idea of the

Isaiah, xl., 11.

From

resemblance which the Divine as

well as kingly authority bore to the pastoral relation, came the noun

noifJLrjv,

in that frequent

Homeric meaning of rulei

or shepherd of the people

noipeva Xativ

’AyapefJLVOva,

as also the verb

Rev.,

;

ii.,

27

;

vii.,

17

which we Matthew, ii.,

in that sense of ruling

7r oipaivo),

find in the Septuagint version of

6

xii.,

;

Psalm 5

;

ii.,

9

;

xix., 15.

XL VI. Peculiarity of certain Negative

Page

Forms of Greek Verbs

55, Lines 1,2. ’ETupekovpevG)

.

.

apekovvTi.

.

.

Why

does the positive, in this word, take the middle or deponent,

may be and of many other

and the negative or privative the active voice difficult to

explain the philosophy of this

we would simply

matters in the Greek, yet fact, that this is

and even

to

the case with a very large

such an extent as

to entitle

It

?

advert to the

number of verbs it

to

;

be justly re-

garded as one of the peculiarities, or well- settled idioms of the language. strictly

Indeed,

we

seldom,

if

ever, find

negative or privative of the middle form.

a word

The

ac-

sometimes slightly va-

tive

form of the privative,

ries

from what would be the analogical active of the middle

it is

true,

not to such a degree

or deponent positive in use

;

as to affect the principle to

which we have adverted. The

former

may

is

generally in

be in opai

;

co

yet

still,

pure, while the middle or deponent

and sometimes the

latter is

compounded

with a preposition, while the former has only the simple


;

PECULIARITY OF NEGATIVE FORMS OF GREEK VERBS. 263

Sometimes the positive is strictly deponent, while other cases it has an active voice in use but even then

radical.

in

;

the privative form in

but of the middle

the privative, not of the active,

is

o)

as, for

;

rreldopai , to obey or trust

example,

whole, rceidopaL

;

we may

disobedient

displeasure

pdopat,

; ;

fcrjdopac,

;

dOvpso),

,

uoopEopai

.

,

,

arjdeo),

comely manner

,

;

hopes

hope

to

deXirco, or

,

peXopai, or pEXeopai, knipeXeopai, cerned for, dpeXe a), to

plan

loss

,

to

,

,

or discour-

dupdeo), to

,

not.

of the active,

;

eXttg), to raise

deXirreo), to despair

take care of or be con-

neglect; pr\x av dopai, or p7]xav £°[mi >

to

to

,

;

— although

,

this

,

word has

oftener, perhaps, the sense

of inconsiderateness or want of refection as though ,

the privative of (3ovXevg)

—rpopiopat,

or drpepeG), to be undisturbed

piOTEG)

,

may

,

to

it

were

tremble arpopio), ,

(pEtdopat, to spare , acpEidEG), also,

ipEvdopat, d'lpEvdEO, d'lpEvorec*)

— oedopac, daedso),

It

;

Compare,

be lavish or prodigal.

teg)

be at a

(dovXopat, to be willing ddovXeo), to be unwilling or

refuse

to

regu-

to

or to act in a

invent dprjxavEC°, to & e without plans ,

to

,

be without order , or

to

a licentious or disorderly manner

eXnopai,

,

order

the negative,

drcocjyeo),

but of the middle or passive, namely, to act in

,

or under

put in order

tcoopECO, to

be

,

angry

be without spirit

to

to

feel disgust or

to

be

to

to iceep one's self in

,

dneldopac),

(not

be concerned about anything

to

be careless or unconcerned late

glad

be

to

ftypeopai EvOvpeopac,

mental excitement

aged

dnecdeo)

,

mention, as

by no means the

cases, although

obey

to

,

'persuade

to

dneideo). to be disobedient.

In illustration of this peculiarity,

some of the most usual

ttelOg),

x api^°liai

— dvvapai,

i

ddvva

&c.

be observed, that in most of these cases the form

with a privative

is

middle

tive or the

;

not the direct negative either of the acthat

is, is

not simply the denial of a re-

flex action but expresses rather a negative state of mind. ,

As, for example, arcEiOEiv

from

pi] tteIOelv, is

,

besides being wholly different

not even equivalent to prj nEiOeoOat to ,


264 GREAT THINGS CANNOT EXIST WITHOUT SMALL, which

it

seems

to

have the nearest

alliance, but expresses

rather that positive condition of the soul from of disobedience do proceed.

which

acts

all

So, also, in the passage from

same

the text, apEXelv is not the

as

emiieXelodat but

urj

,

j

rather expresses that sluggish, indifferent, careless disposi-

which

tion,

so utterly opposed to

is

Mr) empeXeZoOaL

Divine nature. criminality, as

may be seen

used page 50, lines

8, 10.

all right

may

views of the

may

or

from the manner in which

It

may

result from

ways

implies fault, and

vourable sense.

may

is

always

to

’ApeXeZv

be taken

So, also, pi) ttzlOegOcu, or

be consistent with freedom from

all

in

pi)

al-

an unfa-

tuotevelv

,

blame, according

the presence or absence of other circumstances

to

it is

want of pow-

or a variety of other justifying reasons.

er,

not involve

but.

;

must always be associated with condemnation, as

cliteiOeIv

implying an unbelieving and guilty condition of the soul.

This

36

iii.,

word

the force of the

is

6 6s clttelOCjv

:

shall never see life

,

as used

by our Saviour, John,

ovx oxpErat farjv

but the wrath

— The

unbelieving

of God abideth on him fell into an .

For these reasons, perhaps, these verbs

in-

transitive sense, leaving the denial of the action of the positive

form

And

be expressed by the negative particles.

to

perhaps, «also, because they differ somewhat from the mere

negation of the reflex action of the middle, they retain, for distinction’s sake, the active

form

;

first

view,

others, the

most

although, at

such privative words would seem, of

all

foreign to the ordinary use of that voice.

XL VII. Great Things cannot Exist without Small. the

Maxim

cation

Page rrjyolg

,

and 55,

to the

Application of

Doctrine of a Special Providence Edu,

to Politics.

Line

5.

Ov

pi)v ovde Kvdepvrjratg, ovde orpa-

9

ovd av noXtritcoZg

X^P

1

^

optHptiv pevaXa. ov6e


;

GREAT THINGS CANNOT EXIST WITHOUT SMALL. 265 yap avev

ojurcptiv

ev fceloOac political

rovg p,eydXovg (paoiv

— “ Neither

to pilots,

men, can great things

ol

XiOoXoyoi XiOovg

nor to commanders, nor to exist without small things

for, as the stone-masons say, neither do large stones lie

well together in a structure without the small.”

im

is

capable of the widest range.

It is

This max-

not only applica-

ble to stone-masons, and politicians, and to the sublime ar-

gument of Plato here

in favour of a special providence, but

also of the highest importance in respect to education,

is

and well worthy the attention of

all

For

teachers of youth.

want of a patient and laborious care in respect to what may seem the more minute elements of science, a structure is often erected without cohesion or symmetry, and destined, through the looseness of

parts, to fall to pieces almost

its

as soon as completed.

As Plato

applies the

maxim here

Aristotle, in his Politico, lib.

ii.,

to politicians, so, also,

2, institutes

parison in respect to government, and sential to the very constitution of a

that

its

shows

that

it is

sound and healthy

es-

state

individual elements should be small things mingled

with great, in such a pathy

a similar com-

to the

whole.

condemns those

way

as to give coherence and

In pursuance of this

theorists

same

sym-

idea,

he

who, even in his day, advocated

the impracticable doctrine of perfect equality, and charges

them with being the greatest enemies to that very idea of unity which they would be thought so zealously to maintain. The levelling dogma, he admits, is plausible, and apparently most philanthropic

av

elvai So^etev

—evirpoaconog

ical (pcXavOpcjirog

but, in the end, instead of

being produc-

tive of the greatest happiness of the greatest number,

fraught with the seeds of the state.

As

all evil

it

is

both to individuals and to

unity implies plurality

and variety,

clares, there can be no true unity in sameness.

so,

he de-

There can

be no binding sympathy except in a community of higher

and lower, lesser and greater

interests.

Z

As well might one


:

,

266 GREAT THINGS CANNOT EXIST WITHOUT SMALL. attempt to construct a wall with round, smooth pebbles,

all

and fashion, or produce harmony from same length and tension which, as he justly remarks, might furnish an insipid homophony, but never a true symphony coanep nav el ng rrjv ovpupGiviav

same

of the

size

strings all of the

;

:

TroLrjoeiev dfjiO(po)vcav, ii.,

rj

rov pvOpov (3aoiv plav,

Politica ,

2.

There is a singular passage in the Ajax of Sophocles, in which we think there is had in view this same comparison of great and little stones, although the word is not expressly mentioned in the Greek. He also applies it, in the same manner,

wild and disorganizing doctriftes of gov-

to those

ernment, which would destroy support,

all

confidence and

all

mutual

by exciting an unholy jealousy between the rich

The passage is interesting, if for no other show how precisely the same, in temper and in

and the poor. purpose, to

argument, have been the demagogues of

ages

all

:

IIpo^ yap rov exovO’ 6 (j)6ovoc £pnet.

peyahuv x^P^ nvpyov pvpa nehovTai.

Kalroi cpuipoi C(j>a?iep6v

pera yap peyd^cjv

/3aidg

9

apicr dv ,

nal psyag opOoW’ vtzo pLKporipov.

’A/U/ ov dvvarov rovg avorjTovg tovtcov yv6pag TTpodidaoKELv.

Which we would ment on

—Ajax

thus attempt to render, by

Potter’s version, in

which,

we

way of improve-

think,

looked the implied simile, and thus failed

151.

he has over-

to bring out its

principal beauty

Thus envy

And

secretly assails the rich.

yet small stones, unmingled with the great,

Build up a dangerous tower

The

Which one,

frail

defence*

high and low in mutual sympathy

Sustain each other

No

—a

we

fools

;

yet this truth

is

one

can never learn.

think, can fail to admire the

yet most just application which Plato

still

makes

higher and

of this striking


— GENTLENESS OF PLATO comparison

to the

S

;

MODE OF ARGUMENT. 267

government of the Divine Architect, and

to the doctrine of a special providence.

XL VIII. Mode of Argument and

Gentleness of Plato's

,

Adaptation

Page

The

57,

Line

to the

word

will best

of the spirit of the whole passage. train of thought as this

son,

as

it

:

Peculiat

ye pca^eadat rolg Xoyoig,

2. Tgj

propriety of this

its

Minds of the Young. k. t. A.

appear in a paraphrase

suggests some such have now addressed his rea-

“We

It

and by a summary yet conclusive syllogism, forcibly, were, compelled him to admit the incorrectness of his

positions.

although his reason

Still,

ings or imagination

may

silenced, his feel-

yet refuse to surrender, and

revolt at the idea that the Deity is

concerned in

all

may

the ap-

and minute operations of the universe.

parently trivial

There seems,

is

therefore, in addition, to be

soothing charms (eTTudtiv),

some

overcome those prejudices or

need of some

gentle persuasions, to

distastes

which

will not

yield to reason.”

’E nadetv (encod?]), with

word with

Plato.

in the Phsedon,

What

its

derivatives,

is

a favourite

a sublime beauty does

where Socrates,

after

it

possess

having gone through

the strongest and most recondite arguments that reason

could array for a future fidence, the cheering

the

soul,

life,

makes, as his ground of con-

hope which the belief produces

in

and those sweet persuasions of a moral kind,

which surpass “ for noble

is

in

power

all

the deductions of the intellect

the prize (he says), and great the hope”

rca-

Adv yap to aOXov uai rj eXnlg peydkrj. And then, after having gone through the mythical representations of the unseen world, he tells us that the soul must ever chant these to itself as

some soothing

incantation

(

roiavra %pr\


;

268 PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. coonep enadeiv eavrd), Phced ., 114, D.), and like the dying

swan,

which, in another part of this dialogue, he com-

to

pares himself, sing this song of immortality more sweetly

and more clearly the nearer is to test

it

approaches that period which

the great question forever.

Nothing can be more admirable than the tender care which, throughout this discussion, the Athenian

is

made

exercise towards his supposed youthful disputant.

philosopher

knew

ment, however excellent

it

silenced,

it

disputant to a

He

therefore,

dialectical argu-

might be as preparatory

application of other remedies. it

The

that very often little direct influence of

was produced by means of

a moral kind

to

He knew

that,

to the

even where

not unfrequently hardened the vanquished more tenacious hold upon former prejudices. in what succeeds, endeavours to make him

feel that this is

no matter of mere speculation,

like

any mere

theorem, but that he has a deep personal interest

scientific

in the great

arrangements of Providence, and

to

impress

him with the fact, that as a part (although a very small one) of an immense whole, the importance and dignity of his own by this See remarks, notes 1 1 and 12, page 1 1 explanation of the word dvoxepaiveiv, note 3, page 8.

position, instead of being diminished, is magnified

very circumstance. also,

XLIX. The Machinery of Physical Events controlled by Invisible The Doctrine of Plato and of the Spiritual Agencies .

Bible . V

Apxovreg ttpoorer aypevoi. The the ap%ovreg will not permit us and gender word of form Page

57,

Line

12.

any inanimate influences. It can only mean beings of a higher order than man, to whom the lower parts of the universal administration were thought

to

regard

it

as referring to


;

;

;

,

PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. 269 This doctrine, somewhat modified, we

be committed.

to

Holy Scriptures, without suppoJewish writers, any more than Plato, did not

believe to be taught in the

sing that the

hrmly hold

to that regular

we

and phenomena which

and orderly succession of events

They

laws of nature.

style the

manifestly believed in a connexion of cause and effect, ex-

tending in a chain from the throne of

God

to the minutest

and yet

operations of the visible world

all

golden chain of celestial influences, and

this

tions throughout

its

immense

along

down

in all its vibra-

extent, they constantly recog-

nised the control and guidance of supernatural or angelic beings.

Besides revealing the doctrine, the Scriptures sometimes,

draw aside the

as matters of historical fact, invisible world, ral

*

agency

idea in Hosea,

come

dered

:

I will

hear the heavens

it

to

us this constant supernatu-

who descended

as in the account of the angel

;

We find this And

and lay open

shall

ii.,

23,

pass in that

to

from the

veil

which is commonly thus renday I will hear saith the Lord ,

,

;

and

the heavens shall hear the earth,

earth shall hear the corn,

and

the wine,

Jezreel.

sing.

the oil

and they

;

and

the

shall hear

The word HJjP, here used, means, in its primary sense, to Hence, secondly, to pronounce with a measured and solemn

thirdly, to respond

voice

and

fourthly, to hear

erence to the auricular sensation, which

word.

It

having, however, no refis

expressed by another

resembles the Greek pehno, pehnopaL,

or, rather, apetGo-

and conveys the idea of responsive or choral singing. Hence the passage would be more literally, and at the same time more ex-

pai,

And

pressively, rendered thus

:

will sing , saith the Lord,

I will sing

shall

sing (or respond)

it

to the earth

;

shall

come

to the

and

to

pass in that day, 1

heavens

and

;

the heavens

the earth shall respond to the

and the wine, and the oil ; and they shall respond to Jezreel. There seems here a reference to that doctrine of the choral harmony of nature, with which the ancient mind was so filled as though the

corn,

;

touching a chord

in

heaven,

when

the great Coryphaeus or leader of

the universal orchestra gives the starting tone, sounds and vibrates

down through cadence

all

in the

the

compass of the notes,

end designed

to

until

be accomplished.

Z

2

it

makes

its

closing


;

270 PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. into the pool of Bethesda, or of the destroying angel that

appeared with a drawn sword standing over the devoted

2d Samuel,

city of Jerusalem,

In this latter

xxiv., 16, 17.

instance, there is no intimation that

it

differed in

any

way

from the ordinary method by which God sends pestilence

upon the

earth, except that here the curtain is

withdrawn

and the supernatural machinery disclosed. No doubt, second causes were here also at work, and the philosopher of that day,

had there been any such

to investigate the ante-

cedents and consequents connected with the event, might

have bid the Jew Take heart and banish yet

still, all

this

fear

would not change the

vealed, that behind

them

all,

however

extended beyond the utmost bounds of

fact,

far

so clearly re

they

may have

scientific research,

power of God, and his delegated directing them, without any violation of their vis-

there stood the spiritual minister,

Let

the production of the decreed result.

ible order, to

We

science cease her babble. rant as well as the

all

know, the most igno-

most learned, that second causes are

employed in these visitations. The writers of the Bible were no more ignorant of this, as a general principle, than our most scientific savans, although they may have known less of the steps of the process in its minute details.

here

we

Even

surpass them only in having traced a few more

links in a chain, in

differences of the

unknown sinks all insignificance. These links,

which what

known

into

is

in the series of natural sequences,

extent short of the

room enough with them.

infinite,

yet

may

reach back

to

any

and yet leave on the other shore

for the supernatural , in perfect consistency

We

have, therefore, no reason at

all for infer-

ring that the Scriptures meant to represent this as a mirac-

ulous intervention.

In every case of pestilence, they would

have us believe that the destroying angel air, but. in this

is

abroad in the

one, for special reasons, the eye of

man was


PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. 271

He

permitted to behold him.*

maketh his angels winds

,

his

ministers a fiery flame, as the inspired Apostle renders it, Heb., i., 17 all not, as it would be explained by the ra;

tionalizing interpreter, he maketh the winds his messengers ,

The angels of the Lord flaming fire his servants. are ever encamped round about the righteous, although we

and

the

have but one example in the Bible of the glorious vision being revealed to mortal eyes.

The

great objection to this

See 2 Kings, vi., 17. view, as it would present

some minds, would spring from the prejudice to which Plato alludes in the Epinomis, 982, D., E., and on which we have remarked, pages 226, 227. Men are so

itself to

much

inclined to associate undeviating regularity and con-

stancy in physical motions with a nature implying the ab-

sence of a special will and reason

as though an animated

;

personal agency must necessarily be sometimes freaky and capricious in

its

operations as evidences of the exercise of

One answer

a personal volition.

such an objection

to

is

furnished at once by maintaining that spiritual

all such intermediate powers are under the constant control of the Su-

preme Will and Reason, producing the regularity of natural sequence, not as though it needed such sequences at all as indispensable helps to

of them, as signs,

we

itself,

but for our sakes , that

might be able

by means

to exercise faith in the

general constancy of the Divine operations, and regulate our

own

conduct in accordance with

feeling

becomes

When, however,

it.

practical atheism, prevailing to

this

any great

among mankind, we have reason to believe that God* come forth, as Plato says in the Politicus, from his re-

extent will

tired place of observation, *

There are also

break up the long repose of nal-

in the Bible intimations that evil supernatural

agents, under the dominion of the Prince of the

Powers of the

Air,

are sometimes permitted to exercise a physical influence in the affairs

of our globe, and thus to

and body.

See Luke,

xiii.,

16

afflict ;

Job,

men with i.,

12

;

ii.,

disease both of 6, 7.

mind


— 272

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIH1L0

NIHIL.

ural laws, and again astonish the world, as in the early

by displays of super natural power.

times,

-

Nemesius,

in his treatise

on the Nature of Man, alluding

to Plato’s doctrine of providence, describes

sing three divisions.

The

first

province

assigned directly,

is

he

or without media, to the Deity himself, or, as

the

God.

first

This has respect

to the

as recogni-

it

styles him,

world of ideas, and

nporjyovpEVcog

the general care of the universe as a whole

pev t(ov Idetiv eireira 6e %ypnavrog rov uaOoXov uoapov.

The second department is

given in charge of the second or

and has

inferior divinities,

relation to those things

which

are said to be under the law of generation and corruption 7rdvTG)v tgjv £V yEvioci ual (pOopa

dinary physical events. of

and

life,

good and

know

to the distribution of

evil.

what he

Nemesius Be Nat. Horn ,

for this precise division, as

though

for the

the passage

styles organic

.,

We

345.

p.

Nemesius

second some warrant

may be

states

it,

al-

discovered in

which has furnished the ground of

this excur-

For farther information on the ancient views in re-

spect to a special providence, Leg.,

other words, or-

or, in

third relates to the conduct

not in what part of Plato’s dialogues authority can be

found

sus.

The

ii.,

Evang

.,

7

;

Plutarch.,

Be

we may

Fato, 572, E.

consult Cicero , ;

Be

Eusebius, Prczp

630.

L.

The Ancient Maxim, Be Nihilo Nihil.

Page

Line rrdaa onog, k. r. X

2. (bg

58,

.

ysveoig evena ekeivov ylyvErai

— “ That

all

generation, or every gener-

ation, takes place for this purpose,

and

in

such a way,”

&c. This argument would be better accommodated ern ideas, and, at the same time, lose none of

intended meaning in this place, by rendering

its

to

mod-

force or

y EVEOig

ere


— THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

273

NIHIL.

#

According

ation.

page 187,

we have

view

to the

taken of this word,

would always signify the bringing

it

into being

of what did not exist before, so far as the law or idea

concerned

when from a different disposition new substance is produced

as

;

same matter an

entirely

Here there

is

the creation of a

any new matter. regard

of the

it,

ation out

in this

It

would

new

,

is

fair to

way, as synonymous with our phrase,

The word

of nothing.

out of something pre-existent

yevsoig,

;

air.

being although not of

however, be quite

not,

and yet

this

cre-

does

is true,

it

generally imply, in Greek writers, a production in

way

nitric

example, from what before was atmospheric

acid, for

was

some

something

not necessarily, or e vi terminorum to be regarded as pre,

Many

existent matter.

which they styled

held to a metaphysical phantom

hyle (yXrj),

and which the more

spiritual

may have adopted to save their favourite maxFrom some such idea as this the Sep-

philosophers

im, de nihilo nihil. tuagint gave the

name Teveoig

to that

book which

the generations of the heavens and the earth

;

treats of

and in

this

Hebrew word m'lbinthey render the Hebrew substan-

they had some countenance from the Gen.,

ii.

,

tive verb

Thus,

4.

VP, in the account of the origin of light (Gen.,

3), not eoTG)

Psalm case,

(j)d)g,

xc., 2

it is

also,

but yevrjOrjTG) tyug.

npo rov

oprj yev7\0r\vai

no more than a

nb\ a word

In the

faithful

i.,

same way,

— although, in

rendering of the

this

Hebrew

of precisely similar import, implying successive

generation from something pre-existent

— nV

tDVH

^binm before the mountains were generated and was born or brought forth. In this way do the Scriptures, both Greek and Hebrew, speak of the formation of the present earth or of what may be styled the Mosaic bnni

,

the earth

,

creation.

In regard, however, to that originating act

place in the beginning, mentioned Gen.,

language

is

employed

in

many

i.,

1,

which took a different

parts of the Bible.

It

is


— 274

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE

NIIllLO NIHIL. +

represented as proceeding from a word or

something from a

fiat

—a

calling of

state of non-existence both in respect to

— as

Romans, iv., 17 uaXovvrog ra pi) where there seems to be a reference to Isaiah, xlviii., 14.— HIT npjP My hand hath 'JK *np founded the earth and my right hand hath spanned the heavens ; when I called to them they stood up. So, also, Isaiah, xli., 4 nrnn *Op who called the generations from matter and form

ovra

cog

ovra

:

;

,

the beginning .

To

such passages

language of Philo, elg

to elvai.

De

we may

Create 728

ra

:

trace the similar

pi)

ovra enaXeaev

Notwithstanding the clear declarations of the

Greek ideas of origination, connected with the words yeveoig and eyevero maintained their ground for some time, and continued to affect the expressions, if not

Bible, the

,

the intended meaning, of

some of the

the Jewdsh Philo, at times, uses language

imply the eternity of matter,

As when he gives us

if

B.

:

philosophy,

knew

that

it

De Mundi

Opificio

attained the highest

was most

rov ) that in existing things

on the one hand, the

to

account of what he styles the

this

“Moses, who had

which seems

not of the organized world.

philosophy of Moses, in his treatise 2,

Even

earliest fathers.

summit of

necessary {avaytzaibra-

[kv rotg ovoi) there (

efficient

universal mind, most pure and

(

page

,

should be,

dpaorrjpiov ), namely, the

unmixed with anything

else,

and, on the other hand, something inert, passive, or passible, destitute of soul

and motion (a'tpvxov

when moved, endowed

real

Although

which

with form, and animated by the mind

aforesaid, should be converted into this

the world.”

dnivrprov ),

in this

most perfect work,

very argument he

is

dispu-

seems to regard the ultimate element of matter as one of the two necessary existences, almost as much so as mind itself and his language greatly resembles that in which Cicero de-

ting against the eternity of the world, yet he

;

scribes the doctrine of one of the ancient schools

ura autem

ita dicebant, ut

:

De

earn dividerent in res duas

nat:

ut


THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO altera esset -effipiens, altera

eaque efliceretur aliquid. censebant

dam

:

:

in eo autem,

in utroque

autem quasi huic se praebens, In eo,

quod

quod

si

vim esse materiam quam-

efficeret,

efliceretur,

tamen utrumque.

ipsam cohaerere potuisse,

275

NIHIL.

Neque enim materiam

nulla vi contineretur, neque

VIM SINE AL1QUA MATERIA.

Cic.,

Acad. Post .,

6.

In other places, however, he contends clearly and strongly that

even the hyle or unformed principle of matter ,

been created

arising from the systems of philosophy in first

some wavering which they had

instructed, assert pretty clearly an absolute cre-

which there was no

ation from a state in ter

had

beginning by the direct act of God.

in the

In general, the Christian fathers, with

been

itself,

(which we prefer

to the

pre-existent mat-

expression, out of nothing)

;

al-

though, in stating the Scriptural doctrine, they often use lan-

guage which was more congenial with the opposite system.

The words

yeveaig and yevr]r6v were employed for cre-

ation,

and dyevTjrov was used as synonymous with anna-

tov.

In consequence, however, of discussions growing out

of the Nicene controversy, and the doctrine of the eternal

generation of

The

Son, they

made

a distinction between

yevrjrog and yevvyrog, and dyevryTog and dyevvrjrog is far

tristic

,

which

from being so evident in classical Greek as in the Pawritings.

yevrjrog

;

or, in

was yevvrjrog but not words, he was ayevrjrog and annorog

Christ, they said,

other

but not dyevvrjrog.

,

,

So, also, the

first

progenitor of any or-

ganized species was dyevvrjrog although nothing was dye,

vrjrog

which was beneath the Divine hypostases.

Cyril.

Alexand ., Be Sancta

The Greek

Trinit., 8,

Vide

page 37.

philosophers have been, almost

all

of them,-

charged with teaching the eternity of matter, and of having

been universally agreed

in the tenet, that

created or generated out of nothing,

nothing could be

or, as it is

by Lucretius,

De

nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse reverti.

expressed


;

276

No

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

NIHIL.

was the doctrine of many, if not%iost of them, modern acceptation of the terms that is, they

doubt this

even

in the

;

believed in no creation or generation except from pre-existent matter with

the properties of matter as

it

now

whatever changes or modifications

it

might

exists

was

other words, the visible material universe

or, in

nal,

all

eter-

in the lapse

was thus held by the Ionic school in all its branches, by some of the Italian, and by all who were atheistically inclined. It was also maintained, however inconsistently, by some who were undoubted theists, as by Plutarch, and a few others who have been of ages have undergone.

It

styled Platonists.

We

cannot, however, charge any of

them with these

consequences simply from the language of the maxim, as x.iay

be taken in different senses; in some of which

it

it

is

not only consistent with the purest theism, but absolutely essential to

its

proper explanation and defence.

means

clear that the eternity of matter

Plato

and, although

that

;

way when

some things

in the

It is

by no

was ever held by Timaeus

may

look

only partially considered, yet are they

all

capable of a consistent interpretation on a different hypoth-

His doctrine of the inherent

esis.

evil of matter

does not

It was not by any necessity, involve connected with any necessary existence of matter, but with certain necessary properties which it must possess if crewithout which it could not be matter, and without ated which God could not cause it to exist. Vide remarks on

at all,

its

eternity.

—

the Platonic doctrine of avdyrcrj, pages 217, 218.

Laws, as w e have seen, T

are defending him.

The

his evil principle is spiritual, and

has, therefore, nothing to do with the

we

In

Even

if

dogma

against

he had held

it,

it

which would

not have been a heresy fatal to his claim to be regarded as

a pure theist, although an inconsistent one

;

and the

cir-

cumstances in which he was placed would have presented the

same

palliation as

we have

offered for his doctrine of


;

,

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

we know

But, indeed,

evil.

of no system of philosophy to

the tenet in question, in this gross form,

which been more

To have allowed any

foreign.

would have

necessary self-

would have been directly

existence to matter

277

NIHIL.

in the face of

of his most favourite notions, and especially opposed

some

grand division in the Timreus, in which, under the

to that

name to oparov,

general

expressly excluded from the

it is

class of the tgjv ovrcog ovtgjv

,

and assigned

to that of the

ovSettote ovrwg ovtcov.

Vide page 172, and the remarks on the distinction between the verbs dpi

yiyvoyevcov

icat

and ytyvopac.

Nothing can be more express than the dec-

laration that matter

—not as organized, but

treme or lowest state in which

can be matter,

it

most exor, as

he

in the most general terms, the tangible, the visi-

defines

it

ble, the

extended

— belongs

to the class of generated, in dis-

tinction from eternal existences

yiyvopevog

otipa

when we connect passage

in the

rrav 6e

this

teal

oparog yap dirrog re

:

ysvrjrog ecpdvrj.

Tim., 28.

teal

And

with another proposition in the same

av to yiyvopevov in

9

alriov

nvog

el;

yiyvopevov avdyterjg yiyveoQai — “ that everything which must have been produced by some cause” — seems imposis

it

sible

any if

any longer

to

maintain that Plato regarded matter in

state as belonging to the world of necessary entities

not necessary then not eternal in

its

nature

;

for

uses the two terms as mutually implying one another.

would

which runs through

would warrant us compendious

title,

all

SOUL

his writings,

them

in giving to

“ The

,

It

and even hyper-

also be in opposition to that high

spirituality

and

he ever

and which

collectively, as their

its eternal

nite value ; its superior antiquity to matter

;

nature

the

;

its infi-

immense pre-

eminence of incorporeal when compared with corporeal substances,

verse in

and

itself,

wants of the It

is

the utter worthlessness

of the whole material uni or when not viewed as subservient to the higher

spirit .”

true that, in conformity with this ancient

A

A

maxim,


;;

278

De

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

nihilo nihil

veodcu

NIHIL.

— cue ov

— which, as

it

attempt to transfer

dvvarai ovdsv en rov pif ovrog ye stands in the Greek, unmarred by any to a

it

more imperfect language,

of the clearest axioms of reason

—he held

is

one

an elementary

to

more ancient than matter, even in its lowest organized state, and which he and others styled hyle (yXrj). Although he sometimes seems to use this term in principle, or apxv,

the sense of material or source, yet he could not have mean*

by

it

matter itself as something solid, extended, or resisting,

since he expressly denies to

it

any of these

properties, or,

indeed, any connexion in itself with the sensible world

regarding

it,

in fact, as belonging to the vorjrd rather than, ,

any sense, to the aloOrjrd. No sublimation or refinement of the conception of resisting substance, even when carried to its most aethereal limits not even the nebular

in

star dust* or

rudimentary

modern writers

tion of planetary for

it

was

not a

fluid of the universe,

systems

—made

which some

an aid in the construc-

find so convenient

the least approach to

it

mere difference of degree, but a metaphys-

ical entity altogether distinct.

It is

very

difficult to

under-

stand precisely what idea Plato and other Greek philoso-

phers attached *

This

is

to this

elementary hyle without form, exten,

a favourite term with those scientific

men who

are ever

talking about the progression of the universe from the lower to the higher, from the imperfect to the

more

zed to the organized, and, as they ought

perfect,

from the unorganiwould consist-

to say if they

ently follow out their theory, from matter to mind, and, finally, to a

God.

But, on another hypothesis of occasional retrogradations

(which no one

who

considers the vast extent of the universe can

deny to be possible, probable, and in perfect consistency with some unfathomable designs of its Eternal Author), the peculiar celestial appearances indicated by this phrase

may

remains of worlds going out, and in the

last stages of their

to inanity.

We

are too

much

be, in fact, the floating

in the condition

of the

amids, to determine with any satisfaction, unless

sons drawn from revelation, which theory

is

fly

we

approach

on the Pyr-

resort to rea-

correct, or

are physically nearer our descending or ascending node.

whether

we


THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

Some ap%h

sion, parts, or divisibility.

have been

to

was

in his

not matter

;

mind as the

279

NIHIL.

seems which

or principle

origin of matter,

and yet something separate from the Deity,

and existing with him before the formation of the outward

We

material universe.*

are confident, for the reasons as-

signed, that he did not hold to

its

necessary eternity, but

it

it as an emmore modern

not easy to determine whether he regarded

is

anation, a generation, or a creation, in the

sense of the word. as an apx?h or

first

Whether

was merely space regarded

it

principle, like the aneipov or infinite of ,

Anaximander or something similar to the unextended points in the modern theory of Boscovitch whether it was the manifestation of the Divine power in space, so that visible outward matter would be only those impressions upon ;

;

which are the

soul, of resistance, figure, &c.,

action of the Divine immaterial principle

result of the

— a theory which,

although ridiculed as Berkleian and absurd, gives us

which

results or properties of matter,

substantial purposes, while yet

all

it

is

spirit, in reality,

,

we may

suppose,

is

it

idea, that

is,

—

whatever

or

certain that Plato did not teach

the necessary self-existence

common

the

matter enough for

leaves

the only ovoid or essence in the universe else

all

of matter according to the

composed of

as a substance

solid, ex-

tended parts or particles, whether regarded as existing in an organized or a chaotic

The axiom De

state.

nihilo nihil or others similar to ,

found in his writings and those of Aristotle.

regarded

it

as a self-evident truth

book of his Physics, *

c. 4,

asserts that

In the passage of the Timaeus

from which matter was formed, yet

He

as though

it

also styles

it

it

it

still

first

was the common 123, he

as the matter or material

without any of

its

sensible

there the mother of the sensible world,

were the passive or negative

principle, while

the father, or positive power, which produced

time and space.

the

latter, in

which we have cited page

uses language which seems to describe properties.

and the

;

may be They both it,

its

God was

manifestations

in


280

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

the ancient naturalists, that nothing could come

opinion of

all

tnto being

from

which was not

that

rirNOMENOY

utiv, chq

ov

This

capable,

is

NIHIL.

ovdevdq

uolvt)

6o^a rchv ,7

rov

etc

grj

cj)Vot-

0NT02.

of being taken in the atheistic

is true,

it

by those who lay no emphasis on between the two substantive verbs, or who re-

or materializing sense

the contrast

gard the

latter, in this

terial, or of

mind the

expression, as significant of the ma-

the terminus a quo

radical distinction

between

explained page 171, and which Plato in

is

tence divested it

once of

at

really

is,

all

however, elgc

we keep

and yly voficu, as

we

shall find this sen-

objectionable features, and

as one of the clearest dictates of

This language may be, and has been, used by the

reason. ;

but

it

is

capable of being employed with far more

power against him.

Aristotle gives us the

er sense in another place,

where he

key

high

to this

says, with his usual

conciseness, chore eorai nplv yeveodcu

— that essential

necessary being must be before generation

;

Vide

Ausc ., i., 9. The position, thus understood, which forms the very sold of Plato’s philosophy,

Arista Phys that

or

other

or, in

words, that there must be a being before a becoming.

is

in

generally maintained by

important propositions,

all

presented, as

atheist

If,

.

.

namely, the superior rank and antiquity of incorporeal substance in respect to the very position

all

derived or generated things.

which he so strongly maintains

tenth book of The Laws,

It is

in this

to wit, “ that soul (in its largest

sense, and including the Divine Soul, as the source from

whence be said

all

which they may

other spirits proceed, and in

have existed

eter-

necessarily older than matter.”

In-

to pre-exist) must, of necessity,

nally, or that

mind

is

stead of being favourable to atheism, the grand conservative principle rect opposition to

it.

the axiom, in this sense, from the elfii

when

thus held,

which ever stands

The English

actly corresponding to

it is,

fails

in di-

properly to express

want of two words ex-

and yiyvopai

;

and when care-


,

,

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO lessly rendered

The

matter.

seems

it

281

NIHIL.

to favour the eternal existence of

Latin has the same defect

and hence the

;

by Lucretius to a purpose so different intended by Plato and the Grecian theists. This

atheistic perversion

from that

aiises from referring the term ovrog as well as yiyvopevov, to

when used

generated and phenomenal being, to which,

and especially

in this higher sense,

direct antithesis,

it

when

has no application

;

placed in such

we

and

are thus led

into the mistake that all the ancient philosophers taught

proceed from pre-existent matter.

that matter could only

The

idea conveyed by the proposition, ovdev

ovrog yeveoOai etc

or, if

,

the positive form

rov ovrog yeveoOac,

that of the Apostle,

may

be shown

were made by the

that the worlds

pr)

be very similar

By faith we Word of God

Hebrews, xi., 3

rov

preferred, 7ravra

is

to

etc

:

to

understand

,

so that the

made ( yeyovevat ) from things ichich do appear etc (paivopevov. There is another reading given by Griesbach, namely, etc prj paivopevw on what authority, however, we know not. This would change the things that are seen were not ,

<

sentence

to the positive form,

Greek maxim when taken

;

and bring

it

nearer

in the higher sense to

have alluded, but would not essentially vary It

would then be rendered,

By faith

its

to

the

which we meaning.

we understand

that the

worlds were formed so that the things which are seen were ,

made from

things which are not seen

;

or, in

other words, that

phenomenal was made from the invisible A slight attention will show a resemblance to the Greek maxim

the visible or

.

which does not the Apostle

at

first,

sight appear,

and that the language of

in several respects similar to the Platonic.

is

Besides the distinctions so frequently conveyed by ovra

and yiyvopeva the same ideas are variously expressed in ,

Plato by the terms opara or (patvopeva (the visible, or phenomenal), used in place of yiyvopeva

and aopara, aetdrj, synonymous with rd ovra. By these and kindred terms he ever opposes the visible to the or pi) (patvopeva used as

A

a 2

;


:

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

282

invisible, the

phenomenal

NIHIL.

to the essential, the ever- chan-

ging objects of sense (t« aloOrjra) to the vorjra, or those necessary, eternal things which are the objects of the intellect alone.

not supposed that Paul had any direct

It is

reference to Plato or to Platonic language

;

but

we

cannot

doubt that he uses these words in a similar philosophical sense, especially

when we compare

of expression, and

remember

the

many

coincidences

although originally deri-

that,

ved from Plato, these terms, in the Apostle’s time, had be-

come a part of the current scholastic phraseology, with which he must have been familiar. So, also, the words rd pi) fiXsnopEva ( the unseen things ), which we find Hebrews, xi., 1, and which are equivalent to pi) f^aivopEva in the third verse, are elsewhere used by the Apostle to express the same class of substances which are so frequently styled by Plato, rd ovra ra opara ra aetdrj rd del Kara ravrd nai cooavroyg Exovra. Compare 2d Coruithians iv., urj OKonovvrcov rjptiv rd pXEnopEva aXXa rd pi) /3Ae18 rd yap fiXenopEva upoonaipa rd ds pi) PXettotTogeva ,

,

,

,

:

i

*

,

psva alcbvta

—while

ice

aim not

hut at the things which are unseen

seen are temporal (belong

The

seen are eternal .

to

j

at the things

time )

; ;

for

which are seen

the things

the things

,

which are

which are un-

striking resemblance

which

this

some passages in the Phaedon cannot be mistaken Q&pev ovv 6i) 6vo Eidrj, rd pen oparov rb be aEideg nai to pev deibeg del Kara rd avrd exov rb 6e oparov u 7 6 e nors Kara ravrd “ Let us lay down two classes of being,

bears to

:

*

,

the seen

tions

;

and

unseen

)

the unseen, eternal in their rela-

the seen, never the same, but ever changing.”

don, 79, A.

mous.

the

,

The

terms are nearly,

IT pooKatpa is that

or, rather,

temporary

which

if

Phw-

not quite, synony.

exists in time, temporal,

— liable to change —the opposite of del

Kara rd avrd exovra. On the other hand, alcjvia is that which is eternal, not simply in duration, but in its very nature, as not

belonging to time

fixed,

unchangeable, and ne-


,

,

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO

283

NIHIL.

nard ravrd exovra. In these passages, neither Paul nor Plato mean by the unseen things a mere negation of sense, namely, that which is simply concealed cessary

del

from view as a present

fact, or

not seen because belonging

a future untried state of existence

to

but rather those

;

things that are in their very nature invisible that

w orld r

belong not to the sensible

one

come

to

objects of sense.

rov

— either the present or any

and reason as distinguished from the

See, also, Rom.,

20.

i.,

apocryphal book

find the doctrine of the hyle in the

entitled

The Wisdom

of Solomon, ch.

d[iop(j)OV

fcoofiov

18

xi.,

the Septuagint. version of Genesis,

The

rog nal duaraonevaorog.

i.,

2

rj

:

to the

which represented the hyle not only as incapable of being seen

may be more

if it

6e

y r\

Greek

also,

aopa-

doctrine,

invisible, but as

we

we

among

ever ought, in

philosophers, to render vXrj by

can conceive of it as an essence

abstracted from qualities, figure, and extension.

may have

fjv

could not be ranked

doubted whether

strict

our term matter, unless

earth out

Compare,

in fact, as not belonging at all to

;

the sensible world, even It

ual urtoaoa

word aoparog here could

only have been used in reference

translating the

:

vXrjg — “ having built the

of the unformed, or, rather, formless hyle.”

the vorjrd.

which

— the vorjrd as distinguished from the aioQrjrd

or the objects of faith

We

is,

created such an essence

That God

we have no

right to

deny, merely because our minds can form no conception of it

;

and

if it

may exist

as the originally created ground of

subsequently generated or created material things

all

when

manifested in time and space and clothed with qualities by that Eternal Spirit,

which,

we are told in Genesis, hovered may the doctrine of Plato and

over the chaotic deep, then of the

more

spiritual writers of the ancient

world be in ac-

cordance with the philosophy of Paul, Hebrews,

Our only

xi., 3.

safety here is in clinging to the Bible, and to

the fair interpretation of Genesis,

i.,

1.

Human

reason

left


284

THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO tremendous

to itself, finds

when

difficulties in

NIHIL.

both views

and

;

she rejects the aid of revelation, must shrink from

The

taking a decided position on either.

belief that mat-

any form, as an independent principle, is eternal, or anything is such apart from God, carries us to atheism,

ter in

that

although

it

ent theist.

may be On the

maintained by an honest yet inconsist-

existed alone , or that there

seems

draw

to

after

it

all ,

was a time

to

be all or ,

and that therefore creation ;

other words,

or, in

,

the strange consequences that he

never could have ceased being

God once when God was all

other hand, the doctrine that

we

have become

less

but an extension of his

is

are in danger of a pantheism

seemingly more philosophical, yet less favourable than the inconsistent theism which

Reason

reels

than

to piety

we have condemned.

and staggers here like a drunken man, and

if

she will walk alone, finds a dark abyss on each side of her

narrow path, stumbling.

into

which she

is

perpetually in danger of

There may possibly be a way between these

two conclusions, but her eyes are too dim

The

to discover

Scriptures most solemnly declare that

into being things that

,

quence which reason,

lation,

ready

if

she will trust herself alone, can

We

it.

on the doctrine of

at

evil,

must, therefore, on

keep close

in collision with

interpretation

to reve-

a moment’s warning, and without a mur-

mur, to give up our most darling philosophy, all

did call

were not and yet denies the conse-

hardly avoid deducing from this subject, as

God

it.

would

any

truth

if

comes

at

which a sound and unforced

Neither should

elicit.

for our Protestantism, even

if it

we

which differs from Church by which we ever mean

interpretation ;

we

be afraid

are reluctant to adopt any that long received

by the

that line of the good,

pious, and learned in the Scriptures, in all

ages,

and

which no

spiritually-minded reader of ecclesiastical history can ever fail to trace.

that the

In such a case as this, too,

most pious interpretation

is

we

most likely

should feel to

be true.


THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO even

we

if it

285

NIHIL.

should not seem to be the most philosophical.

If

cannot comprehend a positive enunciation of the great

truth,

we must

be content with a negative one, better adapt-

ed, perhaps, to the present state of our faculties,

and

believe

made of things which do

by faith that the worlds were not appear.

There

which Plato speaks act of God, and that, too,

a passage in the Sophista in

is

by the direct which before were not.

plainly of a creation

from things

is

It

very

much

the style of the Scriptures, and no better refutation of

of the charges against

him could be given than

declaration from this undoubted dialogue dvrjra nai <pvra boa r’ erd yrjg

'

,

rj

onepparejv nai pi^ebv

tieov brjpiovpyovvrog tyrjoopev

Trporepov ovk,

and

Travra

boa a'lpvxa cv yy £vviorarat ptiv aXXov nvorepov TirNESGAI

(pvsrat, nai

vog

etc

’GNTA

—“ In

regard to

all

mortal animals

whatever things grow from roots and seeds,

plants,

whatever inanimate organizations exist in the earth

we

some

this clear

Zcioa dij

:

in

— can

say that from any other cause than the creating

they come into being which

before icere not ?”

God

Sophista,

265, B.

Page

58,

Line

3. orreog

oa evdaipov ovoia is

rj

taking place in such a

manner

pertains to the universal life (or

This

blessed.”

is

obscure passage. obtmgat status. pression, life

rj

rov iravroq fUcp vndpxov-

rep

—“All generation, life

of the whole)

the best rendering

Ast translates

It is

not clear

ovoia vnapxovoa

of the universe taken

or every generation,

that the essence

it,

we

which

may be

can give of

this

ut universes vitcefelix

what Plato means by the exnavrdg /3icp whether the

rep

;

collectively as the

sum

of

all

which exists in which case it would seem that (3iog rov navrog would have been sufficient or whether he intends

by ovoia something higher than from which the

life

words, the Universal

this,

namely, that essence

of the universe proceeds, or, in other

Numen

or Deity himself.

If the last


286

DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.

view be the true one, Plato approaches a higher doctrine than has ever been supposed to be taught in his pages.

LI.

Doctrine that the Parts are

made

Whole as set forth by Plato and as viewed by Modern Rationalists and The Converse Doctrine that the Whole is Semi-inf dels only for the

,

,

.

,

Parts examined with reference

also for the

to the

,

Mutual

Harmony of both. Page

Line

58,

4.

ova eveica gov yiyvo\ievr\ ov 6e ,

euecvov.

The

whole

unquestionably true, especially

is

reference to physical ends alone.

made for the when viewed in

It is,

however, only a

portion of the truth, and when, as in Pope’s

and

evstca,

doctrine that the parts are

in the writings of

many

Essay on Man,

scientific religionists,

it

is

un-

by any other views of the system of the universe, Init may be very far from any true religious tendency. it minds, might easily coalesce some with atheism deed, in and although its advocates may sometimes seem to talk dequalified

;

voutly,

it

has

much more

than of piety about

it.

of the appearance of philosophy

It is

a speculative tenet, not

much

dwelt upon in the Scriptures, and, instead of being directly

expressed there,

which, as

is

we have

rather implied in a higher truth, to

intimated, Plato might have

aiming in the language referred

been darkly

to in the close of the pre-

ceding dissertation, namely, the doctrine that the whole self with all

parts severally and collectively

its

for itself, but for a manifestation of the

blessedness

;

,

is

it-

made, not

Divine glory and

a doctrine, the object of most bitter dislike to

which contains an inexpressible mind that will have no philosophy

the frigid rationalist, but

moral sublimity

which is not Volume.

in

to the

accordance with the teachings of the Sacred


DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.

287

Irrespective, however, of this higher truth, the proposi

which

tion here set forth has a converse true,

namely, that

the whole is

made for

we have

styled

converse.

its

it,

be maintained even on physical grounds. product,” says Kant, “ is that in

and means” that

tually ends

those below

them

is this

is

which

is,

all

An

It

might

organized

the parts are

mu-

not merely in respect to

in the scale, but each severally and re-

ciprocally in respect to

sense

This

the 'parts.

in that case they could not

not the opposite of the other, for

both be true, but, as

also equally

is

all

In a

the rest.

much

higher

true of that organized product so appropriately

by the scholastic name The Universe. Even on may we say, that the whole is as much necessary to make each part what it is, and without which it could not have been what it is, as the parts are styled

physical grounds, then,

for the

completion and harmony of the whole.

It is

chiefly,

however, in a moral point of view that

this

converse doctrine assumes a most glorious and thrilling

in-

There are some seemingly most inconsiderable portions of the creation for which we are assured that all terest.

things are working together for good

Qsdv

IIANTA

So, also,

—ALL

1

:

Corinthians,

iii.,

things are yours

;

IIANTA

21, 22:

whether

rolg ayairtioL rov

Romans,

ovvepyel elg ayaOov.

viii.,

28.

vptiv eoriv

THE WORLD,* or life, ALL are yours — nav-

or death, or the present, or the future,

ra vpcov eonv. There are again, on tj^e other hand, other parts, of no higher rank, for which all things are working together for evil. writers of

“ If nothing else,” says one of the ablest

modern times, “if nothing

give us consequence.”

else, our sins shall

Although the other doctrine

may be

speculatively correct, yet these latter are the views

have the greatest prominence given

The Author of the

to

them

Bible does not intend that

which

in revelation.

man

shall hide

himself in an affectation of insignificance, or cover up his *

Here Koayog must certainly be taken

in its largest sense.


DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.

288

individualism in what the sentimental humility of his phi-

losophy might style his subserviency to the interests of the universal

we

life.

The

proposition, against the abuse of

are contending, might seem, at

first

which

view, to be ground-

ed on more enlarged and comprehensive notions of existence.

It

has so

much

to

say of the

great'

whole, and of a

kind of Strauss-ian immortality, which belongs rather than to the individual parts. true in a physical aspect

;

It is,

and when

it

to the

race

however, mainly

occupies the mind

alone, or the moral importance of the individual is not held

up as a corrective, ism

it

becomes a cold and speculative

— a physical fatalism

,

fatal-

in the worst sense of the term,

which would bind both matter and spirit, not by the decrees * of a moral governor, founded on moral reasons, but in the adamantine chain of law viewed as something apart from God.

—

self,

a fatalism

should

in the

it

which would regard even the Deity him-

graciously admit his existence, as included

machinery of the universe.

sesses but

little, if

Such a

doctrine pos-

any, superiority over the creed of the

atheist.

Akin to this is that profession of abstract benevolence which loses sight of individuality in the contemplation of masses or of the great whole, and happiness only as contributing the universe.

This, although

to the it

speculative intellec^, or to those

philosophy,

is

and religious

affects to regard individual

general happiness of

may

be agreeable

whose theology

nevertheless most chilling to affections.

Its

all

at the

but a

the moral

concrete selfishness

hardened and rendered darker, while,

to the

is

same

is

only

time,

it

more and more concealed from the conscience, by the Its false warmth and glow of an abstract benevolence. is

love to

God

is

only a pantheistic rapture, instead of a feel-

ing of gratitude to a personal Redeemer,

man *

is

not that love to one’s neighbour

Its

affection to

which the Bible en-

This unquestionably was the primitive sense of the word fatum.


DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE. joins,

commencing with the domestic and

from whence, as from a centre,

social relations,

on every

radiates

it

289

side,

ever filling, but never attempting to overflow the limits of its

Those

practical capabilities for good.

of

whom we

are

— and these declaimers on the greatest good of the numerous —have really greatest number are becoming speaking

quite

The word

no neighbour, no vicinus no vicinage. ,

gether too narrow in

The

views.

its

individual

meaning

man who

to suit their

fell

among

thieves would

Have been too small and too contiguous an object as can only

aim

promoting some great scheme

at

developments of the race.

them

to

in

for

such

higher

Children, family, home, coun-

which

pant so earnestly and so incessantly for the

Such a philosophical

welfare of being in the abstract.

ology

for

are but fetters to that reforming zeal

try, friends, all

leads

is alto-

expanded

may make

some fancied

the-

a selfish mystic or pantheist, luxuriating vision of universal

good

;

it

may make,

under certain circumstances, a raving fanatic, furious in denunciation in proportion to the self-righteousness of his abstract philanthropy

will produce,

;

but

it

never has produced, and never

an humble, devoted, and warm-hearted Chris-

tian.

Plato does, indeed, teach this doctrine of the parts for the

whole, and qualified

by

we have its

admitted

converse.

it

to

be true

when

rightly

Other writings, however, of our

philosopher, furnish most abundant evidence that he did

hold this converse proposition as equally sound with the

now

which was called forth by the peculiar nature of the objection against which he is here one he

is

contending.

presenting, and

He

tells

the profane scoffer that this Special

Providence will not overlook him, because, though small,

he

is

yet important as a part of the great whole.

When

presenting, however, in other places, the moral aspect of the doctrine, he adopts a very different line of argument.

Poverty, sickness, health,

life,

B

B

death,

ALL THINGS,

he


290

DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.

tells us,

are for the righteous

man

beloved of Heaven.

language possesses a striking resemblance T<5 de

the Scriptures

:

TA

(bg

ylyveoOai

0EO4>IAEI ov%

olov re dpcora

to

some

Hia

parts of

bpLoXoyrjoopLev

ITAN

Qvrcog dpa vno^Tjnreov

;

Kept tov dmaiov dvdpog edv re ev nevta yiyvrpTai lav rs

ev voootg

ravra

elg

rj

tlvl aAAo) rtiv donovvrcov natitiv

n

dyaOov

reXeyrrioei ££jvtl

fj

teal

tovtgj

dnodavovrt.

ovrcovv Tzepi rov adltcov ravavrla rovrcov del dtavoelodac.

Physically , he would teach us,

Republic 613, A., B. ,

is

man

but an atom, subserving the interests of the great whole

morally

,

even a universe of mind and matter,

all things,

working together

;

is

for his individual exaltation or degrada-

Instead of dwindling into the insignificance of an in-

tion.

finitesimal,

he rises in proportion

universe of which he

comes of the

is

to the

magnitude of that

a member, or, in other words, be-

greatest individual importance as a rational

part of the greatest whole.

These apparently opposite yet

strictly consistent

are likewise equally true in science.

The whole

be fully understood without the parts, and

some a

less important, that

a whole, that

sum,

is

is,

priori

it

is

views cannot

an axiom no

knowledge of a whole as

as a unity, and not merely an arithmetical

necessary

to

an understanding of the

parts.

It is

and introaction of such a by the mutual mental synthesis and analysis, that any true progress is action, reaction,

made

in science.

When

either is neglected, or the balance

destroyed, science becomes, on the one hand, an ep,nei-

h aXoyog* an irrational empiricism or evaporates, on the other, into empty a priori speculation. Page 58, Line 5, Ila^ yap larpog nal nag evre^vog drjpuovpyog. The comparison adopted shows that Plato views the doctrine which the present state of his argument re,

quires

him

to

advance, namely, that the parts are

the whole, rather in

its

physical than

* Gorgias, 464,

D

r

its

made

moral aspect.

for It


E

;

DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE. is

291

not the KvdEpvrjTrjg the orparrjyog the commander, the ,

,

governor, the pilot

— comparisons so often employed by him and

in illustration of moral

political relations

— but the phy-

whose efforts are directed to the physical perfection of the work in which they are engaged, or that physical harmony which consists in the subserviensician, the artist, all of

to the

cy of the parts

'This

siderations.

of those arts

oXov.

It

is

whole irrespective of any moral conthe order of physical production, and

and sciences that copy from

it

— pipog evena

forms the parts for the whole, and not the whole,

in any sense , for the parts.

Line

6.

npdg to

fcoivq fvvrelvov

(3 eXtlotov.

Stephanus would both read ^vvte'lvcov in refer

it

The common

to the artist.

though the

literal

on the whole, erly has for

to

its

It

may

this place,

and

reading, however, al-

version in English

very harsh, seems,

is

be deserving of preference.

subject the work than the

the example a few lines back

Ast and

It

more prop-

workman

as in

;

— popiov eig to rcdv %vvtelvei.

here be taken with (3eXtlotov

would be freely translated, doeth

9

and the sentence

all things for the

whole in ,

common good that the physical good the good of the machine

respect to that best end which aims at the is,

in this case,

,

or structure as a structure, moral reasons, strictly such, not

The

being here brought into view. carried no farther,

you

;

would be

this

argument, then,

God

:

when

will not overlook

his special providence is ever directed towards you,

because, however insignificant you yourself,

you are wanted

cancy in the great well adapted.

to

structure,

You may

may

be, physically, in

up some place or some vafor which nothing else is so

fill

therefore seem to be laid aside,

you are not forgotten his eye is upon you. Line 8. dyvocov onrj to tt pl oe aptOTOV tco ttovtI %vpIt is somewhat uncertain whether apLOTOV baivEi Kal oot.

but

here

is to

i-vudaivei.

be taken with to

izEpl

^vpbalvei however, 9

oe or with tco ttovtI or ,

may

,

be rendered,

to

con


;

292 OBJECTION FROM THE EXTENT OF THE UNIVERSE. good of anything, or to the accomplishment of any purpose without any such qualifying word as apiorov. tribute to the ,

It

makes but

view

we

take of

ing version to

:

or, if

we

and, on the whole,

it,

You

yourself which

own good

difference, in the general sense,

little

are vexed not knowing ,

is best for the

how

good both of

hazard, then, of a

little

that , in relation

whole contributes also

to

your

it

may

to ’thee best

con-

,

we connect dptorov with

^vpbalvec,

be read, not knowing how that which relates tributes to the

what

prefer the follow-

and of thee. At the we would give the fol-

the whole

repetition,

lowing free paraphrase of the substance of the whole passage

the latter part, however, or converse doctrine, being

;

rather implied than expressed, although

it

may

found ia other parts of the Platonic dialogues

:

be clearly Physically,

thou art but an insignificant pebble in the great rcrlopa, or building of the universe (see the comparison of the XlOol

and XtdoAoyoi page ,

55), yet forming a necessary part in

the joinings and compactness of the whole, even absolutely essential to the

whole as a whole, and which the builder

and keeper cannot neglect without risking the ruin of the

whole thee,

:

morally, the great universe

and reciprocally

intended, with

for

each of

its

is

also all

made

rational parts

;

for

was

it

other parts, to have a bearing upon thy

all its

blessedness or misery, according as thou violatest or re-

mainest in concord with

harmony thou

its

moral harmony

shalt ever subserve,

;

whatever

its

physical

may

be thy

condition or thy course.

LII.

drawn from

Atheistic Objection

Page .

59,

Line 6

r .

the

Extent of the Universe.

Hin£p av e^oi Xoyov paor&vr] deoTg

^)v ndvrcdv, TavTy) pot 6okg) (frpa&tv

explaining in what

way

—“

I

think that

I

am

ease in the administration of tho


!

OBJECTION FROM THE EXTENT OF THE UNIVERSE. 293 Divine providence

is, may be shown The Epicureans and have been much concerned les‘„

may have

reason, that

be in accordance with reason.”

to

semi-atheists, in all ages,

government of the universe should

the physical and moral

be burdensome

how

it

was unable

Lucretius

to the Deity.

to

He

could consist with the happiness of the Gods.

therefore most reverently relieves

them

see

of all share in so

troublesome a business, and, with pious concern for their ease and quiet, commits the world into the hands of Nature Quae bene cognita

si

:

teneas, Natura videtur

Libera continuo, dominis privata superbis

,

Ipsa sua per se sponte omnia Diis agere expers.

Nam,

pro saneta

Deum

tranquilla pectora pace

Quae placidum degunt aevom, multumque serenum

Quis regere immensi

Indu

manu

summam,

quis habere profundi

validas potis est moderanter habenas?

Quis pariter ccelos omneis convortere, et omneis Ignibus aetheriis terras subfire feraceis

Omnibus inve

omni tempore

locis esse

Nubibus ut tenebras

faciat, ccelique

;

praesto,

serena

Concutiat sonitul turn fulmina mittat, et aedeis Ipse suas disturbet Saeviat,

;

et in deserta

exercens telum

Praeterit,

recedens

quod saepe nocenteis

;

exanimatque indignos, inque merenteis Lucretius

,

1

1089.

lib. ii.,

Horace entertained the same very elevated notions

in re-

gard to -natural laws and the abstraction of the Deity from all

a

the concerns of this world, until he

little

was frightened

unphilosophical piety by happening to hear

der on a clear day.

See Ode xxxiv. of the

first

it

into

thun-

book, com-

mencing Parcus Deorum cultor Insanientis

dum

et infrequens,

sapientiae

Consultus erro

He seems religious

clude?

is

to

fit,

have been brought by his

fright into quite a

and the sentiment with which the ode con-

not only a devout acknowledgment of a special

B

b 2


:

294

EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE.

providence, but

is

expressed in language bearing a striking

some of those many passages in the Bible which speak of depressing the proud and elevating the

resemblance

to

lowly Valet ima summis Mutare et insignem attenuat Deus, Obscura promens bine apicem rapax Fortuna cum stridore acuto :

Sustulit

;

hie posuisse gaudet.

His use, however, of the word Fortuna shows that he could not altogether divest himself of his old atheistic habit, even

when he

Some

attempts to talk religiously.

scientifico-religious

of our

modern

works occasionally exhibit a similar

mixture of the Jew’s language with the dialect of Ashdod.

LIII.

Explanation of a

Difficult

which resolve Morality

and regard

Penal

all

Passage. into

Remarks on

an Obedience

those

Views

Physical Laws,

to

Punishment as Consequential instead of

.

Page

59,

Line

7.

Ei

pev yap

repoq

to oXov

This obscure passage may be thus paraphrased

any Power, having constantly regard only

,

k.

:

to the

t. A.

For

whole,

should ever fashion his work by suddenly transforming things

from

as, for

example, by forming

—and

should not* proceed by (analyzing)

fire

if

all

once frozen water

at

many

things out of one, or (compounding) one thing out of many,

so that they might thus partake of a

even a third generation

of each displaced arrangement blit

now

* Ast,

a second, and

first,

— in that case, the would be

transformations

infinite in

number

;

(that is, in the actual established course of things)

by taking,

in this place,

tj

for the

common

reading, yy, has

completely changed and perverted the whole meaning of the passage*


;

EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE. there

is

295

a wonderful ease in the administration of the Uni-

versal Guardian.”

We

will proceed to give

what seems

to us the general

sense of the passage, and of what follows tance, before going into

and phrases.

It

seems

some

for

dis-

any particular comment on words be

to

this

that the Divine administration,

most minute

it

the speaker

:

showing

is

even when extended

to the

conducted with ease, in conse-

particular, is

quence of being a special superintendence carried on by

may

general laws or media, whatever they ternal operation of powers

themselves

;

so that there

which he is

lias

be, or

by the

in-

implanted in things

no necessity

for

supposing any

great or general change, or sudden transformation in the state of things

(what would be called,

in

modern phraseol-

ogy, a miraculous interposition), for the rectification of natural or the if it

punishment of moral

evil

— a transposition which,

took place in every case, would call for an infinite

number of changes,

and as mi-

differing in every instance,

raculous as the immediate production of cold water* or ice

we have given vdop e/i'ipvxov. The common readand those who maintain it would render vdop e/iipv-

* In the text,

ing Xov,

is epipvxov,

aquam animatam

to

make any sense

of which they refer us to

the doctrine of Thales and Heraclitus, that water ciple of all things,

and

who

also said

was

something about

into water, being the universal semen.

What

the changes and transformations of matter has,

is told it is

is

and obscure

only verbal.

The

first prin-

fire,

changed

us here about

true,

resemblance to the flowing philosophy of Heraclitus.

semblance

the

some

Still,

little

this re-

would be too far-fetched which the Athenian is la-

illustration

to suit the present place, in

bouring to give his hearers as clear an idea as possible of this

diffi-

would also be giving a sanction to Heraclitus which Plato could never have intended and besides all this, it is very difficult to perceive how it would present any illustration at all of the We therefore altogether prefer the other subject he has in hand. reading, which only requires the change of an accent, and which has some authority of manuscripts in its favour. ’Eju’ipvxov would be a cult position.

It

;

participle of the verb epijjvx «, to cool to freeze, ,

and

may

be taken as


;

296 PUNISHMENT OF from

fire,

HOW FAR CONSEQUENTIAL.

SIN

without any of the intervening generations

thus

;

giving to rational beings no grounds for physical science,

knowledge of the Divine operations, and making every act of Providence, instead of moving in harmony with, tc jar and displace every preceding and temporary arrangeor a

ment.

Instead of

this, as

we

are told in

what

he

follows,

has so constituted things, not by any innate necessities of

own

physical laws, but by his evil will find in

absolute

fiat,

that

good and

themselves, both in this world and in the

pre-arrangements of Hades, their appropriate reward, and will each seek and find

vice will diverge, at

its

proper place and level

first slightly,

namely,

;

from the level plane, and

thence descending with constantly-accelerated velocity /

3dGog ), will find

its

ultimate place in the terrors of

'elg

(

Hades

while virtue, mingling with the Divine nature, will ascend purer region, and through different degrees of blessed-

to a

ness will

at last arrive at a perfectly

holy or separate

state,

totcov ayiov oXov.

This doctrine of it,

is

to the for

Plato,

indeed sublime.

we

one

and the mode

Still, it

in

which he

states

needs a qualification similar

applied to a previous view

— a qualification

which there may be found abundant support in other where he maintains the strictly

portions of his writings

penal nature of punishment, as in the close of the Gorgias

and the Republic. presented

The

doctrine

which seems

the truth, but not the whole truth.

is

be here

to

Standing

thus alone, and without the corrective influence of any higher views,

it

is

semi-infidels,

a favourite

scheme with many of our modern

who would

resolve

equivalent to the adjective frigidus. thing

more by

it

all

morality into an obe-

We doubt

if

Plato meant any-

than a strong example derived from substances ap-

parently so remote, although capable of passing into each othei

through a succession of physical media and generations. The othei

and more common reading probably arose from some ignorant scriber,

who

did not understand the passage, and to

animatam, appeared more philosophical.

whom

tran-

ÂŁ/u'ipvxov

l


PUNISHMENT OF dience

or a co-operation with, physical laws, and

to,

the partiality with which

at

They

feel that

it

has no terror

away

utterly takes

it

is

the moral

all

are pleased with

it

it

cording

De

some of the

was the

With

,

and

that

power which belongs to At the same time, they

they have merely revived a

fact,

who

old heathen philosophers,

man

great duty and chief end of

nature

to

Finibus

do not wonder

as a wonderful discovery of the nine-

teenth century, when, in

that

all

entertained by such.

for a sinning soul,

the ideas of penalty and retribution.

doctrine of

We

into natural consequence.

punishment

it

HOW FAR CONSEQUENTIAL. 297

SIN

— Vivere secundum naluram.

held

to live ac-

Vide Cicero

,

v., 9.

writers of this stamp

it

is

the whole.

ployed by Plato and Bishop Butler,

em-

only held in sub-

is

it

When

serviency to higher qualifying views of the Divine govern-

ment, with which

we ram

it

would confine the maxim,

allude

ence

to the

;

whom

whereas, in obedi-

law of a higher nature, man

contend with the external world.

to

secundum natu -

vivere

entirely to the nature without us

,

Those

entirely consistent.

is

is

The

often called to

perfection of his

moral being requires that he should often contemn the law of gravitation, and sometimes even submit that most exquisite

handiwork, his body, with

all

ural laws, to be disfigured, ruined,

the flames of martyrdom.

and

rality of nature, it

most wonderful

nat-

there

is

a truth in this

in

mo-

only by refusing to associate with

it is

any higher principle

Still,

its

and utterly broken up

that

such writers convert

it

into a

most pernicious falsehood. So, also,

may we

ishment of sin

is

the physical consequence of sin

found in the Bible. reap.”

corruption

He :

admit, that the doctrine, that the pun-

What a man

soweth that shall he also ,

that soweth to the flesh , shall

he that soweth

reap everlasting

life.”

also teaches with

itself, is

of the flesh reap

to the Spirit , shall

Revelation declares

of

the Spirit

all this,

but

much more frequency and with more

it

sol-


298 PUNISHMENT OF

emn emphasis,

HOW FAR

SIN

that the

CONSEQUENTIAL.

punishment of sin

in the strictest

is,

“

sense, a penalty pronounced by a sovereign judge.

wicked shall go away into everlasting fire, the devil

and

when they

his

angels�

The

PREP ARED for

Physical consequences, even

are strictly such,

may be

regarded as but pre-

appointed executioners, deriving their powers, and their

connexion with the

sin,

from no inward necessities, but

God

from the sovereign pre-arrangements of

law of which they may thus form the penalty both in the order of nature and of time, to the natural world.

when

it

The

while the

;

all

is anterior,

the laws of

great absurdity of this scheme,

thus stands alone, consists in this, that

it

the

is

penalty which creates the sin.

because

men

it

will be followed

It is wrong to eat too much, by a pain in the stomach and ;

are punished with a pain in the stomach, because they

have been guilty of a breach of the pain, and

you remove the

self to feel that to a

its

Remove

physical law.

Can any one bring him-

sin.

anything like this would be true in regard

breach of the law of charity, or that malevolence would

change

its

moral character, though

an eternity of pleasure

?

it

could be followed by

If the violation of a physical law

proceeds from a disposition to contemn a

known

ment of God, whatever may have been the arrangement,

it

arrange-

object of that

belongs to another department, and must be

transferred to a tribunal higher than the natural. It is

by overlooking the nature of punishment as

retributive, notwithstanding the

mode

of

its infliction,

this doctrine of consequential suffering strips the

law of infidels

all its

that

Divine

majesty, and becomes such a favourite with

and neologists. There

employed, as

strictly

it

qualifications to

sometimes

is

is

no terror in

even in the

it

pulpit,

which we have adverted,

its

;

and when

without the

immediate

ef-

and stupefaction of the conscience, rather than any alarm or true conviction of sin. There is, however, no inconsistency in the belief of both views. The punishment

fect is ease


PUNISHMENT OF SIN IIOW FAR CONSEQUENTIAL. 299 inflicted

by human government would be no

utive penalty of positive law, although

less the retrib-

preordained

its

ar-

rangements were such, that the path of every transgressor

was

literally

beset with snares, or that

it

finally brought

him, without arrest or the aid of the executioner, directly to the prison or the gallows.

Page

59,

Line

npog to oXov del pXenuv

7.

There

continually to the whole.” tive assertion.

is

— “ Looking

implied here a nega-

equivalent to saying, “ and having no-

It is

The meaning seems

thing else in view.”

to be, that the

process here mentioned might perhaps be adopted,

gard was had tion to the

to the parts, as parts, or

whole.

if

no

re-

except in their rela-

In that case, the Divine administration

might perhaps proceed by these sudden transformations.

each act of Providence avast number of purposes,

But as

in

direct

and

collateral, are to

be kept in view, and no one

be effected by disturbing or displacing another, there

to is

need of an arrangement that shall be carried on by media, so that one move on the great chess-board (see note 6, p. 59)

may accomplish many

ends, instead of requiring separ-

ate transpositions in every case.

The

philosopher evidently perceives a great difficulty

tending any explanation that can be given.

We

at-

can never,

perhaps, fully understand the harmonious connexion be-

tween a providence carried on by general laws, operating, in the main, with uninterrupted regularity, and a minute attention to those individual cases which may be made the subjects of special prayer and special judgments. It be-

same

class of mysterious truths, and presents

same apparent

contradictions, as the doctrine of the Di-

longs to that the

vine foreknowledge or foreordination,

nexion with the freedom of the goodness,

ence of

when

evil.

human

when viewed

in con-

will, or of the

Divine

attempted to be reconciled with the exist-

Why

should

rights of reason in religion,

men

be so clamorous for the

when,

in so

many

cases, she


,

300 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN dvd)Xe0pOg AND herself declares her

own

aubviog.

insufficiency as the highest lesson

she can teach us, and delivers us over, either

skep-

to total

by which we receive truths apparently opposed, or whose point of connexion is beyond our radius of mental vision because, without this, we must give up other truths which our moral nature can only yield ticism, or to that faith

;

at the price of total

to

darkness on

most concerns us

all that

know.

LIV. The

Word

’A vtiXedpog as distinguished from Aluviog.

Re-

markable Passage in the Timceus.

Page

60, Line 3. avddXeOpov de ov yevopevov aXX’ ovu

There

aicjviov.

is

intended here an important distinction

between alibvtov and av&XeQpov.

which

is in its

The

former means that

very nature eternal, not subject, in any

to generation or

decay, and, in

fact,

sensfe,

having no reference

to

%povog, or time regarded as proceeding by succession.

of time as given in the Timceus, 37, E., and remarks upon it, page 223.) ? A v&XeQpov, on the other (

See

the definition

hand, suggests, from

its

composite, although,

when used without

be applied

to that

etymology, the idea of something

which

It signifies indestructible,

is

precision,

it

may

possessed of a higher nature.

not in

itself,

but because the thing

of which it is predicated is upheld and maintained in being by the Supreme Power, and thus rendered capable of en-

during through an endless succession, although never ly ald)VLov or eternal in Ast, has respect

He would tuation

:

to

essence.

Kara vopov $eoi,

aluviov alone, and not

to

says

av&XeOpov.

read according to the following order and punc-

i/jvftTjv teal

Kadtinep ol

its

strict-

ocbpa, avibXedpov yevopevov,

ov,

Kara vopov ovreg deoi, aiibvtov — indestructible

yet not eternal as the

,

Gods

are.

This contrast between


•:

REMARKABLE PASSAGE FROM THE TIM^IUS.

301

Gods and men seems plausible, and yet we are satisfied wrong. Our opinion is founded upon that passage of the Timaeus, in which the Eternal Father thus ad-

that Ast is

whom

dresses the inferior deities to

0 eol

he had given being

drjpcovpyog, narrjp re epycov,

tietiv, G)v eyd)

a

yevopeva dXvra epov ye deXovrog. to pev ovv ,

,

uav Xvtov. to ye

prjv tcaXtig

,

eOeXeiv, Hanoi). 6l

pev ovn

9

a

yeyevifoOe

oeoOe ye, ovde rev^eode Zavarov poipag

BOYAHDE£22

pei^ovog

reg, erceivov olg ore

Gods, of

whom

ite)

their existence

will

I

,

which

is

(or

:

dfj

XvOrj -

TH2 ’EMHS

,

tevpiorepov Xa^ov-

Ye Gods

of

the Father, as of

from me, are indis(or

compos-

nevertheless, to choose to

well harmonized, and works well,

is

For which reasons, and since

the part of an evil being.

ye were made

deOev

’A0ANATOI

Everything bound

it.

capable of dissolution

is

dissolve that

teal

Maker and

the

works which, deriving soluble as long as

deopov

eyiyveode cvvedeloOe

am

I

en

dr)

epov

dppooOev aal e%ov ev Xvetv

teal eneiirep

ovd’ aXvroi to Tzapirav. ovrt pev

£(7T£,

6l ’

had a beginning of your existence), ye

are not immortal (in yourselves), nor in every respect indissoluble.

Still,

ye

doom

experience the

shall not be dissolved, nor shall

of death, partaking,

IN

MY

ye

WILL,

more powerful than those things by which ye were bound (or of which ye were comof a bond of

posed)

That

life

when ye

is,

stronger and

received your being.”

the permanence of

all

Timceus, 41, A.

created things, from the

highest to the lowest, rests on the moral attributes of the Deity. all

In his goodness they have a stronger bond than in

the laws or necessities of nature and of things.

On this

depends the continued existence not only of man, but of Gods,

or, in

the

more sublime language of Scripture, of

Thrones, Dominions, Principalities, and Powers.

Kara vopov (

ovreg Qeoc

fatum ) on which

:

According

their existence

depended.

the similar expression, page 61, line 7

C

c

to the

:

decree or fate

Compare, also

tiara ttjv rrjg eipap

;


;

:

302 GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, pevyg

AND

ald)VLOg

This confirms the view

t&I-lv nal vojjlov.

.

we have

They were dependent on

taken above in respect to $eof. this iaw,

ai(OV

and not on any innate immortality.

has about the same meaning with

[iolpa,

No^o^* here

which, according

more ancient creed of the Greeks, meant simply

to the

we

This,

Divine decree.

are prepared to show, is

the

its sig-

Homer, and not a physical fate, as many connal ocbpa are to be taken colThe wor^s

nification in

tend.

lectively for all animated beings

The

thus constituted.

continued existence of soul and body, severally or united,

whether

any one

in the present state or in

pendent on the Eternal Father,

who

to

come,

de-

thus represented as

is

speaking in this sublime passage from the Timaeus

—who

aluviog in the highest sense of that epithet,

alone

is strictly

or, as

the Apostle declares,

aQavaotav

is

1

Timothy

,

vi.,

—who alone hath immortality

16, 6 pbovog

.

LV. The Greek Words for Eternity Ald)V

is

compounded of 9

lib. i., c. ix., 10).

A el,

A ld)v

,

and

A Icbvcog.

del cov (see Aristotle

ever, is

from

aco, deco,

,

De

Coelo,

or drjpt , sig-

nifying, primarily, to blow, to breathe, secondly, to live, to v

pass or spend time. life, to

A(o seems also related to

Homer

in the general sense of existence. in the

verb

is

uses

ao

or aeo)

second of the above meanings, as in the Odyssey,

151, and

iii.,

dlo), to feel

from whence some would derive alcbv

be conscious

490:

v

EvOa

6s vvnr

9

aeoav.

Because

this

thus used, in several places in the Odyssey, in con-

nexion with vv%, some lexicographers absurdly render it to It is, however, only thus employed, because by sleep .

becomes a matter of distinct observation and consciousness more than by day. Hence, as the context shows, it is generally used of wake-

night the flow or succession of time

ful

and anxious nights


GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, aiuv AND

N v/cra

pev deaauev, xaherr a cppsalv oppatvovreg. Odyssey

’Ael,

from

303

al&VLOg.

this derivation,

151.

iii.,

,

would present the idea of

contin-

uous being, of a going on, or succession ; and as a particle of time, is ever used of that which is boundless or undefined

;

not so

much

that

—

which cannot be bounded as that which which is not attempted to be defined, but

is

not bounded

is

always considered as going on, on, on.

would not express the

alone,

true idea of eternity but only ,

This flowing word must be

of endless or unbounded time.

connected with, and, as

more

stability

;

it

were, anchored upon another of

since stability and fixedness enter into the

This other word

essential idea of eternity.

ple of that verb of existence

sophical sense, the highest

compound, then, chains

it

to

’A et, therefore,

is

mode

in its philo-

One

of being.

boundless and unconfined

an eternal present,

part of the

the other

;

since dov

or, rather,

tenses, altogether excludes the idea of time.

the

the partici-

is

which expresses,

It is

of

is

all

thus that

Greek term approaches as near the true notion of it is in the power of language to bring us.

eter-

nity as

Although the human mind idea it

which

may

alcdv

aims

may

to express, still

exist, sufficient, at least, to

take in

to

fail

all that

an apprehension of

convince us that

con-

it

tains nothing unreal, but has a solid foundation in the truth

of things.

We may

approach

it

by negatives.

Aidov

is

not

bounded or endless. It is not the opposite of time, but that of which xpo vo Si or time, in our present state, is the moving image. page 223, ( See remarks

time long or short,

,

and ly

the comparison there referred to.)

be said

be the opposite of

to

It

may more

tcaipog, or

upoonatpog

ing thus used by the Apostle, 2 Corinthians

such a

way

as to exclude

in that place.

It is

all cavil

as to

proper-

its

,

iv.,

18,

;

be-

and in

extent, at least

there the direct antithesis of temporal

or temporary.

However

difficult

it

may

be for beings

who can only


304 GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY,

aUxOV

AND

ClloVLOg.

think in a series, to form a conception of that which necessarily excludes succession of thought,

driven,

by the clearest decisions of

we

are nevertheless

which

that reason

often

goes where the conceptive faculty cannot follow, to affirm that this is the state in

the Divine mind.

have

which

If to this

we

We

perfect definition.

its

things must be present to

all

apply the term

may

although utterly unable to comprehend

ity,

of time

alcov,

be certain of it.

we

its real-

The

idea

connected with an imperfection necessarily be-

is

longing to our present state, namely, an inability to enter-

mind more than one thought at once. This gives rise to what is called the succession of ideas, constituting the measure of time and this succession we apply

tain in the

;

even

to those truths

have no relation fect.

which, as reason plainly assures us,

to time or the

sequences of cause and

ef-

Nothing, on these abstruse points, could be more sat-

and definition, to which which may be found Timceus

isfactory than Plato’s comparison

we have

before referred, and

,

37, E.

Almost

all

our difficulties on the subject of endless being,

and especially endless future punishment,

arise from con-

sidering eternity, or alcov, as time infinitely prolonged, as end-

This addresses

less succession or duration.

itself to the

imagination or conceptive power rather than to the reason,

and hence

this

weak

under the attempt

faculty of the soul faints

to realize

and staggers

what, as a conception of the

But the whol-e subject pre-

sense, never can be realized.

sents itself under quite a different aspect

when we

regard

the future state not as the beginning of a prolonged period,

having nity its

its

— as

own

past and future, but as a transition into eter-

a condition differing not merely in degree, but in

When

the

which now represents

all

very nature, from the present world of time.

revolving mirror

of Chronos,

things in motion, has ceased

spect to the whole or each

its

man

revolutions, either in re-

individually, the landscape


GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, of eternity, with as

AND

ald)VLOg.

becomes

all its fearful states,

ever had been

it

ald)V

in experience,

and motionless

in reality, fixed

305

cuzlvt]-

ra dperdozara, del Kara ravrd e^ovra. There will be no endless succession of years and periods, which, in ev,

ery

mind to grasp them, only present, over and the same difficulties of comprehension, and, in-

effort of the

over again,

stead of a true idea give rise only to a painful* and imper,

“ For days, and nights, and

fect conception of the sense.

months, and years, and Plato, “

all

other successions of time,” says

were not before the heaven

The

existed.

present, and the future are but temporal forms,

past, the

which we

ignorantly and incorrectly attribute to the eternal ovaca or ,

For

essence. (

eon )

we

say was, and

and

is,

will be,

be belong to that flowing yeveoig, or generation, in time. is,

which

exists

For they are motions ( mvijaecg ), but the eternal

in respect to these,

older,

when IS

alone pertains to aeonian being, while was and will

immoveable

having no past and no future”

never younger, never

;

—to 6

e del

Kara ravra

e\ov aiavrjrog, ovre npeodvrepov, ovre ve&repov ylyveodai ttote

,

irpoarjUSL

ovds yeyovevat, ovd’ eloavdcg eoeoOai

Timceus, 38, A.

Change and succession may be

said to form the predom-

inating characteristics of the present flowing

world.

In eternity,

all is

just the reverse.

language derived from the old Ionic problem,

There,

to

use

all things will

which are seen are temporal, probationpreparatory ( Ttpoonaipa ). The things which are un-

stand. ary,

The

phenomenal

things

seen are eternal (alwwa), sion.

The word ahov

* In nothing

is this

is

more

fixed,

immutable, without succes-

undoubtedly used in the Greek than in the efforts some-

fully realized

times made by preachers and others to convey what they call an idea of eternity; as, for example, from an ocean of drops, or the

space of the solar system

filled with grains of sand, and those mulby myriads and millions of centuries. By such immensities of numbers the mind is wearied and exhausted, but never brought a

tiplied

hair’s breadth nearer the object at

C

which

c 2

it

aims.


— 306 GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, poetry in the indefinite sense of

being

;

where

ald)V ^

is

aid)ViOg.

existence, or state of

life,

and there are also some passages it

ND

in the Scriptures

taken figuratively in a lower signification of age

or dispensation, although even these are grounded on the

higher and radical import

but this

;

we

affirm with confi-

dence, that the restorationist can derive no aid from these

specimens of Platonic usage, and, in

more

opposed

utterly

to all his

fact,

views of change, reforma-

We

the eternal state.

tion, or restoration in

nothing could be

conclude with

a definition of alcov, derived from the high authority of Aristotle.

It

contains more reference to succession than that

of Plato, but yet limit the

directly in the

is

meaning of

this illimitable

way

of

all

He

word.

attempts to

speaking

is

of the super-celestial, or extra-mundane state, and what-

ever

we may

think of

its

can be no doubt

reality, there

about the force of the Greek terms by which he attempts to “ Time,” he says, “ is the number of motion, set it forth. but above the heaven

There, there

exist.

change, but

is

it

has been shown that time cannot

no growing

immutable,

all is

the best and most satisfying

TapKeGTdrrjv ), continues for

va )

;

and

name

this its

life

impassible, and having

(fa)fjv

apioTrjv nal tt)v av-

all eternity

is divinely

cients ('detcog EtyOeynraL

napa

(tov aixavra aiti-

declared

to

us from the an-

For

rtiv apxatcov).

which contains the period of each existence alcjv

(

,

or definition

tcard

is

end

that

called

its

same reason tov avrov Xoyov nal to tov navrog

cevum age or being). ,

any

old, neither is there

all is

According

to the

,

ovpavov reXog, nal to tov navTCOV aneipov xpovov nal

tt)v

ansiplav irepisxov TeXog, ’AIS2N egtiv, duo tov ’AEI ’EI-

NAI

eiXr)(j)d)g

which

tt\v

err covvpiav,

aOavaTog nal delog

constitutes the enclosing limit of the

or universe, that

which embraces

— that

whole heaven

the infinite period ,

and

the

of all things that is alcov ETERNITY, taking its name from EVER BEING, immortal and divine.” Arist.,

infinity

De

Coelo, lib.

i.,

c. ix., 10.

,

Compare,

also,

The Laics

,

iv.,


PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. 307 715, P., where Plato speaks of the Eternal Justice, which

always follows as an avenger of crimes committed against the Divine

law

(

rov &eiov vopov npopog), and in com-

menting on which the scholiast thus defines the word n epi7TopEvop,evog

namely, to aiovlcog

,

Kara ra avra

*

rj

yap

irepi(j)Opd

— to

’A el (boavrog

ttai

rovro

LYI. Plato’s Doctrine of the

nexion with the

Freedom of the Willy viewed in Conof Cause and Effect in Nature

Law

.

M eprjxdvrjrat

Page

60,

Line 11

He

devises this in reference to the whole, namely,

r. A.

.

nav rovro

Trpog

6rj

,

k.

what kind of a situation everything which becomes of a certain quality must receive and inhabit.” That is, the itoiorr\g or quality

which,

in the course of generation,

assumes, must determine the quality of

The

anything

habitation.

its final

establishment and enforcement of this law

God has

reserved to himself as his peculiar prerogative, while, as

own

are told in the following sentence, he has left to our wills,

rag alriag

rr\g

yeveoeug rov

of becoming such or such.

ttolov rivog

we

—the causes

(See note 10 page 60 .) ,

In

other words, he has so ordered the course of nature, by a sort of pre-established this law,

sentiment

is

is left to

much

cannot find

and the doctrine

free,

tian

constantly enforces

and in

because

the freedom of our

binding nature fast in

Left free the

fallen,

it

is

fault

human

its

wills.

:

fate,

will.

with this in the heathen Plato,

undoubtedly true of

that primitive state it

own

about the same with that of Pope

And

We

that

while the power of becoming the subjects of

rewards or penalties

The

harmony,

was one with the

when

man viewed his will

will of God.

theology, however, does require us

to

as un-

was

The

truly

Chris-

modify the prop-


;

308 PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. osition as regards our present condition,

some way, man by the

in

although

that, therefore,

which

choices of objects before

above

tion, rise

it

may

man may

be free in

to

can never, by any escape

its

effect, until a stronger

shall interpose for its deliverance

sick

be said

still it

it,

and

all

words on

voli-

adaman-

and perfect freedom.

turn from side to side upon his

its

than nature

The

weary couch,

but he cannot rise, take up his bed, and walk.

exercise

nature

to

has a wide prison-house within

this state of nature, or

tine chain of cause

to believe that,

subjected his will

fall

it

and where

to rove,

and

We

kinds of choices (a term which in the

may

strife

of

many have confounded with will) which we have fallen, be holy, to love God with all our souls,

this subject so

within the limits of the sphere into but

and

we

cannot will to

If the Scriptures

to live to his glory.

on the

subject,

ence that

it is

we may

were not clear

so plainly a matter of personal experi-

well wonder how, in the light of an awa-

kened conscience or consciousness, there could be any room for cavil about

There

is

it.

no doubt, however, that Plato was rather Pe-

lagian on this great question

which show that there were very great

his

cited

x.,

although places could be

mind was

difficulties

We may

could take of the matter. that is here

;

advanced more

unsettled,

and that

attending any view he find this

same doctrine

fully set forth in the Republic,

617, P., where, after a long argument, in which he in-

troduces that wild mythical legend respecting the Destinies,

Lachesis, Clotho, and Atrope, he concludes in the following most concise and remarkable manner pcjv Xr\^erai dA/l’ vfieig daiptova atprjoeoOe 7totov

atria eAoptevov

from control

:

*

deog

selves imply blame),

God

is

Ov% vpag

:

dai-

aperr) 6e ddecr-

avairtog — “ Virtue

the fault is in the chooser

less,” or, rather (since avairtog

:

God

is

is

free

blame-

and atria do not in them-

not concerned in the causation

of sin or the production of virtue.

Notwithstanding

this.


7

:

PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. 309 there

are several striking passages in

in the present state of

its

attainment

hopeless with-

is

As, for example, in the Meno, 99, P.

out the Divine aid.

’Aperi) ovv dv

man,

which he asserts,, gift, and that,

Divine

without qualification, that virtue is a

ovre (pvoet ovre dcdatcrov dXXd deia

elrj

— “ Wherefore ,

poipa Trapaycyvopevrj olg dv TrapayiyvrjTcu virtue

would be neither by nature nor by science or teachby a Divine gift, bestowed upon those by whom it

ing, but is

So, also, a few sentences below, to the

possessed.”

same

Nothing can be clearer

(Meno, 100, B.)

effect.

than this declaration, and yet,

same

other parts of that

when we

dialogue,

it is

take into view

extremely

difficult to

determine what he really thought about the cause and

Whether it was by nature, by ence, or directly from God, were questions to which mind often reverts, and which he seems never to have

source of true virtue.

The

isfactorily solved.

student

may

great length in the Protagoras. (lib. vi.),

where he

is led to

picture of human depravity,

the acquisition of virtue sistance. ist”

Do you

— by which he

moral philosophy

— “ do

is

find

his sat-

discussed

it

at

In the Republic, again

draw as strong as possible

he declares most expressly

a

that

impossible without the Divine as-

think,” says Socrates, “ that

means one of the ancient

who

sci-

undertook

any soph-

lecturers on

teach virtue for pay

to

you think that any sophist, or any instructions of

private persons, can control or even withstand such an in-

fluence for evil

No

?

one

only be evidence of folly.”

;

yea, even to attempt

most solemn and impressive manner ovre yeyovev ovre ovv ttjv rrapa rijv

prj yevrycai

:

would

it

And then he concludes

in this

Ovre yap yiyverat

aXkolov

tovtcov 'natdelav. avOpcbneiov

rjOog ,

cb

,

npog ape-

eralpe

*

del-

ev yap XP?1 eldevai o ri nep dv ooO^j re ual yevryrai olov del ev roiavr \ naraoraoei Qeov polpav avro oCdo at Xeycov ov aanCdg epelg “ For it neither is the

ov e^aipcb Xoyov

.

,

case, nor has been, nor ever can be, that

,

any character

(or


310 PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL state of soul) should

undergo a change

to virtue in opposi-

At least

tion to the corrupt training of these influences.

my

nothing human,

the Divine

;

For we may be well assured

count.

who

truly

friend

asserts that

ces, is saved,

if

lay out of the ac-

I

that

he speaks most

anything, under such circumstan-

and becomes such as

dispensation alone hath saved

ought

it

to be, a

Republic

it.”

vi.,

,

Divine 493, A.

same passage he pronounces the case absolutety desperate eav firj rig avry /3orjdrjoag detiv tvxV “ unless some God should come to the aid of the In another part of this

Repub.,

soul.”

Surely,

492, A.

vi.,

human

be a true picture of

if this

nature,* Plato

may

be justly charged with inconsistency, yet no greater

than

many have

manifested on this subject

the higher light of revelation.

how can

correct,

How

virtue be

If

who

possessed

these representations be

said to be without restraint

?

many impediments, to no accountability when these

can that be free which has so

say the least?

If there is

impediments are supposed utterly of the will,

why

not this

is

when they

pro rata

same

surmount the strength

to

accountability diminished

exist in a less degree, although falling ? and how, then, can we avoid more vicious the disposition, and,

short of an absolute inability

the conclusion, that the *

There

most remarkable declaration of Thucydides on the depravity, which is the more worthy of attention, because it comes from one who, without any philosophical or religious theory, was as cool and keen an observer of human nature as subject of

is

a

human

ever lived.

the nature of

It is

man

to sin (says this sagacious his-

and private. No law can restrain him from All modes of punishment have been exhausted in the attempt.”

torian) both in public it.

Lib.

iil,

45.

And

again, in the

Kal nokkfjg svijOetag,

npoOvpwg deivtp

tl npa^ai,

— “To speak

simplicity for

bang

same

section

anoTponrjv riva e^etr,

plainly, it’is impossible

any one

to

suppose

that,

rj

an k&g

;

vopiov

and

it is

when human

eagerly to the attainment of any gratification, either by force of

:

re,

advvarov

,

olerat , Trig avdpaneiag tyvaeog oppcdpivrjg

law or any penalty, however

it

rj

ok k(p

T(p

a proof of great

nature rushes

can be turned aside

fearful.”


PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. 311 consequently, the more

the practice of virtue, the

difficult

and the nearer an approach

less the degree of guilt,

to a

state of perfect innocence.

Jacob Zimmerman, in his

tract

Be

Proestantia Religionis

Christiana collata cum Philosophia Socratis, finds fault with

a Bivine gift and thinks

this doctrine that virtue is

that, in

,

the contest of Socrates with the sophist Protagoras, on the

question whether virtue could be taught, the latter has great-

He

ly the advantage.

with leading

also charges the views of Socrates

while he seems

to licentiousness,

to

regard

his most corrupt antagonists as the friends of the public

morals qui

Et hac ratione Socrates vel

:

jam

vitiis

invitus efiecit, ut

Nihil enim libentius ejusmodi homines audiunt,

summam

quae

sunt tate

ita

;

—

gift

of

God

is

inferri

posse putant in sua potes-

— should be it

;

charged with licentiousness

has thus been characterized in

men themselves

cian sophists with

death

but

it

Vide Amcenitates Lit -

substantially the declaration that virtue is the

surprising, since

even by

ea,

That the doctrine of Bivine grace

erarice , vol. xi., p. 187.

such

quam

difficultatem in virtuti colenda probare pos-

enim necessario

situm haud esse virtutem sequi.

for

illi

immersi sunt aliquod presidium inde caperent.

all

not

is

ages,

as utterly corrupt as those Gre-

whom

Socrates contended even unto

certainly is a matter of exceeding wonder,

that a professed Christian writer should censure that very sentiment in

which, of

the nearest to the Bible.

all

others,

him

for

he approaches

See some of these questions most

acutely argued in Cicero’s treatise

worthy of an attentive perusal,

De

if for

Fato,

s. v., vi.

no other reason,

It is

to

see

how very

similar, in all ages, have been the discussions which have arisen on these most ancient queries respect-

ing fatalism, causality, co-causes, conditions, moral agency,

and the freedom of the

will.

Jonathan Edwards himself

does not distinguish with more keenness than Cicero and the persons referred

to.

whose opinions he has introduced

in the tract


:

312

EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE.

Page

61, L. 6. ev eavrolg ne/crrjpeva tt)v rr\g per aboXrjg

airiav — “Possessing

That still

is,

in

themselves the cause of change.”

without, or to the exclusion of external causes, yet

not, as those

maintain

ning power of the

will,

who

contend for the self-determi-

without being under the law of cause

and effect existing within

them

;

the cause being the inter-

nal result of their present state at any one time, or the com-

bined sum and product of

all

the influences, from within

and from without, then existing in ual,

their physical, intellect-

and moral constitution, and the

one

effect being the

which the laws of our minds compel must result from it. So Cicero, De Fato, s.

single following state

us to affirm xi.

:

Sic

quum

sine causa

animum moveri

dicimus, sine ex-

terna causa moveri, non omnino sine causa dicimus. ,

LVIT. Explanation of a Difficult Passage.

Page 61, Line 8. There is a good deal

opiKporepa, pev rtiv

i]d gjv,

k.

t. a.

of difficulty about this sentence, and

we think a very good sense may be made of the common reading, without resorting to those conjectural emenda-

yet

which some commentators would propose. The ver^ sions of Ficinus and Cornarius both proceed upon the idea that the main contrast is between opucporepa pev and nXeio de, which view, it must be confessed, seems to have appearances strongly in its favour. Neither translator, howYiger ever, adheres to the Greek text as it now stands. proposes amendments grounded upon the same view of the He would read eXarro) pev nai ducatorepa that passage. it might be more directly opposed to ttXelg) teal adiK&repa, just below. Ast thinks there is no need of any other change than to expunge eXarro, and would render as follows tions

,

Quae minus depravata sunt, ea per untur, quae vero in

terrae

planitiem ingredi-

majorem depravationem inciderunt

in


;

EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE. profundum, &c., detruduntur.

seems

It

to

313

however,

us,

removed by regarding the main contrast as intended between opuiporepa pev and pel^oov 6 e five or six lines below, and a subordinate contrast between that almost all difficulty is

eXarro) and

ttXsig)

We

tie.

eXarr 6), and regard

a..

would place a comma

after

pev as implied in connexion with

it

the omission being nothing strange, seeing that the particle

mark the main antithesis. In this pera6dXXovra is to be taken with eXar-

had just been used

view of the matter, to),

to

and there will also be a contrast of degree between

participle

and peraTreadvra

the former, from

;

its

this

being in

the present tense, implying a slight beginning of a change, either for

good or

descent.

~Elg is to

evil

the latter, a more sudden and rapid

;

be taken with peranopeveraL understood

as though repeated, and not with perarcEGovra

In this

.

view, eXarrcOj instead of being required to be expunged,

becomes an important word, and the only real defect in the sentence is a mere want of verbal symmetry in having nothing to correspond to aduuhrepa, together with the harsh,

ness which tcl.

On

is felt in

connecting this word with peraixeGov-

the other view,

uporepa tg)v

i]Q(x)v

it is

can be made

depraved as the phrase

is

,

and Ast. is

we

to

was most

mean

those

who are

less

to their version is, that there

can contrast pel^cov

the whole following context

antithesis

opc-

regarded by Ficinus, Cornarius,

Another objection

nothing with which

when

how

not easily explained

shows

certainly intended.

can only be effected by regarding

it

below,

'ipvxv

that a very strong

This,

we

think,

as in opposition to opi-

Kporepa, tgjv rjOojv, a phrase equivalent to opiKporepa or ol exovreg opiKpoTEpa,

rfO?],

and which

we would

synonymous with what Plato elsewhere (pvoLg, the small nature the less marked or er as

,

styles

rfO?],

consid-

opwpa

inferior char-

acter or habit of soul, in distinction from the psi^cov ipyx^i

;

neither expression in itself implying depravity, but, on the

other hand, each including the good as well as the bad.

D

D


314

EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE.

With these preliminaries, we proceed to state the order of the whole passage, according to the view above taken, enclosing in brackets the implied words which are essential to a full interpretation

eXarrco

\jpsv~\

6 s perarcsGovra

ttXslo)

paOog [peTaTTOpeveTCu] rd re Kairiag

there

may

rj

deemed

opiKporepa pev tojv

7] 0 d)v,

psrabdXXovra^ peranopeverat Kara to

X<-opag entnedov ,

'ipvX'h

:

teal

itaro), n. r. X.

onorav psraXdb 37,

dpsrr]g

be given the following free

rrjg

d6tKd)repa, sig

psc^cov 6s

6rj

Of which “ The translation k. t. X.

:

smaller natures, to wit, those possessed of none of the greater traits of soul, whether for good or evil, undergoing less change, or as long as they undergo less change, pro-

ceed with a

slight deviation

(change being implied in psra)

along the apparently level plain of cline

more

rapidly,

but

;

when they

de-

and with greater degrees of wickedness

metaphor being carelessly

(the

life

lost sight of in

aduuorepa),

they change their course (slg fiaOog) into a steep descent,

commonly spoken of as being below, which, under the name of Hades, men fear and dream about, &c. but as for the greater soul, whenever it parand

to those regions

;

takes of vice or virtue, by the exercise of

by association, &c.

— such

we

a soul,

mingling with the Divine excellence,

markable degree

similar,

makes a

its

own

will or

say, whenever, it

becomes

by

in a re-

transition, also, into a

surpassingly holy place, being continually carried into another

still

better region

ferring the seat of

contrary abode.”

its

;

when

but

contrariwise, then trans-

life in a contrary direction

From ooa

to

ouparuv

and

inclusive,

to a

may be

regarded as a parenthetical clause, explanatory of ra narco tojv roucov.

In the second

member

of the principal antith-

had there been preserved a perfect correspondence, we should have had psc^G) 6 s rtiv rjOtiv from some idea esis,

;

mind of a transcriber probably arose the rj, other reading preferred by Ast, namely, pst^co 6s 6rj i/> &c. In this way, sXdrrco (/i£F) and tcXsig) 6s indicate two

of wdiich in the


— 315

EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE. different stages in the course of those

repa

7] 0 r]

the

:

denoted by opiKpo-

a gentle deviation, almost level, and

first,

second, a rapid descent.

the

therefore

called ettctte6ov

There

also a great propriety in the use of the present

is

pera6d?i?iOVTa

,

;

which Ast would change

while or as long as they undergo less change.

aorist

,

,

In the words entnedov and j3a6og there

may

An

and which he so frequently employs. be compared

is first

to the three

grows

be one of

evil

course

dimensions of magnitude.

It

a mere point, then extends itself into a line, then

spreads out into superficial space into the

length, breadth, table

may

which Plato was so very

those geometrical allusions of fond,

second

into the

solid

(

Eninedov ), and,

dimensions of iniquity

and depth

;

that

was not

it

—a

in the

finally,

all

theii

and immu-

in the fixed

is,

condition of the sinful nature

Plato would admit that

in

from which power of the will

state

to return.

There

are, in a critical point of view, several defects

about both

members

contrasts.

It

of this antithesis and the subordinate

however,

is,

better to admit that Plato

far

sometimes writes carelessly than jectural emendations.

gests a similar thought from the Republic rrjv dpLOrrjv

diraXX&TTEiv

many

hazard so

to

The whole passage :

con-

strongly suge^el

6fj

Xoyov ,

(pvav kv aXXorpLCOTEpa ovoav Tpocpy, Kamov r?jg

(pavXyg

— Kal

rag

'ijjvxag

rag EV(pvEOT&-

rag KaKijg Traidayoytag rvxoverag diacpEpovroig KaKag yiyvEoOat — “

,

,

It is

reasonable to suppose that the best nature,

being in a condition adverse to

worse than the meaner

turns out

its ;

proper development,

and that the most high-

ly-gifted souls, partaking of evil instruction,

ingly wicked.” is

Republic,

vi.,

equivalent to opiKporepa

^avXrj

491, D.

rjdrj

become

in the

surpass-

'ipvx'f]

here

passage before us.

where the

simi-

larity of the expression tends greatly to confirm the

view

Compare,

we have

also, the Republic, vi., 495, B.,

here taken

:

OfUKpa de

(j>voig

ovdeva ovte 16 l(x)tt]v ovte ttoXiv dpa.

ovdsv psya ovdenors


GREEK WORD HADES,

316 After

all,

however,

little difficulty

it

must be confessed that there

Had

about the passage.

the

first

is

no

member

of

the principal antithesis been double, like the second, or had it

two

specified

distinct courses in opposite directions,

we

should have had no doubt about the correctness of the ver-

we have

sion

plied,

and thus opacporepa

vice both, as well as

ing at

however,

a view,

may

rjdrj

may

second member

meaner

in respect to the

;

nature, be-

so slight as not to call for the distinction

first

be im-

be taken of virtue and

in the

j

way,

the change either

in the

Such

given.

and,

;

second stage, the acceleration of velocity being more

naturally associated with the ideas of descent and sin than

which seems to have led the writer astray from the symmetry and consistency of the thought he intended to express. Hence, with that of virtue

too,

we may

so that

;

the metaphor

it is

perhaps account

for the introduction of adt/cd)-

repa which seems otherwise

mar

to

,

the

harmony of the

Yiger proposes as an emendation eXarrco pev

passage.

/cal

This di/caiorepa as opposed to 7rXeto) tie Kdl adirccbrepa. would favour the idea contained in our version more than his own. A better course, however, would be to regard the words /ca/clag rj dperrjg, &c., as implied after opucporepa ,

t(ov rjOcbv, in the pel^cov ds

first

in the second.

dr) 'ipvx'ij ,

great difficulties to

member, as they are expressed

all

The passage has

after

given

commentators.

LVIII.

The Greek

Word "A idrjg, and

the

Hebrew

and rP3

oSty.

Page is

by

Line 11

Plato, although

matters It

61,

most clearly from

may

:

ev

.

he

adov — to

therefore

mean

This word

"Aidrjv enovopa^ovreg.

deidrjg , invisible. is

Thus

it is

explained

no great authority in etymological

aeideg

dr)

Xeycov, Gorgias 493, B.

the invisible

,

world that ,

is,

unseen in ,


— AND HEBREW SHEOL AND BETH OLAM. the sense of concealed from present vision , or

it

31 ?

may

nected with the more philosophical import of

used by Plato in the Phaedon, namely, the ideal

be con-

aeidijq, as

the intelli-

,

gible world in distinction from the visible world of sense ,

matter.

The

first,

acceptation of the

however,

unseen

,

which the grave hides from our view, not follow the departed.

cannot help being

the

strongly suggests the old ety-

It

Hebrew

mologies given for the

we

common unknown region and whither we can-

doubtless the most

is

word — the

partial,

to

ask

,

to

demand by the

guage of Job

Man

They make

ages

to penetrate the

and wasteth away

dieth,

Job

is lie?”

it

from

dark mys-

sponds, both in form and

;

he giveth

xiv., 10.

,

poetical expression, olnoq

as used Ecclesiastes,

which

veil of death, as in the wailing lan-

up the ghost, and where

The common

to

inquire; as though intimating the

to

in all

tery concealed :

,

and

'lisp (sheol),

notwithstanding they are so

contemptuously rejected by Gesenius.

deep anxiety of men

and

AiSov

*.

,

corre-

Hebrew

sense, to the

IV5>

Man

goeth to the house of his eternity or to his eternal house instead of our very dexii.,

5

:

,

,

fective translation, his long for the body, rather

home which suggests the grave ,

than that abode of departed

spirits

which is undoubtedly meant by the Hebrew as well as the Greek phrase. Compare Xenophon’s Life of Agesilaus, near the close

:

And

thus this

man

spent his

life in

the

was ’AIAION "OIKH-

service of his country, and, having at length died, transferred to his eternal home ”

2IN

uarrjydyeTO.

elq tt)v

So, also, Diodorus Siculus, in his ac-

count of the Egyptians, says, “

They

call the habitations

of the living, lodging-places (fcaraXvoetq), or inns, because

we

dwell in them but for a short time

but the abodes of

;

the departed they style eternal houses because they con,

tinue in

Hades during

the boundless eternity ”

Kovq TzpoaayopevovGiv,

•AJIEIPON ’AIS2NA.

ev

f/

A idov

Diod. Sic .,

D

d 2

lib.

— aldiovq

ol-

diareXovvriov tov i.,

51.


— 318

SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES.

The Hebrew oSty corresponds more Greek

''Aidrjg

than SiKBh

signifies

It

hidden, unknoivn

The

boundless in time, and undefined in space. of the phrase

oixog

r/

is

same

the

closely to the

in both languages

,

composition rrs

:

—the house of Olam—the house of Hades — the

Aidov-

invisible state, the

abode of unseen

These terms

spirits.

suggest conceptions of vastness, of dread sublimity, while the inquiring

presents

it

to

word sheol calls up the unknown world, and the mind as

That undiscovered country, from whose bourn

No

The in the

traveller returns.

common

expression olnog "Acdov must have been

most ancient Greek.

ellipsis, elg

r

Its antiquity is

proved by the

which afterward came into such freHence we conclude that it must

'A idov,

quent use by the poets.

have been an early Orientalism, derived from phrase with which so very

common

we have compared

in classical

doubtless have pronounced

it

Had

it.

Greek, some

this it

very

not been

critics

would

a Hebraism.

LIX. Similar Views of a Future State, and Similar Fears of Hell in all

Ages.

Page 61, Line 11 ooa A tdrjv rs teal rd tovtojv e^dfieva twv ovoparcov enovofad^ovreg ofiodpa (bodovvrac ual ovetpomXovoi ty7)vreg diaXvOevreg re twv owparwv “ which, under the name of Hades and similar titles, men greatly fear ( valde horrent) and dream about, both when living and when separated from the body.” This may be compared r/

.

with a similar passage from the Republic

:

Fv yap

loOi, cb

EuKpareg, otl eneidav rig eyyvg % rov oleoOai reXevTr}oetv, elaep^eraL avrd3 deog ual (f)povrlg. olre yap Xey opevoi uvOol

TCEpt

t(ov ev "A idov, &>g

rov evOade dduerjoavra

6ei


SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES, ekeI didovcu evpLGico)v

dlfcrjv,

vo)v, cjouep oi

tt aldeg,

pera nanfjg eXiridog that is

when any one

going

6

pkv ovv

etc

tg>v im-

orpetyovoc rrjv i/jv%7]v

kavTOv kv rw

(3ccp

iroXXd aSL/crjpara,

dapa

—“For

is

319

eyeipopevog, deipaivei ual ,

be well assured,

O

£rj

Socrates,

near that time in which he thinks he

to die, there enter into

then the old stories about hell,

him

how

and anxiety.

fear

For

man who has

that the

here been guilty of wrong must there suffer punishment,

Wherefore he who,

torture his soul.

his

life,

from

finds

many

crimes, like frightened children starting

their sleep, is terrified,

Republic 330, E. ,

and

lives in evil forebodings.”

Nothing could give us a surer glimpse

into the ancient conscience than

We

in the retrospect of

such a passage as

this.

are very apt to think that the fears of the future world

are almost wholly derived from the Bible, and that the ancient mythology respecting

Hades was

the poet, without possessing the

common mind.

aged Cephalus,

is

/

mere picture of

This declaration, however, of the

undoubtedly meant by the writer

and age

characteristic of the class

belonged.

the

any very strong hold upon

to

In this most dramatic of

to

be

which the speaker

all

the dialogues of

Plato, nothing of the kind would have been put in the mouth of such a character, had it not truly expressed a sentiment deeply grounded in the popular creed and feeling. It testifies more strongly to the ancient universal belief in a retributive hell and a coming judgment, than all the ab stract reasonings of our philosopher,

and

all

the mytholo-

gical allusions of the poets.

The

we have

doctrine of a hell for the wicked, as

one of the oldest

where observed,*

is

gious creed of

ages and nations.

all

articles in the reli-

Such

incidental pas-

* See the Biblical Repository, No. xix., Art. 3d,

kindred topics are dwelt livered at Burlington,

upon

at

else-

some length

;

where

this

and

also a discourse de-

Vermont, 1839, entitled Natural Religion, the

Remains of Primitive Revelation.


:

320

;

:

;

SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES.

sages as these refute

the reasonings of Warburton, in

all

his attempt to prove that the doctrine of future punishment

exerted but

influence in the ancient systems of legis-

little

The

and religion.

lation

ridicule the vulgar fears,

the unseen Hades,

whatever

human

very

and

Even

make

Epicureans

their origin,

the style in

them betrays a secret

truths,

had penetrated the

which Lucretius speaks

trepidation,

to

light of the terrors of

show how deeply these awful

may have been

soul.

to

efforts of the

of

and instead of philosophic

indifference, manifests that bitter hatred which, as in the

case of most modern infidels, proceeds from a mind once

deeply troubled, anxious, and yet unable fears

which

its

bition of a soul

at ease,

which he thus

pect, with

shake

and of an interested is

sets forth that

whose gloomy frown

off those

This exhi-

philosophy affects to despise. ill

the very idea of future retribution, lines in

to

hostility to

apparent in those

monster of horrid as-

was

the timid Epicurean

ever haunted In terris, obpressa

quom vita jaceret gram sub Religione

Quae caput a

regionibus obtendebat,

Humana

ante oculos

cceli

Horribili super adspectu mortalibus instans.

The same

thing

is

manifested

parison), like a child terror,

he seems

when

(to

—Lib

i.,

.

63.

use Plato’s com-

who has awaked from some dream

to exult in the timid

of

hope of deliverance

from the fears of a future hell Et metus

Funditus

ille

foras praeceps Acheruntis agundus,

humanam qui

vitam turbat ab imo

,

Omnia subfuscans mortis nigrorc neque ullam Esse voluptatem liquidam, puramque, relinquit. Lib.

iii.,

37.

Such strong language most clearly shows, that the doctrine and fears against which it was directed were no light or laughing matter, either to the poet or to those

for

whom

he

wrote

We have

every reason, therefore,

for believing that

much


*

:

*

SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES.

same views of

the

mankind ed

;

same apprehensions of

death, and the

now

future retribution as

prevail,

321

have ever existed among

coming not from reason or philosophy, but hand-

down by

tradition

ancient time.

In

from some revelation made in the most

all

ages, too, and in

creeds, the rep-

all

resentations of the nature of this future punishment have

been of the most

kind, as though the imagination,

terrific

for this purpose,

had been taxed

to its

and chains, and

utter darkness,

and similitudes of ever-un-

gratified desire

and of ever-raging passion, have always

utmost powers.

The

formed a part of the dread machinery of Hades. gious poet Pindar describes

as that from

it

Fire,

reli-

which the eye

of the soul turns away, as from scenes too full of horror to

contemplate

for

a

rol d’

moment anpoGoparov oh^ovtl novov

and, in reference to

a

it,

still

more

religious poet, even the

inspired prophet and leader of Israel, asks with dread so-

lemnity,! “ it

Who

knoweth the power of thine anger has been most admirably paraphrased,

Thy dreadful wrath exceeds our And burns beyond our fear.

V

Or, as

thought,

Leaving out of the account the solemn confirmation of the

which may be derived from the fearful imagery employed by our Saviour, and taking into view only the heathen world, we may well ask the question, Whence came all this ? The great problem is for them to solve who asdoctrine

sert that the doctrine of future

Scriptures, the

the

reason,

then,

came

Men

are not fond of what

in the face of

it,

punishment

*

came

this rptyepcov

Find

Olymp. Carm

t JEschylus

,

Choeph

Whence,

these opposing influences

is irrational for its

own

pvdog^ these

ii.,

312.

contrary to

and the feelings. all

they certainly do not love their then,

is

J.,

d.

own

misery. fears of f

Psalm

?

sake, and

Whence, Hades, of xc., 11.


the word

322

ayioq.

Tartarus, of Gehenna, and those other

men have

Plato says in the passage before us,

Why,

names which,

applied to

be

? all false, and without foundaany view of the moral government of God, have the

this state

tion in

human race

Why have

thus

if this

ever .tortured themselves for naught

they indulged in these

cy, handing

down, from age

terrific

to age,

all,

how

is

it,

be such a

if sin

?

inventions of fan-

and from generation

generation, a useless, yet most tormenting anxiety

above

as

trifle,

to

And

?

men, by

that

these inventions, have ever persevered in passing a sen-

tence so unjustly severe on their the Gorgias , 525, C.

own

depravity

Phcedon, 114, A.

;

;

?

Compare

Republic 616, A. ,

LX. The Word "Ay tog. to's

Views.

Many

accommodated

to

Exceeding Spirituality of some of Plaof his Thoughts capable of being fairly

a Spiritual Sense higher than the Author

himself had intended

to

convey

.

Difference in this respect

between his Writings and those of all other Philosophers

Ancient or Modern

Page

61,

Line

,

.

17. uai

perebaXe tottov ayiov oXov

transferred, or passes into a place all holy.�

— “Is

Purity

,

or

generally given as the primary sense of the

holiness , is

Greek aytog and of the Hebrew

or tyYp.

This, how-

ever, besides being incapable of accounting for the other

meanings, some of which are almost directly opposite, does of itself require

some

ultimate, and, at the

may

simple conception into which

it

more simple and primary idea

is that

*

This

will

same

time,

be resolved.

more This

of separation * or of

account for those other senses of the root which seem

may

almost the opposite of holy since

it

purely wicked or separated from

good.

,

,

signify an abominable crime.

all

also refer to that

Hence

So, also, uytog

ayo<;,

which

or ayof,

may sometimes

is

may

denote


;

the word ayiog In proof of this

leing set apart.

of the word

323

.

we may compare

the use

throughout the Pentateuch, in its application to

places, sacrifices, and to the whole nation of Israel, as sep-

arated from the rest of mankind, to be a holy , that

In the

arate people.

New

terized, in the

same manner

a sep-

is,

are Christians charac-

Testament, as ayioi separate peculiar ,

,

Thus God

although in the world, yet not of the world.

is

styled ayiog, in the highest sense, to distinguish him, on the one hand, from the earthly and impure conceptions of polytheistic idolatry, and, on the other, from the apparently

more philosophical, but no

He

theist.

less degrading

views of the pan-

holy, separate from the universe

is

ed into being, and, although filling

he has

call-

all things , yet, in his es-

sence, inhabiting the high and holy place.

As here used by

Plato, ayiog roirog

means a place

apart from everything that is sinful and vile

course of purification, during tinual

ayiaopog that ,

is,

from the impure, leaving

— the end of a

which there has been a con-

a continual separation of the pure at last

nothing that defileth or ren-

Compare

ders unfit for this exceedingly separate region. the description of this holy place in the Phsedon

thus the soul that

which

is

is

Deuteronomy,

word

sacer

occupied,

it

accursed execrable. ,

may mean

away

goes

On

one devoted to the

xxiii., 18.

may

set

the

same

most

:

“

When

to the pure, to the principle, the

Hebrew

beastly wickedness, as in

In a similar manner, the kindred Latin

signify blessed or cursed

.

The Hebrew

^3

has the

it from a different source. Some would which occurs in the tragedians ( ayiog being found mostly in later Greek), from aÂŁcj, ufoyai, to revere, to stand in awe of. Even here, however, the mind is led to the same original or ultimate sense of separation, as the ground of the feeling express-

same make

ed by

peculiarity, but derives ayiog, or dyvog,

it,

whether that feeling be one of admiration and awo of the

pure and holy, or of fearful astonishment at enormous crime.

same primary

The

idea undoubtedly exists in the Latin purus, from the

Greek nvp,

fire,

in all ages,

been regarded as the means and emblem of purification.

the penetrating and separating element which has,

See the Timseus, 56, A.


— 324

PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

ever-being, to the immortal, the unchangeable, and, being of a kindred nature with

ceases from

vov

— and

is

its

restless

always would abide there, and ual uenavrai rov i:Xa-

ever engaged in the contemplation of the eter-

Phcedon, 79, D.

nal.

it,

wandering

Elsewhere he

tells us, in

almost

becomes those who would whether by the term he means a lo-

Scriptural language, that holiness

enter this holy place cality in space, or

soul

:

E Ig

;

an exceedingly separate

6e delov yevog

tiefug acpuiveloOcu

To

\jlt\

tt

state

avreXwg KaOapcp

of the

amovn

ov

enter into the family of the Di-

become a partaker of the Divine nature, “ can only be for him who departs wholly pure.” Ibid 82, B. Without irreverence may we comdycaopov ov pare this with Hebrews, xii., 14 ovHoliness without which no one Idg o'lpETcu rov K vpiov vine,’’ or, in

other words, to

.,

:

,

shall see the Lord.

We

are very far from saying, or even imagining, that

Plato attached to these expressions the

which they

same high sense

are used by Paul, and yet there are

passages which, without any violation of the

in

many such

spirit of his

language, are capable of a comparison, to say the least, with

some of the most precious truths of revealed religion. He was evidently directing his vision to a region of reality, far beyond the aim of any of the heathen philosophers who May he not preceded, or were cotemporary with him. those higher truths which glimpses of faint some had have his words, without any violence in their interpretation, frequently suggest to one who reads him by the light of the Christian revelation

?

Almost everything depends upon the

mind with which his writings are studied. To the materialist and the skeptic he will often appear visionary and unmeaning. Jefferson, in a manner most characterisstate of

tic,

pronounced him a foggy

intellect.

Many

of the Chris-

and a succession of the most learned and pious in the Church throughout its whole history, have ever re*

tian fathers,


PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

325

garded him with enthusiastic fondness, and esteemed his dialogues as ranking next to the Scriptures, although at a

which forbade any comparison with the latter as an inspired message from Heaven. We w^ould not be so distance

extravagant as to assert that Plato has a spiritual or esotersense, as these terms are used by the allegorist or the

ic

No

mystic.

violence need be done to the

letter, or to

the

ordinary laws of interpretation, and yet, by a species of ac-

commodation most easy, and, ral,

a higher elevation, and a

may

be imparted

many

to

same

at the

new and

time, most natu-

almost divine beauty,

passages, causing them to glow

with a radiance that seems derived from the same source

Whatever may

with the inspiration of the Sacred Volume.

be the cause, whether

it

be that lower truths are ever types

which shine through them when examined by

of higher,

a

peculiar light and in a peculiar state of the soul, so that there

may be

lower and a higher sense equally well

truly a

conveyed by the same ly prevails to

some extent

in

what the soundest expositors

regard as the double sense of Scripture) is

a spiritual

power

if

not in

forms, as an

its

in

;

or whether there

language considered in

Reason, so that

at times,

may

its

so manifest

which undoubted-

letter (a principle

own

its

essence,

emanation from the Universal

and when happily employed,

it

inherent light as to transcend the

mind and intended meaning of the writer himself, while the reader, under more favoured circumstances, is admitted to a higher region of thought, and to a deeper participation of that Spirit

which dwelleth

be the explanation of the language of Plato ality of

is

in the fact,

words

—

or

whatever may

most certain

it

is,

that the

often thus easily adapted to a spiritu-

meaning, in the Christian sense of the term, beyond

any uninspired writings, ancient or modern, and to an extent which, we may suppose, would transcend anv con

that of

ception of the philosopher himself.

Any one may understand what

E

E

is

meant by

this,

by keep


— 326

PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

ing these thoughts in mind while reading some of the more

which reference is made. In those where the true philosopher is represented as daily dying to the world and sense (tuvdvvevovoL boot ivy^dvovoiv opOcbg anropEvot tyiXooostriking passages to

parts of the Phaedon, for example,

(pcag keXrjOEvai fj

rovg aXXovg,

on

ovdev avrol emrrjdevovoLv

anoOvrjo/ceiv te /cal TEdvavai ), let the reader think of the

Christian instead of the philosopher, and what a close finity

does the style

What language

pressions of the apostle. set forth that hidden

in

which he

is

aim

could more truly

in the life of the follower of Christ,

unknown

so

The world knoweth him

af-

once assume with some of the ex-

at

to the great

not.

The

mass around him.

rest of

Socrates, “ understand not that he lives

to

mankind/’ says a saying

die

which Cicero, although he but imperfectly comprehended even

its

Platonic sense, has imitated in the declaration,

Tota philosophorum vita commentatio mortis

Tusc. Disp .,

est.

Again, in the same dialogue, take the description of wisdom for which everything else must be exchanged, and without which all other apparent virtues are but splendid o/uaypacptac cheats mere shadows of a shade, consisting i.,

74.

that

only in a wretched barter of one passion for another (rjdovag

npog rjdovag /cal pEc^oj

,

/cat

Xvnag npog Xvnag,

/cal (j)66ov

npog

(j)66ov ,

npog EXarrco, coonep vopiopara /caraWaTTEaQai),

“ the exchanging of pleasure for pleasure

grief for grief fear for fear, and greater for less, like the coin of traffic let any one, we say, in reading this, and its most instructive context, think of the Scriptural

Platonic

(ppovrjcng

,

and

how

Wisdom

,

in place of the

vividly arise

to

mind our

Saviour’s parable of the pearl of great price, and the sub-

lime personifications of wisdom in the books of Job and Proverbs. that

Plato

fear of

the

may not have

Lord which

derstanding, but he

was

exactly meant by (ppovrjoig

is the

beginning of all right un-

certainly aiming far above

any

who

docs

philosopher of his day, or any modern moralist


— 327

PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

Ex-

not draw directly from the fountain of inspiration.

amples of a similar kind may be taken from a great variety of passages everywhere meeting us in his most important In the

dialogues.

first

public, for philosophy,

half of the sixth book of the Re-

and the philosopher, keep

Christianity and the Christian, and

sense, so sublime before, spiritual light

the language retains

its

;

and

how

mount up

new

a

to

no violence

yet, in all this,

in

mind

sublimely does the region of

done

is

to

every argument, every epithet, every metaphor

;

native force and

mind can hardly

harmony, while the

relative

its

resist the impression, that this

glowing

description of the true philosophy and the true philosopher

was intended

The

face.

its

or be

it

for a

higher meaning than,

incongeniality of this

spirit,

be

which we

sense, the contempt poured upon'

live it

it

its

struggles with

by the world,

pendence upon that Divine aid which Plato, in so expressly acknowledges,

else

is

which

it

bestows where

all

changing and flowing, the exceeding joy with which,

at times,

it

inspires that small

have tasted and experienced gift

de-

its

this passage,

continual aspirations after

its

the fixed and eternal, the rest

philosophy

and corrupting

religion, .with the selfish, debasing,

influences in the midst of

appears upon

at first,

number who,

how sweet and

of Heaven, while they contemplate the

rules the multitude rjdv nal

(laviav*

ol

in

every age,

blessed

is this

madness which

oXtyot yEvopEVoi nal yevodfievoi

panaptov to nrrjpa nal rcbv noXXtiv Idovreg rrjv

—the

,

elevation of soul

which

is

produced by a

re-

ligious contemplation of the whole of our being leading, not ,

to a

contempt of our present human

mate of

it

istence,

and of the boundless

life,

but to a just esti-

as an exceeding small portion of our entire ex-

around us, as vtt&pxel avTTj

when he i\

says,

field

of being

which

lies

advvarov ry 6/avota

pEyaXonpETCEia nal 'dECopia iravrog

* Republic, vi., 496, C.

,

(]

ilev j


328

PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

Xpovov TraGrjg 6s ovotag peya tl 6ouslv elvac rov avOptim* vov piov* all these, as they are presented in this warm and ,

,

eloquent description of philosophy and the philosophic rise at

once

how

time,

to a

more elevated meaning, while,

word accommodate

higher sense, as though

itself to this

with that mild pathos

much

life,

same

admirably does every sentence, thought, and

had formed the main and only design of the so

at the

effect,

he

tells

w hich he sometimes T

what

us

it

When,

writer.

uses with

difficulties the 'philosophic

nature has to encounter in maintaining

ground against

its

the unfriendly influences of a foreign, uncongenial clime (cjoirsp %svikov

onsppa sv

yxf

aXX'q onsLpopevov e^irrjXov

uparovpevov Isvai elg to smx&piov),]

(ptXel

ly help thinking that

we

we can

hard-

hear the spiritual and plaintive

Leighton declaring, that “ the grace of God in the heart of

man

is like

where affinity it

a tender plant

its fruit

sown

in a strange, unkindly soil,�

would inevitably wither and degenerate

into

with some base native weed, unless he that planted

should exercise that constant care, without which

it

must

perish.

In the hands of no other writer, ancient or modern, does

philosophy ever assume this heavenly aspect. be supposed that this

is all

with a similar purpose, read the moderns ascertain

if

who

Aristotle, or

treat of the

Let any one,

Bacon, or any of

philosophy of the soul, and

he can, without violence, extract from

them any

such higher sense, or any such easy accommodation elevated Christian spirituality. peculiar Platonic unction

it

the effect of a partial imagina-

experiment be tried with others.

tion, let the

Should

may

A

faint

to

resemblance of

an

this

be traced in some of the

philosophical tracts of Cicero, especially those that were written during the latter years of his

dued

spirit of his

* Republic,

vi.,

adverse fortunes

486, A.

;

life,

and

in the sub-

but even with Cicero,

f Ibid., 497, B.


329

PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

they are mere imitations of the style and manner of one

whom

he professedly takes as his model, and

whom

he so

affectionately styles “his master Plato.’’

Let these thoughts be carried with us in reading, in the seventh book of the Republic, the description of the dark

who

cave, and of the poor prisoners

with their backs to the

light,

are there confined,

and their intent gaze ever

fix-

ed upon those shadowy appearances which so strangely flit

across the walls of their chamber of imagery.

mind can

thoughtful

What

recur to the higher truths of

fail to

the Christian revelation, or avoid being struck with the

most perfect parallelism,

as, in Plato’s

al-

most truthful picture,

he contemplates the fondness of those miserable bonds-

men

for their

gloomy abode,

their first aversion to the daz-

zling splendour of the world of reality, and the strong grasp

with which they cling

to their prison

kind hand attempts to draw them

and steep ascent (rpaxeiag the light of

life.

How

forth,

house,

when some

through the rough

avavrovg avadatJscog),

real

science and philosophy of that narrow world aoeplag).

How

into

graphic, too, the description of the (rrjg

steel

admirably does he depict the interest with

which these subterranean savans are occupied in the study of what they style nature, in tracing the law of cause and effect, antecedents and consequents, as the dim shadows pass across their contracted scene of observation pride with sive

name

which they dignify

this pursuit

—the

petty

with the exclu-

of science, their stinging jealousy of others

who

are ambitiously aiming at the distinctions and honours of

same most intellectual life, the laborious earnestness with which they are engaged in thus building up from these inductions a science of shadows which might astonish their more vulgar companions, by its seeming vaticinations of the periods and returns of those (jiaLvopeva, with which their the

,

minds are daily occupied,

to the

exclusion of any study of

themselves or of their true position

E

e 2

— while

all this

time the


330

PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.

which shines the real sun where may be seen the real heavens and where alone exists the real science are as much and as utterly unknown as are the high hopes of the Christian, and the sublime truths which real world in ,

,

,

,

occupy his

soul, to the

T cpal

ling.

dXkfkuv

6s

snaivoi el Ttvsg avrolg rjoav tots reap’

teal

yspa

teal

most grovelling and sensual world-

tco ot-vTaTa tcaOapcbvTL

Ta napiovra

avrjpovevovTC paXiora oca ts nporspa avTcbv

vcTspa siuOsi

teal

apa nopsvscOac

teal ste

,

TGdTaTa anopavTevopsvG) to psXXov (tov npog to

cpcog

tovtojv

teal 6?)

teal

oca

6vva-

dv avTov

fj^stv, 6otcsig

sXOovTa ) smdvprjTiucbg avTibv s%siv

teal

f7\kovv Tovg nap steslvoig Ttpcjpsvovg Republic, vii., 516, D. The resemblance between this and the spirit and tenor ’

;

of the Scriptural representations need not be pointed out.

One might

almost fancy

it

an expansion of the striking, yet

concise description of the Psalmist

Man

walketh in a shadow

0^3“^,

#'*r:]bniy

:

a land of images,

,

A VAIN

SHOW. Wish

this philosopher

even

assumes a divine and

politics

religicms aspect, and, in all his speculations, the political

closely connects itself with the theological. natural

would

it

be, in pursuance of the

How

easy and

same method,

to

adapt what he says of the heavenly paradigm in the close of the ninth book of the Republic, and his seventh

the Politicus, to the Christian

npcoTov ts

teal

Church

apiCTOV /3lo)tsov

,

:

dXXcov noXuTSiCdV.

in

sv r %f npd)TX) 6s noAv f

nXrjv Tr\g

naoojv yap skslvtjv ys snnpiTSOv, oiov 'Ssov sre t(a)v

kingdom

EBA0MH2.

dvOpunoiv,

Politicus or Statesman, 303, A. ,

From such an accommodation of Plato’s rich and wondrous fancy, how many most valuable thoughts, or rather illustrations,

might be suggested, which would not be un-

worthy even of the pulpit claimed the closest brought

to

power of

— thoughts

affinity

which, while they

with the Scriptures, might be

bear upon the soul and conscience with

illustration

drawn from the language

all

the

of the divin-


MYTHICAL SENSE OF THE WORD Mvarog. 1

est of philosophers.

in this

We

know

way, might be so useful

and no one

whom we

331

of no profane writer who,

preacher as Plato,

to the

would so earnestly recommend

to all

young men who are aiming at the Christian ministry. Let them not read Plato to understand the Bible although,

even with ance

—but

they would receive no small assistthem read the Bible in close connexion with

this in view, let

our philosopher, and they will understand Plato better than

he ever understood himself.

LXI. Mythical Sense of the

Page

62,

Line

Word

4. ev re %G)yj nal kv

Qavarog.

naoc ftavaroig.

This

evidently refers to the deaths of one individual, and not of

many. But why, then, the plural mind here his doctrine of the

its {jL£T£fj,\ljvx(oo£i,g,

We

?

in

think Plato keeps

transition of the soul, or

an ascend-

into various states, either in

ing or a descending series

;

the passage from one to the

See the Phse-

other of which he styles a death and a birth. don, 114, B., also 70, C.

:

uaXaiog

jt

ovv korl

i£v

ng

6 Ao-

yog, (hg elalv £v6iv6£ d(bino\i£vai Znti , nal tt&Xlv ye d£vpo u It is an acpuivovvTCU nal ylyvovrac kn rCdv t£0v£O)tc»)v

,

ancient tradition that souls go there from hence, and again return hither and arise from the dead.”

what

is

Compare,

said respecting the purgations and

ses of the soul, in the remarkable

Republic.

Thus,

of the present

preceding

life

state,

it

myth

also, in the Gorgias,

as though,

at

also,

metempsychothe end of the

493, A., he speaks

when compared with some

might in reality be a death,

to

which, for

some former relations, we may have been doomed. “ As you say,” continues Socrates, “ life is an awful thing (duvog 6 (3log ), and I should not wonder if Euripides spoke the truth when he said, reasons arising out of


MYTHICAL SENSE OF THE WORD

332

6'

Tig

,

^

to rcarOavelv 6e

Who knows we

haps

the soul

The

but

are

body

that the

v pev

oldev el to

life is

now our

is

v

eon

tiavaTOg.

rcarOavelv

death, and death is

And

life ?

per-

dead, as I have heard of the wise, and

monument

(

which

orjpa ) or sepulchre in

buried.”

is

context of this strange declaration in the Gorgias

affords strong reasons for believing, that

may have been

it

spoken mystically and mythically of that

which

,

;

death

spiritual

so prominent a subject of the Scriptures.

is

In this

most exquisite analysis of the nature of physical pleasure, and

its utter

want of

all

claim to be considered

The Good,

the sensualist is regarded as “ dead while he lives.”

soul

is

said to be rotten and leaky, like a perforated cask

His pleasure

rdOog rerpr^evog).

(d)£

His

is

described as a a “ bro-

continual inflowing to supply a constant outflowing

;

ken

filling, in

cistern,” requiring a constant

distinction from that spring

ever

full,

and laborious

which Socrates represents as

and which so strongly suggests our Saviour’s

“ well of living water, bubbling up to everlasting life.” this description, physical pleasure is

tracted dying, because

it

In

regarded as a pro-

can only exist as the gratifying of

an ever-craving want, the removal of an ever-tormenting pain, the vain attempt to to ist

fill

an ever-empty void.

himself

:

tov emppelv is

quench an ever-burning

In the language of the sensual-

ev rovrcp earl to

real dt'ip'ijv

ye

thirst, or

ev rep

<bg nXelcr-

real dL'iptivra rriveiv

“ In this

rjdecog

pleasure, namely, to have the greatest inflowing (as into

a vacuum), to drink while ever thirsting, and ever to thirst

while drinking.” 495, A.

davarog

i

See the whole passage, from 492,

D., to

In the declaration in our text, Plato probably uses in the first of these interpretations.

quolibet mortis genere.

Ast renders

it


OMNIPRESENCE OF THE DIVINE JUSTICE.

333

LXII. Omnipresence of

Language

blance of Plato's

Bible

Remarkable Resem -

Divine Justice .

the

to

some Passages from

the

.

Page

63,

Line

ov yap dpeXpOrja^

1.

A tier],

In this passage avrr\q refers to

Law, which

tt ore

avrijg.

the Divine Justice or

by the Grecian

so frequently personified

is

vn

poets as ever sitting on the right hand of Jove and sharing

There

his throne.

is

a very strong resemblance between

these declarations and Psalm cxxxix.,

be neglected by

You

it.

7.

You

into the depths of the earth, nor, being raised fly

up

into

Heaven, but

whether remaining

that

you

pay the

shall

in this world, or

The

wild than these.”

never

on high, so

fitting

penalty,

having passed through

Hades, or having been borne

life into

shall

cannot, being small, so descend

to a region still

more

expressions of the Psalmist are

strikingly similar, although not directly applied to the trans-

Whither shall I go from thy

gressor.

I flee from

shall

.

and dwell thy

and whither

If I ascend up into Heaven, If I make my bed in Hades, behold,

thy presence ?

behold, thou art there

.

If I should

thou art there.

Spirit,

take the wings of the morning,

in the uttermost parts of the sea, even there shall

hand lead me, and

thy right

hand shall hold me.

More

in accordance with the spirit, although with less similarity

of expression, are upon the

There

is

is

thew passage, Job, xxxiv.,

ways of man, and

all his steps

21: His eyes he beholdeth.

no darkness, no land of the shades of the dead

(yio

or terra umbrarum), where the workers of iniquity * Is there not

some reason

to believe that this word,

generally rendered shadow of death may, ,

properly,

which

mean

is

the

the land of the shades as though it had been plural feminine of obtf* instead of having the punctuation

spiritual t

more

itself,

,

VV

;

which

world

it

has received from the Masorites 1


— DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT.

334

may dig

Compare,

hide themselves.

down

also,

Amos

,

ix.,

2

Sheol (or Hades), from thence shall

into

If they my hand :

Heaven from thence will I bring them down. If they be hidden in the top of Carmel from thence will I discover and take them. If they would If they ascend up

take them .

into

,

,

conceal themselves

from

thence will

from mine I command

eye in the bottom of the sea ,

and

the serpent ,

it

shall bite

them.

How

an ever wakeful,

vividly, too, is this doctrine of

retributive justice presented

by Sophocles

:

yytlode de fihsTceiv [ilv

avrovg 7vpog tov evgeOt)

phe-KELv ds npbg rove 6 vgg sbsig

fiportiv, )yrjv

uvoglov ftportiv

prjntj -yevEoOat (jxjrbg

6 e 7tov

Bethink you, then

Heaven hath

its

Its

eye upon the sinner.

No

hiding-place to

Can

;

eye upon the pious man,

e’er escape.

Flight there’s none,

which the unholy wretch CEdip. Col, 278.

LXIII. Doctrine of a Final Judgment

Word hvvre-

Use of the

.

X eia.

Page noTs

rep Tzavrl

eorum their

64, Line

collatio

1

.

ovu

elddbg avrCbv rfjv

^vptaXXerac.

Ast translates

quomodo, universo conducat,

contribution,” &c.

owreXeiav

He

66

onrj

this, nesciens

not

knowing

takes avvreXeta in what

is

perhaps the more usual signification in classic Greek, namea contribution by members of a society a share or assessThe other ment, and which agrees well with ^vp6dXXerat.

ly,

sense.,

,

however, of termination consummation &c.,

better with the context of this

passage.

,

,

It

resemblance

recommends to the

suits far

most important and solemn

itself, too, to

us by

its

striking

use of the word in certain declarations


DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT. of in

335

Both the ideas, however, may be united or final settlement of an account word reckoning our Scriptures.

tlie

,

We prefer this,

which has been long deferred.

because the

whole passage has reference to a judgment or final disposition of the wicked, and would, therefore, render it, “ not

knowing

their

end or consummation, in what way

tributes to the whole,� that

is,

in

suspension of punishment, and their

con-

what way the present doom, sustain the

final

Probably both senses were present

universal government. to the

it

mind of the writer, and both seem necessary harmony of the conception.

to

com-

plete the

Viger, in his Latin version of Eusebius, Praep. Evang.,

page 635, D., prefers

this

second sense, which, although

comes the nearest to the meaning of the compound. He

the least used, logical

sage, ignorans

FINIS God

translates the pas-

tandem aut qua parte istorum

EXITTJS cum universi rationibus

may

reader of

et

videlicet qui

and etymo-

radical

cohcereret.

deeply interesting subject of the delay

find this

punishment of the wicked treated

in the

The

at great

length by Plutarch in his treatise, TLepl tcov vtto tov Qelov

Ppadecoq Ti[iG)povg,evG)v

;

a very excellent edition of

which

has been lately edited by Professor Hackett of the Newton

Seminary.

Theological

The work

accompanied by

is

notes, chiefly of a theological character, exhibiting real

much

and useful learning, with no display of that philologi-

cal pedantry

which deforms so many modern

editions of

on the whole, forming one of the most

ancient writers, and,

valuable additions to our theological and classical literature.

HwreXeta,

in the sense of completion

,

summing

,

or wind-

ing up and in a connexion impressively similar to the pas,

sage in our

text, is

found in the explanation of the parable

of the tares and the wheat, in

be permitted as

is

final

to

grow

for the

here intimated by Plato,

which the former

sake of the all

latter,

are said to

and where,

things are referred to

period of decision and development

r :

O

some

6e dspiopoq


,

— -:

.

336

DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT.

— The

avvreXeia rov aitivog ear tv

harvest is the end

( the

day of reckoning) of the world. So shall it he in the end of the world (the winding up the conclusion the final account , ,

,

drama of life) ; they shall gather out all things that ojfend and all that do iniquity. Matthew xiii., 39, 41. The same remarkable word is found, Hebrews, ix., 26 airai; enl awreXeia t£)v alcjvuv of the great

the catastrophe

irpa^ig, or

:

— once in the winding up of the ages. 2 vvreXeta

signifies not only

an end like reXog, but an ,

ending together a con-clusion an accomplishment of great ,

,

purposes brought about by a long series of means, which, although, at times, ever so apparently divergent finally,

On

this doctrine of the

of sin,

compare Job,

all,

xxi.,

Divine delay in the punishment

29

The wicked is reserved (Heb. doom: unto the day of wrath

:

No

shall they he brought forth. is

have

hack) unto the day of

!jt£TT,

as

,

converged to one grand result.

shown by the

text in the

context, points

Old Testament,

more clearly

Very

judgment of a general and concluding kind. language

is

to a future

similar

held respecting the fallen angels, Jude, 6

3: All things (to nav to oXov) hath the ,

Lord made for himself yea which is almost equivalent

,

ovvreXeia avrtiv the Psalmist,

Re-

Compare,

served in chains to the judgment of the great day. also, Prov., xvi.,

:

tg5

tt

avri

the ivicked

for the day of evil;

to the declaration in our text i;

vp6aXXerat

when he ceased

to

In like manner,

look upon appearances,

in the language of our author (page 63, line 10), d)^ ev

TOTrrpoig rag rrpa^eig rchv avOpconcov nadopav

or,

na

— when he

“ entered into the sanctuary,” into the study and contemplation of the higher counsels of the Divine

“ then saw he their end”

dream when one awakctli

— ,

rrjv

so,

O

government

awreXecav

avrtiv.

Lord, when

they *

As

a

awake, or

Thus, we are satisfied, should the Hebrew lxxiii., 20. be rendered, as applying to the sinner, and not to God or it may, perhaps, be translated, “ When their image {shade, umbra manes. *

Psalm

;

,


;

DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT. in the

awaking

( that

337

in the resurrection morning, at the

is,

great day of account ), wilt thou despise their image (cddS^),

umbra (LXX., to elSgjXov avr&v). We would not engage in the superfluous work of endeavouring to prop, by the supports of human reason and human their ghost or

any

feelings,

There

is,

truth clearly revealed in the

however, no one which,

might be more safely trusted

if it

such a defence than

to

steady voice of humanity

when

may be

this

Here the long and

doctrine of a general final judgment.

the time

Holy Scriptures. were necessary,

safely appealed

From

to.

the smoking blood of Abel invoked the Di-

human

vine justice, there has ever been something in the

which has declared the necessity of a judgment, of when there shall be a GvvreXeia, or winding when it will be found that the Judge of all the Earth

breast

a fixed time,

up

;

has done

right,

and must do

right

when every wrong which

;

has been seemingly neglected s^ali be made right when “ all that is crooked shall be made straight / and every;

5

thing that

is

dark and mysterious shall be made clear.

alarmed conscience, even while cannot read a poor work of painful feeling

when

it

dreads,

fiction

demands

The

We

it.

without experiencing a

the termination of the story crosses

common parGvvreXeca when

these instinctive sentiments of the soul, or, in lance, does not end well, has no proper virtue (even the poor, miserable,

in repute by the world)

receive

its fitting

feels that a

is

low

virtue

which

is

held

not rewarded, and vice does not

The

punishment.

reader, in such cases,

wrong has been done to his moral sense that which even bad men pos-

the universal instinct of justice, sess,

has been violated.

or ghost) arises thou wilt reject ,

How, it.”

then, can the thought be

We would

also suggest, although

may not

be a similar idea in the

with much diffidence, whether there

as applied to a different character, Hebrew word Psalm xvii., 15 “ When thine image awakes ,” that is, the new spirSee, also, Job, iv., 6. itual form which thou wilt bestow. parallel

:

F

F


PLATONIC USE OF THE WORD

338

endured, that there will be no set time ig,

TVTCOg.

when

the great 7rpaf.

or drama, of this world shall be brought to a fitting close

and every act receive

its

just

recompense of reward

wicked shall not stand in the judgment.

The

?

Instead, however,

of bringing forward such Old Testament texts in proof of the doctrine as a revealed truth,

them a taking

for

we would

rather see in

granted of what the universal voice of hu-

manity has ever proclaimed as the voice of God, uttered in the conscience as well as declared in his

Word.

LXIV. Platonic Use of the

Page

Line k. r. A

Word

rvnog.

dv tvttov

4. fjv rig prj ytyvdtGuojv ovd’

64,

Which, unless one knoweth, he can never know the type (the dorm) of life.” That is, without this doctrine of the end of the wicked, and of the manner in which the present suspension and the final infliction of their Idol ttots,

doom

.

contribute to the universal harmony, life

would have

would be Tohu and Bohu (Genesis, i., 2), a moral chaos, on which no intelligible form had been imno meaning.

pressed

;

It

or, to

take a comparison from Job, xxxviii., 14,

it

would be like a confused mass of clay, which had received Tvnog also, in a *>e stamp (rimog) of no significant seal. ccondary or metaphorical sense, means a summary descrip ,

.o/i,

or, in

philosophy, a general idea , an outline or model ,

,

requiring a correspondence or general conformity in the filling

Hence

up of the more minute parts which are not specified. the

common

phrase, ev tvttg) Xeyecv,

to

say in gen-

eral terms.

This use of the word may be found in the Republic, 379, B., and the following pages, where

what he first

Plato lays

ii.,

down

styles tvtcol nepl '&EoXoyiag, types in theology , or

principles respecting the Divine Nature,

which

are


,

EVIL IN THE PRESENT STATE EXCEEDS THE GOOD. 339 ever to be kept in mind in forming a right estimate of God’s character and government.

have rvnog Romans, ,

oars

etc

In a similar application,

17

vi.,

6s

:

tw

nap6lag slg ov napedodrjTS tvttov didaxrjg

thanks be

to

God

,

— But

ye have obeyed, from the heart that ,

of doctrine in which ye were instructed. rivative vnoTimojoig , 2

Timothy,

13

i.,

form

So, also, the de-

—vttotvttgwlv s%s

vyiaivovrcov Aoyuv, Holdfast the form of sound words doctrines)

— doubtless

referring to

we

$£<p, vtt7)kov-

some symbol,

( or

creed, or

catechism which Timothy had received from Paul, or had

heard recited by him, containing an outline of the Christian faith,

and which he was

and love

use as a preacher and instructer

This Paul enjoins upon him

in the Gospel. faith

to

(or,

as he says in the passage in

sk napdiag ), instead of regarding

it

as a

hold in

to

Romans,

mere speculative

scheme, into which, without care, such a rvnog or vnorvncdocg might degenerate.

Without understanding

this type of life,

we

are told in

the text, there could be no right judgment formed respect-

ing happiness or blessedness, and their opposites.

It is

an

edge of what constitutes the blessed

A complete knowlman depends, not only

upon the end of his individual

but also upon his rela-

expansion of the sentiment of Solon.

life,

tion to the great end, or ovvrsXsia, of the

tion of

which he forms a

on the Greek

part.

world or dispensa-

See Dissertation

xxxviii.,

Words for Happiness and Blessedness

.

LXV. Explanation of a

Difficult

Passage, in which Plato seems

to

assert that our Evils, in the Present State, exceed our

Good

Page

.

68,

Line

11. nXstovcvv 6s tgjv prj.

to determine the true

meaning here,

It is

not easy

or to decide with abso-


,

340 EVIL

THE PRESENT STATE EXCEEDS THE• GOOD.

IN

lute certainty,

whether the speaker intends

ponderance

good or

to

to give the prey

evil in the present state

which

there can be no doubt to

;

although

party, in this severe con-

he would assign the final triumph. Ast renders it, pluribus vero quee non sint bona pugna dicimus, immortalis flict,

,

est ,

&c.

arj.

;

In the Latin version

mat., v., 593,

which

it

,

which, he must supply dyadcov

to authorize

to

is translated,

Clemens Alexandinus,

uncertain whether ejusmodi

Stro -

pluribus qui non sunt ejusmodi

as ambiguous as the Greek, and leaves

is

after

is

meant

to refer to

it

utterly

dyadcov or

evavricov.

Viger, in his Latin version of Eusebius, Prcep.

Evang.,

549, gives an entirely different rendering, by

xi.,

reading nvcov for rcov

lum misceatur

—quibuscum

— a sense

convey any meaning

at

tarnen

genus aliud nul-

which even his emendation, if it It might be, all, would not yield.

on the contrary (and the supposition has much intrinsic plausibility, if we lay aside all considerations drawn from other passages), that the writer meant, by rcbv neither good nor bad, or

what some would

prj,

things

style adiafyopa.

Ficinus renders concisely, et quidem plurium, meaning

thereby the evils

;

which

construction,

he derived from supplying

after prj the

it

may

word

be supposed,

evavricov, and

regarding irXeiovcov as governing rcov, instead of agreeing

with

it

—as though the whole expression had been equiva-

lent to evavria rrXeiova eivai rcov prj evavricov.

The

great

awkwardness of the conupon negatives. II Xeiovcov would most naturally be referred to what just

objection to this

is

the exceeding

struction arising from thus piling negatives

precedes

it,

namely, evavricov.

It

posed that Plato wrote carelessly, connect

it

might, however, be sup.

and actually meant

with dyadcov, farther above.

would correspond

In this case

to it

clumsy English sentence, “ full of contrary but of more than what is not;”

to the

good, and full of the

which, notwithstanding

,

its

harshness, would leave

doubt as to the meaning, although

it

little

would require us

to


— EVIL IN THE PRESENT STATE EXCEEDS THE GOOD. 341 regard TrXecovcov as governing rtiv instead of agreeing with

This view, namely, that rcov fir] agrees with dyadtiv understood, and is governed by nXecovcov, or which would

it.

regard the sentence as assigning a preponderance to the good, might likewise be strengthened by an inference very

drawn from his having so expressly given the superiority in the moving and control of the heavens to the beneficent soul as where Clinias is made to say (page 38, naturally

;

line 1), ovft oolqv dXXcog Xeyeiv 'ifwxfjv

nepiayeiv avrd.

fj

Traaav aperfjv exovoav

Especially might

be deduced

it

from that subtle and beautiful disquisition on the resemblance of the heavenly motions to the motion of vovg or intellect, ,

or of the best soul in distinction from that evil one

which

ever moves, pavitctig re nal ardnrog, in madness and disorder.

But, as

terpretation,

we

conceive,

and compelled

to

we

are estopped from this in-

acquiesce in the contrary, by

the fact, that Plato, in the Republic, most expressly asserts that our evils

dXX

exceed our good

’

oXiyoyv (6 deog)

yap eXarro) ray add rcov itantiv. We cannot, help thinking that he suffered a morbid feeling

alriog, t:oXv

therefore,

of the immediate evils of the world directly around him,

and which were magnified by contiguity, forget the legitimate inferences from his

gument, and

imply

may

that,

to

make

to

cause him to

own

beautiful ar-

a declaration which would seem to

on the whole, there

is

more

also indulge the supposition, that

evil

than good.

We

he refers merely

to

the present time, and believed that the great battle of the universe or the fia^T] aOdvarog of ,

,

which he soon speaks,

would eventually bring out an opposite preponderance of good, and a final triumph of the beneficent over the evil and disorderly soul.

F

f 2


*

342

,

Maxrj aOdvarog or battle of the universe. ,

LXVI. Max?]

AOdvarog

or Battle of the

,

Bowers of Good and Evil £er,

because

which God

Page rj

68,

roiavjT],

would

we

it

is

Sin therefore

.

between the

,

7io

,

Light

Mat -

Treason against the Cause of Good, for contending with the Evil Soul. is

Line

11.

MAXH

(paper,

drj,

’A0ANATO2

nal (pvXafcrjg tiavpaarrig deopevrj.

say, is

an immortal

wonderful care or vigilance.”

menced

Universe

conflict,

The

and needing most

simile

in 7joXepog, several lines back, is

which

egtlv

“ Such,

which was comhere preserved

would be no extravagance to call sublime. All things are most vividly represented as engaged in an everlasting conflict between the powers of Good and Evil. This is the great aycov which, and brought out

in a style

as he elsewhere says,

it

avrl Travrov ayd)VG)v, in the place

is

or before, all other conflicts.

In the description of this

battle of the universe, the author

seems inspired with a more The images in

of,

than Homeric grandeur of imagination. the cite

Theomachia

of the Iliad

may have more tendency to

and arouse the passions, but they are

ex-

far inferior in the

power of producing that swelling, yet calm feeling of moral sublimity with which the soul is filled in reading this noble passage. Not Gods alone descending swell the

but

all

parties

nature and to

this

all

worlds rise into deeply interested

universal

struggling with disorder. ness, truth with error,

science of medicine

fight,

Order

strife.

Light

is

everywhere

contending with dark-

knowledge with ignorance.

is fighting

of every kind with the rude and savage

kvrap hnel

The

with disease, agriculture

with the hostile stubbornness of the earth,

* Iliad, xx., 47.

is

ueO’ opikov

,

art

life.

0?.vpmoL

and science

On

a higher

rjTivdov avdptiv


Max?] aOavarog or battle of the universe.

343

,

scale, the virtues are personified as in

with our

conflict

Righteousness is engaged in a strife which knows sins. no compromise with unrighteousness. Temperance maintains an unintermitting struggle with her most powerful and unyielding antagonist.

To crown

all,

God

himself and the

powers are represented as everywhere contending with the forces of the Evil Soul, and with the dark, mind-

celestial

ess,*

disorderly Spirit of Matter.

All this, too, in a strife of

seems

to

be for our sakes, and for our aid,

which we are so little able to appreciate the The Gods and daipoveg are our allies.

immortal issues.

They

fight for us as their

We

flocks.

nrryiara

;

as shepherds for their

do not wonder, then, that

this

passage sug-

gested to some of the Fathers that strikingly similar declaration of the Apostle, Ephesians

n dXrj npog

,

vi.,

12

— Ova

eonv

rjp.lv

rj

oapua aX Ad npog rag apxdg npog rag e^ovolag, npog rovg uoopouparopag rov cuorovg rov alcoyog ai[ia ical

,

,

rovrov npog rd nvevparmd

—“ Our wrestling ,

vioig

rrjg novrjplag

is not until

flesh

ev rolg enovpa -

and blood only

but

,

with principalities with powers, with the rulers of darkness ,

of this world, with the spiritual powers of evil in the Heavens Compare Clemens Alex., Stromat., 593, B., and Eusebius Prcep.

Evang .,

xi.,

2G, p. 559.

Both of them

,

institute a

comparison between this passage and Ephesians,

12,

vi.,

and both regard Plato as having derived his doctrine of evil

powers

in conflict

with the good from the Old Testa-

ment, especially from such passages as Job,

i.

and

6, 7,

,

Deut., xxxii., 8. Invisible beings are contending for»us It is

to

something like

this,

and not

(although such a warfare, too,

is

to a

and against

physical

strife

us.

only

included), that the philoso

pher alludes, when he says, ^vfipaxoi 6s rpiiv $soi re ual datpoveg, 7]pslg 6’ av urryiara Decoy real datfiovcov. Such, too, is the

constant style of the

New

Testament.

a ndXrj, an aycov, a struggle, a battle, a race, in

Life

is

which we


— — .

3x4

M ax?)

aOavarog or battle of the universe. ,

are earnestly called upon “

to

press forward

to the

mark of

the prize of the upward calling ,” rrjq avco tcXrjoecoq ;* as though God from above was uttering aloud the neXevopa^

or cheering battle-cry, to the contending host, and saying to

each

I

faithful

code, “

combatant, avabrjOi

will give thee the

crown of

come up hither

life ;Ӥ or,

as

it is

and

admirably

paraphrased in that noblest of hymns, ’Tis God’s

That ’Tis his

To

A

all

animating voice

calls thee

from on high

own hand

;

presents the prize

thine uplifted eye.

cloud of witnesses around,

Hold thee

in full

survey

;

Forget the steps already trod,

And upward urge

K aXov

yap to ddXov nal the prize, and the hope is

We may

Phaedon.||

existence

is

rj

thy way.

eXmq

peyaXrj

— “ For noble

is

great,” as Socrates tells us in the

learn even from Plato that our present

no vain thing, no fleeting

For man’s

show

illusion given

according to the mawkish sentimentalism of a modern poet, but a most solemn and dread reality, connected with the

whole scheme of the universe, and in which not only man, but angels and devils, powers visible and invisible, are intent

and deeply interested

Socrates, in the Republic, “

“Life, in

actors.

may be

itself,”

says

insignificant, but think

you,” he continues, “that an immortal thing ought to be

concerned, and in earnest for so short a part alone, and not for the

whole of

its

existence”

old ovv dOavarcp rcpaypart

vnep xpouou ovrcoq oXtyov povov dslv eonovdaKsvai, aX/1’ ovx vnep TOT IIANT02. Lib x., 608, E.

Page

69,

Line 23.

* Philippians,

iii.,

(f)vXatcrjq

tiavpaorrig deopevrj, “ Re-

14.

t Revelations, xi., 12.

t

$ Ibid.,

ii.,

Thessalonians, 10.

I!

iv., 16.

Phaed., 114, C.


;

;

M dx'r]

.

aOdvarog or battle of the universe

quiring a wonderful watch or vigilance.”

mean,

first,

guard

of watching

the act

first

impression would be that

A

referred to the soul of man.

it

compels us

is to

careful consideration,

whole argument, and-especially of what

line 11,

may

,

Here, perhaps, the

page 72,

QvXclict]

secondly, a watch or

or,

a slate of mind watchfulness, or vigilance

or, thirdly,

ever, of the

34 1

,

to refer the

term

be

how-

is said,

to the Deity,

as intimating the intense interest and watchful care with

which God regards the progress of tween Good and Evil.

The

this great battle be-

precise point of the argument, as a whole,

vious without considerable attention tion is bestowed,

when

consequence of not having been obtruded upon

The

substance of

it

seems

speak and think of sin as of that

God

asked

to

is

the Divinities

who have

notice.

who

moment, and who imagine

by

their poor offerings, are

mere earthly

class of

force, in

its

us to be this: those

little

easily propitiated

what

afterward

to

not ob-

that atten

mind with more

strikes the

it

but

;

is

rulers they

The

charge of us.

shown (although somewhat

would liken absurdity

out of

its

is

regular

place in the argument), of supposing that even these lower

guardians could be influenced to do acts injurious to their respective charges, by gifts filched from the very treasury of those to

whom

they are presented

should be seduced to

let

;

as though dogs

wolves ravage the

flock,

by the

offering of a small share of the spoils of the robbery, or the

governor of a vessel, tempted, by presents of wine and in-

cense from the

How much ties

sailors, to destroy

should

less, then,

it

both the ship and them.

be thought that the Divini-

could be induced to be placable to offenders, because

they make offerings crimes

to

them of the very

dv avrolg rtiv

aSucrjiidrcov

These considerations being borne subsequently introduced, and

we

in

of their

own

a\impd dnoveuoiev.

mind, although in part

feel the force of this sub-

lime allusion to the ud%y ddavarog j

fruit

— the

great strife to


— M axq

346

which we

aOdvarog or battle of the universe. ,

immense

are parties, the

theatre on

are actors, and the almost infinite relations

we

which we bear

universe of rational and immortal beings.

Our

therefore, are not unimportant, nor are they,

when

be atoned test,

by any

for

light sacrifice.

should be remembered,

it

Good and

God

Evil.

the battle, and

is

himself

is

Moreover,

to the

actions, evil, to

this con-

between the powers of

leading on the one host to

is

There

personally striving for the victory.

can, therefore, be no neutrality allowed in this warfare,

much for

any actual taking

less

whose

part with the

sake, mainly, the contest

is

enemy by

On

waged.

those

this ac-

by a species of anthropopathy, is represented as exercising the utmost vigilance and circumspection count, the Deity,

in behalf of a charge so

and exposed the

commander

watching

immense, engaged

of a mighty army,

who

is

for the slightest irruption of the

Ov

Xaoi t emrerpa^araL

roooa

/cat

in a conflict

compared

is

to

awake and enemy ever

%prj TTavvv^iov evdeiv PovXrj^opov 9

G)

He

tremendous.

to perils so

avdpa

fiepbrj/

,

lev*

In an infinitely higher sense do. both the Scriptures

and

Plato assert the ever-sleepless vigilance of the physical and

moral Guardian of the universe slumber eth that keepeth in all the

eart-li ,

gle of life

Israel .”

is to

be allowed

Resistance

be secured

to the foe,

moral agents,

:

beholding the evil and the good."

and death.

for

at

is to

a strug-

It is

be made

at

kingdom of darkness.

point to the advance of the

triumph

“ He never sleejpeth or “ The eyes of the Lord are

every

cost.

No

quarter

every Final is to

and especially when any of those

whom

the battle

is

fought, are guilty of

forming an unnatural alliance with the enemy.

This con-

stitutes the intrinsic

odiousness and wickedness, the ex-

ceeding sinfulness of

sin.

sal

Cause of Good.

It is

It is

treason against the univer-

direct opposition to the very na-

* Iliad,

ii.,

24.


plato’s doctrine of the datfioveg ture of

God, and a base and treacherous aiding of his ma-

When

lignant foe.

we

or genii. 347

,

these considerations are kept in mind,

are prepared to feel the force of the concluding decla-

God

ration, that

unholy men, and

by

will never be propitiated to

offerings from

sympathize with Clinias in his passion-

O vdaptig'

of indignation at the. very thought:

ate burst

ovre ave/crog 6 Xoyog — “ By no declaration

is

never

to

means

cannot be

it

;

the

;

be tolerated.”

LXVII. Plato's Doctrine of the Aaifioveg, or Genii.

Page

69,

Line

2.

Qeoi

There are clearly

teal datfioveg.

three distinct grades of superhuman beings presented to us,

not only in the theology of Plato, but also in the Grecian

mythology as

set forth

These

by the poets.

Z evg,

are

Qeoi

and Aatpoveg. Qeoi, however, includes both the others,

we should

rather,

when the common in

say,

in that invocation so

first

pressions

aiS

;

or,

two are mentioned, as

the poets, T2 Zev

the term fteot contains daifioveg

,

teal

Qeoi,

and, again, in such ex-

the above from our text,

it

includes

Z evg. See

the Timceus, 41, A.

We

have several times alluded

Aaifioveg, or Genii,

more

at length.

to Plato’s doctrine of the

and would dwell upon

The passage

in

which we

express and the clearest mention of them mis, or Appendix to teal

imo rovrotg

The Laws,

e^rjg,

984, D.

AAIM0NA2,

and under these, the Genii

(as

because of the bad sense that the tached *

to the

word demons), an

find the

most

in the Epino-

uera de rovrovg

j

:

we

New

— “ Next

to

prefer to render

it,

tc.

r. X.

Testament has

at-

aerial* race, having the

According to a division which he makes of

Supreme

is

in this place

deptov be yevog e^ov

edpav rpirrjv ev^atg rtfiav fiaXa %peoov, these,

it

all

beings below the

Deity, and corresponding to the four states or elements.


:

348 plato’s doctrine of the third seat,

must

we honour by

They

The

prayers,”

which

ferred to the entire passage,

here.

dalpoveg, or genii.

reader

is re-

too long for insertion

is

are spoken of as possessing wonderful intelli-

human

gence, as feeling a deep sympathy in

affairs,

as lov-

ing the good, hating the bad, and, in consequence of their

middle position in the

air,

acting as interpreters and medi-

To

between God and man.

ators

the

same

speaks of them in the Symposion, 202, E. /Xaipoviov pera^v

eon Oeov

olg rti reap dvdpcdreojv, nal ’

rovrov

i]

Oeog de

nv

7}

.^iid

nal

rj

rti

reapd

rti)v

did

lepecov re^vr)

,

evv

to

retiv

'detiv.

ov piyvvrai aXXa did rovrov

opu Ala deolg

Oevdovoi

nal yap

:

re nal dvTjrov , epp7]vevov de-

avQpumoiq

pavniCTj retioa

avOpti) nep

effect Socrates

retied eo-

avOpcdreoig nal eyprjyopooi nal na-

For the whole demonial race

is

between God

mortals, acting as interpreters or messengers to both.

Through ical art

;

passes

this for

all divination,

God mingles

but through these media

and the whole prophet-

not directly with the is

human

race,

ever carried on the intercourse

between Heaven and men, both when awake and wdien Hos See, also, Apuleius, De Deo Socratis 674 asleep.” :

,

nomine A aipovag nuncupant, inter terricolas caelicolasque vectores, hinc precum inde donorumJ* Compare with the above, Hesiod, Works and Days, 233 Graeci

:

iyyvg yap kv dvdp&veoLGLV eovreg

dOdvaroi ?i£vggovglv. For, close at hand,

Immortal eyes behold us evermore.

So, also, a few lines below,

where he represents the number

of these invisible beings as amounting to thirty thousand

Tpig

yap pvpcoi

elalv knl xOovl Trov^vdorelpy

dOdvaroi Zrjvog

<£YAAKE2

rjipa kcGapevoi,

7r dvrrj

'd'vrjr&v

dvOpdiruv,

(poiTtivrsg kn’ alav.

For thrice ten thousand wait upon our earth Jove’s everlasting guards for mortal men,

Who

roam the world

in

;

robes of air concealed.

^


:

Plato’s doctrine op the dafioveg, or genii. 349 Milton must certainly have had in mind this passage from

Hesiod, and perhaps, also, 2 Kings,

vi.,

17

Millions of spiritual creatures walk the earth,

Unseen, both when

we

when we wake.

sleep and

In one of Plato’s strange myths,

which may be found

in

the fourth book of The

Laws, 713, C., the Aafioveg, or Genii, are represented as having been anciently (in the reign of Saturn) the political governors of mankind, ruling them as

man

rules the inferior animals.

to indicate

It

w as

intended, probably,

r

the Divine origin of law and government, in op-

position to the absurd paradox that they derive, not only their forms

and practical administration, but also their

in-

herent authority, solely from the consent of the governed. It is,

however, a paradox which

difficult to refute

it is

by

arguments capable of being appreciated by the mass of

mankind, and therefore Plato, as

is

usual with him in such

cases, does not surrender the truth, or leave

scheme

of legislation, but

cient myth.

The

the Greek.

On

account, however, of

its

mode

ideas, a version is given in full

“

:

dition of the blessed life of the

abundantly and spontaneously

it

related,

self-control

violence

how

of human

it

have received a

And

all things. :

tra-

how

of those days,

this

Saturn, knowing, as

human nature

that

,

in the absolute

,

and unrighteousness appointed as rulers and magis,

men, but beings of a Divine and no-

bler race, namely, the Genii.

wards the flocks and

we

had

intrinsic value, as

of presenting certain

affairs can never avoid being filled with

trates to our cities, not

stitute

We

men

said to have been the cause of

we have

out of his

length of the passage compels us to omit

exhibiting the origin and ancient

is

it

throws himself back upon an an-

all

we now in that we

Just as

tame herds,

conduct

do not con-

oxen as rulers over oxen, nor goats over

ourselves retain the dominion, the

Deity, because he

was a

lover of men.

goats, but

same thing

He

did the

appointed over

us a better race than ourselves, namely, the Aafioveg

G

G

to-

;

who,


;

350 plato’s doctrine of the

much

taking the oversight with

and

us,

and giving

dalpoveg, or genii. ease, both to themselves

us peace, and reverence, and true

to

freedom, and an abundant supply of right and justice, ren-

dered the families of

men most

all

This myth (he proceeds), when ac-

tumult and sedition.

commodated

blessed, and free from

to the truth (dXrjOsia xpcjpevog), or truly inter-

preted, really means, that in whatever states, not God, but

some mere

earthly power, has the ultimate sovereignty, there

there can be no escape from evils possible, to imitate that

time of Saturn

;

and

we

that

we

ought, as far as

which existed in the giving earnest heed to whatever

that,

principle of immortality tions,

mode

;

may

of

life

human

yet remain in

institu-

should, in public and private, administer both our

families and our states in accordance with

it

;

naming Law

(yoyov) the dispensation (Nov Aiavoprjv), or government of

Mind

The specimen

or Reason.”

hibited in this last sentence is poor

ment corresponds precisely as Nov£* avev dpegecog, or

of Plato’s philology ex-

enough

;

but the senti-

to Aristotle’s definition of

Mind

Law,

without passion.

We find the same mythical statement in the Politicus, 271, P. 272, A. to

which

It

there

may

also be connected with the doctrine

was an

allusion (page 231) as having

some

support in the Sacred Volume, namely, of guardian or super-

intending angels having the care of particular nations.

we have Evang.,

already said, this xi.,

regarded by Eusebius, Prcep

.

26, as maintained in the Septuagint version of

Deuteronomy, d)g

is

As

xxxii., 8

ore dcegspL^ev

f

O Tipiorog r/

eOvrj,

SieoneLpev vlovg ’A Sag, eorrjoev opia eQv&v Kara apiOpov

’ATrEAQN 0EOT

—“When

Most High divided the nations, when he dispersed the sons of Adam, he established the boundaries of the nations according to the number of the angels of God. But Jacob was the Lord’s portion Israel

was

the

the line of his inheritance.”


THE FOUR CARDINAL VIRTUES.

351

LXVIII. Beauty and Accuracy of the Ancient and Platonic Division Deep Moral Significance of of the Four Cardinal Virtues .

Four Greek Words AuoXaola ’A uparela^ 'VyupareLa, and 26)(f>poovvrj, as indicating the Four Moral Degrees. ’

the

,

Page I

uera

69, Line 4.

(ppovrjcrecjg

briety,

:

,

oco&l 6e dutaioovvrj

ical

oocbpoavvr]

“ Righteousness and temperance, or so-

There was something very

with wisdom, save us.”

admirable in the ancient classification of the virtues under the four cardinal heads, ducaioovvrj, oco(ppoovvrj avdpeta

and

oo(j)ia

,

righteousness

which we use

for

want of a

philosophical analysis of

Republic,

lib.

iv.,

them

term

and wisdom.

A

most

may

all

They may it

is

be found in the

and continued

P.,

be briefly defined thus

immediate reference

our fellow beings, although public, in a

(a

,

commencing 427,

through several pages. /Xiuaioavvrj has

better),

,

fortitude

temperance

,

to the duties

:

w e owe T

used by Plato, in the Re-

more extensive sense,

for the state of soul

from

whence all right actions proceed, and in the composition of which all the other virtues do more or less enter. 26)</>poovvT more properly, relates to duties we owe ourselves, or, ],

according

to Plato’s favourite allegorical

comparison of the

soul to a state, diuaioovvr] would have regard to relations, OGXftpoovvrj to its internal police.

strength of soul or will tivity

and

xliii., p.

practical

which gives

its

foreign

’A vdpela

is that

to all the virtues ac-

See remarks on avdpeia, Dissertation 2o0/a, when ranked among the virtues, is

efficacy.

257.

wisdom

,

as distinguished from the scientific or

speculative moral insight of the mere casuist.

Plato elsewhere frequently styles

grounded on

(frpovrjoig

It is

what

—a wisdom—

scientific calculations of utility

not

deduced from

antecedents and consequents, but rather an innate perception of right, the result of a

pure heart clearing the under-


THE FOUR MORAL DEGREES.

352 standing

In

being, in fact, a sense or taste rather than science ,

;

would be an innate discernment of God and the universe, and the same with

highest import,

its

our relations to

it

the Scripture ho(j)La.

Cicero has attempted the same distinctions of the four cardinal virtues, without the names, in his Offices,

He most

Sed omne, quod

clearly imitates Plato.

estum, id quatuor partium oritur ex aliqua. perspicientia veri sollertiaque versatur societate tuenda, tribuendoque

tractarum fide

suum

;

5.

est hon-

Aut'enim in

aut in

hominum

cuique, et rerum con-

aut in

;

omnium

quae fiunt, quaeque dicuntur,

ordine et modo, in quo inest modestia et temperantia. quatuor,

i.,

aut in animi excelsi atque invicti magni-

;

tudine et robore

lib.

quamquam

Quas

inter se colligata atque implicata sunt,

tamen ex singulis certa officiorum genera nascuntur.

The etymology

of this beautiful word ccdcppoavvrj

before us in this very passage from our text

212ZEI. (f)pov

;

It

060

clearly from

is

put

OGXppoovvr]

:

and

ooog, ou)ÂŁg),

,

is

(pprjv ,

and would, accordingly, signify the setting or healing

virtue of the soul soundness of the spirit or spiritual health , ,

in distinction

war which

is

from that dissipation corruption or internal ,

,

the result of the opposite.

The division into what are styled the four cardinal virtues may be regarded as made icara TTOiorrjra in respect ,

to quality.

There

term of Aristotle,

is

is

another arrangement, which, to use a

made Kara

irooorrpa, in respect to quan-

This expresses what may be styled

tity.

grees ascending, by

way

or total privation of

all virtue, to

,

the

moral de-

of climax, from the lowest stage,

perfect health of the soul.

the highest condition, or

They

are represented

by

four

Greek terms, namely, anoXaoca, duparda eyupareia and ,

,

co)(j)poovvr}.

The

words contains,

more

etymological analysis alone of these

in itself,

volumes of morality of a purer and

practical kind than is to be found in

treatise of

modern

casuistry.

The

first

many

a frigid

of two them, as


)

;

THE FOUR MORAL DEGREES. Aristotle tells us, Ethic.

domain of to

vice, the last

353

Nicomach ., vii., 1, belong to the two to that of virtue. According

another classification, the two extremes denote respect-

ively the perfection of moral excellence and of moral depravity, the complete separation* of all heterogeneous ele-

ments from both,

or, in

mixed

those quality

other words, the purely wicked and

;

while the two means would represent

states

wherein the one or the other moral

the purely virtuous

may have

a temporary superiority, yet neither can be

said to be triumphant

.

’A noXaaia ( from a, privative and uoXaotg, restraint would denote uncontrolled licentiousness the N ovg (to use ,

Plato’s anthropological division) in utter darkness, the -&vp,og in complete subjection to the emOvptia

;

or, in

other words,

the will not simply overpowered, but the consenting slave

Compare

of appetite and lust.

dpyoKparucbg

Plato’s description of the

man whose

avrjp, or the

soul is a perfect

democracy of ungoverned propensities, Republic 559, 560.

mode

Such a character

is

free

to sin

,

lib. viii.,

or, to

adopt a

of speech directly opposite, yet equally correct, he

so strenuously contend as

a will which

is its

own

is

which some the highest prerogative of man,

hound in the iron chain of that free willf tyrant, cursed

for

with

its

own

self-

determining power, and utterly unrestrained by any fear of

man, or any grace of God. ’

The

AKpareiais want of moral power.

and has some sense of

its

bondage.

It

soul

is

awaking,

feels the chain

which

* See Remarks on the two senses of the word dyioq, p. 322, 323, and note. t All the seeming paradoxes and contradictions connected with this expression arise

the subject 7jTe rfjg

is

from the different points of view from whence

contemplated.

were the

tjte rrj

servants of sin ye

being freed from

sin,

See Romans,

vi.,

20, ore yap dovlou

“ For when yo were free from righteousness, but now, and having become subject to God,” &c. GG2

dyapriag ehsvdepoi

dwaLoovvTp

k. t. X.


(

THE FOUR MORAL DEGREES.

354 the is

first

The

character mistakes for freedom.

overpowered, but unreconciled

struggling feebly against

rational will

to its degradation,

and

it.

’E yrcpdreia, temperance

,

or inward power

,

would denote

the rational will a conqueror, yet holding the sceptre over

a turbulent and rebellious foe ever seeking to regain the

supremacy, and requiring constant watchfulness and restraint.

Zoxfipoovvrj is the spiritual Hygeia,

not only superior, but triumphant

and

signifies the will

in perfect

harmony with

the reason, and presiding, with ever-unresisted sway, over appetites and propensities in cheerful submission to

and rational authority. the spirit healed

In

its

its

highest Platonic sense

— in harmony with

and only

itself,

true it is

falling

short of the Scriptural idea of harmony with Heaven.

Such

are the thoughts suggested

faint outline of

Nicomach ., all

by the very terms, a

which may be found

in

Aristotle, Ethic.

Almost,

if

not quite,

the words derived from (bprjv (0pov), such as

(frpovrjoig,

lib. vii., c. i., 5, 6, c. ix.

(ppovipog, go) j)p(ov, otocppoGvvT], (ppovio), although generally

rendered wise

,

wisdom prudent ia, &c., partake more of a ,

moral than of an intellectual quality, to

express a combination of both.

or, rather,

They

may be

refer to

said

what may

be styled practical wisdom in distinction from speculative ,

knowledge even of the science of morals.

dom formed of Socrates.

a peculiar

trait

both in the

life

This moral wisand philosophy

Xenophon has most admirably

said of him,

% 0 (pLav nal G(xKpp0Gvv7jV ov dicopL^sV) Memorabilia ,

iii.,

9


;

PECULIAR USE OF THE INDICATIVE MODE.

355

LXIX. Mode

Peculiar Use of the Indicative

in certain Cases

New

parison of Passages from the

Page

Line

70,

persuade by

We

flatteries.”

text, in this place, requires

justify us in thus

than what

— what

;

This

Testament,

as, for

yeyewTifiEvog horn of

God

Etc

probably the case, to

is

and there

is

by the context when

The usage

ployed.

disposition, tendency, or na-

thus seeming to occupy the

extent, in all languages,

culty in determining

is

,

ought to do, or would do, rather

it

place of the subjunctive.

some

and because other examples

sometimes taking the indicative mode sub-

actually does

it

— “ Would

thus render, because the con-

it,

jectively, as expressing desire

ture of a thing

Xoywv

ttelOovol 'dconEiatg

2.

Com-

.

Testament.

no great it is

thus em-

occurs a number of times in the

example, John,

1st Epist.,

iii.,

rov Qeov dpaprlav ov notEt

commitleth not sin

tendency, or disposition

that

is, it

— he would not

diffi-

9

New nag 6

:

— Whosoever

is not his nature,

A much

sin.

clearer

example, and one about which there can be no question, although very similar to the preceding,

mans,

ii.,

4

dv os dyEi thee to

what

:

ayvocov

not

Such

is its

goodness of God leadetli tendency or nature, that is,

most striking proof that the actual

It

Compare,

would have been

men

also,

Mark,

better for

him

them not

to

,

does not always

21

<5rc.

have known &c. ,

often furnish the

effect

xiv.,

icpEcrrov rjv avrolg pij EnsyvwKEvai better for

\ietclvoi -

that the

would do, although wicked

take place.

be found, Ro-

to xp^otov tov Qeov Elg

knowing

repentance.

it

on

may

It

;

:

uaXov

fjv

2 Peter,

avrd)

ii.,

21

:

would have been


356 ARITHMETICAL AND GEOMETRICAL EQUALITY.

LXX. Word

Use of the

UXsovegta. Aristotle's Distinction between

Arithmetical and Geometrical Equality

Page

71, Line 4. nXeove^cav.

This

.

a very general

is

term, and, although usually rendered covetousness wherever

occurs in the

it

New

may

Testament,

be applied

to

case in which one seeks to Lave more than others, be

any it

in

respect to wealth, worldly honours, or sensual enjoyment.

would place them

Plato, as well as the Scriptures,

the

be

same low its

and regard the passion, whatever may

scale,

immediate object, as in

harmony of the universe

the

all in

cases alike opposed to

all

that

;

is, to

the good of the

whole, the good of the parts, the good of the individual

who

exercises the feeling, besides being intrinsically, or irrespective of consequences, an evil, and a disease in the spirIt

it.

comprehends

bition , and,

when

all that is

included under our term

am -

directed to personal distinction, is pre-em-

inently “ a lust of the

propensities

mindf in distinction from those bodily which some moralists would regard as the only

sources of sin. Plato here compares

one member

what belongs

to

it

to a plethora, or a

absorb into

to the

itself

whole body

more than

:

that arithmetical equality

being, be

it

angels,

We

law of equality

;

in

share of

rfjv TrXeove^tav ev

oapidvoLg ocoyaot vooiyia naXovyevov. generally, a violation of the

tendency its

may

yev

call

it,

not simply of

which would reduce

men, or the lower animals,

all

ranks of

to the

same

undistinguishing level, but of that geometrical equality without

which harmony could not

exist, or

a dead and monotonous unison. ity

to

A

would become only

violation of this equal-

would consist in the desire or tendency of any member grow out of its natural proportions. Those who have it

may

call

it

a lofty ambition

;

the Scriptures, however, and


FOLLY OF ATTEMPTING TO BRIBE HEAVEN. true philosophy, represent

it

as a

low and

selfish passion,

which, while

utterly blind to that infinitely nobler sentiment it

357

causes the soul to acquiesce, and even rejoice in ranks

and

scheme,

distinctions, as necessary parts of the Divine

yet enables after “ that

it

to lose sight of

them

all in its

aspirations

honour which cometh from God only.”

For the

between arithmetical and

distinction alluded to

geometrical equality, or laoTTjg (from which,

we can

hardly

help thinking, comes the Latin jus, justus, justitia), see ArEthic. Nicomacli.,

istotle,

lib. v.,

The Laws, 757, A., yao Iootvtolv ovaatv.

sixth book of cing, dvolv

c.

and

;

also, the

the passage

commen-

iii.

at

iv.

LXXI. Impiety and Folly of Attempting

Page vsp'q.

71,

Line

11

.

to

Bribe Heaven.

av avrolg rtiv aducryidruv

There cannot

rendered, of the fruit of their wrong doings.

be a baser conception than the world, and under

all

ance, since, in

its

it

;

religions,

weak enough and wicked enough they can disguise

God

this, that

by a share of the product of iniquity

and

could be bribed

yet, in all

ages of

men have been

to entertain

it

;

that

both is, if

under some delusive name and appear-

gross,

the most brutish soul.

naked form,

it

would

revolt even

Instead of making clean hands and

a clean breast by giving up the gains of iniquity, find

nq anomay be

’AducrjpaTGiv is an elliptical expression, and

men, even in Christian lands, endeavouring

we

often

to

make

atonement, and to purchase ease of conscience, by devoting a part of their ill-gotten wealth to religious uses. dignantly, in the fourth book of

The Laws,

How

in-

does Plato re-

pudiate the very thought that God, or even a good man, can receive

gifts

from the wicked

:

napa

tie

piapov dcopa ovr 1

avdo* ayaOov ovre Oeov earl ttote roye opOov dexeodai.


:

358

FOLLY OF ATTEMPTING TO BRIBE HEAVEN.

pdrrjv ovv nspl deovg 6

Compare

717, A.

dubitare qua

De

Cicero,

ab improbo se donare

Jovem

,

Legibus,

lib. ii.,

41

:

Donis

Deos Platonem audiant, qui vemente futurus Deus, quum nemo bonus

sit

Atque hoc

eoti novog rolg avooloic

ijoXvg

impii ne placare audeant tat

,

:

Also, Plautus,

velit.

Rudens

animum inducunt suum,

scelesti in

se placare posse donis, hostiis

;

Sed operam et sumptum perdunt, quia Nihil Ei acceptum est a perjuris supplicii.

To

refer to all the passages in the Scriptures

same sentiment

strongly expressed

is

would be

I

small portion of the Sacred Volume.

where the to quote

will not receive

bullock from thine house , nor goats from thy fold

wood are mine

beasts of the

Psalm

1.,

more absurd than value his fice.

to

own most

Isaiah

suppose

Old and

of the

It is

; for upon a thousand

Bring no more vain oblations

9.

an abomination unto me.

God both

,

the cattle

i.,

,

;

in

a

all the hills.

your incense

is

Nothing could be

13.

by such declarations, the Testament meant to under-

that,

New

solemnly. appointed institution of sacri-

most clear that he intended, rather,

by denouncing,

no

to

guard

it,

most indignant terms, that gross abuse

which would pervert the ritual avowal of the need of expiation, and the ritual acknowledgment of the Great Atonement through

its

type, into the miserable conception of a bribe to

the Almighty

And

— an

yet this

is

offering of flesh

the only view

and fat as

to a

hungry Baal.

which some, who would be

styled theologians, can take of this institution, so ancient

regards the heathen nations,

and so universal, not only as

it

but even in respect to those

who were

expressly taught of

God.

The Plautus

sentiment which is

we have quoted

froaa Cicero

most admirably expressed by Shakspeare.

and

No-

thing can be finer than the contrast he presents between

Divine Justice and the imperfections of human courts. is also

It

rendered peculiarly striking by being put into the

mouth of the

guilty

King of Denmark

:


!

359

DIFFERENT SPECIES OF ATHEISTS.

me my foul murder since I am still possessed

Forgive

That cannot be

Of those

My

which

own

crown, mine

May one In

;

effects for

I

did the murder.

ambition, and

my

queen.

be pardoned, and retain the offence

the corrupted currents of this

world

Offence's gilded

hand may shove by justice

And

,

oft

tis

1

,

;

seen the wicked prize itself

Buys out the law. But tis not so above. There is no shuffling there the action lies In its true nature and we ourselves compelled, Even to the teeth and forehead of our faults, To give in evidence. Hamlet Act III. ’

;

;

,

LXXII. Morality

Different Species of Atheists.

of Atheist

nos

Founded on Principle. First Species styled 6'ucaioq by Plato and invested by him with too good a Character. ,

,

Second Species

,

the

Magician or Juggler.

The Atheist Hobbes.

often in Secret the Victim of Superstition.

The

Species of Atheist , a character peculiar to the

Ironical

Elymas

Ancient World.

the

Simon Magus.

Sorcerer .

Apollonius of Tyanea.

Page the

78, Line 4.

6

pev yap Aoyw,

and most harmless kind of

first

r. X.

tc.

atheist, the

This

is

one who,

although honest and just in his private relations, does not hesitate boldly to ligion with

its

ridicules those

may have

avow

his atheism in speaking against re-

same time, he Such a one Plato thinks

oaths and rites, while, at the

who

respect them.

a dislike for

77, line 7), that

is,

wrong doing (rw dvoxepaivEtv, page

a dislike founded on habit, prejudice,

or an early bias of the mind, remaining in spite of his

atheism

;

for the diaaiov rjOoq

he

is

there represented as

possessing could not be the result of anything like principle,

seeing he rejects the principium of

law

in

denying the existence of a Deity.

all

morals and

That such

all

indi*


360

DIFFERENT SPECIES OF ATHEISTS.

may

viduals

be found here and there in the midst of a so-

ciety holding to a different belief,

Their

ted.

virtue,

How

pressure.

however,

is

may, perhaps, be admit-

only the effect of outward

long anything like morality would remain

in a nation of atheists is a question of far

more

mag-

fearful

Although the experiment has never yet been fully

nitude.

tried, there

can be but

doubt as to what would be the

little

horrid result.

We

can hardly help thinking that Plato, in what

said

is

page 77, line 5, has given altogether too good a character to this man. Such persons may be found putting on a show

making

of morality, and

their lives a lie for the sake of

giving support to the falsehood of their creed, yet

exceedingly of

all

who

however,

difficult for

them

was probably

less

apparent in

many

Plato’s

a malignant

This, time.

trait in

the

character, which, although deep seated in the heart,

never made

its

appearance in the dusky twilight of the Notwithstanding the laboured

heathen systems of religion. chapters of Gibbon, he of the

still, it is

deep hatred

are righteous from religious principle.

Christianity has brought out

human

to disguise their

New

who

reads

Testament will have

human nature

in the light

little difficulty

in under-

standing why, Christianity kindled such a flame of persecu-

entrance into the world, or in realizing the truth of Christ’s declaration, that he “ came, not to send

tion

on

its first

peace upon the earth, but a sword.”

Page n. r. A.

He

78, Line 8. 6 6e

This

is

do%a&v

j

uev

evcpvrjg de,

has no ambition to be thought above vulgar prejudices.

His grand object his

drj

a very different character from the other.

is to

turn to the best account, in promoting

own interests, the prejudices and the superstitions of other

men.

Hence he

carefully conceals his atheism, while he

makes the most abominable abuse of the religious fears of mankind. Having none of that fear of the invisible which would deter ordinary men, he resolves upon playing a bold


361

DIFFERENT SPEOtES OF ATHEISTS.

game

in the

assumed character of

jurer, fortune-teller,

fanatic, magician, con-

oracle-monger (a character, as

common among the or whatever may best

we

learn

from Aristophanes, quite

Athenians),

Sophist, public lecturer,

suit his un-

holy purposes.

It is

on this account he

man of great

acriori ingenio prcedilus, a

nature well adapted to any

however, the character

styled evtyvrjg,' ,

scheme of impiety.

may

is

The absence

nected with superstition.

Sometimes, Gross as

not be all affected.

the apparent inconsistency, atheism

is

is

resources having a

often found con-

of the fear of

God

may sometimes give rise to most alarming fears of a devil. The religious instinct, to which atheism has done violence, but has not been wholly able to destroy, may yet live in the most painful terrors of a superstitious and darkened

The

imagination. its

soul of

supernatural world

It

man must

have, in

some way,

cannot long endure the desolating

void of atheism, and would even find relief in the most horrid imaginings of malevolent

superhuman powers.

must believe in something stronger and higher than

Hence,

if

a

God

is

denied, the moral

vacuum must be

It

itself.

filled

with some personification of Fate, Fortune, or Destiny, or

peopled with the Gorgons and Chimmras of a diseased and

See page 133, where we have shown that even on his own theory, has no security against

troubled fancy. the atheist,

an unknown world of horrible superhuman beings.

No man

ever furnished a stronger proof of the truth of

However seemingly

these positions than Hobbes.

may have been

in his writings,

we

are told on the best au-

thority* that during a large portion of his life

* Vide Bayle’s Dictionary, vol.

iii.,

bold he

471, N.

he was

in

Bayle loved some-

times to expose the skeptic as well as to sneer at the believer, and he says, most justly, that “ the principles of philosophy (meaning materialism) are not sufficient to rid a for, to

man

of the fear of apparitions

reason consequentially, there are no philosophers

less right to reject

magic and sorcery than the

H

H

atheists.’’

;

who have


: ;

362

DIFFERENT SPECIBS OF ATHEISTS.

constant terror of ghosts and hobgoblins, and that he could

never sleep without a light burning in his chamber

not

;

daring to trust himself to that darkness which presented so

own depraved and gloomy mind. Page 78, Line 15. to uev elpumtcov. The first impression would be that this refers to the first character, who is true a picture of his

j

described as ridiculing (tcarayeXtiv, line 6) and making a mock of sacred things. It is clear, however, that a more serious and develish kind of irony is intended.

the

It is

irony of the laughing and juggling fiend, secretly triumph-

ing in the ruin which he

is

weak and

accomplishing in

wicked human nature. The second character is undoubtedly meant 6 doXov Kcd evedpag tt Xrjprjg “ the man full

of guile and stratagem.

5

Nothing could more perfectly

'

correspond to some parts of Plato’s representation, than the

tioned, Acts,

xiii.,

Sorcerer, and

some of

similar, in T

7jXr]p7]g

£2

6,

whom

tt

10,

who

menunder the name of Elymas the

description of that magician and false prophet

is

Paul addresses in a style remarkably its

which

terms, to that

avrog dohov nai

tt darjg

is

here used

padiovpyiag vie Aca,

66Xov, exOpe Trdorjg duiatoovvrjg.

We

can hardly appreciate,

scription of this

at the present day, the de-

character, as given

by Paul and Plato

but there can be no doubt that heathenism furnished

many

an example, exhibiting a hideousness of depravity of

which

it

is

ter

est (if

now

difficult to

which combined,

form a conception. in their

It

we may

all

the devilism

use such a term) that existed in some of the rites of the

heathen religions.

drawn specimens of these reign of Satan entitled

a charac-

most revolting forms, the bold-

and most Heaven-daring atheism with

most horrid

was

The

may be

Most

faithfully

last productions of the expiring

found in two tracts of Lucian

History of Alexander, and the other,

Death of Peregrinus.

The

first

was a

mous Apollonius Tyanseus, who has

;

one

The

follower of the

fa-

often been blasphe*


THE NIGHTLY CONFERENCE, OR AREOPAGUS, OF PLATO. 36S mously compared by

infidels to our Saviour,

most remarkable degree,

self exhibited, in a

and who him-

this

abominable

combination of transcendental sophistry, mystic pantheism

Whether

or disguised atheism, and Satanic magic. last

was wholly pretended,

been

real,

it is

very

or to

what extent

now

to

difficult

it

this

may have

determine.

LXXIII. The Nightly Conference or Areopagus of Plato's Athenian Areopagus ,

,

The

State.

.

Page

wurepivov gvXhoyov

79, Line 7. oi rov

koivgj*

As far as we can recollect, no description of this body, styled The Nightly Conference, is given in any of the preceding books of this dialogue. The reader, howvovvreg.

ever, will find

its

composition and offices subsequently set

forth in the twelfth to

book of The Laws, 961,

A., B.

It

was

be formed by a careful selection from the body of the

magistrates, and of those

who had

travelled abroad for the

purpose of learning the morals and legislation of foreign lands, together with

who might our.

was

This to

some of the more choice young men

be thought worthy of so distinguishing an honcourt,

which he

styles the anchor of the state,

assemble very early, either

daybreak

;

at,

or just preceding,

a season which, besides presenting the most

leisure from other necessary

employments, was also most

favourable to clear thought, and calm, impartial deliberation.

In a subsequent part of the twelfth book (968, B.)

again spoken of under the same

mentioned,

we

title.

It is

think, in the Epinomis, or

members

mode

is

not expressly

Appendix

to the

Laws, and yet the whole of that obscure book seems intended to point out a peculiar

it

to

be

of education for the

of this conference, and a certain higher philoso-

phy, into which, as into sacred mysteries, they were to ba


364

COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE

initiated before they could enter

Perhaps

trust.

upon

hoped

in this Plato

dreams of the Republic, namely,

RELIGIONS.

this

most responsible

to realize

one of the

that union of the characters

of the statesman and the philosopher, in the combination of

which he found the perfection of the political structure. This body was intended to uniter civil with religious and It was to be the high ecclesiastical spiritual functions.

The members were

court of equity and conscience.

not

only to perform the duties of judicial magistrates, but also of public censors.

They

had, besides, the

still

more

sa-

cred and spiritual office of counsellors and instructers to those

who were undergoing

nisterion but ,

curable

;

the discipline of the Sophro-

had not yet been sent

to the

prison of the in-

thus acting, in short, not only as judges, but also

as chaplains and ghostly advisers of the wretched criminals,

especially of such despisers of

God and blasphemers

Providence as the characters treated of in this book. addition to all this, they

were

of In

intrusted with the censorship

of the laws themselves. In this court or conference, Plato

seems

to

have had in

mind the Athenian Areopagus, which, in like manner, was the guardian of the laws and public morals. It was also of a religious nature, and was regarded with so much religious awe that, as iEschines informs us, it was not allowed for any one to laugh within its precincts. his

LXXIV. Common Law

against all Private Religions.

Examination

of Plato’s Doctrine in respect to Changes in the Public Worship and Religion of the State .

Page t. X.

81, Line 5. noivov

The law

d’

em

rovroig iraoi vopov,

k.

here set forth was intended not only for

the three kinds of offenders which have been mentioned#


— COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE

365

RELIGIONS.

but for

the people of the state.

all

'prevention , intended to

was

It

that private superstition

which

rites

namely,

evil,

weak men and women

led

(yvvahtag nai rovg aoOevovvrag irdvrag) chapels and

be a law of

to

reach the origin of the

have private

to

of their own, while they neglected the

and

administrations of the public temples

This

altars.

seems, in Plato’s time, to have been carried to a great extent,

and

to

have produced, and been produced by, the very

class of atheists against

whom he

has been legislating

who

pecially those of the third division,

easily propitiated

men were

by peculiar

held that

and

rites

offerings.

also interpreters of dreams, expounders of omens,

became more extensive and more it

which

iniquitous in proportion

shunned the notice of the legal guardians of the public

religion.

To

prevent this

with

evil,

moralizing consequences, this law

common weal lepd prjde The same law is given by

the

gibus,

nemo

es-

God was These

and, in short, the priesthood of a private superstition,

as

;

lib. ii., 8,

habessit

its

was

irreligious

to

;

for

elg ev Idiaig ohiiaig eurpodco.

Cicero in his treatise

as cited from the twelve tables

Deos

and de-

be established

De Le-

Separatim

:

neve novos, sed ne advenas,

nisi pub-

Clemens Alexandrinus refers with approbation to this law of Plato,* although there can be no doubt that the similar statute in Rome was the

lice adscitos, privatim colunto.

proximate,

if

not the remote, exciting cause of the cruel per-

secution Christianity had to undergo as, at

first,

and, in a great measure, a private religion.

a foreign,

There was,

however, one most beautiful species of family religion,

which Plato not only allowed in his scheme of legislation, We but even encouraged by the warmest commendation. allude to the sacred domestic altar, which he would have dedicated to the paternal and

filial

affections,

and

to the

worship of the aged living parent or grandparent, as the * Stromata,

H

lib. v.,

h 2

584, D.


-

COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE RELIGIONS.

366

See remarks on

best representation of the invisible God.

the passages referred

Page

Line

81,

I., pages 88, 89. deovg ov padiov iSpveoOai,

Dissertation

to,

15, iepa teal

peyaXrjg 6 e diavolag rivdg dpOCjg 6pav to tolovtov

no easy thing, or

no small matter,

is

it

may be

ovg

ligious rites

It is

to establish (or con-

Such a work requires no

secrate) chapels and Divinities.

The phrase

ordinary intelligence.”

ISpveoOai lepa

/cal

$£-

new reThe pri-

taken generally for the introduction of

and the adoration of new Divinities.

mary reference

is to

likewise, to

changes attempted in the public worship,

all

private innovation, but

has respect,

it

by private individuals or by magistrates. We may compare with this a passage from the fifth book of The Laws, 738, D. rcepl ftetiv re teal ieptiv drra re ev rrj 7toeither

:

Xei e/cdoroig ISpvoOai del, ovdelg emx^p'fioei tcivelv vovv exojv,

boa

etc

veg erzeioav

A eheptiv,

n aXaiol

voiag XexOeiorjg

rj

Awdcovrjg,

to

V

A/upcjvog,

Xoyoi, (paoparcjv yevopevcov,

tietiv

—“ In respect

things and places, &c., no one

tempt

reap

rj

to the

who has

rj

rj

n

emn-

Gods and sacred

reason should

at-

change or unsettle anything which has come from

Delphos, or Dodona, or

Ammon,

have recommended

us on the authority of supernatural

to

or

which ancient

traditions

appearances, or of a Divine afflatus or inspiration.” other place (Laws,

772, D.) he condemns

vi.,

tion in religion, or in

all

the magistrates

he means,

secondly, of

;

all

at least, a large majority)

oracles of the

Gods

:

iravra 6e rov 6r\pov

,

innova-

any of the fundamental laws of the

state, unless there shall be the threefold consent, all

In an-

;

of

which

and, thirdly, of

all

izdoag pev rag apxdg /cal

first,

the people (by

the

XPV %vp6ovXovg,

redoag tietiv pavrelag eneXOovrag

eav ovpcpoJVGjoi navreg, ovtgj

tcivelv ,

aXXug

*

6e prjdenoTe

prjdaptig.

When we tion

regard Plato as without any special revela-

from Heaven, or any Divine commission

the religion of his country,

we cannot

severely

to

change

condemn

his


COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE

He may have wished

solicitude in this matter. all

367

RELIGIONS.

preserve

to

the forms of religion, and yet have been influenced by a

sincere and earnest desire to introduce a thorough reformation into its spirit.

He had

sand years, such as

is

now

not the experience of a thou-

spread before us in the history

of the Christian Church, to convince

We, however, with such

was impossible. tion in our hands,

rise to

that this thing

a special revela-

cannot approve the doctrine or the law

much we may

here laid down, however

which gave

him

it

respect the motive

The

in his peculiar circumstances.*

Oxford theologians would hail Plato as inculcating here their favourite

dogma

of authority and tradition.

Sewal, of that University, has made every language

to

Professor

effort to turn his

such a use, sometimes with a tolerable degree

of fairness, and sometimes

which he never dreamed

by giving

although

;

to Plato a

we do

sense of

not think that the

professor has ever referred to the passage before us.

Every

attempt, however, to bring to their aid the divine philoso-

pher of Greece must

him

to

that

tradition

when

fail

was

when

them,

it*

all the revelation

this tradition

became

is

remembered

that

he possessed, and

corrupted, he had no higher

we possess) by which he might correct Plow much he would have prized such a special written

standard (such as it.

revelation,

him any

and how joyfully he would have put away from

inferior guide,

may

be learned from his famous

declaration in the second Alcibiades patiently until

some one,

either a

:

eyes ” ii.,

— and rwv

150, D.

A

That

we must

wait

God, or some inspired

man, teach us our moral and religious in Plomer, did to

duties, and, as Pallas,

Diomed, remove the darkness from our

a%Xvv acfreXelv. Alcibiades inference may be drawn from that most

6(j)0aXfi(x)v rr\v

like

,

remarkable passage in the Republic, where he indulges the

* x.,

See a more extended discussion of 116, and Note 13, page 6.

this subject, Diss. v., p. 102,


— COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE RELIGIONS.

368

hope that the true heavenly philosophy voiag aXrjdivrj a

(j)iXooo(j)ta ),

(etc

and a people

rtvog Jelag emir

in possession of

it

as

from above, either had existed in the immense past time, or might now exist in some obscure 'part of the Bargift

barian or Oriental land 7T0V OVTL T7]g

— ev nvt

pperepag

(3ap6apuc(p tottg)

(

EndxJjecog), or

period be revealed to the rest of the

Can we suppose

499, B.

might

human

at

some

race.

tt oppcj

future

Lib.

vi.,

he would have preferred had he known assuredly that

that

his

myths and his

just

such a people, with just such a Heaven -inspired philoso-

traditions,

phy, then existed in the mountains of the barbarian Judea,

and that that “

A

had been most solemnly declared, even then, Law should go forth from Zion and the Word of the it

,

Lord from Jerusalem.”*

Without fearing

at all for

our Protestantism,

deed admit, as Plato says, that to establish

new

it is

we may

a most important matter

religious rites, or to attempt a

religious doctrines or

in-

change

in

modes of worship which have long

when most erroneous, can seldom be suddenly and violently taken away without danger, to say the least, of tearing up something which may be vital to the soul. The sentiment of Plato may have some truth, prevailed, and which, even

even in reference

to times

and countries possessing a per-

manent revelation from God, and to which resort may be had in bringing men back from those deviations from it

human depravity. Admitsuch seasons when doctrine and worship and when private men under the general,

which are the natural ting that there are

must be reformed, if

ed

results of

not special, revelation to

engage in

this

say, with Plato, that telligence.

order

may

be regarded as lawfully

most responsible work, it

still

call-

may we

does, indeed, require no ordinary in-

Such occasions

call for souls of the highest

rrjg pLEytorpg dtavo'iag

* Isaiah,

— and no vulgar instrument, ii.,

3.


BELIEF IN GHOSTS, ETC., THE SAME IN ALL AGES. SOU no brawling, fanatical reformer should be regarded as

Heaven’s agent

men

in so

When

solemn an undertaking.

as Luther and Calvin arise,

it

is

such’

not easy to mistake

the evidences of their peculiar mission, or their fitness for the great

work

to

which they are

called,

LXXV. Belief in Apparitions, Ghosts, Spectres,

Spc.,

the

ev re (paopaocv eyprjyoporag did

<po-

same

Page

82,

Line

2.

nal ev oveipotg — “

6ovg

Dreams

,

Ages.

in all

Startled,

when awake, by

appari-

Nothing would present a

tions,

and in sleep by dreams.”

more

interesting subject of investigation than the nature

extent of the ancient belief in ghosts it

prevailed extensively, that

that

it

yond

it

was most deeply

had existed from the most remote

all

If ever there

doubt.

could be said that this is one.

it

was held

and

and apparitions. That

was a

rooted,

and

antiquity, is be-

doctrine of which

it

semper, ubique, et ab omnibus

There can be no greater mistake than

pose that this is a consequence of Christianity,

to sup-

and that

its

revelations of the spiritual world have quickened the imagination to impressions and terrors times. is

The

unknown

to the ancient

and supernatural appearances a hell, or in any existence after

belief in ghosts

as old as the belief in

them may be traced back to a period where It was the creed alike of fails us. Jew and Gentile, of the East and the West, of Greek, Chaldean, and Idumean. The account of Saul and the death, and

all

of

profane history wholly

Witch of Endor incidentally discloses the extent and depth of the common Jewish belief in the ghostly world, and that,

much more

would have been done by any Whatever may be thought of the silence of the Old Testament in other parts, the fact of a nu*

too,

strongly than

express declarations.


370 BELIEF

THE SAME

IN GHOSTS, ETC.,

IN

ALL AGES.

merous and well-known class of persons, whose profession it

was

maintain intercourse with the dead, whether such

to

was deceptive

intercourse

or not, does prove,

all

were no Sadducees, and

cavil, that the ancient Israelites that, if

beyond

they did not get their belief in a spiritual world from

Moses, they must have derived it from some cient source common to all mankind.

still

more an-

existed as a part of the patriarchal religion,

we

have direct evidence from the vision of Eliphaz, Job,

iv.,

That 13 in

:

A

it

spirit (a (pdoya) stood before

which the appearance of

The manner

my face.

this ghost is described, bears a

striking resemblance to all representations of the kind in

The

ancient or in modern times.

pearance under which the mind

(j)dGfia,

is

plate the departed yet restless soul

or

shadowy

always led

contem-

to

— the changing and

ting motion, so admirably expressed

ap-

by the Hebrew

flit-

rjblV’

the formless form, the silence, and the voice, present the

same marked

features that are to be found in almost

ghostly narrations. until

not spoken of as a

phenomenon

then unknown, but as something in the possibility of

which swer

It is

all

all

to

his hearers are supposed to believe.

say

it

was

How

a dream.

came

It is

no an-

the nightly world

of the imagination to be peopled with representations from

an unseen

a belief did not universally prevail

state, if

which brought such representations before the soul ? As an example far less sublime than this, but with many of the same points of resemblance, we may cite the apparition of the shade of Patroclus to Achilles, as described in the twenty-third

book of the

100

Iliad, v. ijjvxy ds

Kara x6°vd£, )vre Kanvog,

&X eT0 TETptyvla. TCKpcov

?

6’

X^pai re GVfnrTuiTaytjcrev, 7

£2 ttottoc,

ipvxy

We

rj /3

d

:

avopovcrev ’A^tAAevf,

ettoc 6’ dXofivdvov eeittev

*

rig Eotl ical elv ’Atdao doyoiGiv

teal eldto'Aov

may sometimes

ardp

typkvEC ovk evl rrdfmav.

find ancient accounts of this kind


BELIEF IN GHOSTS, ETC., THE SAME IN ALL AGES. 371 that

may compare

Ages.

Take,

with any of the narratives of the Middle

example, Plato’s myth

for

at the

His wild and

tenth book of the Republic.

end of the

fiery beings

[aypioi nai diaTrvpoi), that torment the wicked, one might

almost suppose had been copied from some saint’s legend.

When

Socrates

tells us, in the

Phaedon, of the ghosts that

— auoeidfj (pavraopara ecduXa, ano — impure departed we might

haunt the tombs and monuments ola TTdpexovTcu -oiavTCU 'ipvxal

XvOsloat

most fancy

the shades it

meeting

al-

some German ballad. The which so solemnly summoned Brutus

at Philippi presents

A

stance of the same kind.

another striking in-

more remarkable case

still

recorded by the younger Pliny ( Epistolce frightful spectre

ens.

The

which appeared

terialist as

we

,

lib. vii.,

in a certain

details are given with

sobriety, that

-

the language of

story of the apparition to his last

the

of

at pi] icaQaptig

such an

is

27), of a

house

Ath-

at

air of truth

and

cannot help thinking that the writer, ma-

he was, did really believe

seriously affected by the account.

it,

It is,

was

or, at least,

however, mainly

by reason of its presenting features so very much resembling some of those that are to be found in the ghost stories of modern times. The old, spacious, desertinteresting,

ed,

and suspected house

ly heard at a distance,

;

the clanking of chains,

first faint-

and becoming louder and louder as

the spectre approaches at the dread hour of midnight silent

and fixed position

pointing with the finger tread with

;

;

the waving of the hand

the motion to follow

;

;

;

the

the

the solemn

which the apparition leads the spectator through

the lonely passages of the building until in the courtyard,

and the

result,

it

finally disappears

which the reader of mod-

ern legends can almost anticipate, namely, the finding the

bones of a murdered man, as they are dug up in the very

as

where it had vanished all these are of such a nature to make us feel for a moment as though, instead of read

spot

ing Pliny and a story of the ancient Athens,

-

we had

actu-


;

372 BELIEF ally

IN GHOSTS, ETC.,

THE SAME

ALL AGES.

IN

been occupied with some of the wild creations of

Shakspeare’s fancy in Hamlet or King Richard the Third. Whatever may be thought of its truth, it is of value as showing that the imagination, in all ages of the world, has been filled with the same images, and that there must be some deep ground of reality to which all such incidents, however deceptive in outward appearances, are to be referred.

How much fected

even the Epicurean age of Horace was

by these preternatural

terrors,

may

af-

be learned from

names he presents in two lines which he would describe a mind

the great variety of frightful

of one of his Epistles, in

raised above the superstitious imaginings of the multitude

although, from state to

some evidences he has

left us, it

which he himself could lay claim

was

;

not a

:

Caret mortis formidine et iral

Somnia, terrores magicos, miracula, sagas,

Nocturnos lemures, portentaque Thessala, Hor., Epist.y

rides'?

206.

lib. ii., 2,

synonymous with (pavraopa. The latter term is the one employed in the New Testament, Matthew, xiv., 20 Mark, vi., 49. In another passage, to express the same idea, the word rcvevpa is used as where Christ says, A spirit hath notjlesli and hones as ye Although he asserts that he himself appears see me have in his risen body, yet, at the same time, he seems clearly <&dopa, is nearly, if not quite,

;

,

.

to sanction the belief in the existence of ghosts or spirits,

and

to treat

it

as a

well-known

this passage, the doctrine of

think for a so strongly

very point.

fact.

We

cannot bear, in

accommodation.

Let any one

moment of those solemn circumstances which demanded the utmost sincerity and truth on this Would Christ have used such language to his

anxiously-inquiring disciples, after having himself just re-

turned from the world of

spirits, if their belief

had been a

mere popular delusion?

Would he thus have

trifled

with


BELIEF IN GHOSTS, ETC., THE SAME IN ALL AGES. 373 them, while their minds were intent upon the solemn realities

of the spiritual state, and occupied with those thoughts

which were suggested by If,

his

own

death and resurrection

?

under these circumstances, he spoke the language of

accommodation

to a false belief,

where we may expect the

we know

literal truth.

Ii

T

not

when and



INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED AND EXPLAINED FROM THE OTHER WRITINGS OF PLATO.

Page

367 Alcibiades II Cratylus 1, 101, 161, 162, 163, 175, 183, 199 261 Critias 76 Crito Epinomis 226, 227, 260, 271, 363 Epistles .198, 199, 238 .

.

Gorgias

.

.

42, 62, 77, 135, 139, 147, 240, 246, 290, 316, 322, 331, 332 7, 17, 22, 28,

Hippias Mai Ion

184

Laches

256

Laws

101

75, 88, 92, 100, 101, 107, 126, 134, 136, 140, 149,

219, 235, 246, 247, 306, 347, 349, 357, 358, 363, 365, 366

Meno

....

Parmenides Phaedon 17,

184,

309 246

107, 129, 147, 151, 165, 224, 261, 268, 282, 322, 324, 326, 331, 344, 371

Page

Phaedrus Philebns

151, 184, 195 47, 150, 184, 203 Politicos 214, 215, 216, 330, 350 Protagoras 66, 140, 259, 309 Republic 6, 42, 43, 51, 72, 102, 103, 140, 150, 184, 208, 290, 308, 309, 310, 315, 318, 319, 322, 327, 328, 329, 330, 338, 341, 351, 353, 368, 371 Sophista 158, 199, 285 Symposion . 101, 140 Theaetetus 22, 62, 98, 122, 138, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 160, 161, 163, 164, 183, 184, 199 Timaeus 35, 96, 102, 121, 122, 123, 144, 150, 171, 172, 173, 184, 211, 212, 217, 219, 220, 222, 223, 224, 228, 229, 230, 234, 235, 240, 277, 279, 300, 301, >

.

.

.

.

.

.... .

.

.

.

.

304, 305, 323, 347

INDEX OF CITATIONS FROM OTHER ANCIENT AUTHORS.

Page

TEschines

Page

364 Aristotle “ De Anim. :

iEsciiYLus “ Choeph 321 “ Prom. Vine. 68, 88, 128, 252 Apuleius 348

“ “

Aristophanes “ Acharn

“ “

:

“ “ “ “

Aves Nubes Thesm.

.

.

.

.

41, 101, 302, 41, 120, 186, .

.

126

3G6 124 187

’128

193, 194, 222

80 47, 128, 245

.

.

7

22, 41

Plutus

.

Ethic. Eud 241 Ethic. Nic. 47, 70, 91, 240, 241, 353, 354, 357 Metaph. 115, 154, 159, 160, 184, 190, 191, 192,

:

...

.

De Ccelo De Mundo De Gen. 119,


376

INDEX.

Aristotle “ 4

Pase

Meteorol

125

Homer 44

Physic. 134, 185, 186, 193, 221, 279, 280 Politic.

47, 265, 266, 349

.

Athenagoras

101

44

Pa<re

:

Iliad

15, 70, 72, 80, 139,

.

149, 158, 168, 208, 209, 342, 346, 370 Odyssey 147, 302, 303 .

Horace

.

:

44 Cicero Ars Poet 44 44 Acad. Post. 160, 200, 275 Epist 44 44 De Fato Odae 311,312 293, 44 De Fin 297 Iamblichus 44 De Leg. 95,111,272,358 Justin Mart 44 DeNat. Deor. 101,113,227, Lucian 157, 244, 245, 258 Lucretius 204, 207, 275, 293, 44 Offic 352 Nemesius “ Tusc. Disp. 114, 147, 194, Origen, Contra Celsum 326 Ovid Claudian' 244 Philo Clemens Alex. 248, 340, 343, 365 Pindar 89, 144, Cyril Alex. 275 Plautus, Rudens Diodorus Siculus 101, 317 Pliny, Epist Empedocles 77, 115, 159 Plutarch, Caes 44 Euripides De Fato 44 44 Helena 129 De Isid. et Osir. 182, :

.

.

....

.

.

.

.... ....

... .

.

.

:

....

Hippolytus

.

44

Medea

.

.

.

44

Orestes

44

Phcenissae

44

Rhesus

44

Supplices

44

.

.

Troades Fragments

13

Eusebius 44

16, 62, 242 129, 240 242

.

.... .... ....

.

44

90, 101

.

.

i,

101 129

217, 235 93, 128, 129, 137, 237, 332 .

.

.

157, 231,

272, 340, 3^3, 350 .65, 173, -231 .

:

44

Works and Days Theog

48, 83, 113, 348

.

180

Placit. Philos. .

.

.

.

.

7,

101

362 320 272 235 259 274 321

358 371 247 272 236 136 165

237

Sext. Empir.

24, 136, 156, 185

Sophocles 44 Ajax 44 Antigone

.

:

44 44

44

Evang.

De

Seneca

:

Prasp.

Herodotus Hesiod 44

44

Proclus, Com. Euc.

18S 372 294 223

44

(Ed. Col (Ed. Tyr Philoc.

266 .

.

...

.

80, 89

334 127 42, 260 64, 65 41, 77

.Trach

Thales Tim^eus, Lex Virgil, Georg

Xenophon

248 93

:

44

Agesil

44

Mem.

...

38, 153,

317 354


INDEX OF PASSAGES CITED FROM* TIIE OLD AND Page

Genesis. Pape i.,

1

212, 273 216, 283, 338 .

.

2 i., 3 1., 31 11., 4 i.,

.... .... .

.

.

273 222 273

,

Exodus. 180

....

xix., 2

.

.

248

.93

.

v.,

26 30

vi.,

2

...

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

18

xxiii.,

92 92 92 323

^xxxii.,8, 231,343,,350

17

.

.

.

.

7.

6 iv., 13 xiv., 10 xxi., 7 xxi.,

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

29

.

24

xxviii.,

.

.

xxxiv., 21

.

xxxviii., 7 xxxviii., 14

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

343 337 370 317 244 336 67 333 232 338

9

xiv.,

.

1

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

11

3

c.,

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4

cxxxix.,

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

358 243 336 70 89 273 321 262 126 212 346 333

Proverbs. xii., 1

.

.

.

.

xvi., 3 xvii., 6

.

.

.

27

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

70 336 89 73 70

Pago

Wisdom

5

...

.

13 3

6

ii.,

26

... ... 14

xlvii.,

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

317 358 368 232 209 274

21

.

.

231

Hosea.

...

23

ii.,

.

269

Amos. ix.,

...

2

.

.

.

15

I

.

372 355

.

.

.

.

Luke. 9

xiii.,

.

42 xxii., 42 xix.,

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

139 139 139

John. 1

i.,

.

.

58

viii.,

.

.

179 181 180

.

...

13

iii.,

10 28 22

xiii., 6,

xxiii., 9

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

362 181

260 139

Romans. i.,

21,

i.,

20

28

4

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

vi.,

17 17 20

... ... ...

ix.,

5

.

vi.,

28

viii.,

ix.,

5

22

.

334

ix.,

.

210

iii. ,

1

....

.

.

...

49

xiv., 21

Malachi. iii.,

.

.

262 336 372 293

Mark.

.

vi.,

Habakkuk. 13

.

26

xxv., 46

iv., .

.

xiv.,

ii-,

Daniel. x., 20,

.

.

39, 41

xvii.,

.

.

.

.

.

xiii.,

xvii.,

.

.

.

.

283

Matthew.

Acts.

Isaiah.

ii.,

of Solomon.

....

18

xi.,

Ecclesiastes

262 51

.

.

...

2 30

civ.,

.

.

...

xc., 2

i.,

Psalms. ii.,

70

.

xiv., 7

.

.

.

.

i.,

271, 348

...

.

.

.

xl.,

iv.,

.

.

2, 3, 10,

,

270

Job. i„ 6,

.

337 330

“ 22

xii.,

2 Kings. vi.,

.

“ 20

82

2 Samuel. xxiv., 16, 17

.

.

.

xxx., 2

...

25

9

xxi.,

Joshua. vii.,

1.,

lxxiii.

cxxi.,

Deuteronomy. iv.,

xlix., 11

Leviticus. xvi., 8

15 xxxix., 7 xvii.,

lxxviii., 61

...

14

111.,

NEW TESTAMENTS.

.

.

.

.

.

115 283 355 271 339 353

180, 181 .

... ...

.

.

.

287 180 139

Corinthians. 21,

22

.

.

287

2 Corinthians.

43

iv. ,

18

.

.

282, 303


378

INDEX Galatians.

16 8

iv., vi.,

2 Timothy.

.... ....

97 297

.... .... Philippians. 4 .... 15 12

vi.,

111.,

Page 1.,

13

1.,

7

iv.,

16 1

1.,

.

97 343

xi.,

26 3

xi.

6

344

xii. ,

ix.,

,

16

344

.

.

93 126, 302

.

.

.

.

339

.

9

iii.,

232 ... 336 281, 283 65

....

Pags

355

.

.

.

.

23

336

Revelations.

324 i.,

James. i.,

Jude. 6

....

14

.

.

.

.

64

8.

.

ii.,

10

.

ii.,

27

.

17 xi., 12 xii., 5 xix., 15 vii.,

2 Peter.

Timotiiv.

....

9

vi.,

...

.

.

Hebrews.

Thessalonians.

1

Epistle John.

1

Page

Ephesians. iv.,

/

i.,

4

iu 21

.... .... THE KKD.

.

61

355

.

... ... ... ... ... ... .

.

181

344 262 262 344 263 263







A.


/



Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.